Owner'S Manual

XX
OWNER'S MANUAL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope your Volvo will give you many years of happy motoring. owner's manual. The Owner's Manual is also available on Volvo Cars
The vehicle is designed for the safety and comfort of you and your support site (volvocars.com/intl/support).
passengers. Volvo strives to design one of the world's safest pas-
We also encourage everyone to always use seat belts in this and
senger vehicles. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable
other vehicles. You should also not drive if you are under the influ-
safety and environmental requirements.
ence of alcohol or medicines or if your ability to drive is for some
To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you other reason impaired.
read the instructions and maintenance information contained in this
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OWNER'S INFORMATION YOUR VOLVO SAFETY
Owner's information 18 Contacting Volvo 24 Safety 42
Complete Owner's Manual in the 19 Volvo ID 24 Safety during pregnancy 43
center display
Creating a Volvo ID 25 Occupant safety 43
Navigate in the Owner's Manual 20
in the center display Problems logging in with Volvo ID 25 Reporting safety defects 44
Using the Owner's Manual 21 Eco-efficiency 26 Recall information 45
The Owner's Manual and the envi- 22 Connection and entertainment 28 Whiplash Protection System 46
ronment Data recording 32 Seat belts 47
Approval of terms and conditions 34 Buckling and unbuckling seat belts 48
and data collection
Seat belt tensioners 50
Important information on acces- 34
sories and extra equipment Resetting the electric seat belt 51
tensioners*
Accessory installation 36
Door and seat belt reminders 52
Connecting equipment to the 36
vehicle's data link connector Airbags 53
Technician certification 37 Driver/passenger side front airbags 54
Viewing the Vehicle Identification 38 Occupant Classification System 58
Number (VIN) Occupant weight sensor 62
Volvo Structural Parts Statement 38 Near-side airbags 65
Change of market when importing 39 Far-side airbags 66
or relocating
Inflatable curtain 67
Driver distraction 39
Safety mode 68
Getting started with Google services 40
Starting and moving the vehicle 69
when it is in safety mode
Child safety 70
Child restraints 72
Infant seats 74
2
DISPLAYS AND VOICE
Convertible seats 77 CONTROL Entering characters, letters and 137
Displays and controls by the driver 92 words by hand in the center display
Booster cushions 79
in a left-hand drive vehicle Changing system units of meas- 138
Top tether anchors 80 urement
Date and time 98
Lower child seat attachment points 82 Changing system language 138
Instrument panel 99
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 83 Resetting user data 138
Instrument panel settings 103
Integrated booster cushion* 85 User profiles 139
Fuel gauge 104
Folding up the integrated booster 87 Managing user profiles 140
cushion* Battery gauge 104
Power meter 105 Profile settings 14 1
Folding down the integrated 89
booster cushion* Trip computer 105 Connecting an account to a user 142
profile
Resetting the trip odometer 106
Connect key to user profile 142
Ambient temperature sensor 106
Message in the center display 144
Indicator and warning symbols 107
Head-up display* 145
License agreement for instrument 110
panel Head-up display settings* 146
Messages in the instrument panel 130 Voice control with the Google 147
Assistant
Center display overview 13 1
Using voice control 148
Handling the center display 132
Center display views 133
Handling tiles in the center display 134
Moving apps in the center display 135
Symbols in the center display sta- 135
tus bar
Keyboard in the center display 136
Changing keyboard language in 136
the center display
3
LIGHTING WINDOWS, GLASS AND SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Lighting control and panel 150 MIRRORS Front seats 194
Adjusting light functions via the 15 1 Windows, glass and mirrors 166 Manual front seats 194
center display Pinch protection for windows and 166 Multifunctional* front seat func- 196
Parking lights 152 sun curtains tion overview
Daytime running lights 152 Reset procedure for pinch protection 167 Power* front seats 196
Low beams 153 Power windows 168 Adjusting the power* front seats 197
Using high beam 154 Operating the power windows 169 Storing positions for seats and mirrors 198
Active high beam 155 Using sun curtains* 17 1 Storing positions for seats, mir- 199
Rearview/door mirrors 173 rors and head-up display*
Using turn signals 156
Adjusting the rearview mirror dim- 174 Using stored positions for seats 200
Active Bending Lights* 156 and mirrors
ming function
Front fog lights/corner illumination* 157 Using stored positions for seats, 201
Adjusting the door mirrors 175
Rear fog light 158 mirrors and head-up display*
Panoramic roof* 176
Brake lights 159 Front seat massage* settings 203
Panoramic roof* 177
Emergency brake lights 159 Adjusting* front seat cushion length 204
Operating the panoramic roof* 178
Hazard warning flashers 160 Adjusting front seat side bolster 205
Auto closing the panoramic roof* 182 settings*
Using Guidance Light 160 sun curtain
Adjusting front seat lumbar support* 206
Welcome Light 16 1 Wiper blades and washer fluid 182
Adjusting the passenger seat from 208
Farewell lighting 16 1 Using the windshield wipers 183 the driver's seat*
Interior Lighting 16 1 Using the rain sensor 185 Rear seat 209
Adjusting interior lighting 163 Using the windshield and head- 188 Folding down the rear seat backrests* 21 0
light washers
Folding the second row backrests 21 3
Using the rear window wiper/washer 190
Adjusting the rear seat head restraints 21 5
Adjusting the second row head 21 9
restraints
4
CLIMATE CONTROL
Moving the second row seats for- 22 1 Climate 230 Activating and deactivating the 245
ward/rearward* ventilated rear seats*
Climate zones 230
Adjusting the second row backrest tilt 222 Activating and deactivating the 245
Climate control sensors 23 1 heated steering wheel*
Getting into and out of the third 223
row of seats* Perceived temperature 232 Activating and deactivating auto- 246
Air quality 233 matic steering wheel heating*
Folding the third row backrests* 224
CleanZone* 233 Activating auto climate control 246
Adjusting the passenger seat from 225
the rear seat Clean Zone Interior Package* 234 Activating and deactivating recir- 247
culation
Steering wheel controls and horn 226 Interior Air Quality System* 234
Activating and deactivating the 247
Adjusting the steering wheel 228 Activating and deactivating the air 235 recirculation timer setting
quality sensor*
Activating and deactivating max 248
Passenger compartment air filter 235 defroster
Advanced Air Cleaner* 236 Activating and deactivating the 249
Air Quality app heated rear window and door mirrors
236
Air distribution Automatically activating and deac- 249
236 tivating the heated rear window
Adjusting air distribution 239 and door mirrors
Opening, closing and directing air 239 Setting the blower speed for the 250
vents front seats
Climate system controls 240 Setting the temperature for the 250
front seats
Activating and deactivating power 242
front seats* Synchronize temperature 25 1
Activating and deactivating the 242 Activating and deactivating air 25 1
heated front seat* conditioning
Activating and deactivating the 243 Activating and deactivating cli- 252
heated rear seats* mate control for the third-row seats*
Activating and deactivating front 244 Activating and deactivating auto- 253
seat ventilation* start of third-row climate control*
5
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Parking climate* 253 Locking and unlocking 266 Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* 287
Preconditioning* 253 Lock indication 266 Keyless unlocking of the trunk lid* 288
Starting and stopping preconditioning 254 Lock confirmation settings 267 Antenna locations for the start 288
and lock system
Preconditioning timer* 255 Keys 267
Locking and unlocking from inside 290
Adding and editing timer settings 256 Locking and unlocking using the 270 the vehicle
for preconditioning* key buttons
Unlocking the tailgate from inside 292
Activating and deactivating pre- 257 Unlock settings 272 the vehicle
conditioning timer*
Unlocking the tailgate using the 272 Unlocking the trunk lid from inside 292
Deleting preconditioning timer 257 key button the vehicle
settings*
Unlocking the trunk lid using the 273 Opening the trunk lid from inside 292
Air purification* 257 key button the trunk
Starting and stopping air purification* 258 Key range 273 Activating and deactivating child locks 293
Climate comfort retaining function* 258 Replacing the key's battery 275 Automatic locking when driving 295
Starting and switching off the cli- 259 Ordering additional keys 278 Closing and locking the tailgate 295
mate retaining function when parking* using the buttons*
Care Key – speed-restricted key 279
Parking climate symbols and mes- 260 Closing and locking the trunk lid 297
sages* Setting speed limitation for Care Key 280
using the buttons*
Heater Detachable key blade 280
262 Setting maximum opening height 298
Parking heater Locking and unlocking with 282 for the power tailgate*
262 detachable key blade
Parking heater 262 Operating the tailgate with a foot 299
Electronic immobilizer 283 movement*
Additional heater 263 Start and lock system type desig- 284 Operating the trunk lid with a foot 301
Activating and deactivating the 263 nations movement*
auxiliary heater
Keyless locking and unlocking 285 Alarm 303
with touch-sensitive surfaces*
Arming and disarming the alarm 304
Keyless locking and unlocking* 285
Keyless unlock settings* 287
6
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver support systems 308 Pilot Assist* 326 Opportunity to reduce speed with 353
assistance during collision risks
Driver support warnings 308 Pilot Assist* displays 33 1
Assistance during collision risks 354
Speed-dependent steering wheel 31 1 Pilot Assist* standby mode 332 limitations
resistance
Pilot Assist* symbols and messages 334 Assistance during collision risks – 356
Electronic Stability Control 31 1 steering assistance for evasive
Passing assistance* 336
Electronic Stability Control sym- 31 3 maneuvers
bols and messages Using passing assistance* 336
Assistance during collision risks in 357
Connected Safety 31 5 Collision risk warning from speed- 337 crossing traffic
controlling functions
Activating and deactivating 31 6 Assistance during collision risks in 358
Connected Safety Switching target vehicles with 338 oncoming traffic
speed-controlling functions
Connected Safety limitations 31 6 Assistance during collision risks 359
Adjusting set speed for speed- 339 with vehicles in your blind spot*
Road Sign Information* 31 7 controlling functions
Assistance during risk of run-off 360
Road Sign Information* display 31 8 Setting time interval to the vehicle 340
ahead Symbols and messages for assis- 36 1
Speed limit and speed camera 31 8 tance during collision risks
warnings from Road Sign Information* Auto-hold braking with speed- 34 1
controlling functions Rear Collision Warning* 363
Activating and deactivating warn- 31 9
ings from Road Sign Information* Lane Keeping Aid 342 Rear Collision Warning* limitations 363
Road Sign Information* limitations 31 9 Activating and deactivating Lane 344 BLIS* 364
Keeping Aid BLIS* limitations 365
Cruise control functions 32 1
Lane Keeping Aid limitations 344 BLIS* messages 368
Steering wheel buttons for speed- 322
controlling functions Lane Keeping Aid symbols and 345 Ready to Drive notification 369
messages
Selecting and activating speed- 323 Driver Alert 369
controlling functions Lane Keeping Aid display 347
Driver Alert limitations 37 1
Deactivating speed-controlling 324 Differences between Pilot Assist* 348
functions and Lane Keeping Aid Distance Alert* 37 1
Cruise control 324 Assistance during collision risks 349 Distance Alert limitations 372
Cruise control standby mode 325 Detecting obstacles with assis- 35 1 Warning and auto-braking while 372
tance during collision risks backing up*
7
ELECTRIC MOTOR AND
Activating and deactivating warn- 374 CHARGING Electric propulsion symbols and 437
ing and auto-braking when back- General information about charging 404 messages in the instrument panel
ing up*
General information about electric 406 Hybrid symbols and messages in 439
Park Assist* 375 vehicles the instrument panel
Park Assist front, rear and sides* 376 Electric vehicle charging 408
Activating and deactivating the 378 Hybrid vehicle charging 41 0
Park Assist system*
General information about charg- 41 2
Park Assist limitations* 379 ing cables
Park Assist Camera* 380 Charging time 41 4
Location and field of vision of Park 381 Charging time 41 5
Assist Cameras*
Charging status in the vehicle's 41 6
Park Assist Camera trajectory lines* 383 charging socket
Park Assist sensor field* 385 Charging status in the instrument 41 8
Activating Park Assist Camera* 386 panel
Park Assist* and Park Assist Cam- 388 Charging in the vehicle's center 42 1
era* symbols and messages display
Radar units 390 Stopping electric vehicle charging 423
Radar sensor type approval 392 Stopping hybrid vehicle charging 425
Camera 393 Electric vehicle charging via wall 426
outlet
Camera and radar unit limitations 393
Hybrid vehicle charging via wall outlet 429
Recommended maintenance for 396
the camera, sensor and radar units Residual current device in charg- 432
ing cable
Camera and radar unit symbols 399
and messages Charging cable temperature moni- 433
toring
Antenna type approval 400
Charging status in the charging 434
cable's control module
8
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the vehicle 442 Braking assist after a collision 46 1 Economical driving 483
Starting the vehicle 443 Regenerative braking 462 Range 484
Switching off the vehicle 446 Regenerative braking* 462 Economical driving 485
Switching off the vehicle 446 Transmission 463 Battery use 486
Ignition modes 447 Gear selector positions 463 Range assistant 487
Selecting ignition mode 448 Shifting gears with automatic 464 Leveling control* and suspension 488
transmission
Usage mode 449 Leveling control settings* 49 1
Shiftlock 467
Brake functions 450 Adjusting Polestar Engineered* 49 1
The kickdown function 467 suspension settings
Brakes 450
The Launch function* 468 Opening/closing the fuel filler door 493
Brake Assist System 452
Transmission symbols and messages 468 Refueling 494
Braking on wet roads 453
Transmission symbols and messages 468 Fuel 496
Braking on salted roads 453
All Wheel Drive (AWD)* 469 Octane rating 497
Maintenance of the brake system 453
All Wheel Drive (AWD)* 469 Emission controls 499
Parking brake 454
Drive systems 469 Service stations 499
Activating and deactivating the 454
parking brake Drive modes* 474 Overheating of engine and trans- 500
mission
Activating and deactivating the 456 Drive modes 475
parking brake Battery drain 501
Changing drive mode* 478
Parking on a hill 457 Jump starting using another battery 501
Smart energy distribution using 479
Parking brake malfunction 457 navigation Jump starting using another battery 503
Automatic braking at a standstill 459 Off-road mode 479 Retractable hitch* 508
(Hold)
Creep 480 Towbar hitch* 51 0
Auto-hold brakes 459
Start/Stop function 480 Foldable towbar hitch* 51 1
Activating and deactivating Auto- 460
hold at a standstill Activating and deactivating the 481 Driving with a trailer 51 3
Start/Stop function
Brake assist at standstill 46 1 Trailer Stability Assist* 51 5
9
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Checking trailer lights* 51 6 Audio and media 536 Handling text messages 548
Towing using a towline 51 7 Sound settings 536 Managing contacts 549
Towing using a towline 51 8 Apps 537 Wireless phone charger* 549
Attaching and removing the tow- 51 9 Download apps 537 Using the wireless phone charger* 550
ing eyelet
Deleting apps 538 Certificate for wireless phone charger 55 1
Activating and deactivating Tow mode 525
Radio* 539 Internet connection 556
Recovery 525
Starting the radio* 539 Connecting to the Internet via 556
Recovery 526 Bluetooth
Storing radio favorites* 539
Preparing for a long trip 526 Connecting to the Internet via Wi-Fi 557
RBDS* 540
Winter driving 527 Internet connection problems 557
SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 540
Driving through standing water 528 Markets with Internet via vehicle 558
Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 54 1 modem
HomeLink®* 530
Bluetooth Media Player 542 Hard disk storage space 559
Programming HomeLink®* 530
Playing media 542 Type approval Radio Equipment 559
Using HomeLink®* 532 Directive
Apple® CarPlay®* 542
Type approval for HomeLink®* 533
Using Apple® CarPlay®* 543
Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* 544
Phone 544
Connecting a phone to the vehicle 545
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-con- 546
nected phone
Switch between phones con- 546
nected via Bluetooth
Disconnecting Bluetooth-con- 547
nected devices
Handling phone calls 547
10
VOLVO ASSISTANCE AND THE NAVIGATION
VOLVO CARSAPP Remote Start of the climate sys- 572 Google Maps 578
Volvo Assistance 562 tem using the Volvo Cars app
Use Google Maps 579
Automatic Crash Notification with 563 Remote Start of the vehicle using 572
the Volvo Cars app Google Maps in the instrument panel 579
Volvo Assistance
Viewing battery level in the Volvo 573 Destinations in Google Maps 580
Emergency assistance with Volvo 563
Assistance Cars app Creating route guidance with 580
Using the Volvo Cars app with an 574 Google Maps
Volvo Assistance help during a trip 564
Apple Watch Electric vehicle functions with 581
Customer service via Volvo Assistance 565 Google Maps
Change of ownership when the 574
Volvo Assistance abroad 565 Volvo Cars app is connected to the Connected functions with Google 582
vehicle Maps
Backup battery for Volvo Assistance 565
Removing the link between the 575 Google Maps settings 582
Volvo Cars app 566 vehicle and the Volvo Cars app
Getting started with the Volvo Cars 566 Map downloads 583
app Updating Google Maps 583
Connecting the Volvo Cars app to 567
the vehicle
Contact between the Volvo Cars 568
app and the vehicle
Devices compatible with the Volvo 569
Cars app
Shortcuts to the Volvo Cars app 569
Booking service with the Volvo 570
Cars app
Locking function in the Volvo Cars app 570
Remote Start of the climate sys- 57 1
tem using the Volvo Cars app
Remote Start of the climate sys- 57 1
tem using the Volvo Cars app
11
WHEELS AND TIRES LOADING, STORAGE AND
Tires 586 Flat tire 61 0 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Tire direction of rotation 588 Tire sealing system 61 0 Passenger compartment interior 622
Tread wear indicator 589 Using the tire sealing system 61 2 Tunnel console 626
Tire terminology 589 Inflating tires using the compres- 61 7 USB ports 629
sor included in the tire sealing system Charging devices via USB ports 63 1
Tire sidewall designations 590
Determining the vehicle's permit- 61 8 Electrical outlets 632
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 592 ted weight
Checking tire pressure 593 Using the electrical outlets 634
Adjusting tire pressure 594 Using the glove compartment 635
Location of tire pressure decal 595 Sun visors 636
Tire Pressure Monitoring System* 596 Folding down the armrest in the 637
rear seat*
Saving new reference values for 597
tire inflation pressure monitoring* Opening the rear seat cup holder 637
Viewing tire pressure status in the 599 Cargo compartment 638
center display* Loading recommendations 640
Action when warned of low tire 599 Roof loads and load carriers 642
pressure
Grocery bag holders 642
Messages for tire inflation pres- 600
sure monitoring* Cargo anchoring eyelets* 646
Changing a wheel 601 Rear seat ski hatch* 647
Tool kit 603 Folding up the cargo compartment 648
floor
Jack* 604
Removing the folding cargo com- 649
Wheel bolts 605 partment floor*
Spare wheel 605 Installing and removing the cargo 650
Handling the spare wheel 606 compartment cover*
Snow tires 608 Operating the cargo compartment 653
cover*
Snow chains 609
12
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Installing and removing the steel 657 Volvo's service program 670 Recycling of batteries 71 7
cargo grid*
Data transfer between vehicle and 673 Fuses and fuseboxes 71 8
Installing and removing the cargo net* 660 workshop over Wi-Fi
Replacing fuses 71 9
Installing and removing the cargo net* 662 Software Updates 673
Fuses under the hood 72 1
Removing and storing the parcel shelf 666 Hoisting the vehicle 675
Fuses in the engine compartment 728
Climate control system service 686
Fuses in the engine compartment 734
Climate control system service 686
Fuses under the glove compartment 749
Damaged windshield 686
Fuses under the left front seat 756
Opening and closing the hood 687
Fuses under the glove compartment 762
Removing panels under the hood 690
Fuses in the trunk 770
Engine compartment overview 692
Fuses in the cargo compartment 775
Engine oil 695
Troubleshooting fuses in the event 783
Checking and filling engine oil 696 of center display problems
Coolant 698 Replacing bulbs 785
Refilling coolant 699 Location of exterior lights 786
Batteries and power supply 701 Replacing rear turn signal bulbs 787
Start battery 703 Replacing the brake light bulb 789
Support battery 707 Replacing the rear fog light bulb 790
Hybrid battery 71 0 Bulb specifications 790
High-voltage battery 71 1 Cleaning the interior 79 1
High-voltage battery recommen- 71 2 Cleaning the center display 79 1
dations
Cleaning the instrument panel 792
Hybrid battery recommendations 71 3
Cleaning the head-up display* 792
12 V battery 71 5
Cleaning fabric upholstery and 793
Battery symbols 71 7 headliner
13
SPECIFICATIONS
Cleaning the seat belt 794 Refilling washer fluid 81 6 Type designations 820
Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats 794 Type designations 822
Cleaning leather upholstery* 795 Dimensions 826
Cleaning Microtech upholstery* 795 Weights 842
Cleaning the leather steering wheel 796 Towing capacity and tongue weight 852
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and 797 Electric motor specifications 857
wood surfaces
Engine specifications 858
Cleaning the exterior 797
Engine oil specifications 862
Polishing and waxing 798
Transmission fluid specifications 863
Hand washing 799
Brake fluid specifications 863
Automatic car washes 800
Fuel tank volume 863
High-pressure washing 802
Air conditioning specifications 864
Cleaning exterior lights 802
Air conditioning specifications 866
Cleaning the wiper blades 803
Approved tire pressure 868
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber 804
and trim components
Cleaning rims 806
Corrosion protection 806
Paintwork 807
Touching up minor paint damage 807
Color codes 808
Changing rear window wipers 81 0
Replacing windshield wiper blades 81 3
Putting the wiper blades in service 81 5
position
14
SERVICES INDEX
Rearview mirror and overhead console 878 Index 901
Exterior 878
Exterior 879
Instrument panel 886
Interior 887
Interior 888
Steering wheel 893
Cargo compartment 894
Trunk 895
Engine compartment 895
Front cargo compartment 897
Key 897
Driver's door control panel 897
Tunnel console 898
15
OWNER'S INFORMATION
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Owner's information Printed information Related information

Owner's information is available in several The glove compartment contains a printed • Complete Owner's Manual in the center
different formats, both digital and printed. supplement to the Owner's Manual, which display (p. 19)
The Owner's Manual is available on the vehi- contains a summary of important and practical • Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)
cle's center display and on Volvo Cars' sup- information.
port site. There is also a digital Quick Guide Other printed information may also be provi-
that can be accessed from the Owner's Man- ded in the vehicle, depending on equipment
ual in the center display. The glove compart- level, market, etc.
ment contains a supplement to the Owner's
Manual with a selection of practical informa-
tion that can be good to have on hand for
CAUTION
times when it's not possible or convenient to The driver is always responsible for operat-
read from the center display, such as if you ing the vehicle in a safe manner and adher-
need to change a tire. ing to all applicable laws and regulations. It
is also important that the vehicle is oper-
Vehicle's center display ated, maintained and serviced according to
To access the Owner's Manual, tap and Volvo's recommendations provided in the
then tap . This gives you access to visual owner's information.
navigation with exterior and interior images of If the information in the center display and
the vehicle. The information is searchable and other sources differs, the information in the
is divided into categories. center display applies.
Volvo Cars support site
Volvo Cars' website and support site contain NOTE
additional information about your vehicle.
Changing languages in the center display
Go to volvocars.com/intl/support and select could mean that certain owner's informa-
your country. The website is available on most tion will not comply with national or local
markets. laws and regulations. Do not change to a
Contact information for customer support and language you do not speak well, as it can
your nearest Volvo retailer are available on the be difficult to find your way back through
support site. the menu.
18
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Complete Owner's Manual in the Find information by: Printed information and support site
center display • using the search function Other printed information may also be provi-
The printed supplement only contains ded in the vehicle, depending on equipment
selected information. You can find complete
• visually navigating using exterior and inte- level, market, etc.
rior images
and up-to-date information in the vehicle's The accompanying supplement can also be
center display. • clicking through categories.
ordered. Contact a Volvo retailer to order.
CAUTION NOTE The Owner's Manual is also available on

volvocars.com/intl/support.
To familiarize yourself with important The digital Owner's Manual is not available
safety instructions and to optimize your during driving.
NOTE
experience, Volvo recommends reading the
owner's information under each category If the information in the center display and
in the center display in its entirety before other sources differs, the information in the
could mean that some of the owner's informa-
driving the vehicle for the first time. center display applies.
tion will not comply with national or local rules
and regulations. Do not change to a language
CAUTION that you do not understand well, as this could Related information
make it difficult for you to navigate back • Navigate in the Owner's Manual in the
The driver is always responsible for operat- through the menu. center display (p. 20)
ing the vehicle in a safe manner and adher-
ing to all applicable laws and regulations. It Child safety information • Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)
is also important that the vehicle is oper-
ated, maintained and serviced according to CAUTION
Volvo's recommendations provided in the Information about child safety and how
owner's information. and where child restraints should be instal-
led is provided in the Owner's Manual in
Finding information in the vehicle's the center display. The information is also
center display available on volvocars.com/intl/support.
Complete and up-to-date information for your
vehicle is always available in the center dis-
play. To access the Owner's Manual, tap
and then .
19
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Navigate in the Owner's Manual in 1. Press Exterior or Interior. Use at the top of the Owner's Manual to
the center display > Exterior or interior images of the vehicle reach the search function from other pages.
The digital Owner's Manual can be accessed are shown with hotspots. The hotspots
from the center display. lead to articles about the corresponding Related information
To access the Owner's Manual, tap and function, component, etc. Swipe the • Complete Owner's Manual in the center
screen horizontally to scroll between display (p. 19)
then .
the images. • Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)
There are a number of ways to find informa-
tion in the Owner's Manual. 2. Tap a hotspot.
> The title of a relevant article will be dis-
Contents of the Owner Manual played.
Start page 3. Tap the title to open the article.
Tap the symbol to return to
To go back, tap the left arrow.
the Owner's Manual start
page. Quick guide
Useful information about the most commonly
used features and functions in your vehicle.
Video
Categories Tap the symbol to go to brief
The articles in the Owner's instructive videos for various
Manual are structured into functions in the vehicle.
main and sub-categories. The
same article may appear in
several relevant categories in
order to help make them eas- Release notes
ier to find. Read more about the current version and
Visual navigation implemented updates.
Exterior and interior overviews of the vehicle.
Hotspots are provided for certain functions, Search function
components, etc. Tap a hotspot to come to a Tap the search field at the top of the Owner's
relevant article. Manual to reach the search function from the
start page.
20
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Using the Owner's Manual requirements and national or local laws and Risk of injury
To get to know your new vehicle, read the regulations.
Owner's Manual before driving it for the first The intention of this owner's information is to
time. explain all of the possible features, functions,
Reading your Owner's Manual is a way to options and accessories included in a Volvo
familiarize yourself with new features and vehicle. It is not intended as an indication or
functions, get advice on how to handle your guarantee that all of these features, functions
vehicle in different situations, and to learn how and options are included in every vehicle.
to take advantage of everything your Volvo has Some terminology used may not exactly
to offer. Pay particular attention to the safety match terminology used in sales, marketing
warnings provided in the Owner's Manual. and advertising materials.
Volvo continuously works to develop and For more information on which equipment is
improve our products. Modifications can mean standard and which is an option or accessory,
that information, descriptions and illustrations please contact your Volvo retailer. Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning field,
in the Owner's Manual differ from the equip- white text/image on a black message field.
ment in the vehicle. We reserve the right to Decals Used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a
make changes without prior notice. There are various types of decals affixed in the warning of this type could result in serious
vehicle to communicate important information injury or death.
© Volvo Car Corporation
in a clear manner. The importance of these
Option/accessory decals is explained as follows, in descending
In addition to standard equipment, the order of importance.
Owner's Manual also describes options (fac-
tory-installed equipment) and certain accesso-
ries (extra retrofitted equipment).
All, at the time of publication known, options
and accessories are marked with an asterisk:
*.
The equipment described in the Owner's Man-
ual is not available in all vehicles. Vehicles may
be equipped differently depending on market
}}
* Option/accessory. 21
OWNER'S INFORMATION
|| Risk of damage White ISO symbols and white text/image on a The Owner's Manual and the
black message field. environment
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper from
NOTE responsibly managed forests.
The decals shown in the Owner's Manual The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® sym-
do not claim to be exact reproductions of bol certifies that the paper pulp in the printed
those found in the vehicle. The purpose is Owner's Manual comes from FSC®-certified
to show approximately how they look and forests or other responsibly managed sources.
about where they are located. The informa-
tion that applies for your vehicle in particu-
lar is found on the decal on the vehicle.
Illustrations, images and video clips

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a Illustrations, images and video clips used in
black or blue warning field and message field. the Owner's Manual are sometimes generic
Used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a and are intended to provide an overview or an
warning of this type could result in damage. example of a certain function or feature. They
Information may vary depending on equipment level and
market and may differ from the appearance of
your vehicle.
Related information
• Complete Owner's Manual in the center
display (p. 19)
Related information
• Eco-efficiency (p. 26)
22
YOUR VOLVO
YOUR VOLVO
Contacting Volvo volvocars.com/ca Volvo ID

Use the following contact information if you Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives you
would like to get in touch with Volvo in the access to a range of services using a single
United States or Canada. username and password.
One example of a service in which a Volvo ID
In the USA: is needed is to check the vehicle via your
Volvo Car USA phone using the Volvo Cars app.
1800 Volvo Place A Volvo ID can be created from the vehicle, at
volvoid.eu.volvocars.com/Account or in the
Mahwah, NJ 07430 Volvo Cars app.
Attn: Volvo Consumer Relations Center
For faster delivery of your letter, send us a fax NOTE
at 1-866-631-9059. The available services can vary over time
Phone: 1-800-458-1552 and depend on equipment level and mar-
ket.
volvocars.com/us
Volvo Car Financial Services Related information
P.O. Box 91300 • Creating a Volvo ID (p. 25)
Mobile, AL 36691-1300 • Problems logging in with Volvo ID
(p. 25)
Visit Volvo Car Financial Service for questions
about your existing VCF contract. • Volvo Cars app (p. 566)
• Booking service with the Volvo Cars app
In Canada: (p. 570)
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Customer Care Centre
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
24
YOUR VOLVO
Creating a Volvo ID Related information Problems logging in with Volvo ID

To use Volvo services connected to the vehi- • Volvo ID (p. 24) This article describes problems that may arise
cle, such as via the Volvo Cars app, a Volvo ID • Problems logging in with Volvo ID when logging in with Volvo ID. For example if
must be created. (p. 25) you have forgotten your password or your
Volvo ID username.
Creating a Volvo ID with the Volvo Cars app • Download apps (p. 537)
Forgotten your password
1. Download the latest version of the • Volvo Cars app (p. 566) To reset your password, follow the instruc-
Volvo Cars app1 to your phone. • Internet connection (p. 556) tions below:
2. Choose to create a Volvo ID. In the Volvo Cars app2
3. The website for creating a Volvo ID will 1. Open the Volvo Cars app.
appear.
2. Select "Log in."
4. Enter a personal email address or cell
phone number. 3. Press "Forgotten password?" and follow
the instructions.
5. Follow the instructions that will be sent
automatically to this email address/cell You can also change your password at
phone number. volvoid.eu.volvocars.com/Account.
> A Volvo ID is created and ready for use. Login error after creating a new account
Creating a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars Sometimes there may be a delay in the proc-
ess which can result in an account not being
website
available directly after it has been created. Try
1. Go to volvoid.eu.volvocars.com/Account.
again after 24 hours and if the problem per-
Choose to create a Volvo ID.
sists contact your local Volvo retailer or Volvo
2. Enter a personal email address or cell Cars customer service for further assistance.
phone number. What is my Volvo ID (user name)?
3. Follow the instructions that will be sent Your Volvo ID is the same as the registered
automatically to this email address/cell email address/cellular phone number.
phone number.
> A Volvo ID is created and ready for use.
1 Can be downloaded from e.g. the Apple App Store or Google Play.
2 Certain markets only.
}}
25
YOUR VOLVO
|| Unlock your Volvo ID delete your account for the old market and Eco-efficiency
Your account will be locked after 5 failed then create a new account for the new market. Volvo is committed to the well-being of its
attempts to log in to the Volvo Cars app2. You E-mail error customers. As a natural part of this commit-
can unlock your account by clicking Forgot If you have entered an email address as user- ment, we care about the environment in
password? in the login screen. name and did not receive a confirmation mes- which we all live. Concern for the environ-
Changed email address sage after registration, check that you provi- ment means an everyday involvement in
If you get a new email address and still have ded a valid email address and that the mes- reducing our environmental impact.
access to your previous address, you can log sage was not stopped by a junk mail filter. Try Volvo's environmental activities are based on a
in using your old credentials and change your to register your email address again. holistic view, which means we consider the
username yourself. If you no longer have overall environmental impact of a product
access to your old email address, you should
Further assistance throughout its complete life cycle. In this con-
If you have not found the solution to a problem text, design, production, product use, and
create a new Volvo ID using your new
regarding Volvo ID and need further assis- recycling are all important considerations. In
address.
tance, contact your local Volvo retailer or production, Volvo has partly or completely
Login error after changing Volvo ID (user Volvo Cars customer service. phased out several chemicals including CFCs,
name) lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and
Make sure you receive a confirmation mes- Related information reduced the number of chemicals used in our
sage verifying your new username. When this • Volvo ID (p. 24) plants 50% since 1991.
has been done you should be able to login • Creating a Volvo ID (p. 25)
using the new username. If you did not receive Volvo was the first in the world to introduce
the confirmation message, your old username into production a three-way catalytic converter
will remain. Log in and try again to change the with a Lambda sond, now called the heated
username. oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current version of
this highly efficient system reduces emissions
Login error after changing password of harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the
Try logging in with your previous password. If exhaust pipe by approximately 95 - 99% and
this doesn't work, try to reset your password. the search to eliminate the remaining emis-
Account registered to another market sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile
An account is registered to a specific market manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for
and cannot be moved to a different market. To the air conditioning system of all models as far
be able to reuse the same email address/cellu- back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec-
lar phone number, we advise you to first
26
YOUR VOLVO
tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are Electrified vehicles

bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to • If possible, precondition the vehicle with
continuous environmental refinement of con- the charging cable before driving.
ventional gasoline-powered internal combus-
• If preconditioning is not possible in cold
tion engines, Volvo is actively looking at weather, use the seat and steering wheel
advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles. heating primarily. Avoid heating the entire
When you drive a Volvo, you become our part- passenger compartment, which reduces
ner in the work to lessen the vehicle's impact the hybrid battery's charge level.
on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's • Choose the Pure drive mode to help mini-
environmental impact, you can: mize electric power consumption.
• Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. • In hilly terrain, put the gear selector in
Tests have shown decreased fuel econ- mode B to utilize the electric motor's
omy with improperly inflated tires. braking function when the accelerator
• Follow the recommended maintenance pedal is released. This helps charge the
schedule in your Warranty and Service hybrid battery.
Records Information booklet.
Related information
• Drive at a constant speed whenever possi- • Economical driving (p. 483)
ble.
• Range (p. 484)
• See a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible for inspec- • Starting and stopping preconditioning
tion if the check engine (malfunction indi- (p. 254)
cator) light illuminates, or stays on after • The Owner's Manual and the environment
the vehicle has started. (p. 22)
• Properly dispose of any vehicle-related • Air quality (p. 233)
waste such as used motor oil, used batter-
ies, brake pads, etc.
• When cleaning your vehicle, please use
genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo
car care products are formulated to be
environmentally friendly.
27
YOUR VOLVO
Connection and entertainment carrier, (3) that the underlying carrier has no • use the Service for commercial purposes.
The vehicle has an intelligent interface and liability of any kind to the user, whether for Your access to the Service is part of a shared
offers Internet connection to the digital breach of contract, warranty, negligence, strict access. Volvo reserves the right to suspend
world. An intuitive navigation structure offers liability in tort or otherwise, (4) that data your access to or use of the Service if your use
access to relevant assistance, information transmissions and messages may be delayed, involves very high volumes of data, dispropor-
and entertainment when it is needed. deleted or not delivered, and emergency tionate to other users. Volvo may also suspend
It includes all of the solutions in the vehicle calling may not be completed, (5) the your access for technical reasons or to protect
related to entertainment, Internet connection underlying carrier cannot guarantee the other functions of your vehicle. Your access to
and navigation, and serves as the user inter- security of wireless transmissions and will not the connected Service is subject to the third-
face between the driver and the vehicle. be liable for any lack of security relating to the party terms and conditions of the mobile net-
use of the services. work provider.
Where Volvo is responsible for the provision of
mobile connectivity services to enable use of Fair Use Policy Information when it's needed, where
certain functions, and excluding any separate Your use of connectivity services that are part it's needed
contract for mobile connectivity services of the of your vehicle is subject to this Fair Use Pol- The vehicle's displays present the right infor-
owner or any other user of the car that Volvo is icy. mation at the right time. Information is pre-
not party to, each user understands and
When using this Service, you agree not to sented in different displays depending on how
agrees that, to the extent permitted by law, it:
it should be prioritized by the driver.
(1) has no contractual relationship with the • submit content that is unlawful, obscene,
underlying wireless service carrier, (2) is not a libelous, threatening, harassing, hateful,
third party beneficiary of any agreement racially or ethnically offensive or otherwise
between the car owner and the underlying inappropriate
• use the Service in breach of any applicable
law
28
YOUR VOLVO
}}
29
YOUR VOLVO
||
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritized.
The instrument panel shows information ing and indicator symbols, battery status,
about speed, road sign information, warn- etc. The instrument panel can also show
30
YOUR VOLVO
incoming calls or information about the The head-up display presents information that
current song on the radio. It is controlled the driver should react to immediately.
using the steering wheel keypads. For example, traffic warnings, speed informa-
Many of the vehicle's main functions are tion and navigation messages. Road sign
controlled from the center display, such as information and incoming phone calls are also
the climate control system, the entertain- shown in the head-up display. These can be
ment system and seat positions. The cen- handled using the right-side steering wheel
ter display also shows navigation and road keypad or the center display.
sign information. The information presen- Voice control system
ted in the center display can be handled The voice control system enables the driver to
by the driver or by someone else in the control certain vehicle functions without tak-
vehicle. ing their hands off the wheel. The system can
understand natural speech. Use voice control
to e.g. play a song, make a phone call,
NOTE
increase the temperature in the passenger
Wearing gloves can limit or prevent compartment or have a text message read
touchscreen response. aloud.
Related information
Head-up display*
• Instrument panel (p. 99)
• Center display overview (p. 131)
• Voice control with the Google Assistant
(p. 147)
• Head-up display* (p. 145)
YOUR VOLVO
Data recording crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by Canadian market only:
As part of Volvo's commitment to safety and the EDR under normal driving conditions and EDR
quality, certain information is recorded regar- no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data
ding vehicle operation, functionality and inci- crash location) is recorded. However, other
Recorder" (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
dents. parties, such as law enforcement, could
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
US market only: combine the EDR data with the type of
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
personally identifying data routinely acquired
EDR hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
during a crash investigation.
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data understanding how a vehicle's systems
Recorder" (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR To read data recorded by an EDR, special performed. The EDR is designed to record
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like equipment is required, and access to the data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
situations, such as an air bag deployment or vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to systems for a short period of time, typically 30
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
understanding how a vehicle's systems as law enforcement, that have the special designed to record such data as:
performed. The EDR is designed to record equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR. • How various systems in your vehicle were
data related to vehicle dynamics and safety operating;
systems for a short period of time, typically 30 ASDR
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is This vehicle is equipped with an Active Safety
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
designed to record such data as: Data Recorder (ASDR). This data recorder can
record information related to the usage of the • How far (if at all) the driver was
• How various systems in your vehicle were depressing the accelerator and/or brake
operating; car, functional errors and active safety
actuations (e.g. auto brake). The information pedal; and,
• Whether or not the driver and passenger saved is used by technicians for service and • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
safety belts were buckled/fastened; maintenance to diagnose and repair possible This data can help provide a better
• How far (if at all) the driver was faults that has occurred in the vehicle and to understanding of the circumstances in which
depressing the accelerator and/or brake fulfil certain legal requirements. The registered crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is
pedal; and, data can also, in congregated form, be used recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
• How fast the vehicle was traveling. for research and product development crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
purposes to continuously improve the safety the EDR under normal driving conditions and
This data can help provide a better and quality of Volvo Cars. For more
understanding of the circumstances in which no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
information contact your local Volvo retailer. crash location) is recorded. However, other
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial parties, such as law enforcement, could
32
YOUR VOLVO
combine the EDR data with the type of continuously improve the safety and quality of lected for product development, quality fol-
personally identifying data routinely acquired Volvo vehicles. low-up, safety work and to improve and moni-
during a crash investigation. tor the vehicle's quality and its safety func-
Volvo will not provide this information to any
tions. Data is also collected in order to man-
To read data recorded by an EDR, special third parties without the vehicle owner's con-
age Volvo Cars' warranty commitments.
equipment is required, and access to the sent. However, national legislation and regula-
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to tions may require Volvo to disclose this type of Related information
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such information to law enforcement or other • Contacting Volvo (p. 24)
as law enforcement, that have the special authorities that can claim a legal right to the
equipment, can read the information if they information. Special technical equipment, • Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 38)
have access to the vehicle or the EDR. which Volvo and workshops that have entered
agreements with Volvo have access to, is
In addition to the EDR, the vehicle is equipped
required to read and interpret the recorded
with a number of computers that continuously
data. Volvo is responsible for ensuring that
control and monitor the vehicle's performance.
information provided to Volvo in conjunction
These computers may record data during nor-
with service and maintenance is stored and
mal driving conditions, particularly if they
handled securely and in compliance with
detect a fault relating to the vehicle's opera-
applicable legal requirements. For more infor-
tion and functionality or upon activation of the
mation, please contact a Volvo retailer.
vehicle's active driver support functions (e.g.
City Safety or the auto-brake function). TCAM
Some of this recorded data is required by Vehicles equipped with TCAM can collect data
technicians performing service and mainte- on the vehicle's safety functions as well as
nance in order to diagnose and rectify any other functions in the vehicle. This data is col-
faults that may have occurred in the vehicle. lected for product development, quality fol-
The recorded information is also needed to low-up, safety work and to improve and moni-
enable Volvo to fulfill legal and other regula- tor the vehicle's quality and its safety func-
tory requirements. Information registered in tions. Data is also collected in order to man-
the vehicle is stored in its computers until the age Volvo Cars' warranty commitments and to
vehicle is serviced or repaired. In addition to comply with legal requirements related to
the above, the recorded information may be engine emission data.
used in aggregated form for research and Vehicles equipped with TCAM can collect data
product development purposes in order to on the vehicle's safety functions as well as
other functions in the vehicle. This data is col-
33
YOUR VOLVO
Approval of terms and conditions Certain settings can only be made from a pro- Important information on
and data collection file with administrative rights. accessories and extra equipment
Messages about different terms and condi- Incorrectly connected or installed accessories
Related information
tions and data collection may be shown in the or extra equipment may have an adverse
center display. Data is collected, for example,
• User profiles (p. 139)
effect on the vehicle's electronics.
in order to provide better safety, vehicle and • Profile settings (p. 141) Volvo strongly recommends that Volvo owners
app functions. • Resetting user data (p. 138) install only genuine, Volvo-approved accesso-
The first time you use your vehicle, a guide will ries, and that accessory installations be per-
open in the center display to help you adjust formed only by a trained and qualified Volvo
various settings. In connection with the guide, service technician. Certain functions only work
you are also prompted to give your agreement when the associated software is installed in
to different types of terms and conditions and the vehicle's computer system.
the collection of information.
The equipment described in the Owner's Man-
You may also be asked to provide your con- ual is not available in all vehicles. Vehicles may
sent in other situations, such as: be equipped differently depending on market
• First use of apps and services requirements and national or local laws and
regulations.
• New user profiles
Optional or accessory equipment may not be
• Logging out from and deleting user pro-
files available in all countries or markets. Please
note that some vehicles may be equipped dif-
• Change of ownership ferently, depending on special legal require-
• Resetting settings ments. For more information on which equip-
ment is standard and which is an option or
To access privacy settings: accessory, please contact your Volvo retailer.
1. Tap in the center display.
2. As a logged in user, press Profiles.
If no user is logged in, press Privacy.
3. Then select Volvo privacy settings or
Google privacy settings.
34
YOUR VOLVO
NOTE WARNING WARNING

Do not export your Volvo to another coun- CALIFORNIA proposition 65 The driver is always responsible for operat-
try before investigating that country's ing the vehicle in a safe manner and for
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
applicable safety and exhaust emission complying with current statutes and regu-
and certain vehicle components contain or
requirements. In some cases it may be dif- lations.
emit chemicals known to the state of Cali-
ficult or impossible to comply with these fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or It is also essential to maintain and service
requirements. Modifications to the emis- other reproductive harm. In addition, cer- the vehicle according to Volvo's recom-
sion control system(s) may render your tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain mendations as stated in the owner's infor-
Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in products of component wear contain or mation and the Warranty and Service
emit chemicals known to the State of Cali- Records Information booklet.
the U.S., Canada and other countries. fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or
If the information in the center display dif-
other reproductive harm.
fers from information in other sources, the
NOTE See www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger information in the center display always
-vehicle. takes precedence.
Do not export your Volvo to another coun-
try before investigating that country's
applicable safety requirements. In some WARNING Related information
cases it may be difficult or impossible to • Accessory installation (p. 36)
Certain components of this vehicle such as
comply with these requirements. air bag modules, seat belt tensioners, • Connecting equipment to the vehicle's
adaptive steering columns, and button cell data link connector (p. 36)
batteries may contain Perchlorate material. • Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)
Special handling may apply for service or
vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
35
YOUR VOLVO
Accessory installation information. Volvo assumes no responsi- Connecting equipment to the

We strongly recommend that Volvo owners bility for death, injury, or expenses that vehicle's data link connector
install only genuine, Volvo-approved accesso- may result from the installation of non- Incorrectly connected or installed software or
ries, and that accessory installations be per- genuine accessories. diagnostic tools may have an adverse effect
formed only by a trained and qualified Volvo on the vehicle's electronics.
Related information
service technician. Certain functions only Volvo strongly recommends that Volvo owners
work when the associated software is instal- • Important information on accessories and
use only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories,
extra equipment (p. 34)
led in the vehicle's computer system. and that accessory installations be performed
• Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to only by a trained and qualified Volvo service
ensure compatibility with the perform- technician. Certain accessories only work
ance, safety, and emission systems in your when the associated software is installed in
vehicle. Additionally, a trained and quali- the vehicle's computer system.
fied Volvo service technician knows where
accessories may and may not be safely
installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please
consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technician before installing any acces-
sory in or on your vehicle.
• Accessories that have not been approved
by Volvo may or may not be specifically
tested for compatibility with your vehicle.
• Any of your vehicle's performance and
safety systems could be adversely affec-
ted if you install accessories that Volvo
has not tested, or if you allow accessories On-board Diagnostic (OBDII) socket under the dash-
to be installed by someone unfamiliar with board on the driver's side.
your vehicle.
• Damage caused by unapproved or
improperly installed accessories may not
be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
See your Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet for more warranty
36
YOUR VOLVO
NOTE This device complies with Industry Canada Technician certification

license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo
Volvo Cars takes no responsibility for the subject to the following two conditions: supports certification by the National Insti-
consequences of connecting non-author-
(1) This device may not cause interference, and tute for Automotive Service Excellence
ized equipment to the On-board
(A.S.E.).
Diagnostic (OBDII) socket. This socket (2) this device must accept any interference Certified technicians have demonstrated a
should only be used by a trained and quali- received, including interference that may high degree of competence in specific areas.
fied Volvo service technician. cause undesired operation. Besides passing exams, each technician must
Related information also have worked in the field for two or more
Type approval years before a certificate is issued. These pro-
USA
• Important information on accessories and
extra equipment (p. 34) fessional technicians are best able to analyze
FCC ID: 2AGKKACUII-06 vehicle problems and perform the necessary
maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC peak operating condition.
rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: Electrified vehicles
Technicians performing work on a vehicle with
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- electrification should also have the necessary
ence, and training and specialized certification required
(2) this device must accept any interference for performing repairs and/or maintenance on
received, including interference that may a vehicle with electrification.
cause undesired operation.
WARNING
WARNING A number of electrical components in elec-
Changes or modifications not expressly trified vehicles use high-voltage current
approved by the party responsible for com- and can be extremely dangerous if handled
pliance could void the user's authority to incorrectly. These components and any
operate the equipment. orange wiring in the vehicle may only be
handled by trained and qualified Volvo
service technicians.
Canada
IC: 20839-ACUII06
37
YOUR VOLVO
Viewing the Vehicle Identification Volvo Structural Parts Statement In addition Volvo does not support the use or
Number (VIN) Volvo is one of the leading companies for car re-use of structural components from an exist-
All vehicles have a unique identification num- safety. ing vehicle that has been previously damaged.
ber, a VIN3. Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles Although these parts may appear equivalent, it
designed to help protect vehicle occupants in is difficult to tell if the parts have been previ-
1. Tap settings at the bottom of the cen-
ously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part
ter display. the event of a collision.
has been damaged as a result of a prior colli-
2. Proceed to System and then About. Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a sion. The quality of these used parts may also
collision. This energy absorption system have been affected due to environmental
The VIN can also be found: including, but not limited to, structural compo- exposure.
nents such as bumper reinforcement bars,
• on the first page of the Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet
bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, fender Related information
aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body panels • Data recording (p. 32)
• on the vehicle's registration card must work together to maintain cabin integrity
• by looking at the dashboard through the and protect the vehicle occupants.
vehicle's windshield. The supplemental restraint system including
but not limited to air bags, side curtain air
bags, and deployment sensors work together
with the above components to provide proper
timing for air bag deployment.
Due to the above, Volvo Car USA does not
support the use of aftermarket, alternative or
anything other than original Volvo parts for
collision repair.
Volvo Car USA also recommends using Volvo-
approved replacement glass. The use of after-
market glass, particularly a windshield, can
The VIN has a similar location on all models. have an adverse effect on collision avoidance
and advanced lighting systems.
3 Vehicle Identification Number
38
YOUR VOLVO
Change of market when importing NOTE Driver distraction

or relocating A driver has a responsibility to do everything
Visit an authorized Volvo retailer if you
If you import a vehicle or move to another possible to ensure his or her own safety and
have imported or relocated with your vehi-
country, it is important that you register the the safety of passengers in the vehicle and
cle to a new country.
vehicle in the new market to help ensure that others sharing the roadway. Part of this
online services work correctly, that the vehi- Available services may vary depending on responsibility is avoiding distractions, includ-
cle meets local laws and regulations, etc. market and car model. ing performing activities that are not directly
related to controlling the vehicle in the driving
Visit an authorized Volvo retailer environment.
Visit an authorized Volvo retailer for assistance NOTE Your new Volvo is equipped with feature-rich
registering the vehicle in the new market. If the vehicle is exported to another market, entertainment and communication systems.
If you do not do this then you may experience Volvo is not responsible for any adapta- You may also own other portable electronic
that apps, Volvo Assistance4, software down- tions to the vehicle in order to meet appli- devices for your own convenience. Use these
loads and other online services are affected cable requirements or laws in the country systems and devices safely to avoid distrac-
and do not work correctly. of import. For more information, see the tion.
Warranty and Service Records Information For all of these systems, we want to provide
Creating a new Volvo ID in your new home booklet or contact your Volvo workshop. the following warning that reflects the strong
market
Volvo concern for your safety. Never use these
When you relocate to another country you
should create a Volvo ID in the new country.
Related information devices or any feature of your vehicle in a way
• Volvo ID (p. 24) that distracts you from the task of driving
If you have already created a Volvo ID in safely. Distraction can lead to a serious acci-
another country and want to use the same
• Volvo Assistance (p. 562)
dent. In addition to this general warning, we
email address, you must first delete your Volvo offer the following guidance regarding specific
ID in the region you originally created it. You new features that may be found in your vehi-
can also create a new Volvo ID with another cle:
email address.
For vehicles with Volvo Assistance
Download the Volvo Cars app from the coun-
try the vehicle will be used in and link the app
to your vehicle.
4 Applicable only to markets that have access to Volvo Assistance. }}
39
YOUR VOLVO
|| WARNING Getting started with Google Related information

services • Connecting an account to a user profile
• Never use a hand-held cellular tele-
Connect your Google account to your user (p. 142)
phone while driving. Some jurisdictions
profile to get started with Google services. • Approval of terms and conditions and data
prohibit cellular telephone use by a
driver while the vehicle is moving. collection (p. 34)
Being logged in with a Google account makes
• If your vehicle is equipped with a navi- Google services such as the Google Assistant • Voice control with the Google Assistant
gation system, set and make changes and Google Maps more personalized. For (p. 147)
to your travel itinerary only with the Google Play to open, a Google account must • Google Maps (p. 578)
vehicle parked. be connected to that user profile.
• Apps (p. 537)
• Never program your audio system Creating a Google account • Map downloads (p. 583)
while the vehicle is moving. Program Go to accounts.google.com/signup. Enter
radio presets with the vehicle parked, your name, create or use an existing email
and use your programmed presets to address and password. Enter your phone
make radio use quicker and simpler. number and verify the account using the code
• Never use portable computers or per- sent to the phone.
sonal digital assistants while the vehi-
cle is moving. Logging in with a Google account in
the center display
Related information 1. Tap , then Google and then Google
• Audio and media (p. 536) Assistant. Tap the profile symbol to log in.
2. Enter the email address connected to your
Google account. Then tap Next.
3. Enter the password connected to your
Google account. Then tap Next.
If the login problem persists, make sure the
vehicle is connected to the Internet.
40
SAFETY
SAFETY
Safety The warning symbol in the instrument panel Related information

The vehicle is equipped with a number of illuminates when the vehicle's electrical sys- • Safety during pregnancy (p. 43)
safety systems that work together to help tem is in ignition mode II. The symbol will go
• Occupant safety (p. 43)
protect the vehicle's driver and passengers in out after approx. 6 seconds if no faults are
the event of an accident. detected in the vehicle's safety systems. • Reporting safety defects (p. 44)
The vehicle is equipped with a number of sen- • Recall information (p. 45)
sors that may react in the event of an accident WARNING • Seat belts (p. 47)
and activate different safety systems, such as If the warning symbol remains illuminated • Airbags (p. 53)
the airbag system and seat belt tensioners. or switches on while driving and the mes-
Depending on the specific conditions of the sage Drive to workshop SRS airbag • Whiplash Protection System (p. 46)
accident, e.g. collisions at certain angles, over- Service urgent is displayed in the instru- • Safety mode (p. 68)
turning or swerving, the systems react differ- ment panel, this indicates that something
in the safety system is not functioning
• Child safety (p. 70)
ently to help provide good protection.
properly. Volvo recommends contacting an
There are also mechanical safety systems authorized Volvo workshop for repairs as
such as the Whiplash Protection System. The soon as possible.
vehicle is also built so that a large part of the
force of a collision is distributed to the vehi-
cle's members, pillars, floor, roof and other WARNING
parts of the body. Never attempt to alter or repair any of the
vehicle's safety systems yourself. Incor-
After an accident, the vehicle's safety mode rectly performed repairs to any system
may be activated if any important function in could impair function and lead to serious
the vehicle has been damaged. injury. Volvo recommends contacting an
authorized Volvo workshop.
Warning symbol in the instrument
panel If this dedicated warning symbol is
The warning symbol illuminates in not functioning, the general warning
the instrument panel when the vehi- symbol will illuminate instead and
cle is started. The symbol goes out the same message will be displayed
after about 6 seconds if no faults are in the instrument panel.
detected in the vehicle's safety systems.
42
SAFETY
Safety during pregnancy position that allows them to retain full control Occupant safety
It is important that seat belts are worn cor- of the vehicle (which means they should be Safety is Volvo's cornerstone.
rectly during pregnancy and that pregnant able to easily reach the steering wheel and
drivers adjust their seating position accord- foot pedals). Try to maintain as much distance Volvo's concern for safety
ingly. as possible between the stomach and the Our concern for safety dates back to 1927
steering wheel. when the first Volvo rolled off the production
Seat belt line. Three-point seat belts (a Volvo invention),
Related information safety cages, and energy-absorbing impact
• Safety (p. 42) zones were designed into Volvo vehicles long
• Seat belts (p. 47) before it was fashionable or required by gov-
ernment regulation.
• Manual front seats (p. 194)
• Power* front seats (p. 196) We will not compromise our commitment to
safety. We continue to seek out new safety
features and to refine those already in our
vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate
hearing your suggestions about improving
automobile safety. We also want to know if
you ever have a safety concern with your vehi-
cle. Call us in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or
The seat belt should fit closely against the in Canada at: 1-800-663-8255.
shoulder, with the diagonal section between
the breasts and to the side of the stomach.
The lap section of the seat belt should lie flat
over the thighs and as far as possible under
the stomach. Never let it ride upward. Remove
unnecessary slack and make sure the seat belt
fits as close as possible to the body. Make
sure there are no twists in the seat belt.
Seating position
As pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust the seat and steering wheel to a
}}
SAFETY
|| Occupant safety reminders Related information Reporting safety defects

How safely you drive doesn't depend on how • Safety (p. 42) The following information will help you report
old you are but rather on: • Reporting safety defects (p. 44) any perceived safety-related defects in your
• How well you see. vehicle.
• Recall information (p. 45)
• Your ability to concentrate. Reporting safety defects in the U.S.
• How quickly you make decisions under If you believe that your vehicle has a
stress to avoid an accident. defect which could cause a crash or
The following suggestions are intended to could cause injury or death, you
help you cope with the ever changing traffic should immediately inform the
environment.
National Highway Traffic Safety
• Never drink and drive. Administration (NHTSA) in addition
• If you are taking any medication, consult to notifying Volvo Car USA, LLC. If
your physician about its potential effects
NHTSA receives similar complaints,
on your driving abilities.
it may open an investigation, and if it
• Take a driver-retraining course.
finds that a safety defect exists in a
• Have your eyes checked regularly.
group of vehicles, it may order a
• Keep your windshield and headlights recall and remedy campaign. How-
clean.
ever, NHTSA cannot become
• Replace wiper blades when they start to
involved in individual problems
leave streaks.
between you, your retailer, or Volvo
• Take into account the traffic, road, and
Car USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA,
weather conditions, particularly with
regard to stopping distance. you may either call the Auto Safety
• Never text while driving. Hotline tollfree at
• Refrain from using or minimize the use of 1-888-327-4236
a cell phone while driving.
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:
NHTSA Headquarters, 1200 New
44
SAFETY
Jersey Avenue SE., West Building, death, you should immediately inform Trans- Recall information
Washington D.C. 20590. port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Car
Canada Ltd. Volvo customers in the US
You can also obtain other informa- Transport Canada can be contacted at:
On our website, click on the three lines next to
tion about motor vehicle safety from "Our Cars" up at the right of the screen, then
1-866-995-9737
click "Help & Support" and then "Recall
http://www.safercar.gov, where you
Teletypewriter (TTY): 1-888-675-6863 information". Enter the vehicle's Vehicle Iden-
can also enter your vehicle's VIN tification Number (VIN) (found at the bottom
Fax: 613-954-4731
(Vehicle Identification Number) to of the windshield). If your vehicle has any open
see if it has any open recalls. Mailing Address: Transport Canada - 330 Recalls, they will be displayed on this page.
Sparks St, Ottawa, (Ontario) K1A 0N5
Volvo strongly recommends that if You can also enter the Vehicle Identification
www.tc.gc.ca Number in the search field on the National
your vehicle is covered under a serv-
Highway Traffic Safety Administration's
ice campaign, safety or emission Related information (NHTSA) website at: www.nhtsa.gov.
recall or similar action, it should be • Safety (p. 42)
completed as soon as possible. • Occupant safety (p. 43) Volvo customers in Canada
For any questions regarding open recalls for
Please check with your local retailer • Recall information (p. 45)
your vehicle, please contact your authorized
or Volvo Car USA, LLC if your vehicle • Viewing the Vehicle Identification Number Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to
is covered under these conditions. (VIN) (p. 38) answer your questions, please contact Volvo
Customer Relations at 800-663-8255, Mon-
NHTSA can be reached at: day through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.
Internet: EST or volvocars.com/ca. You may also write
us at:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Telephone: Customer Care Centre
1-888-327-4236 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Reporting safety defects in Canada Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
}}
45
SAFETY
|| You can also search for manufacturer, model Whiplash Protection System WARNING
and model year on Transport Canada's web- The Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) is
site: Do not attempt to alter or repair the seat or
designed to help reduce the risk of whiplash- WHIPS on your own. Volvo recommends
www.tc.gc.ca type injuries. The system consists of energy contacting an authorized Volvo workshop.
absorbing backrests and seat cushions as
Related information If the front seats have been subjected to
well as specially designed head restraints in
severe stress, e.g. in a collision, the seats
• Safety (p. 42) the front seats. must be replaced. Even if the seats appear
• Reporting safety defects (p. 44) WHIPS is activated in the event of a rear-end undamaged, some of their protective prop-
collision and adapted to the angle and speed erties may have been lost.
• Occupant safety (p. 43) of the collision and to the characteristics of
the colliding vehicle.
When WHIPS is activated, the front seat
backrests move rearward and the seat cush-
ions move downward to change the seating
positions of the driver and front seat passen-
ger. This movement helps absorb some of the
forces that could result in whiplash.
WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seat belt.
Always wear your seat belt.
Do not place any objects on the floor behind or under
the front seats or on the rear seat that could prevent
WHIPS from functioning correctly.
46
SAFETY
WARNING • Power* front seats (p. 196) Seat belts

Do not squeeze box-like cargo between the • Rear Collision Warning* (p. 363) Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-
rear seat cushion and the front seat back- pants in your vehicle. Children should be
rest. properly restrained using an infant seat,
adjustable child seat or booster cushion as
If the rear seat backrests are folded down,
determined by age, weight and height.
cargo must be secured to prevent it from
sliding forward against the front seat back- Most states and provinces make it mandatory
rests in the event of a collision. for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.
Seat belt maintenance

WARNING Check periodically that the seat belts are in
good condition. Use water and a mild deter-
If a rear seat backrest is folded down or if a
rear-facing child restraint is being used in gent for cleaning. Check the seat belt mecha-
the rear seat, the seat in front must be nism's function as follows: attach the seat belt
moved forward so that it does not come and pull rapidly on the strap.
into contact with the backrest or child
restraint.
Seating position
For WHIPS to provide good protection, the
driver and passenger must be seated correctly
and the system's function must not be impe-
ded in any way.
Set the front seat to the correct seating posi-
tion before starting to drive.
The driver and the front seat passenger should
sit in the center of the seat with their heads as
close as possible to the head restraints.
Related information
• Safety (p. 42)
}}
SAFETY
|| WARNING Buckling and unbuckling seat belts Buckling seat belts

Make sure that all passengers have buckled 1. Pull out the belt slowly and make sure it is
• Never repair the belt yourself. Repairs
their seat belts before starting to drive. not twisted or damaged.
should only be performed by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician. If the seat belt in the second row center
seating position1 is used, make sure it is
• Any device used to induce slack into
properly positioned in the correct seat belt
the shoulder belt portion of the three-
guide.
point belt system will have a detrimen-
tal effect on the amount of protection
available in the event of a collision. NOTE
• The seat back should not be tilted too The seat belt is equipped with a seat belt
far back. The shoulder belt must be retractor that will lock up in the following
taut in order to function properly. situations:
• Do not use any type of child restraint in • if the belt is pulled out too quickly.
the front passenger seat. We recom- • during braking and acceleration.
mend that children who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with • if the vehicle is leaning excessively.
the seat belt properly fastened. • when driving in sharp turns.
• if the automatic locking retractor/emer-
Related information gency locking retractor (ALR/ELR) is
• Safety (p. 42) activated. Each seat belt (except for the
driver's) is equipped with an ALR func-
• Seat belt tensioners (p. 50)
tion, which is designed to keep the seat
• Buckling and unbuckling seat belts belt taut when installing a child
(p. 48) restraint. ALR is activated when the seat
• Door and seat belt reminders (p. 52) belt is pulled out as far as possible. If
this is done, a sound from the seat belt
retractor will be audible, which is nor-
mal. The seat belt can now only be fed
into the retractor, not pulled out. This
1 On five- and seven-seat vehicles.
48
SAFETY
function is automatically disabled when 3. The height of the seat belts in the front
the seat belt is unbuckled and fully seats and outboard rear seating positions
retracted. can be adjusted.
The height of the seat belts in the front
2. Buckle the seat belt by pushing the latch seats can be adjusted.
plate into the receptacle.
> A distinct "click" indicates that the belt
is locked into place.
WARNING
Always insert the seat belt latch plate into
the belt buckle on the correct side. Failure The belt should be positioned closely over the shoul-
to do so could cause the seat belts and belt der (against the collarbone, not down over the arm).
buckles to malfunction in a collision. There
is a risk of serious injury. 4. Tighten the lap section of the seat belt
over the hips by pulling the diagonal sec-
tion upward toward the shoulder.
Press the button on the seat belt holder

and move the belt up or down.
Position the belt as high as possible with-
out it chafing against the neck.
The lap section of the seat belt should be positioned

low on the hips (not against the abdomen).
}}
49
SAFETY
|| WARNING 2. If it does not fully retract, guide the belt Seat belt tensioners
manually into the slot and make sure it The vehicle is equipped with standard and
Never use a seat belt for more than one does not hang loose.
occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion electric* seat belt tensioners that can help
of the belt under the arm, behind the back If the seat belt in the second row center tension the seat belt in a critical situation or
or otherwise out of position. Such use seating position1 is used, make sure it is collision.
could cause injury in the event of an acci- properly positioned in the correct seat belt
dent. As seat belts lose much of their Standard seat belt tensioners
guide.
strength when exposed to violent stretch- All seat belts are equipped with a standard
ing, they should be replaced after any colli- Related information seat belt tensioner.
sion, even if they appear to be undamaged.
• Seat belts (p. 47) The seat belts on the front seats and rear out-
• Seat belt tensioners (p. 50) board seats are equipped with standard seat
WARNING belt tensioners.
• Door and seat belt reminders (p. 52)
Do not use clips or fasten the belts around In a collision of sufficiently violent force, the
hooks or other parts of the interior. This will seat belt tensioners will tension the seat belts
prevent the seat belt from fitting properly. in order to more effectively restrain the occu-
pants.
WARNING Electric seat belt tensioners*
Never damage the seat belts and never The driver's and front passenger's seat belts
insert any foreign objects into the belt are equipped with electric seat belt tensioners.
buckle. This may cause the seat belts and
belt buckles to malfunction in a collision. The seat belt tensioners interact and can be
There is a risk of serious injury. activated in conjunction with the assistance
during collision risks and Rear Collision
Unbuckling seat belts Warning* driver support systems. In critical
1. Press the red button on the seat belt situations, such as if the vehicle brakes sud-
receptacle and make sure the seat belt denly, begins to skid or runs off the road (e.g if
retracts fully into the retractor slot. the vehicle rolls into a ditch, lifts off the
ground or hits an obstacle in the road), or if
there is a risk of collision, the seat belts can be
50 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY
pulled taut by the seat belt tensioner's electric WARNING Resetting the electric seat belt
motor. tensioners*
Never attempt to alter or repair the seat
The electric seat belt tensioner helps to posi- belt on your own. Volvo recommends con- The electric seat belt tensioners are designed
tion the occupant more effectively in the seat, tacting an authorized Volvo workshop. to be reset automatically, but if the seat belt
which reduces the risk of the occupant strik- remains taut it can be reset manually.
If the seat belt has been exposed to
ing the interior of the passenger compartment extreme forces, e.g. in conjunction with a 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
and improves the effect of other safety sys- collision, the entire seat belt must be 2. Unbuckle the seat belt and then rebuckle
tems such as the airbags. replaced. Even if the seat belt appears it.
undamaged, some of its protective proper-
When a critical situation has passed, the seat ties may have been lost. Also replace the > The seat belt and the electric seat belt
belt and the electric seat belt tensioner are seat belt if it is worn or damaged. The new tensioner will be reset.
reset automatically. However, they can also be seat belt must be type approved and
reset manually. intended for the same seating position as WARNING
the replaced seat belt.
Never attempt to alter or repair the seat
CAUTION belt on your own. Volvo recommends con-
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the Related information tacting an authorized Volvo workshop.
passenger-side electric seat belt tensioner • Seat belts (p. 47)
If the seat belt has been exposed to
is also deactivated. • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 48) extreme forces, e.g. in conjunction with a
• Resetting the electric seat belt tensioners* collision, the entire seat belt must be
replaced. Even if the seat belt appears
(p. 51)
undamaged, some of its protective proper-
• Rear Collision Warning* (p. 363) ties may have been lost. Also replace the
seat belt if it is worn or damaged. The new
seat belt must be type approved and
intended for the same seating position as
the replaced seat belt.
Related information
• Seat belt tensioners (p. 50)
• Seat belts (p. 47)
SAFETY
Door and seat belt reminders As soon as the graphic is NOTE

This system is intended to remind occupants acknowledged, or after a
short period of time if the The child seat's integrated seat belt is not
to buckle their seat belts and to alert the
graphic is not acknowledged, covered by the seat belt reminder system.
driver if a door, hood or other opening (trunk,
sunroof, etc.) is open. it may switch to a smaller for-
mat and be shown at the top Reminders or information through graphics
Information in the instrument panel of the instrument panel are provided in different ways depending on
instead. the location of the seat belt.
Seat belt reminder The following is provided for the front seat:
• reminder when the driver or a passenger is
not using their seat belt while driving
• reminder when a seat belt is removed
while driving
• information on which seat belts are being
used or not used.
The following is provided for the rear seat:
• reminder when a seat belt is removed
Graphic in the instrument panel. while driving
Graphics in the instrument panel show the • information on which seat belts are being
status of the seat belts, hood, trunk lid and Reminder light in overhead console. used or not used.
doors.
A seat belt reminder light illuminates in the Door, hood and tailgate reminders
Graphics in the instrument panel show the overhead console and a warning symbol is dis- If the hood, trunk lid or any door is not prop-
status of the seat belts, hood, tailgate and played in the instrument panel. erly closed, this will be indicated by a graphic
doors.
The type of visible reminder (steady or flash- in the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle safely
Confirm the graphic by briefly pressing the O ing) and audible reminder (different signals) and close the open door, hood, etc.
button on the right-side steering wheel key- provided depends on the speed of the vehicle If the hood, tailgate or any door is not properly
pad. as well as driving time and distance driven. closed, this will be indicated by a graphic in
the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle safely
and close the open door, hood, etc.
52
SAFETY
If the vehicle is moving at a speed Airbags WARNING

under approx. 10 km/h (6 mph), the The vehicle is equipped with a number of dif-
information symbol will illuminate in If your vehicle has become water-damaged
ferent airbags to help protect the driver and in any way (e.g., soaked floor mats/stand-
the instrument panel. passengers. ing water on the floor of the vehicle), do
If the vehicle is moving at a speed WARNING not attempt to start the engine. This may
above approx. 10 km/h (6 mph), the cause airbag deployment, which could
warning symbol will illuminate in the • If the airbag warning light stays on result in serious injury. Volvo recommends
after the engine has started or if it illu- towing the vehicle directly to an authorized
instrument panel.
minates while you are driving, have the Volvo workshop.
Related information vehicle inspected by a trained and Before attempting to tow the vehicle:
• Seat belts (p. 47) qualified Volvo service technician as
soon as possible. 1. Switch off the ignition for at least 10
• Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 48) minutes and disconnect the battery.
• Never attempt to alter or repair any of
the vehicle's safety systems yourself. 2. Follow the instructions for manually
Incorrectly performed repairs to any overriding the shiftlock system.
system could impair function and lead
to serious injury. All work on these sys- Deployed airbags
tems should be performed by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician. WARNING
If any of the airbags have deployed:
• Do not attempt to drive the vehicle.
Have it towed to an authorized work-
shop.
• If necessary, seek medical attention.
Related information
• Safety (p. 42)
• Driver/passenger side front airbags
(p. 54)
}}
53
SAFETY
• Near-side airbags (p. 65) Driver/passenger side front

• Inflatable curtain (p. 67) airbags
As a supplement to the seat belts, the vehicle
is equipped with driver and passenger side
front airbags.
54
SAFETY
NOTE The front airbag system

The front airbag system includes gas genera-
The sensors react differently depending on tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera-
the circumstances of the accident and tion sensors that activate the gas generators,
whether or not the seat belt is used. This causing the airbags to be inflated with nitro-
applies to all belt positions. gen gas.
There may therefore be accident situations As the movement of the seats' occupants
in which only one (or none) of the airbags compresses the airbags, some of the gas is
are deployed. The sensors monitor the expelled at a controlled rate to provide better
impact of the collision and react accord- cushioning. The belt tensioners minimize slack
ingly to deploy one, several or no airbags. in the seat belts and are activated for occu-
pants wearing their seat belts. The entire proc-
Driver/passenger side front airbags.
ess, from inflation to deflation of the airbag,
WARNING
In a frontal collision, the airbags help protect occurs within tenths of a second.
the driver's and passenger's head, neck, face The seat belt and the airbag work together.
If the seat belt is not used or is used incor- The location of the front airbags is indicated
and chest and the driver's knees and legs.
rectly, the airbag may not provide the by the AIRBAG marking on the steering wheel
A collision of a sufficiently violent force will intended protection in a collision. pad and above the glove compartment, and by
trigger the sensors and one or more airbags To help prevent injury in the event the air- decals on both sun visors and on the front and
will inflate. The airbag helps cushion the initial bag is deployed, passengers should sit as far right side of the dashboard.
impact of the collision for the passenger. The upright as possible, with their feet on the The driver's side front airbag is folded and
airbag deflates when compressed by the colli- floor and their backs against the seat back-
rest. located in the steering wheel hub.
sion. A small amount of powder will also be
released from the airbag. This may appear to The knee airbag is folded on the underside of
be smoke and is normal. The entire process, the dashboard on the driver's side. AIRBAG is
WARNING embossed on the panel.
from inflation to deflation of the airbag, occurs
within tenths of a second. Volvo recommends contacting an author-
ized Volvo workshop for repairs. Incorrectly The passenger's side front airbag is folded
performed repairs to the airbag system behind a panel located above the glove com-
could impair function and lead to serious partment.
injury.
}}
55
SAFETY
|| WARNING deploy in certain non-frontal collisions NOTE

where rapid deceleration occurs.
• The airbags in the vehicle are designed • The front airbags and seat belt tension-
to be a SUPPLEMENT to-not a • The airbag system's sensors, which trigger
ers may be activated in a collision. The
the front airbags, are designed to deter-
replacement for-the three-point seat airbags are only activated one time
mine if the collision is powerful enough to
belts. For maximum protection, wear during an accident. Some noise occurs
activate the belt tensioners and/or the air-
seat belts at all times. Be aware that no and a small amount of powder is
bags.
system can prevent all possible injuries released. The release of the powder
that may occur in an accident. However, not all frontal collisions activate the may appear as smoke-like matter. This
front airbags. is a normal characteristic and does not
• Never drive with your hands on the
steering wheel pad/airbag housing. • If the collision involves a nonrigid object indicate fire.
• The front airbags are designed to help (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed • Volvo's front airbags use special sen-
prevent serious injury. Deployment object at a low speed, the front airbags sors that are integrated with the front
occurs very quickly and with considera- will not necessarily deploy. seat buckles. The point at which the
ble force. During normal deployment • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a airbag deploys is determined by
and depending on variables such as side impact collision, in a collision from whether or not the seat belt is being
seating position, one may experience the rear or in a rollover situation. used, as well as the severity of the col-
abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other lision.
• The amount of damage to the bodywork
injuries as a result of deployment of does not reliably indicate if the airbags • Collisions can occur where only one of
one or both of the airbags. should have deployed or not. the airbags deploys. If the impact is
• When installing any accessory equip- less severe, but severe enough to pres-
ment, make sure that the front airbag ent a clear injury risk, the airbags are
system is not damaged. Any interfer- triggered at partial capacity. If the
ence in the system could cause mal- impact is more severe, the airbags are
function. triggered at full capacity.
Front airbag deployment

• The front airbags are designed to deploy
during certain frontal or front-angular colli-
sions, impacts, or decelerations, depend-
ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and
object impacted. The airbags may also
56
SAFETY
WARNING Should you have questions about any compo- Airbag decals
nent in the SRS system, please contact a
• Do not use child safety seats or child trained and qualified Volvo service technician
booster cushions/backrests in the front or Volvo customer support:
passenger's seat. Volvo follows
NHTSA's recommendations and rec- In the United States
ommends that ALL children up to and Volvo Car USA, LLC
including 12 years of age sit in the rear
Customer Care Center
seat. This is very strongly recom-
mended for children in rear-facing child 1800 Volvo Place
seats. See also the Occupant Weight
Mahwah, New Jersey 07430
Sensor information.
1-800-458-1552
• Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front www.volvocars.com/us Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors.
passenger's seat. Volvo follows
In Canada
NHTSA's recommendations and rec-
ommends that ALL children up to and Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
including 12 years of age sit in the rear Customer Care Centre
seat. This is very strongly recom-
mended for children in rear-facing child 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
seats. See also the Occupant Classifi- Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
cation System information.
1-800-663-8255
• Never drive with the airbags deployed.
The fact that they hang out can impair www.volvocars.com/ca
the steering of your vehicle. Other
safety systems can also be damaged.
• The smoke and dust formed when the Passenger's side airbag decal.
airbags are deployed can cause skin
and eye irritation in the event of pro-
longed exposure.
}}
57
SAFETY
|| WARNING WARNING Occupant Classification System

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
• Children must never be allowed in the • No objects or accessory equipment,
designed to meet the regulatory require-
front passenger's seat. e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed
ments of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
• Occupants in the front passenger's on, attached to, or installed near the air
Standard (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to
seat must never sit on the edge of the bag cover (the area above the glove
disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side
seat, sit leaning toward the instrument compartment) or the area affected by
front airbag under certain conditions.
panel or otherwise sit out of position. airbag deployment.
• The occupant's back must be as • There should be no loose articles, such

upright as comfort allows and be as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or
against the seat back with the seat belt dashboard area.
properly fastened. • Never try to open the airbag cover on
• Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on the steering wheel or the passenger's
the dash, seat or out of the window. side dashboard. This should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
• Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle's occu-
pants.
OCS indicator light.
Related information The front passenger-side airbag is either ena-

• Airbags (p. 53) bled or disabled depending on the classifica-
tion of the passenger in the front passenger
• Occupant Classification System (p. 58) seat.
• Occupant weight sensor (p. 62)
Volvo follows NHTSA's recommendations and
recommends that ALL children up to and
including 12 years of age sit in the rear seat
and are restrained in a suitable manner appro-
priate to their height and weight. This is
strongly recommended for children in rear-fac-
ing child seats.
58
SAFETY
Classifica- OCS indica- Passeng- Occupant Classification System If a malfunction is detected in the
tion of pas- tor light sta- er's side function system, the OCS indicator light will
sengers in tus front air- OCS works in combination with sensors in the remain illuminated and the SRS
front passenger seat. The sensors are warning symbol will be shown in the
front pas- bag status
intended to detect the presence, and classifi- instrument panel along with a text message.
senger seat
cation of, an occupant sitting correctly and
The passen- OCS indica- Enabled determine whether the front passenger airbag WARNING
ger is classi- tor light is should be enabled (able to be deployed) or If a fault in the system is detected and indi-
fied as an not lit. disabled (cannot be deployed). cated as described, be aware that the pas-
adult. senger's side front airbag will not deploy in
The OCS uses an indicator light with the text
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF, which will illu- the event of a collision. If this occurs, have
The passen- The OCS Enabled or the airbag system and Occupant Classifi-
ger is classi- indicator disabled minate and stay on to remind you that the cation System checked by a workshop as
fied as a light is lit or depending passenger's side front airbag is disabled. The soon as possible. Volvo recommends con-
small child in not lit on several PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light is tacting an authorized Volvo workshop.
a front-facing depending parameters located in the overhead console near the
child seat. on several that deter- bracket for the rearview mirror.
Classification of adult
parameters mine the Always pay attention that the status of the To help ensure accurate classification when a
that deter- most suita- indicator light shows the correct classification person of adult size is sitting in the front pas-
mine the ble status. both before and while driving when the front senger seat, the passenger must:
most suitable passenger seat is occupied.
status. • be wearing their seat belt
The passen- OCS indica- Disabled NOTE • sit normally in the seat, in the center of the
seat cushion
ger is classi- tor light is lit. When the ignition is switched on, the OCS
fied as a indicator light will illuminate for several
• sit upright in the seat with their shoulders
small child in against the backrest
seconds while the system performs a self-
a rear-facing diagnostic test. The indicator light will then • have their legs comfortably extended with
child seat. go out or remain illuminated, depending on their feet on the floor.
The passen- OCS indica- Disabled the classification of the passenger in the
ger seat is tor light is lit. front passenger seat.
empty.
}}
59
SAFETY
|| or center console, by pushing their feet

against the floor or by pushing against the
backrest.
• The passenger must never sit on the side
of the seat cushion, slide forward on the
seat cushion or fold the backrest to a lying
position.
• The passenger must never wear wet or
thick clothing, e.g. ski wear or padded gar-
ments.
• Never place any objects between the pas-
Correct seating position. Example of incorrect seating position – the passen- senger and the seat cushion, e.g. pillows,
ger must be seated with their feet on the floor. heating blankets or ordinary blankets, seat
liners or mats.
• Never place a radio transmitter (e.g. hunt-
ing radio or walkie-talkie) or device that is
being charged (e.g. cellular phone, tablet
or computer) on or under the seat cushion.
Never let anyone sitting on the passenger
seat use a radio transmitter or device that
is being charged.
WARNING
Failure to follow the above instructions
Example of incorrect seating position – the passen- could adversely affect the Occupant Classi-
ger must not have slid forward on the seat cushion. Example of incorrect seating position – the passen- fication System functions and result in
ger must not fold the backrest to a lying position. death or serious injury.
Remember the following when an adult sits in
the front passenger seat: If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger's seat, but the OCS indicator lamp
• The passenger must never get up from the
seat cushion using the armrest in the door
60
SAFETY
is on, it is possible that the person isn't sitting Remember the following if a child in a child example by altering or adapting the driver's or
properly in the seat. seat sits in the front passenger seat: front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys-
tems, please contact Volvo at:
If this occurs, turn off the vehicle and ask the • Never place any items or accessories on
person to follow the above instructions for the passenger seat, between the child In the United States
accurate classification. Restart the vehicle and seat and the seat cushion or near to the
Volvo Car USA, LLC
have the person remain in this position for seat cushion.
about two minutes. This will allow the system Customer Care Center
• Never place a radio transmitter (e.g. hunt-
to detect that person and enable the passeng- ing radio or walkie-talkie) or device that is 1800 Volvo Place
er's frontal airbag. being charged (e.g. cellular phone, tablet
Mahwah, New Jersey 07430
If the OCS indicator lamp remains on even or computer) on the seat cushion. Never
after this, the person should be advised to ride let anyone sitting on the passenger seat 1-800-458-1552
in the rear seat. use a radio transmitter or device that is In Canada
being charged.
This may indicate restrictions in the OCS clas- Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
sification ability, e.g. that the person is too • Never place wet clothing or fluids on the
light to be classified as an adult. It does not passenger seat. Customer Care Centre
need to indicate an OCS error. • Always correctly position the child seat so 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
that the entire lower section of the child
Classification of child Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
seat rests against the seat cushion.
Volvo follows NHTSA's recommendations and 1-800-663-8255
recommends that ALL children up to and • Always place a front-facing child seat as
far back as possible against the seat back.
including 12 years of age sit in the rear seat.
WARNING
This is strongly recommended for children in
rear-facing child seats. WARNING Never attempt to open, remove or repair
any components in the OCS system. Volvo
If a child in a child restraint is placed in the Failure to follow the above instructions recommends contacting an authorized
front passenger seat, the child restraint must could adversely affect the Occupant Classi- Volvo workshop. Incorrectly performed
fication System functions and result in repairs to the OCS system could impair
be installed according to the manufacturer's death or serious injury.
instructions to help ensure accurate classifica- function and lead to serious injury.
tion. The front passenger's seat should not be
Modifications modified in any way. This could affect the
If you are considering modifying your vehicle function of the OCS system.
in any way to accommodate a disability, for
}}
61
SAFETY
|| Related information Occupant weight sensor sensors are designed to detect the presence
• Driver/passenger side front airbags (p. 54) The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is of a properly seated occupant and determine if
designed to meet the regulatory require- the passenger's side front airbag should be
ments of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not
Standard (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to inflate).
disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-
front airbag under certain conditions. senger's side front airbag when:
• the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,
or has small/medium objects in the front
seat,
• the system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat that is
installed according to the manufacturer's
instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint
that is installed according to the manufac-
turer's instructions,
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light
• the system determines that a small child is
Disabling the passenger's side front present in a booster seat,
airbag • a child or a small person occupies the
Volvo follows NHTSA's recommendations and front passenger's seat.
recommends that ALL children up to and The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
including 12 years of age sit in the rear seat indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay
and are restrained in a suitable manner appro- on to remind you that the passenger's side
priate to their height and weight. This is front airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER
strongly recommended for children in rear-fac- AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the
ing child seats. overhead console, near the base of the rear-
The OWS works with sensors that are part of view mirror.
the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The
62
SAFETY
NOTE WARNING Passeng- OWS indi- Passenger's

er's seat cator light side front
When the ignition is switched on, the • Never try to open, remove or repair any
OWS indicator light will illuminate for sev- components in the OWS system. This occupancy status airbag sta-
eral seconds while the system performs a could cause the system to malfunction. status tus
self-diagnostic test. Maintenance or repairs should only be Seat unoccu- OWS indi- Passenger's
carried out by an a trained and qualified pied cator light side front air-
However, if a fault is detected in the system: Volvo service technician. lights up bag disabled
• The OWS indicator light will stay on
• The front passenger's seat should not
be modified in any way. This could Seat occu- OWS indi- Passenger's
• The SRS warning light will come on and reduce pressure on the seat cushion, pied by low cator light side front air-
stay on and a text message will be dis- which might interfere with the OWS weight occu- lights up bag disabled
played. system's function. pant/objectA
Seat occu- OWS indi- Passenger's
WARNING pied by cator light side front air-
If a fault in the system is detected and indi- heavy occu- is not lit bag enabled
cated as described, be aware that the pas- pant/object
senger's side front airbag will not deploy in
the event of a collision. In this case, the A Volvo recommends that children always be properly
restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats.
SRS system and Occupant Weight Sensor Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is dis-
should be inspected by a trained and quali- abled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If
fied Volvo service technician as soon as there is any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side
possible. front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat.
The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)

the passenger's side front airbag in the event
of a collision anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the
front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIR-
BAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and
remain off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR-
}}
63
SAFETY
|| BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible 1800 Volvo Place WARNING
that the person isn't sitting properly in the
Mahwah, New Jersey 07430 • No objects that add to the total weight
seat. If this happens:
1-800-458-1552 on the seat should be placed on the
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to front passenger's seat. If a child is
place the backrest in an upright position. In Canada
seated in the front passenger's seat
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, Volvo Car Canada Ltd. with any additional weight, this extra
centered on the seat cushion, with the weight could cause the OWS system
Customer Care Centre
person's legs comfortably extended. to enable the airbag, which might
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 cause it to deploy in the event of a col-
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 lision, thereby injuring the child.
minutes. This will allow the system to
1-800-663-8255 • The seat belt should never be wrapped
detect that person and enable the pas- around an object on the front passeng-
senger's frontal airbag. er's seat. This could interfere with the
• If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- OWS system's function.
tor lamp remains on even after this, the • The front passenger's seat belt should
person should be advised to ride in the never be used in a way that exerts
rear seat. more pressure on the passenger than
This indicates limitations in OWS classifica- normal. This could increase the pres-
tion capability. It does not indicate OWS mal- sure exerted on the weight sensor by a
function. child, and could result in the airbag
being enabled, which might cause it to
Modifications deploy in the event of a collision,
If you are considering modifying your vehicle thereby injuring the child.
in any way to accommodate a disability, for
example by altering or adapting the driver's or
front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys-
tems, please contact Volvo at:
In the United States
Volvo Car USA, LLC
Customer Care Center
64
SAFETY
WARNING WARNING Near-side airbags

The near-side airbags on the driver's and pas-
• Keep the following points in mind with • Do not place any type of object on the
senger sides protect the chest and hips in a
respect to the OWS system. Failure to front passenger's seat in such a way
collision.
follow these instructions could that jamming, pressing, or squeezing
adversely affect the system's function occurs between the object and the
and result in serious injury to the occu- front seat, other than as a direct result
pant of the front passenger's seat. of the correct use of the Automatic
• The full weight of the front seat pas- Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
senger should always be on the seat Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt.
cushion. The passenger should never • No objects should be placed under the
lift him/herself off the seat cushion front passenger's seat. This could inter-
using the armrest in the door or the fere with the OWS system's function.
center console, by pressing the feet on
the floor, by sitting on the edge of the Related information
seat cushion, or by pressing against
the backrest in a way that reduces
• Driver/passenger side front airbags (p. 54)
pressure on the seat cushion. This The near-side airbags are located in the front
could cause OWS to disable the front, seats' outer backrest frames and help protect
passenger's side airbag. the driver and front-seat passenger.
A collision of a sufficiently violent force will
trigger the sensors and the near-side airbag
will inflate. The side airbags inflate between
the seat occupant and the door panel to help
cushion the initial impact of the collision. The
airbag deflates when compressed by the colli-
sion. The near-side airbag normally only
inflates on the side of the vehicle impacted by
the collision.
}}
65
SAFETY
|| WARNING Far-side airbags WARNING

The far-side airbags on the driver's and pas-
Volvo recommends contacting an author- Volvo recommends contacting an author-
ized Volvo workshop for repairs. Incorrectly senger sides protect the head, chest and hips ized Volvo workshop for repairs. Incorrectly
performed repairs to the side airbag sys- in a collision. performed repairs to the side airbag sys-
tem could impair function and lead to seri- tem could impair function and lead to seri-
ous injury. ous injury.
WARNING WARNING
Do not place any objects in the area Do not place any objects in the area
between the outer edges of the seats and between the inner edges of the seats and
the door panels, as this could impair the the tunnel console, as this could impair the
function of the side airbags. function of the side airbags.
Volvo recommends only using seat covers Volvo recommends only using seat covers
approved by Volvo. Other seat covers could approved by Volvo. Other seat covers could
prevent the side airbags from functioning prevent the side airbags from functioning
properly. properly.
The far-side airbags are located in the front
seats' inner backrest frames and help protect
WARNING the driver and front-seat passenger. AIRBAG WARNING
The side airbag is a supplement to the seat is embossed on the seat. The side airbag is a supplement to the seat
belt. Always wear your seat belt. belt. Always wear your seat belt.
trigger the sensors and the far-side airbag will
Related information inflate. The side airbags inflate between the Related information
• Airbags (p. 53) seat occupant and the tunnel console to help • Airbags (p. 53)
cushion the initial impact of the collision. The
far-side airbag normally only inflates for the
seat on the opposite side of the impact side.
66
SAFETY
Inflatable curtain
The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC),
helps to prevent the driver and passengers
from striking their heads on the inside of the
vehicle during a collision.
The inflatable curtains are installed along both

sides of the inside of the roof and help protect
occupants in the vehicle's outer seats. IC
AIRBAG is embossed on the panels.
trigger the sensors and the inflatable curtain
will inflate.
WARNING
Volvo recommends contacting an author-
ized Volvo workshop for repair. Incorrectly
performed repairs to the inflatable curtain
system could impair function and lead to
serious injury.
}}
67
SAFETY
|| WARNING Safety mode WARNING

Safety mode is a feature that is triggered
Never hang or attach heavy objects in the Never attempt to perform repairs or reset
handle in the ceiling bracket. The hooks are after a collision if there is potential damage to electrical components on your own after
only intended for lightweight garments (not an important function in the vehicle, such as the vehicle has been in safety mode. This
for hard objects such as umbrellas). the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety could result in injury or prevent the vehicle
systems, the brake system, etc. from functioning properly. Volvo recom-
Never screw or mount anything to the vehi-
mends having the vehicle inspected and
cle's headliner, door pillars or side panels. Safety mode is a feature that is triggered reset to normal operating status by an
This could impair the intended protective after a collision if there is potential damage to authorized Volvo workshop after Safety
properties. Volvo recommends only using an important function in the vehicle, such as
Volvo original parts that are approved for mode See Owner's manual has been dis-
the high-voltage system, sensors for one of played.
placement in these areas.
the safety systems, the brake system, etc.
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision,
WARNING the text Safety mode See Owner's manual WARNING
If objects are loaded higher than the upper may appear in the instrument panel along with When the vehicle is in safety mode, it
edge of the side windows, leave a 10 cm the warning symbol if the panel is undamaged should not be towed behind another vehi-
(4 in.) space between the objects and the and the vehicle's electrical system is intact. cle. It should be towed from the site on a
window. Objects placed closer to this The message indicates that one or more of the tow truck. Volvo recommends towing the
could impede the function of the inflatable vehicle directly to an authorized Volvo
vehicle's functions may be reduced.
curtain concealed inside the headlining. workshop.
WARNING
Related information
WARNING Never attempt to restart the vehicle if you • Safety (p. 42)
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to smell fuel fumes when the message Safety
mode See Owner's manual is displayed • Starting and moving the vehicle when it is
the seat belt. Always wear your seat belt. in safety mode (p. 69)
in the instrument panel. Leave the vehicle
immediately. • Recovery (p. 525)
Related information
• Airbags (p. 53) • Recovery (p. 526)
If safety mode has been set, it may be possi-
ble to reset the system in order to start and
move the vehicle a short distance, for exam-
ple, if it is blocking traffic.
68
SAFETY
Starting and moving the vehicle 4. Then try to start the vehicle. 6. When Vehicle start System check, wait
when it is in safety mode > The vehicle's electrical system will per- is no longer displayed in the instrument
If safety mode has been set, it may be possi- form a system check and then attempt panel, try again to start the vehicle.
ble to reset the system in order to start and to reset to normal operating mode.
move the vehicle a short distance, for exam- CAUTION
ple, if it is blocking traffic. CAUTION If the message Safety mode See
Resetting and starting the vehicle If the message Safety mode See Owner's manual is still displayed, the
Owner's manual is still displayed, the vehicle should not be driven or towed
when it is in safety mode
vehicle should not be driven or towed behind another vehicle. If the vehicle needs
1. Check the vehicle for damage, particularly
behind another vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be moved, it must be towed on a tow
for fuel leakage. Make sure you do not
to be moved, it must be towed on a tow truck. Even if no damage is apparent, there
detect any gasoline fumes.
truck. Even if no damage is apparent, there may be hidden damage that could make
If the damage to the vehicle is minor and may be hidden damage that could make the vehicle impossible to control.
there is no fuel leakage/fumes, you may the vehicle impossible to control.
attempt to start the engine.
5. Then try to start the vehicle. Moving the vehicle when it is in safety
WARNING mode
> The vehicle's electrical system will per-
Never attempt to restart the vehicle if you form a system check and then attempt 1. If the message The car is now in normal
smell fuel fumes when the message Safety to reset to normal operating mode. The mode is displayed after attempting to
mode See Owner's manual is displayed start the vehicle, the vehicle may be
in the instrument panel. Leave the vehicle message Vehicle start System check,
wait will be displayed on the instru- moved carefully from its present position
immediately. if, for example, it is blocking traffic.
ment panel during the check. This may
take up to a minute. 2. Do not move the vehicle farther than abso-
2. Check the vehicle for damage.
lutely necessary.
If the damage is minor, you may attempt
to start the vehicle.
3. Switch off the vehicle manually.
}}
69
SAFETY
|| WARNING Child safety ejected from the vehicle during a sudden

Children should always be seated safely maneuver or impact. The same can also hap-
When the vehicle is in safety mode, it pen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on
should not be towed behind another vehi- when traveling in the vehicle.
the seat. Other occupants should also be
cle. It should be towed from the site on a
tow truck. Volvo recommends towing the General information properly restrained to help reduce the chance
vehicle directly to an authorized Volvo Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint of injuring or increasing the injury of a child.
workshop. systems for all occupants including children.
All states and provinces have legislation gov-
Remember that, regardless of age and size, a
erning how and where children should be car-
child should always be properly restrained in a
Related information ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist-
vehicle.
• Safety mode (p. 68) ing in your state or province. Recent accident
Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ statistics have shown that children are safer in
• Starting the vehicle (p. 442)
LATCH attachments, which make it more con- rear seating positions than front seating posi-
• Starting the vehicle (p. 443) venient to install child seats. tions when properly restrained. A child
• Recovery (p. 525)
Some restraint systems for children are
restraint system can help protect a child in a
• Recovery (p. 526) vehicle. Here's what to look for when selecting
designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap
a child restraint system:
belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
Such child restraint systems can help protect It should have a label certifying that it meets
children in vehicles in the event of an accident applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
only if they are used properly. However, chil- Standards (FMVSS 213) - or in Canada,
dren could be endangered in a crash if the CMVSS 213.
child restraints are not properly secured in the
Make sure the child restraint system is
vehicle. Failure to follow the installation
approved for the child's height, weight and
instructions for your child restraint can result
development - the label required by the stand-
in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a
ard or regulation, or instructions for infant
sudden stop.
restraints, typically provide this information.
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable
In using any child restraint system, we urge
substitute for a child restraint system. In an
you to carefully look over the instructions that
accident, a child held in a person's arms can
are provided with the restraint. Be sure you
be crushed between the vehicle's interior and
understand them and can use the device prop-
an unrestrained person. The child could also
erly and safely in this vehicle. A misused child
be injured by striking the interior, or by being
restraint system can result in increased inju-
70
SAFETY
ries for both the infant or child and other occu- WARNING Volvo's recommendations
pants in the vehicle. Why does Volvo believe that no child should
• Do not use child safety seats or child sit in the front seat of a vehicle? It's quite sim-
When a child has outgrown the child safety booster cushions/backrests in the front
seat, you should use the rear seat with the ple really. A front airbag is a very powerful
passenger's seat. Volvo follows device designed, by law, to help protect an
standard seat belt fastened. The best way to NHTSA's recommendations and rec-
help protect the child here is to place the child adult.
ommends that ALL children up to and
on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly including 12 years of age sit in the rear Because of the size of the airbag and its speed
located on the hips. Legislation in your state or seat. This is very strongly recom- of inflation, a child should never be placed in
province may mandate the use of a child seat mended for children in rear-facing child the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel-
or cushion in combination with the seat belt, seats. ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo
depending on the child's age and/or size. has been an innovator in the field of safety
Please check local regulations. • Sedan models: Keep vehicle doors and
since it was founded. And we have no inten-
trunk locked and keep remote controls
A specially designed and tested booster cush- tion of resting on our laurels. But we need
out of a child's reach. Unsupervised
ion and backrest can be obtained from your your help. Please remember to put your chil-
children could lock themselves in an
Volvo retailer. See also the article "Integrated dren in the back seat, and buckle them up.
open trunk and risk injury. Children
booster cushion." should be taught not to play in vehi-
cles. WARNING
• On hot days, the temperature in the A child restraint should never be reused if:
vehicle interior can rise very quickly. • The vehicle has been involved in a colli-
Exposure to these high temperatures sion, no matter how minor
for even a short period of time can
cause heat-related injury or death.
• Its history is unknown
Small children are particularly at risk. • It is older than the manufacturer's expi-
Never leave children unattended in a ration date
vehicle.
Child seats should always be registered with

the child seat manufacturer.
}}
71
SAFETY
|| Volvo has some very specific Child restraints

recommendations Suitable child restraints should always be
• Always wear your seat belt. used when children travel in the vehicle.
• Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
Child restraint systems
device which, when used with a three-
point seat belt can help reduce serious
injuries during certain types of accidents.
Volvo recommends that you do not dis-
connect the airbag system in your vehicle.
• Volvo strongly recommends that everyone
in the vehicle be properly restrained.
• Volvo follows NHTSA's recommendations Convertible seat
and recommends that ALL children up to
and including 12 years of age sit in the rear WARNING
seat. This is strongly recommended for
A child seat should never be used in the
children in rear-facing child seats.
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
• Drive safely! Infant seat front passenger airbag - not even if the
There are three main types of child restraint "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
CAUTION systems: infant seats, convertible seats and rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the
severity of an accident were to cause the
Information about how and where child booster cushions. They are classified accord-
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
restraints should be installed is provided in ing to the child's age and size. injury or death to a child seated in this
the Owner's Manual in the center display. The child restraint should be secured using a position.
The information is also available on three-point seat belt, ISOFIX/LATCH anchors
volvocars.com/intl/support. or top tether anchors.
Related information
• Safety (p. 42)
• Child restraints (p. 72)
• Activating and deactivating child locks
(p. 293)
72
SAFETY
WARNING NOTE
• When not in use, keep the child Use caution when installing child seats to
restraint system secured or remove it ensure that sharp edges or protruding
from the passenger compartment to parts on the child seat do not damage the
help prevent it from injuring passen- vehicle's interior.
gers in the event of a sudden stop or
Long-term installation and use of child
collision.
seats could damage the vehicle's interior.
• A small child's head represents a con- Volvo recommends using the kick guard
siderable part of its total weight and its accessory to help protect the vehicle's
neck is still very weak. Volvo recom- interior.
mends that children up to age 4 travel,
Booster cushion properly restrained, facing rearward. In
addition, Volvo recommends that chil-
Automatic Locking Retractor/
dren should ride rearward facing, prop- Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/
WARNING
erly restrained, as long as possible. ELR)
Always refer to the child restraint manufac- To make child seat installation easier, each
turer's instructions for detailed information seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-
on securing the restraint. NOTE ped with a locking mechanism to help keep
For child seats in which the child uses one the seat belt taut.
of the vehicle's integrated seat belts, read
the Owner's Manual's seat belt recommen-
dations.
}}
73
SAFETY
|| When attaching the seat belt to a child out and return the registration card that Infant seats
seat: comes with new child restraints. Suitable child restraints should always be
1. Position the child seat and secure it using Child restraint recall information is readily used when children (depending on their age/
the seat belt according to the manufactur- available in both the U.S. and Canada. For size) are seated in the vehicle.
er's instructions. recall information in the U.S., call the U.S.
Government's Auto Safety Hotline at
Securing an infant seat with a seat
2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.
1-800-424-9393 or go to https://www- belt
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/owners/
buckle (lock) in the usual way. SearchSafetyIssues. In Canada, visit Transport
4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut Canada's Child Safety website at https://
around the child seat. www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/child-car-seat
-safety.html.
A sound from the seat belt retractor will be
audible at this time and is normal. The belt will Related information
now be locked in place. This function is auto- • Child safety (p. 70)
matically disabled when the seat belt is
unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. • Infant seats (p. 74)
• Convertible seats (p. 77)
WARNING • Booster cushions (p. 79)
Do not use child safety seats or child • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 85) Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's
booster cushions/backrests in the front seat
passenger's seat. We also recommend that
• Top tether anchors (p. 80)
1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the
children who have outgrown these devices • Lower child seat attachment points vehicle.
sit in the rear seat with the seat belt prop- (p. 82)
erly fastened. 2. Secure the child seat for small children
• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 83)
using the seat belt according to the manu-
Child restraint registration and recalls facturer's instructions.
Child restraints could be recalled for safety
reasons. You must register your child restraint
to be reached in a recall. To stay informed
about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill
SAFETY
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag - not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the
injury or death to a child seated in this
position.
3.
Route the seat belt through the infant seat. Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt.
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
WARNING out as far as possible to activate the belt's
• An infant seat must be in the rear-facing automatic locking function.
position only.
• The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is
adequate space for safe installation.
Fasten the seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
}}
75
SAFETY
|| NOTE WARNING • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 83)
The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child
release when the seat belt is unbuckled restraint more than 2.5 cm (1 in.) in any
and allowed to retract fully. direction along the seat belt path.
5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the

seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound
from the seat belt retractor's automatic
locking function will be audible at this time
and is normal. The seat belt should now be
locked in place.
When installing infant seats in the rear seat, Volvo

recommends maintaining a distance of at least
50 mm (2 inches) from the front-most part of the
infant seat to the rearmost part of the seat in front.
The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling
the seat belt and letting it retract completely.
Check that the infant seat is properly secured. Related information

6. Press and pull the infant seat along the
direction of the seat belt to check that it is • Convertible seats (p. 77)
properly held in place by the seat belt. • Booster cushions (p. 79)
• Lower child seat attachment points
(p. 82)
76
SAFETY
Convertible seats WARNING

Suitable child restraints should always be
used when children (depending on their age/ • A small child's head represents a con-
siderable part of its total weight and its
size) are seated in the vehicle.
neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-
Securing a convertible seat with a seat mends that children up to age 4 travel,
belt properly restrained, facing rearward. In
addition, Volvo recommends that chil-
dren should ride rearward facing, prop-
erly restrained, as long as possible.
• Convertible child seats should be instal-
led in the rear seat only.
Route the seat belt through the convertible seat. • A rear-facing convertible seat should not
be positioned behind the driver's seat
WARNING unless there is adequate space for safe
Always use a convertible seat that is suita- installation.
ble for the child's age and size. See the
convertible seat manufacturer's recom- 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat
mendations. according to the child restraint manufac-
Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas-
senger's seat.
turer's instructions.
1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat
Convertible seats can be used in either a for- of the vehicle.
ward or rearward-facing position, depending
on the age and size of the child.
}}
77
SAFETY
|| NOTE WARNING
The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child
release when the seat belt is unbuckled restraint more than 2.5 cm (1 in.) in any
and allowed to retract fully. direction along the seat belt path.
5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, The convertible seat can be removed by
let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract
sound from the seat belt retractor's auto- completely.
matic locking function will be audible at
this time and is normal. The seat belt
should now be locked in place.
Fasten the seat belt.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the belt's
automatic locking function.
Ensure that the convertible seat is securely in place.
WARNING
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt. A child seat should never be used in the
6. Push and pull the convertible seat along front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag - not even if the
the seat belt path to ensure that it is held
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
securely in place by the seat belt. rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the
injury or death to a child seated in this
position.
78
SAFETY
Related information Booster cushions 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
• Child restraints (p. 72) Suitable child restraints should always be plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
used when children (depending on their age/ click is audible.
• Infant seats (p. 74)
size) are seated in the vehicle.
• Booster cushions (p. 79)
• Top tether anchors (p. 80) Securing a booster cushion
(p. 82)
Positioning the seat belt.

4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and
Position the child correctly on the booster cushion. fits snugly around the child.
Booster cushions are recommended for chil-
dren who have outgrown convertible seats. WARNING
1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat • The hip section of the three-point seat
of the vehicle. belt must fit snugly across the child's
hips, not across the stomach.
2. With the child properly seated on the
booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or
• The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across
around the cushion according to the man-
the chest and shoulder.
ufacturer's instructions.
• The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the
arm.
}}
79
SAFETY
|| Related information Top tether anchors backrests. There is no symbol for the center anchor
position.
• Child restraints (p. 72) Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint
• Convertible seats (p. 77) top tether anchorages for all three seating
positions in the rear seat. They are located on
• Infant seats (p. 74)
the rear side of the backrests.
Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint
• Lower child seat attachment points top tether anchors for all seating positions in
(p. 82) the second row of seats. In vehicles with six
• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 83) seats, there is a child restraint top tether
anchor on the right-side seat in the third row
of seats. They are located on the rear side of
the backrests.
Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint
top tether anchorages for all three seating Six-seat models: Top tether anchors and symbols on
positions in the rear seat. They are located on the rear side of the second row backrests.
the rear parcel shelf.
Child restraint anchorages
Six-seat models: Top tether anchor and symbol on

the rear side of the third row backrests.
Five-seat and seven-seat models: Top tether anchors

and symbols on the rear side of the second row
80
SAFETY
Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's

instructions for information on securing the
child seat.
NOTE
If the vehicle is equipped with a cargo
compartment cover, this must be removed
before a child seat can be attached in the
tether anchors.
The parcel shelf must be removed before a
child seat can be attached in the tether
Top tether anchors and symbols on the rear parcel Top tether anchors and symbols on the rear side of anchors.
shelf. the rear seat backrests.
Securing a child seat
WARNING
1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.
• Always refer to the recommendations
2. Route the top tether strap under the head made by the child restraint manufac-
restraint and attach it to the anchor. turer.
3. Attach the strap for the lower tether • Volvo recommends that the top tether
anchors in the lower ISOFIX/LATCH anchors be used when installing a for-
attachment points. If the child restraint is ward-facing child restraint with upper
not equipped with straps for the lower tether straps.
tether anchors, or if the child restraint is
used on the center seating position, follow
• Never route a top tether strap over the
top of the head restraint. The strap
the instructions for attaching a child
should be routed beneath the head
Top tether anchors and symbols on the rear side of restraint using the automatic locking seat
restraint.
the rear seat backrests. belt.
• Child restraint anchorages are
4. Firmly tension all straps. designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts or
}}
81
SAFETY
|| harnesses. The anchorages are not able Lower child seat attachment points
to withstand excessive forces on them The rear seats are equipped with lower child
in the event of collision if full harness seat attachment points.
seat belts or adult seat belts are instal-
led to them. An adult who uses a belt The vehicle is equipped with lower child
anchored in a child restraint anchorage restraint attachment points in the second row
runs a great risk of suffering severe of seats.
injuries should a collision occur. The lower child seat attachment points are
intended for use with certain rear-facing child
• Do not install rear speakers that require restraints.
the removal of the top tether anchors
or interfere with the proper use of the Always follow the manufacturer's installation
top tether strap. instructions when attaching a child seat to the
lower child seat attachment points.
Related information Location of child seat attachment
• Child restraints (p. 72) points
(p. 82)
Location of the child seat attachment points in the

second row of seats.
Location of child seat attachment points in the rear
seat.
The child seat attachment points in the sec-
ond row of seats are located on the rear sec-
tion of the front seat floor rails.
82
SAFETY
The child seat attachment points in the rear ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
seat are located on the rear section of the Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped
front seat floor rails. child seats are located in the second row,
outboard seats, hidden below the backrest
NOTE cushions.
Never store loose items around the sup- The lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equip-
port legs of a child seat. Make sure that the ped child seats are located in the rear outer
child seat's loose parts (straps, for exam- seats, behind covers in the lower section of
ple) are secured in accordance with the the backrest.
child seat's installation instructions.
Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child
seat anchors
Related information Location of the ISOFIX/LATCH anchors
Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the
• Top tether anchors (p. 80) ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as shown. To
• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 83) access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion
and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow
your child seat manufacturer's installation
instructions, and use both ISOFIX/LATCH
lower anchors and top tethers whenever pos-
sible.
Symbols on the covers mark the ISOFIX/
LATCH anchor positions, as shown in the illus-
tration. The anchors are located behind covers
Location of the ISOFIX/LATCH anchors between the backrest and the seat cushion.
Always follow your child seat manufacturer's
installation instructions, and use both ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors and top tethers when-
ever possible.
}}
83
SAFETY
|| To access the anchors NOTE WARNING

1. Put the child restraint in position.
• The rear center seat is not equipped • Be sure to fasten the attachment cor-
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down with ISOFIX/LATCH lower tether rectly to the anchor (see the illustra-
the seat cushion and locate the anchors anchors. If a child restraint is used in tion). If the attachment is not correctly
by feel. this seat, attach the restraint's upper fastened, the child restraint may not be
3. Open the covers to access the anchors. anchor strap (if equipped with these) properly secured in the event of a colli-
to the top tether anchor point for this sion.
4. Fasten the attachment on the child strap and secure the child restraint
restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ • The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child
with the vehicle's center seat belt. restraint anchors are only intended for
LATCH lower anchors.
• Always follow your child seat manufac- use with child seats positioned in the
5. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps turer's installation instructions, and use outboard seating positions. These
according to the manufacturer's instruc- both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors anchors are not certified for use with
tions. and top tethers whenever possible. any child restraint that is positioned in
the center seating position. When
securing a child restraint in the center
WARNING
seating position, use only the vehicle's
Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to center seat belt.
FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer
to the child restraint system's manual for
weight and size ratings. Related information
Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/

LATCH lower anchors
84
SAFETY
Integrated booster cushion*2 seat belts. The integrated booster cushion in

The integrated booster cushion in the second the rear seat can be folded up to two posi-
tions, depending on the child's height.
row3 center seating position helps ensure
that a child can sit comfortably and safely. If using a booster cushion does not result in
proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then
The integrated booster cushions in the rear
the child should be placed in a properly
seat's outboard seating positions help ensure
secured child restraint. The shoulder belt must
that children can sit comfortably and safely.
never be placed behind the child's back or
The integrated booster cushion has been spe-
under the arm.
cially designed to help safeguard children in
the rear seat when used with the vehicle's
seat belts.
If using a booster cushion does not result in Correct seating position: the seat belt is positioned
proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then across the collarbone.
the child should be placed in a properly Before driving, make sure that:
secured child restraint. The shoulder belt must
never be placed behind the child's back or
• the booster cushion is raised to the cor-
rect position for the child's weight
under the arm.
• the booster cushion is locked into position
Only used for children in the weight range
15-36 kg (33-80 lbs) and height range • the head restraint is set to the same
97-137 cm (38-54 inches). height as the child's head, so that, if possi-
ble, the entire back of the child's head is
In Canada: 18 kg (40 lbs) is the minimum Correct seating position: the seat belt is positioned covered
weight requirement for a child using booster across the collarbone.
cushions according to the Canadian regulation • the seat belt is taut, in contact with the
child's body and not twisted
CMVSS 213.4
The integrated booster cushion has been spe-

cially designed to help safeguard children in
the rear seat when used with the vehicle's
2 Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.

}}
SAFETY
|| • the seat belt is not positioned across the WARNING replaced if it is badly worn or damaged
child's throat or below the shoulder in any way. This work should be per-
• the lap section of the seat belt is placed
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can formed by a trained and qualified Volvo
low over the child's hips to provide the occur service technician only.
best protection. • Follow all instructions on this
US models child restraint and in the vehi- Related information
cle's owner's manual. • Child restraints (p. 72)
Stage 1 Stage 2
• Folding up the integrated booster cush-
Weight 50 - 80 lbs 33 - 55 lbs • Make sure the booster cushion ion* (p. 87)
is securely locked before the • Folding down the integrated booster
22 - 36 kg 15 - 25 kg
child is seated. cushion* (p. 89)
Length 45 - 55 in. 37 - 47 in.
• Only use for children who weigh
115 - 140 cm 95 - 120 cm between 15-36 kg (33-80 lbs) and
who are between 97-137 cm
Canadian models (38-54 tum) in height. In Canada: 18
kg (40 lbs) is the minimum weight
Stage 1 Stage 2 requirement for a child using booster
Weight 22 - 36 kg 18 - 25 kg cushions according to the Canadian
regulation CMVSS 213.4
50 - 80 lbs 40 - 55 lbs
• Use this booster cushion only with chil-
Length 115 - 140 cm 102 - 120 cm dren whose height and weight are
within the permitted limits shown in
45 - 55 in. 40 - 47 in. the table.
18 kg (40 lbs) is the minimum weight require- • Use only the vehicle's lap and shoulder
belt system when restraining the child
ment for a child using booster seats according
in this booster cushion.
to the Canadian regulation CMVSS 213.4.
• In the event of a collision while the
integrated booster cushion was occu-
pied, the entire booster cushion and
seat belt must be replaced. The
booster cushion should also be
SAFETY
Folding up the integrated booster

cushion*
When the integrated booster cushion is used,
it must be folded up.
Press the booster cushion rearward to Press the booster cushion rearward to
lock it into position. lock it into position.
Lower position: Upper position (from the lower position):
Pull the handle forward and upward to

release the booster cushion.
Pull the handle forward and upward to Press the button to release the booster
release the booster cushion. cushion.
}}
SAFETY
|| WARNING booster cushion should also be

replaced if it is badly worn or damaged
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can in any way. This work should be per-
occur formed by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician only.
• Follow all instructions on this
child restraint and in the vehi-
cle's owner's manual. NOTE
• Make sure the booster cushion The integrated booster cushion cannot be
moved directly from the upper position to
is securely locked before the the lower position. From the upper posi-
child is seated. tion, the booster cushion must first be
• Only use for children who weigh folded down completely into the rear seat
Lift the front edge of the booster cushion and then raised to the lower position.
between 15-36 kg (33-80 lbs) and
and press it rearward toward the backrest
to lock it into position.
(38-54 tum) in height. In Canada: 18 Related information
kg (40 lbs) is the minimum weight • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 85)
requirement for a child using booster
cushions according to the Canadian • Folding down the integrated booster
regulation CMVSS 213.4 cushion* (p. 89)

dren whose height and weight are
the table.
• Use only the vehicle's lap and shoulder
SAFETY
Folding down the integrated

booster cushion*
When the integrated booster cushion in the
rear seat is not in use, it should be stowed
(folded down).
NOTE
The integrated booster cushion cannot be
moved directly from the upper position to
the lower position. From the upper posi-
tion, the booster cushion must first be
folded down completely into the rear seat
and then raised to the lower position.
Press down on the center of the booster Press down on the center of the booster
cushion to lock it into position. cushion to lock it into position.
CAUTION
Make sure that there are no objects (e.g.
toys) on the seat under the integrated
booster cushion before folding it down.
NOTE
The integrated booster cushion must be
stowed (folded down) before folding down
the seat backrest.
Pull the handle forward to release the
booster cushion. Pull the handle forward to release the
booster cushion.
}}
SAFETY
|| WARNING replaced if it is badly worn or damaged

in any way. This work should be per-
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can formed by a trained and qualified Volvo
occur service technician only.
• Follow all instructions on this
child restraint and in the vehi- Related information
cle's owner's manual. • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 85)
• Folding up the integrated booster cush-
• Make sure the booster cushion ion* (p. 87)
is securely locked before the
child is seated.
• Only use for children who weigh
between 15-36 kg (33-80 lbs) and
(38-54 tum) in height. In Canada: 18
kg (40 lbs) is the minimum weight
requirement for a child using booster
cushions according to the Canadian
regulation CMVSS 213.4
dren whose height and weight are
the table.
• Use only the vehicle's lap and shoulder
booster cushion should also be
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Displays and controls by the driver Steering wheel adjustment Wipers and washers, rain sensor*
in a left-hand drive vehicle
Horn Right-side steering wheel keypad
The overviews show the location of the vehi-
cle's displays and controls. Left-side steering wheel keypad Steering wheel adjustment
Steering wheel and dashboard Hood open Horn
Unlocking/opening*/closing* the tailgate Left-side steering wheel keypad
Unlocking/opening*/closing* the trunk lid Hood open
Unlocking/opening*/closing* the tailgate
Parking lights, daytime running lights, low

beams, high beams, turn signals, front fog
lights/cornering illumination*, rear fog
light, trip computer reset
Parking lights, daytime running lights, low Parking lights, daytime running lights, low
beams, high beams, turn signals, rear fog beams, high beams, turn signals, front fog
light, trip computer reset lights/cornering illumination*, rear fog
Head-up display*
Instrument panel beams, high beams, turn signals, rear fog
Wipers and washers, rain sensor*
Head-up display*
Right-side steering wheel keypad
Instrument panel
Unlocking/opening*/closing* the tailgate Hood open
Unlocking/opening the trunk lid Display lighting, unlocking/locking*/clos-

ing* the trunk lid/tailgate

beams, high beams, turn signals, front fog
lights/cornering illumination*, rear fog
light, trip computer reset Parking lights, daytime running lights, low
Parking lights, daytime running lights, low beams, high beams, turn signals, front fog Parking lights, daytime running lights, low
beams, high beams, turn signals, rear fog lights/cornering illumination*, rear fog beams, high beams, turn signals, front fog
light, trip computer reset light, trip computer reset lights/cornering illumination*, rear fog
Head-up display* Instrument panel
Instrument panel
Instrument panel Wipers and washers, rain sensor*
Wipers and washers, rain sensor*
Wipers and washers, rain sensor* Right-side steering wheel keypad
Right-side steering wheel keypad
Right-side steering wheel keypad Steering wheel adjustment
Steering wheel adjustment
Steering wheel adjustment Horn
Horn
Horn Left-side steering wheel keypad
Left-side steering wheel keypad
Left-side steering wheel keypad
Display lighting, unlocking/locking*/clos-
Hood open ing* the trunk lid/tailgate
}}
|| Ceiling console Center and tunnel console
Front reading lights and courtesy lighting

Panoramic roof* Center display
SIM card slot
Sunroof Hazard warning flashers, defrosting,
Ceiling console display button media
Front reading lights and courtesy lighting
HomeLink®* Gear selector
Ceiling console display button
Start knob
SIM card slot
Parking brake
HomeLink®*
Auto-hold brakes
Center display Center display Center display
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, Hazard warning flashers, defrosting,
media, glove compartment open media media
Gear selector Gear selector Gear selector
Start knob Start knob Start knob
Parking brake Parking brake Parking brake
Auto-hold brakes Auto-hold brakes Auto-hold brakes
}}
95
|| Driver's door
Center display Center display

Memory for power front seat settings*,
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, Start button
door mirrors and head-up display*
media
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, Central locking
Gear selector media, drive mode button*
Power windows, door mirrors and child
Parking brake Electrical outlet, USB port, wireless phone
locks*
charger*
Controls for front seat
Gear selector
Parking brake
Auto-hold brakes
Memory for power front seat settings*, Memory for power front seat settings*, Memory for power front seat settings
door mirrors and head-up display* door mirrors and head-up display*
Central locking and power door mirrors
Central locking Central locking
Controls for front seat
Power windows, door mirrors and child Power windows, door mirrors and child
locks* locks* Power windows and child locks*
Controls for front seat Controls for front seat
}}
|| Date and time adjust the time zone manually, switch off the
The clock is shown in the center display, setting for automatic time zone. It is also pos-
where it is also possible to adjust settings for sible to select either a 24-hour or a 12-hour
date and time. clock.
Location of clock Related information

• Center display overview (p. 131)
Memory for power front seat*, door mirror

settings
Central locking, power windows, door mir-
rors and child locks*
Hood open
Controls for front seat The clock is located at the top right in the cen-
ter display's status bar.
Related information
Settings for date and time
1. Tap and then System. Then select
• Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 197)
Date and time.
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 228)
2. Select your preferred settings.
• Lighting control and panel (p. 150)
Automatic date and time setting
By default, the date and time are already set
• Starting the vehicle (p. 443) and the time zone is automatically adjusted to
• Instrument panel (p. 99) the vehicle's location.
• Center display overview (p. 131) To adjust the date and time manually, switch
• Transmission (p. 463) off the setting for automatic date and time. To
Instrument panel The instrument panel is activated as soon as a WARNING

The instrument panel displays information door is opened. The panel will power down
after a short period of time if it is not used. To If the instrument panel is not functioning
related to the vehicle and driving. properly, information about brakes, airbags
The instrument panel includes gauges, driver reactivate it, do one of the following:
or other safety-related systems may not be
support functions and indicator and warning • Activate ignition mode I. displayed. The driver will then not be able
symbols. What is shown in the instrument to check the status of the vehicle systems
panel varies depending on the equipment, set-
• Open one of the doors. or receive relevant warnings and informa-
tings and functions currently active. tion.
WARNING
The instrument panel is activated as soon as a If the instrument panel turns off, does not
door is opened. The instrument panel will activate when the ignition is switched on,
power down if it is not used but will be reacti- or part/all of the panel cannot be read, do
vated again if any of the doors are opened or not drive the vehicle. Consult a workshop
the vehicle is started. immediately. Volvo recommends an
authorized Volvo workshop.
}}
99
|| Location in the instrument panel:

Left side In the center Right side
Indicator and warning symbols Indicator and warning symbols Indicator and warning symbols
Speedometer Temperature Power meter
Cruise control/speed limiter information Messages (also graphics in some cases) Trip odometer
OdometerA Door and seat belt status Selected direction of travel
– Driver support system Battery gauge

– App menu (activated using steering wheel keypad) –
A Total distance.
100
Location in the instrument panel:

Left side In the center Right side
Indicator and warning symbols Indicator and warning symbols Indicator and warning symbols
Speedometer Temperature Tachometer
Cruise control/speed limiter information Messages (also graphics in some cases) Drive Mode
OdometerA Door and seat belt status Selected direction of travel
– Driver support system Battery gauge

Regenerative brakingB
}}
101
|| Left side In the center Right side

– App menu (activated using steering wheel keypad) Fuel gauge
– – Trip odometer
A Total distance.
B Mild hybrid only.
Related information
• Instrument panel settings (p. 103)
• Indicator and warning symbols (p. 107)
• Cleaning the instrument panel (p. 792)
• Trip computer (p. 105)
• Resetting the trip odometer (p. 106)
• Messages in the instrument panel
(p. 130)
• Battery gauge (p. 104)
• Power meter (p. 105)
102
Instrument panel settings Managing the App menu Center display settings
Change display mode or adjust display set- Instrument panel settings are adjusted via the
tings for the instrument panel. center display.
App menu 1. Tap .

2. Select Controls.
3. Adjust desired settings.
The settings are personal and saved in the
active user profile.
Alternative speedometer
The alternative speedometer makes it easier to
drive in countries where speed limit signs are
Close menu/change display mode shown in a different measurement unit than
Left/right the one usually shown in the vehicle.
When the driver changes unit to display the
Up/down speedometer in e.g. km/h a smaller speedom-
– Information about trip odometer, odome- eter is displayed digitally in mph above the
ter, etc. Open menu/confirm
standard speedometer and vice versa.
The App menu turns off after a period of inac-
tivity or after certain selections are made. Related information
Display modes
The instrument panel has two different display
• Messages in the instrument panel
(p. 130)
modes, which can be changed using the
button on the right-side steering wheel key- • Trip computer (p. 105)
pad.
• Calm – the center part of the instrument
panel is empty.
• Navigation* – a map is displayed over the
entire instrument panel.
Fuel gauge Battery gauge be shown next to the battery gauge. Range
The fuel gauge in the instrument panel shows The battery gauge shows the vehicle's charge may be affected by factors such as driving
the fuel level in the tank. level. style and ambient temperature.
The battery gauge at the bottom of the instru-
ment panel shows the charge level of the bat-
tery and the estimated driving distance until
the battery is discharged.
Symbols in the instrument panel

The gasoline engine is being
used.
The blue area in the fuel gauge indicates the The vehicle is running on
amount of fuel left in the tank. electricity alone.
When the fuel level is low, the fuel pump sym-

bol will illuminate with an amber-colored light.
Distance to empty is also indicated in the fuel
gauge.
Related information
Related information
• Regenerative braking (p. 462)
• Regenerative braking* (p. 462)
• Refueling (p. 494)
• Economical driving (p. 483)
• Fuel tank volume (p. 863) The battery gauge at the bottom of the instru-
ment panel shows the charge level of the
high-voltage battery. When the remaining
range falls below 50 km (30 miles), this will
Power meter Trip computer Driving time

The power meter indicates the vehicle's elec- The vehicle's trip computer registers data
tric propulsion, when it is recovering energy while driving, such as mileage, average con-
to the battery or when regeneration is limited. sumption and average speed.
Trip odometer
Information in the trip computer There are two trip odometers: TM and TA.
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset
automatically if the vehicle is not used for four
hours.
Odometer
The odometer records the vehicle's total mile-
age. This reading cannot be reset.
Trip computer settings

Settings for the trip computer are adjusted via
the center display.
The power meter is located to the right in the instru-
ment panel. 1. Tap .
Available battery power is limited. Mileage 2. Select Controls.
The vehicle is consuming electric current. 3. Adjust desired settings.
Regeneration with the accelerator pedal or Related information
brake pedal. Average consumption • Economical driving (p. 483)
Hard braking exceeds the capacity of • Instrument panel (p. 99)
regenerative braking and the friction
brakes will be applied to stop the vehicle.
• Resetting the trip odometer (p. 106)
Average speed
Related information
Resetting the trip odometer Related information Ambient temperature sensor

The trip odometer can be reset in the instru- • Trip computer (p. 105) The temperature outside the vehicle is dis-
ment panel or by using the left-side steering played in the instrument panel. If the vehicle
wheel lever. has been stationary for a prolonged period of
Reset all information in the trip odometer time, the gauge may show a higher tempera-
(mileage, average consumption, average ture than the actual temperature.
speed and driving time). When the temperature out-
side the vehicle is between
Resetting in the instrument panel –5 °C(23 °F) and +2 °C
1. Press the O button on the steering wheel. (36 °F), a snowflake symbol
2. Confirm again with the O button to reset. will illuminate to alert the
driver of the risk of slippery
> The trip odometer is reset.
conditions.
Resetting using the steering wheel Temperature gauge settings
lever
1. Tap .
2. Select System.
3. Tap Units.
4. Adjust desired settings.
Related information
• Changing system units of measurement
(p. 138)
– Press and hold down the RESET button

on the steering wheel lever.
> The trip odometer is reset.
106
Indicator and warning symbols Airbags Fault in electrical system

Indicator and warning symbols alert the
A fault has been detected in one A fault has occurred in the elec-
driver that a function is active, that a symbol
of the vehicle's safety systems. trical system.
is working, or that an error or serious fault
has occurred. Read the message in the instru- Read the message in the instru-
ment panel and contact a work- ment panel and contact a work-
Red symbols shop. Volvo recommends con- shop. Volvo recommends con-
WARNING tacting an authorized Volvo tacting an authorized Volvo
workshop. workshop.
The red warning symbol illumi-
nates to indicate that a fault has Fault in brake system High engine temperature
been detected that could affect
A fault has occurred in the brake The engine's temperature is too
safety or driveability. An explana-
system. high. Read the message in the
tory message will be simultane-
instrument panel.
ously displayed in the instrument A Read the message in the instru-
panel. ment panel and contact a work-
shop. Volvo recommends con-
The warning symbol may also
tacting an authorized Volvo
illuminate in combination with
workshop.
other symbols.
B
Seat belt reminder
Parking brake
Lights up or flashes when a
someone in the vehicle has not Steady glow: the parking brake
fastened their seat belt. is activated.
A Flashing: a fault has occurred in
the parking brake. Read the mes-
sage in the instrument panel.
}}
107
|| Assistance at risk of collision Amber symbols Emission control system

Warns the driver if there is a risk Information Fault in emission control system.
of a collision with another vehi- A problem has occurred in one of Have the vehicle checked by a
cle, pedestrian, cyclist or large the vehicle's systems. Read the workshop. Volvo recommends
animal. message in the instrument panel. contacting an authorized Volvo
workshop.
Low oil pressure The information symbol may also
illuminate in combination with Rear fog light
The engine's oil pressure is too
other symbols.
low. Switch off the engine imme- Rear fog light on.
diately and check the engine oil Fault in brake system
level. Add oil if necessary.
A fault has occurred in the brake Tire pressure system
If this symbol lights up and the system. Read the message in the
oil level is normal, read the mes- Tire pressure low.
A instrument panel.
sage in the instrument panel and If there is a fault in the tire pres-
contact a workshop. Volvo rec- sure system, the symbol will first
ommends contacting an author- flash for approximately 1 minute
ized Volvo workshop. and then glow steadily. This may
occur if the system cannot
A Canadian models. B
B US models. detect or alert the driver of low
tire pressure as intended.
Fault in ABS system
The system is not functioning Fault in headlight system
properly. The vehicle's regular A fault has occurred in the head-
A brakes will still work, but without light system. Read the message
the ABS function. in the instrument panel.
Lane Keeping Aid
Lane Keeping Aid is alerting/
intervening.
B
108
Reduced performance Green symbols Preconditioning

Temporary fault in driveline. Read Auto-hold brake Engine and passenger compart-
the message in the instrument The function is activated and the ment heater/air conditioning is
panel. brakes or the parking brake are preconditioning the vehicle.
A being used.
Stability system Hybrid battery charging
Steady glow: a fault has occur- Front fog light Hybrid battery charging.
red in the system.
Front fog light on.
Flashing: the system is working. Cold battery
Assistance during collision Parking lights The battery has reduced capacity
risks System not available due to low temperature. The bat-
Parking lights on. tery charge could drop signifi-
The system for assistance during
cantly if the vehicle is parked in
collision risks is not available or
Left/right turn signals cold ambient temperatures.
is working but performance is
reduced. Turn signal in use. Lane Keeping Aid
White symbol: Lane Keeping Aid
Blue symbols
is on and lane marker lines are
Active high beam detected.
Active high beam is activated Gray symbol: Lane Keeping Aid
and on. is on and lane marker lines are
High beams White/gray symbols not detected.
Active high beam Rain sensor
High beams on.
Active high beam is activated but The rain sensor is activated.
not on.
Automatic braking at a stand-
still (Hold) Related information
Automatic braking at a standstill
(Hold) is activated.
109
License agreement for instrument following text is Volvo's agreement with the product under the terms of the respective
panel manufacturer or developer. licenses. The source code corresponding to
A license is an agreement on the right to con- the open source components is also provided
1.1 List of used Open Source along with the product wherever mandated by
duct a certain activity or the right to use
someone else's right according to terms and
Components the respective OSS license
This table contains a list of open source
conditions specified in the agreement. The
software (OSS) components used within the
Sl Name of OSS Version of Name and Home Page More Information

No. Component OSS Version of
Component License (License
text can be
found in
Appendix below)
1 BidiReferenceCpp 26 Unicode Terms of http://www.unicode.org/ (C) Socionext Embedded Software Austria
Use Public/PROGRAMS/ GmbH (SESA) Copyright (C) 1999-2009,
BidiReferenceCpp/ ASMUS, Inc
2 FASTCRC32 License of http://stephan-brumme.com/ Copyright © 2011-2013 Stephan Brumme.
Stephan brumme/ All rights reserved, Copyright (C)
Zlib style License 1995-2006, 2010, 2011, 2012 Mark Adler
3 Freescale IMX6 BSD 3-clause https://www.nxp.com/ Copyright © 2009-2012, Freescale
"New" or Semiconductor, Inc, Copyright ©
HDMI
"Revised" License 2010-2012, Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.
4 FreeType Hashing MIT License https://sourceforge.net/p/ Copyright 2000 Computing Research Labs,
canvasdraw/cd/642/tree/ New Mexico State University Copyright
trunk/freetype/include/ 2001-2015 Francesco Zappa Nardelli
freetype/internal/fthash.h
5 Freetype Project 1.16 MIT License https://www.freetype.org/ Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by Francesco
Zappa Nardelli.
110

text can be
found in
Appendix below)
- BDF
6 Freetype Project 24.16.8 MIT License https://www.freetype.org/ Copyright 2000-2001, 2003 by Francesco
Zappa Nardelli Copyright (C) 2000, 2001,
-PCF
2002, 2003, 2006, 2010 by Francesco
Zappa Nardelli Copyright (C) 2000-2004,
2006-2011, 2013, 2014 by Francesco
Zappa Nardelli Copyright 2000-2010,
2012-2014 by Francesco Zappa Nardelli
Copyright 2003 by Francesco Zappa
Nardelli
7 Freetype Project Open Group https://www.freetype.org/ Copyright 1990, 1994, 1998 The Open
License Group
- Pcfutil
8 HarfBuzz 1.3.1 MIT License http://freedesktop.org/wiki/ Copyright © 2007 Chris Wilson Copyright ©
Software/HarfBuzz 2009,2010 Red Hat, Inc. Copyright ©
2011,2012 Google, Inc.
9 Integrity Libnet Internet Software https://github.com/lattera/ Copyright © 1996 by Internet Software
Consortium-IBM glibc/blob/master/resolv/inet Consortium. Consortium, Copyright © 1995
License ISC _pton.c by International Business Machines, Inc.
License
10 Khronos EGL 1.3 MIT License http://www.khronos.org/ Copyright © 2007-2013 The Khronos Group
Headers registry/egl/ Inc. Copyright 2008 VMware, Inc. Copyright
© 2013-2014 The Khronos Group Inc.
}}
111
|| Sl Name of OSS Version of Name and Home Page More Information

text can be
found in
Appendix below)
11 Khronos Group - 2.0 SGI Free http://www.khronos.org/
OpenGL ES Software License opengles/
B v2.0
12 libjpeg 6b Independent http://www.ijg.org/ Copyright (C) 1991-1997, Thomas G. Lane.
JPEG Group
License
13 libpng 1.4.3 libpng License http://github.com/coapp- Copyright © 1998-2010 Glenn Randers-
packages/libpng/ Pehrson Copyright © 2007, 2009 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson Version 0.96 Copyright ©
1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Version 0.88
Copyright © 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat,
Group 42, Inc.
14 Libunibreak 2.1 zlib License https://github.com/ Copyright (C) 2008-2011 Wu Yongwei
adah1972/libunibreak Copyright (C) 2012
Tom Hacohen
[email protected]
15 lz4 Compression NA BSD 2-clause http://github.com/Cyan4973/ Copyright (C) 2011-2014, Yann Collet
algorithm "Simplified" lz4/
License
16 md5 NA Public Domain https://doxygen.reactos.org/
d7/d04/sdk_2lib_23rdparty
112

text can be
found in
Appendix below)
_2freetype_ 2src_2base
_2md5_8c_source.html
17 NetBSD 1.5 HPND like license http://www.netbsd.org/ Copyright © 1998 Manuel Bouyer Copyright
© 1996 Matt Thomas., Copyright 1997
IBM License
Marshall Kirk McKusick. All Rights Reserved,
BSD-4-Clause Copyright © 1985, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1993,
(University of 1995 The Regents of the University of
California- California Copyright © 1989, 1993 The
Specific) Regents of the University of California
BSD 3-clause Copyright © 1983, 1993 The Regents of the
"New" or University of California Copyright 2000-2011
"Revised" License Green Hills Software Copyright (c) 1996 by
Internet Software Consortium. Copyright (C)
BSD One Clause 1998 WIDE Project, Portions Copyright ©
License 1995 by International Business Machines,
Inc, Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1997 TooLs
GmbH Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1997
Wolfgang Solfrank Copyright © 1995, 1999
Berkeley Software Design, Inc Portions
Copyright © 1993 by Digital Equipment
Corporation Copyright © 1992 Henry
Spencer Copyright © 1997, 1998, 1999 The
NetBSD Foundation, Inc Copyright © 1994
James A. Jegers
}}
113
|| Sl Name of OSS Version of Name and Home Page More Information

text can be
found in
Appendix below)
18 NetBSD_BSD4 NA BSD 4-clause http://www.netbsd.org/ Copyright 2000-2011 Green Hills Software
"Original" or "Old" Copyright © 1994, 1998 Christopher G.
License Demetriou
19 The FreeType Project 2.6.3 Freetype Project http://sourceforge.net/ Copyright 2013-2016 by David Turner,
License projects/freetype/ Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg,
- freetype2
Copyright 2007-2016 by Rahul Bhalerao
[email protected]
[email protected]
Copyright 2009-2016 by Oran Agra and
Mickey Gabel, Copyright 2008-2016 by
David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, Werner
Lemberg, and suzuki toshiya. , Copyright
2000 Computing Research Labs, New
Mexico State University, Copyright
2001-2015 Francesco Zappa Nardelli,
Copyright 2004-2016 by Masatake
YAMATO and Redhat K.K, Copyright
2007-2016 by Derek Clegg and Michael
Toftdal, Copyright 2010-2016 by Joel
Klinghed, Copyright 2007-2013 Adobe
Systems Incorporated, Copyright
2007-2014 Adobe Systems Incorporated,
Copyright 2004-2016 by Albert Chin-A-
Young, Copyright 2013-2016 by Google, Inc,
114

text can be
found in
Appendix below)
Copyright 2002-2016 by Roberto Alameda,
Copyright 2003 Huw D M Davies for
Codeweavers, Copyright 2007 Dmitry
Timoshkov for Codeweavers
20 Vivante Driver NA MIT License http://www.vivantecorp.com/ Copyright 2012 - 2016 Vivante Corporation,
software Santa Clara, California Copyright © 2007
The Khronos Group Inc Copyright © 2014 -
2016 Vivante Corporation Copyright 2012
Vivante Corporation, Sunnyvale, California
Copyright © 2011 Intel Corporation
Copyright (C) 1999-2001 Brian Paul
21 zlib 1.2.8 zlib License zlib License Copyright (C) 1995-2007 Mark Adler
Copyright (C) 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly
Copyright (C) 1995-2010 Mark Adler
Copyright (C) 2003 Chris Anderson
Copyright (C) 1998 Brian Raiter
22 RBTree.cpp NA Public Domain http:// (C) Socionext Embedded Software Austria
eternallyconfuzzled.com/tuts/ GmbH (SESA)
datastructures/
jsw_tut_rbtree.aspx
2. APPENDIX - LICENSE TEXT 2.1 HPND Like license Permission to use, copy, modify, and
Portions Copyright (c) 1993 by Digital distribute this software for any purpose with
Equipment Corporation. or without fee is hereby granted, provided that
}}
115
|| the above copyright notice and this disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must International Business Machines, Inc.
permission notice appear in all copies, and reproduce the above copyright notice, this list (hereinafter called IBM) grants permission
that the name of Digital Equipment of conditions and the following disclaimer in under its copyrights to use, copy, modify, and
Corporation not be used in advertising or the documentation and/or other materials distribute this Software with or without fee,
publicity pertaining to distribution of the provided with the distribution. provided that the above copyright notice and
document or software without specific, all paragraphs of this notice appear in all
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
written prior permission. copies, and that the name of IBM not be used
AUTHOR "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
in connection with the marketing of any
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
product incorporating the Software or
DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP. DISCLAIMS NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
modifications thereof, without specific, written
ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
prior permission.
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL To the extent it has a right to do so, IBM
FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, grants an immunity from suit under its
EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE LIABLE INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, patents, if any, for the use, sale or
FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL manufacture of products to the extent that
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED such products are used for performing
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE Domain Name System dynamic updates in
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, TCP/IP networks by means of the Software.
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS No immunity is granted for any product per se
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND or for any other function of any product.
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", AND
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
IBM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
2.2 BSD 2-clause "Simplified" License OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
BSD Two Clause License OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
Redistribution and use in source and binary SHALL IBM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
DAMAGE.
forms, with or without modification, are DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
2.3 IBM License DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
permitted provided that the following
Portions Copyright (c) 1995 by International WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF OR IN
conditions are met: Redistributions of source
Business Machines, Inc. CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
116
EVEN IF IBM IS APPRISED OF THE IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT disclaimer in the documentation and/or
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE other materials provided with the
2.4 BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, distribution.
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR 3. All advertising materials mentioning
License
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, features or use of this software must
Copyright/Copyright holders – see List of
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF display the following acknowledgement:
Open Source Components
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS This product includes software developed
All rights reserved. OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS by the organization.
Redistribution and use in source and binary INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER 4. Neither the name of the organization nor
forms, with or without modification, are the names of its contributors may be used
permitted provided that the following IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR to endorse or promote products derived
conditions are met: from this software without specific prior
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
Redistributions of source code must retain the OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF written permission.
above copyright notice, this list of conditions ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
and the following disclaimer. Redistributions DAMAGE. COPYRIGHT HOLDER ''AS IS'' AND ANY
in binary form must reproduce the above EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
2.5 BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old"
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
following disclaimer in the documentation License
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
and/or other materials provided with the Copyright/Copyright holders – see List of
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
distribution. Neither the name of the Open Source Components
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
[ORGANIZATION] nor the names of its All rights reserved. IN NO EVENT SHALL {{COPYRIGHT
contributors may be used to endorse or HOLDER}} BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
Redistribution and use in source and binary
promote products derived from this software INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
forms, with or without modification, are
without specific prior written permission. EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
permitted provided that the following
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
conditions are met:
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
1. Redistributions of source code must retain GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
the above copyright notice, this list of DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
conditions and the following disclaimer. INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF 2. Redistributions in binary form must ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A reproduce the above copyright notice, this IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. list of conditions and the following (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
}}
117
|| OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT 4. Neither the name of the University nor the Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by David Turner,
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF names of its contributors may be used to Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH endorse or promote products derived from
DAMAGE. this software without specific prior written
2.6 BSD-4-Clause (University of California- permission.
Specific) THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
BSD-4-Clause (University of California- REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS `ÀS IS''
Specific) AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
Copyright/Copyright holders – see List of LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
Open Source Components OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
Redistribution and use in source and binary A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
forms, with or without modification, are DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
permitted provided that the following REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
conditions are met: FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
the above copyright notice, this list of
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
conditions and the following disclaimer.
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
2. Redistributions in binary form must OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
reproduce the above copyright notice, this INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
list of conditions and the following ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
disclaimer in the documentation and/or IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
other materials provided with the (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
distribution. OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
3. All advertising materials mentioning OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
features or use of this software must ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
display the following acknowledgement: DAMAGE.
This product includes software developed 2.7 Freetype Project License
by the University of California, Berkeley The FreeType Project LICENSE
and its contributors.
2006-Jan-27
118
Introduction Project and assume no liability related to The Throughout this license, the terms `package',
The FreeType Project is distributed in several FreeType Project. Finally, many people asked `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive'
archive packages; some of them may contain, us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer refer to the set of files originally distributed by
in addition to the FreeType font engine, to use in compliance with this license. We the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm,
various tools and contributions which rely on, thus encourage you to use the following text: and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType
or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license "Portions of this software are copyright © Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final
applies to all files found in such packages, and 1996-2002, 2006 The FreeType Project release. `You' refers to the licensee, or person
which do not fall under their own explicit (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved." using the project, where ùsing' is a generic
license. The license affects thus the FreeType term including compiling the project's source
"Portions of this software are copyright ©
font engine, the test programs, documentation code as well as linking it to form a `program'
1996-2002, 2006 The FreeType Project
and makefiles, at the very least. This license or èxecutable'. This program is referred to as
(www.freetype.org). All rights reserved."
was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG à program using the FreeType engine'. This
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all Definitions license applies to all files distributed in the
encourage inclusion and use of free software Throughout this license, the terms `package', original FreeType Project, including all source
in commercial and freeware products alike. As `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' code, binaries and documentation, unless
a consequence, its main points are that: refer to the set of files originally distributed by otherwise stated in the file in its original,
the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, unmodified form as distributed in the original
We don't promise that this software works. and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType archive. If you are unsure whether or not a
However, we will be interested in any kind of Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final particular file is covered by this license, you
bug reports. (às is' distribution) release. `You' refers to the licensee, or person must contact us to verify this.
You can use this software for whatever you using the project, where ùsing' is a generic
No Warranty
want, in parts or full form, without having to term including compiling the project's source
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED ÀS
pay us. (`royalty-free' usage) code as well as linking it to form a `program'
IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
or èxecutable'. This program is referred to as
You may not pretend that you wrote this EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
à program using the FreeType engine'. This
software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
license applies to all files distributed in the
program, you must acknowledge somewhere WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
original FreeType Project, including all source
in your documentation that you have used the FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN
code, binaries and documentation, unless
FreeType code. (`credits') NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR
otherwise stated in the file in its original,
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
We specifically permit and encourage the unmodified form as distributed in the original
DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE
inclusion of this software, with or without archive. If you are unsure whether or not a
INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE
modifications, in commercial products. We particular file is covered by this license, you
PROJECT. Redistribution
disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType must contact us to verify this.
}}
119
|| Redistribution Advertising Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals,

This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, Neither the FreeType authors and contributors design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
perpetual and irrevocable right and license to nor you shall use the name of the other for Our home page can be found at: http://
use, execute, perform, compile, display, copy, commercial, advertising, or promotional www.freetype.org
create derivative works of, distribute and purposes without specific prior written
sublicense the FreeType Project (in both permission. We suggest, but do not require, 2.8 Independent JPEG Group License
source and object code forms) and derivative that you use one or more of the following The Independent JPEG Group's JPEG
works thereof for any purpose; and to phrases to refer to this software in your software README for release 6b of 27-
authorize others to exercise some or all of the documentation or advertising materials: Mar-1998
rights granted herein, subject to the following `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', This distribution contains the sixth public
conditions: `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. release of the Independent JPEG Group's free
As you have not signed this license, you are JPEG software. You are welcome to
Redistribution of source code must retain this
not required to accept it. However, as the redistribute this software and to use it for any
license file (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any
FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only purpose, subject to the conditions under
additions, deletions or changes to the original
this license, or another one contracted with LEGAL ISSUES, below. Serious users of this
files must be clearly indicated in
the authors, grants you the right to use, software (particularly those incorporating it
accompanying documentation. The copyright
distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, into larger programs) should contact IJG at
notices of the unaltered, original files must be
distributing, or modifying the FreeType [email protected] to be added to our
preserved in all copies of source files.
Project, you indicate that you understand and electronic mailing list. Mailing list members
Redistribution in binary form must provide a
accept all the terms of this license. are notified of updates and have a chance to
disclaimer that states that the software is
based in part of the work of the FreeType Contacts participate in technical discussions, etc. This
Team, in the distribution documentation. We There are two mailing lists related to software is the work of Tom Lane, Philip
also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType: Gladstone, Jim Boucher, Lee Crocker, Julian
FreeType web page in your documentation, Minguillon, Luis Ortiz, George Phillips, Davide
[email protected] Rossi, Guido Vollbeding, Ge' Weijers, and
though this isn't mandatory. These conditions
apply to any software derived from or based Discusses general use and applications of other members of the Independent JPEG
on the FreeType Project, not just the FreeType, as well as future and wanted Group. IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO
unmodified files. If you use our work, you must additions to the library and distribution. If you JPEG standards committee.
acknowledge us. However, no fee need be are looking for support, start in this list if you
paid to us. haven't found anything to help you in the
documentation.
[email protected]
120
LEGAL ISSUES original files must be clearly indicated in instead by the usual distribution terms of the
In plain English: accompanying documentation. Free Software Foundation; principally, that
2. If only executable code is distributed, then you must include source code if you
We don't promise that this software works.
the accompanying documentation must redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full
(But if you find any bugs, please let us know!)
state that "this software is based in part details.)
You can use this software for whatever you
want. You don't have to pay us. You may not on the work of the Independent JPEG However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as
pretend that you wrote this software. If you Group". part of any program generated from the IJG
use it in a program, you must acknowledge 3. Permission for use of this software is code, this does not limit you more than the
somewhere in your documentation that you've granted only if the user accepts full foregoing paragraphs do. The Unix
used the IJG code. In legalese: responsibility for any undesirable configuration script "configure" was produced
consequences; the authors accept NO with GNU Autoconf. It is copyright by the Free
The authors make NO WARRANTY or
LIABILITY for damages of any kind. Software Foundation but is freely
representation, either express or implied, with
distributable. The same holds for its
respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, These conditions apply to any software
supporting scripts (config.guess, config.sub,
merchantability, or fitness for a particular derived from or based on the IJG code, not
ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support script,
purpose. This software is provided "AS IS", just to the unmodified library. If you use our
install-sh, is copyright by M.I.T. but is also
and you, its user, assume the entire risk as to work, you ought to acknowledge us.
freely distributable.
its quality and accuracy. This software is Permission is NOT granted for the use of any
copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All It appears that the arithmetic coding option of
IJG author's name or company name in
Rights Reserved except as specified below. the JPEG spec is covered by patents owned
advertising or publicity relating to this
by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, software or products derived from it. This
arithmetic coding cannot legally be used
modify, and distribute this software (or software may be referred to only as "the
without obtaining one or more licenses. For
portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, Independent JPEG Group's software".
this reason, support for arithmetic coding has
subject to these conditions: We specifically permit and encourage the use been removed from the free JPEG software.
1. If any part of the source code for this of this software as the basis of commercial (Since arithmetic coding provides only a
software is distributed, then this README products, provided that all warranty or liability marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman
file must be included, with this copyright claims are assumed by the product vendor. mode, it is unlikely that very many
and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by implementations will support it.) So far as we
additions, deletions, or changes to the permission of L. Peter Deutsch, sole proprietor are aware, there are no patent restrictions on
of its copyright holder, Aladdin Enterprises of the remaining code.
Menlo Park, CA. ansi2knr.c is NOT covered by
the above copyright and conditions, but
}}
121
|| The IJG distribution formerly included code to SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", AND
read and write GIF files. To avoid CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY IBM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent, DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
GIF reading support has been removed FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
altogether, and the GIF writer has been WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT
simplified to produce "uncompressed GIFs". NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS SHALL IBM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
This technique does not use the LZW ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
algorithm; the resulting GIF files are larger CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
than usual, but are readable by all standard PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF OR IN
GIF decoders. We are required to state that: CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
Portions Copyright (c) 1995 by International
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
"The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Business Machines, Inc.
EVEN IF IBM IS APPRISED OF THE
Copyright property of CompuServe
International Business Machines, Inc. POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark
(hereinafter called IBM) grants permission
property of CompuServe Incorporated."
under its copyrights to use, copy, modify, and
2.9 Internet Software Consortium-IBM distribute this Software with or without fee,
License provided that the above copyright notice and
Copyright (c) 1996 by Internet Software all paragraphs of this notice appear in all
Consortium. copies, and that the name of IBM not be used
in connection with the marketing of any
Permission to use, copy, modify, and
product incorporating the Software or
distribute this software for any purpose with
modifications thereof, without specific, written
or without fee is hereby granted, provided that
prior permission.
the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies. To the extent it has a right to do so, IBM
grants an immunity from suit under its
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND
patents, if any, for the use, sale or
INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM
manufacture of products to the extent that
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
such products are used for performing
REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING
Domain Name System dynamic updates in
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
TCP/IP networks by means of the Software.
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO
No immunity is granted for any product per se
EVENT SHALL INTERNET SOFTWARE
or for any other function of any product.
CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY
122
2.10 Khronos License 2.11 License of Stephan Brumme/ Zlib style persons to whom the Software is furnished to
Copyright (c) 2013 The Khronos Group Inc. License do so, subject to the following conditions:
** ** Permission is hereby granted, free of This software is provided 'as-is', without any The above copyright notice and this
charge, to any person obtaining a ** copy of express or implied warranty. In no event will permission notice shall be included in all
this software and/or associated the author be held liable for any damages copies or substantial portions of the Software.
documentation files (the ** "Materials"), to arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
deal in the Materials without restriction, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
including ** without limitation the rights to software for any purpose, including
commercial applications, and to alter it and EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
use, copy, modify, merge, publish, ** NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the redistribute it freely, subject to the following
restrictions: The origin of this software must MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Materials, and to ** permit persons to whom PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
the Materials are furnished to do so, subject not be misrepresented; you must not claim
that you wrote the original software. If you use NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
to ** the following conditions: ** ** The above THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
copyright notice and this permission notice this software in a product, an
acknowledgment in the product BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
shall be included ** in all copies or substantial OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
portions of the Materials. ** documentation would be appreciated but is
not required. Altered source versions must be OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
** THE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", plainly marked as such, and must not be ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, ** misrepresented as being the original software. CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
2.12 MIT License SOFTWARE.
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF **
The MIT License
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND Copyright/Copyright holders – see List of
NONINFRINGEMENT. ** IN NO EVENT Open Source Components
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY ** CLAIM, to any person obtaining a copy of this
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, software and associated documentation files
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, ** (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, without restriction, including without
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE ** limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
MATERIALS OR THE USE OR OTHER merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
DEALINGS IN THE MATERIALS. sell copies of the Software, and to permit
}}
123
|| 2.13 Open Group License 2.14 Public Domain OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
Copyright 1996, 1998 The Open Group. Public domain code is not subject to any INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
license. ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute,
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
and sell this software and its documentation 2.15 BSD One Clause License
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, BSD One Clause License
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
provided that the above copyright notice Copyright/Copyright holders – see List of OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
appear in all copies and that both that Open Source Components ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
copyright notice and this permission notice
All rights reserved. DAMAGE.
appear in supporting documentation. The
above copyright notice and this permission Redistribution and use in source and binary
notice shall be included in all copies or forms, with or without modification, are
substantial portions of the Software. permitted provided that the following
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", conditions are met:
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, * Redistributions of source code must retain
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT the above copyright notice, this list of
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF conditions and the following disclaimer.
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
THE OPEN GROUP BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
Except as contained in this notice, the name of FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
The Open Group shall not be used in SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
use or other dealings in this Software without BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
prior written authorization from The Open SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
Group.
124
2.16 ISC License Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, Except as contained in this notice, the name of
ISC License (ISCL) to any person obtaining a copy of this Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in
software and associated documentation files advertising or otherwise to promote the sale,
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software use or other dealings in this Software without
without restriction, including without prior written authorization from Silicon
Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, Graphics, Inc.
distribute this software for any purpose with merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
or without fee is hereby granted, provided that sell copies of the Software, and to permit
the above copyright notice and this persons to whom the Software is furnished to
permission notice appear in all copies. do so, subject to the following conditions:
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND The above copyright notice including the dates
THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL of first publication and either this permission
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/
SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND or substantial portions of the Software.
FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL
DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN
FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING
DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS
SOFTWARE.
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN
2.17 SGI Free Software License B v2.0 AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
ISC License (ISCL) OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING
Copyright/Copyright holders – see List of OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
Open Source Components USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
}}
125
|| 2.18 Unicode Terms of Use restrictions of use. For the book editions subject to the restrictions set forth in this
For the general privacy policy governing (Unicode 5.0 and earlier), these are found Agreement.
access to this site, see the Unicode Privacy on the back of the title page. The online
C. Warranties and Disclaimers.
Policy. For trademark usage, see the code charts carry specific restrictions. All
Unicode® Consortium Name and Trademark other files, including online documentation 1. This publication and/or website may
Usage Policy. of the core specification for Unicode 6.0 include technical or typographical errors or
and later, are covered under these general other inaccuracies . Changes are
A. Unicode Copyright. periodically added to the information
Terms of Use.
1. Copyright © 1991-2014 Unicode, Inc. All herein; these changes will be incorporated
6. No license is granted to "mirror" the
rights reserved. in new editions of the publication and/or
Unicode website where a fee is charged
2. Certain documents and files on this website. Unicode may make
for access to the "mirror" site.
website contain a legend indicating that improvements and/or changes in the
7. Modification is not permitted with respect product(s) and/or program(s) described in
"Modification is permitted." Any person is to this document. All copies of this
hereby authorized, without fee, to modify this publication and/or website at any
document must be verbatim. time.
such documents and files to create
derivative works conforming to the B. Restricted Rights Legend. 2. If this file has been purchased on
Unicode® Standard, subject to Terms and Any technical data or software which is magnetic or optical media from Unicode,
Conditions herein. licensed to the United States of America, its Inc. the sole and exclusive remedy for any
agencies and/or instrumentalities under this claim will be exchange of the defective
3. Any person is hereby authorized, without
Agreement is commercial technical data or media within ninety (90) days of original
fee, to view, use, reproduce, and distribute
commercial computer software developed purchase.
all documents and files solely for
informational purposes in the creation of exclusively at private expense as defined in 3. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN SECTION C.2,
products supporting the Unicode FAR 2.101, or DFARS 252.227-7014 (June THIS PUBLICATION AND/OR
Standard, subject to the Terms and 1995), as applicable. For technical data, use, SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS"
Conditions herein. duplication, or disclosure by the Government WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
is subject to restrictions as set forth in DFARS EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR
4. Further specifications of rights and
202.227-7015 Technical Data, Commercial STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
restrictions pertaining to the use of the
and Items (Nov 1995) and this Agreement. For LIMITED TO, ANY WARRANTIES OF
particular set of data files known as the
Software, in accordance with FAR 12-212 or MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
"Unicode Character Database" can be
DFARS 227-7202, as applicable, use, PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-
found in Exhibit 1.
duplication or disclosure by the Government is INFRINGEMENT. UNICODE AND ITS
5. Each version of the Unicode Standard has LICENSORS ASSUME NO
further specifications of rights and RESPONSIBILITY FOR ERRORS OR
126
OMISSIONS IN THIS PUBLICATION reference and you agree to abide by the may not assign any part of this Agreement
AND/OR SOFTWARE OR OTHER provisions of the Trademark Policy, which without Unicode's prior written consent.
DOCUMENTS WHICH ARE may be changed from time to time in the 3. Taxes. The user agrees to pay any taxes
REFERENCED BY OR LINKED TO THIS sole discretion of Unicode, Inc. arising from access to this website or use
PUBLICATION OR THE UNICODE 3. All third party trademarks referenced of the information herein, except for those
WEBSITE. herein are the property of their respective based on Unicode's net income.
D. Waiver of Damages. owners. 4. Severability. If any provision of this
In no event shall Unicode or its licensors be F. Miscellaneous. Agreement is declared invalid or
liable for any special, incidental, indirect or unenforceable, the remaining provisions of
1. Jurisdiction and Venue. This server is
consequential damages of any kind, or any this Agreement shall remain in effect.
operated from a location in the State of
damages whatsoever, whether or not Unicode California, United States of America. 5. Entire Agreement. This Agreement
was advised of the possibility of the damage, Unicode makes no representation that the constitutes the entire agreement between
including, without limitation, those resulting materials are appropriate for use in other the parties.
from the following: loss of use, data or profits, locations. If you access this server from
in connection with the use, modification or other locations, you are responsible for
distribution of this information or its compliance with local laws. This
derivatives. Agreement, all use of this site and any
E. Trademarks & Logos. claims and damages resulting from use of
this site are governed solely by the laws of
1. The Unicode Word Mark and the Unicode
the State of California without regard to
Logo are trademarks of Unicode, Inc. "The
any principles which would apply the laws
Unicode Consortium" and "Unicode, Inc."
of a different jurisdiction. The user agrees
are trade names of Unicode, Inc. Use of
that any disputes regarding this site shall
the information and materials found on
be resolved solely in the courts located in
this website indicates your
Santa Clara County, California. The user
acknowledgement of Unicode, Inc.'s
agrees said courts have personal
exclusive worldwide rights in the Unicode
jurisdiction and agree to waive any right to
Word Mark, the Unicode Logo, and the
transfer the dispute to any other forum.
Unicode trade names.
2. Modification by Unicode. Unicode shall
2. The Unicode Consortium Name and
have the right to modify this Agreement at
Trademark Usage Policy ("Trademark
any time by posting it to this site. The user
Policy") are incorporated herein by
}}
127
|| 2.19 libpng License satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, implied, including, without limitation, the
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for and effort is with the user. warranties of merchantability and of fitness for
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy any purpose. The Contributing Authors and
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through
between this copy and the notices in the file Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct,
1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c)
png.h that is included in the libpng indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or
1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distribution, the latter shall prevail. consequential damages, which may result
distributed according to the same disclaimer
from the use of the PNG Reference Library,
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and and license as libpng-0.96, with the following
even if advised of the possibility of such
LICENSE: individuals added to the list of Contributing
damage. Permission is hereby granted to use,
Authors:
The above copyright notice and this copy, modify, and distribute this source code,
permission notice shall be included in all Tom Lane, Glenn Randers-Pehrson, Willem or portions hereof, for any purpose, without
copies or substantial portions of the Software. van Schaik. fee, subject to the following restrictions:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 1. The origin of this source code must not be
notices immediately following this sentence. 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 misrepresented.
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked
1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88,
as such and must not be misrepresented
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are with the following individuals added to the list
as being the original source.
distributed according to the same disclaimer of Contributing Authors:
and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed
John Bowler, Kevin Bracey, Sam Bushe, or altered from any source or altered
individuals added to the list of Contributing Magnus Holmgren, Greg Roelofs, Tom Tanner.
Authors: source distribution.
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
Simon-Pierre Cadieux, Eric S. Raymond, Gilles January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 specifically permit, without fee, and encourage
Vollant Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. For the the use of this source code as a component to
and with the following additions to the purposes of this copyright and license, supporting the PNG file format in commercial
disclaimer: "Contributing Authors" is defined as the products. If you use this source code in a
following set of individuals: product, acknowledgment is not required but
There is no warranty against interference with
your enjoyment of the library or against Andreas Dilger, Dave Martindale, Guy Eric would be appreciated. A "png_get_copyright"
infringement. There is no warranty that our Schalnat, Paul Schmidt, Tim Wegner. function is available, for convenient use in
efforts or the library will fulfill any of your "about" boxes and the like:
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS
particular purposes or needs. This library is IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
provided with all faults, and the entire risk of Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or
128
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) documentation would be appreciated but
is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and is not required.
"pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" 2. Altered source versions must be plainly
(98x31). marked as such, and must not be
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source misrepresented as being the original
Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a software.
certification mark of the Open Source 3. This notice may not be removed or altered
Initiative. from any source distribution.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Related information
[email protected] • Instrument panel (p. 99)
April 15, 2002
2.20 zlib License
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will
the authors be held liable for any damages
arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including
commercial applications, and to alter it and
redistribute it freely, subject to the following
restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that
you wrote the original software. If you use
this software in a product, an
acknowledgment in the product
129
Messages in the instrument panel Managing messages Message Meaning

The instrument panel shows messages in
certain circumstances to inform or assist the Do not driveA Stop and contact a work-
driver. shop. Serious risk of dam-
age.
Book time Time for service - contact a
for regular workshopA. Shown before
maintenance the next service date.
Time for reg- Time for service - contact a
ular mainte- workshopA. Shown on the
nance next service date.
Regular Time for service - contact a
Left/right
maintenance workshopA. Shown when
Confirm overdue the date for service has
passed.
The messages are shown in the center of the The message disappears from the instrument
panel when it is acknowledged or any required A Part of message, shown along with information on the loca-
instrument panel. The layout may vary and tion of the problem.
include graphics, symbols or buttons to e.g. action has been taken. Certain messages
acknowledge the message or accept a appear in the center display's Notifications Related information
request. view. • Instrument panel (p. 99)
Service messages
The following table lists a selection of service
messages and what they mean.
130
Center display overview Home view consists of four tiles showing the
Many of the vehicle's functions can be con- most recently used apps. Other views in the
trolled from the center display. The center center display, such as Climate view, Camera
display and its possibilities are presented view, App view and Notifications view, can be
below. accessed from Home view.
Home view Camera view
Camera view shows the Park Assist Cameras (PAC1),

which display a 360° panoramic view as well as sep-
arate views for each of the four cameras: rear, front,
left and right.
Home view is the first view displayed when the

screen is activated.
1 Park Assist Camera }}
131
|| App view Related information Handling the center display

• Handling the center display (p. 132) Many of the vehicle's functions and features
• Center display views (p. 133) can be controlled and adjusted from the cen-
ter display. The center display is a
• Apps (p. 537)
touchscreen that reacts to taps and other
• Symbols in the center display status bar gestures.
(p. 135)
• Google Maps (p. 578) Using the center display's
touchscreen
• Bluetooth Media Player (p. 542)
The screen reacts differently depending on
• Phone (p. 544) whether it is touched by dragging, swiping or
• Climate system controls (p. 240) tapping. It is possible to e.g. move between
different views, mark objects and scroll in a
• Sound settings (p. 536)
list by touching the screen in various ways.
• Changing system language (p. 138)
The center display is an optic touchscreen.
(p. 138) Two people can interact with the screen at the
same time, e.g. to adjust climate system set-
• Cleaning the center display (p. 791)
tings for both the driver and passenger sides.
• Message in the center display (p. 144)
• Charging in the vehicle's center display CAUTION
(p. 421)
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
View for downloaded apps (third-party apps) and
apps for integrated functions. this could cause scratches.
NOTE NOTE
The climate system can be used to cool Wearing gloves can limit or prevent
down the media system in the center dis- touchscreen response.
play if needed. In these cases, the message
Cooling infotainment system will be
shown in the instrument panel.
132
Returning to Home view from another Center display views Notifications view
view The center display is automatically activated The vehicle's notifications are collected at the
– Briefly press the home button below the when the driver's door is opened. top of the screen.
center display. Pull the tab down to access Notifications
> The most recent Home view mode will Home view
view. Notifications shows missed calls or
be displayed. Home view is the view displayed when the
information about the vehicle. User profiles are
screen is activated. It consists of four tiles.
also accessed from Notifications view.
Related information You can choose which apps will be shown in
• Moving apps in the center display To leave Notification view, tap outside of Noti-
Home view tiles. An app that is selected from
(p. 135) fications, press the Home button or swipe
App view starts in the respective tile in Home
upwards. The views behind will become visi-
• Keyboard in the center display (p. 136) view.
ble again and can be used.
The tiles are dynamic and show the last-used
apps, such as navigation, media, phone, etc. Climate view
Tap an app to expand it or swipe from the left At the bottom of the screen are buttons for
in the tile to view additional apps. App view, settings and the most common cli-
mate settings, such as temperature and seat
heating settings.
NOTE
When the vehicle is moving: Tap the temperature button at the bottom
center of the center display to open Climate
• Certain applications (e.g. the Owner's view and additional settings options.
Manual) may be deactivated.
Tap the Home button to close Climate view.
• Certain messages (e.g. those gener-
ated by apps) will be shortened. Camera view
Camera view starts automatically when gear
Status bar selector position R is used.
Current vehicle activities are shown at the top Camera view shows the Park Assist Cameras
of the screen in the status bar. The status bar (PAC2), which display a 360° panoramic view
shows information such as active user profile, as well as separate views for each of the four
network and connection status as well as the cameras: rear, front, left and right.
clock.
2 Park Assist Camera }}
133
|| Camera view closes automatically when the Related information Handling tiles in the center display
vehicle reaches a certain speed or can be • Handling tiles in the center display The center display's Home and App views
closed manually by tapping or the Home (p. 134) contain expandable tiles.
button. • Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 135) Expanding an app in Home view
App view To expand an app:
Tap toward the bottom of the center dis- • Resetting user data (p. 138)
– Tap the desired app. When an app is
play. • User profiles (p. 139)
opened, the other apps are temporarily
App view provides access to the vehicle's pre- • Climate system controls (p. 240) hidden.
installed and downloaded apps. From App • Apps (p. 537) Opening an app provides access to its
view, you can download and install additional
• Center display overview (p. 131) basic functions.
apps and access the Owner's Manual.
• Charging in the vehicle's center display To close an app:
Tap an app to open it in full-screen mode. (p. 421)
– Press briefly on the Home button under
User profiles • Moving apps in the center display the center display.
Pull down Notifications view to access user (p. 135)
profiles. Expanding a tile in App view
Expanding a tile:
Many of the vehicle's settings can be custom-
ized to the user's personal preferences and – Tap .
saved in different user profiles. > The tile expands and provides access to
additional apps.
Settings that can be saved in a user profile
include screens, mirrors, front seat, navigation, Closing an expanded tile:
audio and media system, language and voice The tile can be closed in two ways:
–
control.
You can add profiles, log out or switch • Tap .
between profiles in Notifications view. • Briefly press the Home button at the
bottom of the center display.
134
Moving apps in the center display Symbols in the center display

App view consists of four tiles in which apps status bar
can be moved and arranged according to Overview of symbols displayed in the center
preference. Expand a tile for access to other display status bar.
apps in addition to those shown. The status bar shows current vehicle activities
Recently installed apps are placed in App and in certain cases, also their status. Due to
view. the limited space in the status bar, not all sym-
bols will be displayed at all times. Several
1. Open App view.
examples are provided below.
Tap .
2. Press and hold an app. Symbol Meaning
Center display's home button. > It can then be moved. Connected to the Internet.
You can always press the Home button to 3. Drag the app to the desired location in
Roaming activated.
return to Home view. App view.
Swipe the screen to scroll up or down in the Bluetooth device connected.
Related information
view to display information outside the view.
• Handling the center display (p. 132) Information sent to and from
• Center display views (p. 133)
NOTE
GPS.
There must be at least one app in every tile. Clock.
Wireless phone charging.

NOTE
Apps cannot be situated at spots already in
Related information
use. • Center display views (p. 133)
• Message in the center display (p. 144)
Related information • Internet connection (p. 556)
• Apps (p. 537) • Wireless phone charger* (p. 549)
• Handling the center display (p. 132) • Phone (p. 544)
• Date and time (p. 98)
Keyboard in the center display Variants of letters or characters Changing keyboard language in
You can use the keyboard in the center dis- Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can the center display
play to enter characters or to switch to hand- be entered by pressing and holding the letter In order to toggle between keyboard lan-
writing mode to "write" letters and charac- or character. A box containing possible vari- guages, the languages must first be added
ters on the screen. ants of the letter or character will appear. Tap under Settings.
The keyboard can be used to enter characters the desired variant. If no variant is selected,
(letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) to e.g. send the original letter/character will be used. Adding or deleting languages in
text messages from the vehicle, enter pass- Settings
words or search for information in the digital Related information The keyboard is automatically set to the same
Owner's Manual. • Changing keyboard language in the center language as the system language. The key-
display (p. 136) board language can be changed manually
The keyboard will only appear when it is possi-
ble to enter text on the screen.
• Entering characters, letters and words by without affecting the system language.
hand in the center display (p. 137)
This button hides the key- 1. Tap at the bottom of the center dis-
• Handling the center display (p. 132) play.
board. In cases where this is
not possible, the button will • Handling text messages (p. 548)
2. Tap System, Languages and input,
not be displayed. Keyboard.
3. Select one or more languages in the list.
> It is now possible to toggle between
Used to change to handwrit- the selected languages using the key-
ing mode. board.
If no language has been selected under
Settings, the keyboard will remain in the
same language as the vehicle's system lan-
guage.
Tap the confirm button over the keyboard
once to confirm the text that has been
entered. The button's appearance differs
depending on the context.
136
Toggling between keyboard languages Entering characters, letters and Handwriting characters/letters/words
If more than one language words by hand in the center 1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts
has been selected in display of a word in the field for handwritten let-
Settings, the button in the Characters, letters and words can be entered ters. Write the word or part of the word
keyboard can be used to in the center display by handwriting them on vertically or horizontally.
switch between the different the touchscreen. > A number of suggestions for charac-
languages. Tap the button on the center ters, letters or words will be displayed.
To toggle between keyboard languages from display's keyboard to switch The most likely will be shown at the top
the list: from the keyboard to hand- of the list.
writing mode.
1. Press and hold the button.
CAUTION
> A list will appear.
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
2. Select the desired language. If more than Return to the standard key- this could cause scratches.
four languages have been selected, you board layout.
can browse through the list shown on the
2. The character/letter/word will be entered
keyboard.
automatically after a short pause if no
> The keyboard and word suggestions other action is taken.
will be adapted to the selected lan-
> The character/letter/word at the top of
guage.
the list will be used. Tap one of the
To change keyboard language without display- other characters/letters/words in the
ing the list: list to use it instead.
– Briefly press the button. Related information
> The keyboard layout will change to the • Keyboard in the center display (p. 136)
next language in the list without dis-
playing the list.
Related information
• Keyboard in the center display (p. 136)
137
Changing system units of Changing system language Resetting user data

measurement Language settings are adjusted via the center User data and system settings can be reset
Measurement unit settings are adjusted via display. via the center display.
the center display. NOTE Settings that can be reset to default values:
1. Tap . • app settings
2. Proceed to System, Units. could mean that certain owner's informa- • network settings (admin only)
3. Select the desired unit standard for dis- tion will not comply with national or local • factory reset (admin only) – profiles, user
tance, speed, temperature, etc. laws and regulations. Do not change to a data, connected keys, personal settings,
language you do not speak well, as it can etc. are deleted.
> The units in the instrument panel and
be difficult to find your way back through
center display are changed. If the vehicle changes owners, all user data
the menu.
and system settings should be reset to factory
Related information defaults.
• Center display overview (p. 131) 1. Tap .
Resetting settings via the center display
• Resetting user data (p. 138) 2. Proceed to System, Languages and
1. Tap .
• Changing system language (p. 138) input.
2. Go to System, Reset settings to reset
3. Select the desired language. the desired setting.
> The language in the instrument panel
To reset network settings or reset the vehicle
and center display is changed.
to factory default settings, the user profile
When the system language is changed, the must have administrative rights, which can be
Google Assistant language will also be obtained by tapping Become an admin in
changed. If another language is desired for the Profile view. All of the vehicle's keys must also
Google Assistant, it can be selected separately be in the vehicle to perform a factory reset.
in the Google Assistant menu.
Related information
Related information • Center display overview (p. 131)
• Center display overview (p. 131) • Change of ownership when the Volvo Cars
• Resetting user data (p. 138) app is connected to the vehicle (p. 574)
(p. 138)
138
• Approval of terms and conditions and data User profiles Personal settings
collection (p. 34) Many of the vehicle's settings can be saved in Personal settings are saved to an active pro-
• Profile settings (p. 141) a personal user profile. file.
The first time the vehicle is used, or after a fac- There are two sorts of personal settings:
tory reset, the Owner profile is preinstalled
and active in the vehicle. • Function settings – settings related to
driver support, driver's side climate con-
The Owner profile has administrative rights trol, the driver's seat, the power door mir-
and cannot be deleted. rors, as well as interior and exterior light-
Pull down Notifications view to access user ing. These settings retain their values
profiles. when a profile is added or when logging
out from an active profile.
A symbol is shown in the status bar along
with the initials of the active profile. When the
• Audio and media settings – settings rela-
ted to navigation, audio and media sys-
system is logged out, no symbol/initials will be
tem, apps and linked accounts. These set-
shown in the status bar.
tings go back to default values when a
Automatic profile selection profile is added or when logging out from
A key can be linked to a profile. This profile an active profile.
and all of its settings will then be selected Global settings
every time this specific key is identified when The global settings are not changed when the
unlocking or opening the driver's door. profile is changed. They remain the same
The last-used profile will be activated if a key regardless of which profile is currently active.
is not connected to a specific profile. Examples of global settings are passenger-
side climate control, memory function for the
General information about settings passenger seat, and some system settings.
Changes to the vehicle's settings can be saved
in different ways depending on which cate-
gory the settings belong to. The settings can
be personal, global or customized for one driv-
ing cycle.
}}
139
|| Default settings for driving cycle Managing user profiles 3. Selectable profiles are shown.
A number of settings revert to default set- It is possible to change to another profile 4. Select a profile.
tings3 after one driving cycle. even if the key used is connected to another > The profile has now been selected and
These settings can be adjusted while driving. profile. the system will load the settings stored
At the next driving cycle, the settings will Creating a profile in the selected profile.
revert to default values. 1. Pull down Notifications view to access
Related information user profiles. NOTE
• Managing user profiles (p. 140) 2. Tap on an active profile. To stop the seat's movement when switch-
ing to a different profile, press any of the
• Profile settings (p. 141) 3. Select New profile. buttons on the front seat cushion.
• Connect key to user profile (p. 142) 4. The profile is created.
• Storing positions for seats and mirrors > The profile will be set as the active pro- Logging out of a profile
(p. 198) file. 1. Pull down Notifications view to access
• Storing positions for seats, mirrors and You will be guided through an interactive flow user profiles.
head-up display* (p. 199) to set up the new profile. From here you can 2. Select Log out.
• Using stored positions for seats and mir- select to pair a phone with the vehicle or con-
> You are logged out of the profile and it
rors (p. 200) nect different accounts, e.g. Volvo ID, to the
is no longer possible to access
• Using stored positions for seats, mirrors profile. Certain steps can be skipped to be fin-
accounts connected to that profile.
and head-up display* (p. 201) ished later.
3. The system goes into logged-out mode
• Connecting an account to a user profile
It is possible to create up to six different pro- and changed settings are not saved to any
(p. 142) profile.
files.
• Connect key to user profile (p. 142)
Selecting a profile NOTE
1. Pull down Notifications view to access
Creating, selecting and logging out of a
user profiles.
user profile is only possible when the vehi-
2. Tap on an active profile. cle is at a standstill.
3 Default settings may vary depending on market.
Related information Profile settings 4. The system goes into logged-out mode
• User profiles (p. 139) From profile settings, among other things, it and changed settings are not saved to any
is possible to change profile name, add and profile.
delete connected keys, connect accounts
• Profile settings (p. 141)
(e.g. Volvo ID), activate screen lock and
Becoming an administrator
• Connect key to user profile (p. 142) A profile can be set as administrator.
delete an active profile.
• Connecting an account to a user profile 1. Tap .
(p. 142) Activating screen lock
When screen lock is activated, a passcode is 2. Select Profiles.
• Approval of terms and conditions and data required to use the active profile.
collection (p. 34) 3. Select Become an admin.
• Connect key to user profile (p. 142) 1. Tap .

Changing a profile name
2. Select Profiles. 1. Tap .
3. Select Screen lock. 2. Select Profiles.
4. Select type of screen lock and activate. 3. Tap Edit next to the current profile name.
> The screen lock will be shown on the 4. Change the profile name and confirm the
center display when switching to a pro- change.
file with a passcode as well as each
time the system is restarted. Related information
Deleting a profile
Settings that have been saved for one or more • Managing user profiles (p. 140)
profiles can only be deleted when the vehicle • Connecting an account to a user profile
is stationary. (p. 142)
1. Tap . • Connect key to user profile (p. 142)
2. Select Profiles. • Resetting user data (p. 138)
3. Select Delete this profile.

• Connecting the Volvo Cars app to the
vehicle (p. 567)
> User information and connections
linked to the profile are deleted.
• Approval of terms and conditions and data
collection (p. 34)
141
Connecting an account to a user Connect key to user profile

profile A key can be linked to a profile. This profile
An account can be connected to the selected and all of its settings will then be automati-
user profile. Examples of accounts that can cally selected every time this specific key is
be added are Volvo ID and Google account. identified when unlocking or opening the
driver's door.
Adding an account The first time the key is used, it is not con-
1. Tap . nected to any specific profile. The Owner pro-
file or the last-used profile is automatically
2. Select Profiles.
activated when the vehicle is started.
3. Select Accounts.
Connecting a key to a profile
4. Select to add an account.
Location of the backup reader in the tunnel console.
> A list will appear of the accounts that
NOTE
can be added.
If the key was previously linked to another
5. Select an account.
profile, the link will be moved from the pre-
Then follow the instructions provided. The vious profile to the active profile.
instructions depend on what type of account
is selected.
1. Tap .
Related information 2. Select Profiles.
3. Select Connect key to profile to connect
• Profile settings (p. 141) the selected key to a profile.
A profile can only be connected to the key cur-
rently being used in the vehicle. If there are Location of the backup reader in the tunnel console.
any other keys in the vehicle, the message
More than one key found. Place the key Disconnecting a key from a profile
you want to connect on the backup reader. 1. Tap .
will be displayed 2. Select Profiles.
142
3. Select Disconnect key from profile to

delete the active profile from the con-
nected key.
A key can be deleted from a profile even if the
key is not inside the vehicle.
Related information
• Keys (p. 267)
143
Message in the center display

The following illustration shows how mes-
sages and notifications may appear in the
center display in different situations.
Shown at the top of the center display. Related information

Requires immediate action and may have • Center display overview (p. 131)
up to three buttons allowing the user to
manage the message. Dismiss by swiping
right or left. The message will then be
saved in Notifications view.
Shown as a window in the center display
and requires immediate action. May have
1-3 buttons for management.
Shown for a few seconds at the top of the
center display. It is not possible to do any-
thing with the notification, and it is not
saved anywhere.
144
Head-up display* • road sign information4 CAUTION

The head-up display can help make driving • warnings The information is projected from a display
easier by projecting information from the
Activating or deactivating the head-up unit located in the dashboard. To help pre-
instrument panel onto the windshield, allow-
vent damage to the display unit's glass
ing the driver to concentrate on the road display
cover, do not place any objects on the
ahead. 1. Tap . glass and prevent objects from falling onto
2. Select Controls. it.
3. Under Displays, activate or deactivate
Head-up display. NOTE
People with certain types of vision prob-
NOTE lems may experience headaches or eye
The driver's ability to see information in the strain when using the head-up display.
head-up display may be impeded by
• the use of polarizing sunglasses Related information
• a driving posture in which the driver is • Damaged windshield (p. 686)
not centered in the seat • Cleaning the head-up display* (p. 792)
The head-up display projects information from • objects on the display unit's glass
the instrument panel onto the windshield in cover
front of the driver. This information can only be
seen from the driver's position.
• unfavorable lighting conditions.
Examples of information that can be dis-

played:
• cruise control
• speed
• navigation
• telephone call
4 The function is available in certain markets.
Head-up display settings* Click on the setting you would like to adjust. Click on the setting you would like to adjust.
You can adjust the position, brightness or – You can use the right-side steering wheel – You can use the right-side steering wheel
rotation of the head-up display. keypad to adjust the position or bright- keypad to rotate the display.
ness.
System settings
Settings can be adjusted when the vehicle is
started and a projected image is displayed on
the windshield.
1. Tap .
2. Select Controls.
3. Select the setting you would like to adjust
under Displays.
Adjusting position or brightness
The information in the display is automatically
adapted to the background lighting condi- Rotate counterclockwise
tions. Adjusting the brightness in the vehicle's Decreasing brightness
other displays will also affect the brightness of Rotate clockwise
the head-up display. Increasing brightness
Confirm
Raising position
Related information
Lowering position
Confirm • User profiles (p. 139)
Rotate • Storing positions for seats and mirrors
If you replace the windshield or display unit, (p. 198)
the head-up display may need to be rotated. • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 199)
Voice control with the Google forecasts, or manage your Google Calendar5,
Assistant you can also control a number of functions in
The Google Assistant, which is integrated in the vehicle using your voice. These include:
the vehicle, makes it possible to control a • media
number of functions, such as the climate sys-
tem, Google Maps for navigation, FM radio* • FM radio*
and phone, using your voice. • phone and text messages6
What is the Google Assistant? • navigation via Google Maps

The Google Assistant is a virtual assistant that • climate
enables you control various functions in the
vehicle using your voice and get assistance NOTE
with other things, such as searching for infor-
A poor Internet connection can limit the
mation, getting weather forecasts, managing
number of available functions.
your Google Calendar, etc.
The assistant understands natural speech, i.e.,
no knowledge of specific commands is nee- WARNING
ded to get the system to perform different The driver is always responsible for ensur-
tasks. Instead, the user can speak freely with ing that the vehicle is operated in a safe
the system, which will respond with answers manner and that all applicable traffic regu-
to questions or will notify the user that it did lations are followed.
not understand what was said.
Related information
• Using voice control (p. 148)
Voice control microphone
• Google Maps (p. 578)
What areas can be controlled using
the Google Assistant?
In addition to asking the assistant to search
for information on Google, search for weather
5 Requires Internet connection.

6 Dictating text messages is only possible for phones with Android or iOS 13 or later.
Using voice control home address for the Google account Related information
The Google Assistant enables you to use your used to log in. • Voice control with the Google Assistant
voice to control various functions in the vehi- • "Read my messages" – Have text mes- (p. 147)
cle or to ask for other information, such as a sages sent to your phone read out loud. • Connecting an account to a user profile
weather forecast. (p. 142)
• "Raise the temperature" – Raise the
Starting the Google Assistant temperature in the passenger compart-
The Google Assistant can be started in three ment.
different ways: • "Play music" – Play music in selected
media app.
• saying the voice command "Ok Google"
or "Hey Google"7 Logging in with a Google account means that
the Assistant will be more personalized when
• briefly pressing the steering wheel button
the vehicle is connected to the Internet. For
for voice control example, it is possible to call contacts stored
• pressing the microphone in the center dis- in contacts.google.com or ask about informa-
play . tion entered in Google Calendar.
The system indicates that it is active and lis-
tening by emitting a brief audible signal8 and a NOTE
graphic acknowledgment in the center dis- Google Assistant is not yet available in all
play. languages. Read more at
support.google.com for availability or, if
Voice control examples possible, try another language.
After the system starts, you can give instruc-
tions and ask questions in natural speech.
Here are some examples of how to use voice NOTE
control. The above instructions provide a general
• "Navigate home" – Get route guidance description and include third-party suppli-
to the address stored in Maps as the ers. Availability, procedures and functional-
ity may vary or be changed.
7 "Hey Google" only works in some languages.

8 When voice commands are used to start the system, the audible signal will only sound if you pause before continuing your instructions.
148
LIGHTING
LIGHTING
Lighting control and panel Position Meaning Position Meaning

The lighting panel and controls can be used
to adjust both exterior and interior lighting. US: Daytime running lights and Front daytime running lights and
The lighting ring on the left-side steering parking lights are off. rear parking lights in daylight.A
wheel lever can be used to activate and Canada: Daytime running lights Low beams and parking lights in
adjust the exterior lighting. Both exterior and and parking lights are on. weak daylight or dark conditions
interior lighting can be activated and adjusted or when the front fog lights*
via the center display. High beam flash can be used.
and/or rear fog light are acti-
Parking lights when the vehicle vated.
Exterior Lights is parked.
Active high beam can be acti-
US: Daytime running lights are vated.
off.
High beams can be activated
Canada: Daytime running lights when low beams are on.
are on.
High beam flash can be used.
Active high beams on/off.
Low beams and parking lights.
High beams can be activated. A US models only: Daytime running lights and parking lights
can be deactivated in the center display.
NOTE
Lighting ring position.
Volvo recommends use of Daytime
When the vehicle's ignition is in mode II, the Running Lights in the US. Its use is man-
lighting ring positions have the following func- datory in Canada.
tions:
When the vehicle is started, the lighting ring Volvo recommends using position when
positions have the following functions: the vehicle is in motion.
LIGHTING
WARNING • Using Guidance Light (p. 160) Adjusting light functions via the
• Welcome Light (p. 161) center display
The vehicle lighting system cannot in all sit-
uations determine when the daylight is too • Farewell lighting (p. 161) Light functions can be adjusted and activated
weak or not strong enough, e.g. when via the center display.
there is fog or rain. 1. Tap in the center display.
The driver is always responsible for driving 2. Then press Controls.
the vehicle with lighting that is safe for the
traffic conditions and as specified by appli- 3. Adjust the desired function for interior or
cable traffic regulations. exterior lighting.
Related information
Exterior and interior lighting
Both exterior and interior lighting can be
adjusted via the center display. • Welcome Light (p. 161)
• Interior Lighting (p. 161)
Related information
• Adjusting light functions via the center
display (p. 151)
• Interior Lighting (p. 161)
• Parking lights (p. 152)
• Using turn signals (p. 156)
• Using high beam (p. 154)
• Low beams (p. 153)
• Front fog lights/corner illumination*
(p. 157)
• Rear fog light (p. 158)
• Active Bending Lights* (p. 156)
• Brake lights (p. 159)
• Emergency brake lights (p. 159)
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 160)
LIGHTING
Parking lights conditions, the parking lights and low beams Daytime running lights
The parking lights can be used to help other will be illuminated. The vehicle has sensors that detect ambient
road users see the vehicle if it is stopped or Canadian models: If the vehicle is in Drive lighting conditions. With the lighting ring in
parked. Use the lighting ring on the steering mode, the daytime running lights will be illu- the position, the daytime running lights
wheel lever to turn on the parking lights. minated instead of the front parking lights. will always be activated when the ignition is
in mode II. In weak daylight or dark condi-
US models: When mode is selected, tions, the headlights automatically switch to
the daytime running lights can be deactivated low beams.
in the center display. The parking lights will
also be deactivated. In weak daylight or dark The vehicle has sensors that detect ambient
conditions, the parking lights and low beams lighting conditions. With the lighting ring in
will be illuminated. the position, the daytime running lights
will be on. In weak daylight or dark condi-
In dark conditions, the rear parking lights also
tions, the headlights automatically switch to
illuminate when the trunk lid is opened to alert
low beams.
following traffic. This happens regardless of
what position the lighting ring or ignition is in.
Lighting ring in the parking light position.
illuminate when the tailgate is opened to alert
Turn the lighting ring to the position to following traffic. This happens regardless of
turn on the parking lights (the license plate what position the lighting ring or ignition is in.
lighting will also illuminate).
Canadian models: If the ignition is in the II illuminate when the tailgate is opened to alert
position, the daytime running lights will illumi- following traffic.
nate instead of the front parking lights. With
the lighting ring in this position, the parking Related information
lights will remain on regardless of what mode • Lighting control and panel (p. 150)
the ignition is in. • Ignition modes (p. 447) Lighting ring in AUTO position.
• Usage mode (p. 449) With the steering wheel lever's lighting ring in
US models: When mode is selected,
the position, the daytime running lights
the daytime running lights can be deactivated • Daytime running lights (p. 152)
in the center display. The parking lights will (DRL1) will illuminate when the vehicle is
also be deactivated. In weak daylight or dark driven in daylight conditions. The headlights
152
LIGHTING
will switch automatically from daytime run- WARNING Low beams

ning lights to low beams in weak daylight or When driving with the lighting ring in the
dark conditions. The headlights will also The system is an energy saving aid – it
cannot in all situations determine when the position, low beam will be automati-
switch to low beams if the front* and/or rear
daylight is too weak or not strong enough, cally activated in weak daylight or dark condi-
fog lights are activated. e.g. when there is fog or rain. tions, when the ignition is in the II position.
US models: When mode is selected, The driver is always responsible for driving When driving with the lighting ring in the
the daytime running lights can be deactivated the vehicle with lighting that is safe for the
position, low beam will be automati-
in the center display. The parking lights will traffic conditions and as specified by appli-
cable traffic regulations. cally activated in weak daylight or dark condi-
also be deactivated. In weak daylight or dark
tions, or when the vehicle is in drive mode.
conditions, the parking lights and low beams
will be illuminated. Related information
US models: With the lighting ring in the
or position, the daytime running lights • Ignition modes (p. 447)

will be off. • Usage mode (p. 449)
Canadian models: With the lighting ring in • Low beams (p. 153)
the or position, the daytime run-
ning lights will be on.
NOTE
Volvo recommends use of Daytime
Lighting ring in AUTO position.
Running Lights in the US. Its use is man-
datory in Canada. With the lighting ring in the position, the
low beams will be automatically activated if:
• the front fog lights* are activated
• the rear fog light is activated
• the rear and front fog lights are activated.
1 Daytime Running Lights }}
LIGHTING
|| With the lighting ring in the position, the Using high beam . Activate high beams by moving the
low beams will also be automatically activated High beam is operated via the left-hand steering wheel lever forward.
if the rear fog light is activated. steering wheel lever. High beam is the vehi- Deactivate by moving the steering wheel
cle's strongest lighting and should be used lever backward.
With the lighting ring in the position,
when driving in dark conditions, provided it
low beams will always be on when the ignition
does not blind other road users, to improve
is in the II position. NOTE
visibility.
With the lighting ring in the position, When high beams are activated, they can
low beams will always be on when the vehicle be deactivated by moving the steering
is in drive mode. wheel lever back to either position or
.
Tunnel detection
The vehicle will detect if it enters a tunnel and
shift from daytime running lights to low When the high beams are activated, the
beams. symbol will be illuminated in the instrument
Note that the left-hand steering wheel lever panel.
must be in position for tunnel detection Related information
to work. • Lighting control and panel (p. 150)
Related information Steering wheel lever with lighting ring. • Active high beam (p. 155)
High beam flash
• Ignition modes (p. 447)
Move the steering wheel lever slightly
• Usage mode (p. 449) backward to the high beam flash mode.
• Daytime running lights (p. 152) The high beams will illuminate until the
lever is released.
High beams
The high beams can be activated when
the lighting ring is in mode 2 or
2 When the low beams are on.
154
LIGHTING
Active high beam The lighting ring will then return to . WARNING
Active high beam uses the camera sensor at When active high beams are activated, a white
Automatic high beam is an aid in using the
the top of the windshield. The camera sensor symbol will be displayed in the instru- best possible light based on prevailing con-
registers the headlights of oncoming vehicles ment panel. When high beams are on, the ditions.
or the taillights of vehicles ahead and auto- symbol will be blue.
The driver is always responsible for man-
matically switches from high beams to low
If active high beams are deactivated when the ually switching between high and low
beams. beam when traffic situations or weather
high beams are on, the headlights will auto-
matically switch to low beams. conditions require this.
Limitations for active high beams Related information

The camera sensor on which the function is • Lighting control and panel (p. 150)
based has limitations.
• Using high beam (p. 154)
If this symbol and the message
Active High Beam Temporarily
• Camera and radar unit limitations (p. 393)
unavailable is displayed in the
instrument panel, switching between
high and low beams must be done manually.
The same applies if this symbol
Active high beams is indicated by the symbol. along with the message
Windscreen sensor blocked See
This function can be used in dark conditions
Owner's manual is displayed.
when the vehicle's speed is approx. 20 km/h
(approx. 12 mph) or higher. The function can Active high beams may be temporarily unavail-
also detect street lighting. When the camera able in certain situations, e.g. heavy fog or
sensor no longer detects an approaching vehi- rain. When active high beams become availa-
cle or a vehicle ahead, the headlights will ble again, or the windshield sensors are no
return to high beams after a second or two. longer blocked, the message will disappear
and active high beams will be reactivated.
Activating active high beams
Active high beams can be activated and deac-
tivated by turning the lighting ring on the left-
side steering wheel lever to position .
155
LIGHTING
Using turn signals Continuous flashing sequence Active Bending Lights*

The vehicle's turn signals are controlled using Move the lever up or down as far as possi- Active Bending Lights (ABL) are designed to
the left-side steering wheel lever. The turn ble. help provide extra illumination in curves and
signals flash three times or continuously, The lever will stop in its end position and can intersections. Depending on equipment level,
depending on how far up or down the lever is be moved back manually or automatically by vehicles with LED3 headlights* may be equip-
moved. moving the steering wheel. ped with Active Bending Lights.
NOTE
If the turn signal indicator flashes more
quickly than normal, refer to the message
in the instrument panel.
Related information
• Adjusting light functions via the center
display (p. 151)
Turn signals. • Replacing rear turn signal bulbs (p. 787) Headlight pattern without Active Bending Lights
(left), and with (right).
Triple flash indicator
Move the steering wheel lever up or down Active Bending Lights follow the movement of
to the first position and release. The turn the steering wheel to help provide extra illumi-
signals will flash three times. nation in curves and intersections, helping to
improve visibility for the driver.
NOTE If a fault is detected in the system, the

symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel
This automatic flashing sequence can be
and a message will be displayed.
interrupted by immediately moving the
lever in the opposite direction. Active Bending lights are only activated in
weak daylight or darkness or when the light-
3 LED (Light Emitting Diode)
LIGHTING
ing ring on the steering wheel lever is in posi- Front fog lights/corner Tap the button to activate or deactivate the
tion . The vehicle must be moving with illumination* function. The symbol in the instrument
low beams on. The fog lights can be activated manually panel comes on when the front fog lights are
when driving in fog and are activated auto- on.
Active Bending lights are only activated in
weak daylight or darkness or when the light- matically when backing up to help augment The front fog lights turn off automatically
ing ring on the steering wheel lever is in posi- the backup light. when the ignition is switched off or when the
tion . The vehicle must be moving with If the vehicle is equipped with corner illumi- lighting ring is in position .
high beams or low beams on. nation*, the fog lights are activated automati-
cally in weak daylight or dark conditions to NOTE
Active Bending lights are only activated in
illuminate the area diagonally in front of the
weak daylight or darkness or when the light- Regulations concerning fog light use vary
vehicle.
ing ring on the steering wheel lever is in posi- from country to country.
tion . The vehicle must be moving with
high beams or low beams on.
Cornering illumination*
Related information The front fog lamps can include the cornering
• Adjusting light functions via the center lights function, which temporarily illuminates
display (p. 151) the area diagonally in front of the car in the
direction the steering wheel is turned on a
• Front fog lights/corner illumination* sharp bend, or in the direction shown by the
(p. 157) direction indicators.
The function is activated in weak daylight or
dark conditions when the lighting ring is in
Front fog lights button. or mode and the vehicle speed is
less than about 30 km/h (about 20 mph).
The front fog lights can be turned on when the
ignition is in mode II and the lighting ring is in Both cornering illumination are also illumi-
nated as a complement to the taillights when
position , or .
reversing. They will go out when the vehicle
The front fog lights can be turned on when the drives forward again.
vehicle is in drive mode and the lighting ring is
in position , or .
}}
LIGHTING
|| Related information Rear fog light The rear fog light can only be switched on
• Lighting control and panel (p. 150) The rear fog light is considerably brighter when the ignition is in II mode and the lighting
• Ignition modes (p. 447) than ordinary taillights and should only be ring is in position or .
used to help other road users see the vehicle
• Usage mode (p. 449)
when visibility is reduced by conditions such
The rear fog light can only be used when:
• Rear fog light (p. 158) as fog, snow, smoke or dust. • when the vehicle is in drive mode and the
• Active Bending Lights* (p. 156) lighting ring is in position or
• Adjusting light functions via the center • when the vehicle is in drive mode and the
display (p. 151) lighting ring is in position and the
fog lights are on.
Press the button to switch on/off. The
symbol in the instrument panel illuminates
when the rear fog light is on.
The rear fog light turns off automatically when:
• the ignition is off or the lighting ring is in
the position.
Rear fog light button.
• the lighting ring is in the position
The fog lights are located on the right and left and the front fog lights are turned off.
sides of the rear of the vehicle. The rear fog light turns off automatically when
The rear fog light consists of a light on the rear the ignition is switched off or when the steer-
of the vehicle on the driver's side. ing wheel lever lighting ring is in position
The rear fog light can only be used when: or .
The rear fog light turns off automatically when:
• ignition mode II is active and the lighting
ring is in position or • when the lighting ring is in position
• ignition mode II is active, the lighting ring • the vehicle is switched off
is in position and the fog lights are
on.
• the lighting ring is in the position
and the front fog lights are turned off.
LIGHTING
NOTE Brake lights Emergency brake lights

The brake lights are automatically illuminated The emergency brake lights are activated to
Regulations concerning rear fog light use
when braking. warn following vehicles of hard braking.
vary from country to country.
The brake lights are illuminated when the
This function causes an additional taillight on
brake pedal is depressed and when the brakes
each side of the vehicle to illuminate.
Related information are automatically applied by a driver support
The emergency brake lights are activated in
• Checking trailer lights* (p. 516) system.
the event of hard braking or if the ABS system
• Lighting control and panel (p. 150) The brake light also comes on during regener- is activated and the vehicle is traveling at a
• Front fog lights/corner illumination* ative braking if the braking effect exceeds a high speed.
(p. 157) certain level.
After the driver decelerates to a low speed and
• Ignition modes (p. 447) Related information then releases the brake, the brake lights
• Replacing the rear fog light bulb (p. 790) • Emergency brake lights (p. 159) resume their normal function and the lights go
out.
• Brake functions (p. 450)
• Replacing the brake light bulb (p. 789) Related information
• Driver support systems (p. 308)
• Brakes (p. 450)
LIGHTING
Hazard warning flashers Using Guidance Light

Hazard warning flashers warn other road Some of the exterior lights remain on to illu-
users by all of the vehicle's turn signals being minate the area around the vehicle and work
activated at the same time. The function can as Guidance Light after the vehicle is locked.
be used to warn about a traffic hazard. To activate the function:
1. Make sure the vehicle is switched off.
2. Push the left-side steering wheel lever
toward the dashboard and release.
3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.
> The symbol illuminates in the instru-
Hazard warning flashers button. ment panel to indicate that the function
is activated and exterior lighting
Press the button to activate the hazard warn-
switches on: Parking lights, headlights,
ing flashers.
license plate lighting and outer door
The hazard warning flashers are automatically handle lighting*.
activated in a collision.
The Guidance Light remains illuminated for
about 60 seconds.
NOTE
Regulations concerning the use of hazard
Related information
warning flashers may vary from country to • Adjusting light functions via the center
display (p. 151)
country.
• Welcome Light (p. 161)
Related information • Farewell lighting (p. 161)
• Emergency brake lights (p. 159) • Switching off the vehicle (p. 446)
• Using turn signals (p. 156) • Switching off the vehicle (p. 446)
• Braking assist after a collision (p. 461)
LIGHTING
Welcome Light Farewell lighting Interior Lighting

The Welcome Light is activated when the Farewell lighting is activated when the driver The passenger compartment is equipped
vehicle is unlocked and can be used to pro- exits the vehicle. with several different types of lighting, e.g.
vide light as you walk toward the vehicle. When the driver exits the vehicle after driving, general lighting, adjustable interior lighting
The function is activated when the vehicle is the parking lights and license plate lights will and reading lights.
unlocked. The parking lights, overhead lights, remain on. The lights will stay illuminated for
footwell lights and trunk/cargo compartment about two minutes or until the vehicle is Front overhead lighting
lights are activated in daylight conditions. In locked.
weak daylight or dark conditions, the license
If the lighting ring on the steering wheel lever
plate lighting and outer door handle lighting*
will also be activated, with the light directed is in position , the parking lights will
toward the ground. remain illuminated until they are switched off
manually.
If no door is opened, the lights will remain illu-
minated for approx. 2 minutes. If a door is Related information
opened while the function is activated, the • Adjusting light functions via the center
interior lighting and outer door handle lighting* display (p. 151)
will remain on for a longer period of time. • Using Guidance Light (p. 160)
This function can be activated and deactivated • Keys (p. 267)
in the center display. Lighting and controls in the overhead console.
• Welcome Light (p. 161)
General lighting
Related information • Switching off the vehicle (p. 446)
• Adjusting light functions via the center • Switching off the vehicle (p. 446) Reading light
display (p. 151)
Button for courtesy lighting and automatic
• Using Guidance Light (p. 160)
courtesy lighting
• Keys (p. 267)
Interior Mood Lighting
• Farewell lighting (p. 161)
Reading lights
Briefly press one of the reading lights in the
overhead console to turn it on or off. The light
intensity can be adjusted by pressing and
holding your finger on the light.
}}
LIGHTING
|| Passenger compartment lighting Rear roof lighting*

Briefly press the courtesy lighting button in Reading lights are located in the rear section
the overhead console to switch on or off the of the vehicle and can also be used as general
footwell lighting and general lighting. lighting.
Courtesy lighting auto switch
Press and hold the courtesy lighting button to
activate and deactivate automatic passenger
compartment lighting. When the button lights
up
• white, automatic passenger compartment
lighting is activated
• orange, automatic passenger compart- In vehicles with a panoramic roof*, there are two
ment lighting is deactivated. lighting units on each side of the roof.5
When automatic passenger compartment Gently press the light briefly to turn on or off
lighting is activated, courtesy lighting will illu- the reading lights. The light intensity can be
minate as follows. Reading lights over the rear seat.4 adjusted by pressing and holding your finger
on the light.
Courtesy lighting is switched on when
• the vehicle is unlocked Glove compartment lighting
The glove compartment lighting comes on or
• a side door is opened.
goes off when the glove compartment is
Courtesy lighting is switched off when opened or closed.
• the vehicle is locked
Vanity mirror lighting*
• gear selector position D, R or N is The vanity mirror lighting comes on or goes off
selected when the cover over the mirror is opened or
• a side door is closed closed.
• a side door has been open for approx.
2 minutes.
4 There are also reading lights over the third row of seats*.
5 Does not apply to the third row of seats*.
LIGHTING
Ground lighting* Related information Adjusting interior lighting

The ground lighting comes on or goes off • Adjusting interior lighting (p. 163) Illumination in the vehicle varies depending
when a door is opened or closed. • Lighting control and panel (p. 150) on ignition mode. The interior lighting can be
adjusted via the center display.
Doorsill lighting • Usage mode (p. 449)
The doorsill lighting comes on or goes off • Passenger compartment interior (p. 622) Illumination in the vehicle varies depending
when a door is opened or closed. on usage mode. The interior lighting can be
adjusted via the center display.
Trunk lighting
The trunk lighting comes on or goes off when Adjusting interior lighting via the
the trunk lid is opened or closed. center display
Cargo compartment lighting
The cargo compartment lighting comes on or 2. Then press Controls.
goes off when the cargo compartment is 3. Set a preference for interior lighting.
opened or closed.
Interior Lighting Related information

A number of ambient light sources inside the • Interior Lighting (p. 161)
vehicle can be adjusted via the center display. • Adjusting light functions via the center
display (p. 151)
Lighting in the door storage
compartments
The lights in the door storage compartments • Usage mode (p. 449)
come on when the vehicle is unlocked and go
out when the vehicle is locked. The brightness
can be adjusted via the center display.
Lighting in the tunnel console's front

cup holder*
The lighting in front console cup holders
switches on when the vehicle is unlocked and
off when the vehicle is locked. The brightness
can be adjusted via the center display.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Windows, glass and mirrors • Using the windshield wipers (p. 183) Pinch protection for windows and
The vehicle is equipped with several different • Using the windshield and headlight wash- sun curtains
types of windows, glass and mirrors. Some of ers (p. 188) All power windows and sun curtains* have a
the windows in the car are laminated. pinch protection function that is triggered if
• Activating and deactivating the heated
The windshield has laminated glass. Lamina- rear window and door mirrors (p. 249) anything blocks them while they are opening
ted glass is also available as on option for or closing.
some other glass surfaces1. Laminated glass is If pinch protection is activated, movement will
reinforced, which provides better protection stop and then retract automatically to approx.
against break-ins and improved soundproofing 50 mm (2 inches) from the point at which it
in the passenger compartment. was blocked (or to full ventilation position).
The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass. It is still possible to override pinch protection
when closing is interrupted (e.g. due to ice) by
pressing and holding down the control in the
same direction.
The symbol shows the windows containing lamina- If there is any problem with the pinch protec-
ted glass.23 tion, a reset procedure can be tested.
Related information WARNING

• Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 166) If the 12 V battery is disconnected, the
function for automatic opening and closing
• Panoramic roof* (p. 176) must be reset to function correctly. A reset
• Panoramic roof* (p. 177) is required in order for the pinch protection
to work.
• Power windows (p. 168)
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
• Rearview/door mirrors (p. 173) function for automatic opening and closing
• Using sun curtains* (p. 171) must be reset to function correctly. A reset
is required in order for the pinch protection
• Head-up display* (p. 145) to work.
1 Certain models only.

2 Does not apply to windshield and panoramic roof*, which are always laminated and therefore do not have this symbol.
3 Does not apply to the windshield, which is always laminated and therefore does not have this symbol.
Related information Reset procedure for pinch 2. Then move the control in manual mode
• Reset procedure for pinch protection protection three times upward toward the closed
(p. 167) If you experience any problems with the elec- position.
• Operating the power windows (p. 169) trical functions for the power windows, you > The system will be automatically acti-
can try to perform a reset. vated.
• Using sun curtains* (p. 171)
Power sun curtains* also have a reset proce- If the problem persists, contact a workshop.
• Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 178)
dure that can be tested as needed. Resetting a sun curtain*
WARNING 1. Begin with the sun curtain in the lowered
position.
If the 12 V battery is disconnected, the
function for automatic opening and closing 2. Press and hold the lowering control for
must be reset to function correctly. A reset approx. 15 seconds.
is required in order for the pinch protection
> The system will be automatically acti-
to work.
vated.
function for automatic opening and closing Related information
must be reset to function correctly. A reset • Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
is required in order for the pinch protection tains (p. 166)
to work.
• Operating the power windows (p. 169)
Consult aworkshop4 if you experience any • Using sun curtains* (p. 171)
problems with the panoramic roof.
Consult a workshop5 if you experience any
problems with the sunroof.
Resetting a power window

1. Start with the window in the closed posi-
tion.
4 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Power windows
Every door has a control panel for the power
windows. The driver's door has controls for
operating all windows and for activating the
child safety locks.
The power window in left rear door can also
be operated with the control panel in the
right rear door.
Driver's door control panel. Right-hand rear door controls.

Electric child safety locks* that deactivate Rear window controls.
the controls in the rear doors to prevent
the doors or windows from being opened
from the inside.
Rear window controls.
Front window controls.
WARNING Related information Operating the power windows

• Usage mode (p. 449) All power windows can be operated using the
Children, other passengers or objects can
be trapped by the moving parts. • Ignition modes (p. 447) control panel in the driver's door. The control
panels in the other doors can be used to
• Always operate the windows with cau- • Operating the power windows (p. 169)
operate that particular door.
tion. • Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 166) The power window in left rear door can also
• Do not allow children to play with the be operated with the control panel in the
operating controls. • Reset procedure for pinch protection right rear door.
• Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. (p. 167) The power windows have pinch protection. If
• Remember to always cut the current to there is any problem with the pinch protection,
the power windows by setting the a reset procedure can be tested.
vehicle's electrical system to ignition
mode 0 and then taking the key with
you when leaving the vehicle.
• Remember to always cut the current to
the power windows by removing all
keys from the vehicle when leaving the
driver's seat. Note that if the vehicle's
software is not updated to version
1.106 or later, the power windows
could be reactivated through the center
display or by the driver's seat being
occupied even if the keys are not in the
vehicle.
• Never stick objects or body parts out
through the windows, even if the vehi-
cle electrical system is completely
turned off.
6 For more information on software updates, see https://www.volvocars.com/intl/support. }}
169
|| WARNING position and release it. The window moves

automatically to its fully closed/open posi-
Children, other passengers or objects can tion.
be trapped by the moving parts.
To use the power windows, the ignition must
• Always operate the windows with cau- be in at least mode I or II. After the ignition
tion. has been switched off, the power windows
• Do not allow children to play with the can be operated for several minutes or until a
operating controls. door is opened. Only one control can be oper-
ated at a time.
• Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
• Remember to always cut the current to The power windows can be operated as long
the power windows by setting the as the seat sensor detects an occupant in the
vehicle's electrical system to ignition driver's seat. Only one control can be operated
mode 0 and then taking the key with at a time.
you when leaving the vehicle. It can also be operated using keyless opening*
• Remember to always cut the current to with the door handle.
the power windows by removing all
keys from the vehicle when leaving the WARNING
driver's seat. Note that if the vehicle's
Make sure that no child or other passenger
software is not updated to version comes into contact with the windows as
1.107 or later, the power windows they are closing with keyless closing*.
occupied even if the keys are not in the NOTE
vehicle. Operating the power windows. One way to reduce the pulsating wind
• Never stick objects or body parts out Operating manually. Move one of the con- noise heard when the rear windows are
through the windows, even if the vehi- trols slightly up or down. The power win- open is to also open the front windows
cle electrical system is completely dows go up or down while the control is slightly.
turned off. held in position.
Operating with automatic controls. Move
one of the controls up or down to its end
7 For more information on software updates, see https://www.volvocars.com/intl/support.
NOTE Using sun curtains* Rear door – electrically operated

There are integrated sun curtains in each rear
The windows cannot be opened at speeds
door.
over approx. 180 km/h (ca 112 mph), but
they can be closed. There are integrated sun curtains in each rear
door and in the parcel shelf in the rear win-
The driver is always responsible for follow-
dow.
ing applicable traffic regulations.
Rear door – manually operated
NOTE
It may not be possible to operate the win-
dows in low temperatures.
Related information Each of the sun shades can be fully retracted

• Usage mode (p. 449) or fully extended.
• Ignition modes (p. 447) The sun curtains are equipped with pinch pro-
• Power windows (p. 168) tection. If you experience any problems oper-
ating in the sun curtains, a reset sequence can
be tested.
tains (p. 166)
The illustration is generic – the design may vary.
• Reset procedure for pinch protection
(p. 167) Hook with locking mechanism
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 285) – Pull up the sun curtain and hook it to the
• Locking and unlocking using the key but- upper section of the door frame.
tons (p. 270) The window can be opened and closed when
the sun curtain is being used.
}}
|| Control for power sun curtain 1. Move the button downward and release.
Control: Controls: > The sun curtain moves automatically to
its lower end position.
Driver's door Right and left rear door
2. Move the button downward again to open
Passenger door None the window.
Left rear door Left rear door > The window moves automatically to its
lower end position.
Right rear door Right and left rear door Automatic operation - rapid opening/
closing
To operate the power windows and sun cur- The window and sun curtain can be opened/
tains, the ignition must be in at least mode I or closed simultaneously:
II. Right-hand rear door controls.
– Open – press the control down twice to
If multiple controls are used at the same time, Raising of sun curtain the automatic operation position and
the operation initiated by the first control used release.
Lowering of sun curtain
will be activated. Once that operation has
been completed, the other controls can be – Close – press the control up twice to the
Close the window and raise the sun curtain
used again. automatic operation position and release.
The window must be fully closed before the
sun curtain can be raised. Rear window shelf
1. Move the button upward and release.
> The window moves automatically to its
upper end position.
2. Move the button upward again and
release.
> The sun curtain moves automatically to
its upper end position.
Lowering the sun curtain and opening the
window
The sun curtain must be fully retracted (low-
ered) before the window can be opened.
172
An electrically operated sun curtain is inte- • Power windows (p. 168) Rearview/door mirrors
grated in the rear window shelf. The rearview mirror and door mirrors can be
To operate the sun curtain, the ignition must used to improve the driver's visibility behind
be in mode II. the vehicle.
Rearview mirror
NOTE The rearview mirror is equipped with Home-
It may not be possible to operate the sun Link* and automatic dimming*.
shade in low temperatures. The rearview mirror can be adjusted manually.
Operating with right-side rear door controls Door mirrors
WARNING
The door mirror on the passenger side is
curved to improve visibility. Objects in the
mirror may appear farther away than they
actually are.
The joystick in the drivers' door control panel

is used to adjust the position of the door mir-
rors.
There are also several automatic settings that
can also be connected to the memory function
Briefly press the button - the sun curtain will buttons for the power seat*.
automatically move to its end position, up or
down. Related information
• HomeLink®* (p. 530)
Related information
• Pinch protection for windows and sun cur- • Adjusting the rearview mirror dimming
tains (p. 166) function (p. 174)
• Reset procedure for pinch protection • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 175)
(p. 167)
}}
• Storing positions for seats and mirrors Adjusting the rearview mirror NOTE
(p. 198) dimming function
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g. a
• Storing positions for seats, mirrors and Bright light entering the vehicle from behind,
parking permit, transponder, sunshade or
head-up display* (p. 199) e.g. from the headlights of following vehicles,
objects on the seats or parcel shelf in a
• Activating and deactivating the heated could reflect in the rearview mirror and door
way that prevents light from reaching the
rear window and door mirrors (p. 249) mirrors and cause a glare. Use the dimming
sensors, the auto-dim function in the rear-
function when light from behind is distract-
view and door mirrors will be reduced.
ing.
Auto-dim NOTE
If bright light enters the vehicle from behind,
the door mirrors will automatically dim when it If the sensors are obstructed by e.g. a
is dark outside or when lighting conditions are parking permit, transponder, sunshade or
low, for example when driving in tunnels. objects on the seats or in the cargo com-
partment in a way that prevents light from
The rearview mirror and door mirrors automat- reaching the sensors, the auto-dim func-
ically dim when driving in the dark. A brighter tion in the door and rearview mirrors will
dimming level is used for city driving in the be reduced.
dark.
Auto-dim can be set in the center display to be Related information
active or not active while driving.
• Rearview/door mirrors (p. 173)
1. Tap in the center display. • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 175)
2. Tap Controls.
3. Choose a setting under Mirror auto-
dimming.
Dimming is automatically adjusted via the
light sensors in the rearview mirror.
Adjusting the door mirrors 1. Press the L and R buttons at the same
To improve visibility to the rear, the door mir- time.
rors need to be adjusted to the driver's height 2. Release the buttons after about 1 second.
and seating position. The mirrors will automatically stop when
There are several automatic settings that can they are completely folded in.
also be connected to the memory function Open the mirrors by pressing L and R at the
buttons for the power seat*. same time. The mirrors will automatically stop
when they reach the last-used setting.
Controls used for door mirrors
Resetting the mirrors' position
A mirror that has been moved out of position
manually (e.g. hit or bumped into) must be
Door mirror controls.
electrically returned to its original position for
The joystick in the drivers' door control panel automatic folding* to function properly.
is used to adjust the position of the door mir-
1. Fold in the mirrors by pressing the L and R
rors. The vehicle must be at least in usage
buttons at the same time.
mode Comfort.
2. Open them again by pressing the L and R
1. Press the L button for the left door mirror
buttons at the same time.
or R for the right door mirror. The button
will light up. 3. Repeat the above procedure as needed.
2. Adjust the position using the joystick The mirrors return to their original positions.
located between the buttons.
Tilting when parking8
3. Press the L or R button again. The light in
The door mirrors can be tilted down to help
the button will go out.
give the driver a better view along the sides of
Automatically folding door mirrors* the vehicle, e.g. of the curb when parking.
The door mirrors can be automatically folded – Select reverse gear and press the L or R
when driving or parking in tight spaces. mirror button.
8 Only on models equipped with a power driver's seat with memory buttons*. }}
|| Please note that the button may need to be NOTE Panoramic roof*
pressed twice depending on settings. When The vehicle has a full panoramic window in
the door mirror is tilted down, the light in the If the mirrors are folded in manually using
tinted glass to reduce incoming light, heat
button will flash.When reverse gear is disen- the L and R buttons and the vehicle is then
and ultraviolet rays.
gaged, the door mirrors automatically return to locked, the mirrors will not fold out auto-
The panoramic roof is made of laminated
their original positions. matically when the vehicle is unlocked,
glass.
even if this preference has been set. The
Automatically tilting when parking8 door mirrors must be folded out manually Related information
With this setting, the door mirrors will auto- using the L and R buttons. • Windows, glass and mirrors (p. 166)
matically tilt down when reverse gear is
engaged. The folded position is preset and Related information
cannot be adjusted.
1. Tap in the center display. • Usage mode (p. 449)
2. Tap Controls. • Rearview/door mirrors (p. 173)
3. Choose a setting under Exterior mirrors • Adjusting the rearview mirror dimming
tilt at reverse. function (p. 174)
To immediately return the door mirrors to their • Storing positions for seats and mirrors
(p. 198)
original position, press the L or R button
twice. • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
Automatic folding when the vehicle is
locked* rear window and door mirrors (p. 249)
The door mirrors fold in or out automatically
when the vehicle is locked/unlocked using the
key.
8 Only on models equipped with a power driver's seat with memory buttons*.
Panoramic roof* WARNING

The panoramic roof is divided into two glass
Children, other passengers or objects can
sections. The front section can be opened be trapped by the moving parts.
vertically at the rear edge (ventilation posi-
tion) or horizontally (open position). The rear • Always operate the windows with cau-
section cannot be moved. tion.
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and • Do not allow children to play with the
sun curtain made of perforated fabric (located operating controls.
beneath the glass sections) for extra protec- • Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
tion in e.g. bright sunlight. • Remember to always cut the current to
the power windows by setting the
vehicle's electrical system to ignition
The panoramic roof and sun curtain can also mode 0 and then taking the key with
be operated with the controls in the right-side you when leaving the vehicle.
rear door.
• Remember to always cut the current to
To operate the panoramic roof and sun cur- the power windows by removing all
tain, the vehicle must be in usage mode Com- keys from the vehicle when leaving the
fort or Drive. driver's seat. Note that if the vehicle's
software is not updated to version
1.109 or later, the power windows
The panoramic roof and sun curtain are oper- occupied even if the keys are not in the
ated using the controls in the overhead con- vehicle.
sole. • Never stick objects or body parts out
through the windows, even if the vehi-
turned off.
|| CAUTION Operating the panoramic roof*

The panoramic roof and sun curtain are oper-
• Do not open the panoramic roof when
ated using a control in the overhead console,
load carriers are installed.
and both are equipped with pinch protection.
• Never place heavy objects on the pan-
oramic roof. The control in the right rear door can also be
used for operation.
CAUTION
• Remove ice and snow before opening
the panoramic roof. Be careful not to
scratch any surfaces or damage the
trim.
The panoramic roof is equipped with a wind
• Do not operate the panoramic roof if it blocker that folds up when the roof is open.
is frozen in place.
Related information
Wind blocker • Ignition modes (p. 447)
• Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 178)
• Auto closing the panoramic roof* sun cur-
tain (p. 182)
tains (p. 166)
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 285)
• Locking and unlocking using the key but-
tons (p. 270)
WARNING CAUTION CAUTION

Children, other passengers or objects can • Do not open the panoramic roof when Check that the panoramic roof is properly
be trapped by the moving parts. load carriers are installed. closed when closing.
• Always operate the windows with cau- • Never place heavy objects on the pan-
tion. oramic roof. The panoramic roof and sun curtain are also
• Do not allow children to play with the equipped with pinch protection. If there is any
operating controls. problem with the pinch protection, a reset pro-
CAUTION cedure can be tested.
• Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
• Remove ice and snow before opening
• Remember to always cut the current to the panoramic roof. Be careful not to NOTE
the power windows by setting the scratch any surfaces or damage the
vehicle's electrical system to ignition It may not be possible to operate the win-
trim.
mode 0 and then taking the key with dows in low temperatures.
you when leaving the vehicle. • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
is frozen in place.
• Remember to always cut the current to Opening and closing the panoramic
the power windows by removing all roof to ventilation position using the
keys from the vehicle when leaving the To operate the panoramic roof and sun cur-
control in the overhead console
driver's seat. Note that if the vehicle's tain, the vehicle must be in usage mode Com-
software is not updated to version fort or Drive.
1.1010 or later, the power windows It can also be operated using keyless opening*
could be reactivated through the center with the door handle.
occupied even if the keys are not in the WARNING
vehicle.
Make sure that no child or other passenger
• Never stick objects or body parts out comes into contact with the windows as
through the windows, even if the vehi- they are closing with keyless closing*.
turned off.
Ventilation position, rear edge raised.
|| Open and close by pressing once anywhere on Fully opening and closing the 3. To open the panoramic roof to its fully
the touch-sensitive control. panoramic roof with the control in the open position, swipe rearward over the
overhead console control a third time.
When ventilation mode is selected, the rear
edge of the front section of the roof is raised. To close, swipe forward over the control twice.
If the sun curtain is fully closed when ventila- Automatic operation – rapid opening or
tion position is selected, it will automatically
closing
open approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
The panoramic roof and sun curtain can be
If the panoramic roof is closed from the venti- opened or closed simultaneously:
lation position, the sun curtain will also auto-
– Open – swipe rearward over the control
matically close.
twice. It is not necessary to wait for the
sun curtain to open all the way before
NOTE swiping again.
If the roof is closed using the control in the – Close – swipe forward over the control
right rear door, the sun curtain must be twice. It is not necessary to wait for the
closed separately. sun curtain to close all the way before
Make a steady and continuous swiping motion
rearward/forward over the touch-sensitive swiping again.
control to fully open/close the panoramic roof.
If this doesn't work, try making the motion
more quickly or slowly.
Auto operation
1. To open the sun curtain to its fully open
position, swipe rearward over the control
once.
2. To open the panoramic roof, swipe rear-
ward over the control a second time.
To open the panoramic roof to comfort
position, swipe rearward over the control
a second time.
180
Operating with right-side rear door Auto operation

controls 1. To open to the ventilation position, move
the panoramic roof control downward to
the auto open position and release.
2. To open to the sun curtain, move the sun
curtain control downward to the auto
open position and release.
3. To open the panoramic roof, move the
panoramic roof control downward a sec-
ond time to the auto open position and
release.
Panoramic roof control. To close, pull up the respective control to the
Operation, manual mode automatic closing position.
Sun curtain control.
Operation, automatic mode Automatic operation – rapid opening and
Operation, manual mode closing
Manual operation The panoramic roof and sun curtain can be
Operation, automatic mode
1. To open the panoramic roof to the ventila- opened or closed simultaneously.
tion position, move the panoramic roof
1. To open to the ventilation position, move
control downward to the manual opening
the panoramic roof control downward to
position.
the auto position and release.
2. To open the sun curtain, move the sun
2. To open fully, move the sun curtain control
curtain control downward to the manual
downward to the auto position and
open position.
release. Then immediately move the pan-
3. To open the panoramic roof fully, move oramic roof control downward to the auto
the panoramic roof control downward a position and release.
second time to the manual operation posi-
3. To close, pull up the panoramic roof con-
tion.
trol to the auto position and release. Then
To close, pull up the respective control to the immediately move the sun curtain control
manual closing position. up to the auto position and release.
}}
181
|| Related information Auto closing the panoramic roof* Wiper blades and washer fluid
• Ignition modes (p. 447) sun curtain The wipers and the washer fluid are designed
• Usage mode (p. 449) With this function, the sun curtain closes to improve visibility and the headlight pat-
automatically 15 minutes after the vehicle has tern.
• Panoramic roof* (p. 176)
been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This Washer fluid direct from the wiper blades and
• Panoramic roof* (p. 177) is done to lower the passenger compartment heating* of the wiper blades gives improved
• Auto closing the panoramic roof* sun cur- temperature and protect the upholstery vision.
tain (p. 182) against being bleached by the sun. The washer nozzles are heated* automatically
The function is deactivated as the default fac-
• Pinch protection for windows and sun cur- in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
tains (p. 166) tory setting and can be activated or deacti- from freezing.
vated using the center display.
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 285) The wiper blades are heated* automatically in
– Tap , Controls, Auto-close sunroof cold temperatures to help improve winter
tons (p. 270) cover and choose a setting. properties and prevent the washer fluid from
freezing.
NOTE When there is approximately 1 liter (1 qt) of
The sun curtain also closes when all win- washer fluid remaining, a message to refill will
dows are closed with keyless closing*. appear in the instrument panel.
Related information
Related information • Using the rain sensor (p. 185)
• Panoramic roof* (p. 176) • Using the windshield and headlight wash-
• Panoramic roof* (p. 177) ers (p. 188)
• Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 178) • Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 190)
tains (p. 166) • Refilling washer fluid (p. 816)
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 285) • Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 815)
tons (p. 270) • Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 813)
• Changing rear window wipers (p. 810) Using the windshield wipers
• Using the windshield wipers (p. 183) The windshield wipers are designed to clean
the windshield. The right-side steering wheel
lever is used to adjust windshield wiper set-
tings.
Right-hand steering wheel lever.

The thumb wheel is used to set rain sen-
sor sensitivity and interval wiper speed.


}}
183
|| Single sweep
Move the lever down and release for a
single sweep.
Wipers off
Move the lever to position 0 to turn off
the windshield wipers.
Interval wipers
Move the lever upward to put the wip-
ers in interval wiping mode. Set the
number of sweeps per time unit with the
thumb wheel when interval wipers are
Right-hand steering wheel lever. Right-hand steering wheel lever.
selected.
The thumb wheel is used to set rain sen- The thumb wheel is used to set rain sen-
sor sensitivity and interval wiper speed. sor sensitivity and interval wiper speed. Continuous wipers
Move the lever upward for the wipers
to operate at normal speed.
Move the lever upward again for the
wipers to operate at high speed.
CAUTION
Before activating the wipers, make sure
that the wiper blades are not frozen in
place and that any snow or ice on the
windshield and rear window has been
scraped away.
Right-hand steering wheel lever. Right-hand steering wheel lever.
The thumb wheel is used to set rain sen- The thumb wheel is used to set rain sen-
sor sensitivity and interval wiper speed. sor sensitivity and interval wiper speed.
184
CAUTION Using the rain sensor

The rain sensor monitors the amount of water
Before activating the wipers, make sure
on the windshield and automatically starts
that the wiper blades are not frozen in
the windshield wipers. Rain sensor sensitivity
place and that any snow or ice on the
can be adjusted using the thumb wheel on
windshield has been scraped away.
the right-hand steering wheel lever.
CAUTION
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
clean the windshield. The windshield must
be wet when the windshield wipers are
working. Right-hand steering wheel lever.
Rain sensor button
Related information
• Using the rain sensor (p. 185) Thumb wheel, sensitivity/interval wiper
speed
• Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 188)
• Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 182)
Rain sensor button
• Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 190) Thumb wheel, sensitivity/interval wiper
• Refilling washer fluid (p. 816) speed
• Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 815)
• Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 813)
• Changing rear window wipers (p. 810)
}}
185
||
Right-hand steering wheel lever. Right-hand steering wheel lever. Right-hand steering wheel lever.
Rain sensor button Rain sensor button Rain sensor button
Thumb wheel, sensitivity/interval wiper Thumb wheel, sensitivity/interval wiper Thumb wheel, sensitivity/interval wiper
speed speed speed
186
Move the lever downward for an extra wiper

sweep.
Turn the thumb wheel upward for increased
sensitivity and downward for decreased sensi-
tivity. The wipers will make one extra sweep
when the thumb wheel is turned upward.
Deactivate the rain sensor

Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
rain sensor button or moving the lever
upward to another wiper mode.
Right-hand steering wheel lever. Right-hand steering wheel lever. The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the vehicle is switched off.
Rain sensor button Rain sensor button
The rain sensor is also automatically deacti-
Thumb wheel, sensitivity/interval wiper Thumb wheel, sensitivity/interval wiper vated when the wiper blades are put in the
speed speed service position. The rain sensor will reactivate
When the rain sensor is activated, the when service mode is switched off.
rain sensor symbol will be displayed in the
instrument panel. CAUTION
The rain sensor is automatically off or on when The windshield wipers may start inadver-
the vehicle starts depending on the rain sensor tently and be damaged in automatic car
position when the vehicle is switched off. washes. Switch off the rain sensor before
washing the vehicle. The symbol in the
Activating the rain sensor instrument panel will go out.
When the rain sensor is activated, the wind-
shield wipers must be in 0 position or in the
single sweep position. Related information
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain ers (p. 188)
sensor button .
}}
187
• Using the rear window wiper/washer Using the windshield and

(p. 190) headlight washers
• Refilling washer fluid (p. 816) The windshield and headlight washers are
• Putting the wiper blades in service posi- designed to clean the windshield and head-
tion (p. 815) lights. Use the right-side steering wheel lever
to start the windshield and headlight wash-
• Replacing windshield wiper blades ers.
(p. 813)
• Changing rear window wipers (p. 810) Starting the windshield and headlight
washers
• Using the windshield wipers (p. 183)
Washing function, right-hand steering wheel lever.
188
CAUTION
Avoid activating the washer system when
it is frozen or the fluid reservoir is empty.
Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the
pump.
Headlight washer*
When the windshield washers are activated
and the headlights are on, the headlights are
also washed automatically according to a
defined interval.
Washing function, right-hand steering wheel lever. Washing function, right-hand steering wheel lever.
Reduced washing
When there is about 1 liter (1 qt) of washer
fluid left in the reservoir and the message
Washer fluid Refill washer fluid, level low is
displayed in the instrument panel together
with the symbol, the washer fluid supply
to the headlights is cut off. This is to prioritize
windshield cleaning and visibility through it.
The headlights are only washed if high or low
beam is on.
Related information
• Using the rain sensor (p. 185)
Washing function, right-hand steering wheel lever. Washing function, right-hand steering wheel lever.
– Move the right-hand steering wheel lever
toward the steering wheel to start the • Refilling washer fluid (p. 816)
windshield and headlight washers. • Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
> After the lever is released, the wipers tion (p. 815)
make several extra sweeps.
}}
• Replacing windshield wiper blades Using the rear window wiper/

(p. 813) washer
• Using the windshield wipers (p. 183) The rear window washer/wiper is designed to
clean the rear window. Use the right-side
steering wheel lever to start and control the
wiper/washer.
Activating the rear window wiper/

washer
NOTE
The rear window wiper motor is equipped
with overheating protection that switches Select for interval rear window
off the motor if it becomes overheated. The wiper.
rear window wiper can be operated again Select for continuous rear window
after a cooling-down period. wiper.
190
Select for interval rear window Select for interval rear window Select for interval rear window
wiper. wiper. wiper.
Select for continuous rear window Select for continuous rear window Select for continuous rear window
wiper. wiper. wiper.
– Move the right-side steering wheel lever
forward to wash/wipe the rear window.
Automatic rear window wiping when

backing up
If reverse gear is engaged while the wind-
shield wipers are on, the rear window wipers
will start. This function is deactivated when a
different gear is selected.
NOTE
At low ambient temperatures, the auto-
matic rear window wiper when backing up
is switched off to help prevent damage to
the wiper arm.
}}
191
|| Related information
ers (p. 188)
• Refilling washer fluid (p. 816)
tion (p. 815)
(p. 813)
192
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Front seats Manual front seats Raise/lower the seat by moving the con-
The seat has a number of setting options to The front seats can be adjusted in a number trol up/down.
increase comfort. of different ways to help enhance your seat- Change the backrest tilt by turning the
ing comfort. knob on the backrest.
Related information
• Multifunctional* front seat function over-
view (p. 196)
• Power* front seats (p. 196)
• Storing positions for seats and mirrors
(p. 198)
• Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
• Using stored positions for seats and mir-
rors (p. 200) Raise/lower the front edge of the seat Move the seat forward/backing by lifting
cushion* by moving the control up/down.1 the handle and moving the seat to a suita-
• Using stored positions for seats, mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 201) Change the length of the seat cushion* by ble distance from the steering wheel and
pulling up the lever and moving the cush- pedals. Check to make sure the seat is
• Adjusting* front seat cushion length
ion forward/backward. securely locked into place after its setting
(p. 204)
has been changed.
Move the seat forward/backing by lifting
• Front seat massage* settings (p. 203)
the handle and moving the seat to a suita- Change the length of the seat cushion* by
• Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* ble distance from the steering wheel and pulling up the lever and moving the cush-
(p. 205) pedals. Check to make sure the seat is ion forward/backward.
• Adjusting front seat lumbar support* securely locked into place after its setting Raise/lower the front edge of the seat
(p. 206) has been changed. cushion* by moving the control up/down.3
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the Adjust lumbar support* by pressing the Adjust lumbar support* by pressing the
driver's seat* (p. 208) button up/down/forward/rearward.2 button up/down/forward/rearward.
• Rear seat (p. 209)
Raise/lower the seat by moving the lever WARNING • Adjusting* front seat cushion length
up/down. (p. 204)
• Do not adjust the seat while driving.
Change the backrest tilt by turning the
The seat should be adjusted so that the • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
knob on the backrest. (p. 205)
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rear- • Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
ward as comfort and control allow. (p. 206)
• Check that the seat is securely locked • Adjusting the passenger seat from the
into position after adjusting. driver's seat* (p. 208)
Related information
• Front seats (p. 194)
view (p. 196)
The head restraint can be adjusted up or

down by pressing the button and manually • Storing positions for seats and mirrors
moving the head restraint to the desired (p. 198)
position. • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
rors (p. 200)
and head-up display* (p. 201)
1 Only applies to the driver's seat.

2 Applies for four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forward/rearward.
3 Only applies to the driver's seat.
Multifunctional* front seat function Power* front seats Related information

overview The front seats can be adjusted in a number • Front seats (p. 194)
Enhance seating comfort using the multifunc- of different ways to help enhance your seat- • Manual front seats (p. 194)
tion control*. ing comfort. The power seat can be moved
forward/backward and up/down. The height
Related information view (p. 196)
and length* of the seat cushion and the tilt of
• Front seats (p. 194) the backrest can be adjusted. Lumbar sup- • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 197)
• Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 197) port* can be adjusted up, down, forward and • Storing positions for seats and mirrors
• Storing positions for seats and mirrors backward4. (p. 198)
(p. 198) The front seats can be adjusted in a number • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
• Storing positions for seats, mirrors and of different ways to help enhance your seat- head-up display* (p. 199)
head-up display* (p. 199) ing comfort. The power seat can be moved • Using stored positions for seats and mir-
forward/backward and up/down. The front rors (p. 200)
edge of the seat cushion can be raised/
rors (p. 200)
lowered and the tilt of the backrest can be
• Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and head-up display* (p. 201)
adjusted. Lumbar support* can be adjusted
and head-up display* (p. 201) up/down/forward/rearward. The length of the • Front seat massage* settings (p. 203)
• Front seat massage* settings (p. 203) seat cushion can be adjusted manually*. • Adjusting* front seat cushion length
The seats can be adjusted when the vehicle is (p. 204)
running and for a certain period of time after
(p. 204)
the door has been unlocked without the vehi-
• Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
• Front seat massage* settings (p. 203) (p. 205)
cle running. They can also be adjusted for a
• Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* short period after the vehicle is turned off. • Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
(p. 205) (p. 206)
• Adjusting front seat lumbar support* CAUTION • Adjusting the passenger seat from the
(p. 206) driver's seat* (p. 208)
The power seats have an overload protec-
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the tor that is triggered if a seat is blocked by
driver's seat* (p. 208) any object. If this occurs, remove the
object and attempt to adjust the seat
again.
4 Applies for four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forward/rearward.
Adjusting the power* front seats round button to adjust the lumbar support Raise/lower the seat by moving the con-
Set the desired seating position using the forward/rearward. trol up/down.
controls on the front seat cushion. To set the Raise/lower the front edge of the seat Move the seat forward/rearward by mov-
convenience functions, turn the multifunction cushion by moving the control up/down. ing the control forward/rearward.
control5 upward/downward. Raise/lower the seat by moving the con- Change the backrest tilt by moving the
Set the desired seating position using the trol up/down. control forward/backward.
controls on the front seat cushion. Activate Move the seat forward/rearward by mov- Only one movement (forward/rearward/up/
lumbar support* by pressing the four-way ing the control forward/rearward. down) can be performed at a time.
control.
Change the backrest tilt by moving the The front seat backrests cannot be folded
control forward/backward. down completely.
The illustration shows the controls in a vehicle with

four-way lumbar support*. Vehicles with two-way
lumbar support* do not have the rotary multifunction Activate and use the lumbar support con-
control. The head restraint can be adjusted up or
trol by pressing the four-way control down by pressing the button and manually
In vehicles with four-way lumbar support*, upwards/downwards/forwards/back- moving the head restraint to the desired
turn the multifunction control5 up/down to wards. position.
set the convenience functions. In vehicles
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat
with two-way lumbar support*, use the
cushion by moving the control up/down.
5 Not available in vehicles with two-way lumbar support*. }}
|| Related information Storing positions for seats and 2. Press and hold the M button. The indica-
• Front seats (p. 194) mirrors tor light in the button will illuminate.
• Manual front seats (p. 194) Adjustment settings for the power* seat and 3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1
door mirrors can be stored in the memory or 2 button.
buttons.
view (p. 196) > When the position has been stored in
Two different positions for the power* seat the memory button, an audio signal will
• Power* front seats (p. 196) and the door mirrors can be stored using the sound and the indicator light in the M
• Storing positions for seats and mirrors memory buttons. The buttons are located on button will go out.
(p. 198) the inside of either one or both* front doors.
If none of the memory buttons are pressed
within three seconds, the M button will go out
and no position will be stored.
The seats or door mirrors must be readjusted
rors (p. 200)
before a new memory position can be set.
and head-up display* (p. 201) Related information
• Front seat massage* settings (p. 203) • Front seats (p. 194)
• Adjusting* front seat cushion length • Manual front seats (p. 194)
(p. 204) • Multifunctional* front seat function over-
• Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* view (p. 196)
(p. 205) • Power* front seats (p. 196)
• Button M for storing a setting.
Adjusting front seat lumbar support* • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 197)
(p. 206) Memory button. • Using stored positions for seats and mir-
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the rors (p. 200)
driver's seat* (p. 208) Memory button.
Storing positions
1. Adjust the seat and door mirrors to the • Front seat massage* settings (p. 203)
desired position. • Adjusting* front seat cushion length
(p. 204)
• Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* Storing positions for seats, mirrors stored using the memory buttons. The buttons
(p. 205) and head-up display* are located on the inside of either one or both*
• Adjusting front seat lumbar support* Adjustment settings for the power* seat, door front doors.
(p. 206) mirrors and head-up display* can be stored in
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the the memory buttons.
driver's seat* (p. 208) Three different positions for the power* seat,
door mirrors and head-up display* can be
• Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 175) stored using the memory buttons. The buttons
are located on the inside of either one or both*
front doors.
Button M for storing a setting.
Memory button.
Memory button.
Storing positions
1. Adjust the seat, door mirrors and head-up
Memory button. display to the desired position.
Memory button. 2. Press and hold the M button. The indica-
tor light in the button will illuminate.
Memory button.
Button M for storing a setting.
Two different positions for the power* seat,

door mirrors and head-up display* can be
}}
|| 3. Within three seconds, press and hold the Related information Using stored positions for seats
1, 2 or 3 button. • Front seats (p. 194) and mirrors
> When the position has been stored in • Manual front seats (p. 194) If the positions for the power* seat and door
the memory button, an audio signal will mirrors have been stored, they can be acti-
sound and the indicator light in the M
vated using the memory buttons.
view (p. 196)
button will go out.
• Power* front seats (p. 196) Using a stored position
1. Adjust the seat, door mirrors and head-up
display to the desired position. • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 197)
2. Press and hold the M button. The indica- • Using stored positions for seats and mir-
rors (p. 200)
tor light in the button will illuminate.
3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1
or 2 button.
> When the position has been stored in
the memory button, an audio signal will • Adjusting* front seat cushion length
sound and the indicator light in the M (p. 204)
button will go out. • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
If none of the memory buttons are pressed (p. 205)
within three seconds, the M button will go out • Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
A stored position can be used with the front
and no position will be stored. (p. 206)
door open or closed:
The seats, door mirrors or head-up display • Adjusting the passenger seat from the
must be readjusted before a new memory driver's seat* (p. 208) Front door open
position can be set. – Briefly press one of the memory buttons 1
• Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 175)
( ) or 2 ( ). The power seats and door
• Head-up display settings* (p. 146) mirrors will move and stop at the positions
NOTE
stored in that button.
The stored positions are saved in the active
profile.
Front door closed • Multifunctional* front seat function over- Using stored positions for seats,
– Press and hold one of the memory buttons view (p. 196) mirrors and head-up display*
(1 ( ) or 2 ( ) until the seat and door • Power* front seats (p. 196) If the positions for the power* seat, door mir-
mirrors stop in the positions stored in that rors and head-up display* have been stored,
memory button. they can be activated using the memory but-
• Storing positions for seats and mirrors tons.
If the memory button is released, the seat and (p. 198)
door mirrors will stop moving. Using a stored position
WARNING
• This list point needs to be translated
exactly to: "Because the driver's seat
(p. 204)
can be adjusted with the ignition off,
children should never be left unatten- • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
ded in the vehicle. (p. 205)
• Movement of the seat can be STOP- • Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
PED at any time by pressing any but- (p. 206)
ton on the power seat control panel. • Adjusting the passenger seat from the
• Do not adjust the seat while driving. driver's seat* (p. 208)
• The seat should be adjusted so that the • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 175)
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In • Head-up display settings* (p. 146)
addition, position the seat as far rear-
ward as comfort and control allow.
• The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is
in motion.
Related information
}}
|| A stored position can be used with the front WARNING • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 197)
door open or closed: • Storing positions for seats and mirrors
• This list point needs to be translated
(p. 198)
Front door open exactly to: "Because the driver's seat
– Briefly press one of the memory buttons can be adjusted with the ignition off, • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
(1-3). The power seats, door mirrors and children should never be left unatten- head-up display* (p. 199)
head-up display will move and stop at the ded in the vehicle. • Front seat massage* settings (p. 203)
positions stored in that button.
• Movement of the seat can be STOP- • Adjusting* front seat cushion length
– Briefly press one of the memory buttons 1 PED at any time by pressing any but- (p. 204)
( ) or 2 ( ). The power seats, door mir- ton on the power seat control panel.
rors and head-up display will move and • Do not adjust the seat while driving. (p. 205)
stop at the positions stored in that button.
• The seat should be adjusted so that the • Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
Front door closed brake pedal can be depressed fully. In (p. 206)
– Press and hold one of the memory buttons addition, position the seat as far rear-
(1-3) until the seat, door mirrors and head- ward as comfort and control allow.
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the
up display stop in the positions stored in driver's seat* (p. 208)
that memory button.
• The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is
– Press and hold one of the memory buttons in motion. • Head-up display settings* (p. 146)
1 ( ) or 2 ( ) until the seat, door mirrors
and head-up display stop in the positions
stored in that memory button.
NOTE
The stored positions are saved in the active
If the memory button is released, the seat,
profile.
door mirrors and head-up display will stop
moving.
Related information
view (p. 196)
Front seat massage* settings • Intensity: Select between 1, 2 and 3.

To change settings, use the center display. • Speed: Select between 1, 2 and 3.
These settings are first set using the multi- Restarting the massage function
function control on the seat.
The massage function turns off automatically
after 20 minutes. The function is reactivated
manually.
– Tap Restart, which is displayed in the
center display, to restart the selected mas-
sage program.
> The massage program will restart. If no
action is taken, the message will disap-
1. Activate the multi-function control by turn- pear.
ing the control up/down or pushing in one
Related information
of the four buttons on the multi-function
control. The seat settings view is shown in
Multifunction control, located on the side of the seat the center display. • Manual front seats (p. 194)
cushion.
2. Select Massage in the seat settings view. • Multifunctional* front seat function over-
Adjusting front seat massage settings view (p. 196)
The front seat backrests have a massage func- 3. To choose between the different massage
functions shown in the center display,
tion. Air-filled cushions provide the massaging
action and a number of settings are available. make your selection directly in the center • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 197)
display or by using the multi-function con- • Storing positions for seats and mirrors
The massage function can only be activated trol. (p. 198)
when the engine is running.
Massage settings • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
The following massage settings are available: head-up display* (p. 199)
• On/Off: Select On/Off to switch on/off • Using stored positions for seats and mir-
rors (p. 200)
the massage function.
• Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset mas- • Using stored positions for seats, mirrors
sage programs. Choose between Swell,
Tread, Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder.
}}
• Adjusting* front seat cushion length Adjusting* front seat cushion – Activate the multifunction control by turn-
(p. 204) length ing the control upward/downward. The
• Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* Depending on the selected equipment level, seat settings view will appear in the center
(p. 205) the length of the seat cushion can either be display.
• Adjusting front seat lumbar support* adjusted using the multifunction control* on • Push in the front part of the four-way
(p. 206) the side of the seat cushion, or manually
button to extend the seat cushion.
adjusted using the control on the front of the
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the seat cushion. • Press the rear part of the four-way but-
driver's seat* (p. 208) ton to shorten the seat cushion.
The length of the seat cushion can be
adjusted to increase comfort. Manually adjusting seat cushion
Adjusting seat cushion length using length
the multifunction control
Control for adjusting seat cushion.

The multifunction control, located on the side of the 1. Grasp the handle on the front of the
seat cushion. seat and pull upward.
2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion.
3. Release the handle and make sure the
seat cushion locks into position.
• Storing positions for seats, mirrors and Adjusting front seat side bolster
head-up display* (p. 199) settings*
• Using stored positions for seats and mir- Enhance comfort in the front seat by adjust-
rors (p. 200) ing the sides of the backrest.
(p. 205)
• Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
(p. 206)
Control for adjusting seat cushion.
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the
1. Grasp the handle on the front of the driver's seat* (p. 208)
seat and pull upward.
2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion. The multifunction control is located on the side of the
seat cushion.
3. Release the handle and make sure the
seat cushion locks into position. The side bolsters in the front seat backrests
can be inflated/deflated to adjust the amount
Related information of support provided. The settings for the multi-
• Front seats (p. 194) functional seats can be adjusted using either
the mutifunction control on the seat or the
center display. The adjustment settings are
• Multifunctional* front seat function over- shown in the center display.
view (p. 196)
(p. 198)
}}
|| To adjust the side bolsters: • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* Adjusting front seat lumbar
– Activate the multifunction control by turn-
(p. 206) support*
ing the control upward/downward. The • Adjusting the passenger seat from the Use the control on the side of the seat cush-
seat settings view will appear in the center driver's seat* (p. 208) ion to adjust the lumbar support.
display.
• Press the front part of the four-way but-
ton to increase side bolster support .
• Press the rear part of the four-way but-
ton to decrease side bolster support .
Related information
view (p. 196) Multifunction control, in vehicles with four-way lum-
• Power* front seats (p. 196) bar support*.

(p. 198)
rors (p. 200)
(p. 204)
Control in vehicles with two-way lumbar support*.
Lumbar support is adjusted using the multi- Adjusting lumbar support in vehicles Adjusting lumbar support in vehicles
function control in vehicles with four-way lum- with four-way lumbar support with two-way lumbar support
bar support*, or the round button in vehicles
with two-way lumbar support*. The control is
located on the side of the seat cushion.
Depending on the selected equipment level,
the lumbar support can be adjusted forward/
rearward and up/down (four-way lumbar sup-
port) or forward/backward (two-way lumbar
support).
– Activate the multifunction control by turn- 1. Press the front part of the round button
ing the control upward/downward. The to increase lumbar support.
seat settings view will appear in the center
display. 2. Press the rear part of the round button
to decrease lumbar support.
• Press the round button up /down
to move the lumbar support upward/
downward.
The four-way button is located on the side of the seat
cushion. • Press the front part of the button to
increase lumbar support.
Four-way lumbar support is adjusted using the
four-way button (the round one) located on • Press the rear part of the button to
the side of the seat cushion. The lumbar sup- decrease lumbar support.
port can be adjusted forward/backward and
up/down.
}}
|| Adjusting lumbar support • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and Adjusting the passenger seat from
head-up display* (p. 199) the driver's seat*
• Using stored positions for seats and mir- The front passenger seat can be adjusted
rors (p. 200) from the driver's seat.
• Using stored positions for seats, mirrors Activate the function in the center display.
and head-up display* (p. 201) 1. Tap .
• Front seat massage* settings (p. 203) 2. Select Controls.
3. Activate Adjust passenger seat.
(p. 204)
• Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* 4. The driver must adjust the passenger seat
(p. 205) within 10 seconds of activating the func-
tion. If no adjustment is made within this
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the time, the function will be deactivated.
• Press the four-way button up /down driver's seat* (p. 208)
to move the lumbar support upward/
downward.
• Press the front part of the four-way
button to increase lumbar support.
• Press the rear part of the four-way but-
ton to decrease lumbar support.
Related information
view (p. 196)
(p. 198)
5. The driver adjusts the passenger seat • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and Rear seat
using the controls on the driver's seat: head-up display* (p. 199) The vehicle has five seats. The rear seat is
• Using stored positions for seats and mir- divided into two folding sections. One section
rors (p. 200) has two seating positions and the other has
one seating position.
and head-up display* (p. 201) The vehicle has five seats. If the vehicle is
• Front seat massage* settings (p. 203) equipped with a folding rear seat*, it is divi-
ded into two sections. One section has one
seating position and the other has two seat-
(p. 204)
ing positions.
The vehicle has five seats. If the vehicle is
(p. 205)
equipped with a folding rear seat,*6 it is divi-
• Adjusting front seat lumbar support* ded into two sections. One section has one
(p. 206) seating position and the other has two seat-
Move the passenger seat forward/rear- ing positions.
ward by moving the control forward/rear-
ward. Depending on whether the vehicle has five,
six or seven seats, there are either one or two
Change the backrest tilt of the passenger
rows of rear seats. The second row of seats
seat by moving the control forward/back-
has three seats7 that can be folded down
ward.
separately, and the third row of seats has two
Related information folding seats.
• Front seats (p. 194) The vehicle has six or seven seats and two
• Manual front seats (p. 194) rows of rear seats. The second row has three
• Multifunctional* front seat function over- seats8 that can be folded down separately.
view (p. 196) The third row has two folding seats.

(p. 198)
}}
|| Related information Folding down the rear seat CAUTION

• Folding down the rear seat backrests* backrests*
(p. 210) When the backrest is folded down, make
The rear seat backrest is split into two sec-
sure there are no objects in the rear seat,
• Folding the second row backrests tions. The two sections can be folded forward
and the seat belts are not buckled. Other-
(p. 213) individually.
wise there is a risk of damage to the
• Adjusting the rear seat head restraints WARNING upholstery.
(p. 215) • Adjust the seat and ensure it locks into
• Adjusting the second row head restraints position before driving. Use caution
CAUTION
(p. 219) when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled
or careless adjustments could lead to The seat cushion of the integrated child
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the rear
restraint* must be in the stowed position
seat (p. 225) injury.
before the rear seat backrest can be folded
• Moving the second row seats forward/ • Long objects must always be securely
down.
rearward* (p. 221) tied down to help prevent injury or
damage in the event of sudden brak- The armrest* in the center seat must be
• Adjusting the second row backrest tilt ing. raised before the seat backrest is folded
(p. 222) down.
• Always turn off the vehicle and apply
• Getting into and out of the third row of the parking brake when loading or The ski hatch* must be closed before the
seats* (p. 223) unloading the vehicle. seat backrest is folded down.
• Folding the third row backrests* (p. 224)
• Put the gear selector in P to help pre-
• Front seats (p. 194) vent the gear selector from being inad-
vertently moved.
NOTE
• Folding down the armrest in the rear seat*
(p. 637) The rear seat must be in the upright posi-
tion when private locking is activated in
order for the seats to lock. Seats in the
folded-down position will not lock.
6 The rear seat cannot be folded down in vehicles with armrests*, which are unlocked and folded down using a handle.
7 In vehicles with six seats, there is no center position in the second row of seats.
8 In vehicles with six seats, there is no center position in the second row of seats.
NOTE 3. Press and hold one of the buttons located 4. The backrest lock will release but the
on the left side of the parcel shelf in the backrest will remain in the same position.
The front seats may need to be pushed for- rear window. The head restraint will fold down automat-
ward and the backrest adjusted so that the ically.
rear seat backrests can be fully lowered. 4. The backrest lock will release but the
backrest will remain in the same position. 5. Manually fold the backrest down to its
The head restraint will fold down automat- horizontal position.
Folding down the backrests ically.
The vehicle must be stationary and at least
one of the rear doors must be open before a 5. Manually fold the backrest down to its
backrest can be folded down. horizontal position.
Buttons for folding down the seats, located on the Buttons for folding down the seats, located on the
top section of the left-side rear seat. top section of the left-side rear seat.
1. Make sure that the rear seat is unoccupied 1. Make sure that the rear seat is unoccupied
and that there are no objects on the seat. and that there are no objects on the seat.
2. Fold down the center seat's head restraint 2. Fold down the center seat's head restraint
manually. manually.
3. Press and hold one of the buttons located
on the left side of the parcel shelf in the
rear window.
}}
211
|| Pull the handle in the vehicle's left or right

rear seat backrest forward to fold down
the left or right section of the rear seat.
Pull up the handle on the backrest
while folding down the backrest. The han-
dle for the head restraint will be automati-
cally pulled up when the backrest is low-
ered. A red indicator light near the back-
rest lock indicates that the backrest is
no longer locked.
NOTE
When the backrest is folded down, the
head restraint may come in contact with
the seat cushion of the seat being folded
down. Adjust the head restraints on the
folded seat to help prevent damage to the
fabric.
5. The backrest lock will release and the

backrest will automatically fold down to
the horizontal position.
Folding up the backrest

Make sure that the rear seat is unoccupied To fold up the backrest to the upright position
and that there are no objects on the seat. manually:
Fold down the center seat's head restraint 1. Move the backrest upward/rearward.
manually.
2. Press the backrest until it locks into posi-
Fold down the center seat's head restraint tion.
manually.
3. Fold up the head restraints manually.
212
4. Adjust the center head restraint if neces- • Adjusting the second row backrest tilt Folding the second row backrests
sary. (p. 222) The backrests can be folded down separately.
• Getting into and out of the third row of WARNING
WARNING seats* (p. 223)
• Adjust the seat and ensure it locks into
When the backrest is restored to an • Folding the third row backrests* (p. 224) position before driving. Use caution
upright position, the red indicator should
no longer be visible. If it is still visible, the • Folding down the armrest in the rear seat* when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled
backrest is not locked in place. (p. 637) or careless adjustments could lead to
injury.
WARNING
• Long objects must always be securely
tied down to help prevent injury or
Make sure that the rear seat backrest and damage in the event of sudden brak-
head restraint are locked securely in place ing.
after the seat is folded up.
• Always turn off the engine and apply
The head restraints at the outer seats must the parking brake when loading or
always be raised when there is a passenger unloading the vehicle.
in one of these spots of the rear seat.
vent the gear selector from being inad-
Related information vertently moved.
• Folding down the rear seat backrests* CAUTION
(p. 210) When the backrest is folded down, make
• Folding the second row backrests sure there are no objects in the rear seat,
(p. 213) and the seat belts are not buckled. Other-
• Adjusting the rear seat head restraints wise there is a risk of damage to the
(p. 215) upholstery.
• Adjusting the second row head restraints
(p. 219)
• Moving the second row seats forward/
rearward* (p. 221)
}}
|| CAUTION Center seat9 Outboard seats10

The seat cushion of the integrated child
restraint* must be in the stowed position
before the center seat backrest can be
folded down.
The armrest* in the center seat must be
raised before the seat backrest is folded
down.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
ward and/or the backrest adjusted so that
To fold down the backrest: To fold down the backrest:
the rear seat backrests can be fully low-
ered. 1. Push down the head restraint manually.
NOTE
The rear seats may also need to be moved 2. Pull the strap on the right side of the cen-
rearward. ter seat. When folding down a second row seat
backrest, always start from the seat's nor-
The seats in the second row must be in the 3. Fold the backrest down until it locks into mal upright position.
upright position before they can be folded position. The seat cushion will move
down completely. They should not be downward/forward when the backrest is Do not use the handle for folding down the
folded down when they are tilted forward folded down and create a flat surface. seat when the seat is in the position for
to access the third row of seats. accessing the third row.
To return the backrest to the upright position:
1. Pull the strap. 1. Pull up and hold the handle on the side of
2. Fold up the backrest and release the strap. the seat while the backrest is being folded
Push the backrest until it locks into posi- down.
tion.
3. Adjust the head restraint if necessary.
9 In vehicles with six seats, there is no center seat.

10 This illustration shows a vehicle with seven seats.
2. Make sure that backrest and head WARNING Adjusting the rear seat head
restraint do not come in contact with the restraints
seat in front while the backrest is being Make sure that the rear seat backrest and
head restraint are locked securely in place Adjust the center head restraint in the rear
folded down. Fold the backrest down until seat to the seat occupant's height. Fold down
it locks into position. the outboard head restraints* to improve rear
> The seat cushion will move downward/ The head restraints at the outer seats must
always be raised when there is a passenger visibility.
forward when the backrest is folded in one of these spots of the rear seat.
down and create a flat surface. The Adjusting the center seat head
head restraint folds down automatically restraint
when the backrest is lowered. WARNING
The head restraints on the outboard sec-
WARNING ond-row seats must always be folded up
when there are passengers in the third row
Make sure the backrest is securely locked of seats*.
into position after it is folded down.
To return the backrest to the upright position: Related information

1. Pull up and hold the handle on the side of
the seat while the backrest is being folded
• Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
(p. 215)
up.
2. Make sure that backrest and head (p. 219)
restraint do not come in contact with the The center head restraint should be adjusted
seat in front while the backrest is being • Adjusting the passenger seat from the rear to suit the passenger's height. The entire back
folded up. Fold up the backrest and seat (p. 225) of the head should be covered if possible.
release the handle. • Moving the second row seats forward/ Manually move the restraint up or down as
rearward* (p. 221) needed.
3. Press the backrest until it locks into posi-
tion. • Adjusting the second row backrest tilt
(p. 222)
4. Push up the head restraint manually.
• Getting into and out of the third row of
seats* (p. 223)
}}
||
To lower the restraint, push and hold the but-

ton (see illustration) while carefully lowering
the head restraint.
216
WARNING
The center seat head restraint must be in
its lowest position when the seat is not
occupied. When the center seat is occu-
pied, the head restraint must be correctly
adjusted to the passenger's height, cover-
ing the entire back of the head if possible.
Folding the rear seat outboard head

restraints using the center display*
The outer head restraints can be folded via the
center display. The head restraint can be
folded down when the vehicle is in Passive
usage mode.
}}
|| Folding the rear seat outboard head

restraints using the handle
1. Tap in the center display. For vehicles without electrically folding back-
rests, fold the outboard head restraints man-
2. Tap Controls. ually using the inner control on the top of the
For vehicles with electrically folding* head
3. Choose a setting under Headrest fold. restraints, the outboard head restraints can be seat (see illustration ).
Manually push the head restraint until it clicks folded using the handle on the top of the seat
(see illustration .) Note that this method Folding the rear seat outboard head
into position.
also folds down the backrests. To fold down restraints using the handle
only the head restraints, e.g. to improve visibil- For vehicles with the electric folding function*,
WARNING the outboard head restraints can be folded
ity, use the center display* instead.
Do not lower the head restraint if there are using the handle on the top of the seat (see
passengers in any of the rear seats. illustration .) Note that this method also
folds down the backrests. To fold down only
the head restraints, e.g. to improve visibility,
WARNING
use the center display* instead. On models
The head restraint must be locked in the without electrically folding backrests, the head
upright position after it has been folded up. restraints cannot be moved.
Adjusting the second row head

restraints
Adjust the center seat's head restraint to suit
the height of the passenger.11 Fold down the
outer seats' head restraints* to improve rear
visibility.
Adjusting the center head restraint
Folding the rear seat outboard head Related information

restraints using the handle • Ignition modes (p. 447)
The outboard head restraints can be folded • Usage mode (p. 449)
using the handle on the top of the seat (see
illustration ). Note that this method also
folds down the backrests. To fold down only • Folding down the rear seat backrests*
the head restraints, e.g. to improve visibility, (p. 210)
use the center display* instead. • Folding the second row backrests (p. 213)
The center head restraint should be adjusted
• Getting into and out of the third row of to suit the passenger's height. The entire back
seats* (p. 223) of the head should be covered if possible.
• Folding down the armrest in the rear seat* Manually move the restraint up or down as
(p. 637) needed.
11 In vehicles with six seats, there is no center seat. }}
|| Electrically folding down the rear WARNING

seat's outboard head restraints*
Do not lower the head restraint if there are
passengers in any of the rear seats.
WARNING
The head restraint must be locked in the
upright position after it has been folded up.
WARNING
The head restraints on the outboard sec-
To lower the restraint, press and hold the but- ond-row seats must always be folded up
when there are passengers in the third row
ton (located between the backrest and the
of seats*.
head restraint, see illustration) while carefully The outer head restraints can be folded via the
lowering the head restraint. center display's function view. The head
restraint can be folded down when the vehicle
Related information
WARNING is in ignition mode 0. • Rear seat (p. 209)
The center seat head restraint must be in Tap the Headrest fold but-
• Folding down the rear seat backrests*
its lowest position when the seat is not (p. 210)
ton to activate/deactivate
occupied. When the center seat is occu- folding. • Folding the second row backrests (p. 213)
pied, the head restraint must be correctly
adjusted to the passenger's height, cover- • Moving the second row seats forward/
ing the entire back of the head if possible. rearward* (p. 221)
• Adjusting the second row backrest tilt
Manually push the head restraint until it clicks (p. 222)
into position. • Getting into and out of the third row of
seats* (p. 223)
Moving the second row seats Move the seat forward or backward to the Adjusting seats in a 6-seat vehicle
forward/rearward* desired position.
In vehicles with 6 or 7 seats*, the seats in the 3. Release the handle and press the seat
second row can be moved forward or rear- until it locks into position.
ward individually to help adapt legroom for
passengers in the second and third rows. The Check to make sure the seat is securely
second row seats cannot be moved forward locked into place after its position has been
changed.
or backward in 5-seat models.12
In vehicles with 6 or 7 seats*, the seats in the WARNING
second row can be moved forward or rear-
ward individually to help adapt legroom for • Adjust the seat and ensure it locks into
passengers in the second and third rows. position before driving. Use caution
when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled
Adjusting seats in a 7-seat vehicle or careless adjustments could lead to Lift the handle under the seat.
injury.
• Long objects must always be securely Move the seat forward or backward to the
tied down to help prevent injury or desired position.
damage in the event of sudden brak- 3. Release the handle and press the seat
ing. until it locks into position.
Check to make sure the seat is securely
the parking brake when loading or
locked into place after its position has been
unloading the vehicle.
changed.
vent the gear selector from being inad- Related information
vertently moved. • Rear seat (p. 209)
Lift the handle under the seat. (p. 210)
• Folding the second row backrests (p. 213)
12 Five-seat vehicles are only available on some markets. }}
• Adjusting the rear seat head restraints Adjusting the second row backrest Outboard seats
(p. 215) tilt
• Adjusting the second row head restraints Backrest tilt can be adjusted separately for
(p. 219) each seat in the second row.
Center seat13
(p. 222)
seats* (p. 223)
1. Pull the handle on the side of the seat

upward.
2. Adjust backrest tilt forward/backward by
decreasing/increasing pressure on the
backrest.
1. Pull the strap on the right side of the cen-
ter seat. 3. Release the handle to lock the backrest in
its new position and press on the backrest
2. Adjust backrest tilt forward/backward by until the lock engages.
decreasing/increasing pressure on the
backrest. Check to make sure the seat is securely
3. Release the strap to lock the backrest in changed.
its new position and press on the backrest
until the lock engages.
Check to make sure the seat is securely
changed.
13 In vehicles with six seats, there is no center seat.
WARNING • Getting into and out of the third row of Getting into and out of the third
seats* (p. 223) row of seats*
• Adjust the seat and ensure it locks into
position before driving. Use caution • Folding the third row backrests* (p. 224) The second row of seats can be adjusted to
make it easier to get in and out of the third
when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled
row of seats*.
or careless adjustments could lead to
injury.
• Long objects must always be securely
tied down to help prevent injury or
damage in the event of sudden brak-
ing.
the parking brake when loading or
unloading the vehicle.
vent the gear selector from being inad-
vertently moved.
The illustration is generic.
Related information To fold down the backrest:

• Rear seat (p. 209) 1. Pull the handle on the upper side of the
• Folding down the rear seat backrests* right or left outboard second row seat
(p. 210) upward/forward.
• Folding the second row backrests (p. 213) 2. Fold the backrest down and move the
• Adjusting the rear seat head restraints entire seat forward.
(p. 215) To return the seat to the upright position:
• Adjusting the second row head restraints – Push the seat rearward to its end position.
(p. 219) The backrest should then easily return to
• Moving the second row seats forward/ the correct position.
rearward* (p. 221)
}}
|| NOTE • Adjusting the second row head restraints Folding the third row backrests*
(p. 219) The third row has two individual seats. These
If a backrest in the second row of seats
does not lock back into the upright posi- • Moving the second row seats forward/ can be folded down separately.
rearward* (p. 221) CAUTION
tion after being folded down (e.g. for get-
ting in or out of the third row of seats), it • Adjusting the second row backrest tilt To fold down the third-row seat backrests,
may need to be pushed forward again (p. 222) it may be necessary to change the posi-
before trying again. • Folding the third row backrests* (p. 224) tion/tilt the seats in the second row.
WARNING
Make sure that the rear seat backrest and
head restraint are locked securely in place
The head restraints at the outer seats must
always be raised when there is a passenger
in one of these spots of the rear seat.
The second row backrests must always be
in the upright position when child seats are
installed in the third row of seats. Use cau-
tion when getting in and out of the third
row of seats to ensure that the second-row
seats do not pinch or otherwise affect
installed child seats. 1. Pull the handle on the upper side of the
backrest upward/forward.
Related information
(p. 210)
• Folding the second row backrests (p. 213)
• Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
(p. 215)
2. Make sure that backrest and head • Moving the second row seats forward/ Adjusting the passenger seat from
restraint do not come in contact with the rearward* (p. 221) the rear seat
seat in front while the backrest is being • Adjusting the second row backrest tilt The front passenger seat can be adjusted
folded down. Fold the backrest down. (p. 222) using the control in the right-hand rear door.
> The seat cushion will move downward/
Using the functions
forward when the backrest is folded seats* (p. 223)
down and create a flat surface. The
head restraint folds down automatically
when the backrest is lowered.
To return the seat to the upright position, fold
the backrest up manually until it locks into
position. Fold up the head restraint manually.
WARNING
Make sure that the rear seat backrest and
head restraint are locked securely in place
The head restraints at the outer seats must
Control right-hand rear door.
always be raised when there is a passenger
in one of these spots of the rear seat. Move the front passenger seat forward.
Move the front passenger seat backrest

Related information rearward.
Move the front passenger seat rearward.
(p. 210) Move the front passenger seat backrest
• Folding the second row backrests (p. 213) forward.
• Adjusting the rear seat head restraints Related information

(p. 215) • Rear seat (p. 209)
• Adjusting the second row head restraints • Folding down the rear seat backrests*
(p. 219) (p. 210)
}}
• Folding the second row backrests (p. 213) Steering wheel controls and horn
• Adjusting the rear seat head restraints The steering wheel has a horn and controls
(p. 215) for e.g. driver support systems and voice con-
trol.
(p. 219)
• Moving the second row seats forward/
rearward* (p. 221)
(p. 222)
seats* (p. 223)
Keypad in the steering wheel.
Driver support system controls.15
Controls for voice control, adjusting the
Keypad in the steering wheel. head-up display, accessing menus and
messages, and handling phone calls.
Controls for voice control, accessing
menus and messages, and handling
phone calls.
14 Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Alert* and Pilot Assist.
Horn
Keypad* in the steering wheel. The horn is located in the center of the steering
The horn is located in the center of the steering wheel.
wheel.
Controls for voice control, accessing Related information
menus and messages, and handling • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 228)
phone calls.
The horn is located in the center of the steering

wheel.
Adjusting the steering wheel

The steering wheel can be adjusted to various
positions.
Steering wheel adjuster lever.

1. Move the lever forward to release the
steering wheel.
The steering wheel's reach and height can be
adjusted. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
WARNING 3. Pull the lever back to lock the steering
Adjust the steering wheel and ensure it wheel into place. If the lever is difficult to
locks into position before driving. Never move, press or lift the steering wheel
adjust the steering wheel while driving. lightly while pulling the lever.
Related information
• Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 226)
• Speed-dependent steering wheel resis-
tance (p. 311)
CLIMATE CONTROL
CLIMATE CONTROL
Climate • Air distribution (p. 236) Climate zones

The vehicle is equipped with electronic cli- • Climate system controls (p. 240) The vehicle is divided into climate zones to
mate control. The climate system cools, heats make it possible to set different temperatures
and dehumidifies the air in the passenger for different parts of the passenger compart-
compartment. ment.
All of the climate system functions are con-
trolled from the center display and the buttons 2-zone climate system
on the center console.
Certain rear seat functions can also be con-
trolled from the climate controls* on the rear
of the tunnel console.
Most climate functions can also be controlled
via voice control. Certain functions require an
internet connection to be voice controlled.
NOTE
The climate system can be used to cool
down the media system in the center dis-
play if needed. In these cases, the message
Cooling infotainment system will be
shown in the instrument panel.
Related information
• Climate zones (p. 230)
• Climate control sensors (p. 231)
• Perceived temperature (p. 232)
• Parking climate* (p. 253)
• Heater (p. 262)
• Air quality (p. 233)
CLIMATE CONTROL
4-zone climate system* Climate control sensors

The climate system has a number of sensors
to help regulate the climate settings in the
vehicle. Do not cover or block the sensors
with clothing or other objects.
Location of the sensors
Sunlight sensors - on the upper side of the

dashboard.
Humidity sensor - in the rearview mirror
console.
Climate zones with 2-zone climate system. Ambient temperature sensor - in the right-
Climate zones with 4-zone climate system.
side door mirror.
In 2-zone climate systems, the passenger
compartment temperature can be set sepa- Passenger compartment temperature sen-
In 4-zone climate systems, the passenger
rately for the left and right sides of the vehicle. sor - near the buttons in the center con-
compartment temperature can be set sepa-
sole.
rately for the left and right sides of the vehicle,
and for the front and rear seats.
Related information
• Climate (p. 230) }}
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| Airborne particulate matter sensor* – on Perceived temperature

the underside of the glove compartment. The climate control system regulates the cli-
Ambient temperature sensor - in the right- mate in the passenger compartment based
side door mirror. on perceived temperature, not actual tem-
On vehicles equipped with the Interior Air perature.
Quality System*, there is also an air quality The selected passenger compartment tem-
sensor in the climate system's air intake. perature is based on the physical perception of
the current ambient temperature, airflow
Related information speed, humidity, sunlight in the passenger
• Climate (p. 230) compartment, etc.
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 234) The system has a sunlight sensor that detects
which side of the vehicle the sunlight is shin-
ing on and adjusts the temperature accord-
ingly. This means that the temperature of the
air coming out of the vents may be different
for the left and right sides, even if the tem-
perature setting is the same for both sides.
Related information
• Climate (p. 230)
Sunlight sensors - on the upper side of the

dashboard.
Humidity sensor - in the rearview mirror
console.
Passenger compartment temperature sen-
sor - near the buttons in the center con-
sole.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air quality • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 234) CleanZone*

The materials used in the passenger compart- • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 234) The CleanZone function monitors the condi-
ment and air filtering system have been tions affecting good air quality in the passen-
• Advanced Air Cleaner* (p. 236)
selected to ensure a high level of air quality in ger compartment and indicates whether they
the passenger compartment. • Passenger compartment air filter (p. 235) are fulfilled or not.
If the conditions are not met, the text
Materials used in the passenger CleanZone will be shown in white in Climate
compartment view.
The materials in the passenger compartment
are designed to be pleasant and comfortable, When all the conditions are met, the text will
even for people with asthma or allergies. change to blue.
The materials have been developed and tested The same indicator will also be shown in the
to reduce dust in the passenger compartment climate panel on the rear side of the tunnel
and make it easier to keep clean. console.
The mats in both the passenger compartment The following conditions must be met:
and cargo compartment can be easily • All doors and trunk lid are closed.
removed for cleaning.
• All doors and tailgate are closed.
The mats in both the passenger compartment • All door windows and the sunroof* are
and trunk can be easily removed for cleaning. closed.
Use Volvo-recommended cleaning agents and • All side windows and panoramic roof* are
car care products to clean the interior. closed.
Air filtering systems • The Interior Air Quality System* is acti-
In addition to the passenger compartment air vated.
filter, the vehicle is also equipped with other • The blower is activated.
air cleaning systems that help you maintain • Air recirculation is deactivated.
high air quality in the passenger compartment.
Related information
• Climate (p. 230)
• CleanZone* (p. 233)
}}
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| NOTE Clean Zone Interior Package* Interior Air Quality System*

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) is a series Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully
CleanZone does not indicate that the air
of modifications that filters even more allergy automatic air quality system that removes
quality is good, but only that the conditions
and asthma-inducing substances and other gases and particles to reduce odors and con-
for good air quality have been met.
pollutants from the passenger compartment. taminants in the passenger compartment.
CZIP includes the following: IAQS is part of the Clean Zone Interior
Related information Package (CZIP) and removes air contaminants
• An enhanced function that starts the
blower when the vehicle is unlocked using
such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitric oxides
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 234) and ground-level ozone.
the key. The blower will then fill the pas-
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 234) senger compartment with fresh air. The If the system's air quality sensors detect con-
function starts when required and taminants in the outside air, the air intake
• Passenger compartment air filter (p. 235)
switches off automatically after a period of closes and air recirculation is activated.
time or when one of the passenger com-
partment doors is opened. The amount of NOTE
time the blower runs gradually decreases
due to reduced need up until the vehicle is The air quality sensor should always be
4 years old. connected so that it can help improve the
air quality in the passenger compartment.
• The fully automatic Interior Air Quality
System (IAQS). Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
prevent fogging.
Related information
In the event of fogging, use the defroster
functions for the windshield, side windows
• CleanZone* (p. 233) and rear window.
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 234)
• Passenger compartment air filter (p. 235) Related information
• Activating and deactivating the air quality
sensor* (p. 235)
CLIMATE CONTROL
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 234) Activating and deactivating the air Passenger compartment air filter
• Passenger compartment air filter (p. 235) quality sensor* All air entering the passenger compartment
The air quality sensor is part of the fully auto- through the climate control system intake is
mated Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). filtered.
The air quality sensor can be switched on or
off. Replacing the passenger
compartment filter
1. Tap the temperature button in the middle To maintain the high performance of the cli-
at the bottom of the center display to mate control system, the filter must be
open Climate view. replaced regularly. Follow Volvo's service
2. Tap in Climate view. schedule for recommended replacement inter-
vals. When driving in areas with a lot of smog,
3. Choose a setting under Air quality dust, etc., the filter may need to be changed
sensor to activate/deactivate the air qual- more frequently.
ity sensor.
Related information NOTE

• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 234) There are two types of passenger compart-
ment filters. Make sure that the correct fil-
ter is installed.
Related information
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 234)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Advanced Air Cleaner* Air Quality app Air distribution

Advanced Air Cleaner is a fully automatic air The Air Quality app is a service that visualizes The climate system distributes incoming air
cleaner that traps airborne particulate matter, the measured concentration of airborne par- through a number of vents in the passenger
exhaust and other pollutants in the passenger ticulate matter inside and outside the vehicle compartment.
compartment air filter, which improves the over time.
climate in the passenger compartment. A climate sensor measures the concentration Automatic and manual air distribution
of PM2.5 particles (particles smaller than 2.5 When the auto-climate feature is on, air distri-
The function starts automatically when the bution is regulated automatically. Air distribu-
blower starts. µm) in the passenger compartment. Measure-
ments of pollutants outside the vehicle are tion can also be controlled manually.
Airborne particulate matter are also known as provided by an external service and based on
PM2.5 (particles smaller than 2.5 µm), and the Adjustable air vents
modeled data.
Certain air vents in the vehicle are adjustable,
concentrations of these particles in the vehicle
Related information which means they can be opened/closed and
are measured by one of the vehicle's climate
• Apps (p. 537) the direction of the air flow from the vent can
control sensors. The concentration in the vehi-
be adjusted.
cle is presented in the downloadable app Air • Climate control sensors (p. 231)
Quality.
• Advanced Air Cleaner* (p. 236)
Related information
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 234)
• Passenger compartment air filter (p. 235)
• Climate control sensors (p. 231)
• Air Quality app (p. 236)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger
compartment. compartment. compartment.
2-zone system - four vents on the dash- Two rows of seats – four vents on the 2-zone system - four vents on the dash-
board and one on each of the pillars dashboard, two on the rear side of the board and one on each of the pillars
between the front and rear doors. tunnel console and one on each side of the between the front and rear doors.
4-zone system* - two additional vents on pillars between the front and rear doors. 4-zone system* - two additional vents on
the rear side of the tunnel console. A third row of seats – one additional vent the rear side of the tunnel console.
4-zone system* and a third row of seats – on each of the pillars behind the rear
one additional vent on each of the pillars doors.
behind the rear doors.
}}
CLIMATE CONTROL
||
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger
compartment. compartment. compartment.
Four vents on the dashboard and one on Four vents on the dashboard, two on the With 1-zone climate system - four on
each of the pillars between the front and rear side of the tunnel console and one on dashboard.
rear doors. each side of the pillars between the front 2-zone climate system* - two additional
and rear doors. vents on the rear side of the tunnel con-
sole.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Adjusting air distribution Opening, closing and directing air

Air distribution can be adjusted manually if vents
needed. Some of the air vents in the passenger com-
1. Tap the temperature symbol in the middle partment can be individually opened, closed
at the bottom of the center display to and directed.
open Climate view. Misting can be eliminated by directing the
2. The air distribution buttons in the Climate outer air vents towards the door windows.
view are located in the middle around the Direct the outer air vents into the passenger
AUTO button, from top to bottom: compartment to maintain a comfortable tem-
perature in warm weather.
• Air distribution - windshield defrost
vents Opening and closing the air vents
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger
compartment.
• Air distribution - dashboard and center Air vents on the dashboard:
console air vents
Four on the dashboard and two on the – Turn the knob in the center of the air vent
rear side of the tunnel console. • Air distribution - floor air vents to open/close airflow from the vent.
Tap one or more air distribution buttons to When the mark on the knob is vertical, the
NOTE open/close the airflow for that vent. airflow is strongest.
> The air distribution changes and the
At low ambient temperatures, no air is dis- Air vents on the door pillars:
buttons will light up or go out.
tributed from the adjustable air vent noz- – Move the lever in the center of the air vent
zles at the rear of the tunnel console. If all air distribution buttons are dese-
up/down to open/close the airflow from
lected in manual mode, the climate
the vent.
control system will revert to automatic
Related information mode. The airflow is stopped when the lever is in
• Climate (p. 230) the lowest position. In other positions, the
• Adjusting air distribution (p. 239) Related information airflow is constant.
• Opening, closing and directing air vents • Air distribution (p. 236)
(p. 239) • Opening, closing and directing air vents
(p. 239)
}}
239
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| Air vents on the door pillars and rear side of Climate system controls
the tunnel console*: The climate system functions are controlled
Air vents on the door pillars: from physical buttons on the center console,
the center display, and the climate panel on
Air vents on the rear side of the tunnel con- the rear side of the tunnel console*.
sole*:
– Turn the thumb wheel under the air vent Physical buttons in the center console
to open/close the airflow from the vent.
The more white lines that are visible, the
stronger the airflow.
Directing air flow

– Move the lever in the center of the air vent Temperature controls for driver and pas-
horizontally or vertically to direct the air- senger side.1
flow from the vent. Controls for heated* driver and front pas-
senger seat, as well as heated steering
Related information
wheel*.
• Air distribution (p. 236)
• Adjusting air distribution (p. 239) Climate view in the center display
Button for max defroster. Tap the fan symbol or the temperature button
in the middle at the bottom of the center dis-
Button for heated rear window and door
play to open Climate view.
mirrors.
Climate buttons in the center display

The most common climate functions are
always available at the bottom of the center
display.
1 If temperature synchronization has been deactivated, the current temperature for both the driver's and passenger sides will be shown.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Main climate Related information

In addition to the climate functions that can • Climate (p. 230)
always be accessed in the center display, • Activating and deactivating power front
other main climate functions can also be con- seats* (p. 242)
trolled under Main climate.
Control for max defroster. rear seats* (p. 243)
• Activating and deactivating the ventilated
rear seats* (p. 245)
steering wheel* (p. 245)
Air conditioning controls.

• Activating auto climate control (p. 246)
Button for auto-regulation of climate control • Activating and deactivating recirculation
and arrows for air distribution. (p. 247)
Parking climate • Activating and deactivating max defroster
The vehicle's parking climate can be controlled (p. 248)
under Parking.
Air recirculation controls. Settings rear window and door mirrors (p. 249)
Additional climate settings can be adjusted
• Setting the blower speed for the front
under . seats (p. 250)
Physical buttons at the rear of the • Synchronize temperature (p. 251)
tunnel console* • Activating and deactivating air condition-
There are physical buttons on the rear side of ing (p. 251)
Control for heated rear win- the tunnel console for adjusting rear seat heat- • Activating and deactivating climate con-
dow and door mirrors. ing. trol for the third-row seats* (p. 252)
Physical buttons at the rear of the • Activating and deactivating front seat ven-
tunnel console* tilation* (p. 244)
There are physical buttons on the rear side of
the tunnel console for adjusting rear seat heat-
ing.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating power WARNING Activating and deactivating the

front seats* heated front seat*
Heated seats should not be used by people
The seats can be heated for added comfort who have difficulty detecting temperature The seats can be heated for added comfort
for the driver and passengers in cold weather. increases due to nerve damage or numb- for the driver and passengers in cold weather.
ness or who for another reason may have Automatic start of heated seats can be set to
difficulty operating the controls for seat be activated/deactivated when the driver gets
heating. into the vehicle.2 With automatic start acti-
vated, heating will be turned on at an ambient
Related information temperature of 10 °C (50 °F) or lower.
• Climate system controls (p. 240) 1. Tap the temperature button in the middle
1. Tap the seat button for the driver's or pas- • Activating and deactivating the heated at the bottom of the center display to
senger's side at the bottom of the center front seat* (p. 242) open Climate view.
display to open the control for seat heat-
ing. 2. Press
3. Choose a setting under Auto driver seat
heat and Auto passenger seat heat to
activate/deactivate automatic start of
heated driver's and passenger's seat.
Related information
• Activating and deactivating power front
2. Tap the seat heating button repeatedly to seats* (p. 242)
turn on/off heating and to switch between • Usage mode (p. 449)
the three heat levels.
> The level is changed and the set level is
displayed in the button.
2 Usage mode Comfort
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating the With 4-zone system*:

heated rear seats*
The seats can be heated for added comfort
for the passengers in cold weather.
With 2-zone system:
Buttons for seat heating on the rear side of the tun-

nel console.
– Press the left or right seat heating buttons
on the back of the tunnel console to turn
on/off seat heating and switch between
the three heating levels.
> The level is changed and the indicator Seat heating controls and indicator lights on the rear
lights in the button display the level. side of the tunnel console.
– Press repeatedly on the left or right seat
heating buttons on the climate panel on
}}
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| the tunnel console to select one of four Activating and deactivating front
heating levels. seat ventilation*
> The level will be changed and the cli- The seats can be ventilated to provide
mate panel screen will show the new increased comfort in warm weather.
level. 2. Tap the seat ventilation button repeatedly
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrest that draw air through the to select one of the three levels: High,
seat upholstery. The cooler the passenger Medium or Low.
WARNING
compartment is, the greater the cooling effect > The level is changed and the set level is
Heated seats should not be used by people displayed in the button.
who have difficulty detecting temperature of the ventilation. The system can be activated
increases due to nerve damage or numb- when the engine is running.
Related information
ness or who for another reason may have
difficulty operating the controls for seat • Climate system controls (p. 240)
heating.
Related information 1. Tap the left- or right-side steering wheel

• Climate system controls (p. 240) and seat button in the center display's cli-
mate bar to open the controls for steering
wheel and seat heating.
If the vehicle is not equipped with heated
seats or heated steering wheel (for the
driver's side), the button for seat ventila-
tion is directly accessible in the climate
bar.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating the
ventilated rear seats* ventilated rear seats from the rear heated steering wheel*
The seats can be ventilated to provide seats The steering wheel can be heated for added
increased comfort in warm weather. comfort in cold weather.
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrest that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooler the passenger
compartment is, the greater the cooling effect
of the ventilation. The system can be activated
when the engine is running.
1. Tap the driver's side seat button at the
bottom of the center display to show the
control for steering wheel heating.
Seat ventilation controls and indicator lights on the

rear side of the tunnel console.
– Press repeatedly on the left or right seat
ventilation buttons on the climate panel on
the tunnel console to select one of four
levels. 2. Tap the steering wheel heating button
> The level will be changed and the cli- repeatedly to turn on/off heating and to
mate panel screen will show the new switch between the three heat levels.
level. > The level is changed and the set level is
displayed in the button.
Related information
• Climate system controls (p. 240) Related information
• Climate system controls (p. 240)
• Activating and deactivating automatic
steering wheel heating* (p. 246)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating Activating auto climate control Related information

automatic steering wheel heating* If auto climate control is activated, several cli- • Climate system controls (p. 240)
The steering wheel can be heated for added mate system functions are controlled auto-
comfort in cold weather. matically.
Automatic start of heated steering wheel can 1. Tap the temperature button in the middle
be set to be activated/deactivated when the at the bottom of the center display to
driver gets into the vehicle.3 With automatic open Climate view.
start activated, heating will be turned on at 2. Tap or press and hold AUTO.
low ambient temperatures.
• Tap - air recirculation, air conditioning
1. Tap the temperature button in the middle and air distribution are controlled auto-
at the bottom of the center display to matically.
open Climate view.
• Press and hold - air recirculation, air
2. Press conditioning and air distribution are
controlled automatically. Temperature
3. Choose a setting under Auto steering
and blower speed are changed to
wheel heat to activate/deactivate auto-
standard settings: 22 °C (72 °F) and
matic start of heated steering wheel.
speed 3.
Related information > Auto climate mode is activated and the
• Activating and deactivating the heated button lights up.
steering wheel* (p. 245)
• Usage mode (p. 449) NOTE
It is possible to change the temperature
and blower speed without deactivating
automatic climate control. Automatic cli-
mate control is deactivated when the air
distribution is changed manually or when
the max defroster is activated.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating NOTE Activating and deactivating the

recirculation recirculation timer setting
If the system's air quality sensors detect
The climate system's recirculation function The climate system's recirculation function
contaminants in the outside air, the air
helps shut out smog, smoke, exhaust fumes, helps shut out smog, smoke, exhaust fumes,
intake closes and air circulation activates
etc. by reusing the air in the passenger com- etc. by reusing the air in the passenger com-
automatically.
partment. partment.
1. Tap the temperature button in the middle When the recirculation timer is activated, air
at the bottom of the center display to Related information recirculation will switch off automatically after
open Climate view. • Climate system controls (p. 240) 20 minutes.
• Activating and deactivating the recircula- 1. Tap the temperature button in the middle
tion timer setting (p. 247) at the bottom of the center display to
open Climate view.
2. Press
3. Choose a setting under Recirculation
2. Tap the air recirculation button.
timer to activate/deactivate the air recir-
culation timer.
> Air recirculation is activated/deacti-
vated and the button lights up/goes Related information
out. • Activating and deactivating recirculation
(p. 247)
CAUTION
If the air in the vehicle is recirculated too
long, there is a risk of fogging on the inside
of the windows.
NOTE
Recirculation cannot be activated when the
max defroster is on.
247
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating max

defroster
Max defroster is used to quickly remove con-
densation and ice from windows.
Max defroster deactivates automatic climate
control and air recirculation, activates the air
conditioning, and changes blower speed to 5 2. Tap the max defroster button.
and temperature to HI.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button lights up/goes out.
NOTE While max defroster is activated, the
The volume increases when the blower temperature in the different climate
speed is changed to 5. Button in center console.
zones is not synchronized.
– Tap the button. Related information

When max defroster is deactivated, the cli- > Max defroster is activated/deactivated • Climate system controls (p. 240)
mate system reverts to the previous settings. and the button lights up/goes out. • Synchronize temperature (p. 251)
Activating and deactivating max While max defroster is activated, the
temperature in the different climate
defroster from the center console
zones is not synchronized.
A button in the center console offers quick
access to the max defroster. Activating and deactivating max
defroster from the center display
1. Tap the temperature button in the middle
at the bottom of the center display to
open Climate view.
248
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating the heated Automatically activating and
heated rear window and door rear window and door mirrors from deactivating the heated rear
mirrors the center display window and door mirrors
The heated rear window and door mirrors are 1. Tap the temperature button in the middle The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove condensation and ice at the bottom of the center display to used to quickly remove condensation and ice
from the glass. open Climate view. from the glass.
Automatic start of heated rear window and
Activating and deactivating the heated door mirrors can be set to be activated/deacti-
rear window and door mirrors from vated when the driver gets into the vehicle.4
the center console With automatic start activated, heating will be
A button in the center console offers quick turned on when there is a risk of ice or con-
access to the heated rear window and door densation on the windows or mirrors. Heating
mirrors functions. is automatically switched off when the win-
2. Tap the button for heated rear window dow or door mirror is sufficiently warm and
and door mirrors. the condensation or ice is gone.
> Heated windows and door mirrors are 1. Tap the temperature button in the middle
activated and the button lights up/goes at the bottom of the center display to
out. open Climate view.
Related information 2. Press
3. Choose a setting under Auto rear
• Automatically activating and deactivating defroster to activate/deactivate auto-
the heated rear window and door mirrors matic start of heated rear window and
(p. 249) door mirrors.
Button in center console. Related information

– Tap the button.
rear window and door mirrors (p. 249)
> Heated windows and door mirrors are
activated and the button lights up/goes • Usage mode (p. 449)
out.
249
CLIMATE CONTROL
Setting the blower speed for the Related information Setting the temperature for the
front seats5 • Climate system controls (p. 240) front seats6
The blower can be set to several different The temperature can be set to the desired
automatically controlled speeds for the front number of degrees for the front seat climate
seat. zones.
1. Tap the temperature button in the middle 1. Tap the temperature button at the bottom
at the bottom of the center display to in the middle of the center display to open
open Climate view. the control.7
2. Tap the desired blower speed: OFF, 1-5 or 2. Tap the arrows next to the temperature to
Max. raise or lower the temperature. When the
> The blower speed will be changed and temperature is synchronized, you can also
the set speed will light up. tap directly on the arrows without having
to press the temperature button first.
CAUTION > The temperature will be set and the
button will display the new tempera-
The air conditioning will not engage if the ture.
blower is turned off completely, which may
cause fogging on the inside of the win-
dows. NOTE
Heating/cooling cannot be accelerated by
choosing a higher/lower temperature than
NOTE the desired temperature.
The climate system automatically adapts
airflow as needed within the set blower Related information
speed, which means that airflow speed
may vary slightly within the same blower
speed.
High blower speed in the rear seat can
cause increased sound volume in the front
seat.
5 The same setting applies to the rear seats with the 2-zone climate system.
250
CLIMATE CONTROL
Synchronize temperature Temperature synchronization can also be Activating and deactivating air
By default, the temperature in the vehicle's deactivated by changing the temperature on conditioning
various climate zones is synchronized with the passenger side. The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
the set temperature for the driver's side, but incoming air as needed.
Resetting synchronized temperature
it is possible to deactivate the synchroniza- When the air conditioning is activated, it will
1. Tap the temperature button for the driver's
tion and set the temperature separately for be switched on and off automatically by the
or passenger's side at the bottom of the
the different climate zones. climate system as needed.
center display to open the control.
Deactivating temperature 1. Tap the temperature button in the middle
synchronization at the bottom of the center display to
1. Tap the temperature button at the bottom open Climate view.
in the middle of the center display to open
the control.
2. Tap the synchronization button between

the temperature controls.
> The temperature for all zones in the
vehicle is synchronized with the set 2. Tap the air conditioning button.
temperature on the driver's side. > Air conditioning is activated/deacti-
2. Tap the synchronization button between vated and the button lights up/goes
the temperature controls. Related information out.
> The temperature can now be set sepa-
rately for the individual climate zones.
The set temperature is now shown sep-
arately on the driver's and passenger's
sides in the climate bar instead of only
in the middle.
6 The same setting applies to the rear seats with the 2-zone climate system.
7 If temperature synchronization has been deactivated, the current temperature for both the driver's and passenger sides will be shown. }}
251
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| NOTE Activating and deactivating climate Related information

control for the third-row seats* • Climate system controls (p. 240)
For optimal air conditioning function, close
The third row of seats has separate air condi- • Activating and deactivating auto-start of
all the side windows and the panoramic
tioning that cools and dehumidifies incoming third-row climate control* (p. 253)
roof*.
air as needed.
For optimal air conditioning function, close
all the side windows and the sunroof*.
NOTE 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate

The air conditioning cannot be activated bar to open Climate view in the center dis-
when the fan speed is set to Off. play.
2. Select the Rear tab.
Related information 3. Tap Third row.
> The climate system is activated/deacti-
vated and the button lights up/goes
out.
NOTE
The climate control for the third row of
seats is automatically activated if any of
the third-row seat belts are buckled.
It is not possible to manually activate air
conditioning for the third row of seats if the
main air conditioning system is deactivated
or the climate system* for the second row
of seats is deactivated.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating auto- Parking climate* Preconditioning*

start of third-row climate control* Parking climate is an umbrella term for vari- Preconditioning is a climate function that, if
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies ous functions that improve the passenger possible, attempts to achieve a comfortable
incoming air as needed. compartment climate when the vehicle is temperature in the passenger compartment
On models with a 4-zone climate*, the air con- parked, e.g. preconditioning. before driving.
ditioning for the third row of seats can be set Parking climate functions are controlled from Preconditioning can be started immediately,
to start automatically when the engine is the Parking tab in the center display's Climate or started at a preset time using a timer, from
started. view. Tap the temperature symbol in the mid- the center display. It can also be started from
dle at the bottom of the center display to open a device that has the Volvo Cars app*.
Climate view.
In warm weather, the climate system venti-
Related information lates the passenger compartment by blowing
• Climate (p. 230) air in from outside. The function cannot heat
1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate the passenger compartment.
bar to open Climate view in the center dis- • Preconditioning* (p. 253)
The function utilizes several of the vehicle's
play. • Air purification* (p. 257)
systems:
2. Tap . • Parking climate symbols and messages*
(p. 260) • In cold weather, the parking heater heats
3. Activate Autostart third-row climate. the passenger compartment to a comfort-
• Remote Start of the vehicle using the able temperature.
> The message Activates third-row Volvo Cars app (p. 572)
climate at startup is displayed in the • In warm weather, air conditioning cools
center display. the passenger compartment to a comfort-
able temperature.
Related information
• The electrically heated steering wheel*
and seats* can be activated.
• Activating and deactivating climate con-
• Heating for the rear window and door mir-
trol for the third-row seats* (p. 252)
rors is automatically activated as needed.
During preconditioning in a hot climate, con-
densation from the air conditions may drip
under the vehicle. This is normal.
}}
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| NOTE NOTE Starting and stopping

preconditioning
Preconditioning can be used to warm up Air purification* starts automatically when
Preconditioning heats or cools the passenger
the vehicle even if it is not connected to an preconditioning is complete.
compartment, if possible, before driving. The
electrical outlet. Full preconditioning is
Windows and doors must be closed for air function can be started directly from the cen-
available when the hybrid battery has a
purification to be performed. ter display or the Volvo Cars app.
sufficient charge level. Otherwise, precon-
1. Tap the temperature button in the middle
ditioning is limited depending on the
at the bottom of the center display to
charge level of the hybrid battery. NOTE open Climate view.
If the vehicle is not connected to an electri- Air purification* starts automatically when 2. Tap Parking.
cal socket it is still possible in a warm cli- preconditioning is complete.
mate to achieve brief cooling of the pas- 3. Tap Start heating/cooling to start pre-
Windows and doors must be closed for air
senger compartment by direct starting preconditioning immediately.
purification to be performed.
conditioning.
NOTE
Related information
NOTE • Parking climate* (p. 253) Preconditioning is available when the high-
voltage battery is sufficiently charged, but
Preconditioning is available when the high- • Starting and stopping preconditioning the vehicle's range will be affected consid-
voltage battery is sufficiently charged, but (p. 254) erably if preconditioning is carried out
the vehicle's range will be affected consid-
erably if preconditioning is carried out • Preconditioning timer* (p. 255) when the vehicle is not plugged in for
• Air purification* (p. 257) charging.
when the vehicle is not plugged in for
charging.
NOTE
NOTE The vehicle doors and windows should be
closed during preconditioning of the pas-
During preconditioning of the passenger
senger compartment.
compartment, the vehicle works to reach a
comfortable temperature and not the tem-
perature set in the climate system.
CLIMATE CONTROL
NOTE • Remote Start of the climate system using Preconditioning timer*

the Volvo Cars app (p. 572) The timer can be set to finish preconditioning
Air purification* starts automatically when
preconditioning is complete. • Economical driving (p. 483) at a predetermined time.
• Usage mode (p. 449) The timer can store up to 8 preset times for
purification to be performed. • a time on one or more days of the week,
with or without the repeat function.
NOTE NOTE
When someone sits in the driver's seat8, Preconditioning can be used to warm up
preconditioning is paused and regular cli- the vehicle even if it is not connected to an
mate control starts. electrical outlet. Full preconditioning is
When the vehicle starts driving9, precondi- available when the hybrid battery has a
tioning is switched off. sufficient charge level. Otherwise, precon-
ditioning is limited depending on the
charge level of the hybrid battery.
Related information
• Parking climate* (p. 253) If the vehicle is not connected to an electri-
cal socket it is still possible in a warm cli-
• Preconditioning* (p. 253)
mate to achieve brief cooling of the pas-
• Preconditioning timer* (p. 255) senger compartment by direct starting pre-
• Air purification* (p. 257) conditioning.
• Remote Start of the vehicle using the
Volvo Cars app (p. 572) Related information
• Remote Start of the climate system using • Preconditioning* (p. 253)
the Volvo Cars app (p. 571) • Adding and editing timer settings for pre-
• Remote Start of the climate system using conditioning* (p. 256)
the Volvo Cars app (p. 571)

9 Usage mode Drive }}
CLIMATE CONTROL
• Activating and deactivating precondition- Adding and editing timer settings 3. Tap the timer setting you would like to
ing timer* (p. 257) for preconditioning* change.
• Deleting preconditioning timer settings* The preconditioning timer can store up to 8 > A pop-up window will appear.
(p. 257) preset timer settings. 4. To edit a timer setting, follow the proce-
dures described under the heading "Add-
Adding a timer setting ing a timer setting" above.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
Related information
2. Select the Parking tab.
3. Tap Timers. • Preconditioning timer* (p. 255)
4. Tap Add new timer. • Activating and deactivating precondition-
ing timer* (p. 257)
NOTE • Deleting preconditioning timer settings*
It is not possible to add a time setting if (p. 257)
there are already 8 settings for the timer.
Delete a time setting to be able to add a
new one.
5. Set a time for one or more days of the

week. Activate/deactivate repeat by tap-
ping to Repeat weekly.
6. Tap Set timer.
> The timer setting will be added to the
list and activated.
Editing the timer setting

1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2. Select the Parking tab.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating Deleting preconditioning timer Air purification*

preconditioning timer* settings* Air purification is used to improve the air
Timer settings in the preconditioning timer A preconditioning timer setting that is no quality in the passenger compartment before
can be activated or deactivated as needed. longer needed can be deleted. driving.
It is possible to activate air purification man-
1. Open Climate view in the center display. 1. Open Climate view in the center display.
ually from the center display, but the function
2. Select the Parking tab. 2. Select the Parking tab. is also started automatically when precondi-
3. Activate/deactivate a timer setting by tap- 3. Tap the timer setting you would like to tioning has finished.
ping the button to the right of the setting. delete. The function uses the ventilation system to
> The timer is activated/deactivated and 4. Press Delete timer. blow fresh air into the passenger compart-
the button lights up/goes out. ment and then circulates the air through the
> The timer setting is deleted. climate system's passenger compartment air
Related information Related information filter.
• Preconditioning* (p. 253) Related information
• Preconditioning timer* (p. 255)
• Preconditioning timer* (p. 255) • Parking climate* (p. 253)
• Adding and editing timer settings for pre-
• Adding and editing timer settings for pre- • Starting and stopping air purification*
conditioning* (p. 256)
conditioning* (p. 256) (p. 258)
• Deleting preconditioning timer settings*
• Activating and deactivating precondition- • Preconditioning* (p. 253)
(p. 257)
ing timer* (p. 257)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Starting and stopping air Climate comfort retaining NOTE

purification* function*
Climate comfort maintenance will be deac-
Air purification improves the air quality in the The climate in the passenger compartment
tivated if the vehicle is locked from the out-
passenger compartment before driving. The can be maintained when the vehicle is
side in order to avoid using residual engine
function is activated in the center display. parked, e.g. if the engine is turned off but the
heat unnecessarily. This function is
1. Tap the temperature button in the middle driver or passengers remain in the vehicle.
intended to be used to maintain climate
at the bottom of the center display to This function can only be direct-started from
comfort when the driver or a passenger
open Climate view. the center display.
remains in the vehicle after the engine is
2. Tap Parking. The function utilizes several of the vehicle's turned off.
systems:
3. Tap Start air purification to start air puri- The climate comfort retaining function is
fication immediately. • Residual heat from the engine is used to limited in duration in cold weather depend-
help heat the passenger compartment to a ing on the amount of residual warmth
NOTE comfortable temperature. available.
Air purification* starts automatically when • In warm weather, the ventilation system
preconditioning is complete. cools the passenger compartment by Related information
blowing air in from outside. • Parking climate* (p. 253)
purification to be performed. • Starting and switching off the climate
WARNING retaining function when parking* (p. 259)
Never leave children or people who cannot
Related information exit the vehicle without help alone in the
• Parking climate* (p. 253) vehicle.
• Air purification* (p. 257)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Starting and switching off the NOTE

climate retaining function when
parking* Climate comfort maintenance will be deac-
tivated if the vehicle is locked from the out-
The climate retaining function maintains the
side in order to avoid using residual engine
climate settings in the vehicle after the
heat unnecessarily. This function is
engine has been switched off. The function
intended to be used to maintain climate
can be activated in the center display.
comfort when the driver or a passenger
remains in the vehicle after the engine is
turned off.
The climate comfort retaining function is
1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate limited in duration in cold weather depend-
bar to open Climate view in the center dis- ing on the amount of residual warmth
play. available.
2. Tap Use heat from drive to start climate
comfort. Related information
> The climate comfort retaining function • Climate comfort retaining function*
will be activated/deactivated and the (p. 258)
button light will go on/off.
NOTE
Maintained climate comfort is not possible
when there is not sufficient residual engine
heat to maintain the climate settings in the
passenger compartment, or if the outside
temperature is above approximately 20 °C
(68 °F).
CLIMATE CONTROL
Parking climate symbols and Messages related to parking climate can also
messages* be displayed in a device that has the Volvo
A number of symbols and messages related Cars* app.
to parking climate may be displayed in the
instrument panel.
Symbol Message Meaning

Parking climate Service required Parking climate is not functioning properly. Contact a workshopA to have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Parking climate Temporarily Parking climate is temporarily not functioning properly.

unavailable
Parking climate unavailable The parking climate cannot be activated because the high-voltage battery's charge level is too
Charge level too low low to start the parking heater. Charge the vehicle.
The parking climate cannot be activated because the hybrid battery's charge level is too low to
start the parking heater. Start the vehicle.
Parking climate unavailable Not The parking climate cannot be activated if the charging cable is not connected. Connect the
connected to power supply charging cable.
CLIMATE CONTROL

Limited parking climate Charge Parking climate will only run for a limited time when the high-voltage battery's charge level is too
level too low low. Charge the vehicle.
Parking climate will only run for a limited time when the hybrid battery's charge level is too low.
Start the vehicle.
Parking climate unavailable Parking climate will not run because the heating need is low.
Desired temperature reached
A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
• Volvo Cars app (p. 566)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Heater Parking heater Parking heater

The heater has two subfunctions that help The parking heater heats the passenger com- The parking heater heats the passenger com-
warm the passenger compartment or engine partment and battery as needed before driv- partment as needed before driving if precon-
in various situations. ing if preconditioning is activated. ditioning is activated.
The heater has two sub-functions: The parking heater is a high-voltage heater. It The parking heater is one of two subfunctions
starts automatically if the parking climate's of the vehicle's heater. The heater is mounted
• Parking heater - heats the passenger com-
preconditioning is activated and the passenger in the front right-side wheel housing.
partment as needed when the parking cli-
compartment needs to be heated.
mate's preconditioning is activated. The parking heater starts automatically if the
• Auxiliary heater - heats the passenger Preconditioning switches off automatically parking climate's preconditioning is activated
compartment while driving. when the vehicle is started. and the passenger compartment needs to be
heated.
The heater is a high-voltage coolant heater Battery and charging
and is mounted in the front right-side wheel The heater is powered by the vehicle's high- Depending on factors such as battery level,
housing. voltage battery. If the charge level in the high- passenger compartment temperature and
voltage battery is too low, the heater will ambient temperature, the heater has different
Battery and charging switch off automatically and a message will be running times. If the battery is fully charged,
The heater is powered by the vehicle's hybrid displayed in the instrument panel. the charging cable is plugged in and the timer
battery. If the charge level in the hybrid battery
is set well in advance of departure, increased
is too low, the heater will switch off automati-
NOTE preconditioning can be automatically activated
cally and a message will be displayed in the
in cold weather. Increased preconditioning
instrument panel. Make sure that the high-voltage battery
may mean an idling time of up to 120 minutes.
has sufficient charge if the parking heater
The running time without extended precondi-
NOTE must be used.
tioning is up to 30 minutes.
Make sure that the battery has sufficient
charge if the heater must be used. Related information NOTE
Make sure that the hybrid battery has suffi-
Related information • Preconditioning* (p. 253) cient charge if the parking heater must be
• Climate (p. 230) used.
• Parking heater (p. 262)
• Additional heater (p. 263)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Related information Additional heater Activating and deactivating the

• Heater (p. 262) The auxiliary heater helps heat the passenger auxiliary heater
• Additional heater (p. 263) compartment while driving. The auxiliary heater helps heat the passenger
The auxiliary heater is one of two sub-func- compartment and engine while driving.
tions of the vehicle's heater. The heater is It is possible to set whether automatic start
mounted in the front right-side wheel housing. for the auxiliary heater should be activated or
The auxiliary heater is started and controlled deactivated.
automatically when extra heat is required 1. Tap the temperature button in the middle
while the vehicle is being driven. at the bottom of the center display to
It switches off automatically when the ignition open Climate view.
is switched off. 2. Press
Related information 3. Activate/deactivate automatic start of
• Heater (p. 262) Additional heater.
NOTE
If automatic start of the auxiliary heater is
• Activating and deactivating the auxiliary
heater (p. 263) deactivated, this may impair comfort in the
passenger compartment since the climate
system then does not have a heat source
during electrical operation.
Related information
• Additional heater (p. 263)
263
Locking and unlocking Lock indication Lock and alarm indicators on the
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked in The vehicle can indicate locking and unlock- dashboard
several different ways. ing in different ways. You can adjust how the
These are: vehicle confirms locking and unlocking
through settings for lock indication and door
• with the key buttons
mirrors.
• with the detachable key blade (if the bat-
tery in the key is discharged) Exterior confirmation
• keyless* (the vehicle detects when a key is Locking
within range) • The turn signals will flash once and the
• from the inside of the vehicle with the door mirrors will fold in1 to confirm the
door handles and lock buttons vehicle is locked.
• with the Volvo Cars app Unlocking
• automatic locking when the vehicle is driv- • The turn signals will flash twice and the The locks and alarm indicator is located in the center
ing. door mirrors will fold out1 to confirm the of the dashboard, near the windshield.
vehicle is unlocked. The locks and alarm indicator will display the
NOTE The tailgate, hood and all doors must be status of the locking system:
For safety reasons, all of the vehicle's closed for confirmation to be given. If only the • One long flash indicates locking.
doors will unlock in the event of a collision. driver's door is closed when the vehicle is
This will only happen if one of the safety locked2, the vehicle will be locked but the turn • When the vehicle is locked, this will be
systems has been triggered. indicated by short, pulsating flashes.
signals will only flash to indicate locking when
all doors and the tailgate and hood have been • Rapid flashing after disabling the alarm
closed. indicates that the alarm has been trig-
Related information
gered.
• Locking and unlocking using the key but- The trunk lid, hood and all doors must be
tons (p. 270) closed for confirmation to be given. If only the Indicators in the doors' lock buttons
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 285) driver's door is closed when the vehicle is There are lock buttons inside the vehicle with
locked3, the vehicle will be locked but the turn lock symbols and lock indicator lights.
• Locking and unlocking from inside the
signals will only flash to indicate locking when
vehicle (p. 290)
all doors and the trunk lid and hood have been
• Alarm (p. 303) closed.
Lock confirmation settings Keys

Settings for how the vehicle confirms locking The vehicle's physical keys are available in
and unlocking can be adjusted in the center different variants. The vehicle detects when a
display's Settings menu. key is inside the front part of the passenger
1. Tap in the center display. compartment, and can then be started.
2. Tap Controls.
When the front doors' indicator lights are lit,
all doors are locked. The lights go out if any of 3. Select to activate or deactivate confirma-
the vehicle's doors are opened. tion for locking/unlocking.
The rear doors' indicator lights* go out if the Related information
relevant door is unlocked and opened. • Lock indication (p. 266)
Other indicators • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 175)
Depending on the vehicle's settings, functions
such as home safe lighting, Guidance Light
and automatic folding in or out of the door
mirrors can indicate locking or unlocking.
Available key types are the standard key, the button-
Related information
less key (Key Tag)*, and Care Key.4
• Lock confirmation settings (p. 267)
The standard key and the Care Key are equip-
• Locking and unlocking (p. 266)
ped with buttons. Additional keys than those
• Welcome Light (p. 161) included as standard can be ordered. For vehi-
• Using Guidance Light (p. 160) cles equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking*, a smaller, lighter and buttonless
key (Key Tag) can be purchased as an acces-
sory.
1 Only vehicles with power folding mirrors.

2 Not possible with keyless locking*.
3 Not possible with keyless locking*.
4 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model. }}
|| To start the vehicle, a key must be in the front Standard key and its buttons warning signal will sound when the tail-
section of the passenger compartment. gate is opening or closing.
For vehicles equipped with keyless locking Trunk lid
and unlocking (Passive Entry)*, the engine can Press the button once to disarm* and
be started with the key anywhere in the vehi- unlock the trunk lid.
cle. Panic alarm
The keys can be linked to different user pro- The panic alarm is used to attract atten-
files to store personal settings in the vehicle. tion in emergency situations. Press and
hold the button for at least 3 seconds or
press twice within 3 seconds to activate
WARNING the vehicle's turn signals and horn. To
The key contains a button cell battery. deactivate, wait at least 5 seconds and
Keep new and used batteries out of the press the button again. Otherwise, it will
reach of children. If batteries are swal- The key has four buttons, one on the left side and
switch off automatically after 3 minutes.
lowed, they can cause serious injury. three on the right.
If any damage is detected, e.g. if the bat- Locking
tery cover cannot be closed properly, do
WARNING
not use the product. Keep defective prod- Press the button once to lock the vehicle If anyone is left in the vehicle, make sure
ucts out of the reach of children. and arm the alarm. that power to the power windows and sun-
Press and hold to close all windows. roof* is cut off by taking the key with you
when you leave the vehicle.
Unlocking
If anyone is left in the vehicle, make sure
Press the button once to unlock the vehi- that power to the power windows and pan-
cle and disarm the alarm. oramic roof* is cut off by taking the key
Press and hold to open all windows at with you when you leave the vehicle.
the same time. This can be used, for
example, to quickly air out a hot passen-
ger compartment before getting in.
Tailgate
Press the button once to disarm* and
unlock the tailgate.
On vehicles with power tailgates*, press
and hold to open or close the tailgate. A
WARNING NOTE If the active key is removed from the

vehicle
Be aware of the risk of injury when opening A key that has been locked in the vehicle is
and closing. If the key is removed from the vehi-
temporarily deactivated and cannot be cle while the engine is running, the
• Always operate with caution. used until the vehicle is unlocked using
warning message The car key is not
another valid key.
• Do not allow children to play with the detected. See Owner's Manual for
operating controls. more information. will be displayed in the
• Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. Button-less key (Key Tag)* instrument panel and an audible signal will
A buttonless key5 can be ordered as an acces- sound when the last door is closed.
• Keep in mind that the power windows sory for vehicles equipped with the keyless
can be operated even if the key has locking and unlocking function. Start and key- The message will disappear when the key is
been removed from the vehicle, as long less locking and unlocking function in the returned to the vehicle and the O button on
as the seat sensor detects an occupant same way as with the standard key. The key is the right-side steering wheel keypad is
in the driver's seat. To cut the power waterproof up to a depth of approx. 10 meters pressed or when all doors are closed.
supply to the power windows, the driv- (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes. It does not
er's door must be open and no one have a key blade and the battery cannot be
Interference
may be sitting in the driver's seat. The replaced. Electromagnetic fields or obstructing objects
power windows can be reactivated in may interfere with the key's functions for key-
the center display, even if the key has Care Key less start and keyless locking and unlocking*.
been removed from the vehicle and the It is possible to set a speed limitation that will
seat sensor doesn't detect any occu- be active when Care Key is used. This limit is NOTE
pant in the driver's seat. intended to promote safe use of the vehicle,
Do not store the vehicle's keys near metal
• Never stick objects or body parts out e.g. when it is loaned out.
objects or electronic devices (phones, tab-
through the windows, even if the vehi- lets, laptops, chargers, etc.). Keep a dis-
cle electrical system is completely tance between them of at least 10-15 cm
turned off. (4-6 inches).
If you experience interference, use the key's

detachable blade to unlock the vehicle. Then
place the key in the backup reader in the cup
5 Also called sport key. }}
|| holder to disarm the alarm and start the vehi- WARNING Locking and unlocking using the
cle. key buttons
California Proposition 65
If you experience interference, use the key's The buttons on the key can be used to lock or
detachable blade to unlock the vehicle. Then Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- unlock the entire vehicle.6
senger vehicle can expose you to chemi-
place the key in the backup reader in the tun- cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-
nel console storage compartment to disarm oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
the alarm and start the vehicle. known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
NOTE tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
To help ensure that the key can be
except as necessary, service your vehicle in
detected by the backup reader, make sure a well ventilated area and wear gloves or
there are no other vehicle keys, metal wash your hands frequently when servicing
objects or electronic devices (phones, tab- your vehicle. For more information go to
lets, laptops, chargers, etc.) in the cup www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
holder. These objects can interfere with its vehicle.
functioning.
Related information
Locking with the key's buttons
NOTE • Starting the vehicle (p. 442)
– Press the button to lock the vehicle.
detected by the backup reader, make sure • Locking and unlocking using the key but-
there are no other vehicle keys, metal tons (p. 270)
objects or electronic devices (phones, tab- • Key range (p. 273)
lets, laptops, chargers, etc.) in the area.
• Replacing the key's battery (p. 275)
These objects can interfere with its func-
tioning. • Detachable key blade (p. 280)
• Care Key – speed-restricted key (p. 279)
• Electronic immobilizer (p. 283)
• Connect key to user profile (p. 142)
6 Including the fuel filler door.
270
To activate the locking sequence, the driver's Locking when the trunk lid is open Related information
door must be closed7. If any of the other doors • Unlock settings (p. 272)
or the tailgate are open, they will be locked NOTE • Unlocking the tailgate using the key but-
and the alarm will be armed once they are ton (p. 272)
closed. If the vehicle is locked and the trunk lid is
still open, make sure that the key is not left • Unlocking the trunk lid using the key but-
To activate the locking sequence, the driver's in the trunk when the trunk lid is closed10. ton (p. 273)
door must be closed8. If any of the other doors
or the trunk lid are open, they will be locked
• Keys (p. 267)
and the alarm will be armed once they are Unlocking with the key's buttons • Replacing the key's battery (p. 275)
closed. – Press the button to unlock the vehicle. • Locking and unlocking with detachable
key blade (p. 282)
NOTE Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or tailgate are opened
A key that has been locked in the vehicle is
within two minutes after being unlocked, they
temporarily deactivated and cannot be
will automatically relock. This function reduces
used until the vehicle is unlocked using
the risk of inadvertently leaving the vehicle
another valid key.
unlocked.
Locking when the tailgate is open If none of the doors or trunk lid are opened
within two minutes after being unlocked, they
will automatically relock. This function reduces
NOTE the risk of inadvertently leaving the vehicle
If the vehicle is locked and the tailgate is unlocked.
still open, make sure that the key is not left
in the cargo compartment when the tail- If the key doesn't work
gate is closed9. If the key's buttons are not working, its battery
may be discharged. Replace the battery or use
the detachable key blade.
7 If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*, all side doors must be closed.
8 If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*, all side doors must be closed.
9 If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking* and the key is detected inside the vehicle, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.
10 If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking* and the key is detected inside the vehicle, the trunk lid will not lock when it is closed.
Unlock settings Unlocking the tailgate using the Power tailgate*

Several different sequences are available for key button – Press and hold the key's button for a
unlocking. There is a button on the key for unlocking few seconds.
1. Tap in the center display. only the tailgate. > The tailgate will unlock and open. How-
2. Tap Controls. ever, the side doors will remain locked
and armed.
3. Select setting for unlocking.

• Locking and unlocking using the key but- If the power tailgate system* has been
tons (p. 270) working continuously for too long, it will be
• Locking and unlocking from inside the switched off to help prevent overheating. It
vehicle (p. 290) can be used again after a few minutes.
Related information
tons (p. 270)
– Press the button on the key.
> The tailgate will be unlocked but remain • Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 287)
closed. • Keyless unlocking of the trunk lid*
(p. 288)
The side doors remain locked and
armed. The lock and alarm indicator on • Setting maximum opening height for the
the dashboard will go out to indicate power tailgate* (p. 298)
that the vehicle is no longer fully
locked.
The tailgate can be opened by grasping
the rubberized button under the lower
edge of the trunk lid.
If the tailgate is not opened within
2 minutes, it will be relocked and the
alarm armed.
Unlocking the trunk lid using the Power trunk release* Key range
key button – Press and hold the key's button for a In order to function correctly, the key must be
There is a button on the key for unlocking few seconds. within a certain distance from the vehicle.
only the trunk lid. > The trunk lid will open mechanically Physical barriers between the key and the
while the doors remain locked and vehicle may adversely affect the range or
armed. obstruct the signal completely.
Related information When using the key buttons

• Locking and unlocking using the key but- The key's functions that are controlled by the
tons (p. 270) buttons have a range of about 20 meters
(65 feet) from the vehicle.
• Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 287)
If the vehicle's locks do not react, move closer
• Keyless unlocking of the trunk lid*
and try again.
(p. 288)
Keyless* use
– Press the button on the key.

> The trunk lid will be unlocked but
remain closed.
The side doors remain locked and
armed. The lock and alarm indicator on
the dashboard will go out to indicate
that the vehicle is no longer fully
locked.
The trunk lid can be opened by grasp-
ing the rubberized button under the
lower edge of the trunk lid.
If the trunk lid is not opened within
2 minutes, it will be relocked and the
alarm armed.
}}
||
For keyless operation to be possible, the key

must be within a distance of about 1 to
1.5 meters (3 to 5 feet) from the vehicle's
doors or tailgate.
For keyless operation to be possible, the key
must be within a distance of about 1 to
274
1.5 meters (3 to 5 feet) from the vehicle's Replacing the key's battery CAUTION
doors or trunk lid. The battery in the key can be replaced when
Hand in used Key Tags to an authorized
it is discharged. Battery life depends on how
Volvo workshop, where the key can be
NOTE much the key is used. The battery for the but-
deleted from the vehicle's system. The key
The functions of the key can be disrupted tonless key (Key Tag)* cannot be replaced.
can still be used even if the battery is dis-
by ambient radio waves, buildings, topo- NOTE charged to start the vehicle via a back-up
graphical conditions, etc. The vehicle can All batteries have a limited service life and start.
always be locked/unlocked using the key must eventually be replaced (does not
blade. apply for Key Tag). The battery's service life Opening the key and replacing its
varies depending on how often the battery
Related information vehicle/key is used.
• Keys (p. 267)
CAUTION
• Antenna locations for the start and lock
Do not touch the contact surfaces of new
system (p. 288)
batteries. This impairs the battery's func-
• Keyless locking and unlocking with touch- tion.
sensitive surfaces* (p. 285)
When the information icon illuminates and the
message The car key battery is low. See Hold the key with the front side (with the
Owner's Manual for replacement. appears Volvo logo) facing up, and the key ring bracket
in the instrument panel, the key's battery facing you.
needs to be replaced.
There should be a catch to the left of the key
Reduced key range is another sign that the ring bracket. If this catch is on the wrong side,
battery level is low.
The battery in the buttonless key (Key Tag)*
cannot be replaced. When the battery is dis-
charged, a new buttonless key can be ordered
from an authorized Volvo workshop.
}}
|| the front and back sides have been switched

during a previous battery change.
2. Move the catch behind the front cover to 3. Turn the battery cover counterclockwise
the side and slide the rear cover away to the OPEN position. Use a screwdriver,
from the key ring bracket. coin or similar.
1. Move the catch next to the key ring
bracket to the side and slide the front > The cover comes loose and can be lif- Remove the battery cover. If it is difficult
cover away from the bracket. ted off. to remove, use a narrow object to carefully
> The cover comes loose and can be lif- Under the rear cover is a battery cover. pry it up.
ted off.
There is an additional catch under the
front cover for removing the back cover.
4. The battery's positive side (+) faces

upward. Remove the battery by pressing
its edge and then lifting it out.
276
5. Insert a new battery with the positive side 6. Put the battery cover back into place and 8. Turn the key and put the front cover back
(+) facing upward. Do not touch the con- turn it clockwise to the CLOSE position. on in the same way as the back cover.
tact surfaces of the key battery.
Place the edge of the battery under the
two lower plastic catches.
Then push the battery down so that it is
held in place by the upper plastic catch.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation
CR2032, 3 V.
7. Put the back cover on in the reverse order
it was removed. The back cover does not
NOTE have a logo. Press the cover down until it
clicks and then push it the last few milli-
Volvo recommends that replacement bat-
meters back to its original position.
teries for the key meet the UN Manual of
Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3. > A second click indicates that the cover
The supplied batteries or batteries replaced is correctly positioned and locked into
by an authorized Volvo workshop meet the place.
same criteria. There should not be any gaps.
}}
277
|| WARNING CAUTION Ordering additional keys

If more keys than the standard number sup-
Make sure the battery is positioned cor- Batteries must be recycled in an environ-
rectly with the right polarity. If the key will plied with the vehicle are needed, or if any
mentally sound manner at the end of their
not be used for a prolonged period of time, key is lost, new keys can be ordered. If the
service life.
remove the battery to avoid battery leakage vehicle is equipped with keyless locking and
and damage. Wear protective gloves when unlocking*, a buttonless key (Key Tag) can
handling damaged batteries, as batteries WARNING also be ordered.
that are damaged or leaking can cause cor- A total of 12 keys can be programmed and
rosive damage in contact with the skin. California Proposition 65 used for the same vehicle. An additional driver
• Keep batteries out of the reach of chil- Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- profile will be added for each new key. This
dren. senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- also applies to the key tag.
cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-
• Do not leave batteries lying out where oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are Lost key
they could be swallowed by children or known to the State of California to cause If a key is lost, a replacement key can be
pets. cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
ordered through a Volvo retailer or an author-
tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
• Never disassemble, short-circuit or
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ized Volvo workshop. As an anti-theft meas-
place a battery into open fire. except as necessary, service your vehicle in ure, the code of the lost remote key must be
• Do not charge non-chargeable batter- a well ventilated area and wear gloves or erased from the system. All remaining keys
ies. They could explode. wash your hands frequently when servicing must be brought to the workshop.
your vehicle. For more information go to
• Check products with batteries regularly www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
for signs of damage. vehicle.
Do not use the key if there is anything to
suggest that the key or its battery has been Related information
damaged or is beginning to leak. Keep
defective products out of the reach of chil- • Locking and unlocking with detachable
dren. key blade (p. 282)
• Keys (p. 267)
NOTE Care Key – speed-restricted key limitation is activated when the vehicle is
A Care Key enables the vehicle owner to set a unlocked with a Care Key, or when the driver's
Volvo recommends that you order a new or door is opened and the vehicle detects a Care
maximum speed limit for the vehicle. This
duplicate key from an authorized Volvo Key on the driver's side.
speed limit is intended to promote safe use of
workshop.
the vehicle, e.g. when it is loaned out. The ability to set a maximum speed for use
You can also obtain additional or duplicate with a specific key is intended to give the vehi-
NOTE
keys from certain independent repair facili- cle owner increased peace of mind when
ties and locksmiths that are qualified to The speed limitation with Care Key func-
handing over the vehicle to a young or inexper-
make keys. Each key must be programmed tion will be available through a planned
ienced driver, a valet, a workshop, etc.
to work with your vehicle. software update.
A list of independent repair facilities and/or
Related information
locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut • Setting speed limitation for Care Key
(p. 280)
and code replacement keys can be found:
• Keys (p. 267)
• at volvocars.com
• Managing user profiles (p. 140)
• by calling Volvo Customer Care
1-800-458-1552.
Related information
• Keys (p. 267)
The button functions for the Care Key are the

same as for the regular key. If no speed limit
has been set, the vehicle and the key work as
normal. Like other keys, the Care Key can be
linked to a user profile to save personal set-
tings in the vehicle.
The speed limitation can be set by the user
profile who is the administrator. The speed
279
Setting speed limitation for Care Indication in the instrument panel Detachable key blade
Key An active speed limitation is indicated in the The standard key contains a detachable metal
The speed limitation for the Care Key is set in instrument panel with a symbol and the mes- key blade that has several different functions.
the center display. sage Speed limitation cannot be exceeded A Volvo workshop can provide you with the
Care Key in use. A yellow dotted line on the key blade's unique code, which is recom-
NOTE speedometer shows the current speed limita- mended in case you need to order a new key
The speed limitation with Care Key function. blade.
tion will be available through a planned
software update. Symbol Meaning Using the detachable key blade
The detachable key blade can be used to:
Speed limitation is active.
The speed limitation for the Care Key can only • manually open the left-side front door if
be set from a profile with administrative rights. central locking cannot be activated by
To access the settings: pushing a button
1. Tap in the center display. • emergency lock all doors
2. Select Profiles. • activate/deactivate the rear door mechani-

cal child locks.
3. Select Care key. Related information If the key blade has been used to unlock the
4. Activate Speed limit and select the • Care Key – speed-restricted key (p. 279) vehicle, the alarm can be disabled and the
desired maximum speed11. • Managing user profiles (p. 140) vehicle started by placing the key in the
> The speed limitation is activated when backup reader in the tunnel console storage
the vehicle is used with a Care Key. compartment.
To deactivate the function, the vehicle must be If the key blade has been used to unlock the
unlocked using an unrestricted key. The speed vehicle, the alarm can be disabled and the
limitation for the Care Key can be deactivated vehicle started by placing the key in the
via settings in the center display. The Care Key backup reader in the tunnel console cup
can then be used as a regular key. holder.
The optional buttonless key (Key Tag) does
not have a detachable key blade.
11 The speed can be set within the range of 50-150 km/h (30-95 mph), in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph).
280
Removing the key blade Related information

Hold the key with the front side (with the • Locking and unlocking with detachable
Volvo logo) facing up, and the key ring bracket key blade (p. 282)
facing you. • Keys (p. 267)
There should be a catch to the left of the key
ring bracket. If this catch is on the wrong side,
the front and back sides have been switched
at some point when the key was disassem-
bled.
2. Remove the key blade.
1. Move the catch next to the key ring

bracket to the side and slide the front 3. Put the front cover on in the reverse order
cover away from the bracket. it was removed. Press the cover down
> The cover comes loose and can be lif- until it clicks and then push it the last few
ted off. millimeters back to its original position.
> A second click indicates that the cover
is correctly positioned and locked into
place.
There should not be any gaps.
281
Locking and unlocking with Locking using the key blade

detachable key blade The front left door can also be locked using
The detachable key blade can be used to the detachable key blade.
unlock one of the vehicle's doors from the The other doors have a lock mechanism in the
outside, for example if the key's battery is dis- side of the door that must be pushed in using
charged. the key blade. The doors will then be mechani-
cally locked and cannot be opened from the
Unlocking using the key blade
outside. The doors can still be opened from
inside the vehicle.
NOTE
When the door is unlocked using the
detachable key blade and then opened, the
alarm will be triggered. The alarm must be
deactivated manually – it can be a good
idea to read the section about this before
opening the vehicle.
Pull the handle on the left-side front door

to its end position.
Insert the key.
Manual door lock. This is not the child lock.
Turn the key clockwise 45 degrees so that 1. Remove the detachable key blade from
the key is pointing straight rearward. the key with buttons.
Turn the key back 45 degrees to the origi- 2. Insert the key blade into the opening for
nal position and remove it. the lock mechanism.
> The door can be opened using the han- 3. Push in the key until it stops, about 12 mm
dle. (0.5 inch).
282
The door can be opened from both the Electronic immobilizer Related information
outside and the inside. The electronic immobilizer is a start inhibitor • Keys (p. 267)
The door cannot be opened from the out- that helps prevent the vehicle from being • Ordering additional keys (p. 278)
side. To return to position A, open the door started by an unauthorized person.
using the inside door handle. The vehicle can only be started with the right
key.
NOTE The following instrument panel error mes-
• The door's lock controls only lock that sages are related to the electronic immobil-
specific door, not all doors simultane- izer:
ously.
• A manually locked rear door with an
activated child lock cannot be opened The car key Key not recog-
from either the outside or the inside. It is not nized during
can be unlocked using the key buttons, detected. start. Place the
central locking button, keyless locking See key on the key
system* or through the Volvo Cars app. Owner's symbol in the cup
Manual for holder and try to
Related information more infor- start the vehicle
• Arming and disarming the alarm (p. 304) mation. again.
• Detachable key blade (p. 280) Key not recog-
• Starting the vehicle (p. 442) nized during
start. Place the
• Starting the vehicle (p. 443) key on the key
• Replacing the key's battery (p. 275) symbol in the
• Keys (p. 267) tunnel console's
storage compart-
ment and try to
start the vehicle
again.
Start and lock system type (1) This device may not cause harmful Immobilizer and Passive Entry*/
designations interference, and (2) this device must accept Passive Start systems
The following information contains type des- any interference received, including USA-FCC ID: LTQVO3134
ignations for the start and lock system. interference that may cause undesired
operation. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Alarm system rules. Operation is subject to the following
CAUTION: Changes or modifications not two conditions:
USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
to operate the equipment. ence, and
rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions: (1) This device may not cause Canada (2) this device must accept any interference
harmful interference, and (2) this device must received, including interference that may
accept any interference received, including Volvo Standard Key IC: 4008C-HUF8423MS cause undesired operation.
interference that may cause undesired opera- Volvo Tag ID IC: 4008C-HUF8432MS Any changes or modification not expressly
tion.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC approved by the party responsible for compli-
Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt ance could void the user's authority to operate
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the this equipment.
This device is subject to the following condi-
tions: (1) This device may not cause interfer- following two conditions: Canada-IC:3659A-VO3134
ence, and (2) this device must accept any (1) This device may not cause harmful This device complies with Industry Canada
interference, including interference that may interference, and (2) this device must accept license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is
cause undesired operation of the device. any interference received, including subject to the following two conditions:
interference that may cause undesired
Remote keys (Passive Entry*/Passive (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
operation.
Start) ence, and (2) this device must accept any
USA Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR interference received, including interference
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils that may cause undesired operation.
Volvo Standard Key FCC ID: YGO- radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
HUF8423MS autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : Related information
Volvo Tag ID FCC ID: YGOHUF8432MS (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, • Keys (p. 267)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter
Rules. Operation is subject to the following tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
two conditions: brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
Keyless locking and unlocking with NOTE Keyless locking and unlocking*
touch-sensitive surfaces* With keyless locking and unlocking, touching
It is important that only one pressure-sen-
With keyless locking and unlocking, the key's the pressure-sensitive surfaces on the door
sitive surface is activated at a time. If the
buttons do not need to be used – the key handle will lock or unlock the vehicle. A key
handle is grasped at the same time as the
only needs to be near the vehicle. The vehicle must be detected near the vehicle.
lock area is pressed, there is a risk that
can then be locked or unlocked by touching NOTE
double commands may be sent. This may
the pressure-sensitive surface on the door
cause the requested action (locking/ One of the vehicle's keys must be within
handle.
unlocking) to be delayed or not performed range for locking and unlocking to be pos-
Pressure-sensitive surfaces at all. sible.
Door handle
There are indentations on the outside of the Tailgate handle
outer door handles for locking, and pressure- The tailgate handle has a rubberized button
sensitive surfaces on the inside of the handles underneath that can only be used for unlock-
for unlocking. ing.
Trunk lid handle
The trunk lid handle has a rubberized button
underneath that can only be used for unlock-
ing.
NOTE
Please be aware that the system could be
activated in a car wash if the key is within
range. Pressure-sensitive indentation for locking
Pressure-sensitive surface for unlocking

Related information
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 285)
NOTE
Pressure-sensitive indentation for locking • Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 287)
Please be aware that the system could be
Pressure-sensitive surface for unlocking • Keyless unlocking of the trunk lid* activated in a car wash if the key is within
(p. 288) range.
}}
|| Keyless locking Locking when the tailgate is open Automatic relocking

Keyless locking can be performed by touching If the vehicle is locked and the tailgate is still If the vehicle is not opened again within 2
the vehicle's handle when it is completely open, make sure that the key is not left in the minutes after unlocking, it will automatically
closed. cargo compartment when the tailgate is lock again. This function reduces the risk of
closed. inadvertently leaving the vehicle unlocked.
It is also possible to lock using one of the side
door handles when the tailgate is open. In this Related information
case, the tailgate will lock after it has been NOTE
• Keyless unlock settings* (p. 287)
closed. If the key is detected in the vehicle, the tail-
gate will not lock when it is closed.
• Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 287)
It is also possible to lock using one of the side
door handles when the trunk lid is open. In
• Keyless unlocking of the trunk lid*
(p. 288)
this case, the trunk lid will lock after it has Locking when the trunk lid is open
been closed. If the vehicle is locked and the trunk lid is still • Keyless locking and unlocking with touch-
open, make sure that the key is not left in the sensitive surfaces* (p. 285)
– Touch the marked area on the outside of a
door handle after the door is closed. trunk when the trunk lid is closed.
It is also possible to lock the vehicle with-
NOTE
out a key by pressing the button on
the bottom edge of the tailgate and then If the key is detected in the vehicle, the
closing it. trunk lid will not lock when it is closed.
It is also possible to lock the vehicle with-
out a key by pressing the button on Keyless unlocking
the bottom edge of the trunk lid and then – To unlock, grasp a door handle or lightly
closing it. press the rubberized button on the under-
side of the tailgate handle.
> The lock indicator light on the dash-
board will flash to confirm locking. To unlock, grasp a door handle or lightly
press the rubberized button on the under-
Closing the windows with keyless locking
side of the trunk lid handle.
To close all side windows at the same time,
press and hold the touch-sensitive indentation > The lock indicator light on the dash-
on the outside of the door handle until the board will stop flashing to confirm that
windows close. the vehicle is unlocked.
Keyless unlock settings* Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* WARNING

Several different sequences are available for With keyless locking and unlocking, the tail-
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic
keyless unlocking. gate can be unlocked by lightly touching the exhaust fumes can be sucked into the vehi-
1. Tap in the center display. rubberized button under the tailgate handle. cle through the cargo compartment.
2. Tap Controls. NOTE
One of the vehicle's keys must be within Related information
3. Select setting for unlocking.
range behind the vehicle for unlocking to • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 285)
Related information be possible. • Keyless locking and unlocking with touch-
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 285) sensitive surfaces* (p. 285)
• Keyless locking and unlocking with touch- The tailgate is held closed by an electronic • Key range (p. 273)
sensitive surfaces* (p. 285) locking mechanism.
• Operating the tailgate with a foot move-
To open: ment* (p. 299)
1. Lightly press the rubberized pressure plate • Operating the trunk lid with a foot move-
on the underside of the tailgate handle. ment* (p. 301)
> The lock will disengage.
2. Lift the outer handle to open the tailgate.
CAUTION
• Handle the rubber plate carefully to help
prevent damage to its electrical connec-
tions. Very little force is needed for acti-
vation.
• Use the handle to lift – do not apply
force to the rubberized pressure plate.
The tailgate can also be unlocked by making a

foot movement* under the rear bumper; see
the separate section.
Keyless unlocking of the trunk lid* WARNING Antenna locations for the start and
With keyless locking and unlocking, the trunk lock system
Do not drive with the trunk lid open. Toxic
can be unlocked by lightly touching the rub- exhaust fumes can be sucked into the vehi- The antennas for the keyless start system and
berized button on the trunk lid handle. cle through the trunk. keyless locking system* are integrated in the
NOTE vehicle.
One of the vehicle's keys must be within Related information

range behind the vehicle for unlocking to • Operating the tailgate with a foot move-
be possible. ment* (p. 299)
• Operating the trunk lid with a foot move-
The trunk lid is held closed by an electronic ment* (p. 301)
locking mechanism. • Keyless locking and unlocking with touch-
To open: sensitive surfaces* (p. 285)
1. Lightly press the rubberized pressure plate • Key range (p. 273)
on the underside of the trunk lid handle.
> The lock will disengage.
2. Lift the outer handle to open the trunk lid.
CAUTION
• Handle the rubber plate carefully to help
prevent damage to its electrical connec-
tions. Very little force is needed for acti-
vation.
• Use the handle to lift – do not apply
force to the rubberized pressure plate.
The trunk can also be opened by making a

kicking movement under the rear bumper.
Location of the antennas:

In the storage compartment in the tunnel
console
Under the cup holder in the front section
of the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the left-side
rear door12
In the upper front section of the right-side
rear door12
In the cargo compartment12
In the middle seat of the rear seat12
In the center of the rear seat backrest12
In the trunk12
12 Only in vehicles equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*. }}
|| WARNING Locking and unlocking from inside

the vehicle
People with a pacemaker should keep a
distance of at least 22 cm (9 inches) from There are several lock buttons inside the vehi-
the antennas to prevent interference cle. The inner door handles can also be used
between the pacemaker and the key sys- to unlock the vehicle from the inside.
tem.
Central locking
The central locking buttons in the front door
Related information lock or unlock the entire vehicle.
• Keyless locking and unlocking with touch-
• Key range (p. 273)
Unlocking using the front door buttons

– Press the button to unlock all side
doors and the tailgate.
Press the button to unlock all side
doors and the trunk lid.
Unlocking using the front door handle Unlocking a rear door using the door
– Pull one of the front side door's inner han- handle
dles and release. 1. Pull the opening handle to unlock the rear
> The vehicle is unlocked. Depending on door.
settings, either only the selected door is 2. Pull the opening handle again to open the
unlocked or all doors are unlocked. rear door13.
Locking using the front door buttons Related information
– Press the button (both front doors • Unlock settings (p. 272)
must be closed).
• Unlocking the tailgate from inside the
> All doors and the tailgate will lock. vehicle (p. 292)
All doors and the trunk lid will lock. Button with indicator light for locking/unlocking in • Unlocking the trunk lid from inside the
rear door. vehicle (p. 292)
Locking using the rear door button*
(p. 293)
• Opening the trunk lid from inside the trunk
(p. 292)
Button with indicator light for locking/unlocking in Button with indicator light for locking/unlocking in
rear door. rear door.
The lock buttons in the rear doors lock/unlock
that particular door.
13 If the child lock is not activated.
Unlocking the tailgate from inside Unlocking the trunk lid from inside Opening the trunk lid from inside
the vehicle the vehicle the trunk
The tailgate can be unlocked from inside the The trunk can be unlocked from inside the The vehicle is equipped with a fluorescent
vehicle by pressing the button on the dash- vehicle by pressing the button on the dash- handle on the inside of the trunk lid that can
board, to the side of the steering wheel. board, to the side of the steering wheel. be used in an emergency to open the trunk lid
from the inside.14
– Press the button on the dashboard. – Press the button on the dashboard.
> The tailgate is unlocked and can be > The trunk lid is unlocked and can be
opened from the outside. opened from the outside.
With the optional power tailgate*: Related information
– Press and hold the button on the • Locking and unlocking from inside the
dashboard for a few seconds. vehicle (p. 290)
> The tailgate will open.
NOTE
If the power tailgate system* has been
working continuously for too long, it will be
switched off to help prevent overheating. It
can be used again after a few minutes.
Related information
vehicle (p. 290)
14 US only.
WARNING Activating and deactivating child

locks
• Lock the doors and trunk lid when the
The child locks help prevent the rear doors
vehicle is parked and keep the remote
from being able to be opened from the inside.
keys out of reach of children. Unsuper-
With the electric child lock, the power win-
vised children could lock themselves in
dows are also prevented from being operated
the trunk and be injured.
from the rear seat.
• On hot days, the temperature in the
trunk and inside the vehicle could rise The child lock can be either manual or elec-
very quickly. Exposure to these high tric*.
temperatures, even for a short time, Manual child lock
could lead to heat-related injury or
fatality. Small children are particularly
1. Pull the handle downward to release the at risk.
trunk lid.
> The trunk lid will open.
Related information
2. After use, the handle must be pushed • Locking and unlocking from inside the
back to its original position before the vehicle (p. 290)
trunk lid can be closed.
• Unlocking the tailgate from inside the
vehicle (p. 292)
NOTE
• Unlocking the trunk lid from inside the
The handle is not intended to be used to vehicle (p. 292)
secure the trunk lid, e.g. when transporting
Manual child lock. This is not the manual door lock.
long objects.
– Use the detachable key blade in the key to
turn the control.
The door cannot be opened from the
inside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
}}
|| NOTE • Rear doors can be opened from the inside

and power windows can be operated from
• The door's knob control only locks that the rear seat.
specific door, not both rear doors
simultaneously. Symbols and messages
• There are no manual child locks on Symbol Message Meaning
models equipped with electric child
locks. Rear child The child lock is
lock acti- activated.
vated
Electric child lock*
The electric child lock can be activated and Rear child The child lock is
deactivated in any ignition mode higher than lock deacti- deactivated.
Button for activation and deactivation.
0. The lock can be activated and deactivated vated
up to 2 minutes after the ignition is turned off Rear child lock activated
if no door has been opened. When the indicator light in the button is lit, the
child lock is activated. Related information
If the child lock is activated when the vehicle vehicle (p. 290)
is switched off, it will remain activated the
next time the vehicle is started. • Detachable key blade (p. 280)
• Power windows (p. 168)
• Rear doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
• Rear power windows can only be oper-
ated from the driver's door.
• The control panel on the right-side rear
door is deactivated.
Rear child lock deactivated
Button for activation and deactivation.
When the indicator light in the button is not lit,
the child lock is deactivated.
Automatic locking when driving Closing and locking the tailgate Closing15
For safety reasons, the doors and tailgate using the buttons* – Press the button on the underside of
automatically lock when the vehicle starts The buttons underneath the tailgate can be the tailgate.
driving. used to close and lock the vehicle automati- > The tailgate will close automatically and
For safety reasons, the doors and trunk lid cally. remain unlocked.
automatically lock when the vehicle starts
driving. NOTE
The doors can still be opened from the inside
during automatic locking when driving. • The button remains active 24 hours
after the tailgate was opened. After this
Depending on lock settings, either all doors
time, the tailgate must be closed man-
will be unlocked or only the door being
ually.
opened.
• If the tailgate has been open for more
NOTE than 30 minutes, it will automatically
close slowly.
The child lock should be used to help pre-
vent a rear door from being opened from
the inside. Location of button(s) on underside of tailgate.
Locking16
CAUTION 1. Press the button on the underside of

NOTE the tailgate.
When operating the tailgate manually,
For safety reasons, all of the vehicle's 2. Close the trunk lid manually.
open and close it slowly. If you encounter
doors will unlock in the event of a collision. > The tailgate and doors will lock17.
resistance, do not use force. This could
This will only happen if one of the safety
damage the tailgate and lead to loss of
systems has been triggered.
function.
Related information
vehicle (p. 290)
(p. 293)
}}
|| Closing and locking18 Tailgate movement is interrupted and stops. Preloaded springs
– Press the button on the underside of The tailgate can then be opened or closed
the tailgate. manually.
> The tailgate closes automatically and If the tailgate stops near the closed position, it
the vehicle locks19. will open the next time it is activated.
Pinch protection
NOTE If anything obstructs the tailgate with enough
• One of the vehicle's keys must be within force to prevent it from opening or closing,
range for locking and unlocking to be pinch protection will be activated.
possible. • When opening - the tailgate will stop
• When the keyless locking or closing* moving and an audible signal will sound.
functions are used, three audible signals • When closing - the tailgate will stop, a Preloaded springs for the power tailgate.
will sound if the key is not close enough long audible signal will sound and the tail-
to the tailgate. gate will return to the programmed maxi-
mum opening position.
Interrupting closing WARNING

• Press the button on the dashboard.
Be aware of the risk of injury when opening
• Press the button on the key. and closing.
• Press the close button on the underside of Before opening or closing, make sure that
the tailgate15. no one is near the tailgate's range of
motion. Serious injury could occur.
• Press the rubberized pressure plate on the
underside of the tailgate's outer handle. Always operate the tailgate with caution.
• Using a foot movement*.
Preloaded springs for the power tailgate.
15 Vehicles with power-operated trunk lid.

16 Vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking.
17 All doors must be closed for the vehicle to lock.
18 Vehicles with keyless locking/unlocking and power-operated tailgate.
WARNING Closing and locking the trunk lid Closing 20

using the buttons* – Press the button on the underside of
Do not attempt to open or access the pre-
loaded springs in the power tailgate struts. The buttons on the lower edge of the trunk lid the trunk lid.
They are preloaded with high pressure and can be used to close and lock the vehicle > The trunk lid will close automatically
can cause injury if opened. automatically. and remain unlocked.

• Setting maximum opening height for the
• The button remains active 24 hours
power tailgate* (p. 298)
after the tailgate was opened. After this
• Operating the tailgate with a foot move- time, the tailgate must be closed man-
ment* (p. 299) ually.
• Operating the trunk lid with a foot move- • If the tailgate has been open for more
ment* (p. 301) than 30 minutes, it will automatically
• Key range (p. 273) close slowly.
Location of button on underside of trunk lid.
CAUTION
When operating the trunk lid manually,
open and close it slowly. If you encounter
resistance, do not use force. This could
damage the trunk lid and lead to loss of
function.
20 Vehicles with power-operated trunk lid. }}
|| Closing and locking21 The trunk lid will stop closing and return to its Setting maximum opening height
– Press the button on the underside of fully open position. The trunk lid can then be for the power tailgate*
the trunk lid. opened or closed manually. The tailgate can be set to stop opening at a
> The trunk lid closes automatically and certain height, for example if the vehicle is
Pinch protection
the vehicle locks22. parked in a garage with a low ceiling.
If anything obstructs the tailgate with enough
force to prevent it from closing, pinch protec- Setting maximum opening height
NOTE tion will be activated. 1. Open the tailgate manually to the desired
• One of the vehicle's keys must be within • The trunk lid will stop and then return to opening height.
range for locking and unlocking to be its fully open position. A long audible sig-
2. Press the button on the lower edge of
possible. nal will sound.
the tailgate and hold it for about
• When the keyless locking or closing* 3 seconds.
functions are used, three audible signals WARNING > Two audio signals will sound to indicate
will sound if the key is not close enough Be aware of the risk of serious injury when that the position has been stored.
to the tailgate. operating the trunk lid.
Before opening or closing, make sure that NOTE
no one is near the trunk lid's range of
Interrupting closing motion. Serious injury could occur. It is not possible to program an opening
position lower than half-open tailgate.
• Press the button on the dashboard. Always operate the trunk lid with caution.
• Press the button on the key.
Resetting maximum opening position
• Press the close button on the underside of Related information
1. Open the tailgate manually to the fully
the trunk lid20. • Setting maximum opening height for the
open position.
power tailgate* (p. 298)
• Press the rubberized pressure plate on the
underside of the tailgate's outer handle. • Operating the tailgate with a foot move-
ment* (p. 299)
• Using a kicking motion*.
• Operating the trunk lid with a foot move-
ment* (p. 301)
21 Vehicles with keyless locking/unlocking and power-operated trunk lid.

20 Vehicles with power-operated trunk lid.
2. Press the button on the lower edge of Operating the tailgate with a foot
the tailgate and hold it for about movement*
3 seconds. The tailgate can be opened and closed by
> Two audio signals will sound to indicate making a foot movement* under the rear
that the stored position has been bumper. This function makes it easy to
erased. access the cargo compartment when your
hands are full.
Related information
• Closing and locking the tailgate using the
buttons* (p. 295)
• Closing and locking the trunk lid using the
buttons* (p. 297)
The sensor is located slightly to the left of center
under the bumper.
One of the vehicle's keys must be within range
behind the vehicle, approx. 1 meter (3 feet) for
opening and closing to be possible. This
applies even if the vehicle is unlocked in order
to prevent the trunk lid from inadvertently
opening e.g. at a car wash.
The sensor is located in the center under the bumper.
}}
|| Foot movement operation Interrupting opening or closing with a foot • Key range (p. 273)
movement
– Make one forward kicking motion during
opening or closing.
> The tailgate will stop opening or clos-
ing.
The key does not need to be within range of
the vehicle to interrupt opening or closing of
the tailgate.
If the tailgate stops near the closed position, it
will open the next time it is activated.
– Make one forward kicking motion with

NOTE
your foot under the sensor area under the Keep the area around the foot movement
rear bumper. Then take a step back. Do sensor clean. The accumulation of dirt, ice
not touch the bumper. or snow may interfere with its functioning.
> A brief audible signal will be heard
when opening or closing is activated -
NOTE
the tailgate will open/close.
Please note that the system could be inad-
If several opening attempts have been made
vertently activated in a car wash if the key
without a key in range behind the vehicle, foot
is within range.
movement operation will not be available for a
short period of time.
Related information
Do not hold your foot under the vehicle in a
kicking motion – this can cause the activation
to fail.
• Closing and locking the tailgate using the
buttons* (p. 295)
• Closing and locking the trunk lid using the
buttons* (p. 297)
Operating the trunk lid with a foot Foot movement operation

movement*
The trunk lid can be opened by moving your
foot* under the rear bumper. This function
makes it easy to access the cargo compart-
ment when your hands are full.
The sensor is located to the left of center under the

rear bumper. Kicking motion within the sensor's activation area.
One of the vehicle's keys must be in range – Make one forward kicking motion with
behind the vehicle, within about 1 meter your foot under the sensor area under the
(3 feet), for activation to be possible. This also rear bumper. Then take a step back. Do
applies if the vehicle is unlocked. not touch the bumper.
The sensor is located in the center under the bumper. > A brief audible signal will sound when
opening or closing is activated - the
trunk lid will open/close.
If several opening or closing attempts have
been made without the key in range behind
the vehicle, foot movement operation will not
be available for a short period of time.
Do not hold your foot in a kicking motion
under the vehicle. This may cause activation to
fail.
}}
|| Interrupting foot movement operation Opening the trunk lid with a foot NOTE
– Make one forward kicking motion while movement
the trunk lid is closing to stop its move- Keep the area around the foot movement
ment. sensor clean. The accumulation of dirt, ice
or snow may interfere with its functioning.
> The trunk lid will stop closing and
return to its fully open position. The
trunk lid can then be opened or closed NOTE
manually.
Please note that the system could be inad-
The key does not need to be within range of vertently activated in a car wash if the key
the vehicle to interrupt closing. is within range.
Related information
Kicking motion within the sensor's activation area. sensitive surfaces* (p. 285)
– Make one forward kicking motion with • Closing and locking the tailgate using the
your foot under the sensor area under the buttons* (p. 295)
rear bumper. Then take a step back. Do • Closing and locking the trunk lid using the
not touch the bumper. buttons* (p. 297)
> A short signal sounds and the trunk lid
opens.
If several kicking movements are made with-
out a key within range, the function will be dis-
abled for a short time.
Do not hold your foot in a kicking motion
under the vehicle. This may cause activation to
fail.
The trunk lid is closed by pressing it down
manually.
Alarm 30 seconds or until the ignition is put in I NOTE

The alarm emits sound and light signals if mode – the alarm has been triggered.
Do not attempt to repair or alter any of the
anyone without a valid key attempts to break
When armed, the alarm will be triggered if: components in the alarm system yourself.
into the vehicle, tries to steal a tire or tow
• the hood, tailgate or any door is opened. Any such attempt could affect the terms
away the vehicle, or interferes with the vehi-
and conditions of your insurance policy.
cle's battery or alarm siren. • the hood, trunk lid or any door is opened.
Alarm indicator • the battery is disconnected
Related information
• the alarm siren is disconnected. • Arming and disarming the alarm (p. 304)
Alarm signals
The following occurs if the alarm is triggered:
• A siren will sound for 30 seconds or until
the alarm is turned off.
• The hazard warning flashers will flash for
5 minutes or until the alarm is turned off.
If the reason the alarm was triggered is not
rectified, the alarm cycle will repeat up to 10
times23.
The locks and alarm indicator is located in the center
of the dashboard, near the windshield. Symbols and messages
A red indicator light shows the status of the Symbol Message Meaning
alarm system: Alarm sys- Contact a work-
• Indicator off – the alarm is disarmed. tem failure shop ‒ an
Service authorized Volvo
• Indicator flashes once every two seconds
– the alarm is armed. required workshop is rec-
ommended.
• The indicator flashes quickly after the
alarm has been disabled for up to
303
Arming and disarming the alarm 2.

The alarm is armed when the vehicle is
locked and disarmed when the vehicle is
unlocked. The alarm can also be disarmed
without a functioning key.
Arming and disarming the alarm

The alarm is armed when the vehicle is locked
and disarmed when the vehicle is unlocked.
Disarming the alarm without a functioning
key
The vehicle can be unlocked and disarmed
even if the key is not functioning, e.g. if its bat- 3. Place the key on the key symbol in the
tery is discharged. backup reader in the tunnel console's cup
Place the key on the key symbol in the
1. Open the driver's door using the detacha- holder.
backup reader in the tunnel console's stor-
ble key blade. age compartment. 4. Depress the brake pedal and select a gear.
> This will trigger the alarm. Press the start button.
Turn the start knob clockwise and release.
> The alarm will be disarmed.
NOTE
detected by the backup reader, make sure
there are no other vehicle keys, metal
objects or electronic devices (phones, tab-
lets, laptops, chargers, etc.) in the area.
These objects can interfere with its func-
tioning.
304
Turning off a triggered alarm

A triggered alarm can be turned off by pushing
the key's unlock button or by starting the vehi-
cle, provided that an authorized key is on the
key symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel
console's storage compartment.
A triggered alarm can be turned off by pushing
the key's unlock button or by starting the vehi-
cle, provided that an authorized key is on the
key symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel
console's cup holder.
– Press the unlock button on the key or
depress the brake pedal and select a gear.
Press the start button.
Press the unlock button on the key or
select ignition mode I by turning the start
knob clockwise and then releasing it.
Related information
• Alarm (p. 303)
305
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver support systems Related information Driver support warnings

The vehicle is equipped with a number of • Driver support warnings (p. 308) If you find that the vehicle is acting in a way
driver support systems that can provide the • Speed-dependent steering wheel resis- that you did not expect, it may be that one of
driver with active or passive assistance in var- tance (p. 311) the vehicle's safety-related functions has
ious situations. been activated.
The systems can, for example, help the driver:
• Electronic Stability Control (p. 311)
• Connected Safety (p. 315) What is happening in your vehicle?
• with steering assistance to reduce the risk There are a number of functions in your vehicle
of inadvertently veering from your own • Road Sign Information* (p. 317)
that can actively help to improve safety in traf-
lane or colliding with another vehicle • Cruise control (p. 324) fic, both for you and for other road users. To
• maintain a set speed • Pilot Assist* (p. 326) help prepare you in the event any of the func-
• maintain a set time interval to the vehicle • Passing assistance* (p. 336) tions is suddenly activated, an overview is pro-
ahead vided here of some of the functions and how
• Lane Keeping Aid (p. 342)
they might react. If a function is activated, you
• help prevent a collision by warning the • Rear Collision Warning* (p. 363) can also be notified of this via a text message
driver and applying the brakes in the instrument panel.
• BLIS* (p. 364)
• park.
• Ready to Drive notification (p. 369)
Some of the systems are standard and others NOTE
are options. This also varies from market to • Driver Alert (p. 369)
Read the individual parts about each sys-
market. • Distance Alert* (p. 371)
tem to fully understand the functions and
Some of the systems have improved function- • Warning and auto-braking while backing be notified of important warnings.
ality when Google Maps is in use. up* (p. 372)
• Park Assist* (p. 375) Warning with symbols, sounds, lights
WARNING • Park Assist Camera* (p. 380) or vibration
The driver support systems are only sup- • Radar units (p. 390) The driver support functions in your vehicle
plementary aids – they cannot manage all can alert you in different ways. They can pro-
situations in all conditions. • Camera (p. 393)
vide alerts through e.g. vibrations in the steer-
The driver is always responsible for ensuring wheel, brake pulsations, visible or audible
ing that the vehicle is driven in a safe man- signals, or through symbols in the instrument
ner and in accordance with applicable traf- panel.
fic rules and regulations.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Alerts can also be shown in the head-up dis- • Assist: If the function detects that the Blind Spot Information (BLIS)
play*. vehicle is approaching a lane marker line, BLIS is designed to help provide assistance in
you will feel light pressure applied to the heavy traffic with several lanes moving in the
Assistance at risk of collision steering wheel. Both hands must be on same direction by alerting the driver to rapidly
Assistance during collision risks1 can help the the steering wheel for this function to approaching vehicles and to the presence of
driver avoid or mitigate a collision by providing work. vehicles in the "blind spot" area behind and to
warnings, automatic braking and steering the side of your vehicle.
assistance.
• Warning: If the function detects that the
vehicle is approaching a lane marker line,
How the function is experienced can therefore you will be alerted through vibrations in
differ depending on which subfunction is acti- the steering wheel.
vated. • Both: You are alerted with vibrations and
Assistance during collision risks can, if neces- light pressure on the steering wheel.
sary, provide the following:
Rear Collision Warning (RCW)*
• Collision warning Rear Collision Warning is a system that can • Warning with an indicator light in the door
mirror, with steady and flashing lights.
• Assisted braking help you avoid being hit from behind by an
approaching vehicle. If the system detects a
• Auto-hold brakes Driver Alert
collision risk from behind, it can alert you and
• Steering assistance provide the following types of assistance
depending on the situation.
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA2)
• Intense flashes of the direction indicators.
• At lower speeds, the function can tension
the seat belts by activating the seat belt
tensioners and the Whiplash Protection The function is designed to catch the driver's
System. attention if he/she starts driving inconsis-
• If the vehicle is stationary, the brakes can tently, for example, if the driver is distracted or
Lane Keeping Aid can help you reduce the risk be applied. starts to fall asleep.
of the vehicle inadvertently veering out of its • Audible signal combined with a symbol in
own lane. the instrument panel and a message.
1 Collision Avoidance
2 Lane Keeping Aid
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Distance Alert*3 If an obstacle is detected: WARNING

Distance Alert can warn you if the distance to 1. A warning signal and graphic for Park The functions described here are supple-
the vehicle ahead decreases to an unsafe dis- Assist illuminate to indicate the location of mentary aids - they cannot manage all sit-
tance. the obstacle. uations in all conditions.
• A warning symbol will appear in the wind- 2. If the driver does not react to the warning The driver is always responsible for ensur-
shield's head-up-display. For this function and a collision is unavoidable, the vehicle ing that the vehicle is driven in a safe man-
to be possible, the vehicle must be equip- will automatically brake, and a message ner and in accordance with applicable traf-
ped with a head-up-display*. will appear explaining why the brakes fic rules and regulations.
were applied.
Warning and auto-braking while Related information
backing up Roll Stability Control (RSC) • Driver support systems (p. 308)
There are two functions that can help the Roll Stability Control is a stabilization system
driver avoid a collision while backing up. that can help reduce the risk of overturning
and spinning in certain situations, e.g. sudden
• Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* is designed to
evasive maneuvers or if the vehicle begins to
alert the driver of crossing traffic when the
skid. If the system detects that the vehicle is
vehicle is backing up.
at risk of overturning, it can react by:
• Rear Auto Brake (RAB) is designed to help
the driver detect stationary obstacles • The engine torque is reduced.
directly behind the vehicle when backing • One or several wheels braked.
up.
3 Distance Alert
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed-dependent steering wheel WARNING Electronic Stability Control

resistance The Electronic Stability Control (ESC4) func-
If the temperature rises too high, the power
Speed-dependent power steering increases steering may be forced to switch off com- tion helps the driver avoid skidding and
the steering wheel resistance in pace with pletely. In such a situation, the driver dis- improves the vehicle's directional stability.
the vehicle's speed, which can help give the play shows the message Stop safely This symbol will be displayed
driver an enhanced feeling of control and sta- Power steering failure along with a sym- in the instrument panel when
bility. Steering is stiffer on highways. When bol. the system is intervening.
parking and at low speeds, it will be easier to
When the system has inter-
move the steering wheel. Changing the level of steering wheel vened to apply the brakes, a
Reduced power resistance pulsing sound may be heard
In rare situations, the power steering may 1. Tap in the center display. and the vehicle may accelerate more slowly
need to work at reduced power and the steer- than expected when the accelerator pedal is
2. Then press Driving.
ing wheel may then feel more difficult to depressed.
move. This may happen when the power 3. Activate or deactivate Steering feel firm.
The system consists of the following sub-func-
steering becomes too hot and needs to be Steering wheel resistance settings can only be tions:
temporarily cooled. It can also happen if there accessed if the vehicle is stationary or is mov-
is a disturbance in power supply. • Stability control5
ing straight ahead at a low speed.
If there is reduced power, the • Spin control and active yaw control
Related information
message Power steering • Engine drag control
assistance Temporarily
• Trailer Stability Assist
reduced and this symbol are • Drive modes* (p. 474)
• Roll Stability Control
shown in the instrument • Drive modes (p. 475)
panel.
While the power steering is working at
reduced power, the driver support functions
and systems with steering assistance are not
available.
4 Electronic Stability Control

5 Also called traction control.
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| WARNING Spin control and active yaw control Roll Stability Control
Spin control is active at all speeds and pre- This function helps reduce the risk of a rollover
• The function is supplementary driver vents the wheels from spinning while the vehi- in the event of e.g. a sudden evasive maneuver
support intended to facilitate driving cle is accelerating. or if the vehicle begins to skid. The system
and help make it safer – it cannot han- monitors the lateral angle at which the vehicle
dle all situations in all traffic, weather Active yaw control is active at low speeds and
is leaning and registers any changes. Using
and road conditions. can brake the wheels that are spinning in
this information, the system calculates the
order to increase power to the wheel on the
• The driver is advised to read all sec-
opposite side.
likelihood of a rollover. If there is an imminent
tions in the Owner's Manual about this risk of a rollover, Electronic Stability Control is
function to learn of its limitations, Engine drag control activated, engine torque is reduced and brakes
which the driver must be aware of Engine drag control (EDC6) can help prevent are applied to one or more of the wheels until
before using the function. involuntary wheel locking, such as after engine the vehicle has regained stability.
• Driver support functions are not a sub- braking on slippery roads. Inadvertent wheel
stitute for the driver's attention and lock while driving could impair the driver's WARNING
judgment. The driver is always respon- ability to steer the vehicle. The vehicle’s stability systems help
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven improve vehicle safety but do not replace
in a safe manner, at the appropriate Electric motor drag control the driver’s responsibility for operating the
speed, with an appropriate distance to Electric motor drag control (EDC7) can help vehicle in a safe manner. Speed and driving
other vehicles, and in accordance with prevent involuntary wheel locking, such as style should always be adapted to the cur-
current traffic rules and regulations. after electric motor braking on slippery roads. rent road, traffic and weather conditions.
Inadvertent wheel lock while driving could Posted speed limits should always be
impair the driver's ability to steer the vehicle. respected.
Stability control5
This function helps control the driving and Trailer Stability Assist*8 Related information
braking force of each individual wheel in an Trailer Stability Assist (TSA9) is designed to • Driver support systems (p. 308)
attempt to stabilize the vehicle. help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer if
• Electronic Stability Control symbols and
the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway. messages (p. 313)
• Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 515)
5 Also called traction control.

6 Engine Drag Control
7 Engine Drag Control
8 Trailer Stability Assist is included if the vehicle is equipped with a Volvo original towbar.
9 Trailer Stability Assist
DRIVER SUPPORT
Electronic Stability Control displayed in the instrument panel. Several

symbols and messages examples are provided below.
A number of symbols and messages related
to Electronic Stability Control (ESC10) may be
Steady glow for System check when the engine is started.
approx. 2 seconds
System check when vehicle is started.
Flashing light The system is actively operating.
10 Electronic Stability Control }}
313
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Symbol Message Meaning

– Traction control temporar- Active yaw control has been temporarily reduced due to too-high brake system temperature. The
ily off function will be automatically reactivated when the brakes have cooled.
ESC Service required The system is not functioning properly. Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
Check if the problem was temporary or if it persists by switching off the engine and then starting
it again.
Check if the problem was temporary or if it persists by exiting the vehicle, locking the vehicle, and
then unlocking and getting in again.
If the problem persists, contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
The vehicle can be driven, but without ESC functionality.
A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the button in the center of the right-
side steering wheel keypad.
If the message persists, contact a workshop.
An authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Related information
• Electronic Stability Control (p. 311)
314
DRIVER SUPPORT
Connected Safety When your vehicle WARNING

Connected Safety11
communicates informa- approaches a vehicle with its
tion between your vehicle and other vehicles hazard warning flashers on, • The function is supplementary driver
this symbol will appear in the support intended to facilitate driving
via a cloud service12. The function is designed and help make it safer – it cannot han-
to notify the driver of any hazardous road instrument panel.
dle all situations in all traffic, weather
conditions ahead. and road conditions.
The function can notify the driver if another In vehicles equipped with a head-up display,
vehicle further down the road has activated its the warning symbols for Connected Safety
hazard warning flashers or detected slippery tions in the Owner's Manual about this
will also be displayed there.
road conditions. You will also be notified if function to learn of its limitations,
your own vehicle detects slippery road condi- Slippery road alerts which the driver must be aware of
tions. If your vehicle detects before using the function.
Connected Safety can assist the driver with

reduced friction between the • Driver support functions are not a sub-
tires and the road, this sym- stitute for the driver's attention and
the following:
bol will be shown in the judgment. The driver is always respon-
• Hazard warning flashers alert instrument panel. This infor- sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
• Slippery road alerts mation can then be forwar- in a safe manner, at the appropriate
ded to vehicles approaching speed, with an appropriate distance to
Connected Safety communication between
your vehicle's location. other vehicles, and in accordance with
vehicles only works for vehicles equipped with
current traffic rules and regulations.
this function. Connected Safety also needs to If your vehicle receives infor-
be approved via Volvo privacy. mation about slippery condi-
tions from another vehicle, Related information
Hazard warning flashers alert this symbol will be shown in • Driver support systems (p. 308)
If your vehicle's hazard warning flashers are the instrument panel. • Activating and deactivating Connected
activated, information on this can be sent to Safety (p. 316)
other vehicles approaching your location.
In vehicles equipped with a head-up display, • Connected Safety limitations (p. 316)
the warning symbols for Connected Safety • Internet connection (p. 556)
will also be displayed there.
11 Not available in all markets.

12 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the cloud service, depending on your service plan.
315
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating and deactivating Connected Safety limitations WARNING

Connected Safety Information on vehicles with activated hazard
For Connected Safety to be able to share warning flashers or which have detected slip- • In certain situations, the function may
give false warnings of slippery road
information about road conditions with other pery road conditions is not always communi-
conditions.
drivers, the function must be approved in cated between all vehicles in the affected
Volvo privacy. area. • The function cannot always detect
This may be the case if: other vehicles with activated hazard
1. Tap in the center display. warning factors or detect all stretches
• No or insufficient Internet connection. of road with slippery conditions.
2. Press Privacy or Profiles. The menu path
depends on whether or not you are logged • The maneuvers (steering wheel move-
ments, acceleration or braking) made by
in to a Google account. Related information
the vehicles on slippery surfaces are too
3. Then tap Privacy settings and approve weak for friction between the tires and
• Connected Safety (p. 315)
Connected Safety. road to be detected. • Internet connection (p. 556)
• Vehicles that have detected slippery road
Even when your vehicle is not connected to conditions, or have turned on their hazard
the Internet, you will still be notified if the sys- warning flashers, do not have the function
tem in your own vehicle detects slippery road active.
conditions. For Connected Safety to function
at full capacity, your vehicle needs to be con- • Vehicles that have detected slippery road
nected to the Internet. conditions or activated hazard warning
flashers are not equipped with the func-
Related information tion.
• Connected Safety (p. 315) • Insufficient GPS/satellite navigation may
• Internet connection (p. 556) prevent warnings.
• Connected Safety limitations (p. 316) • Slippery road conditions were detected or
hazard warning flashers were activated on
a road that is not registered in the Volvo
Cars database.
• Connected Safety is not developed on all
markets and does not cover all areas. Con-
sult a Volvo retailer for more information
on covered areas.
316
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information* NOTE WARNING

The Road Sign Information function can help
the driver observe speed-related road signs13.
The speed camera information function will • The function is supplementary driver
be available at a later time. support intended to facilitate driving
The function is available in certain markets. and help make it safer – it cannot han-
NOTE and road conditions.
In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa- • The driver is advised to read all sec-
tion function is only available in combinations in the Owner's Manual about this
tion with map data. Google Maps15 set- function to learn of its limitations,
tings may need to be changed. which the driver must be aware of
before using the function.
NOTE • Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa- judgment. The driver is always respon-
tion function is only available in combina- sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
tion with map data. in a safe manner, at the appropriate
Examples of signs that can be detected14. speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
If the vehicle passes a speed limit sign, it will
be displayed in the instrument panel and the
head-up display*.
Related information
If the vehicle passes a speed limit sign, it will
be displayed in the instrument panel. • Driver support systems (p. 308)
• Road Sign Information* display (p. 318)
There are also subfunctions for Road Sign
Information that can alert the driver if the • Speed limit and speed camera warnings
speed limit has been exceeded or if there are from Road Sign Information* (p. 318)
speed cameras nearby. • Road Sign Information* limitations
(p. 319)
13 An Internet connection is needed for Road Sign Information to work.

14 Road signs differ according to market ‒ the illustrations shown here are just some examples.
15 Read more at Maps Privacy center.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information* display Signs for "School" and "Children Speed limit and speed camera
Road Sign Information displays road signs in playing" warnings from Road Sign
different ways depending on the sign and sit- The instrument panel can dis- Information*
uation. The following illustrations are exam- play signs for "School" or There are subfunctions for Road Sign Infor-
ples. "Children playing" if this data mation that can alert the driver if the speed
is available. limit has been exceeded or if there are speed
The function is available in certain markets.
cameras nearby17.
The function is available in certain markets.
Related information
• Road Sign Information* (p. 317) Speed limit warning
• Road Sign Information* limitations The symbol18 in the instru-
(p. 319) ment panel will flash when
the speed limit is exceeded
by 5 km/h (3 mph).
The warning will be repeated once after

about 30 seconds if the speed is not reduced.
Example16 of registered speed information.
After this, new warnings will only be provided
When the function has registered a speed if the speed is reduced by at least 5 km/h
limit sign, the instrument panel will display the (3 mph) under the speed limit and then excee-
sign as a symbol. ded again. A new warning may also be provi-
If the vehicle is equipped with map data*, ded if the vehicle enters a new speed limit
speed-related information will also be zone.
retrieved from map data, which means that The driver can be alerted if the vehicle is
the instrument panel can display or change exceeding a detected speed limit and is
information about speed limits even if the
approaching a speed camera.17
vehicle has not passed a speed-related sign.
16 Road signs differ according to market ‒ the illustrations shown here are just examples.
17 Information on speed cameras on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas.
18 Road signs differ by market – the illustration shown here is just an example.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed camera warning Activating and deactivating Road Sign Information* limitations
Vehicles equipped with Road Sign Information warnings from Road Sign Road Sign Information functionality may be
and map data17 can provide information on Information* reduced in certain situations.
upcoming speed cameras in the instrument Road Sign Information can be deactivated on The function is available in certain markets.
panel. some markets.
The function could have reduced functionality
NOTE The function is available in certain markets. due to e.g.:
The speed camera information function will Activate or deactivate the function under set-
• faded road signs
be available at a later time. tings.
• signs located in a curve in the road
• twisted or damaged signs
Related information 2. Tap Driving and select settings for Road • signs positioned high above the road
• Road Sign Information* (p. 317) Sign Information.
• fully/partially obstructed or poorly posi-
• Activating and deactivating warnings from Related information tioned signs
Road Sign Information* (p. 319) • Road Sign Information* (p. 317) • signs partially or fully covered by frost,
• Road Sign Information* limitations • Speed limit and speed camera warnings snow and/or dirt
(p. 319) from Road Sign Information* (p. 318) • digital map data with outdated, incorrect
• Road Sign Information* limitations or missing speed information19
(p. 319) • no Internet connection
• approval for Google Maps20.
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa-
tion function is only available in combina-
tion with map data.
17 Information on speed cameras on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas.
19 Map data and speed information is not available for all areas.
20 Read more at Maps Privacy center. }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which has certain general
limitations.
Related information
• Road Sign Information* (p. 317)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cruise control functions Here is a summary to make them more easily function in order to learn about factors such as
There are several driver support systems that distinguishable. its limitations and what the driver should be
can assist you while driving in order to main- We recommend that you read all of the sec- aware of before using the system.
tain a suitable speed depending on situation. tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to a
Cruise controlA Pilot Assist – without steering Pilot Assist – with steering assistance*B
assistanceB
Symbol in the
instrument
panel
Brief descrip- Cruise control can help the driver Pilot Assist without steering assis- Pilot Assist with steering assistance can help
tion maintain an even speed to provide tance can help the driver to maintain a the driver keep the vehicle in the current traffic
a more relaxing driving experience constant speed, combined with a pre- lane by providing steering assistance and main-
on e.g. highways and long, straight set time interval to the vehicle in front. taining an even speed and a set time interval to
roads with even traffic flows. the vehicle ahead.
A Cruise Control
B Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.
Related information
• Cruise control (p. 324)
• Pilot Assist* (p. 326)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering wheel buttons for speed- : From standby mode – Activates the WARNING
controlling functions selected function and sets the current
The speed-controlling function selected in the speed. • The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
center display can be controlled using the : From active mode – Puts the func- and help make it safer – it cannot han-
left-side steering wheel keypad. This applies tion in standby mode. dle all situations in all traffic, weather
for cruise control (CC21) and Pilot Assist* with and road conditions.
and without steering assistance. : From standby mode – Activates the
selected function and resumes the stored • The driver is advised to read all sec-
speed. tions in the Owner's Manual about this
function to learn of its limitations,
: From active mode – Increases the
which the driver must be aware of
stored speed.
: Reduces the set speed. • Driver support functions are not a sub-
: Reduces the time interval to the vehi- stitute for the driver's attention and
cle ahead. judgment. The driver is always respon-
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
: Increases the time interval to the in a safe manner, at the appropriate
vehicle ahead. speed, with an appropriate distance to
Buttons for speed-controlling functions current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
• Cruise control functions (p. 321)
• Selecting and activating speed-controlling
functions (p. 323)
• Deactivating speed-controlling functions
(p. 324)
21 Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Adjusting set speed for speed-controlling Selecting and activating speed- WARNING
functions (p. 339) controlling functions
A noticeable increase in speed may follow
• Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead The speed-controlling functions must first be
when the speed is resumed with the
(p. 340) selected in the center display before they can steering wheel button.
be activated using the button on the steering
wheel. This applies to cruise control (CC22)
and Pilot Assist* with and without steering Requirements
assistance. Certain conditions must be met in order to
start any of the functions.
Cruise control
2. Tap Driving and activate your preferred
function. • In order to start Cruise Control from
standby mode, the vehicle's current speed
3. When the desired function is selected, must be 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher.
press on the steering wheel keypad to Pilot Assist without steering assistance
activate. • The driver's seat belt must be buckled and
> The symbol in the instrument panel the driver's door must be closed.
lights up – the function starts and the
• There must be a vehicle ahead (target
current speed is stored as the maxi- vehicle) within a reasonable distance or
mum speed. your vehicle's current speed must be at
4. If the function goes into standby mode – least 15 km/h (9 mph).
press the button on the steering
wheel to reactivate.
> The speed-controlling markings in the
instrument panel illuminate and the
vehicle will then return to the most
recently set speed.
22 Cruise Control }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Pilot Assist with steering assistance Deactivating speed-controlling Cruise control

• The driver's seat belt must be buckled and functions Cruise Control (CC24) can help the driver
the driver's door must be closed. The speed-controlling functions can be deac- maintain an even speed to provide a more
• The side markings of the lane must be tivated using the button on the steering relaxing driving experience on highways and
clearly visible and detected by the vehicle. wheel. The relevant function will then go into long, straight roads with even traffic flows.
standby mode. This applies for cruise control
• There must be a vehicle ahead (target Cruise control is not available in vehicles
vehicle) within a reasonable distance or (CC23) and Pilot Assist*. equipped with Pilot Assist.
your vehicle's current speed must be at – Pressing the button on the steering
least 15 km/h (9 mph). wheel keypad. Using engine braking instead of
• The speed must not exceed 140 km/h (87 > The symbol and the markings in the applying the brakes
mph). instrument panel are extinguished – the Cruise Control regulates speed by lightly
selected speed-controlling functions applying the brakes. On downgrades, it can
• The driver must keep their hands on the
are in standby mode. sometimes be desirable to roll a bit faster and
steering wheel. let speed be reduced instead by engine brak-
When another function is selected in the cen-
ing alone. The driver can temporarily disen-
Related information ter display, the instrument panel's symbol and
gage the Cruise Control braking function.
• Cruise control functions (p. 321) marking for the previously selected function
• Deactivating speed-controlling functions are hidden, and the set/stored maximum To disengage CC:
(p. 324) speed is deleted. – Press the accelerator pedal about halfway
• Cruise control standby mode (p. 325) down and then release it.
WARNING > Cruise Control will automatically disen-
• Pilot Assist* standby mode (p. 332)
When speed-controlling functions are in gage the automatic brake function and
standby mode, the driver must intervene speed will only be reduced using the
and regulate both speed and distance to engine braking function.
the vehicle ahead.
Related information
• Cruise control functions (p. 321)
functions (p. 323)
23 Cruise Control
24 Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING • Adjusting set speed for speed-controlling Cruise control standby mode
functions (p. 339) Cruise control (CC25) can be deactivated and
• The function is supplementary driver
put in standby mode. This can take place
automatically or be due to driver intervention.
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
Standby mode means that the function is
selected in the instrument panel but not acti-
and road conditions.
vated. The symbol in the instrument panel is
• The driver is advised to read all sec- not illuminated and cruise control is not regu-
tions in the Owner's Manual about this lating the speed.
which the driver must be aware of Standby mode due to action by the
before using the function. driver
• Driver support functions are not a sub- Cruise control will be deactivated and put in
stitute for the driver's attention and standby mode if any of the following occurs:
judgment. The driver is always respon- • The brakes are applied.
in a safe manner, at the appropriate • The gear selector is moved to N.
speed, with an appropriate distance to • The vehicle is driven faster than the set
other vehicles, and in accordance with speed for more than 1 minute.
current traffic rules and regulations. The driver must then control the vehicle's
speed.
Related information Temporarily increasing speed using the accel-
• Driver support systems (p. 308) erator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehi-
• Steering wheel buttons for speed-control- cle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will
ling functions (p. 322) return to the set speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.
functions (p. 323)
(p. 324)
• Cruise control standby mode (p. 325)
}}
325
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Automatic standby mode Pilot Assist*

The function may automatically go into Pilot Assist26 can help the driver to maintain
standby mode if one of the following occurs: a constant speed, combined with a preset
• The wheels lose traction. time interval to the vehicle in front. If the
vehicle is equipped with steering assistance,
• The engine speed (rpm) is too low/high.
Pilot Assist can help the driver keep the vehi-
• The temperature in the brake system cle in the current traffic lane.
becomes too high.
• The vehicle's speed goes below 30 km/h
(20 mph).
The driver must then control the vehicle's
speed.
Related information
• Cruise control (p. 324)
functions (p. 323)
(p. 324)
The camera and radar units monitor the distance to

the vehicle ahead and detect lane markings.
Camera
Radar sensor
25 Cruise Control
26 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane marking detection27 Pilot Assist is designed to: off Pilot Assist or switch to Pilot Assist with-
out steering assistance.
Distance detection • smoothly regulate speed. The driver must
apply the brakes in situations requiring Steering assistance27
Get to know Pilot Assist immediate braking. For example, when
The color of the steering
Pilot Assist with steering assistance helps to there are great differences in speed
wheel symbol indicates the
steer the vehicle, and you may need to drive a between vehicles or if the vehicle ahead
current status of steering
few miles with Pilot Assist before you feel brakes suddenly. Due to limitations in the
assistance:
completely at home with the function. It is camera and radar sensor, braking may
occur unexpectedly or not at all. • Illuminated indicates that
important to be familiar with all of the func-
steering assistance is active
tion's applications and limitations in order to • follow a vehicle ahead in the same lane
take advantage of all it has to offer. and maintain a time interval to that vehicle • Extinguished (as shown in illustration) indi-
set by the driver. If the radar unit does not cates that steering assistance is deactivated.
The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended
detect a vehicle ahead, it will instead
for use on highways and other major roads Pilot Assist's steering assistance is based on
maintain the maximum speed selected by
where it can help provide a more comfortable monitoring the direction of the vehicle ahead
the driver. This will also happen if the
and relaxing driving experience. and the traffic lane's side marker lines. The
speed of the vehicle ahead exceeds the
driver can adjust steering assistance from
The driver sets the desired speed and distance selected maximum speed for your vehicle.
Pilot Assist at any time and steer in another
to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist monitors the
The vehicle's position in the traffic direction, e.g. to change lanes or avoid obsta-
distance to the vehicle ahead and the traffic
cles on the road. Resistance will be felt in the
lane's side markers using the camera. The sys- lane27
steering wheel as long as steering assistance
tem maintains the set time interval to the vehi- When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it attempts to
is active.
cle ahead by automatically adjusting your vehi- position the vehicle halfway between the visi-
cle's speed and keeps your vehicle in its lane ble lane marking lines. For a smoother drive, it
by providing steering assistance. is a good idea to allow the vehicle to find a
good position. The driver can always adjust
Pilot Assist regulates speed by accelerating
the position him/herself by increasing steering
and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit
input. It is important for the driver to make
a slight sound when they are being used to
sure the vehicle is positioned safely in the lane.
adjust speed.
If Pilot Assist does not position the vehicle
appropriately in the lane, the driver should turn
27 Applies only to vehicles equipped with Pilot Assist with steering assistance. }}
327
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Temporarily deactivating steering should always be ready to increase his or her instruct the driver to actively steer the
assistance own steering efforts, particularly in curves. vehicle.
When the vehicle is approaching an off-ramp 2. If the driver's hands are still detected on
WARNING or a fork in the road, the driver should steer the steering wheel after a few seconds
toward the desired lane so that Pilot Assist have passed the instructions to actively
Pilot Assist is deactivated automatically
and resumes working without prior notice. can detect the desired direction of travel. steer the vehicle will be repeated accom-
panied by an audible signal.
Hands on the steering wheel 3. If Pilot Assist still does not detect the driv-
When the turn signals are used, Pilot Assist's Pilot Assist only functions if
steering assistance will be temporarily deacti- er's hands on the steering wheel after a
the driver's hands are on the few more seconds have passed, the audi-
vated. When the direction indicator is turned steering wheel. It is also
off, steering assistance is reactivated automat- ble signal will become intense and the
important for the driver to steering function will switch off. Pilot
ically if the lane's edge markings can still be always continue to be active
detected. Assist must then be reactivated by press-
and alert when driving since
ing the button on the steering wheel.
If Pilot Assist cannot clearly interpret the Pilot Assist is unable to read
lane's side marker lines and if the camera is all situations and may toggle between off and 4. When Pilot Assist is switched off, addi-
unable for some other reason to clearly inter- on without prior warning. tional sound and light signals will be
pret the lane, Pilot Assist will temporarily given, and the vehicle's systems will begin
deactivate steering assistance. The speed and WARNING braking the vehicle. This braking takes
distance warning functions will remain active. place intermittently in order to attract the
Act immediately if any warning signal is driver's attention.
Steering assistance will resume when the side triggered – do not wait for all levels of
marker lines can once again be interpreted. In warnings and assistance from the systems 5. The system continues to brake the vehicle
these situations, the driver may be alerted to be provided. to a standstill in its own lane and activates
through slight vibrations in the steering wheel the hazard warning flashers28.
that steering assistance is temporarily deacti- 1. If Pilot Assist detects that the driver's
vated. Steep roads and/or heavy loads
hands are not on the steering wheel, the
Pilot Assist is primarily intended to be driven
In curves and forks in the road system will provide a symbol and a text
on flat roads. The function may not be able to
message in the instrument panel to
Pilot Assist is designed to interact with the maintain the correct time interval to the vehi-
driver. The driver should never wait for steer- cle ahead when driving down steep down-
ing assistance from Pilot Assist, but instead
28 Regulations for using hazard warning flashers may vary from country to country.
328
DRIVER SUPPORT
grades. The driver should be extra attentive Read all warnings before use CAUTION
and prepared to apply the brakes.
Only a workshop may perform mainte-
Do not use Pilot Assist if the vehicle is carrying WARNING nance on driver support components – an
a heavy load or towing a trailer. • The function is supplementary driver authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
Pilot Assist will not provide steering assis- support intended to facilitate driving mended.
tance if anything is connected in the towbar and help make it safer – it cannot han-
connector. dle all situations in all traffic, weather
NOTE • The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual about this
Pilot Assist will not provide steering assis-
tance if anything is connected to the tow-
bar connector, for example a trailer or bicy-
cle holder.
• Driver support functions are not a sub-
judgment. The driver is always respon-
in a safe manner, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
NOTE
limitations.
}}
329
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| WARNING ity with poor light conditions, back- • Pilot Assist will be switched off if the
lighting, wet road surface, etc. speed-dependent power steering
In some situations, Pilot Assist may have wheel resistance is working at reduced
trouble helping the driver properly or may The driver should also note that Pilot Assist
has the following limitations: power, e.g. during cooling due to over-
be deactivated automatically – we advise
against using Pilot Assist in such cases. heating.
• High curbs, roadside barriers, tempo-
Examples of such situations include: rary obstacles (traffic cones, safety bar-
• the lane markings are unclear, worn, riers, etc.) are not detected. Alterna- WARNING
missing, cross each other, or there are tively, they may be detected incorrectly
Pilot Assist should only be used if there are
multiple sets of road markings. as lane markings, with a subsequent clear lane lines painted on each side of the
risk of contact between the vehicle and lane. All other use will increase the risk of
• the lane division changes, e.g. when
such obstacles. The driver is responsi-
lanes split or merge, and at off-ramps. contact with nearby obstacles that cannot
ble for ensuring that the vehicle main- be detected by the functions.
• when there is road construction and tains a suitable distance from such
sudden changes to the road surface, obstacles.
e.g. when the lines may no longer mark
the correct route. • The camera and radar units do not
have the capacity to detect all oncom-
• edges or other lines than lane markings ing objects and obstacles in traffic
are present on or near the road, e.g. environments, e.g. potholes, stationary
curbs, joints or repairs to the road sur- obstacles or objects that completely or
face, edges of barriers, roadside edges partially block the route.
or strong shadows.
• Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
• the lane is narrow or winding. animals, etc.
• the lane contains ridges or holes. • The steering assistance is limited in
• weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, force, which means that Pilot Assist
snow or fog or slush or reduced visibil- cannot always help the driver to steer
and keep the vehicle within the lane.
• In vehicles equipped with map data,
the function is able to use information
from map data, which could cause var-
iations in performance.
330
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING • Pilot Assist* symbols and messages Pilot Assist* displays

(p. 334) The following illustration shows how Pilot
• This is not a collision avoidance sys-
tem. The driver is always responsible • Collision risk warning from speed-control- Assist* with and without steering assistance
ling functions (p. 337) may be displayed in the instrument panel29.
and must intervene if the system fails
to detect a vehicle ahead. • Switching target vehicles with speed-con-
Symbol indication
trolling functions (p. 338)
• The function does not brake consis- Pilot Assist without steer-
tently for people or animals and does • Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead
ing assistance is active.
not brake for small vehicles, such as (p. 340)
bicycles and motorcycles. Similarly, it Pilot Assist with steering
• Adjusting set speed for speed-controlling
does not brake for low trailers, oncom- functions (p. 339) assistance is selected but
ing, slow-moving or stationary vehicles not available. The condi-
and objects.
• Auto-hold braking with speed-controlling tions for the function are
functions (p. 341) not met.
• Do not use the function in demanding
• Passing assistance* (p. 336)
situations, such as in city traffic, at Both of the functions are
intersections, on slippery surfaces, active.
with a lot of water or slush on the road,
in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads, or on on/off ramps.
Related information
• Steering wheel buttons for speed-control-
ling functions (p. 322)
functions (p. 323)
(p. 324)
• Pilot Assist* displays (p. 331)
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Speed Time interval Pilot Assist* standby mode

When the symbol in the Pilot Assist30 can be deactivated and put in
instrument panel shows a standby mode. This can take place automati-
vehicle, the time interval cally or be due to driver intervention.
to the vehicle ahead is Standby mode means that the function is
being regulated. selected in the instrument panel but not acti-
vated. In standby mode, Pilot Assist will not
regulate the speed or distance to the vehicle
When no vehicle is ahead or provide steering assistance.
shown, the functions are
following the saved Standby mode due to action by the
speed. driver
Pilot Assist will be deactivated and put in
Speed indicators. standby mode if any of the following occurs:
Set speed • The brakes are applied.
Related information
The current speed of your vehicle • Pilot Assist* (p. 326) • The gear selector is moved to N.
• A turn signal is used for more than
1 minute.
• The vehicle is driven faster than the set
speed for more than 1 minute.
Temporarily increasing speed using the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehi-
cle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will
return to the set speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.
29 Depending on market, these functions can be either standard or optional.

DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING The function may automatically go into Related information

standby mode if one of the following occurs. • Pilot Assist* (p. 326)
• If Pilot Assist without steering assis-
tance is in standby mode, the driver • One of the systems that Pilot Assist is • Selecting and activating speed-controlling
must intervene and regulate both dependent on stops working, such as functions (p. 323)
speed and distance to the vehicle Electronic Stability Control 31. • Deactivating speed-controlling functions
ahead. • The driver's hands are not on the steering (p. 324)
• If the vehicle comes too close to a vehi- wheel.
cle ahead when Pilot Assist without • The driver opens the door.
steering assistance is in standby mode,
• The driver unbuckles the seat belt.
the driver can be warned of the short
distance by the Distance Alert* func- • The engine speed (rpm) is too low/high.
tion instead. • One or more of the wheels lose traction.
• The brake temperature is high.
Automatic standby mode • The parking brake is applied.
• The camera and radar units are covered by
WARNING snow or heavy rain (the camera lens/radar
With automatic standby mode, the driver is waves are blocked).
warned by an audible signal and a message • Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h
in the instrument panel.
(3 mph) and Pilot Assist cannot determine
• The driver must then regulate vehicle if the vehicle ahead is stationary or if it is
speed, apply the brakes if necessary, another object, e.g. a speed bump.
and maintain a safe distance to other
• Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h
vehicles. (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so
that Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to
follow.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Pilot Assist* symbols and

messages
A number of symbols and messages relating
to Pilot Assist32 may be displayed. Several
The symbol is illuminated. The vehicle symbol is The vehicle is maintaining the set speed.
illuminated when the vehicle has a vehicle ahead
to relate to.
Pilot Assist Service required The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop.
The symbol is extinguished Pilot Assist is in standby mode.
Extinguished steering wheel symbol Indicates that steering assistance is deactivated. When Pilot Assist is provid-
ing steering assistance, the steering wheel is illuminated.
DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbol for hands on the steering wheel The system cannot detect the driver's hands on the steering wheel. Place
your hands on the steering wheel and actively steer the vehicle.
The system alerts in various stages along with audible signals. The hazard
warning flashers are activated if the vehicle needs to brake down to a stand-
still.
Radar sensor front Sensor blocked See Own- Clean the area in front of the radar sensors.
er’s manual,
Front radar alignment incomplete
or
Front camera alignment incomplete

mended.
Related information
DRIVER SUPPORT
Passing assistance* WARNING Using passing assistance*

Passing assistance can assist the driver when Passing assistance can be used with Pilot
passing other vehicles. The function can be • The function is supplementary driver
Assist*, with and without steering assistance.
used with Pilot Assist*. Several conditions must be met for passing
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle assistance to be possible.
and you indicate that you intend to pass that In order to activate passing assistance:
vehicle by using the turn signal33, the system
• The driver is advised to read all sec- • your vehicle must be following a vehicle
can assist by beginning to accelerate toward ahead (target vehicle)
the vehicle ahead before your vehicle has tions in the Owner's Manual about this
moved into the passing lane. function to learn of its limitations, • your vehicle's current speed must be
which the driver must be aware of at least 70 km/h (43 mph)
The function will then delay a speed reduction before using the function.
to avoid early braking as your vehicle • the selected speed must be high enough
approaches a slower-moving vehicle. • Driver support functions are not a sub- to safely pass another vehicle.
stitute for the driver's attention and To start passing assistance:
The function remains active until your vehicle judgment. The driver is always respon-
has passed the other vehicle. sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven – Turn on the left turn signal.
in a safe manner, at the appropriate > Passing assistance begins accelerating
WARNING speed, with an appropriate distance to and shortens the time interval to the
other vehicles, and in accordance with vehicle ahead for a short period of time
Please note that this function can be acti-
current traffic rules and regulations. to facilitate passing. If the passing
vated in more situations than just passing
another vehicle, such as when a direction maneuver is not completed, the time
indicator is used to indicate a lane change interval will revert to the preset value.
Related information
or before exiting to another road – the vehi-
cle will then briefly accelerate. • Driver support systems (p. 308)
• Using passing assistance* (p. 336)
33 Only the left-hand turn signal for left-hand drive vehicles, or right-hand turn signal for right-hand drive vehicles.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING Collision risk warning from speed- WARNING

controlling functions
The driver should be aware that if condi- The driver support system only issues a
tions suddenly change when using Passing The driver support system Pilot Assist* can warning for vehicles detected by its radar
Assistance, the function may implement an alert the driver if the distance to the vehicle unit – thus, a warning may come after a
undesired acceleration in certain condi- ahead suddenly decreases to an unsafe dis- delay or not at all. Never wait for a warning.
tions. tance. Apply the brakes when necessary.
Some situations should be avoided, e.g. if:
• the vehicle is approaching an exit in the
same direction as passing would nor-
mally occur
• the vehicle ahead slows before your
vehicle has had time to switch to the
passing lane
• traffic in the passing lane slows down
Situations of this type can be avoided by
temporarily putting Pilot Assist in standby
mode.
Collision warning audible signal and symbol
Related information Audible signal at risk of collision Collision warning symbol on the windshield
• Passing assistance* (p. 336) Collision warning symbol In vehicles equipped with a head-up display*,
• Pilot Assist* (p. 326) a flashing warning symbol will be displayed on
Camera and radar unit distance monitor- the windshield.
ing
Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the vehicle's NOTE
braking capacity. If a situation requires more
Visual warnings on the windshield may be
braking force than driver support can provide,
difficult to notice in cases of strong sun-
and if the driver does not apply the brakes, a
light, reflections, extreme light contrasts,
warning light and audible warning signal will
or if the driver is wearing sunglasses or is
be activated to alert the driver that immediate
not looking straight ahead.
action is required.
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Related information Switching target vehicles with WARNING

• Driver support systems (p. 308) speed-controlling functions
When Pilot Assist is following another vehi-
• Pilot Assist* (p. 326) At certain speeds, models with automatic cle at speeds over approx. 30 km/h
transmissions and the Pilot Assist* driver (20 mph) and changes target vehicle –
• Distance Alert* (p. 371)
support function can switch target vehicles. from a moving vehicle to a stationary one –
• Head-up display* (p. 145) Pilot Assist will ignore the stationary vehi-
Switching target vehicles cle and instead accelerate to the stored
speed.
• The driver must then intervene and
apply the brakes.
Automatic standby mode when switching

targets
Pilot Assist disengages and goes into standby
mode if:
If the target vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may • your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h
be stationary traffic ahead. (3 mph) and Pilot Assist cannot determine
When Pilot Assist is actively following another if the target object is a stationary vehicle
vehicle at speeds under 30 km/h (20 mph) or another object, e.g. a speed bump.
and switches target vehicles – from a moving • your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h
to a stationary vehicle – Pilot Assist will brake (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so
for the stationary vehicle. that Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to
follow.
Related information
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adjusting set speed for speed- – Change a set speed by pressing the Possible speed
controlling functions (1) or (2) buttons briefly or by pressing Automatic transmission
It is possible to adjust set speeds for cruise and holding them: The driver support functions can follow
control and Pilot Assist* functions. another vehicle at speeds from a standstill up
• Brief press: Each press changes the
speed in +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph) incre- to the vehicle's maximum speed.
ments. Pilot Assist can provide steering assistance
• Press and hold: Release the button from near-stationary speeds up to 140 km/h
when the set speed indicator (3) has (87 mph).
moved to the desired speed. The lowest speed that can be set is 30 km/h
> The most recently set speed will be (20 mph). When following another vehicle,
stored. ACC can monitor that vehicle's speed and
slow your own vehicle down to a standstill,
NOTE but it is not possible to set speeds lower than
30 km/h (20 mph).
For vehicles without Pilot Assist, speed
instead increases by +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph) Related information
Set speed each time the button is pressed. • Driver support systems (p. 308)
: Increases the set speed • Cruise control (p. 324)

Pressing the accelerator pedal • Pilot Assist* (p. 326)
: Reduces the set speed If speed is increased by depressing the accel-
erator pedal while pressing the (1) button
on the steering wheel, the vehicle's speed
when the button is pressed will be stored as
the set speed.
Temporarily increasing speed using the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehi-
cle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will
return to the set speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Setting time interval to the vehicle vehicle ahead. 5 bars represents NOTE
ahead approx. 3 seconds.
The time interval to the vehicle ahead can be
• The greater the vehicles' speed, the
In order to help your vehicle follow the vehicle greater the distance between them for
set for Pilot Assist*. ahead as smoothly and comfortably as possi- a set time interval.
ble, Pilot Assist allows the time interval to vary
noticeably in certain situations. At low speeds, • Only use the time intervals permitted
when the distance to the vehicle ahead is by local traffic regulations.
short, Pilot Assist increases the time interval • If driver support does not seem to
slightly. respond with a speed increase when
activated, it may be because the time
NOTE interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter
than the set time interval.
When the symbol in the instrument panel
shows a vehicle and a steering wheel, Pilot
Assist follows a vehicle ahead at a preset WARNING
time interval.
• Only use a time interval suitable for the
Controls for setting a time interval. When only a steering wheel is shown, current traffic conditions.
Reduce the time interval there is no vehicle ahead within a reasona- • The driver should be aware that short
ble distance. time intervals give them limited time to
Increase the time interval
react and act to any unforeseen traffic
Distance indicator situation.
– Press the (1) or (2) button to decrease or

increase the time interval. Related information
> The distance indicator (3) shows the
current time interval. • Pilot Assist* (p. 326)
Different time intervals to the vehicle ahead • Head-up display* (p. 145)
can be selected and are shown in the instru-
ment panel as 1–5 horizontal bars. The more
bars, the longer the time interval. One bar rep-
resents an interval of approx. 1 second to the
DRIVER SUPPORT
Auto-hold braking with speed- WARNING • The gear selector is moved to the P, N or
controlling functions R position.
The driver support system only issues a
The driver support function Pilot Assist* has a warning for obstacles detected by its radar • The driver puts Pilot Assist in standby
special braking function in slow traffic and at sensor – thus, a warning may come after a mode.
a standstill. In certain situations, the parking delay or not at all.
brake will be applied to keep the vehicle at a Auto Activate Parking Brake
standstill.
• Never wait for a warning or assistance. The parking brake will be applied if the func-
Apply the brakes when necessary. tion is keeping the vehicle stationary using the
Braking function in slow traffic and at brakes and:
a standstill NOTE • The driver opens the door or unbuckles
In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when his/her seat belt.
stopped at a traffic light, driving will resume Driver support can keep the vehicle sta-
automatically if the vehicle is stopped for less tionary for no more than 10 minutes – after • The function has kept the vehicle at a
than approx. 3 seconds. If it takes more than 3 that time the parking brake is applied and standstill for more than
seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving the function is deactivated. approx. 10 minutes.
again, the driver support function will go into The parking brake must be released before • The brakes overheat.
standby mode and the auto-hold brake func- driver support can be reactivated. • The driver switches off the engine.
tion will activate.
The function can be reactivated by: Related information
– Deactivation of the Auto-hold brake
function
• Pressing the button on the steer-
In certain situations, auto-hold will be deacti- • Pilot Assist* (p. 326)
ing wheel keypad.
vated when the vehicle is at a standstill and • Brake functions (p. 450)
• Pressing the accelerator pedal. the function will go into standby mode. This
> The function will resume following the means that the brakes will be released and the
vehicle ahead if it begins to move vehicle could begin to roll. The driver must
within approx. 6 seconds. actively apply the brakes to keep the vehicle
stationary.
WARNING This can occur if:
A noticeable increase in speed may follow
• The driver depresses the brake pedal.
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button. • The parking brake is applied.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Keeping Aid

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA34) is designed to
actively steer the vehicle on freeways, high-
ways and other major roads to help the driver
reduce the risk of the vehicle unintentionally
veering out of the lane.
Lake Keeping Aid steers the vehicle back into
the lane and/or alerts the driver using vibra-
tions in the steering wheel.
Lane Keeping Aid is active at speeds between
65–200 km/h (40–125 mph) on roads with
clearly visible traffic lane marker lines. A camera monitors the road/traffic lane's marker Lane Keeping Aid alerts the driver using vibrations in
On narrow roads, the function may be unavail- lines. the steering wheel.
able and go into standby mode. The function Lane Keeping Aid functions as follows:
will become available again when the road
becomes sufficiently wide. • When the vehicle approaches a lane
marker line, the function will actively steer
the vehicle back into the lane using light
pressure on the steering wheel.
• If the vehicle is about to move over a lane
marker line, the driver will be alerted by
vibrations in the steering wheel.
NOTE
When the direction indicators/turn signals
Lane Keeping Aid steers the vehicle back into its are activated, the Lane Keeping Aid does
lane.
not provide any warning or intervene with
steering.
34 Lane Keeping Aid
342
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING Lane Keeping Aid does not intervene warning signal will sound until the driver
begins steering the vehicle again.
support intended to facilitate driving Related information
and help make it safer – it cannot han- • Driver support systems (p. 308)
dle all situations in all traffic, weather • Activating and deactivating Lane Keeping
and road conditions. Aid (p. 344)
• The driver is advised to read all sec- • Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 344)
function to learn of its limitations, • Lane Keeping Aid symbols and messages
which the driver must be aware of (p. 345)
before using the function. • Differences between Pilot Assist* and
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 348)
stitute for the driver's attention and Lane Keeping Aid does not intervene in sharp inside
judgment. The driver is always respon- curves.
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven In certain cases, such as when a turn signal is
in a safe manner, at the appropriate used or when "straightening out" an inside
speed, with an appropriate distance to curve, Lane Keeping Aid will not provide steer-
other vehicles, and in accordance with ing assistance or alerts.
Hands on the steering wheel
Steering assistance with Lane Keeping Aid
only functions if the driver's hands are on the
steering wheel, which the system continu-
ously monitors.
If the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel, an audible signal will be given and a
message will instruct the driver to actively
steer the vehicle:
• Apply steering Lane Keeping Aid
If the driver does not follow the recommenda-
tions and begin actively steering the vehicle, a
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating and deactivating Lane Lane Keeping Aid limitations Related information
Keeping Aid In certain demanding driving conditions, Lane • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 342)
The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA35) function is Keeping Aid (LKA36) may not be able to prop- • Speed-dependent steering wheel resis-
optional – the driver can choose to have the erly assist the driver. In these situations, it is tance (p. 311)
function activated or deactivated. However, recommended that the function be deacti-
steering assistance for solid lines is always vated.
on. Examples of such situations include:
Activate or deactivate the function under set-
• road work
tings.
• winter driving conditions
• poor road surfaces
2. Tap Driving and activate your preferred • a very sporty driving style
function.
• bad weather with reduced visibility
Related information • roads with indistinct or no lane markings
• sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
• Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 344) side markings
• when speed-dependent power steering
wheel resistance is working at reduced
power – e.g. during cooling due to over-
heating.
The function cannot detect barriers, railings or
similar obstacles at the side of the lane.
NOTE
limitations.
35 Lane Keeping Aid

36 Lane Keeping Aid
344
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Keeping Aid symbols and played in the instrument panel. Several exam-
messages ples are provided below.
to Lane Keeping Aid (LKA37) may be dis-
Driver support system Reduced function- The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA.
ality Service required
Windscreen sensor blocked See Owner's The camera's ability to detect the lane in front of the vehicle is reduced.
manual
Apply steering Lane Keeping Aid Steering assistance is disabled when the driver's hands are not on the wheel.
Follow the instructions and steer the vehicle.
A text message can be erased by briefly press- If the message persists, contact a workshop.
ing the button in the center of the right- An authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
side steering wheel keypad. mended.
37 Lane Keeping Aid }}
345
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Lane Keeping Aid display (p. 347)
• Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 344)
346
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Keeping Aid display Unavailable Steering/warning indicator

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA38)
uses symbols in
the instrument panel for various situations.
Some examples of symbols
and descriptions of the situa-
tions in which they might
appear are provided below.
Available
Unavailable – the marker lines in the symbol are Steering/warning – the marker lines in the symbol
extinguished. are colored.
Lane Keeping Aid is unable to detect the lane Indicates that the Lane Keeping Aid system is
marker lines, the vehicle's speed is too low or alerting the driver and/or attempting to steer
the road is too narrow. the vehicle back into the lane.
Related information
• Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 344)
Available – the marker lines in the symbol are white.
Lane Keeping Aid is able to detect one or both
of the traffic lane's side marker lines.
38 Lane Keeping Aid
347
DRIVER SUPPORT
Differences between Pilot Assist* Pilot Assist is active. How do I know that Lane Keeping Aid is
and Lane Keeping Aid on?
Pilot Assist with steering
Pilot Assist is a comfort function that can Symbols in the vehicle's instrument panel
assistance is selected but
help keep the vehicle in its own lane and show the function status.
not available. The condi-
maintain the distance to the vehicle in front of An extinguished symbol in
tions for the function are
you. Lane Keeping Aid39 is a function that not met. the instrument panel means
similarly helps in certain situations to reduce that the function is on but
the risk of the vehicle unintentionally veering Pilot Assist with steering that the conditions for LKA
out of its lane. assistance is active. have not been met.
Pilot Assist with steering assistance
Pilot Assist can help you to steer your vehicle White symbol in the instru-
between the lane markings, as well as main- ment panel means that the
tain a preset speed and distance to the vehicle conditions for LKA have been
ahead. The function can also use the lane Lane Keeping Aid met and that the function is
marking lines to help the driver maintain a Lane Keeping Aid can provide steering assis- available.
favorable position in the lane. tance and/or a warning to the driver when the
What does Pilot Assist do? vehicle is about to leave its lane unintention- An orange symbol in the
• Can help to keep the vehicle within its lane ally. The function is active between 65-200 instrument panel means that
by assisting steering in some cases. km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with clearly visi- LKA is providing steering
ble side markings.
• Can help to maintain a preset speed or the assistance back into the lane
distance to the vehicle ahead by means of What does Lane Keeping Aid do? and/or giving a warning with
acceleration and braking operations. • Lane Keeping Aid can provide the driver vibration in the steering
with steering assistance, steering the wheel.
How do I know that Pilot Assist is on?
Symbols in the vehicle's instrument panel let vehicle back into its lane and/or providing
you know when Pilot Assist is on. warnings using steering wheel vibration.
39 Lane Keeping Aid(LKA)
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 342) Assistance during collision risks40
The driver is always responsible for ensur- Assistance during collision risks41 can help
ing that the vehicle is operated in a safe the driver avoid or mitigate a collision by pro-
manner. The driver is advised to read all of viding warnings, automatic braking and
the sections in the Owner's Manual about steering assistance.
this function before using the function.
WARNING
which the driver must be aware of Collision warning audible signal and symbol
before using the function. Audible signal at risk of collision
stitute for the driver's attention and Collision warning symbol
judgment. The driver is always respon- Camera and radar unit distance monitor-
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven ing
Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not
be aware of the function except when the sys-
tem intervenes when a collision is imminent.
can help the driver avoid a collision when e.g.
driving in stop-and-go traffic, when changes in
Related information
the traffic ahead and driver distraction could
lead to an incident. The function then activates
• Pilot Assist* (p. 326) a brief, forceful braking in an attempt to stop
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| your vehicle immediately behind the vehicle or Step 3 – Auto-hold brakes WARNING
object ahead. If the driver has not taken evasive action and a
collision is imminent, the automatic braking The function must not be used to change
The function is always active and cannot be how the driver operates the vehicle. The
switched off. function will be triggered. This occurs whether driver must not only rely on the function to
or not the driver is pressing the brake pedal. brake the vehicle.
Sub-functions Full braking force will be applied to reduce the
Assistance during collision risks can, if neces- speed at impact or reduced braking effect will
be applied if this is sufficient to avoid the colli- Steering assistance
sary, provide the following:
sion. The function can help the driver reduce the
• Collision warning risk of the vehicle leaving its lane unintention-
The seat belt tensioner may be activated when ally or colliding with another vehicle or obsta-
• Assisted braking
the automatic braking function is triggered. cle by actively steering the vehicle back into
• Auto-hold brakes
its lane or swerving. Steering assistance is not
The function is designed to be activated as
• Steering assistance late as possible to help avoid unnecessary provided sequentially, but instead can occur
Step 1 – Collision warning intervention. Automatic braking will only be regardless of when the other steps take place.
If there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian, applied after or during a collision warning. After the system has automatically intervened,
cyclist, large animal or another vehicle, the this text message will appear in the instru-
If braking assistance has prevented a collision,
driver will be alerted with light, sound and pul- ment panel.
the vehicle will be kept at a standstill until the
sations in the brake pedal. During hard braking
driver takes action. If the vehicle has slowed to
or if the accelerator pedal is pressed, the brake
avoid colliding with a slower-moving vehicle NOTE
pedal pulsation warning will not be given. The
ahead your speed will be reduced to that vehi- It is always the driver who must decide
intensity of the brake pedal pulsations varies
cle's speed. how much the vehicle should be in control
according to the vehicle's speed.
Auto-braking can always be cancelled if the – the vehicle can never take command.
Step 2 – Assisted braking
driver presses hard on the accelerator pedal.
If the system determines that the pressure the
driver is exerting on the brake pedal is insuffi- When the function is activated and braking,
cient to prevent the collision, assisted braking the brake light will illuminate. A message will
will increase pressure. be displayed in the instrument panel saying
that the function is or has been active.
40 This function is not available on all markets.

350
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING • Assistance during collision risks in oncom- Detecting obstacles with

ing traffic (p. 358) assistance during collision risks
support intended to facilitate driving • Assistance during risk of run-off (p. 360) Assistance during collision risks42 can help
and help make it safer – it cannot han- the driver detect different types of obstacles.
dle all situations in all traffic, weather The function can detect pedestrians, cyclists
and road conditions. or vehicles that are stationary or ahead and
• The driver is advised to read all sec- moving in the same direction as your vehicle.
tions in the Owner's Manual about this The function can also detect pedestrians,
function to learn of its limitations, cyclists or large animals crossing the road in
which the driver must be aware of front of your vehicle.
• Driver support functions are not a sub- WARNING
stitute for the driver's attention and Warnings and brake interventions may
judgment. The driver is always respon- occur late or not at all. The driver is always
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is
in a safe manner, at the appropriate driven correctly and with a safety distance
suitable for the speed.
current traffic rules and regulations. Vehicles
For the function to be able to detect a vehicle
in the dark, its headlights and taillights must
Related information
be on and clearly visible.
• Detecting obstacles with assistance dur-
ing collision risks (p. 351)
• Opportunity to reduce speed with assis-
tance during collision risks (p. 353)
• Assistance during collision risks limita-
tions (p. 354)
• Assistance during collision risks in cross-
ing traffic (p. 357)
}}
351
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Cyclists WARNING the clearest possible information about the

contours of the pedestrian's head, arm,
The function is supplementary driver sup- shoulders, legs, torso and lower body in com-
port, but it cannot detect all cyclists in all bination with normal human movements.
situations and, for example, cannot see:
In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be
• partially obscured cyclists.
a contrast to the background, which could
• cyclists if the contrast to the cyclist's depend on clothing, weather conditions, etc. If
background is poor. there is little contrast, the person may be
• cyclists in clothing that hides their detected late or not at all, which may result in
body contour. a delayed reaction from the system or no reac-
tion at all.
• bikes loaded with large objects.
The function can detect pedestrians even in
Examples of what the function would interpret to be Pedestrians dark conditions if they are illuminated by the
a cyclist: clear body and bicycle shapes. vehicle's headlights.
For good performance, the system's camera
and radar units for cyclist detection need the WARNING
clearest possible information about the con- The function is supplementary driver sup-
tours of the bicycle and of the cyclist's head, port, but it cannot detect all pedestrians in
arm, shoulders, legs, torso and lower body in all situations and, for example, cannot see:
combination with normal human movements. • partially obscured pedestrians, people
If large portions of the cyclist's body or the in clothing that hides their body con-
bicycle itself are not visible to the function's tour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm
camera, it will not be able to detect a cyclist. (32 tum).
The system can only detect adult cyclists rid- • pedestrians if the contrast to the
ing on bicycles intended for adults. Examples of what the function considers to be a
pedestrian's background is poor.
pedestrian: clear body contours. • pedestrians who are carrying large
For good performance, the system's camera objects.
and radar units for pedestrian detection need
352
DRIVER SUPPORT
Large animals WARNING Opportunity to reduce speed with

assistance during collision risks
The function is supplementary driver sup-
port, but it cannot detect all large animals Assistance during collision risks43 can help
in all situations and, for example, cannot prevent a collision or lower the vehicle's
see: speed at the point of impact.
If the difference in speed between your vehicle
• partially obscured larger animals.
and the obstacle is greater than the speeds
• larger animals seen from the front or specified below, the automatic brake function
from behind. cannot prevent a collision, but it can help miti-
• running or fast moving larger animals. gate its effects.
• larger animals if the contrast to the ani- Vehicles
mal's background is poor. Braking assistance can help prevent a collision
Examples of what the function would interpret as a • smaller animals such as cats and dogs. with a vehicle ahead by reducing your vehi-
large animal: stationary or moving slowly and with Warnings and brake interventions may cle's speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).
clear body contours. occur late or not at all. The driver is always Cyclists
For good performance, the system's function responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is Braking assistance can help prevent a collision
for detecting large animals (e.g. moose, driven correctly and with a safety distance with a cyclist ahead by reducing your vehicle's
suitable for the speed.
horses, etc.) needs the clearest possible infor- speed by up to 50 km/h (30 mph).
mation about body contours. This entails Pedestrians
being able to detect the animal straight from Related information
Braking assistance can help prevent a collision
the side in combination with normal move- • Assistance during collision risks (p. 349)
with a pedestrian ahead by reducing your vehi-
ments for that animal. • Assistance during collision risks limita- cle's speed by up to 45 km/h (28 mph).
If parts of the animal's body are not visible to tions (p. 354)
the function's camera, the system will not be
able to detect the animal.
The function can detect large animals even in
dark conditions if they are illuminated by the
vehicle's headlights.
43 Collision Avoidance }}
353
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Large animals Assistance during collision risks steering and applying the accelerator pedal,
If there is a risk of colliding with a large ani- limitations the function will not intervene, even if a colli-
mal, braking assistance can help reduce your Assistance during collision risks44 has certain sion is unavoidable. An active and aware driv-
vehicle's speed by up to 15 km/h (9 mph). limitations that a driver needs to be aware of. ing style may therefore delay collision warn-
ings and intervention in order to minimize
The braking function for large animals is pri-
Braking assistance limitations unnecessary warnings.
marily intended to mitigate the force of a colli-
sion at higher speeds. Braking is most effec- Extra equipment Steering assistance limitations
tive at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) and Hanging objects, such as a flag or streamer to The function may have limited functionality in
less effective at lower speeds. signal an over-sized load, or accessories such certain situations and not intervene, e.g.:
as auxiliary lights or front protective grids that
Related information extend beyond the height of the vehicle's • for smaller vehicles such as motorcycles
• Assistance during collision risks (p. 349) hood, may obstruct the camera or radar unit. • if more than half of your vehicle has
• Assistance during collision risks limita- Slippery road conditions moved into the adjacent lane
tions (p. 354) The extended braking distance on slippery • on roads/lanes with indistinct or no side
• Seat belt tensioners (p. 50) roads may reduce the function's capacity to lane markings
help avoid a collision. In these types of situa- • outside the speed range 60-140 km/h
tions, the Anti-lock Braking System and Elec- (37-87 mph)
tronic Stability Control (ESC45) are designed
for optimal braking power with maintained
• steering assistance for evasive maneuver:
outside the speed range 50–100 km/h
stability.
(30–62 mph)
Low speed
• when speed-dependent power steering
The function is not activated at very low wheel resistance is working at reduced
speeds under 4 km/h (3 mph). The system will power – e.g. during cooling due to over-
therefore not intervene in situations in which heating.
your vehicle is approaching another vehicle
very slowly, such as when parking. Functionality may also be reduced in other sit-
uations, such as:
Active driver
The driver's commands are always prioritized. • road work
In situations in which the driver is clearly • winter driving conditions
354
DRIVER SUPPORT
• narrow roads WARNING WARNING

• poor road surfaces
• Automatic braking can prevent a colli- • Warnings and brake interventions can
• a very sporty driving style sion or reduce collision speed, but to be triggered late or not at all if the traf-
• bad weather with reduced visibility. ensure full brake performance the fic situation or external influences pre-
driver should always depress the brake vent the camera and radar units from
In these demanding driving conditions, the
pedal – even when the vehicle brakes properly detecting pedestrians,
function may not be able to properly assist the
automatically. cyclists, large animals or vehicles
driver.
• The warning and steering assistance ahead of the vehicle.
Important warnings are only activated if there is a high risk • To be able to detect vehicles at night,
of collision – you must therefore never its front and rear lights must work and
WARNING wait for the collision warning or the illuminate clearly.
function to intervene. • Warnings for stationary and slow-mov-
The driver support system only issues a
warning for obstacles detected by its radar • The function does not activate auto- ing vehicles, as well as large animals,
sensor – thus, a warning may come after a matic braking intervention during can be disengaged due to darkness or
delay or not at all. heavy acceleration. poor visibility.
• Never wait for a warning or assistance. • Warnings and brake interventions for
Apply the brakes when necessary. pedestrians and cyclists are disen-
gaged at vehicle speeds over 80 km/h
(50 mph).
• The system can provide effective warn-
ings and brake intervention if the rela-
tive speed is lower than 50 km/h
(30 mph).
• For stationary or slow-moving vehicles,
warnings and brake interventions are
effective at vehicle speeds of up to
70 km/h (43 mph).
• Speed reduction for large animals is
less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and can be
achieved at vehicle speeds over
}}
355
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 70 km/h (43 mph). At lower speeds, Assistance during collision risks – function also helps stabilize the vehicle after it
the warning and brake intervention for steering assistance for evasive has passed the obstacle.
large animals is less effective. maneuvers The function can detect:
• Do not place, affix or mount anything Steering assistance can help the driver steer
on the inside or outside of the wind- away from obstacles when a collision cannot • vehicles
shield, or in front of or around the cam- be avoided by braking alone. Steering assis- • cyclists
era – this could disrupt camera-based tance is always active and cannot be • pedestrians
functions. switched off.
• large animals
• Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of
the camera and radar units can reduce Related information
the function, disengage it completely • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 342)
or give an improper function response. • Assistance during collision risks limita-
tions (p. 354)
NOTE
limitations.
CAUTION Your vehicle swerves away

nance on driver support components – an Slow/stationary obstacles.
authorized Volvo workshop is recom- The function helps provide assistance by
mended. strengthening the driver's steering move-
ments, but only if the driver has begun evasive
Related information action and the system detects that the driver's
• Assistance during collision risks (p. 349) steering movements are not sufficient to avoid
a collision.
The brake system is used simultaneously to
further strengthen steering movements. The
356
DRIVER SUPPORT
Assistance during collision risks in • the oncoming vehicle's headlights must Related information
crossing traffic be on. • Assistance during collision risks (p. 349)
Assistance during collision risks46 can assist The function may be unable to assist the driver • Assistance during collision risks limita-
the driver when turning in the path of an if, for example: tions (p. 354)
oncoming vehicle in an intersection.
• the road is slippery and Electronic Stability
Control47 is intervening.
• the approaching vehicle is detected at a
late stage.
• the oncoming vehicle is partially obstruc-
ted by another vehicle or object.
• the oncoming vehicle's headlights are off.
• the oncoming vehicle is moving erratically
and e.g. suddenly changes lanes at a late
stage.
WARNING
Sector in which the function can detect an
oncoming vehicle in crossing traffic. Warnings and steering assistance due to
an imminent collision with an oncoming
In order for the function to detect an oncom- vehicle always come very late.
ing vehicle in situations where there is a risk of
a collision, that vehicle must be within the
sector in which the function can analyze the NOTE
situation.
The following conditions must also be met: radar sensor, which has certain general
limitations.
• your vehicle's speed must be at least
4 km/h (3 mph).
• your vehicle must be making a left turn.
47 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
357
DRIVER SUPPORT
Assistance during collision risks in The following criteria must be met for the
oncoming traffic function to work:
Assistance during collision risks48 can help • your vehicle's speed must be above
the driver by providing steering assistance to 4 km/h (3 mph)
help prevent collisions with vehicles in
• the road must be straight
oncoming lanes. The function can also reduce
your vehicle's speed when an oncoming vehi- • your lane must have clear side lane mark-
cle is approaching in your lane to attempt to ings
mitigate the force of the impact. • your vehicle must be positioned straight in
your lane
Oncoming vehicles in your own lane
If an oncoming vehicle veers into your lane • the oncoming vehicle must be positioned
within your vehicle's lane markings
and a collision is unavoidable, the function can The function provides assistance by swerving your
help reduce your vehicle's speed to attempt to • the oncoming vehicle's headlights must vehicle back into your own lane.
mitigate the force of the collision. be on Oncoming vehicles
• the function can only handle “front-to-
front” collisions Own vehicle
• the function can only detect vehicles with The function is active at speeds between
four wheels. 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with
clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines.
When the vehicle veers into oncoming
If your vehicle is starting to veer from your
traffic own lane and a vehicle is approaching from
This function can help assist a distracted
the opposite direction, this function can help
driver who has not noticed that the vehicle is
the driver steer the vehicle back into its own
veering into oncoming traffic.
lane.
However, the function will not provide steer-
ing assistance if the turn signal is used. The
Own vehicle function will also not be activated if it detects
Oncoming vehicles that the driver is actively operating the vehicle.
358
DRIVER SUPPORT
When the function is intervening, a symbol Assistance during collision risks The function is active at speeds between
and a message will appear in the instrument with vehicles in your blind spot* 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with
panel and an audible signal will sound. If you become distracted and do not notice clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines.
your vehicle starting to veer out of the lane The lights in the door mirrors will flash and
WARNING while another vehicle is approaching from steering assistance will be provided. An audi-
Warnings and steering assistance due to behind or is in your vehicle's blind spot, assis- ble signal will also sound.
an imminent collision with an oncoming tance during collision risks49 can help provide
vehicle always come very late. When the function is intervening, a message is
assistance.
displayed in the instrument panel.
NOTE WARNING
The function uses the vehicle's camera and Warnings and steering assistance due to
radar sensor, which has certain general an imminent collision always come very
limitations. late.

• Assistance during collision risks (p. 349)
• Assistance during collision risks limita- radar sensor, which has certain general
tions (p. 354) limitations.
The function provides assistance by steering your
vehicle back into your own lane.
Related information
Another vehicle in blind spot zone • Assistance during collision risks (p. 349)
Own vehicle • Assistance during collision risks limita-
tions (p. 354)
Even if the driver intentionally changes lanes
using a turn signal without noticing another
• BLIS* (p. 364)
vehicle approaching, the function can provide
assistance.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Assistance during risk of run-off However, the function will not provide either
Assistance during collision risks50
can help steering assistance or braking if a direction
the driver and reduce the risk of the vehicle indicator is used. The function will also not be
inadvertently running off the road by actively activated if it detects that the driver is actively
steering the vehicle back onto the road. operating the vehicle.
This function has two levels for intervention: When the function is intervening, a message is
• Steering assistance only displayed in the instrument panel.
• Steering assistance with braking

WARNING
Warnings and steering assistance due to
an imminent collision with an oncoming
Intervention with steering assistance and braking vehicle always come very late.
Braking intervention assists in situations

where steering assistance alone is not suffi- NOTE
cient. Braking force is automatically adapted The function uses the vehicle's camera and
according to the situation at the moment the radar sensor, which has certain general
vehicle begins to run off the road. limitations.
The function is active at speeds between
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with Related information
clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines. • Assistance during collision risks (p. 349)
Intervention with steering assistance
The vehicle's camera unit monitors the edges • Assistance during collision risks limita-
of the road and the painted side marker lines. tions (p. 354)
If the vehicle is about to cross the edge of the
road, the function may attempt to steer the
vehicle back onto the road. If this is not suffi-
cient to keep the vehicle on the road, the
brakes will also be applied.
360
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for displayed in the instrument panel. Several

assistance during collision risks examples are provided below.
to assistance during collision risks51 may be
Automatic intervention Collision Avoidance When the function is activated, a message will appear to alert the driver.
Collision Avoidance system unavailable The system is temporarily malfunctioning or working with reduced perform-
ance.
51 Collision Avoidance }}
361
DRIVER SUPPORT

Collision Avoidance Reduced functionality The system is not functioning as intended. Contact workshop.
Service required
Windscreen sensor blocked See Owner's The camera's ability to detect the lane in front of the vehicle is reduced.
manual

mended.
Related information
• Assistance during collision risks (p. 349)
• Assistance during collision risks limita-
tions (p. 354)
362
DRIVER SUPPORT
Rear Collision Warning* WARNING Rear Collision Warning* limitations

The Rear Collision Warning52 (RCW) function In some situations, it may be difficult for Rear
can help the driver avoid rear-end collisions
Collision Warning (RCW)53 to warn the driver
from vehicles approaching from behind. of a collision risk.
The function can alert drivers of following vehi- This may be the case if:
cles of the risk of a collision by rapidly flashing
the turn signals.
and road conditions. • the vehicle approaching from the rear is
• The driver is advised to read all sec- detected at a late stage
If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the tions in the Owner's Manual about this • the vehicle approaching from the rear
function detects that the vehicle is in danger function to learn of its limitations, changes lanes at a late stage
of being hit from behind, the seat belt tension- which the driver must be aware of
ers may tension the front seat belts. The • a trailer, bicycle holder or similar is con-
before using the function. nected to the vehicle's electrical system -
Whiplash Protection System will also be acti-
vated in a collision. • Driver support functions are not a sub- the function will then be automatically
stitute for the driver's attention and deactivated.
Immediately before a collision from behind, judgment. The driver is always respon-
the function may also activate the brakes in sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven NOTE
order to reduce the forward acceleration of the in a safe manner, at the appropriate
vehicle during the collision. However, the speed, with an appropriate distance to In certain markets RCW does not warn
brakes will only be applied if your vehicle is other vehicles, and in accordance with with the direction indicators due to local
stationary. The brakes will be immediately current traffic rules and regulations. traffic regulations – in such cases, that part
released if the accelerator pedal is depressed. of the function is deactivated.
The function is automatically activated each Related information
time the engine is started. • Driver support systems (p. 308) NOTE
• Rear Collision Warning* limitations The function uses the vehicle's radar sen-
(p. 363) sors, which have certain general limita-
• Whiplash Protection System (p. 46) tions.
52 This function is not available on all markets.

53 Warning of collision from the rear. }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Related information BLIS*

• Rear Collision Warning* (p. 363) The BLIS54 function is designed to help pro-
• Camera and radar unit limitations (p. 393) vide assistance in heavy traffic with several
lanes moving in the same direction by helping
the driver to detect the presence of vehicles
in the "blind spot" area behind and to the side
of the vehicle.
BLIS overview
Blind spot zone
Rapidly approaching vehicle zone

The system is designed to react to:
• vehicles passing your vehicle
Location of BLIS indicator light • another vehicle is rapidly approaching your
vehicle.
BLIS is a driver support system designed to
alert the driver of: When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a
rapidly approaching vehicle in zone 2, an indi-
• vehicles in your "blind spot" cator light will illuminate in the right or left
• vehicles approaching rapidly in adjacent rearview mirror and glow steadily. If the driver
lanes. then uses the turn signal on the side in which
the warning has been given, the indicator light
will become brighter and begin flashing.
BLIS is active when your vehicle is traveling at
a speed over 12 km/h (7 mph).
54 Blind Spot Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
If a passing vehicle's speed is more than Related information BLIS* limitations

15 km/h (9 mph) faster than your vehicle, BLIS • Driver support systems (p. 308) BLIS55 functionality may be reduced in cer-
will not react.
• BLIS* limitations (p. 365) tain situations.
NOTE
• BLIS* messages (p. 368)
The light illuminates on the side of the

vehicle where the system has detected the
vehicle. If the vehicle is passed on both
sides simultaneously, both lights come on.
WARNING
dle all situations in all traffic, weather Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and
right sides of the vehicle).
55 Blind Spot Information }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and
right sides of the vehicle). right sides of the vehicle). right sides of the vehicle).
Examples of limitations:
• Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may reduce functionality and prevent the
system from providing warnings.
• The BLIS function is automatically deacti-
vated if a trailer, bicycle holder or similar is
connected to the vehicle's electrical sys-
tem.
• For BLIS to function effectively, bicycle
holders, luggage racks or similar should
not be mounted on the vehicle's towbar.
Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and
right sides of the vehicle). right sides of the vehicle).
366
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
• BLIS does not work in sharp curves.
• BLIS does not work when the vehicle
is being reversed.
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's radar sen-
sors, which have certain general limita-
tions.
Related information
• BLIS* (p. 364)
DRIVER SUPPORT
BLIS* messages
A number of messages related to BLIS56 may
be displayed in the instrument panel. Several
Message Meaning
Blind spot sensor Service required The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA.
Blind spot system off Trailer attached BLIS and Cross Traffic Alert* have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to the vehi-
cle's electrical system.

mended.
Related information
• BLIS* (p. 364)
• Warning and auto-braking while backing
up* (p. 372)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Ready to Drive notification WARNING Driver Alert

The Driver Alert function is designed to help
The vehicle's system can help alert the driver • The function is supplementary driver
alert the driver to erratic behavior, e.g. if the
when the vehicle ahead starts driving again. support intended to facilitate driving
driver is distracted or showing signs of fati-
To help prevent the vehicle from remaining and help make it safer – it cannot han-
gue.
stationary too long and causing traffic distur- dle all situations in all traffic, weather
The objective of the function is to detect
bances, the Ready to drive notification func- and road conditions.
slowly deteriorating driving behavior and is
tion can provide an audible signal and display
• The driver is advised to read all sec- primarily intended to be used on major roads.
a symbol and message in the instrument tions in the Owner's Manual about this The function is not intended for use in city traf-
panel. If the system detects pedestrians or function to learn of its limitations, fic.
cyclists near the vehicle, it might not provide a which the driver must be aware of
notification. before using the function. DAC is activated when the vehicle's speed
exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains
• Driver support functions are not a sub- active as long as speeds are above 60 km/h
WARNING stitute for the driver's attention and (37 mph).
However, the system cannot detect pedes- judgment. The driver is always respon-
trians and cyclists in all situations. The sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
driver is always responsible for ensuring in a safe manner, at the appropriate
that the vehicle is operated in a safe man-
ner.
To activate or deactivate the function:
1. Tap in the center display. NOTE

2. Tap Driving and change the setting. This function uses the vehicle's radar
and/or camera units, which have some
general limitations.
Driver Alert detects the vehicle's position in the traf-

Related information fic lane.
A camera monitors the traffic lane's marker
• Camera and radar unit limitations (p. 393) lines and compares the direction of the road
}}
369
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| with the driver's movements of the steering WARNING WARNING

wheel.
An alarm from Driver Alert should be taken • The function is supplementary driver
very seriously since a sleepy driver is often support intended to facilitate driving
not aware of their own condition. and help make it safer – it cannot han-
If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued: dle all situations in all traffic, weather
• Stop the vehicle safely as soon as pos-
sible and rest. • The driver is advised to read all sec-
Studies have shown that it is just as dan- tions in the Owner's Manual about this
gerous to drive while tired as it is to drive function to learn of its limitations,
under the influence of alcohol or other which the driver must be aware of
stimulants. before using the function.
The vehicle is moving erratically in the lane. judgment. The driver is always respon-
If driving behavior becomes
considerably erratic, the
driver will be alerted by this
symbol in the instrument
panel, an audible signal and
the message Time for a
break Driver Alert. Related information
The warning will be repeated after a short time
if driving behavior does not improve. • Driver Alert limitations (p. 371)
WARNING
Driver Alert must not be used to extend a
period of driving. The driver should plan in
breaks at regular intervals and make sure
they are well rested.
370
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver Alert limitations Distance Alert* WARNING

Driver Alert functionality may be reduced in The Distance Alert57 function can help alert Distance Alert only reacts if the time inter-
certain situations. the driver that the time interval to the vehicle val to the vehicle ahead falls below a cer-
In certain situations, the system may provide a in front may be too short. The vehicle must be tain limit – your vehicle's speed will not be
warning even if it has not detected a change in equipped with a head-up display* in order to affected.
driving behavior, e.g.: display Distance Alert.
In vehicles equipped with a head-up display, a
• in strong crosswinds WARNING
symbol is shown on the windshield when the
• on grooved road surfaces. time interval to the vehicle ahead falls below a • The function is supplementary driver
certain limit. support intended to facilitate driving
WARNING and help make it safer – it cannot han-
Distance Alert is active at speeds
In certain cases, driving behavior might not above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts for dle all situations in all traffic, weather
be affected despite the driver's fatigue – vehicles ahead moving in the same direction and road conditions.
when using the Pilot Assist* function – as your vehicle. No distance information is • The driver is advised to read all sec-
resulting in the driver not getting a warning
provided for oncoming, slow-moving or stations in the Owner's Manual about this
from Driver Alert.
tionary vehicles. function to learn of its limitations,
NOTE NOTE before using the function.
The function uses the vehicle's camera and Visual warnings on the windshield may be • Driver support functions are not a sub-
radar sensor, which has certain general difficult to notice in cases of strong sun- stitute for the driver's attention and
limitations. light, reflections, extreme light contrasts, judgment. The driver is always respon-
or if the driver is wearing sunglasses or is sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
not looking straight ahead. in a safe manner, at the appropriate
Related information speed, with an appropriate distance to
• Driver Alert (p. 369) other vehicles, and in accordance with
• Camera and radar unit limitations (p. 393) NOTE current traffic rules and regulations.
Distance Alert is deactivated while Pilot
Assist* is active.
57 Distance Alert }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Related information Distance Alert limitations Warning and auto-braking while

• Distance Alert limitations (p. 372) Distance Alert58
functionality may be reduced backing up*
• Collision risk warning from speed-control- in certain situations. The function is only There are systems in the vehicle that can help
ling functions (p. 337) available in vehicles that can display informa- the driver detect obstacles when backing up
tion on the windshield with a head-up dis- and even automatically brake the vehicle if
the driver does not react in time.
play*.
The Rear Auto Brake (RAB) and Cross Traffic
WARNING
Alert (CTA)* functions are only active when the
• Detection ability may be affected by vehicle is moving backward or if reverse gear
vehicle size, which may cause the is engaged.
warning light to be illuminated at a
shorter time interval or no warning to If an obstacle is detected:
be given at all. 1. A warning signal and the Park Assist
• Very high speeds can cause the warn- graphic illuminate to indicate the location
ing to come on at a shorter time inter- of the obstacle.
val due to limitations in the range of 2. If the driver does not react to the warning
the radar unit. and a collision is unavoidable, the vehicle
may automatically brake, and a message
will appear explaining why the brakes
NOTE were applied.
This function uses the vehicle's radar If the accelerator pedal is depressed forcibly,
and/or camera units, which have some the vehicle will back up even after auto-brak-
general limitations. ing.
Related information
• Distance Alert* (p. 371)
58 Distance Alert
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING This function is primarily designed to detect Examples of detection and limitations
stationary objects that are taller than the rear
• The functions are supplementary driver bumper and not, for example, moving vehicles.
and help make it safer – they cannot Braking intervention with Rear Auto Brake is
handle all situations in all traffic, active at speeds under 10 km/h (6 mph).
weather and road conditions. The auto brake needs to be deactivated before
• The driver is advised to read all sec- entering automatic car washes and may also
tions in the Owner's Manual about need to be deactivated to avoid undesirable
these functions to learn of their limita- interventions, e.g. when backing up in tall
tions, which the driver must be aware grass.
of before using the functions.
Obstacles from the side
• Driver support functions are not a sub- Cross Traffic Alert is intended to help the
stitute for the driver's attention and Examples of areas in which the function can help the
driver detect vehicles crossing behind the driver detect obstacles while backing up.
judgment. The driver is always respon- vehicle while backing up.
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven The function's sensors cannot detect move-
in a safe manner, at the appropriate This function is primarily designed to detect ments in traffic through other parked vehicles
speed, with an appropriate distance to larger moving vehicles, but in certain cases or objects blocking the vehicle. Here are some
other vehicles, and in accordance with can also detect pedestrians or smaller objects examples of when approaching vehicles can
current traffic rules and regulations. such as bicycles. therefore not be detected until they are very
Braking intervention with Cross Traffic Alert is close.
active at speeds under 15 km/h (9 mph).
NOTE
The auto brake needs to be deactivated before
The functions use the vehicle's sensors and
entering automatic car washes and may also
radar units, which have certain general lim-
need to be deactivated to avoid undesirable
itations.
interventions, e.g. when backing up in tall
grass.
Obstacles directly behind the vehicle
Rear Auto Brake is designed to help the driver
detect stationary obstacles directly behind the
vehicle when backing up.
}}
373
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| changes in relation to the obstructing vehicle/ Activating and deactivating

object and its blind zone is reduced. warning and auto-braking when
backing up*
Backing up with equipment connected
The driver can choose to disable auto-braking
to the towbar
with Rear Auto Brake (RAB) and Cross Traffic
RAB and CTA are automatically deactivated
Alert (CTA)*. The warning signal can be deac-
when a trailer, bicycle holder or similar is con-
tivated separately.
nected to the trailer contact. If the connected
equipment does not have an electrical connec- Warning signal
tion, RAB and CTA must be deactivated man- Activate or deactivate warn-
ually via the button in the center display. ing signals using this button
in Park Assist Camera view.
Related information
The vehicle is parked very far into a parking space.
• Activating and deactivating warning and
auto-braking when backing up* (p. 374)
• BLIS* (p. 364) Auto-brake
Activate or deactivate auto-
• Park Assist* (p. 375)
matic braking using this but-
• Park Assist limitations* (p. 379) ton in Park Assist Camera
• Automatic car washes (p. 800) view.
• Illuminated button – the function is acti-

vated.
In a diagonal parking space, the sensors may be
completely blocked on one side of your vehicle.
• Extinguished button – the function is
deactivated.
Blind zone
The functions are automatically activated each
The function's detection sectors time the vehicle is started.
However, as you back your vehicle slowly out

of a parking space, CTA's field of vision
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information Park Assist* The audible signals will also speed up the
• Warning and auto-braking while backing The Park Assist function uses sensors to help closer the obstacle is to the vehicle. The vol-
up* (p. 372) the driver when maneuvering in tight spaces ume of the audio system will be automatically
by indicating distances to obstacles using lowered.
• Park Assist Camera* (p. 380)
audible signals and graphics in the center dis- Audible signals for obstacles in front and to
play. the sides of the vehicle are active when the
vehicle is moving but will cease after the vehi-
cle has been stationary for approx. 2 seconds.
Audible signals for obstacles behind the vehi-
cle will remain active even when the vehicle is
stationary.
If a detected obstacle is within approx. 30 cm
(1 foot) from the front or rear of the vehicle, the
tone will become constant and the active sen-
sor field closest to the vehicle symbol will be
filled in.
At distances within approx. 25 cm (0.8 foot)
from an obstacle to the sides of the vehicle, a
Example of display view showing obstacle zones and
sensor sectors. rapid pulsing signal will be given and the
active sector fields will change color from
The center display shows an overview of the orange to red.
vehicle in relation to objects that have been
detected. The volume of the Park Assist audible signals
can be adjusted while the signal is being given
The marked sector indicates where the obsta- using the >II knob or in Park Assist settings.
cle is located. The closer the vehicle symbol is
to a marked sector forward/rearward, the
closer the detected obstacle is to your vehicle.
The side sectors change color as the distance
between the vehicle and an object decreases.
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE WARNING Park Assist front, rear and sides*

Park Assist behaves differently depending on
Besides in the sector closest to the vehicle • The function is supplementary driver
which part of the vehicle is approaching an
symbol, audible warnings are only provided support intended to facilitate driving
obstacle.
for objects located directly in the vehicle's and help make it safer – it cannot han-
path. dle all situations in all traffic, weather Front camera
WARNING • The driver is advised to read all sec-

• The Park Assist sensors are a comple- function to learn of its limitations,
ment to the driver's attention to the which the driver must be aware of
surroundings around the vehicle. Their before using the function.
ability to detect obstacles at certain
angles may be affected by the condi-
tions during use.
• Pay particular attention to people and sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
animals near the vehicle. in a safe manner, at the appropriate
• Bear in mind that the front end of the speed, with an appropriate distance to
vehicle may swing out towards oncom- other vehicles, and in accordance with
ing traffic during the parking maneuver. current traffic rules and regulations.
• Objects/obstacles may be closer to the
vehicle than they appear on the screen. Related information
• Park Assist front, rear and sides* (p. 376)
• Activating and deactivating the Park
Assist system* (p. 378)
• Park Assist limitations* (p. 379)
The warning signal has a continuous audible tone

when the obstacle is less than approx. 30 cm (1 foot)
from the vehicle.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The Park Assist system's front sensors are Back

automatically activated when the engine is
started. They are active at speeds
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The distance monitored extends
approx. 80 cm (2.5 feet) in front of the vehicle.
NOTE
The Park Assist system is deactivated
when the parking brake is used or when P
is selected on vehicles with automatic
transmission. The warning signal has a continuous tone when the
The warning signal has a continuous tone when the obstacle is less than approx. 30 cm (1 foot) from the
obstacle is less than approx. 30 cm (1 foot) from the vehicle.
CAUTION vehicle. The rear sensors will be activated if the vehicle
When installing auxiliary lights: Make sure begins rolling backward or if reverse gear is
these do not obscure the sensors – the engaged.
auxiliary lights could be perceived as an The distance monitored extends
obstacle. approx. 1.5 meter (5 feet) behind the vehicle.
The Park Assist system's rear sensors will be
automatically deactivated if the vehicle is
backing up with a trailer connected to the
vehicle's electrical system.
The warning signal has a continuous tone when the

obstacle is less than approx. 30 cm (1 foot) from the
vehicle.
}}
377
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE angle of the front wheel increases and Activating and deactivating the
depending on the position of the steering Park Assist system*
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike wheel, obstacles up to approx. 90 cm (3 feet) The Park Assist function can be activated or
carrier on the trailer hitch – without Volvo diagonally behind or in front of the vehicle can deactivated.
original trailer cables – the Parking Assist be detected.
system may have to be turned off manually Park Assist's front and side sensors are auto-
to prevent the sensors from reacting to Related information matically activated when the engine is started.
these. • Park Assist* (p. 375) The rear sensors are activated if the vehicle is
moving backward or reverse gear is engaged.
• Park Assist sensor field* (p. 385)
Side sensors Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
Park Assist Camera view.

vated.
• Extinguished button – the function is
deactivated.
In vehicles equipped with Park Assist Cam-
era*, Park Assist can also be activated or deac-
The warning signal pulsates rapidly when the obsta- tivated from the relevant camera view.
cle is less than approx. 25 cm (0.8 foot) from the
vehicle. Related information
Park Assist's side sensors are automatically • Park Assist* (p. 375)
activated when the engine is started. They are • Park Assist limitations* (p. 379)
active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The distance monitored is approx. 25 cm
(0.8 foot) out from the sides.
The detection area of the side sensors increa-
ses significantly, however, when the steering
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist limitations* WARNING CAUTION

Park Assist may not be able to detect all con-
Be extra cautious when In some circumstances, the Park Assist
ditions in all situations and functionality may reversing if this symbol is System may produce false warnings due to
therefore be limited in certain cases. shown when a trailer, bike external sound sources with the same
The driver should be aware of the following carrier or similar is ultrasonic frequencies as those the system
attached and electrically
limitations for Park Assist: works with.
connected to the vehicle.
An unlit symbol indicates Examples of such sources are horns, wet
WARNING that the rear parking assist sensors are tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust
• The Park Assist Cameras' ability to deactivated and will not warn of any noise from motorcycles, etc.
clearly reproduce the surroundings in obstacles.
all zones around the vehicle may be
affected by the conditions during use. NOTE
CAUTION
• Pay particular attention to people and When a trailer hitch is configured with the
Objects such as chains, thin and glossy vehicle electrical system, the trailer hitch
animals near the vehicle.
poles or low obstacles may end up in the protrusion is included when the function
• Bear in mind that the front end of the "signal shadow" and then go temporarily measures the distance to objects behind
vehicle may swing out towards oncom- undetected by the sensors – the pulsating the vehicle.
ing traffic during the parking maneuver. tone may then unexpectedly stop instead
• Objects/obstacles may be closer to the of becoming a constant tone as expected.
Related information
vehicle than they appear on the screen. The sensors cannot detect high objects, • Park Assist* (p. 375)
such as protruding ramps.
• Warning and auto-braking while backing
• In such situations, pay extra attention up* (p. 372)
and maneuver/drive the vehicle very
slowly or stop the current parking
maneuver – there may be a high risk of
damage to the vehicle or other objects
since information from the sensors is
not always reliable in such situations.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist Camera* Activates/deactivates Park Assist system WARNING

The Park Assist Camera can assist the driver sensors
when maneuvering in tight spaces by indicat- Activates and deactivates auto-braking
ing obstacles using the camera screen and when backing up*
graphics in the center display. The Park Assist Camera is a support function dle all situations in all traffic, weather
that is automatically activated when reverse and road conditions.
gear is engaged. It can also be started man-
ually in the center display. • The driver is advised to read all sec-
WARNING which the driver must be aware of
• The Park Assist Cameras' ability to before using the function.
clearly reproduce the surroundings in • Driver support functions are not a sub-
all zones around the vehicle may be stitute for the driver's attention and
affected by the conditions during use. judgment. The driver is always respon-
• Pay particular attention to people and sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
animals near the vehicle. in a safe manner, at the appropriate
• Bear in mind that the front end of the
vehicle may swing out towards oncom- other vehicles, and in accordance with
ing traffic during the parking maneuver. current traffic rules and regulations.
• Objects/obstacles may be closer to the

vehicle than they appear on the screen. Related information
• Location and field of vision of Park Assist
Cameras* (p. 381)
Example camera view. • Park Assist Camera trajectory lines*
(p. 383)
Settings
• Park Assist sensor field* (p. 385)
Activates all cameras to provide a 360°
• Activating Park Assist Camera* (p. 386)
view
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Park Assist* and Park Assist Camera* Location and field of vision of Park camera symbols disappear after a moment if
symbols and messages (p. 388) Assist Cameras* the screen is not touched.
• Camera and radar unit limitations The Park Assist Cameras can individually The cameras can be activated automatically or
(p. 393) show rear, front, left or right camera views. manually.
• Park Assist* (p. 375) You can also get a combined 360° view
showing the views from all sides of the vehi- Back
• Warning and auto-braking while backing cle.
up* (p. 372)
360° view*
The rear camera is located above the license plate.
Example of how all camera symbols are displayed in

360° view.
The 360° view function activates all Park
Assist Cameras and all four sides of the vehi-
cle are shown in the center display at once to
help the driver see what is around the vehicle
while maneuvering at low speeds. From the
360° view, each camera view can be acti-
vated separately. Tap the screen to display the
camera symbols and select a view. These
The rear camera is located above the license plate.
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Front camera
The rear camera is located above the license plate. The front Park Assist Camera is located in the grille.
The front Park Assist Camera is located in the grille.
The rear camera is located above the license plate. The front Park Assist Camera is located in the grille.
The rear camera shows a wide area behind the The front Park Assist Camera is located in the grille. The front camera can be useful when pulling
vehicle. On certain models, part of the bumper out from areas with limited visibility, such as
and the towbar (if installed) may be visible. when pulling out of a garage. The front camera
is active at speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph)
Objects in the center display may appear to be
and is automatically turned off when the vehi-
leaning slightly. This is normal.
cle exceeds this speed.
382
DRIVER SUPPORT
If the vehicle does not reach a speed of Park Assist Camera trajectory
50 km/h (30 mph) and speed falls below lines*
22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute after the The Park Assist Camera uses trajectory lines
front camera turns off, the camera will be and fields on the screen to indicate the vehi-
reactivated. cle's position in relation to its immediate sur-
roundings.
Side cameras
The side cameras are located in the rearview mirrors.

The side cameras can show views along each
side of the vehicle.
Related information
The side cameras are located in the rearview mirrors. • Activating Park Assist Camera* (p. 386)
Example of trajectory lines

The trajectory lines show the anticipated tra-
jectory for the vehicle's outermost dimensions
based on the current position of the steering
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| wheel and can help simplify parallel parking, CAUTION Trajectory lines in 360° view*
backing into tight spaces or attaching a trailer.
• Bear in mind that when the rearward
The lines on the screen are projected as if they camera view is selected, the screen
were painted lines on the ground behind the only shows the area behind the vehicle
vehicle and are directly affected by the way in – pay attention to the sides and front
which the steering wheel is turned. This of the vehicle when steering while
makes it possible for the driver to see path the reversing.
vehicle will take, even if he/she turns the
steering wheel. • The same applies to the reverse – pay
attention to what is happening with
These lines also indicate the outermost limits the rear parts of the vehicle when the
that any object (towbar, rearview mirrors, cor- front camera view is selected.
ners of the body, etc.) extends out from the
vehicle.
• Note that the guide lines show the
shortest path – pay extra attention to
ensure that the vehicle sides do not
NOTE come in contact with/travel over any-
• When backing up with a trailer that is thing when steering while driving for-
not electrically connected to the vehi- ward or that the vehicle front moves
cle, the trajectory lines on the screen toward/over anything when steering
show the path the vehicle will take – while reversing.
not the trailer.
• The screen does not show guide lines
when a trailer is electrically connected
to the vehicle's electrical system.
360° view with trajectory lines
In the 360° view, trajectory lines are shown
behind, in front of, or to the sides of the vehi-
cle, depending on the direction of travel.
• When driving forward: Front lines
• When backing up: Side lines and rear lines
DRIVER SUPPORT
When the front or rear camera is selected, the Park Assist sensor field* WARNING
trajectory lines will be shown regardless of the If the vehicle is equipped with Park Assist,
vehicle's direction of travel. The sensor fields on the
distances will be shown in the Park Assist 360° symbol only show in
With a side camera selected, the trajectory Camera's 360° view with colored fields for which direction an obsta-
lines will only be shown if the vehicle is back- each sensor that has detected an obstacle. cle is located. It does not
ing up. show the distance to the
Front and rear sensors obstacle.
Trajectory lines for a towbar The front and rear fields change colors (from
A trajectory line for the towbar's intended yellow to orange to red) as the vehicle moves
direction of travel can be shown to assist closer to an obstacle. Side sensor fields
when hitching a trailer. The function is acti-
Field color Distance in meters Warning signals vary depending on the vehi-
vated under the Park Assist Camera settings.
rearward (feet) cle's intended direction of travel. Depending
Trajectory lines cannot be displayed for the on the steering wheel position, warnings may
towbar and the entire vehicle at the same Yellow 0.6-1.5 (2.0-4.9) be given for obstacles diagonally in front of or
time. behind the vehicle, not only directly behind the
Orange 0.3–0.6 (1.0–2.0) vehicle.
Related information Red 0-0.3 (0-1.0)
• Location and field of vision of Park Assist
Cameras* (p. 381) Field color for- Distance in meters
ward (feet)
Yellow 0.6–0.8 (2.0–2.6)
Orange 0.3–0.6 (1.0–2.0)
Red 0-0.3 (0-1.0)
When the sensor field color is red, the audible

pulsing sounds will change to a continuous
tone.
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| The color of the side field changes as the vehi- Activating Park Assist Camera*
cle moves closer to the object – from yellow The Park Assist Camera is automatically acti-
to red. vated when reverse gear is engaged or can
Side field Distance in meters be started manually using one of the center
color (feet) display's function buttons.
Yellow 0.25–0.9 (0.8–3.0) Camera view when backing up

Red 0–0.25 (0–0.8) When reverse gear is engaged, the screen
shows the rear view59.
When the sensor field is red, the audible puls- Camera view when manually
ing signal will become more rapid. activating the camera
Parking sensor sectors where obstacles can be Activate the Park Assist Cam-
detected. Related information
era using this button in the
Left-side front sensor field • Park Assist* (p. 375)
center display. The screen
• Park Assist Camera* (p. 380) will first show the most
Obstacle sector in the vehicle's intended
direction of travel forward – varies accord- • Location and field of vision of Park Assist recently used camera view.
Cameras* (p. 381) But every time the engine is
ing to steering wheel position
• Camera and radar unit limitations (p. 393) started, the previously shown
Sector with red field color and rapidly side view will be replaced by the 360° view.
pulsing tone
Right-side rear sensor field vated.
Obstacle sector in the vehicle's intended • Extinguished button – the function is
direction of travel rearward – varies deactivated.
according to steering wheel position.
Automatically deactivating the camera
Front view switches off when the vehicle's
speed reaches 25 km/h (16 mph) to help avoid
distracting the driver. It will be automatically
reactivated if the vehicle's speed falls below
59 In Canada, it is also possible to choose the 360° view. For the US, rear view is standard and cannot be changed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute as long as

the vehicle's speed has not exceeded 50 km/h
(31 mph).
Other camera views switch off at 15 km/h
(9 mph) and are not reactivated.
Related information
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist* and Park Assist displayed in the instrument panel and/or the
Camera* symbols and messages center display. Several examples are provided
Symbols and messages for the Park Assist below.
system and the Park Assist Camera can be

If the symbol is extinguished. The rear Park Assist sensors are turned off and no acoustic warnings or field mark-
ings for obstacles/objects will be provided.
Cleaning needed Park Assist System One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as
sensors blocked soon as possible.
Park Assist System unavailable Serv- The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA.
ice required
A text message can be erased by briefly press- WARNING

Be extra cautious when
reversing if this symbol is
If the message persists, contact a workshop. shown when a trailer, bike
An authorized Volvo workshop is recom- carrier or similar is
mended. attached and electrically
connected to the vehicle.
An unlit symbol indicates
that the rear parking assist sensors are
deactivated and will not warn of any
obstacles.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Defective Park Assist Camera • a door is open

• the tailgate is open
• a rearview mirror is folded in
Related information
• Park Assist* (p. 375)
Example indicating that the vehicle's left camera is

malfunctioning.
If a camera sector is dark, this indicates that
the camera is not functioning properly.
A dark camera sector may also be displayed in
the following situations, but without the
defective camera symbol:
DRIVER SUPPORT
Radar units
The radar units are used by several driver
support systems and detect different areas
around the vehicle.
Location of the front radar sensor Location of rear radar sensors
Location of the front radar sensor
Location of rear radar sensors Location of rear radar sensors
390
DRIVER SUPPORT

Modifying the radar units can make them ille-
gal to use.
Avoid mounting extra lights or similar in front
of the grille, as this could affect the radar
unit's function.
Related information
• Recommended maintenance for the cam-
era, sensor and radar units (p. 396)
Location of rear radar sensors • Radar sensor type approval (p. 392)
391
DRIVER SUPPORT
Radar sensor type approval

The type approval for the vehicle's radar units
for Pilot Assist* and BLIS*60.
Market PA BLIS Type approval
Canada ✓ IC: 8436B-77V12FLR
✓ IC:2694A-RS4
USA ✓ FCC ID: WU877V12FLR
✓ FCC ID: NBG01RS4
Canada licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux Changes or modifications not expressly
This device contains license-exempt conditions suivantes : approved by the party responsible for
transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with compliance could void the user`s authority to
1) L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage;
Innovation, Science and Economic operate the equipment.
Development Canada's license exempt 2) L'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est For detailed information about type approval,
two conditions: susceptible d'en compromettre le go to volvocars.com/intl/support.
fonctionnement.
(1) This device may not cause interference. Related information
USA • Radar units (p. 390)
(2) This device must accept any interference, This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
including interference that may cause Rules. Operation is subject to the following
undesired operation of the device. two conditions: (1) this device may not cause • BLIS* (p. 364)
L'emetteur/recepteur exempt de licence harmful interference, and (2) this device must
contenu dans le present appareil est conforme accept any interference received, including
aux CNR d'Innovation, Sciences et interference that may cause undesired
Developpement economique Canada operation.
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de CAUTION TO USERS
DRIVER SUPPORT
Camera The camera is used by the following functions: Camera and radar unit limitations
The camera is used by several driver support • Pilot Assist* The camera and radar used by several of the
systems to e.g. detect lane marker lines or driver support functions have certain limita-
road signs.
• Lane Keeping Aid*
tions, which also affect the functions using
• Assistance at risk of collision the camera and radar units. The driver should
• Driver Alert* be aware of the following limitations:
• Road Sign Information* Common camera and radar limitations
• Active high beams* Cameras and radar are aids for intelligent driv-
• Park Assist* ing that cannot be called upon to achieve
intelligent driving, and necessary safety man-
• Ready to Drive notification agement must be implemented to avoid traffic
safety risks or accidents caused by the driver's
CAUTION incorrect use of cameras and radar.
Do not attempt to access the camera with Obstructed camera
sharp or foreign objects through the venti- Do not place, affix or mount anything in front
Location of the camera lation openings as this could damage the of or around the camera and radar units – this
equipment. could disrupt camera- and radar-based func-
tions. It could cause functions to be reduced,
Related information deactivated completely or to produce an incor-
• Driver support systems (p. 308) rect function response.
• Recommended maintenance for the cam-
era, sensor and radar units (p. 396)
Location of the camera
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Damaged windshield NOTE

When a camera is mounted in the windshield,
the following also applies: Failure to take action could result in
reduced performance for the driver support
• If there are cracks, scratches or stone systems that use the camera and/or radar
chips in front of the unit covering an area units. It could cause functions to be
of about 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) reduced, deactivated completely or to pro-
or more, contact a workshop61 to have the duce an incorrect function response.
windshield replaced.
• Volvo advises against repairing cracks, Additional radar limitations
scratches or stone chips in the area in
front of the unit – the entire windshield Vehicle speed
should instead be replaced. The radar sensor's ability to detect a vehicle
ahead is significantly reduced if the speed of
• Before replacing the windshield, contact a the vehicle ahead differs greatly from your
workshop61 to verify that the right wind- vehicle's speed.
shield has been ordered and installed.
Limited field of vision
• The same type of windshield wipers or The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In
wipers approved by Volvo should be used some situations, it may detect a vehicle later
for replacement. than expected or not at all.
• If the windshield is replaced, the camera
must be recalibrated by a workshop61 to The radar sensor's field of vision
help ensure proper functioning of all of the The radar sensor's detection of vehicles
vehicle's camera-based systems. very close to your vehicle may be delayed
in certain situations, e.g. if a vehicle pulls
in between your vehicle and the vehicle
directly ahead.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles that are not driving in the center
of the lane may remain undetected.
394
DRIVER SUPPORT
In curves, the radar may detect the a dif- Additional Park Assist Camera* Lighting conditions
ferent vehicle than intended or lose sight limitations The camera image is automatically adjusted
of a target vehicle. according to the current lighting conditions.
Blind sectors
Reduced functionality This means that the brightness and quality of
In heavy rain or if there is wet snow or ice on the image may vary slightly. Poor lighting con-
the emblem, the radar's functions may be ditions may result in reduced image quality.
reduced, completely disabled or provide inac-
Related information
curate responses.
• Camera (p. 393)
Additional camera limitations • Radar units (p. 390)
Reduced visibility • Recommended maintenance for the cam-
Cameras have the same limitations as the era, sensor and radar units (p. 396)
human eye. In other words, their “vision" is • Park Assist Camera* (p. 380)
impaired by adverse weather conditions such
as heavy snowfall/rain, dense fog, swirling
dust/snow, etc. These conditions may reduce There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields
the function of systems that depend on the of vision.
camera or cause these systems to temporarily With the Park Assist Camera's 360° view*
stop functioning. selected, objects/obstacles may not be
Strong sunlight, reflections from the road sur- detected if they are located in the "joints"
face, ice or snow covering the road, a dirty where the edges of the individual camera
road surface, or unclear lane marker lines may views meet.
drastically reduce the camera’s ability to
detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian, a WARNING
cyclist, a large animal or another vehicle.
Even if it seems as though only a fairly
Bicycle holders or other accessories mounted small section of the screen image is
behind the vehicle may obstruct the camera's obstructed, this may mean that a relatively
view. large sector is hidden and obstacles there
may not be detected until they are very
near the vehicle.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Recommended maintenance for

the camera, sensor and radar units
In order for the cameras, parking sensors and
radar units to function properly, they must be
kept free of dirt, ice, snow, etc. and should be
washed regularly with water and car washing
detergent.
• Do not attach any items, tape or decals in
the areas described below.
• Clean the camera lenses regularly using
lukewarm water and car washing deter-
gent. Wash gently to avoid scratching the
lens.
• Avoid mounting extra lights or similar in
the grille, as this could affect the front
radar unit's performance.
Location of the radar units
396
DRIVER SUPPORT
Location of the Park Assist sensors

Location of the parking sensors around the vehicle

Location of the parking sensors around the vehicle
}}
397
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
could cause false warnings, reduced func-
tion, or no function.
CAUTION
nance on driver support components – an
authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Location of the front camera
Related information
• Camera (p. 393)
• Radar units (p. 390)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Camera and radar unit symbols Sensor blocked The following table shows some of the situa-
and messages If this symbol and a message tions that can cause the message to be dis-
Here are examples of some of the messages are displayed in the instru- played, and suggested actions:
and symbols related to the camera and radar ment panel, it means that the
units that may be displayed in the instrument camera and radar units are
panel. unable to detect other vehi-
cles, cyclists, pedestrians and
large animals in front of the
vehicle and that the vehicle's camera and
radar-based functions may be obstructed.
Cause Action
The area in front of the radar unit is dirty or covered by ice or snow. Clean the area in front of the radar unit to remove dirt, ice and snow.
The area of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered Clean the windshield in front of the camera and remove dirt, ice and snow.
by ice or snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain or snow is blocking the radar signals or the No action. Heavy precipitation may sometimes prevent the camera/radar
camera's range of visibility. sensor from functioning.
Water or snow is spraying/swirling up and blocking the radar signals No action. Very wet or snow-covered roads may sometimes prevent the
or the camera's range of visibility. camera/radar sensor from functioning.
Bright sunlight. No action. The camera/radar sensor will reset automatically when lighting
conditions improve.
Related information
• Camera (p. 393)
• Radar units (p. 390)
399
DRIVER SUPPORT
Antenna type approval 102 of the ISED radio frequency (RF) guarantee that interference will not occur in a
Type approval for the vehicle's antenna is Exposure rules. This transmitter must not be particular installation. If this equipment does
provided below. co-located or operating in conjunction with cause harmful interference to radio or
any other antenna or transmitter. The antenna television reception, which can be determined
Continental
should be installed and operated with by turning the equipment off and on, the user
Model: TCAM1NA0 minimum distance of 2.4 cm between the is encouraged to try to correct the interference
radiator and your body. by one or more of the following measures:
FCC ID:KR5TCAM1NA0
Le présent appareil est conforme à l'exposition • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
IC:7812D–TCAM1NA0 aux radiations FCC / ISED définies pour un • Increase the separation between the
environnement non contrôlé et répond aux equipment and receiver.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC directives d'exposition de la fréquence de la
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt FCC radiofréquence (RF) et RSS-102 de la • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fréquence radio (RF) ISED règles d'exposition. circuit different from that to which the
following two conditions: (1) this device may L'émetteur ne doit pas être colocalisé ni receiver is connected.
not cause interference, and (2) this device fonctionner conjointement avec à autre • Consult the dealer or an experienced
must accept any interference, including antenne ou autre émetteur.L'antenne doit être radio/TV technician for help.
interference that may cause undesired installée de façon à garder une distance Continental Automotive GmbH has not
operation of the device. minimale de 2.4 centimètres entre la source approved any changes or modifications to this
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR de rayonnements et votre corps. device by the user. Any changes or
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils modifications could void the user’s authority
FCC Class B digital device notice to operate the equipment.
radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital Continental Automotive GmbH n’approuve
l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et aucune modification apportée à l’appareil par
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide l’utilisateur, quelle qu’en soit la nature. Tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le changement ou modification peuvent annuler
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This le droit d’utilisation de l’appareil par
le fonctionnement. l’utilisateur.
equipment generates, uses and can radiate
This device complies with FCC/ISED radiation radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled used in accordance with the instructions, may
environment and meets the FCC radio cause harmful interference to radio
frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS- communications. However, there is no
400
DRIVER SUPPORT
CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)

This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est
conforme à la norme canadienne ICES-003.
401
ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING
General information about shorter charging times. The highest charging WARNING
charging output is normally achieved when the charge
level of the battery is 0-30%, after which the California Proposition 65
An electric car is driven in the same way as a
car with a gasoline engine, but certain func- charging output gradually decreases. Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
tions differ. The vehicle is equipped with a senger vehicle can expose you to chemi-
Effect of temperature cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-
rechargeable high-voltage battery1. The hybrid battery with associated electrical oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
drive system as well as gasoline engine and its known to the State of California to cause
Different types of charging cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
The hybrid battery's charging time depends on drive system, work better when they are at the
the amperage used. The 12V battery is also correct operating temperature.
charged when the vehicle is charged. The high-voltage battery may have reduced except as necessary, service your vehicle in
performance if the temperature in the battery a well ventilated area and wear gloves or
Charging via wall outlet (AC charging) wash your hands frequently when servicing
is too low or too high.
The vehicle can be charged via a regular wall your vehicle. For more information go to
outlet. This type of charging is suitable as www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
extra charging for electric vehicles but is not CAUTION vehicle.
recommended for regular charging. Leaving the vehicle for prolonged periods
Charging via charging station (AC at temperatures under –10 °C (14 °F) or WARNING
charging) over 40 °C (104 °F) may reduce the per-
formance of the high-voltage battery. If the high-voltage battery needs to be
The charging station may be equipped with replaced, this may only be done by Volvo
either a permanent charging cable or with a Charging the vehicle can help prevent the
retailer or authorized Volvo workshop.
socket where a mode 3 charging cable can be battery from becoming too hot or too cold.
plugged in. This type of charging is recom-
mended for regular charging. Important
Rapid charging via charging station (DC
charging) NOTE
The vehicle supports rapid charging with The capacity of the high-voltage battery
direct current (DC) at charging stations sup- decreases somewhat with age and use.
porting the CCS (Combined Charging System)
standard. Charging with direct current usually
enables higher charging output and thereby
1 Lithium-ion.
404
Exterior engine noise WARNING • Towing using a towline (p. 518)
A number of electrical components in the • Charging status in the instrument panel

NOTE vehicle use high-voltage current and can be (p. 418)
When the electric motor is in use, an artifi- extremely dangerous if handled incorrectly. • Charging in the vehicle's center display
cial exterior sound will play in the back- These components and any orange wiring (p. 421)
in the vehicle may only be handled by
ground. This sound is intended to help trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
warn children, pedestrians, cyclists, ani- cians.
mals, etc. outside the vehicle of the vehi-
cle's approach.
Do not touch anything that is not clearly
described in this Owner's Manual.
High-voltage electrical current
Related information
• Electric vehicle charging (p. 408)
• Hybrid vehicle charging (p. 410)
• Electric vehicle charging via wall outlet
(p. 426)
• Hybrid vehicle charging via wall outlet
(p. 429)
WARNING
The electrical system in your vehicle uses
high-voltage electrical current. Any damage • Regenerative braking (p. 462)
to this system or to the high-voltage bat- • Regenerative braking* (p. 462)
tery may result in the danger of overheat-
ing, fire, or serious injury. If the vehicle is • Battery gauge (p. 104)
involved in a collision or subjected to flood- • Starting and stopping preconditioning
ing, fire, etc., have it inspected by a trained (p. 254)
and qualified Volvo service technician. Prior
to this inspection, the vehicle should be • High-voltage battery (p. 711)
parked outdoors at a safe distance from • Economical driving (p. 485)
any building or potentially flammable mate-
rials. • Gear selector positions (p. 463)
• Towing using a towline (p. 517)
General information about electric While driving Important

vehicles The instrument panel shows charging informa-
The vehicle is equipped with a rechargeable tion, selected drive mode, distance to empty NOTE
hybrid battery2. The electric motor powers battery and the hybrid battery's charge level
(in % only when plugged in for charging). The capacity of the hybrid battery dimin-
the vehicle primarily at low speeds; the gaso- ishes somewhat with age and use, which
line engine is used at higher speeds or during Different drive modes can be selected while could result in increased use of the gaso-
more active driving. driving, e.g. electric power only or, if more line engine and consequently, slightly
power is needed, a combination of electric and higher fuel consumption.
Charging the hybrid battery gasoline power. The vehicle calculates a com-
bination of driveability, driving experience,
environmental impact and fuel economy for WARNING
the selected drive mode. California Proposition 65
Effect of temperature Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
The hybrid battery with associated electrical senger vehicle can expose you to chemi-
drive system as well as gasoline engine and its cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-
oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
drive system, work better when they are at the known to the State of California to cause
correct operating temperature. cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
If the hybrid battery's temperature is below tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
-10 ºC (14 ºF) or above 40 ºC (104 ºF), some breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
of the vehicle's functions may be reduced or a well ventilated area and wear gloves or
The hybrid battery is recharged using the not available at all because the hybrid battery's wash your hands frequently when servicing
charging cable. It can also be recharged dur- capacity is reduced outside this temperature your vehicle. For more information go to
ing light braking and through engine braking in range. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
gear position B. The combustion engine can vehicle.
The electric motor cannot be used if the bat-
also help recharge the hybrid battery. The tery's temperature is too low or too high.
vehicle's start battery is charged when the
hybrid battery is charged.
The hybrid battery's charging time depends on
the amperage used.
2 Lithium-ion.
406
WARNING WARNING • Hybrid vehicle charging via wall outlet

(p. 429)
If the hybrid battery needs to be replaced, The hybrid electrical system in your vehicle
this may only be done by a Volvo retailer or uses high voltage electrical current. Any • Battery gauge (p. 104)
authorized Volvo workshop. damage to this system or to the hybrid bat- • Drive modes* (p. 474)
tery may result in the danger of overheat-
ing, fire, or serious injury. If the vehicle is • Drive modes (p. 475)
Exterior engine noise involved in a collision or subjected to flood- • Starting and stopping preconditioning
ing, fire, etc., have it inspected by a trained (p. 254)
NOTE and qualified Volvo service technician. Prior
to this inspection, the vehicle should be • Hybrid battery (p. 710)
Because there is no sound from the engine parked outdoors at a safe distance from • Economical driving (p. 485)
when only the electric motor is running, any building or potentially flammable mate-
the vehicle is equipped with artificial exte- rials. • Gear selector positions (p. 463)
rior background noise at low speeds and • Towing using a towline (p. 517)
when reversing. This warning sound is • Towing using a towline (p. 518)
intended to help warn children, pedes- WARNING
trians, cyclists, animals, etc. outside the A number of electrical components in the
vehicle of the vehicle's approach. vehicle use high-voltage current and can be
extremely dangerous if handled incorrectly.
These components and any orange wiring
High-voltage electrical current in the vehicle may only be handled by
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cians.

described in this Owner's Manual.
Related information
(p. 426)
Electric vehicle charging Charging via charging station (mode 4.

You can charge the vehicle at a home charg- 3)3
ing station or a public charging station. 1. Pull out the cable from the charging sta-
tion's storage socket or take out the
Location of charging socket charging cable. Note that the ignition
must be switched off completely before
charging.
2. Plug the charging cable into the charging
station. If the charging station has a per-
manent charging cable, proceed to step 3.
Remove the charging handle's protective
CAUTION cover and push the charging handle all the
Do not plug in the charging cable if there is way into the charging socket.
a risk of thunder or lightning.
CAUTION
3. To prevent paintwork damage, e.g. in
strong winds, position the protective cover
of the charging handle so that it does not
touch the vehicle.
5. The charging cable handle will lock into

place and charging will begin within
5 seconds.
> When charging starts, the green LED
light in the charging socket will begin
to flash.
Press the rear edge of the charger door to
open the charging socket4.
3 Applies to charging using a mode 3 charging cable or charging station with a permanent charging cable.
4 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to model.
408
The approximate remaining charging time or WARNING CAUTION

the charging status will be displayed in the
instrument panel and center display. • Children should be supervised when in Do not wash the vehicle while the charging
the vicinity of the charging cable when cable is plugged in or the charging door is
Ensure that the specified amperage in the it is plugged in. open.
center display is set to what the charging sta-
tion is specified to handle. • High voltage is present in your electric
meter housing and power distribution
During charging, condensation from the air service panel. Contact with high volt- Rapid charging (direct current)
conditioning may form under the vehicle. This age can cause death or serious per- 1. Remove the charging cable from the
is due to cooling of the high-voltage battery. sonal injury. charging station's storage socket. Note
that the ignition must be switched off
• Do not use the charging cable if it is
completely before charging.
damaged in any way. A damaged or
malfunctioning charging cable may 2. Open the charger door and remove the
only be repaired by a workshop – an charging socket's protective cover.
mended.
• Always position the charging cable so
that it will not be driven over, stepped
on, tripped over or otherwise damaged,
or cause personal injury.
• Do not use one or more adapters
between the charging cable and the
electric outlet.
• Never connect adapters of any kind
vehicle.
Also, refer to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions for using the charging cable and its
components.
}}
409
|| NOTE Hybrid vehicle charging

You can charge the vehicle at a home charg-
Charging stations supporting CCS are usu-
ing station or a public charging station5.
ally clearly marked CCS or Combo.
Starting charging
Related information 1. Pull out the cable from the charging sta-
• Charging status in the vehicle's charging tion's storage socket or take out the
socket (p. 416) charging cable. Note that the ignition
must be switched off completely before
• Charging status in the instrument panel
charging.
3. Grasp the charging cable with both hands (p. 418)
and push the charging cable all the way • Charging in the vehicle's center display 2. Plug the charging cable into the charging
into the vehicle's charging socket. Hold (p. 421) station. If the charging station has a per-
the charging handle up for a few seconds. manent charging cable, proceed to step 3.
The charging cable automatically locks
• Stopping electric vehicle charging
(p. 423)
into the charging socket after a few sec- CAUTION
onds. Make sure that the charging cable • Stopping hybrid vehicle charging (p. 425)
Do not plug in the charging cable if there is
locks fully into place so that charging can • Electric vehicle charging via wall outlet
a risk of thunder or lightning.
start. (p. 426)
4. Follow the instructions in the charging • Hybrid vehicle charging via wall outlet
station's user interface to authorize the (p. 429)
charging. Charging will begin after the
charging station completes an insulation
test. This may take a minute or so.
to flash. The approximate remaining
charging time or the charging status
will be displayed in the instrument
panel and center display.
410
3. 4. 5. The charging cable handle will lock into

place and charging will begin within
5 seconds.
to flash.
The approximate remaining charging
time or the charging status will be dis-
played in the instrument panel.
During charging, condensation from the air
Press the rear edge of the charger door to Remove the charging handle's protective conditioning may form under the vehicle. This
open the charging socket6. cover and push the charging handle all the is normal and is caused by the hybrid battery
way into the vehicle's socket. cooling.
Press the rear edge of the charger door to
open the charging socket and remove the
charging socket's protective cover7. CAUTION
To prevent paintwork damage, e.g. in
strong winds, position the protective cover
of the charging handle so that it does not
touch the vehicle.
6 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to model.

7 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to model. }}
411
|| WARNING Related information General information about

• General information about charging charging cables
• Children should be supervised when in (p. 404) A mode 3 charging cable is used when charg-
the vicinity of the charging cable when
• General information about electric vehi- ing at a charging station. Some charging sta-
it is plugged in.
cles (p. 406) tions have a permanent charging cable that is
• High voltage is present in your electric used instead.
meter housing and power distribution • Charging status in the vehicle's charging
service panel. Contact with high volt- socket (p. 416) NOTE
age can cause death or serious per- • Charging status in the instrument panel The information in this section applies only
sonal injury. (p. 418) to charging using a mode 3 charging cable
• Do not use the charging cable if it is • Stopping electric vehicle charging or charging station with a permanent
damaged in any way. A damaged or (p. 423) charging cable.
malfunctioning charging cable may • Stopping hybrid vehicle charging (p. 425)
only be repaired by a workshop – an WARNING
authorized Volvo workshop is recom- • Electric vehicle charging via wall outlet
(p. 426) Only use the charging cable provided with
mended.
• Hybrid vehicle charging via wall outlet your vehicle or a replacement cable pur-
(p. 429) chased from a Volvo retailer.
Charging with permanent charging cable in
accordance with mode 38
between the charging cable and the In certain places, the charging cable is perma-
vehicle. nently installed within a charging station con-
nected to an electrical outlet. You must there-
fore use the charging station's charging cable
tions for using the charging cable and its
components. and follow the instructions on the charging
station.
CAUTION
Do not wash the vehicle while the charging
cable is plugged in or the charging door is
open.
412
Specifications, charging cable WARNING CAUTION

Enclosure class IP67 • Children should be supervised when in Always interrupt charging first and then
the vicinity of the charging cable when disconnect the charging cable – first from
Compliance SAE J1772 it is plugged in. the vehicle's charging socket and then
Ambient tempera- -32 ºC to 50 ºC • High voltage is present in your electric from the charging station.
ture (-25 ºF till 122 ºF) meter housing and power distribution
service panel. Contact with high volt-
CAUTION
age can cause death or serious per-
sonal injury. Wipe the charging cable with a clean cloth
lightly moistened with water or a mild
detergent. Do not use chemicals or sol-
damaged in any way. A damaged or
vents.
malfunctioning charging cable may
only be repaired by a workshop – an
authorized Volvo workshop is recom- WARNING
mended.
The charging cable and its components
• Always position the charging cable so must not be rinsed or immersed in water.
Related information
vehicle. • Electric vehicle charging via wall outlet
(p. 426)
tions for using the charging cable and its • Hybrid vehicle charging via wall outlet
components. (p. 429)
8 European standard - EN 61851-1.
413
Charging time Cur- Charging Charging time NOTE

The following charging times are approximate rent output (hours)D To improve charging performance during
and apply when charging is not affected by (A)B (kW)C
Single Twin rapid charging, the battery is precondi-
current being drawn from the climate system
tioned when a rapid charging station is set
or any other function. Charging time can also motorE motorF
as the destination in Google Maps.
vary depending on battery size. If charging
seems to be taking much more time than 32 7.2 11 12
shown in the table, this should be investiga- 48 11 8 8 NOTE
ted.
A Applies for charging with a 200-240 V outlet. At lower vol- • In cold or hot weather, it may take
CAUTION tages, charging takes more time than what is shown in the longer to charge the high-voltage bat-
table.
Volvo strongly advises against charging the B Maximum charging current may vary from market to mar- tery. Some of the charging current is
ket.
vehicle with alternating current of 100-120 C The highest charging output that the vehicle can achieve is then used to heat up/cool down the
V in combination with an amperage under 11 kW. high-voltage battery.
D From 0-100%
10A. E Standard range. • Selecting preconditioning can affect
F Extended range.
the charging time.
Charging time (alternating Charging time for rapid charging • Rapid charging with up to 150 kW out-
current/AC) (direct current/DC) put is possible under favorable condi-
Single-phase chargingA tions for the high-voltage battery and
Charging output Charing timeB charging station. Charging output is
Cur- Charging Charging time (kW)A (minutes) limited toward the end of rapid charg-
rent output (hours)D ing.
50 60
(A)B (kW)C
Single Twin
150 37
motorE motorF Related information
A Maximum output that the charging station can supply. • Electric vehicle charging (p. 408)
6 1,3 64 72 B Applies at 10-80% charge level when the battery's tem-
perature is around 35 °C (95 °F). • Hybrid vehicle charging (p. 410)
10 2.2 36 40 • General information about charging cables
16 3.6 22 24 (p. 412)
(p. 418)
414
• Charging in the vehicle's center display Charging time Charging times for charging with 100-120 V
(p. 421) The following charging times are approximate Amperage Charging Charging
• Charging status in the vehicle's charging and apply when charging is not affected by (A)A output (kW) time
socket (p. 416) current being drawn from the climate system (hours)
or any other function. If charging seems to be
(p. 423) taking much more time than shown in the 6 0.7 24
table, this should be investigated.
• Stopping hybrid vehicle charging (p. 425) 10 1.1 14
• Preconditioning* (p. 253) Charging time (single-phase charging)
16 1,8 10
Charging times for charging with 200-240 V
• Starting and stopping preconditioning A Maximum charging current may vary from market to mar-
(p. 254) Amperage Charging Charging ket.
(A)A output time
(kW)B (hours) NOTE
6 1.3 12 • Charging output and charging time
may vary depending on voltage level
10 2.2 7 and other loads connected on the
same circuit.
16 3.6 5
• The maximum charging output for the
A Maximum charging current may vary from market to mar- hybrid is 3.6 kW, even when using a
ket.
B The highest charging output that the vehicle can achieve is charging station with a higher output
3.6 kW. than 3.6 kW.
NOTE
In extremely cold or hot weather, part of
the charging current is used to heat/cool
the hybrid battery, resulting in a longer
charging time. If the parking heater is
active, some of the charging current will
also be used for it.
}}
|| Related information Charging status in the vehicle's LED Meaning

• Electric vehicle charging (p. 408) charging socket indicator
• Hybrid vehicle charging (p. 410) The LED indicator light in the vehicle's charg- light's
ing socket shows the current charging status. color
• General information about charging cables
The different colors of the LED indicator light
(p. 412) Red Malfunction. Check the charg-
are explained in the table below.
• Charging status in the instrument panel ing cable's connection to the
(p. 418) LED Meaning
vehicle's charging socket and
indicator
• Charging status in the vehicle's charging the power source.
light's
socket (p. 416) color Then restart charging by follow-
• Stopping electric vehicle charging ing these steps:
(p. 423) White Welcome lighting
1. Unplug the charging cable
• Stopping hybrid vehicle charging (p. 425) Flashing The charging process is being from the charging socket.
yellow stopped. 2. Wait a few seconds.
Yellow Wait modeA – waiting for 3. Plug the charging cable
charging to start. back into the charging
socket.
Flashing Charging is in progressB.
green 4. If the problem persists,
contact your Volvo retailer.
Green Charging completedC
Flashing The vehicle is locked and does
red not detect any key when the
charging cable is unlocked via
the button next to the charging
socket.
Blue Scheduled charging activated.
A E.g. after a door has been opened or if the charging cable
handle is not locked in place.
B The more slowly the light flashes, the closer the battery is to
being fully charged.
C The light will go out after a short time.
416
NOTE
The charging socket's LED light indicates
the status for charging the high voltage
battery and not whether the vehicle draws
power, for example when the climate sys-
tem is used. Even if the LED indicates that
charging is complete, or that scheduled
charging is activated, the vehicle can still
draw current from the outlet. To avoid
affecting the vehicle's range, current is first
drawn from the outlet and not from the
battery to supply any extra vehicle loads
(parking heater, etc.).
Related information
(p. 418)
• Charging status in the charging cable's
control module (p. 434)
(p. 423)
• Stopping hybrid vehicle charging (p. 425)
(p. 426)
(p. 429)
417
Charging status in the instrument This information is displayed as long as the

panel instrument panel is active.
Charging status is indicated in the instrument
panel using both graphics and messages.
Color Status Meaning
Pulsating The instrument panel frame will appear Charging is in progress and the approximate time at which the hybrid battery will be
green with a green, pulsating light. fully charged is displayed.
Green The instrument panel frame will appear The battery is fully charged.
with a steady green light.
Red The instrument panel frame will appear Malfunction. Check the charging cable's connection to the vehicle's charging socket
with a steady red light. and the power source.
Then restart charging by following these steps:
1. Unplug the charging cable from the charging socket.
2. Wait a few seconds.
3. Plug the charging cable back into the charging socket.
4. If the problem persists, contact your Volvo retailer.
Yellow The instrument panel frame will appear Charging is waiting to start or has been paused.
with a steady yellow light.

Pulsating The instrument panel frame will appear with a Charging is in progress and the approximate time at which the vehicle will be fully
green green, pulsating light. charged is displayed.
Green The instrument panel frame will appear with a The vehicle is fully charged.
steady green light.
418

Red The instrument panel frame will appear with a Malfunction. Check the charging cable's connection to the vehicle's charging
steady red light. socket and the power source.
Then restart charging by following these steps:
2. Wait a few seconds.
Blue The instrument panel frame will appear with a Scheduled charging activated.
steady blue light.
Yellow The instrument panel frame will appear with a Charging is waiting to start or has been paused.
steady yellow light.
In addition to charging status and other infor- NOTE Related information

mation, the instrument panel also shows: • Electric vehicle charging (p. 408)
If the instrument panel is not used, it will
• current amperage and set amperage as go dark after a period of time. To reactivate • Hybrid vehicle charging (p. 410)
well as number of phases9 the display: • Electric propulsion symbols and messages
• charging output in the instrument panel (p. 437)
• open one of the doors, or
• battery percentage
• put the ignition in mode I by turning
• Hybrid symbols and messages in the
instrument panel (p. 439)
• time until the vehicle is fully charged. the START knob clockwise and then
releasing. • Charging status in the vehicle's charging
socket (p. 416)
If the instrument panel is not used, it will
go dark after a period of time. Reactivate • Charging status in the charging cable's
the display by opening one of the doors. control module (p. 434)
Read more in the instrument panel section.
9 Current amperage and set amperage applies per phase from the alternating current source. }}
419
|| • Stopping electric vehicle charging

(p. 423)
(p. 426)
(p. 429)
420
Charging in the vehicle's center Setting a charging limit

display
The center display can be used to set charg-
ing level, unlock the charging cable, set cur-
rent intensity (amperage), and schedule
charging.
To access the charging view in the vehicle's
center display, tap and then Charging. The
charging view in the center display is also acti-
vated when charging begins.
CAUTION
Volvo strongly advises against charging the Select Charging Set timer in the center
The battery's current charge level. display and then activate the scheduled charg-
vehicle with alternating current of 100-120
V in combination with an amperage under Charging limit – Swipe to set a charge ing in Schedule charging. Drag the and
10A. level at which charging should stop. The controls to set start and stop times for
set limit remains the same until it is charging.
changed again in the center display or via
Deactivate scheduled charging using the con-
the Volvo Cars app.
trol next to Schedule charging.
CAUTION
Follow the recommendations for high-volt-
age battery handling to optimize its life-
time and performance.
Schedule charging
When charging using alternating current, it is
possible to schedule and set start and stop
times for charging.
}}
421
|| Temporarily overriding scheduled charging NOTE Setting amperage

settings
It is possible to override active scheduled The charging socket's LED light indicates
charging settings without needing to deacti- the status for charging the high voltage
vate the scheduled charging. This can be use- battery and not whether the vehicle draws
ful, for example, if the vehicle has a charging power, for example when the climate sys-
session scheduled during the night but you tem is used. Even if the LED indicates that
would like to charge it at another time, such as charging is complete, or that scheduled
while it is parked after driving. charging is activated, the vehicle can still
draw current from the outlet. To avoid
1. Plug the charging cable into the vehicle. affecting the vehicle's range, current is first
The LED indicator in the vehicle's charging drawn from the outlet and not from the
socket will glow blue when the vehicle is battery to supply any extra vehicle loads
set to charge at the scheduled time. If this (parking heater, etc.).
is done outside the scheduled time, no Set amperage.
charging will take place.
Unlocking and locking the charging It is possible to set the current intensity
2. Unplug the cable and then plug it in again. cable (amperage) for charging with alternating cur-
> The LED indicator next to the charging Tap Unlock cable in the center display to rent10.
socket will flash/glow steadily green unlock the charging cable and cancel charg- Select Charging and the arrow next to
and the vehicle will be charged. The ing. You can lock the cable into the charging Current limit (amps). Tap + to increase
scheduled charging will still be acti- socket by tapping Lock cable in the center
amperage or - to decrease amperage11.
vated the next time the vehicle is plug- display. When charging using a wall outlet/
ged in for charging. charging station (AC charging), charging will For charging with more than one phase, an
resume automatically. During rapid charging average value for the set amperage will be
(DC charging), charging will not resume auto- shown in the instrument panel12.
matically.
10 Applies to charging via charging station (mode 3) and charging via wall outlet (mode 2).
11 The set amperage applies per phase from the alternating current source.
422
NOTE Stopping electric vehicle charging

Stop charging at any time by pressing the
The amperage may be limited by the
button next to the charging socket or tapping
charging station, charging cable or the
the button in the center display.
vehicle's high-voltage system. It is not
guaranteed that the vehicle can be charged Stopping charging (alternating
with the specified amperage if this is
current/AC)13
higher than what the charging station or
1. Press the button next to the charging
charging cable allow.
socket or tap the button in the center dis-
play.
2. Press the lock button on the charging
Related information
cable's handle. The handle will be
• Electric vehicle charging (p. 408) CAUTION released/unlocked. Unplug the cable from
• Hybrid vehicle charging (p. 410) Charging must be stopped before the the vehicle's charging socket and close
• Charging status in the vehicle's charging charging cable is removed from the vehi- the charger door.
socket (p. 416) cle's charging socket. Failing to stop 3. Remove the charging cable from the
• Stopping electric vehicle charging charging before unplugging the charging charging station, or plug the permanent
(p. 423) cable could damage the charging cable or charging cable into the charging station's
the system. storage socket.
• Electric vehicle charging via wall outlet Charging cable automatically locks
(p. 426) If the charging cable is not removed from the
• Hybrid vehicle charging via wall outlet charging socket, it will automatically lock back
(p. 429) into place a short time after unlocking to maxi-
mize charging. The charging cable can be
• High-voltage battery recommendations
released again by pressing the button next to
(p. 712)
the charging socket or the button in the center
• Hybrid battery recommendations (p. 713) display.
13 Applies to charging using a mode 3 charging cable or charging station with a permanent charging cable. }}
423
|| Stopping rapid charging (direct restart interrupted rapid charging, remove the If the problem persists, contact your Volvo
current/DC) charging cable from the vehicle's charging retailer.
socket, then plug it in again and follow the
instructions in the charging station's user CAUTION
CAUTION
interface.
Never try to unplug the charging cable Never try to unplug the charging cable
from the vehicle while it is charging. In the event of problems removing the from the vehicle while it is charging.
Always stop charging first and then unplug charging handle Always stop charging first by unlocking the
the charging cable after the charging If the charging handle is left in the charging vehicle using the key or by tapping the but-
socket lock automatically unlocks. socket for a while after charging has stopped, ton in the center display. Then unplug the
the charging cable will automatically lock into charging cable after the charging socket
place again. To release it, first try again to stop lock automatically unlocks.
1. To stop rapid charging, press the button
next to the vehicle's charging socket, tap the charging. If the charging handle still does
the button in the center display, or use the not release automatically, the following meas- Related information
charging station's user interface. ures can be taken: • Electric vehicle charging (p. 408)
> Charging will stop and the charging • Make sure that the key is within range and • Hybrid vehicle charging (p. 410)
socket will automatically unlock. This that the vehicle is unlocked.
may take a few seconds. • Safely cut the power supply to the charg- (p. 412)
2. Unplug the charging cable from the vehi- ing station. When charging at a charging
station, contact the charging station's
• Charging in the vehicle's center display
cle's charging socket and close the cover. (p. 421)
customer care for assistance with stop-
3. Plug the charging cable into the charging ping charging. • Electric vehicle charging via wall outlet
station's storage socket or hang it back in (p. 426)
the designated location. • Move the charging handle gently from
side to side. • Hybrid vehicle charging via wall outlet
Unlocking the vehicle during rapid charging (p. 429)
• Lock and unlock the vehicle.
Rapid charging will not normally be interrup- • Cargo compartment (p. 638)
• Lock the vehicle and wait until the LED
ted if the vehicle is unlocked. If rapid charging light by the vehicle's charging socket goes • Folding up the cargo compartment floor
is stopped, it will not resume automatically out. This can take up to 7 minutes. Then (p. 648)
because the charging station requires reautho- unlock the vehicle.
rization of charging via the user interface. If
rapid charging is stopped, the charging cable
will not automatically lock into place again. To
424
Stopping hybrid vehicle charging CAUTION

To stop charging14 of the hybrid battery,
Always unlock the vehicle so that charging
unlock the vehicle, unplug the charging cable
is stopped before unplugging the charging
from the vehicle's charging socket and then
cable. Note that the charging cable must
unplug the cable from the charging station.
be disconnected from the vehicle's charg-
1. Use the key15 to unlock the vehicle. Charg- ing socket before it is disconnected from
ing stops. the charging station, partly to prevent
damage to the system and party to prevent
CAUTION unintentional interruption of charging.
Always interrupt charging first and then 2. Press the release button on the charging
disconnect the charging cable – first from cable's handle. The handle will be
Charging cable automatically locks
the vehicle's charging socket and then released/unlocked. Remove the cable
If the charging cable is not removed from the
from the charging station. from the vehicle's charging socket, put the
charging socket, it will automatically lock back
socket's cover back in place and close the
into place a short time after unlocking. The
charger door.
charging cable can be removed again if the
Press the release button on the charging vehicle is unlocked using the key. For vehicles
cable's handle. The handle will be with keyless locking and unlocking*, it is pos-
released/unlocked. Unplug the cable from sible to lock and unlock using the handle
the vehicle's charging socket and close again.
the charger door.
Related information
3. Remove the charging cable from the
charging station, or plug the permanent
charging cable into the charging station's • Hybrid vehicle charging (p. 410)
storage socket. • General information about charging cables
(p. 412)
(p. 426)
(p. 429)
15 Unlocking to stop charging must be done regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
Electric vehicle charging via wall WARNING • Never connect the charging cable to an
outlet extension cord or a multiple plug
If no other charging options are available, the
• The charging cable must be grounded socket.
when in use. It is equipped with a cord
vehicle can be charged via a wall outlet.
with a grounding conductor and a • Do not use one or more adapters
NOTE between the charging cable and the
grounding plug. The plug must be
electric outlet.
The information in this section applies to inserted into an appropriate outlet that
charging via a wall outlet and a mode 2 is properly installed and grounded in • Never connect adapters of any kind
accordance with all local codes and between the charging cable and the
charging cable.
ordinances and is not damaged in any vehicle.
way. • Do not use an external timer between
Charging cable (mode 2) the charging cable and the electrical
When charging via a wall outlet, use a charg- • Children should be supervised when in
the vicinity of the charging cable when outlet.
ing cable with a control module that can limit
it is plugged in. Also, refer to the manufacturer's instruc-
the amperage (mode 2).
• High voltage is present in your electric tions for using the charging cable and its
components.
WARNING meter housing and power distribution
Only use the charging cable provided with age can cause death or serious per-
your vehicle or a replacement cable pur- CAUTION
sonal injury.
chased from a Volvo retailer. Avoid exposing the control unit and its plug
• Do not use the charging cable if it is to direct sunlight. In such cases, the over-
damaged in any way. A damaged or heating protection in the plug could reduce
WARNING malfunctioning charging cable may or cut off charging of the high-voltage bat-
The charging cable and its components only be repaired by a workshop – an tery.
must not be rinsed or immersed in water. authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
• Disconnect the charger from the wall
outlet before cleaning it.
426
Starting charging WARNING NOTE

Plug the charging cable into a 120/240 V out-
let. Open the charger door. Note that the igni- • The electric vehicle must only be Read more about how charging is stopped
tion must be switched off completely before charged at maximum permitted charg- in the "Stopping electric vehicle charging"
charging. Remove the charging handle's pro- ing current or lower in accordance with section.
tective cover and push the handle all the way applicable local and national recom-
into the vehicle's charging socket. mendations for charging from wall out-
lets/plugs. CAUTION
The charging cable handle will lock into place Charging must be stopped before the
and charging will begin within 5 seconds. • Only charge the electric vehicle from
approved, grounded wall outlets. charging cable is removed from the vehi-
cle's charging socket. Failing to stop
NOTE • Avoid visibly worn, defective or dam-
charging before unplugging the charging
aged electrical outlets since they may
Read more about how charging is started cable could damage the charging cable or
lead to fire damage and/or personal
in the "Electric vehicle charging" section. the system.
injury if used.
CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION

If the power capacity of the wall outlet's Never connect the charging cable if there • Never unplug the charging cable from
fuse is too low, the fuse could blow while the wall outlet while charging is in pro-
is a risk of a thunderstorm or there is light-
the vehicle is charging. Set the lowest gress – the wall outlet could be dam-
ning.
amperage for charging in the vehicle's cen- aged in such circumstances.
ter display before reconnecting the vehicle • Always unlock the vehicle so that
for charging. If the problem persists, con- Stopping charging charging is cut off before unplugging
tact a qualified electrician for further inves- To stop charging, press the button next to the the charging cable from the wall outlet.
tigation. charging socket or tap the button in the center
display. Then unplug the charging cable from • Note that the charging cable must be
the vehicle's charging socket and then from disconnected from the vehicle's charg-
the 120/240 V wall outlet. ing socket before it is disconnected
from the wall outlet, partly to prevent
damage to the system and party to
prevent unintentional interruption of
charging.
}}
427
|| Fuse Reset the fuse for the outlet and select a lower • General information about electric vehi-
Charging an electric vehicle via a wall outlet charging current in the center display. cles (p. 406)
corresponds to a high load on the fuse. Example 2 • Electric vehicle charging (p. 408)
If the vehicle is connected to a wall outlet • Hybrid vehicle charging (p. 410)
CAUTION (10 A) and the charging current is set to 10 A,
the vehicle will draw 10 A from the power grid. • Charging time (p. 414)
Make sure that the fuse to the wall outlet
can handle the current specified for the If another power consumer is connected to • Charging time (p. 415)
charging cable. the same outlet (or another outlet in the same • Charging status in the vehicle's charging
fuse circuit), the 10 A fuse for the outlet/fuse socket (p. 416)
circuit could be overloaded and tripped, which
There are normally several 120/240 V power would stop battery charging.
consumers in one fuse circuit, which means (p. 418)
that more than one power consumer (e.g. Reset the fuse for the outlet/fuse circuit and • Residual current device in charging cable
lighting, vacuum cleaner, electric drill, etc.) select a lower charging current in the center (p. 432)
may use the same fuse. display, or disconnect the other power con-
sumer from the outlet/fuse circuit. • Charging cable temperature monitoring
(p. 433)
CAUTION Example 3
If the vehicle is connected to a wall outlet • Charging status in the charging cable's
Make sure that the 120/240 V outlet has control module (p. 434)
(10 A) and the charging current is set to 6 A,
sufficient amperage for charging electric • Electric propulsion symbols and messages
the vehicle will only draw 6 A from the power
vehicles. If you are uncertain of the in the instrument panel (p. 437)
grid. It will take longer to charge the battery,
capacity, have the outlet checked by a
but additional power consumers can be con- • Hybrid symbols and messages in the
licensed electrician. If you are unsure of the
nected simultaneously to the same outlet/fuse instrument panel (p. 439)
power capacity of the outlet, set the lowest
circuit as long as the combined load does not
amperage shown in the center display.
exceed the capacity of the outlet/fuse circuit.
Example 1 Related information

If the vehicle is connected to a wall outlet • Charging in the vehicle's center display
(10 A) and the charging current is set to 16 A, (p. 421)
the vehicle will attempt to draw 16 A from the • General information about charging
power grid. After a short time, the overloaded (p. 404)
10 A fuse for the outlet will be tripped and bat-
tery charging will be stopped.
428
Hybrid vehicle charging via wall WARNING • Never connect the charging cable to an
outlet extension cord or a multiple plug
If no other charging options are available, the
• The charging cable must be grounded socket.
when in use. It is equipped with a cord
vehicle can be charged via a wall outlet.
with a grounding conductor and a • Do not use one or more adapters
NOTE between the charging cable and the
grounding plug. The plug must be
electric outlet.
The information in this section applies to inserted into an appropriate outlet that
charging via a wall outlet and a mode 2 is properly installed and grounded in • Never connect adapters of any kind
accordance with all local codes and between the charging cable and the
charging cable.
ordinances and is not damaged in any vehicle.
way. • Do not use an external timer between
Charging cable (mode 2) the charging cable and the electrical
When charging via a wall outlet, use a charg- • Children should be supervised when in
the vicinity of the charging cable when outlet.
ing cable with a control module that can limit
it is plugged in. Also, refer to the manufacturer's instruc-
the amperage (mode 2).
• High voltage is present in your electric tions for using the charging cable and its
components.
WARNING meter housing and power distribution
Only use the charging cable provided with age can cause death or serious per- Starting charging
your vehicle or a replacement cable pur- sonal injury. Plug the charging cable into a 120/240 V out-
chased from a Volvo retailer.
let. Open the charger door and remove the
damaged in any way. A damaged or charging socket's protective cover. Note that
WARNING malfunctioning charging cable may the ignition must be switched off completely
only be repaired by a workshop – an before charging. Remove the charging han-
The charging cable and its components
authorized Volvo workshop is recom- dle's protective cover and push the handle all
must not be rinsed or immersed in water.
mended. the way into the vehicle's socket.
• Always position the charging cable so The charging cable handle will lock into place
that it will not be driven over, stepped and charging will begin within 5 seconds.
or cause personal injury. NOTE
• Disconnect the charger from the wall Read more about how charging is started
outlet before cleaning it. in the "Hybrid vehicle charging" section.
}}
429
|| Plug the charging cable into a 120/240 V out- WARNING NOTE

let. Open the charger door. Note that the igni-
tion must be switched off completely before • The hybrid battery must only be Read more about how charging is stopped
charging. Remove the charging handle's pro- charged at maximum permitted charg- in the "Stopping hybrid vehicle charging"
tective cover and push the handle all the way ing current or lower in accordance with section.
into the vehicle's socket. applicable local and national recom-
mendations for hybrid charging from
The charging cable handle will lock into place wall outlets/plugs. CAUTION
and charging will begin within 5 seconds.
• Only charge the hybrid battery from Before the charging cable is removed from
approved, grounded wall outlets. the vehicle's charging socket, the vehicle
NOTE must be unlocked using the unlock button
• Avoid visibly worn, defective or dam-
on the key. This must be done even if the
Read more about how charging is started aged electrical outlets since they may
in the "Hybrid vehicle charging" section. vehicle's doors are already unlocked. If the
lead to fire damage and/or personal
vehicle is not unlocked using the unlock
injury if used.
button, the charging cable or system may
CAUTION be damaged.
If the power capacity of the wall outlet's CAUTION
fuse is too low, the fuse could blow while Never connect the charging cable if there
the vehicle is charging. Contact a qualified is a risk of a thunderstorm or there is light-
electrician for further investigation. ning.
Stopping charging
To stop charging of the hybrid battery, unlock
the vehicle, unplug the charging cable from
the vehicle's charging socket and then unplug
the cable from the 120/240 V outlet.
430
CAUTION lighting, vacuum cleaner, electric drill, etc.) • Electric propulsion symbols and messages
may use the same fuse. in the instrument panel (p. 437)
• Never unplug the charging cable from
the wall outlet while charging is in pro- • Hybrid symbols and messages in the
CAUTION instrument panel (p. 439)
gress – the wall outlet could be dam-
aged in such circumstances. Make sure that the 120/240 V outlet has
sufficient amperage for charging electric
• Always unlock the vehicle so that
vehicles. If you are uncertain of the
charging is cut off before unplugging
capacity, have the outlet checked by a
the charging cable from the wall outlet.
licensed electrician.
• Note that the charging cable must be
disconnected from the vehicle's charg-
ing socket before it is disconnected Related information
from the wall outlet, partly to prevent • General information about charging
damage to the system and party to (p. 404)
prevent unintentional interruption of • General information about electric vehi-
charging. cles (p. 406)
Fuse • Hybrid vehicle charging (p. 410)
Charging a hybrid battery via a wall outlet cor-
responds to a high load on the fuse.
• Charging time (p. 414)
• Charging time (p. 415)
CAUTION • Charging status in the vehicle's charging
socket (p. 416)
Make sure that the fuse to the wall outlet
can handle the current specified for the • Charging status in the instrument panel
charging cable. (p. 418)
• Residual current device in charging cable
There are normally several 120/240 V power (p. 432)
consumers in one fuse circuit, which means • Charging cable temperature monitoring
that more than one power consumer (e.g. (p. 433)
control module (p. 434)
431
Residual current device in

charging cable
The charging cable16 has a circuit breaker
that helps protect against current overloads
and thermal overheating.
WARNING
Only charge the vehicle using approved,
grounded wall outlets. If the electrical cir-
cuit or electrical socket's capacity is not
known, let a licensed electrician inspect
the electrical circuit's capacity. Using a
charge level that exceeds the electrical cir-
cuit's or electrical outlet's capacity may Control module's LED17 indicator.
start a fire or damage the electrical circuit. LED indicator CAUTION
If the control module's built-in residual current • Check the capacity of the socket.
WARNING device is triggered, the LED indicator will light • Other electronic equipment connected
• The charging cable's residual current up red. Check the wall outlet. Have the outlet on the same fuse circuit must be dis-
breaker helps protect the vehicle's checked by a licensed electrician or try using connected if the total load is exceeded.
charging system but cannot ensure another wall outlet.
• Do not plug in the charging cable if the
that an current overload will never outlet is damaged, worn or defective.
occur.
Related information
(p. 426)
(p. 429)
16 For charging with a mode 2 charging cable.

432
• General information about charging cables Charging cable temperature CAUTION

(p. 412) monitoring
Avoid exposing the control unit and its plug
• Charging status in the charging cable's To help ensure the vehicle's hybrid battery is
to direct sunlight. In such cases, the over-
control module (p. 434) reliably charged each time18 it is connected, heating protection in the plug could reduce
the charging cable's control module and plug or cut off charging of the vehicle.
have integrated temperature monitoring devi-
ces.
To help ensure the vehicle's battery is reliably CAUTION
charged each time19 it is connected, the If charging is often inadvertently interrup-
charging cable's control module and plug ted, the charging cable and the vehicle's
have integrated temperature monitoring devi- charging system should be checked by a
ces. trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
The temperature in both the control module cian. The wall outlet should also be
and the plug is monitored. checked by a licensed electrician.
Temperature monitoring in the control
module Related information
To help protect the vehicle's electronics, • Electric vehicle charging via wall outlet
charging is stopped if the temperature in the (p. 426)
control module becomes too high. This may • Hybrid vehicle charging via wall outlet
occur due to e.g. high ambient temperatures (p. 429)
or strong sunlight directly on the control mod-
ule.
(p. 412)
Monitoring in the plug
The charging current is reduced if the tem- control module (p. 434)
perature in the plug becomes too high. If the
temperature exceeds a critical limit, charging
is stopped completely.

433
Charging status in the charging CAUTION

cable's control module
Read the accompanying instructions to
The LED indicator light on the charging
ensure that the charging cable is handled
cable's control module shows the status of
in accordance with recommendations and
charging in progress and completed charg-
instructions.
ing20.
Control module's LED21 indicator.

LED indicator

434
LED Status Meaning Recommended action

Off Charging is not No power supply to 1. Unplug the charging cable from the wall outlet.
possible. the charging cable. 2. Plug the charging cable back into the wall outlet or use another wall outlet.
White light Charging possi- The charging cable is If the LED indicator is white but charging is not possible:
ble. ready to be plugged
into the vehicle.
3. If the indicator does not begin flashing white within about 10 seconds, first unplug
the charging cable from the charging socket and then unplug it from the wall outlet.
4. Plug the charging cable back into the wall outlet and then plug the charging socket
into the vehicle.
Flashing Charging is in The vehicle's elec- Wait until the vehicle is fully charged.
white progress. tronic system has ini-
tiated charging
Charging is in pro-
gress.
Steady red Charging is not Temporary error. 1. Unplug the charging cable from the charging socket.
light possible. 2. Wait a few seconds.
Flashing Charging is not Serious error. 1. Unplug the charging cable from the charging socket and then from the wall outlet.
red light possible. 2. Wait a few seconds.
}}
435
|| LED Status Meaning Recommended action

3. Plug the charging cable back into the wall outlet and then plug the charging socket
into the vehicle.
Related information
(p. 426)
(p. 429)
• Charging status in the vehicle's charging
socket (p. 416)
(p. 418)
436
Electric propulsion symbols and are displayed in the instrument panel. Several
messages in the instrument panel examples are provided below.
If a problem occurs with the vehicle's electric
propulsion system, a symbol and a message
Symbol Meaning
Fault in 12 V battery.
Read the message in the instrument panel.
Contact a workshop A.
Fault in drive system.
Contact a workshop A.
Temporary performance limitation.
Information about the high-voltage battery's charge level

Remove charging cable before start.
Related information • Stopping electric vehicle charging (p. 423) • Electric vehicle charging via wall outlet
• Electric vehicle charging (p. 408) • Stopping hybrid vehicle charging (p. 425) (p. 426)
}}
437
|| • Hybrid vehicle charging via wall outlet

(p. 429)
438
Hybrid symbols and messages in instrument panel. They may also appear in
the instrument panel combination with general indicator and warn-
A number of symbols and messages relating ing symbols and disappear when the neces-
to hybrid operation may be displayed in the sary action has been taken.
Drive to workshop 12 V Battery Fault in 12 V battery. Contact a workshopA to have the battery checked as soon as possible.
charging fault Service urgent
Stop safely 12 V battery critical Fault in 12 V battery. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and contact a workshopA to have
charging fault the battery checked.
12 V battery fuse failure Service Fault in 12 V battery. Contact a workshopA to have the system checked as soon as possible.
required
Stop safely HV battery overheated The hybrid battery's temperature seems to be rising at an abnormal rate. Stop the vehicle and
turn off the engine. Wait at least 5 minutes before driving. Call a workshopA or inspect the
vehicle to make sure everything seems normal before continuing to drive.
Reduced performance Max vehicle The hybrid battery's charge level is too low for driving at high speeds. Charge the battery as
speed limited soon as possible.
}}
439

Propulsion system Harsh behavior at The hybrid system is not functioning properly. Contact a workshopA to have the system
low speed Vehicle ok to use checked as soon as possible.
Remove charge cable before start Displayed when the driver attempts to start the vehicle with the charging cable still con-
nected. Remove the charging cable and close the charger cover.
Related information
• Stopping electric vehicle charging (p. 423)
(p. 426)
(p. 429)
• Fuel gauge (p. 104)
440
Starting the vehicle WARNING • Switching off the vehicle (p. 446)
To start the vehicle, one of its keys must be
• Never use more than one inlay mat at a • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 228)
inside the vehicle.
time on the driver's floor. If any other • Regenerative braking (p. 462)
WARNING type of floor mat is used, remove the • Regenerative braking* (p. 462)
Before starting: original mat from the driver's seat floor
before driving. All types of mats must
• Buckle your seat belt.
be securely anchored in the attach-
• Adjust the seat, steering wheel and ment points in the floor. Make sure the
mirrors. floor mat does not impede the move-
• Make sure you can fully depress the ment of the brake pedal or accelerator
brake pedal. pedal in any way, as this could be a
serious safety hazard.
Make sure the key is in the vehicle. • Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-
factured for your vehicle. They must be
1. Fasten your seat belt. properly secured in the attachment
2. Depress the brake pedal. points in the floor to help ensure they
cannot slide and become trapped
3. Put the gear selector in position D or R.
under the pedals.
> The vehicle is now in drive mode.
4. Release the brake pedal.
CAUTION
> If One Pedal Drive is activated, the
vehicle will not move forward, but The vehicle cannot be started if the charg-
could begin rolling away if the ground is ing cable is still plugged in. Make sure that
leaning in the same direction as the the charging cable is removed and the
selected gear position. charger cover is closed before starting the
vehicle.
If One Pedal Drive is deactivated, the
vehicle will drive slowly in the selected
direction if the accelerator pedal is Related information
pressed lightly. • Gear selector positions (p. 463)
• Switching off the vehicle (p. 446)
Starting the vehicle 4. Put the gear selector in position D or R.

The vehicle can be started using the start > If One Pedal Drive is activated, the
knob in the tunnel console when a key is in vehicle will drive in the selected direc-
the passenger compartment. tion of travel when the brake pedal is
WARNING released, provided that the car is not on
an uphill slope.
Before starting:
• Buckle your seat belt. vehicle is kept stationary until the
• Adjust the seat, steering wheel and accelerator pedal is depressed.
mirrors.
• Make sure you can fully depress the CAUTION
brake pedal. Start knob in the tunnel console. If the engine has not responded after 3
Make sure the key is in the vehicle1. attempts – wait for 3 minutes before star-
CAUTION ting a new attempt. Starting capability
1. Fasten your seat belt. increases if the starter battery is given time
The vehicle cannot be started if the charg- to recover.
2. Depress the brake pedal2.
ing cable is still plugged in. Make sure that
the charging cable is removed and the 3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release.
charger cover is closed before starting the The starter motor will crank until the engine
> The vehicle starts and the start knob
vehicle. starts or until overheating protection is trig-
returns automatically to its original
gered3.
position.
During normal start conditions, the vehicle's
electric motor will be prioritized and the gaso-
line engine will remain off. This means that
once the start knob is turned clockwise, the
electric motor has been "started" and the vehi-
cle is ready to be driven. The warning and
information symbols in the instrument panel
1 For vehicles with passive start, the key must be in the front section of the passenger compartment.
2 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to turn the start knob clockwise to start the engine.
3 Does not apply for KERS vehicles, which use the generator for starting.
}}
443
|| will go out and the selected theme will be dis- NOTE WARNING
played to indicate that the electric motor is
activated. When the key is placed in the backup • Always remove the key from the pas-
reader, make sure that no other keys, metal senger compartment when you leave
In some situations such as in cold weather or objects or electronic devices (e.g. cellular the vehicle and make sure the ignition
if the hybrid battery's charge level is too low phones, tablets, laptops or chargers) are in is in mode 0.
the gasoline engine will start instead. the backup reader. Multiple keys close to • Always put the gear selector in P and
each other in the backup reader can dis- apply the parking brake before leaving
Error messages
rupt their functionality. the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle
If the Car key not detected message is
shown at start, place the key at the backup unsupervised while the engine is run-
reader and then make a new start attempt. If Vehicle start System check, wait is dis- ning.
played, wait until the message disappears and • Always open the garage door fully and
try again to start the vehicle. make sure that ventilation is very good
before starting the engine in a garage.
NOTE The exhaust fumes produced by the
The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid vehicle contain carbon monoxide,
battery is discharged. which is invisible and odorless but very
toxic.
WARNING
Never remove the key from the vehicle
while driving or while the vehicle is being
towed.
Location of the backup reader in the tunnel console.
WARNING
Never remove the key from the vehicle
while driving.
444
CAUTION NOTE Related information

• Switching off the vehicle (p. 446)
• When starting in cold weather, the With a cold start, idling speed may be con-
automatic transmission may shift up at siderably higher than normal for certain • Switching off the vehicle (p. 446)
slightly higher engine speeds than nor- engine types. This is done to get the emis- • Ignition modes (p. 447)
mal until the automatic transmission sions system up to normal operating tem- • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 228)
fluid reaches normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which min-
perature. imizes exhaust emissions and protects the • Jump starting using another battery
(p. 501)
• Do not race a cold engine immediately environment.
after starting. This could prevent fluids • Jump starting using another battery
(p. 503)
from properly lubricating vital compo-
WARNING
nents in the engine before it has • Selecting ignition mode (p. 448)
reached the proper operating tempera- • Never use more than one inlay mat at a
• Hybrid battery (p. 710)
ture. time on the driver's floor. If any other
type of floor mat is used, remove the • Creep (p. 480)
• The engine should be idling when the
original mat from the driver's seat floor
gear selector is moved. Never acceler-
ate until the gear is fully engaged.
Accelerating rapidly before a gear is
ment points in the floor. Make sure the
properly engaged could lead to harder
floor mat does not impede the move-
wear of components.
ment of the brake pedal or accelerator
• To help prevent the transmission oil pedal in any way, as this could be a
from overheating, select P or N when serious safety hazard.
idling at a standstill for prolonged peri-
ods of time.
• Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-
properly secured in the attachment
points in the floor to help ensure they
cannot slide and become trapped
under the pedals.
445
Switching off the vehicle Switching off the vehicle • Jump starting using another battery
The vehicle switches off automatically from The vehicle can be switched off using the (p. 501)
drive mode when the driver leaves the vehicle start knob in the tunnel console. • Jump starting using another battery
and it is parked. (p. 503)
Automatic deactivation • Selecting ignition mode (p. 448)

1. Apply the parking brake. • Parking brake (p. 454)
2. Open the driver's door.
> The vehicle is now not in drive mode.
Switching off manually via the center

display
The vehicle can be switched off manually.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Tap . Start knob in the tunnel console.
3. Select Controls. To switch off the vehicle:
4. Tap Power off vehicle. – Turn the start knob clockwise and release.
> The vehicle is switched off and the start
5. Follow the instructions in the screen.
knob returns automatically to its origi-
> The vehicle is now not in drive mode. nal position.
Related information If the vehicle rolls:
• Usage mode (p. 449) – Turn the start knob clockwise and hold
• Gear selector positions (p. 463) until the vehicle switches off.
Related information
• Starting the vehicle (p. 443) • Starting the vehicle (p. 442)
446
Ignition modes Mode Functions Mode Functions

The vehicle's ignition can be put in various
modes (levels) to make different functions 0 • The odometer, clock and tem- I • The panoramic roof, power
available. perature gauge are illumi- windows, 12-volt electrical
To enable the use of a limited number of func- natedA. socket in the passenger com-
tions when the engine is not running, the igni- partment, Bluetooth, naviga-
• The power* seats can be
tion can be put in one of three different levels: adjusted. tion, phone, blower and wind-
0, I and II. These levels are referred to as "igni- shield wipers can be used.
• The center display is activated
tion modes" in the Owner's Manual.
and can be usedA. • The power seats can be
The following table shows which functions are adjusted.
• The infotainment system can
• The 12-volt electrical socket* in
available in each ignition mode:
be usedA.
the cargo compartment can be
In this mode, the functions are used.
available for a limited time and
then switch off automatically.
• The 12-volt electrical socket* in
the trunk can be used.
Electrical current will be taken
from the battery in this ignition
mode.
}}
|| Mode Functions Selecting ignition mode automatically return to the original posi-
The vehicle's ignition can be put in various tion.
II • The headlights illuminate. modes (levels) to make different functions • Ignition mode II – Turn the start knob
• Warning/indicator lights illumi- available. clockwise and hold it there for
nate for 5 seconds. approx. 5 seconds. Release the knob,
Selecting an ignition mode which will automatically return to its origi-
• A number of other systems are
activated. However, seat and nal position.
rear window heating can only • Back to ignition mode 0 – To return to
be activated when the engine ignition mode 0 from modes I and II, turn
is running. the start knob clockwise and release it.
This ignition mode uses a lot of The control will automatically return to the
current from the battery and original position.
should be avoided whenever
Related information
possible!
A Also activated when the door is opened.
Related information • Switching off the vehicle (p. 446)
• Starting the vehicle (p. 442) Start knob in the tunnel console. • Switching off the vehicle (p. 446)
• Starting the vehicle (p. 443) • Ignition mode 0 – Unlock the vehicle and • Ignition modes (p. 447)
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 228) keep the key in the passenger compart-
ment.
• Jump starting using another battery • Jump starting using another battery
(p. 501) (p. 501)
NOTE
• Jump starting using another battery • Jump starting using another battery
(p. 503) To set level I or II without engine start – (p. 503)
do not depress the brake pedal when
• Selecting ignition mode (p. 448)
selecting this ignition mode.
• Ignition mode I – Turn the start knob

clockwise and release it. The control will
448
Usage mode The vehicle automatically goes into different shows which functions are available in the dif-
The vehicle has three different usage modes modes: passive, comfort and drive. The table ferent modes.
that make different functions in the vehicle
available.
Position Functions
Passive When the vehicle is unlocked, the following functions are available:
• The instrument panel shows e.g. charging information.
• The power seats can be adjusted.
In this mode, the functions are available for a limited time and then switch off automatically.
Comfort When someone sits in the driver's seat or when the center display is used or started via the media button in the tunnel consoleA:
• The center display can be used.
• The infotainment system starts automatically (same as while driving).
• The climate system starts automatically (same as while driving).
• The power seats can be adjusted.
• Power windows, Bluetooth, navigation, phone and windshield wipers can be used.
• The 12-volt electrical socket in the cargo compartment can be used.
• USB ports can be used.
Drive When the driver is sitting in the driver's seat and a gear position is selected:
All functions are available and the vehicle can be driven.
A Comfort mode switches off when the driver's seat is unoccupied. Use the center display to put the vehicle back into comfort mode. Comfort mode will switch off again when the front passenger
door opens.
Related information
449
Brake functions • Braking assist after a collision (p. 461) Brakes

The vehicle's brakes are used to reduce • Automatic braking at a standstill (Hold) The brake pedal is used to apply the vehicle's
speed or prevent the vehicle from rolling. (p. 459) regular brakes, which are part of the brake
In addition to the wheel brakes and parking system.
• Brake assist at standstill (p. 461)
brakes, the vehicle is also equipped with a The vehicle is equipped with two brake cir-
number of automatic brake assist functions. • Regenerative braking (p. 462) cuits. If one brake circuit is damaged, the
These systems provide assistance by e.g. the • Regenerative braking* (p. 462) brake pedal may go down further when
driver not needing to depress the brake pedal • Assistance during collision risks (p. 349) depressed. More pressure will then be
at a traffic light or when starting up a hill. required from the driver for normal braking
• Warning and auto-braking while backing effect.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, up* (p. 372)
the following brake assist functions may be The driver's pressure on the brake pedal is
included: enhanced by a power braking function.
• Auto-hold brake function at a standstill
(Auto hold) WARNING
• Automatic braking at a standstill (Hold) Power braking only functions if the vehicle
• Hill Start Assist (Hill Start Assist) is running.
• Braking assist after a collision

If the brake pedal is used when the engine is
• Regenerative braking turned off, the pedal will feel stiffer than usual
• Warning and auto-braking while backing and greater pressure must be applied to brake
up the vehicle.
• Assistance at risk of collision If the brake pedal is used when the vehicle is
• Off-road mode switched off, the pedal must be depressed
• Hill Descent Control (Hill Descent with greater pressure, past the normal braking
Control)* position, in order to brake the vehicle.
In very hilly areas or when driving with a heavy
Related information load, gear position B can be used to augment
• Brakes (p. 450) the brakes with engine braking.
• Parking brake (p. 454)
• Auto-hold brakes (p. 459)
Use the Off-road drive mode to increase the low speed. During the test, the brake pedal Symbols in the instrument panel
engine braking effect when driving on steep may feel as though it is pulsating.
Symbol Meaning
downgrades at low speeds.
Light braking charges the hybrid Check the brake fluid level. If the
In very hilly areas or when driving with a heavy battery level is low, fill brake fluid and
load, engine braking in manual gear should be Energy is regenerated to the battery during check to determine the reason
used to augment the brakes. Engine braking is light braking. This converts the vehicle's for the loss of brake fluid.
most effective if the same gear is used both kinetic energy into electrical energy, which is A
uphill and downhill. Use the Off-road* drive used to charge the hybrid battery. When the
mode to increase the engine braking effect battery is being charged using regenerative
when driving on steep downgrades at low braking, this will be indicated in the instru-
speeds. ment panel.
In very hilly areas or when driving with a heavy This function is active at speeds in the range B
load, manual gear shifting can be used to aug- of 150-5 km/h (93-3 mph). When braking at
ment the brakes with engine braking. Engine speeds outside of this range, or during harder Fault in pedal sensor.
braking is most effective if the same gear is braking, the hydraulic braking system is used
used both uphill and downhill. to augment braking.
Anti-lock brakes A
The vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock

Braking System (ABS4), which helps prevent
the wheels from locking and helps maintain
steering control when braking. Vibrations may
be felt from the brake pedal when ABS is B
operating, which is normal.
After the vehicle is started, a brief test of the
ABS system is automatically performed when
the driver releases the brake pedal. An addi-
tional automatic test of the system may be
performed when the vehicle is traveling at a
4 Anti-lock Braking System }}
|| Symbol Meaning WARNING Brake Assist System

If the warning symbols for both brake fault The brake enhancing system, (BAS5), helps
Steady glow for 2 seconds after increase braking force and can thereby
the vehicle is started: Automatic and ABS fault are lit simultaneously, there
may be a fault in the brake system. reduce braking distance.
function check. The system monitors the driver's braking hab-
Steady glow for more than 2
• If the brake fluid reservoir level is nor-
its and increases braking force when neces-
A mal when this occurs, drive carefully to
seconds: Fault in ABS system. sary. Braking force can be increased up to the
the nearest workshop to have the
The vehicle's regular brakes will point at which the ABS intervenes.
brake system checked - an authorized
still work, but without the ABS
Volvo workshop is recommended.
function. NOTE
• If the brake fluid has fallen below the
B MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, When BAS is activated, depress and hold
the vehicle should not be driven until down the brake pedal as long as needed.
In the event of the message: the brake fluid has been filled. The rea-
Brake pedal characteristics son for the brake fluid loss must be Related information
changed Service required checked. • Brakes (p. 450)
The brake pedal must be
depressed with greater pressure, Related information
past the normal braking position, • Brake Assist System (p. 452)
in order to brake the vehicle.
A
B
In Canada.
In the US.
• Braking on wet roads (p. 453)
• Braking on salted roads (p. 453)
• Maintenance of the brake system (p. 453)
5 Brake Assist System
Braking on wet roads Braking on salted roads Maintenance of the brake system
Prolonged driving in heavy rain without brak- When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt Regularly check the brake system compo-
ing may cause braking effect to be slightly may form on the brake discs and brake pads. nents for wear.
delayed the first time the brakes are applied. This could increase stopping distance. Main- To keep the vehicle as safe and reliable as
This may also occur after washing the vehicle. tain an extra large safety distance to the vehi- possible, follow the Volvo service schedule
It will then be necessary to apply greater pres- cle ahead. Make sure to also: specified in the Warranty and Maintenance
sure to the brake pedal. You should therefore Records Information booklet. After replacing
maintain a greater distance to the vehicle
• Apply the brakes from time to time to help
brake pads and brake discs, braking effect is
remove salt. Make sure braking does not
ahead. not adapted until they are "broken in" by driv-
pose a risk to any other road users.
ing a few hundred kilometers (miles). Com-
Firmly apply the brakes after washing the • Gently apply the brakes when you have pensate for the reduced braking effect by
vehicle or driving on wet roads. This helps finished driving and before driving again. applying greater pressure to the brake pedal.
warm up the brake discs, enabling them to dry
Volvo recommends only using brake pads
more quickly and protecting them against cor- Related information
approved for your Volvo.
rosion. Consider the current traffic situation • Brakes (p. 450)
when braking.
• Braking on wet roads (p. 453)
CAUTION
Related information The brake system's components should be
• Brakes (p. 450)
regularly checked for wear.
• Braking on salted roads (p. 453)
Contact a workshop for advice on how to
do this or let a workshop perform the
inspection - an authorized Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Related information
• Brakes (p. 450)
453
Parking brake Related information Activating and deactivating the

The parking brake helps keep the vehicle sta- • Activating and deactivating the parking parking brake
tionary by mechanically locking the rear brake (p. 454) Use the parking brake to help keep the vehi-
wheels. • Activating and deactivating the parking cle stationary when it is parked. When the
brake (p. 456) parking brake is activated, both rear wheels
are locked.
• Parking on a hill (p. 457)
• Parking brake malfunction (p. 457) Activating the parking brake
The parking brake controls are located in the tunnel

console between the seats.
When the electric parking brake is being
applied, a faint sound can be heard from the
The button for the parking brake is located next to
brake's electric motor. This sound can also be
the gear selector.
heard during the automatic function check of
the parking brake. – Tap the button.
If the vehicle is stationary when the parking > The symbol in the instrument panel will
brake is activated, it will only be applied to the illuminate when the parking brake is
rear wheels. If it is activated while the vehicle activated.
is moving, the normal brakes will be used on
all four wheels. Braking will be transferred to
only the rear wheels when the vehicle is
almost stopped.
454
Automatic activation Deactivating the parking brake Symbol in the instrument panel
The parking brake is applied automatically The parking brake is deactivated automatically Symbol Meaning
when a gear position is selected.
• if the vehicle is switched off.
Steady glow: the parking brake
• when the driver removes their seat belt 1. Fasten your seat belt.
is activated.
and/or opens the driver's door. 2. Depress the brake pedal.
Flashing: a fault has occurred in
• if the Hold (automatic braking at a stand- 3. Select gear selector position D or R A the parking brake. Read the mes-
still) function is activated and the vehicle sage in the instrument panel.
> The parking brake will release automat-
has been stationary for a long period of
ically and the symbol in the instrument
time (about 5-10 minutes).
panel will go out.
CAUTION 4. Release the brake pedal.

> If One Pedal Drive is activated, the B
Make sure that the parking brake symbol is
vehicle will not move forward, but
illuminated when leaving the vehicle. A Canadian models.
could begin rolling away if the ground is B US models.
leaning in the same direction as the
Emergency braking selected gear position. Related information
In an emergency, the parking brake can be • Activating and deactivating the parking
activated when the vehicle is moving by push- brake (p. 454)
vehicle will drive slowly in the selected
ing and holding down the button.
direction if the accelerator pedal is • Activating and deactivating the parking
The brakes will then be applied with force in pressed lightly. brake (p. 456)
order to brake the vehicle. The braking process • Regenerative braking (p. 462)
is canceled when the button is released or if NOTE
the accelerator pedal is depressed. • Regenerative braking* (p. 462)
For automatic deactivation to be possible, • Automatic braking at a standstill (Hold)
the driver's seat belt must be buckled or (p. 459)
NOTE
the driver's door closed.
In case of emergency braking at high • Parking brake malfunction (p. 457)
speeds, a signal sounds during the brake • Parking brake (p. 454)
procedure. • Parking on a hill (p. 457)
Activating and deactivating the Symbol in the instrument panel Emergency braking
parking brake Symbol Meaning In an emergency, the parking brake can be
Use the parking brake to help keep the vehi- activated when the vehicle is moving by pull-
cle stationary when it is parked. The symbol will be illuminated ing and holding up the control. The braking
when the parking brake is acti- process is canceled when the control is
Activating the parking brake vated. released or if the accelerator pedal is
A flashing symbol indicates that depressed.
A
a fault has been detected. Read
the message in the instrument NOTE
panel. In case of emergency braking at high
speeds, a signal sounds during the brake
B
procedure.
A
B
Canadian models.
US models.
Deactivating the parking brake
Automatic activation
The parking brake is applied automatically
1. Pull up the control. • when the vehicle is switched off.

> The symbol in the instrument panel will • when the gear selector is moved to P on a
illuminate when the parking brake is steep hill.
activated. • if the auto-hold brake function at a stand-
2. Make sure the vehicle is stationary. still (Auto hold) is activated and
• the vehicle has been stationary for a
prolonged period of time (5-10
minutes).
• the vehicle is switched off.
• the driver has left the vehicle.
456
Deactivating manually Parking on a hill Parking brake malfunction

The parking brake can only be deactivated if Always activate the parking brake when park- If you are unable to deactivate or activate the
the engine is running. ing on a hill. parking brake after several attempts, contact
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. WARNING an authorized Volvo workshop.
A audible warning signal will sound if the park-
2. Press the control down. Always apply the parking brake when parking brake is activated while the vehicle is
> The parking brake will release and the ing on an incline. Selecting a gear or put- being driven.
ting the automatic transmission in P may
symbol in the instrument panel will go
not be sufficient to keep the vehicle sta- If the vehicle must be parked before the prob-
out. tionary in all situations. lem is rectified, turn the wheels as when park-
Deactivating automatically ing on an incline and put the gear selector in
1. Start the vehicle. If the vehicle is pointing uphill: P.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. Choose • Turn the front wheels so they are pointing A audible warning signal will sound if the park-
gear selector position N, D or R and away from the curb. ing brake is activated while the vehicle is
depress the accelerator pedal. being driven.
If the vehicle is pointing downhill:
> The parking brake will release and the
• Turn the front wheels so they are pointing If the vehicle must be parked before the prob-
symbol in the instrument panel will go
toward the curb. lem is rectified, secure the vehicle so that it
out.
cannot roll away.
Heavy load uphill
NOTE Heavy loads, such as a trailer, could cause the To secure the vehicle, make sure it is parked
vehicle to roll backward when the parking on level ground and:
For automatic deactivation to be possible,
brake is released automatically on steep uphill • Block one or more wheels using chocks or
the driver's seat belt must be buckled or
gradients. To help avoid this, pull the control another suitable object.
the driver's door closed.
upward while you are driving away. Release
the control when the vehicle gains traction. • Angle the front wheels toward the curb or
similar.
Related information Related information
• Parking brake malfunction (p. 457) • Activating and deactivating the parking Low battery charge level
brake (p. 454) If the battery charge level is too low, it will not
• Parking brake (p. 454)
be possible to activate or deactivate the park-
• Parking on a hill (p. 457) • Activating and deactivating the parking ing brake. Connect an auxiliary battery to the
brake (p. 456) vehicle if the battery is discharged.
}}
457
|| Replacing brake pads Symbols in the instrument panel Related information

Due to the design of the electric parking Symbol Meaning • Activating and deactivating the parking
brake, the rear brake pads must be replaced brake (p. 454)
by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop A flashing symbol indicates that • Activating and deactivating the parking
is recommended. a fault has been detected. See brake (p. 456)
the message in the instrument
panel. • Parking on a hill (p. 457)
A
• Start battery (p. 703)
• Volvo's service program (p. 670)
Fault in the brake system. See

the message in the instrument
panel.
Information message in the

instrument panel.
A Canadian models.
B US models.
458
Automatic braking at a standstill The parking brake is applied automatically Auto-hold brakes
(Hold) • if the vehicle is switched off. With the Auto-hold brake function, the driver
With the automatic braking at a standstill can release the brake pedal and the brakes
function (Hold), the driver can release the
• when the driver removes their seat belt
will remain applied, for example, when the
and/or opens the driver's door.
brake pedal and the brakes will remain vehicle has stopped at a traffic light or inter-
applied, for example, when the vehicle has • if the function is active and the vehicle has section.
stopped at a traffic light. been stationary for a long period of time When the vehicle stops, the brakes are acti-
(about 5-10 minutes). vated automatically. The function can use
Activating braking at a standstill Hold can also switch over to the parking brake either the normal brakes or the parking brakes
(Hold) in other situations. to keep the vehicle stationary and works on
The function is activated automatically at a flat surfaces or hills. If the driver has their seat
standstill if gear position D or R is selected Related information belt fastened and/or if the driver's door is
and • Brakes (p. 450) closed, the brakes will disengage automati-
• One Pedal Drive is activated • Parking brake (p. 454) cally when the vehicle starts driving.
• the vehicle is at risk of starting to roll. • Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 454) NOTE
Deactivating braking at a standstill • Activating and deactivating the parking When braking to a stop on an uphill or
(Hold) brake (p. 456) downhill gradient, depress the brake pedal
The function is released when the driver
presses the accelerator pedal with a gear posi- • Regenerative braking (p. 462) with slightly more force than usual before
• Regenerative braking* (p. 462) releasing to ensure that the vehicle cannot
tion selected.
move at all.
NOTE
Auto-hold brakes are also deactivated
when the driver moves the gear selector to • if the vehicle is switched off
Neutral position. • when the driver removes their seat belt
and/or opens the driver's door.
• if the Auto hold (automatic braking at a
standstill) function is activated and the
vehicle has been stationary for a long
period of time (about 5-10 minutes).
}}
|| Auto hold can also switch over to the parking Activating and deactivating Auto- • The function will remain off until it is reac-
brake in other situations. hold at a standstill tivated.
Symbols in the instrument panel The Auto-hold brake function at a standstill is • When the function is switched off, brake
activated with the button in the tunnel con- assist will remain active to help prevent
Symbol Meaning sole. the vehicle from rolling backward when
starting up a hill.
This symbol illuminates when the
function is using the normal Related information
brakes to keep the vehicle sta- • Auto-hold brakes (p. 459)
tionary. Note that the normal
brakes may be active even if the • Brake assist at standstill (p. 461)
symbol is not illuminated.
This symbol illuminates when the
function is using the parking
brake to keep the vehicle station-
ary.
A
– Press the button in the tunnel console to

activate or deactivate the function.
> The indicator light in the button will illu-
B minate when the function is activated.
The function will remain active the next
A Canadian models. time the vehicle is started.
B US models.
When shutting off
Related information If the function is active and holding
• Activating and deactivating Auto-hold at a the vehicle stationary using the nor-
standstill (p. 460) mal brakes (A symbol lit in the instru-
• Brakes (p. 450) ment panel), the brake pedal must
• Parking brake (p. 454) be depressed while pressing the button in
order to deactivate Auto-hold.
460
Brake assist at standstill • if the Hold (automatic braking at a stand- Braking assist after a collision
Brake assist can be activated automatically to still) function is activated and the vehicle In a collision in which the activation level is
keep the vehicle stationary in certain situa- has been stationary for a long period of reached for the pyrotechnic seat belt tension-
tions. time (about 5-10 minutes). ers or airbags, or if a collision with a large ani-
Brake assist is also available when Auto hold mal is detected, the vehicle's brakes will be
Related information
is deactivated. automatically activated. This function is
intended to help prevent or reduce the effects
Brake assist is also available when Hold is
• Automatic braking at a standstill (Hold) of any subsequent collision.
deactivated. (p. 459) After a serious collision, it may no longer be
Brake assist is activated: • Brakes (p. 450) possible to control and steer the vehicle. In
• When stationary if gear selector position • Starting the vehicle (p. 442)
order to avoid or mitigate a possible further
D or R is selected and the vehicle is at risk collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehi-
of rolling in the opposite direction to the • Starting the vehicle (p. 443) cle's path, the brake assist system is activated
selected direction of travel • Creep (p. 480) automatically to help stop the vehicle safely.
• When stationary if creep mode is deacti- • Parking brake (p. 454) The brake lights and hazard warning flashers
vated are activated during braking. When the vehicle
Brake assist is deactivated: has stopped, the hazard warning flashers will
• When gear selector position D or R is continue to flash and the parking brake will be
selected and the driver depresses the applied.
accelerator pedal If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a
• When the driver selects gear selector risk of being hit by passing traffic, the driver
position N can override the system by depressing the
accelerator pedal.
This function assumes that the brake system
• if the vehicle is switched off. is intact after a collision.
• when the driver removes their seat belt
and/or opens the driver's door. Related information
• Rear Collision Warning* (p. 363)
• if the Auto hold (automatic braking at a
standstill) function is activated and the • BLIS* (p. 364)
vehicle has been stationary for a long • Brake functions (p. 450)
period of time (about 5-10 minutes).
Regenerative braking Regeneration using the brake pedal Regenerative braking*

The vehicle uses braking energy and regener- – Depress the brake pedal. The vehicle recovers kinetic energy during
ates current to the battery when the driver > The vehicle brakes and charging is indi- braking in order to reduce fuel consumption
releases the accelerator pedal or when the cated in the instrument panel. and emissions.
brake pedal is used. The function is available in all drive modes
One Pedal Drive together with gear selector position D or M.
One Pedal Drive is well suited to urban driving.
With One Pedal Drive, the vehicle can be con- The function is available in all drive modes
veniently driven by simply depressing and together with gear selector position D or B.
releasing the accelerator pedal, without need- Activating brake regeneration
ing to use the brake pedal. – Depress the brake pedal.
Activating or deactivating regenerative > The vehicle brakes and regenerates
braking energy.
1. Tap in the center display. Regeneration increases during engine braking
if manual gear selector position M is selected.
2. Select Driving.
Regeneration increases during engine braking
3. Activate or deactivate One Pedal Drive.
Indication in the instrument panel during regenera- if manual gear selector position B is selected.
tive braking. Related information Symbols in the instrument panel
Regeneration using the accelerator • Winter driving (p. 527) If the vehicle is a mild hybrid,
pedal • Power meter (p. 105) a battery symbol will be
– Release the accelerator pedal. shown on the right side of the
instrument panel.
> The vehicle brakes and charging is indi-
cated in the instrument panel.
NOTE When the battery is being

charged, for example through
If the braking effect exceeds a certain level,
regenerative braking, it is
the brake light will come on.
indicated by this symbol.
Related information Transmission Gear selector positions

• Drive modes* (p. 474) The transmission is part of the vehicle's drive- Gear position is selected automatically to
• Drive modes (p. 475) line (power transmission) between the engine make driving as energy efficient as possible.
and the drive wheels. The function of the The transmission also has a manual mode.
• Shifting gears with automatic transmis-
transmission is to change gears depending
sion (p. 464)
on speed and power needs.
The vehicle has an 8-speed automatic trans-
mission and an electric motor for rear-wheel
drive. The number of gears allows the engine's
torque and power band to be effectively uti-
lized.
Two of the gears are overdrive gears that save
fuel when driving at a constant engine speed.
The selected gear selector position will be dis-
The vehicle has a seven- or eight-speed auto- Overview of gear selector and gear shift pattern in
matic transmission. The number of gears the instrument panel.
allows the engine's torque and power band to
be effectively utilized.
Two of the gears are overdrive gears that save
fuel when driving at a constant engine speed.
The selected gear selector position will be dis-
Related information
• Gear selector positions (p. 463)
Overview of gear selector and gear shift pattern in

the instrument panel.
}}
|| The selected gear selector position is dis- Shifting gears with automatic
played in the instrument panel: transmission
P, R, N, D or M. Change gear position by pushing the spring-
loaded gear selector forward or rearward, or
P, R, N, D or B. to the side for manual shifting.
Related information Selecting gears
• Shifting gears with automatic transmis-
sion (p. 464)
• Shiftlock (p. 467)
• The kickdown function (p. 467)
• The Launch function* (p. 468)
Gear selector and gear selector positions overview.
• Transmission symbols and messages
(p. 468)
• Transmission symbols and messages
(p. 468)
Gear selector and gear selector positions overview.
Gear selector positions WARNING Reverse – R

Parking – P Select R when backing up. The vehicle must
Always apply the parking brake when park- be stationary when R is selected.
ing on an incline. Selecting a gear or put-
ting the automatic transmission in P may Neutral – N
not be sufficient to keep the vehicle sta- In N position, the vehicle can roll freely. The
tionary in all situations. vehicle can be started when it is in N position.
Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta-
tionary with the gear selector in the N posi-
NOTE
tion.
The gear selector must be in position P in
order to lock the vehicle and set the alarm. To move to another gear position when N is
selected, the brake pedal must be depressed
and the engine running.
Help functions
D drive mode
The system will switch to the P position auto- D is the normal driving gear position. The
Gear selector and P position overview.
matically: transmission shifts up or down automatically
Parking is activated using the P button located depending on acceleration and speed.
next to the gear selector. • if the ignition is switched off while D or R
is selected and the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle must be stationary when the gear
In the P position, the transmission is mechani-
• if the vehicle is moving at low speed and selector is moved from R to D.
cally locked. the driver unbuckles their seat belt and
Select P position when the vehicle is parked. opens the driver's door without any pedal NOTE
The vehicle can be started when it is in P posi- being depressed.
To facilitate parking and other low-speed
tion. The vehicle must be stationary when P is To park a vehicle with an unbuckled seat belt maneuvers, the gear selector can be
selected. and open door – end P mode by shifting to R moved between D and R at very low
When parking – apply the parking brake or D again. speeds without depressing the brake
before shifting to position P. If the vehicle is switched off in gear position pedal.
N, it will not automatically switch to the P
position. This makes it possible to wash the
vehicle in an automatic car wash.
}}
465
|| Brake – B6 Manual position – M Related information

• The kickdown function (p. 467)
Brake position in instrument panel overview.

With position M, it is possible to shift gears
With position B, it is possible to shift gears manually. Engine braking will occur when the
manually. When the accelerator pedal is accelerator pedal is released.
released, the electric motor brakes the vehicle
M position is selected by moving the gear
and the hybrid battery is recharged at the
selector rearward from D.
same time.
B position is selected by moving the gear • Push the gear selector to the right toward
"+" (plus) and release to shift up one gear.
selector rearward from D.
• Push the gear selector to the left toward
• Push the gear selector to the right toward "–" (minus) and release to shift down one
"+" (plus) and release to shift up one gear. gear.
• Push the gear selector to the left toward
• Push the gear selector rearward to return
"–" (minus) and release to shift down one to D mode.
gear.
For smooth shifting and engine performance,
• Push the gear selector rearward to return the transmission will shift down automatically
to D mode. if the vehicle's speed becomes too low for the
selected gear.
6 Brake position B is not available in drive mode Pure
466
Shiftlock There is no mechanical shiftlock function.7 The kickdown function

The automatic transmission's shiftlock func- Kickdown can be used when maximum
tion helps prevent inadvertently moving the Related information acceleration is needed e.g. when passing.
gear selector between different positions. • Gear selector positions (p. 463) When the accelerator pedal is depressed all
• Shifting gears with automatic transmis- the way to the floor (past the normal full accel-
Automatic shiftlock sion (p. 464) erator position), the transmission will auto-
The automatic shiftlock has a separate safety matically engage kickdown, i.e. immediately
system. shift down to a lower gear.
From Park – P or Neutral – N If the accelerator pedal is released from the
To move the gear selector from P or N to kickdown position, the transmission will auto-
another gear selector position, the engine matically shift up again.
must be running, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition must be in mode II. Safety function
The transmission control module is equipped
If the gear selector is in N and the vehicle has with a downshift protection feature to help
been stationary for at least 3 seconds (with or prevent the engine from overheating.
without the engine running), the gear selector
will be locked in that position. In some conditions, the transmission will pre-
vent downshifting/kickdown if this would lead
The brake pedal must be depressed in order to to such high engine speed (rpm) that the
move to another gear selector position. engine could be damaged. If the driver still
attempts downshifting or kickdown at a high
The gear selector can always be moved for-
rpm, nothing will happen and the original gear
ward and rearward, but to change to a new
will remain selected.
gear selector position, the brake pedal must
be depressed. With kickdown, the vehicle can downshift one
or more steps at a time depending on the
Messages in the instrument panel engine speed. The vehicle upshifts when the
If the gear selector is locked in position, a engine reaches its maximum rpm to prevent
message will appear in the instrument panel, engine damage.
e.g. Press brake pedal to activate gear
lever. Related information
7 Applies for vehicles with the small gear selector
467
The Launch function* Transmission symbols and Transmission symbols and

Launch can be used to provide maximum messages messages
acceleration from a standstill. The function is If a problem occurs with the transmission, a If a problem occurs with the transmission, a
available for the drive modes: Hybrid, symbol and a message are displayed in the symbol and a message are displayed in the
Constant AWD and Power. instrument panel. instrument panel.
Launch can be used to provide maximum Symbol Meaning CAUTION
acceleration from a standstill. Check the operating temperature of the
A fault has occurred in the trans-
mission. transmission to help avoid damage to any
Activating Launch
of the drive system components. If there is
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and Read the message in the instru- a risk of overheating, a warning symbol will
that the wheels are pointing straight ahead. ment panel. appear in the instrument panel and a text
1. Put the gear selector in D position. Temporary fault in driveline. message will be displayed. Follow the rec-
2. Depress the brake pedal fully. ommendations given.
Read the message in the instru-
3. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal. ment panel.
Symbol Meaning
4. Release the brake pedal within 2 seconds.
Related information
A fault has occurred in the trans-
mission.
NOTE
If the Launch function does not work, wait Read the message in the instru-
a few minutes to let the driveline reach ment panel.
working temperature before trying again.
Hot or overheated transmission.
Read the message in the instru-
CAUTION ment panel.
The driveline is exposed to wear when
Temporary fault in driveline.
using Launch and the function is therefore
only available a limited number of times. Read the message in the instru-
ment panel.
Related information
Related information
All Wheel Drive (AWD)* All Wheel Drive (AWD)* Drive systems
All-wheel drive (AWD8),
also called four- All-wheel drive (AWD10), also called four- The vehicle combines a combustion engine
wheel drive, means that power is distributed wheel drive, means that power is distributed for the front wheels and an electric motor for
to all four wheels, which improves traction. to all four wheels, which improves traction. the rear wheels.
The electric motor that powers the rear wheels The electric motor that powers the rear wheels The vehicle is powered by the electric motor.
enables electric all-wheel drive functionality9. enables electronic all-wheel drive functionality.
All-wheel drive reacts differently depending on
Related information which drive mode is selected.
Two drive systems
• Gear selector positions (p. 463) Depending on the selected drive mode and
To achieve the best traction, power is auto- power available in the electric motor, the drive
matically directed to the wheels that have the systems can either be used separately or in
best grip. The system continuously calculates tandem.
the need for torque to the rear wheels, and
Both the combustion engine and the electric
can immediately redistribute up to half of the
motor can generate power directly to the
engine's torque to the rear wheels.
wheels. An advanced control system coordi-
All-wheel drive also has a stabilizing effect at nates both the drive systems to help optimize
higher speeds. In normal driving conditions, driving economy.
most of the engine's power is directed to the
front wheels. When the vehicle is stationary,
all-wheel drive is always activated in prepara-
tion for maximum traction during acceleration.
All-wheel drive reacts differently depending on
which drive mode is selected.
Related information
• Drive modes* (p. 474)
• Drive modes (p. 475)
• Transmission (p. 463)
8 All-wheel drive
9 Vehicles with two electric motors.
10 All-wheel drive
}}
|| engine. Can provide the combustion ily power the electrical air conditioning to
engine with extra electrical current. precondition the passenger compartment.
Electric motor - Powers the vehicle using Combustion engine - The combustion
electricity. Can provide extra torque and engine starts when the charge level in the
power during acceleration. Provides elec- hybrid battery is too low to provide the
trical all-wheel drive functionality. Regen- power output requested by the driver.
erates braking energy into electrical cur- High-voltage generator12 - Charges the
rent. hybrid battery. Starter for the combustion
engine. Can provide the combustion
engine with extra electrical current.
Electric motor - Powers the vehicle using
electricity. Can provide extra torque and
Hybrid battery - The hybrid battery's func-
power during acceleration. Provides elec-
tion is to store electrical current. This
trical all-wheel drive functionality. Regen-
energy is provided by plugging the charg-
erates braking energy into electrical cur-
ing cable into an electrical outlet, through
rent.
regenerative braking or from the high-volt-
age generator. This provides current to
power the electric motor and to temporar-
ily power the electrical air conditioning to
precondition the passenger compartment.
Combustion engine - The combustion tion is to store electrical current. This
engine starts when the charge level in the energy is provided by plugging the charg-
hybrid battery is too low to provide the ing cable into an electrical outlet, through
power output requested by the driver. regenerative braking or from the high-volt-
High-voltage generator11 - Charges the age generator. This provides current to
hybrid battery. Starter for the combustion power the electric motor and to temporar-
11 CISG (Crank Integrated Starter Generator) – combined high-voltage generator and starter.
470
engine. Can provide the combustion ily power the electrical air conditioning to
rent.
14 CISG (Crank Integrated Starter Generator) – combined high-voltage generator and starter. }}
471
|| engine. Can provide the combustion ily power the electrical air conditioning to
rent.
472
Related information
• General information about charging
(p. 404)
• General information about electric vehi-
cles (p. 406)
• Transmission (p. 463)
• Range (p. 484)
Electric motor17 – The vehicle contains Electric motor18 – The vehicle contains
two electric motors that power the vehicle two electric motors that power the vehicle
and regenerate braking energy into electri- and regenerate braking energy into electri-
cal current. cal current.
High-voltage battery – The vehicle con- High-voltage battery – The vehicle con-
tains a high-voltage battery. The function tains a high-voltage battery. The function
of the high-voltage battery is to store of the high-voltage battery is to store
energy. This current is provided by plug- energy. This current is provided by plug-
ging the charging cable into an electrical ging the charging cable into an electrical
outlet and through regenerative braking. outlet and through regenerative braking.
Electric motor – The vehicle's electric Electric motor – The vehicle's electric
motor powers the vehicle and regenerates motor powers the vehicle and regenerates
braking energy into electric current. braking energy into electric current.
12 V battery – The vehicle contains a 12 V 12 V battery – The vehicle contains a 12 V
battery that starts up the vehicle's electri- battery that starts up the vehicle's electri-
cal system and powers the electrical cal system and powers the electrical
equipment in the vehicle. equipment in the vehicle.
17 Applies to vehicles with two electric motors.

18 Applies to vehicles with two electric motors.
Drive modes* Indication in the instrument panel Polestar Engineered

Adapt the drive mode to the vehicle's current In Polestar Engineered mode, gear shifting
driving situation. is faster and more distinct and the transmis-
sion prioritizes gears with a higher traction
Available drive modes force. Steering response is faster and suspen-
There are three available drive modes: sion is stiffer.
Comfort, Polestar Engineered and Off-
Volvo recommends Polestar Engineered
road.
mode when sportier driving characteristics
Vehicles that are not equipped with Polestar and faster acceleration response are desired.
Engineered have the drive modes Comfort
To keep in mind when using Polestar
and Off-road.
Engineered mode
Each drive mode is adapted to help optimize • ground clearance is lower to reduce body
driving characteristics in terms of: The illustration is generic roll when cornering
• steering The selected drive mode is indicated in the • the Start/Stop function is deactivated.
• engine/transmission/all-wheel drive* instrument panel.
Off-road
• brakes Comfort In Off-road mode, steering is light and all-
• pneumatic suspension* and shock absorb- The vehicle starts in Comfort mode. This set- wheel drive* and the low-speed function with
ers ting offers driving comfort, light steering and assistance for driving downhill (Hill Descent
soft suspension. This drive mode is certified Control) are activated.
• shock absorbers
for carbon dioxide emissions. Volvo recommends using Off-road mode
• instrument panel
Volvo recommends using Comfort mode when increased traction is desired and when
• the Start/Stop function
when driving on freeways, highways, etc. driving in difficult terrain or on poor roads.
• climate control settings.
To keep in mind when using Comfort mode
• the Start/Stop function is activated at
start.
To keep in mind when using Off-road mode • Start/Stop function (p. 480) Drive modes
• the Start/Stop function is deactivated • All Wheel Drive (AWD)* (p. 469) Adapt the drive mode to the vehicle's current
• ground clearance is higher19 driving situation.
• All Wheel Drive (AWD)* (p. 469)
• this drive mode is only available at low • User profiles (p. 139) Available drive modes
speeds There are five available drive modes: Hybrid,
• fuel consumption may increase
Pure, Power20, Constant AWD* and Off-
road.
NOTE There are four available drive modes: Hybrid,
This drive mode is not designed to be used Pure, Power21 and Constant AWD*.
for normal street driving. Each drive mode is adapted to help optimize
driving characteristics in terms of:
NOTE • steering
Due to the increased ground clearance, if • engine/transmission/all-wheel drive
the Off-road mode was selected when the • brakes
engine was switched off, the suspension
will lower when the engine is restarted. • leveling control* and suspension
• shock absorbers
CAUTION • instrument panel

• climate control settings.
Do not use the Off-road drive mode when
towing a trailer without an electrical con-
nection. This could result in damage to the
pneumatic suspension system's bellows.
Related information
• Changing drive mode* (p. 478)
19 Only vehicles equipped with pneumatic suspension

20 Power mode is also available in a Polestar* version }}
|| WARNING tion is adapted with regard to performance, Pure

fuel consumption and comfort. Driving In Pure mode, use of the vehicle's electric
Do not leave the vehicle in an unventilated capacity on the electric motor alone is deter- motor is prioritized. This drive mode is availa-
area with a drive mode activated and the mined by factors such as the hybrid battery's
combustion engine switched off. The ble when the hybrid battery is sufficiently
engine will start automatically if the charge charge level, the need for heat or cooling in charged. If the charge level of the battery is
level in the hybrid battery is low and the the passenger compartment, etc. too low, the vehicle's characteristics are adap-
resulting exhaust gases can be very harm- Volvo recommends using Hybrid mode for ted to lower energy consumption as much as
ful to people and animals. possible.
daily driving.
To keep in mind when using Hybrid mode Volvo recommends using Pure mode for daily
Indication in the instrument panel driving.
• at high speeds, ground clearance is auto-
matically adjusted to a lower level22
• all-wheel drive is automatically engaged
as needed
• at low charge levels, the hybrid battery
starts the gasoline engine more frequently.
Charge the vehicle or activate Charge
under Battery usage in the center display
to drive on the electric motor alone.
• at high charge levels, the vehicle can run
on electricity alone. The gasoline engine
will start when the current in the battery
The selected drive mode is indicated in the cannot supply the power requested by the
instrument panel. accelerator pedal.
Hybrid • lightly depressing the brake pedal regen-

erates energy back to the hybrid battery.
The vehicle starts in Hybrid mode. Both the
electric motor and the gasoline engine are
used – separately or in tandem – and utiliza-
21 Power mode is also available in a Polestar* version

22 For vehicles with leveling control.
476
To keep in mind when using Pure mode NOTE Volvo recommends Power mode when sport-
• ground clearance is lower22 to reduce air ier driving characteristics and faster accelera-
resistance The combustion engine may start tempo- tion response are desired.
rarily in certain situations when Pure drive
• some climate settings are adjusted mode is used. This is to provide the wheels To keep in mind when using Power mode
• on slippery roads, slightly more wheel spin with the desired torque in driving situations • a lower ground clearance22 helps reduce
may be permitted before all-wheel drive is that require higher loads, such as when body roll when cornering
activated towing a trailer or driving up a hill. • fuel consumption may increase.
Pure mode is available as long as the hybrid
battery has a high enough charge level and Constant AWD*
NOTE Constant AWD mode improves the vehicle's
power, which can be affected by temperature.
When the gasoline engine starts, the vehicle Because there is no sound from the engine traction with increased all-wheel drive. An
automatically switches to Hybrid mode until it when only the electric motor is running, adapted distribution between front and rear
is possible for the driver to select Pure mode the vehicle is equipped with artificial exte- axle torque provides effective control, stability
rior background noise at low speeds and and traction.
again.
when reversing. This warning sound is Volvo recommends using Constant AWD
The gasoline engine starts: intended to help warn children, pedes- mode on slippery roads or when towing a
• if the battery's charge level is too low trians, cyclists, animals, etc. outside the heavy trailer or another vehicle.
vehicle of the vehicle's approach.
• if the driver presses the accelerator pedal
all the way down. Off-road
Power2324 In Off-road mode, ground clearance is high22,
Pure mode is not available: steering is light, and all-wheel drive and the
Power mode adjusts the combined output of
• if the battery's charge level is too low the electric motor and the gasoline engine to low-speed function with assistance for driving
downhill (Hill Descent Control) are activated.
• if the vehicle's speed exceeds 140 km/h enhance performance and response during
(87 mph) (does not apply on downhill gra- acceleration as much as possible. Gear shift- Volvo recommends using Off-road mode
dients, etc.) ing will be faster and more distinct and the when increased traction is desired and when
• if factors such as cold weather affect the transmission will prioritize gears with a higher driving in difficult terrain or on poor roads.
system or components. traction force. Steering response is faster and
suspension is stiffer.

23 This drive mode only applies to vehicles with a maximum output over 300 kW.
24 This drive mode only applies to vehicles with a maximum output over 300 kW. Power mode is also available in a Polestar* version. }}
|| To keep in mind when using Off-road mode Polestar*25 Changing drive mode*
• This drive mode is only available at low Polestar mode adjusts the combined output Select the drive mode that is adapted to the
speeds, up to 40 km/h (25 mph). If this of the electric motor and the gasoline engine current driving conditions.
speed is exceeded, Off-road mode will be to enhance performance and response during Keep in mind that not all drive modes are
cancelled and Constant AWD mode will acceleration as much as possible. Gear shift- available in all situations.
be activated instead. ing will be faster and more distinct and the
transmission will prioritize gears with a higher Change drive mode in the center display.
• fuel consumption may increase.
traction force. Steering response is faster and Tap .
1.
suspension is stiffer.
NOTE 2. Select Driving.
Volvo recommends Polestar mode when
This drive mode is not designed to be used 3. Select a drive mode.
sportier driving characteristics and faster
for normal street driving.
acceleration response are desired.
Related information
To keep in mind when using Polestar mode • Drive modes* (p. 474)
NOTE
• a lower ground clearance22 helps reduce • Drive modes (p. 475)
Due to the increased ground clearance, if body roll when cornering
the Off-road mode was selected when the
• fuel consumption may increase.
engine was switched off, the suspension
will lower when the engine is restarted. Related information
• Changing drive mode* (p. 478)
CAUTION • Range (p. 484)
Do not use the Off-road drive mode when • Battery gauge (p. 104)
towing a trailer without an electrical con- • General information about charging
nection. This could result in damage to the (p. 404)
pneumatic suspension system's bellows. • General information about electric vehi-
cles (p. 406)
25 Applies to Polestar Engineered vehicles.

Smart energy distribution using Off-road mode NOTE

navigation An adapted mode for low speeds that
Off-road mode is not designed to be used
Distribute electrical current as efficiently as improves the vehicle's traction and handling
for normal street driving.
possible for the entire route using Google in difficult terrain and on steep gradients and
Maps. poor roads.
In Hybrid drive mode, the Drive mode Off-road gives a high ground Activating or deactivating Off-road
vehicle is powered by both clearance*, light steering, extended four wheel 1. Tap in the center display.
the electric motor and the drive* as well as activated low speed function
2. Select Driving.
gasoline engine. If a destina- with downhill assistance. This gives increased
tion has been selected in engine braking that makes it possible to 3. Activate or deactivate Off-road mode.
Google Maps, the vehicle will increase or reduce the vehicle's speed on
The function is deactivated when the vehicle is
calculate the most energy- steep gradients with only the accelerator
switched off.
efficient way to distribute the electrical current pedal, without using the normal brakes.
throughout the trip. The calculation takes into The speed is regulated using the accelerator Related information
account factors such as speed limits, traffic pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released, • Regenerative braking (p. 462)
and altitude differences the vehicle brakes to a very low speed regard- • Regenerative braking* (p. 462)
Using smart energy distribution less of how steep the hill is and without the
Select a destination in Google Maps and make brakes needing to be applied.
sure that the following criteria are met: The brake lights illuminate when the vehicle is
braking/speed is reduced. The driver can also
• Hybrid drive mode must be selected.
depress the brake pedal to reduce creep
• Battery usage is set to Auto in the set- speed or to stop the vehicle.
tings for Driving in the center display.
Keep in mind that:
Related information • The mode is only available at low speeds,
• Destinations in Google Maps (p. 580) up to 40 km/h (25 mph). If this speed is
• Regenerative braking (p. 462) exceeded, Off-road drive mode switches
• Regenerative braking* (p. 462) off.
• Range (p. 484)
Creep Start/Stop function • the driver is making large steering wheel

Creep mode can simplify driving at lower Start/Stop is a function that temporarily movements
speeds, such as in stop-and-go traffic or in switches off the engine when the vehicle has • the road gradient is very steep
parking lots. stopped, e.g. at a traffic light or in heavy traf-
• the hood is open
When the function is active, the vehicle will fic, and then starts it again automatically
move slowly in the selected direction of travel when needed. • ABS has been activated
without the accelerator pedal being used. The Start/Stop function reduces fuel con- • hard braking (even if the ABS system has
sumption, which can in turn contribute to an not been activated)
Activate or deactivate creep mode environmentally conscious driving style and • the start battery's charge has dropped
1. Tap in the center display. reduced emissions. below the minimum level
2. Select Driving. To keep in mind when using the Start/ • many starts during a short period of time
3. Deactivate One Pedal Drive. Stop function have triggered the starter motor's over-
Certain conditions must be met for Start/Stop heating protection
> Creep is now activated.
to function. • the exhaust system's particulate filter is
full
NOTE The Start/Stop function is not activated
If creep mode is activated when stationary, The engine may not switch off/the function • a trailer is connected to the vehicle's elec-
may not be activated due to one or more of trical system.
the accelerator pedal must be depressed
for the function to work. the following criteria:
• the driver has not fastened their seat belt NOTE
Related information • the vehicle has not reached a speed of High electrical current consumption may
• Starting the vehicle (p. 442) about 10 km/h (6 mph) after start or after cause the battery capacity to drop below
the function has been activated a number the minimum permitted level, which will
• Starting the vehicle (p. 443) temporarily limit the Start/Stop function.
of times in succession
• Regenerative braking (p. 462) The engine will then start automatically
• the engine has not reached its normal
without the driver lifting their foot from the
• Regenerative braking* (p. 462) operating temperature
brake pedal.
• windshield heating is activated
• the climate system settings and the actual
climate in the passenger compartment dif-
fer
The Start/Stop function is not deactivated WARNING Activating and deactivating the
The engine may not start/the function may not Start/Stop function
be deactivated due to one or more of the fol- Do not open the hood when the Start/Stop
function is active. Switch off the engine The Start/Stop function is available when the
lowing criteria: normally before raising the hood. vehicle is started. When the function is acti-
• the driver has not fastened their seat belt vated, the engine is temporarily switched off.
The engine then starts automatically when
• gear selector position P is engaged and Related information the function is deactivated or when the vehi-
the driver's door is open. • Activating and deactivating the Start/Stop
cle requires this.
The Start/Stop function is deactivated function (p. 481)
without the brake pedal being released • Drive modes* (p. 474) Activating the Start/Stop function
The function may be deactivated and the – Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
engine may start without the driver releasing > The Start/Stop function is activated
the brake pedal in the following cases: and the engine switches off.
• high levels of condensation on the inside
of the windows NOTE
• the climate system settings and the actual • In some cases, the Start/Stop function
climate in the passenger compartment dif- can be activated before the vehicle is
fer completely stationary.
• the brake pedal is pumped repeatedly • When Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot
Assist is activated, the Start/Stop
• the hood is open
function is activated a few seconds
• the start battery's charge has dropped after the vehicle is completely station-
below the minimum level ary.
• the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
gear selector is in position D or N
• the gear selector is moved from position D
to R or M
• the driver's door is open with the gear
selector in position D.
}}
|| NOTE NOTE Symbol Meaning

All of the vehicle's ordinary systems, such When the Start/Stop function is deacti- White – the function is available.
as lighting and radio, function normally vated and:
even when the Start/Stop function is acti-
vated.
• the automatic brakes at standstill func-
tion (Auto hold) is activated, the engine
However, the function of certain equip- will not start until the accelerator pedal Green – the function is activated.
ment may be temporarily reduced, such as is depressed
the climate system's blower speed or the • Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot Assist
volume of the speakers. is activated, the engine will start when
Gray – the function is not availa-
the accelerator pedal is depressed or
ble.
Deactivating the Start/Stop function the button on the steering wheel's
– Release the brake pedal or lightly press left-side keypad is pressed
the accelerator pedal.
• the vehicle is on an uphill gradient,
> The Start/Stop function is deactivated If no symbol is shown in the instrument panel,
HSA26 will activate to help prevent the
and the engine starts. the function is switched off.
vehicle from rolling backward
• the vehicle is on a downhill gradient, Related information
release the brake pedal slightly. A • Start/Stop function (p. 480)
slight increase in speed starts the • Brake assist at standstill (p. 461)
engine.
Symbols in the instrument panel • Transmission (p. 463)

The tachometer in the instrument panel indi-
cates when the Start/Stop function is: availa-
ble, active or not available.
26 Hill Start Assist
482
Economical driving • Maintain a steady speed and a generous • Auto-hold brakes (p. 459)
To achieve the longest possible driving range, following distance to traffic ahead to mini- • Battery use (p. 486)
the driver should plan the trip and adapt driv- mize braking.
ing style and speed to the current situation. • When braking, the hybrid battery is
charged by braking lightly using the brake
Before driving pedal.
• Whenever possible, precondition the vehi-
cle before driving by connecting the • Higher speeds increase energy consump-
charging cable to an electrical outlet. tion because air resistance increases with
speed.
• If preconditioning is not possible when it
is cold outside, use seat and steering • In a cold climate, reduce heating of the
wheel heating first. Avoid heating the windshield/rear window, mirrors, seats
entire passenger compartment to reduce and the steering wheel.
the amount of current being taken from • Avoid driving with the windows open.
the hybrid battery. • Do not use the accelerator pedal to keep
• The type of tires and inflation pressure the vehicle stationary on an uphill gradi-
used could affect energy consumption – ent. Instead, activate the auto-hold brake
consult an authorized Volvo retailer for function at a standstill.
advice on suitable tires. • If possible, turn off the climate system
• Remove unnecessary items from the vehi- when driving shorter distances after pre-
cle - the heavier the load, the higher the conditioning.
fuel consumption.
After driving
While driving • If possible, park in a climate-controlled
• Activate Pure drive mode. garage with vehicle charging outlets or
stations.
• Activate the Hold function at high speeds
when traveling farther than is possible Related information
using the hybrid battery's capacity. • Regenerative braking (p. 462)
• Whenever possible, avoid using the • Regenerative braking* (p. 462)
Charge function to charge the hybrid bat-
tery. • Range (p. 484)
• Checking tire pressure (p. 593)
Range Factors affecting range include:

A number of factors can affect vehicle range. • speed
The ability to achieve a long driving range var-
ies according to the outside conditions and to
• climate control settings
how the vehicle is driven. • topography
A number of factors can affect electric driving • preconditioning
range. The ability to achieve a long driving • tires and tire pressure
range varies according to the outside condi- • the current traffic situation
tions and to how the vehicle is driven.
• temperature and weather
The certified value for the vehicle's range • road conditions.
should not be considered an expected driving
range. The certified value is obtained during Range in cold temperatures
The estimated range is shown in the instru- In cold ambient tempera-
special test cycles and is primarily intended to ment panel.
be used for comparisons between different tures, the battery may
vehicles. When the vehicle leaves the factory, or after a become cold, which will
factory reset, range is based on the certified adversely affect range. If the
Range in the instrument panel value. Once the vehicle has been driven for a battery drops to a critically
while, range is instead based on historical low temperature, this symbol
driving patterns. is shown in the instrument
panel. If the vehicle is parked in cold ambient
The amount of history used depends on the
temperatures, the range could be drastically
battery's charge level. The lower the charge
reduced. To avoid extremely reduced range
level of the battery, the more quickly the range
after parking in cold ambient temperatures,
adapts to changed driving patterns. The esti-
the vehicle should be charged while it is
mated range is shown in the instrument panel
parked.
when it falls below 50 km (30 miles).
Factors affecting driving range
There are a number of other factors in addition
to historical trip data that affect range. The
longest range is achieved under very favorable
conditions when all factors positively influence
range.
484
Range based on speed and ambient Higher ambient temperature and deactivated Economical driving
temperature climate system are also more favorable for To achieve the longest possible driving range,
range. the driver should plan the trip and adapt driv-
ing style and speed to the current situation.
Related information
• Economical driving (p. 485) Before driving
• Economical driving (p. 483) • Whenever possible, precondition the vehi-
cle before driving by connecting the
charging cable to an electrical outlet.
• Range assistant (p. 487)
• If preconditioning is not possible when it
is cold outside, use seat and steering
wheel heating first. Avoid heating the
entire passenger compartment to reduce
the amount of current being taken from
20 °C (68 °F) ambient temperature and the battery.
passenger compartment climate control • The type of tires and inflation pressure
off. used could affect energy consumption –
20 °C (68 °F) ambient temperature and consult an authorized Volvo workshop for
passenger compartment climate control advice on suitable tires.
on. • Remove unnecessary items from the vehi-
35 °C (95 °F) ambient temperature and cle - the heavier the load, the higher the
passenger compartment climate control fuel consumption.
on.
While driving
-10 °C (14 °F) ambient temperature and • Maintain a steady speed and a generous
passenger compartment climate control following distance to traffic ahead to mini-
on. mize braking.
The graph shows the approximate relationship • When braking, the battery is charged by:
between constant speed and driving range. • braking lightly using the brake pedal.
Driving at a lower constant speed helps
increase the electric motor's driving range. • release the accelerator pedal and
make sure that regenerative braking is
activated.
}}
485
|| • Higher speeds increase energy consump- Battery use Activating Hold or Charge
tion because air resistance increases with Use the Hold and Charge functions to help Activate in the center display.
speed. control the charge level of the hybrid battery
1. Tap .
• In a cold climate, reduce heating of the while driving.
windshield/rear window, mirrors, seats Hold and Charge are available in all drive 2. Select Driving.
and the steering wheel. modes. The functions will switch off if Pure 3. Activate the desired function next to
• Avoid driving with the windows open. drive mode is activated. Battery usage.
• Do not use the accelerator pedal to keep Hold In Hybrid drive mode with
the vehicle stationary on an uphill gradi- When Hold is activated, the battery usage set to Auto,
ent. Instead, activate the auto-hold brake charge in the hybrid battery smart energy distribution
function at a standstill. will be retained for use at a with Google Maps can be
• If possible, turn off the climate system later time, for example when used to help ensure the vehi-
when driving shorter distances after pre- driving in city traffic. cle is driven in the most
conditioning. energy-efficient way possible
The vehicle will function as in normal hybrid along the entire route.
After driving
• If possible, park in a climate-controlled driving with a discharged battery - in addition Related information
garage with vehicle charging outlets or to reusing energy from e.g. regenerative brak-
ing, the combustion engine will be used more
• Range (p. 484)
stations.
frequently to maintain the charge in the bat- • Economical driving (p. 485)
Related information tery. • Battery gauge (p. 104)
• Range (p. 484) • Smart energy distribution using navigation
Charge
• Regenerative braking (p. 462) When Charge is activated,
(p. 479)
• Regenerative braking* (p. 462) the hybrid battery is charged • Destinations in Google Maps (p. 580)
• Checking tire pressure (p. 593) using the gasoline engine for
increased use of the electric
motor at a later time.
Range assistant Optimize range NOTE

The range assistant supplies the driver with The range optimization function adjusts the
climate settings to save energy and thus Heater power is reduced in cold ambient
general information and assistance to facili-
extend the vehicle's range. temperatures. If the passenger compart-
tate more economical driving.
ment climate feels too cool, deactivate
The factors that the driver can influence to
Activate or deactivate range optimization via range optimization.
extend the range are speed, driving style and
the center display
climatization settings. Cooling is limited in warm ambient tem-
1. Tap . peratures. If the passenger compartment
Speed
climate feels too warm, deactivate range
2. Select Range assistant. optimization.
3. Activate or deactivate range optimization. Problems with misting may occur because
the AC function that adjusts air humidity is
NOTE limited.
Driving style Range optimization deactivates automati- Because the AC function is limited, air
cally at a 50% or higher charge level. recirculation increases, which could cause
the air quality to be perceived as less com-
fortable, especially in the rear seat.
Related information
Climate control • Range (p. 484)
Each icon has a meter that indicates the

energy use. When the meter changes color
from blue to orange the driver should check
their energy use for more economical driving.
487
Leveling control* and suspension continuously according to the road surface Leveling control reduces the vehicle's ground
Self-leveling and suspension functions are and the vehicle's acceleration, braking and clearance at higher speeds to reduce air resis-
controlled automatically. cornering. If a stiffer chassis is desired, set the tance and increase stability. The shock
wheel suspension to Suspension feel firm. absorbers are set to help optimize comfort
The vehicle's leveling control system adjusts and are adjusted continuously according to
the suspension and shock absorbers auto- Manually adjustable shock absorbers* the road surface and the vehicle's accelera-
matically to help optimize comfort and con- The suspension on Polestar Engineered* vehi- tion, braking and cornering.
trol while driving. Leveling can also be con- cles can be manually adjusted. There are three
trolled manually to facilitate loading. recommended modes: Performance, Dynamic The instrument panel indicates when
Rear leveling control keeps the rear section of and Comfort. the suspension level is being
the vehicle at the same height while driving adjusted.
regardless of load. Performance mode
In Performance mode, the vehicle's suspen- The following apply if a door or the tailgate is
Shock absorbers (Four-C)* sion feels stiffer. opened:
On vehicles equipped with Four-C, the shock Dynamic mode • If a door is opened, the level can only be
absorbers are adapted to the selected drive Dynamic mode is the vehicle's default setting adjusted upwards.
mode and the current vehicle speed. The and is adapted for daily driving.
shock absorbers are normally set to help opti- • If the tailgate is open, the level can only be
mize comfort and are adjusted continuously Comfort mode adjusted downwards.
according to the road surface and the vehicle's In Comfort mode, the vehicle's suspension
acceleration, braking and cornering. feels softer. Parking27
When parking, make sure that there is ade-
On vehicles equipped with Four-C, the shock Leveling control and suspension quate space above and below the vehicle
absorbers are set to help optimize comfort The system is adapted to the selected drive since ground clearance may vary depending
and are adjusted continuously according to mode and vehicle speed. Leveling control on e.g. ambient temperature, how the vehicle
the road surface and the vehicle's accelera- reduces the vehicle's ground clearance at is loaded, if loading mode is used, which drive
tion, braking and cornering. higher speeds to reduce air resistance and mode is selected after the engine is started,
increase stability. The shock absorbers are etc.
On vehicles equipped with Four-C, the shock
normally set to help optimize comfort and are
absorbers are adapted to the selected wheel When parking, make sure that there is ade-
adjusted continuously according to the road
suspension setting and the current vehicle quate space above and below the vehicle
surface and the vehicle's acceleration, braking
speed. The shock absorbers are normally set since ground clearance may vary depending
and cornering.
to help optimize comfort and are adjusted
27 Vehicles equipped with pneumatic suspension
on e.g. ambient temperature, how the vehicle Transporting Symbols and messages
is loaded, if loading mode is used, etc. When transporting the vehicle on a ferry, train If a problem occurs with the leveling control, a
The level may also be adjusted a period after or truck, only secure (lash) the vehicle around message will be displayed in the instrument
the vehicle is parked. This is to compensate the tires, not using any other parts of the chas- panel.
for any height changes that may occur due to sis. Changes in leveling control may occur dur-
temperature changes in the air springs when ing transport, which could adversely affect the
the vehicle cools. lashing and result in damage.

Suspension Deactivated by Active leveling control has been switched off manually by the user.
user
Suspension Temporarily Active leveling control performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system use.
reduced performance
Suspension Service A fault has occurred. Visit a workshopA as soon as possible.

required
Stop safely Suspension fail- A critical fault has occurred. The vehicle's driving performance is significantly reduced. Stop safely.
ure Have the vehicle towed to a workshopA if the message is displayed while the vehicle is stationary.
A critical fault has occurred. The vehicle's driving performance is significantly reduced. Stop safely.
Have the vehicle towed (raised with all four wheels on the bed of a tow truck) to a workshopA if the
message is displayed while the vehicle is stationary.
}}
489

Slow down Suspension A fault has occurred. The vehicle's driving performance is reduced. Slow down until the symbol disap-
Vehicle too high pears. Contact a workshopA if the message is displayed while the vehicle is stationary.
Suspension Auto adjusting Level control of the car's rear axle to target height is in progress.
vehicle level Level control to target height is in progress.
Related information
• Leveling control settings* (p. 491)
• Adjusting Polestar Engineered* suspen-
sion settings (p. 491)
Leveling control settings* The setting is adjusted in the center display: Adjusting Polestar Engineered*
Turn off pneumatic suspension before lifting Tap .
suspension settings
1.
the vehicle with a jack to help avoid problems The shock absorber settings can be adjusted
with the automatic leveling control. 2. Select Driving. for driving in other conditions or on particular
The vehicle can be lowered or raised to make 3. Choose to activate or deactivate Air road surfaces.
it easier to load or for passengers to get in suspension control for easy entry and
Location of adjustment knobs
and out. exit
There are four adjustment knobs, two for the
Adjusting loading mode Activating or deactivating pneumatic front shock absorbers and two for the rear.
suspension There are adjustment knobs above each
In certain situations this function must be wheel. The adjustment knobs for the front
turned off e.g. before the vehicle is raised wheels are located under the hood. The
using a jack*. The level difference caused by adjustment knobs for the rear wheels are
raising the vehicle with a jack could cause located above each wheel in the wheel hous-
problems with the pneumatic suspension. ing.
The setting is adjusted in the center display:
1. Tap .
2. Select Driving.
3. Choose to activate or deactivate pneu-
matic suspension.
Use the buttons in the cargo compartment to
raise or lower the rear section of the vehicle to Related information
facilitate loading or unloading the vehicle or • Leveling control* and suspension (p. 488)
connecting or disconnecting a trailer.
• Loading recommendations (p. 640)
Easy Entry and Exit Suspension
Location of adjustment knob, front wheel.
Control*
The vehicle can be lowered to make it easier
to get in and out.
}}
|| Adjusting front suspension settings

Make sure the adjustment knob is set to 0
before starting the adjustment. This makes it
easier to determine what adjustment position
is set.
The rubber cap is located above the adjustment

knob.
Location of adjustment knob, rear wheel.
Turn the adjustment knob clockwise or counterclock-

wise to change the adjustment position.
Turn the knob clockwise until it stops to
get to adjustment position 0.
Turn the knob counterclockwise to the
desired adjustment position. You should Turn the adjustment knob clockwise or counterclock-
feel and hear a click each time the adjust- wise to change the adjustment position.
ment position is changed. Remove the protective rubber cap over
> Then follow the same procedure for the the adjustment knob.
second shock absorber.
Turn the knob clockwise until it stops to
Location of adjustment knob, rear wheel.
Adjusting rear suspension settings get to adjustment position 0.
The rear adjustment knobs are located above
NOTE
the tire inside the wheel housing. To access
The closer to position 0 the knob is set, the the rear adjustment knobs, the vehicle must
stiffer the suspension. be raised using a jack; see separate section.
492
Turn the adjustment knob counterclock- Related information Opening/closing the fuel filler door
wise to the desired adjustment position. • Hoisting the vehicle (p. 675) The vehicle must be unlocked before the fuel
You should feel and hear a click each time
• Leveling control* and suspension (p. 488) filler door can be opened28.
the adjustment position is changed.
A button on the instrument panel is used to
> When the desired position has been
unlock the fuel filler door.
reached, replace the protective rubber
cap. Then follow the same procedure
for the second shock absorber.
NOTE
For optimal performance, Volvo recom-
mends setting the adjustment knobs to the
same position for each axle.
Recommended positions
Position Front Rear
Performance adjustment adjustment
mode position 4 position 4
Dynamic adjustment adjustment
Comfort adjustment adjustment
NOTE
Volvo only takes responsibility for the rec-
ommended adjustment positions.
28 Only locking and unlocking using the key, Passive Entry* or via the Volvo Cars app will affect the status of the fuel filler door. }}
|| NOTE Refueling
The fuel tank is equipped with a fuel filling
Refueling must be done within approxi-
system without a cover.
mately 15 minutes of opening the fuel filler
door. After this time, the valve opened by Refueling the vehicle at a service
pushing the button for opening the fuel station
filler door will close and it will no longer be
possible to refuel without the pump's noz-
zle switching off.
If the valve is closed before refueling is
complete - press the button again and wait
until the driver display shows the message
Ready for refueling.
1. Press the button on the dashboard.
> Pressure equalization in the fuel tank
causes a slight delay before the fuel 2. Open the fuel filler door by pressing lightly
filler door opens. The message on its rear edge.
Preparing for refuel Fuel lid will be 3. After refueling, press the fuel filler door
unlocked when ready will appear in lightly to close it. It is important to insert the pump's nozzle past both
the instrument panel. When the system of the two flaps in the fuel filler pipe before beginning
is ready, the message Ready for Related information fueling.
refueling will be shown. If the gasoline • Refueling (p. 494)
engine is activated when the button is
pressed, it will usually be deactivated
and the vehicle will switch to electric
propulsion.
494
Instructions for fueling: 4. Avoid overfilling the tank. Do not press the
handle on the filler nozzle again after it has
1. Turn off the engine and open the fuel filler
initially stopped pumping.
door.
> The fuel tank is now filled.
NOTE
NOTE
Refueling must be done within approxi-
mately 15 minutes of opening the fuel filler An over-full tank may overflow in hot
door. After this time, the valve opened by weather.
pushing the button for opening the fuel
filler door will close and it will no longer be
CAUTION
possible to refuel without the pump's noz-
It is important to insert the pump's nozzle past both zle switching off. Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In
of the two flaps in the fuel filler pipe before beginning addition to causing damage to the environ-
fueling. If the valve is closed before refueling is
ment, gasolines containing alcohol can
complete - press the button again and wait
cause damage to painted surfaces, which
until the driver display shows the message
may not be covered under the New Vehicle
Ready for refueling.
Limited Warranty.
2. Select a fuel approved for use in the vehi-

cle. For more information on approved Refueling from a fuel container
fuels, see the section on “Fuel”.
When filling from a fuel container, use the fun-
3. Insert the pump's nozzle into the fuel filler nel provided in a foam block under the floor
pipe's opening. There are two flaps just hatch in the cargo compartment.
inside the fuel filler pipe and the pump's
1. Open the fuel filler door.
nozzle must push both of these flaps open
before fuel can be added. 2. Insert the funnel into the fuel filler pipe's
opening. There are two flaps just inside
the fuel filler pipe and the tube section of
the funnel must push both of these flaps
open before fuel can be added.
}}
495
|| WARNING Fuel system. Repeated use of leaded gasoline will

Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- lessen the effectiveness of the emission con-
California Proposition 65 trol system and could result in loss of emission
oline to control engine deposits.
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- warranty coverage. State and local vehicle
senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- Deposit control gasoline (gasoline inspection programs will make detection of
cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon- with detergent additives) misfueling easier, possibly resulting in emis-
oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping sion test failure for misfueled vehicles.
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- injectors and intake valves clean. Consistent
tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid use of deposit control gasolines will help NOTE
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ensure good driveability and fuel economy. If
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain
except as necessary, service your vehicle in you are not sure whether the gasoline contains
a well ventilated area and wear gloves or an octane enhancing additive called
deposit control additives, check with the serv-
wash your hands frequently when servicing methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tricar-
ice station operator.
your vehicle. For more information go to bonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used, your
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- Emission Control System performance
vehicle. NOTE may be affected, and the Check Engine
Volvo recommends not using external fuel Light (malfunction indicator light) located
Related information injector cleaning systems, e.g. do not add on your instrument panel may light. If this
• Opening/closing the fuel filler door detergent additives to gasoline before or occurs, please return your vehicle to a
(p. 493) after refueling. trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian for service.
• Fuel (p. 496)
Unleaded fuel
All Volvo vehicles have a three-way catalytic Gasoline containing alcohol and
converter and must only use unleaded gaso- ethers, "Oxygenated fuels"
line. US and Canadian regulations require that Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
pumps delivering unleaded gasoline are "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
labeled "UNLEADED". Only the nozzles of ethers. In some areas, state or local laws
these pumps will fit in your vehicle's fuel filler require that the service pump be marked indi-
inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,
a vehicle labeled "unleaded gasoline only". there are areas in which the pumps are
Leaded gasoline damages the three-way cata- unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is
lytic converter and the heated oxygen sensor alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy,
check with the service station operator. To
496
meet seasonal air quality standards, some Octane rating

areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel. Volvo requires premium fuel (91 octane29 or
Volvo permits the use of the following "oxy- higher) for all B4, B5, B6 and T8 engines,
genated" fuels. However, the specified octane and recommends AKI 93 for optimal per-
ratings must still be met. formance and fuel economy. See decal exam-
ples in illustrations 1 and 2.
Alcohol - Ethanol
Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume Minimum octane
may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to
Decals
as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". Illustration 2: Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap
Ethers - MTBE/ETBE: Fuels containing up to on vehicles that require premium fuel30.
22% MTBE/ETBE by volume may be used. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
Methanol Volvo endorses the use of "TOP TIER Deter-
Do not use gasolines containing methanol gent Gasoline" where available to help main-
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice tain engine performance and reliability. TOP
can result in vehicle performance deterioration TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new stand-
and can damage critical parts in the fuel sys- ard jointly established by leading automotive
tem. Such damage may not be covered under manufactures to meet the needs of today's
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retail-
ers (stations) will, in most cases, identify their
Related information gasoline as having met the "TOP TIER Deter-
• Octane rating (p. 497) Illustration 1: Sample fuel pump octane label29. gent Gasoline" standards.
• Opening/closing the fuel filler door
(p. 493) NOTE
• Refueling (p. 494) Information about TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline is available at toptiergas.com
• Emission controls (p. 499)
29 AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average value of RON (Research Octane Number) and MON (Motor Octane Number) - (RON)+(MON)/2
30 For supplementary information - see the car's Service and Warranty Booklet. }}
497
|| NOTE Use of Additives may be a good idea to switch to a higher-

With the exception of gas line antifreeze dur- octane fuel (AKI29 91 or higher) or to switch to
When switching to higher octane fuel or ing winter months, do not add solvents, thick- another brand of gasoline in order to fully uti-
changing gasoline brands, it may be neces- eners, or other store-bought additives to your lize the vehicle's engine capacity and optimize
sary to fill the tank more than once before a vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. traction.
difference in engine operation is noticea- Overuse may damage your engine, and some
ble. of these additives contain organically volatile Related information
chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself • Fuel (p. 496)
Fuel Formulations to these chemicals. • Emission controls (p. 499)
Do not use gasoline that contains lead or man-
ganese as a knock inhibitor, and do not use WARNING
lead additives. Besides damaging the exhaust
Never carry a cell phone that is switched
emission control systems on your vehicle, lead on while refueling your vehicle. If the
has been strongly linked to certain forms of phone rings, this may cause a spark that
cancer. could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire
and injury.
Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to
certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area WARNING
where you must fill your own gas tank, take
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,
precautions. These may include:
and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust
• standing upwind away from the filler noz- gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes
zle while refueling inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger
compartment is ventilated, and immedi-
• refueling only at gas stations with vapor ately return the vehicle to a trained and
recovery systems that fully seal the mouth qualified Volvo service technician for cor-
of the filler neck during refueling rection.
• wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle. Demanding driving
In demanding driving conditions, such as
when towing a trailer or driving in hot weather
or for prolonged periods at high altitudes, it
29 AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average value of RON (Research Octane Number) and MON (Motor Octane Number) - (RON)+(MON)/2
498
Emission controls tion settings or components, altering Service stations

emission system components or location You can use the vehicle's navigation system*
Three-way catalytic converter or removing components, and/or repeated to find a route to the nearest service station.
• Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain use of leaded fuel. While you are stopped to refuel, it can be a
engine malfunctions, particularly involving good idea to perform a quick inspection of the
the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition NOTE vehicle, such as checking tire pressure, lights,
systems, may cause unusually high three- wiper blades, filling washer fluid, etc.
way catalytic converter temperatures. Do Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with
not continue to operate your vehicle if you three-way catalytic converters. Related information
detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of • Checking tire pressure (p. 593)
power or other unusual operating condi- Heated oxygen sensors • Cleaning the center display (p. 791)
tions, such as engine overheating or back- The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy-
firing. A properly tuned engine will help gen content of the exhaust gases. Readings • Opening and closing the hood (p. 687)
avoid malfunctions that could damage the are fed into a control module that continuously • Refilling washer fluid (p. 816)
three-way catalytic converter. monitors engine functions and controls fuel • Replacing windshield wiper blades
• Do not park your vehicle over combustible injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine (p. 813)
materials, such as grass or leaves, which is continuously adjusted for efficient combus-
tion to help reduce harmful emissions.
can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system and cause such materials • Refilling coolant (p. 699)
Related information • Checking and filling engine oil (p. 696)
to ignite under certain wind and weather
conditions. • Octane rating (p. 497)
• Automatic car washes (p. 800)
• Excessive starter cranking (in excess of • Fuel (p. 496)
one minute), or an intermittently firing or
flooded engine can cause three-way cata-
lytic converter or exhaust system over-
heating.
• Remember that tampering or unauthor-
ized modifications to the engine, the
Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may
be illegal and can cause three-way cata-
lytic converter or exhaust system over-
heating. This includes: altering fuel injec-
Overheating of engine and and letting the engine idle for a few Related information
transmission minutes to let the transmission cool. • Refilling coolant (p. 699)
In certain driving conditions, such as driving • If the vehicle begins to overheat, the air • Driving with a trailer (p. 513)
in mountainous areas or hot weather, there is conditioning may be temporarily switched
an increased risk of the engine or drive sys-
• Preparing for a long trip (p. 526)
off.
tem overheating, especially when carrying • After a prolonged period of driving in
heavy loads. demanding conditions, do not turn off the
• Engine power may be temporarily limited. engine immediately after stopping.
• Remove any auxiliary lights mounted in
front of the grille when driving in hot NOTE
weather.
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
• If the temperature in the engine's cooling operate for a short time after the engine is
system becomes too high, a warning sym- switched off.
bol will appear in the instrument panel
along with the message Stop safely High
engine temperature. Pull over to a safe Symbols in the instrument panel
location and let the engine idle for a few Symbol Meaning
minutes to cool down.
High engine temperature. Follow
• If the message Turn off engine High the recommendations provided.
engine temperature or Turn off engine
Coolant level low is displayed, stop the
vehicle and turn off the engine. Low coolant level. Follow the
• If the transmission becomes overheated, recommendations provided.
an integrated safety function is activated.
A warning symbol illuminates and the
instrument panel displays the message Transmission hot/overheated/
Reduce speed to lower temperature cooling. Follow the recommen-
Transmission warm or Stop safely dations provided.
Transmission hot Wait for cooling. Fol-
low the recommendations given by reduc-
ing speed or stopping the vehicle safely
500
Battery drain – Charge the start battery by starting the Jump starting using another
Using a lot of electrical current without allow- vehicle and letting it run for at least battery
ing the vehicle to charge the start battery 15 minutes. The start battery is charged If the vehicle doesn't start, it could be
results in a low battery level and some electri- more effectively while driving than while because the 12 V battery is discharged. It can
cal functions will be reduced or switched off. idling. then be charged using another vehicle's 12 V
If the battery level drops below a certain If the battery level is still low after taking these battery or an external charger.
level, it will no longer be possible to start the measures, the vehicle should be checked by a Under normal conditions, the 12 V battery is
vehicle without jump-starting or charging of workshop – an authorized Volvo workshop is charged when the vehicle is charged, and
the start battery with an external charger. recommended. through electrical current transfer directly from
Several measures can be taken to reduce the high-voltage battery when the vehicle is
power consumption. Avoid using ignition not plugged in for charging.
NOTE
mode II when the engine is switched off.
High current consumption can lead to low If the 12 V battery becomes discharged for any
Instead, use ignition mode I, which uses less
battery level, which temporarily limits the reason, it can be jump-started. There are sev-
electrical current. Do not use functions that
start/stop function. The engine can then eral reasons why a battery may become dis-
use a lot of electrical current when the vehicle
start automatically during a stop to charge charged, such as the vehicle not being used
is not being driven. Examples of such func-
the battery. for a long period of time, a temporary malfunc-
tions are:
tion or a blown fuse in the vehicle's charging
• blower circuit. A discharged 12 V battery needs to be
Related information charged in order to start the vehicle and
• headlights
• Start battery (p. 703) power its electrical systems. After startup, it is
• windshield wipers
possible to start charging of the vehicle using
• audio system a charging cable, which is necessary when the
• accessories plugged into the vehicle. high-voltage battery is also discharged. If the
vehicle is out of range for charging, it must be
If the battery level is low, a message is shown
towed.
in the instrument panel. The vehicle's energy-
saving function will then turn off or reduce cer- To jump-start the vehicle, jumper cables must
tain functions, such as the blower and the be connected to the vehicle's charging points
audio system. for the 12 V battery.
To access the charging points, a number of
panels under the hood must be removed.
}}
501
|| CAUTION To avoid short circuits or other damage, the 7. Clamp one end of the black jumper cable
following steps are recommended when jump to the assisting battery's negative terminal
The charging points of the vehicle are only starting the battery using another battery: (3).
intended for jump-starting the vehicle in
question. The charging points are not 1. Put the vehicle's electrical system in Pas- 8. Clamp the other end of the black jumper
intended for jump-starting another vehicle. sive usage mode. cable to your vehicle's negative charging
Using the charging points to start another point (4).
2. Make sure that the assisting battery has a
vehicle could cause a fuse to blow, which voltage of 12 V. 9. Make sure the jumper cable's clamps are
would cause the charging points to stop securely attached. Poor contact can cause
3. If the battery is in another vehicle, turn off
working. sparks or the clamps to loosen during the
that vehicle's engine and make sure that
If the message 12 V battery fuse failure start attempt.
the vehicles are not touching each other.
Service required is displayed in the 10. Start the motor of the assisting vehicle.
4. Attach one end of the red jumper cable to
instrument panel, a fuse has blown and
the assisting battery's positive terminal (1). 11. Start the vehicle with the discharged bat-
needs to be replaced. Volvo recommends
tery by depressing the brake pedal and
contacting an authorized Volvo workshop.
CAUTION selecting gear position D or R.
Handle jumper cables carefully. A short cir-
cuit can occur if the ends come in contact CAUTION
with any other surface than the charging Do not touch the connections between the
points. cable and the vehicle during the start
attempt. Risk of sparking.
5. Open the cover over the positive charging
point (2) by pressing in its side to release NOTE
the catch while lifting the cover upward.
There are two connecting points under the Full startup is indicated by the indicator
cover. Use the one closest to the center of lights on the instrument panel going out
the vehicle. and its preselected theme illuminating.
6. Clamp the other end of the red jumper

A number of the panels around the storage compart- 12. If the high-voltage battery is also dis-
ment need to be removed to access the charging cable to your vehicle's positive charging
point (2). charged, begin charging of the vehicle
points under the hood.
using the charging cable.
502
13. Remove the jumper cables in the reverse WARNING Jump starting using another
order ‒ first the black cables and then the battery
red cables. • The 12 V battery can generate oxyhy-
If the start battery is discharged, current from
drogen gas, which is very explosive. A
Make sure that the clamps of the black another battery can be used to start the vehi-
spark caused by an incorrectly con-
jumper cables do not come into contact cle.
nected jumper cable could be enough
with the vehicle's positive charging point, to make the battery explode. If the vehicle's start battery(12 V) is dis-
the assisting vehicle's battery's positive charged, current from another battery can be
terminal, or the red jumper cable's clamps. • The 12 V battery contains sulfuric acid,
which could cause serious burn inju- used to start the vehicle's electrical system.
ries. Jump-starting requires access to another vehi-
NOTE cle's 12 V battery and jumper cables.
• If contact with eyes, skin or clothing
A discharged 12 V battery must be charged occurs, flush the affected area immedi-
for a while in order to power the vehicle's ately with water. Obtain medical help CAUTION
electrical systems. At an ambient tempera- immediately if eyes are affected. The charging points in mild hybrid vehicles
ture of about +15 °C (about 60 °F), the are only intended for jump-starting your
battery must be charged by the vehicle for • Never smoke near the battery.
own vehicle. Don't use the charging points
at least 30 minutes. At lower ambient tem- on mild hybrid vehicles to start other vehi-
peratures, the charging time can increase Related information cles – the charging circuit's fuse could be
to 3-4 hours. If possible, the battery should • Starting the vehicle (p. 442) overloaded and stop working.
be charged using an external battery • Starting the vehicle (p. 443)
charger.
• Gear selector positions (p. 463) In mild hybrid vehicles, a discharged start bat-
• Opening and closing the hood (p. 687) tery can be caused by an overloaded fuse that
WARNING is preventing charging. If the fuse has blown,
• Removing panels under the hood 12 V battery fuse failure Service required
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery (p. 690)
posts, terminals, and related accessories will be displayed in the instrument panel.
contain lead and lead compounds, chemi- Volvo recommends contacting an authorized
cals known to the state of California to Volvo workshop.
cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
}}
503
|| 2. Make sure that the assisting battery has a 10. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
voltage of 12 V. and let it run for a few minutes at a higher
idling speed than normal, about
1500 rpm.
that vehicle's engine and make sure that
the vehicles are not touching each other. 11. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
dead battery.
4. Clamp one end of the red jumper cable to
the assisting battery's positive terminal (1).
CAUTION
CAUTION Do not touch the connections between the
cable and the vehicle during the start
Connect the jumper cable carefully to pre-
vent short circuit and contact with other
components in the engine compartment.
12. Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order ‒ first the black cables and then the
5. Fold back the cover over your vehicle's
red cables.
positive charging point (2).
Make sure that none of the clamps of the
6. Clamp the other end of the red jumper
black jumper cables come into contact
cable to your vehicle's positive charging
with the vehicle's positive charging point,
point (2).
the assisting vehicle's battery's positive
7. Clamp one end of the black jumper cable terminal, or either of the red jumper
to the assisting battery's negative terminal cable's connected clamps.
(3).
Jumper cable charging points. Engine compartment 8. Clamp the other end of the black jumper
appearance may vary depending on vehicle model cable to your vehicle's negative charging
and equipment level. point (4).
To avoid short circuits or other damage, the 9. Make sure the jumper cable's clamps are
following steps are recommended when jump securely attached. Poor contact can cause
starting the battery using another battery: sparks or the clamps to loosen during the
1. Put the ignition in mode 0. start attempt.
504
WARNING WARNING
Mild hybrid vehicles have components that • Batteries generate hydrogen gas,
work with 48 V voltage, which can be dan- which is flammable and explosive.
gerous if handled incorrectly. Do not touch
components that are not clearly described • Do not connect the jumper cable to
in the Owner's Manual. any part of the fuel system or to any
moving parts. Avoid touching hot
• Never use a 48 V support battery to
manifolds.
jump-start the vehicle.
• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
• External electrical equipment may not
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
under any circumstance be connected
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces.
to the 48 V battery.
• If contact occurs, flush the affected
• Only a workshop may replace or per-
area immediately with water. Obtain
Jumper cable charging points. Engine compartment
form service on the 48 V battery – an appearance may vary depending on vehicle model
medical help immediately if eyes are and equipment level.
affected.
mended.
• Never expose the battery to open flame CAUTION
or electric spark. Do not smoke near The charging points of the vehicle are only
WARNING the battery. Failure to follow the intended for jump-starting the vehicle in
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery instructions for jump starting can lead question. Do not use them to start other
posts, terminals, and related accessories to injury. vehicles – the charging circuit's fuse could
contain lead and lead compounds, chemi- be overloaded and stop working.
cals known to the state of California to If the 12 V battery (start battery) is discharged,
hands after handling. the vehicle's electrical system can be jump-
If a fuse has become overloaded, 12 V battery
started from another vehicle's battery using
fuse failure Service required will be dis-
jumper cables. If the hybrid battery is also dis-
played in the instrument panel. Volvo recom-
charged, it must be charged using the charg-
mends contacting an authorized Volvo work-
ing cable after the electrical system is started
shop.
so that the engine can be started.
To avoid short circuits or other damage, the
following steps are recommended when jump
starting the battery:
}}
505
|| 1. Put the ignition in mode 0. 9. Make sure the jumper cable's clamps are 11. Start your vehicle's engine. If the engine
securely attached. Poor contact can cause does not start, allow an additional 10
2. Make sure that the assisting battery has a
sparks or the clamps to loosen during the minutes of charging time and then try to
voltage of 12 V.
start attempt. start the engine again.
10. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
that vehicle's engine and make sure that NOTE
and let it run for a few minutes at a higher
the vehicles are not touching each other.
idling speed than normal, about When the engine is started under normal
4. Clamp one end of the red jumper cable to 1500 rpm. conditions, the vehicle's electrical drive
the assisting battery's positive terminal (1). motor is prioritized – the gasoline engine
remains off. This means that after the start
CAUTION knob has been turned clockwise, the elec-
Connect the jumper cable carefully to pre- tric motor has "started" and the vehicle is
vent short circuit and contact with other ready to be driven. Start of the electric
components in the engine compartment. motor is indicated by the indicator lights on
the instrument panel going out and its pre-
selected theme illuminating.
5. Fold back the cover over your vehicle's
positive charging point (2).
6. Clamp the other end of the red jumper CAUTION
cable to your vehicle's positive charging Do not touch the connections between the
point (2). cable and the vehicle during the start
7. Clamp one end of the black jumper cable
to the assisting battery's negative terminal
(3).
8. Clamp the other end of the black jumper
cable to your vehicle's negative charging
point (4).
506
12. Remove the jumper cables in the reverse WARNING NOTE

order ‒ first the black cables and then the
red cables. • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, If the starter battery has such a low charge
which is flammable and explosive. level that the vehicle does not have normal
Make sure that the clamps of the black electrical functions and the engine must
jumper cables do not come into contact • Do not connect the jumper cable to
any part of the fuel system or to any then be jump-started with an external bat-
with the vehicle's positive charging point, tery or a battery charger, the Start/Stop
the assisting vehicle's battery's positive moving parts. Avoid touching hot
manifolds. function may remain activated. If the Start/
terminal, or either of the red jumper Stop function shortly thereafter auto-stops
cable's connected clamps. • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do the engine, there is a huge risk that auto-
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, start of the engine will fail since the battery
WARNING skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. had not had time to recharge sufficiently.
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery • If contact occurs, flush the affected
If the vehicle has been jump-started or if
posts, terminals, and related accessories area immediately with water. Obtain
there has not been enough time for the
contain lead and lead compounds, chemi- medical help immediately if eyes are
battery to be charged with a battery
cals known to the state of California to affected.
cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash charger, the Start/Stop function should be
hands after handling. • Never expose the battery to open flame temporarily deactivated until the battery
or electric spark. Do not smoke near has been recharged sufficiently. At an
the battery. Failure to follow the ambient temperature of about +15 °C
instructions for jump starting can lead (about 60 °F), the battery must be charged
to injury. by the vehicle for at least 1 hour. At lower
ambient temperatures, the charging time
can increase to 3-4 hours. The recommen-
NOTE
dation is to charge the battery with an
The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid external battery charger, if possible.
battery is discharged.
Related information
}}
507
• Selecting ignition mode (p. 448) Retractable hitch* Folding out the towbar
• Support battery (p. 707) The retractable hitch is designed to be used 1. Press the button in the cargo compart-
to tow a trailer or mount a bicycle holder. The ment and release – pressing too long on
hitch can be easily retracted or extended as the button may prevent the towbar from
needed. When retracted, the towbar is com- folding out.
pletely concealed. > The towbar will fold out and down to an
WARNING unlocked position – the indicator lamp
will flash orange.
Follow the instructions for folding in/out
the towbar carefully. 2. Move the towbar to its end position,
where it will lock into place.
> The indicator light glows steadily when
WARNING
the towbar is ready for use.
Do not press the operating button for the
towbar if a trailer or accessory is attached
to the towbar. WARNING
Do not stand near the center of the bumper
There is a button for operat- behind the vehicle when folding out the
towbar.
ing the towbar on the right-
hand side at the rear of the
cargo compartment. The indi- CAUTION
cator light in the button
When the towbar is activated by pressing
flashes or glows steadily
the button and put in unlocked position:
orange while the towbar is
folding in or out. Wait at least 2 seconds before moving the
towbar to locked position. If the towbar
does not remain in locked position, wait a
few more seconds and try again.
Do not kick the towbar.
Retracting the towbar NOTE Hitch-mounted bicycle holder

1. Press the button in the cargo compart-
ment and release – pressing too long on Power save mode will be activated after a
short time and the indicator light will go NOTE
the button may prevent the towbar from
folding in. out. The system can be reactivated by clos- The weight limits for trailers and towbar-
ing and then reopening the tailgate. This mounted accessories differ. A separate
Press the button in the trunk and release – applies to both folding in and folding out limit applies for each. This towbar is only
pressing too long on the button may pre- the towbar. designed for towbar-mounted bicycle hold-
vent the towbar from folding in. ers. All other accessories are not suitable.
If the vehicle electrically detects a con-
> The towbar will fold down to an
nected trailer, the indicator light will stop
unlocked position – the indicator lamp Before mounting the bicycle on the bicycle
glowing with a steady light. It will then not
will flash orange. holder, keep in mind that:
be possible to fold the towbar in or out.
2. Secure the towbar into position by push- • Do not mount more than four bicycles
ing it back to its retracted position under
the bumper, where it will lock into place. CAUTION • The maximum weight for the bicycle
holder including bicycles is 200 lbs/90
> The indicator light in the button will Make sure that there is no adapter in the
kg. For example: holder 40 lbs + 4 bicy-
glow steadily when the towbar is cor- electrical socket or removable ball section
cles at 30 lbs each = 160 lbs total > OK
rectly locked in the retracted position. mounted when the towbar is folded in.
Remove the bicycle holder from the towbar NOTE
CAUTION when it is not being used.
Volvo recommends only using Volvo origi-
When the towbar is activated by pressing
nal accessories. Follow the instructions
the button and put in unlocked position:
CAUTION supplied with the product.
Wait at least 2 seconds before moving the The towbar should always be folded in
towbar to locked position. If the towbar when it is not being used.
does not remain in locked position, wait a
few more seconds and try again.
Do not kick the towbar.
}}
509
|| CAUTION Related information Towbar hitch31*

• Towbar hitch* (p. 510) Volvo recommends the use of Volvo towbars
• Never use towbar adapters or towbar
extenders. • Foldable towbar hitch* (p. 511) that are specially designed for the vehicle.
• Only use ball mount for towing. Do not • Driving with a trailer (p. 513) NOTE
mount accessories directly on the ball The optional detachable trailer hitch may
mount. Use accessories designed to not be available in all markets or on all
be mounted in the towbar's square models. Consult your Volvo retailer.
bracket. Do not use accessories
designed to be secured around the ball
mount
• Never use a load basket.
Loading the bicycle holder

The greater the distance between the load and
the bicycle holder, the greater the load on the
hitch and on the vehicle.
Keep the following points in mind:
• Mount the heaviest bicycle closest to the
vehicle.
• If possible, mount the bicycles symmetri- Ball holder
cally, as close as possible to the center of
Cotter pin
the vehicle.
• Remove loose objects from the bicycle, Towbar assembly
such as baskets, batteries or child seats.
This will help reduce the load on the hitch Locking bolt
and the bicycle holder. Safety wire attachment bracket
• Do not place a cover over the bicycle as
this could lead to increased load on the
hitch.
Installing the ball holder Stowing the ball holder Foldable towbar hitch32*
1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from Volvo recommends the use of Volvo towbars
the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt WARNING that are specially designed for the vehicle.
out of the towbar assembly.
When not in use, the detachable ball holder NOTE
2. Slide the ball holder into the towbar should always be properly stowed in the
assembly. designated location under the floor of the The optional detachable trailer hitch may
cargo compartment. not be available in all markets or on all
3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the models. Consult your Volvo retailer.
one in the towbar assembly.
Related information
4. Slide the locking bolt through the towbar • Driving with a trailer (p. 513)
assembly/ball holder.
• Towing capacity and tongue weight
5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end (p. 852)
of the locking bolt.
WARNING
• Be sure the towbar is securely locked
in position before attaching anything to
it.
• Always attach the trailer's safety wire
securely to the towbar's safety wire
attachment bracket. Ball holder
Cotter pin
Removing the ball holder
1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking Towbar assembly
bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the
ball holder/towbar assembly. Locking bolt
2. Pull the ball holder out of the towbar Safety wire attachment bracket
assembly.
31 The following markets only: USA, Canada, Chile, Mexico, Peru, Puerto Rico, Australia and New Zealand.
32 The following markets only: USA, Canada, Chile, Mexico, Peru, Puerto Rico, Australia and New Zealand. }}
|| Installing the ball holder WARNING

1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from
the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt Damage may occur on the towbar if it is
not used correctly or if incorrect or faulty
out of the towbar assembly. accessories are used, such as:
2. Slide the ball holder into the towbar • Overloading of accessory.
assembly.
• Use of incorrect or faulty accessory.
3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the
one in the towbar assembly.
• Accessory used for an incorrect pur-
pose.
4. Slide the locking bolt through the towbar
• Use of weight-distributing towing sys-
assembly/ball holder. tem.
5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end • Incorrectly positioned ball mount; see
of the locking bolt. geometric limits for the towbar. The ball mount must fall within the geometric
limits for the towbar, for both distance and
WARNING Stowing the ball holder
height . Geometric limits are described on a
type plate located on the towbar.
• Be sure the towbar is securely locked
in position before attaching anything to WARNING Related information
it. • Retractable hitch* (p. 508)
When not in use, the detachable ball holder
• Always attach the trailer's safety wire should always be properly stowed in the • Driving with a trailer (p. 513)
securely to the towbar's safety wire designated location under the floor of the
attachment bracket. cargo compartment. • Towing capacity and tongue weight
(p. 852)
Removing the ball holder Driving with a trailer

1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking When towing a trailer, the original ball holder
bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the or equivalent should be used.
ball holder/towbar assembly.
2. Pull the ball holder out of the towbar
assembly.
Driving with a trailer • Drive slowly when towing a trailer up a Activate stiff suspension feel via the center
There are a number of things to consider long and steep incline. display
when towing a trailer, such as the towbar, the • The maximum trailer weights given only 1. Tap .
trailer and how the load is distributed in the apply to altitudes up to 1000 meters
trailer. (3280 feet) above sea level. At higher alti- 2. Select Driving.
Load-carrying capacity is determined by the tudes, engine power (and thus the vehi- 3. Activate Suspension feel firm.
vehicle's curb weight. The total weight of all cle's climbing ability) is decreased due to
passengers and any installed accessories, e.g. the reduced air density, and the maximum
towbar, reduces the vehicle's load-carrying trailer weight must therefore be reduced.
capacity by the corresponding amount. The weight of the vehicle and trailer must
be decreased by 10% for each additional
• Towbars used on the vehicle must be
approved for the applicable use. 1000 m (3280 feet) or part thereof.
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
the weight on the towbar complies with more than 12%.
the specified maximum towball weight. • Avoid overloading and other incorrect use.
The tongue weight is calculated as part of • The trailer's brakes must be balanced with
the vehicle's payload. the vehicle's brakes to help ensure safe
• Increase the tire pressure to the recom- stops (follow applicable local regulations).
mended pressure for a full load. • Rear Auto Brake should be deactivated
• The engine is subjected to more load than before driving with a trailer.
usual when towing a trailer.
CAUTION
• The electric motor is subjected to more
load than usual when towing a trailer. When towing a trailer with air suspension,
the Suspension feel firm setting must be
• Towing a trailer affects the vehicle's han- activated at each new driving cycle.
dling, durability and driving economy.
When towing a trailer with air suspension,
• Do not drive with a heavy trailer when the
the Power drive mode must be selected at
vehicle is very new. Wait until the mileage
each new driving cycle.
has reached at least 1000 km (620 miles).
• Follow applicable regulations regarding
permitted speed and weight.
}}
513
|| CAUTION NOTE the vehicle will be slightly lowered, which is

normal.
• Bumper-attached trailer hitches must Extreme weather conditions, towing a
not be used on Volvos, nor should trailer, high altitude and lower fuel grade Driving in mountainous areas
safety chains be attached to the than recommended are factors that can In certain conditions, there is a risk of over-
bumper. significantly increase the vehicle's fuel con- heating when driving with a trailer. If overheat-
• Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle sumption. ing of the electric motor and drive system is
rear axle must not be used. detected, a warning symbol will illuminate in
the instrument panel and a message will
• Never connect a trailer's hydraulic Trailer weights
appear.
brake system directly to the vehicle
brake system, nor a trailer's lighting WARNING In certain conditions, there is a risk of over-
system directly to the vehicle lighting heating when driving with a trailer. If overheat-
Please adhere to the recommendations ing of the engine and drive system is detected,
system. Consult your nearest author- provided for trailer weight. If the recom-
ized Volvo retailer for correct installa- mendations are not followed, the vehicle a warning symbol will illuminate in the instru-
tion. and trailer may be difficult to control during ment panel and a message will appear.
• When towing a trailer, the trailer's evasive maneuvers and braking. The automatic transmission adapts the gear
safety chains or wire must be correctly for the current load and engine speed.
fastened to the attachment points pro- NOTE Steep inclines
vided in the trailer hitch on the vehicle.
The specified maximum trailer weights are Do not lock the automatic transmission into a
The safety chain or wire must never be
those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle higher gear than what the engine can handle ‒
fastened to or wound around the tow-
regulations may set additional restrictions it is not always preferable to drive in high
ing ball.
on trailer weight and speed. The trailer gears at low rpm.
hitches may be certified for higher towing Parking on a hill
NOTE weights than the vehicle is permitted to 1. Depress the brake pedal.
tow.
The optional detachable trailer hitch may 2. Apply the parking brake.
not be available in all markets or on all
models. Consult your Volvo retailer. Self-leveling suspension* 3. Release the brake pedal.
The vehicle's self-leveling system attempts to Put chocks behind the wheels when the vehi-
keep the vehicle at a constant level, regardless cle is parked on a hill with a trailer attached.
of load (up to the maximum permitted weight).
When the vehicle is stationary, the rear end of
Starting on a hill Trailer Stability Assist* Trailer Stability Assist function

1. Depress the brake pedal. Trailer Stability Assist (TSA33)
is part of the Trailer Stability Assist continuously monitors
ESC34 stability system and is a function the vehicle's movements, particularly lateral
2. Select gear position D or R and press the
designed to help stabilize a vehicle that is movements. If swaying is detected, the brakes
accelerator pedal.
towing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer are applied individually on the front wheels,
> The parking brake will release and the which has a stabilizing effect on the vehicle
symbol in the instrument panel will go have begun to sway. The function is added
when installing a towbar. Contact a Volvo and trailer. This is often enough to enable the
out. You can now drive the vehicle. driver to regain control of the vehicle.
retailer for more information.
1. Depress the brake pedal. If the Trailer Stability Assist function's first
Reasons for swaying attempt is not adequate to stop the swaying
2. Put the gear selector in D.
A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway motion, the brakes are applied on all wheels
3. Release the parking brake. for various reasons. Normally this only occurs and vehicle power is temporarily reduced. As
4. Release the brake pedal and start driving. at high speeds. However, if the trailer is over- the swaying motion begins to decrease and
loaded or unevenly distributed, e.g. too far the vehicle and trailer have once again
Related information back, there is a risk of swaying even at low become stable, TSA stops regulating the
• Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 515) speeds. brakes/engine power and the driver regains
• Checking trailer lights* (p. 516) Swaying may be caused by factors such as: control of the vehicle.
• Towing capacity and tongue weight • The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden, Trailer Stability Assist may not intervene if the
(p. 852) strong crosswind. driver tries to compensate for the swaying
• Retractable hitch* (p. 508) • The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an motion by moving the steering wheel rapidly,
• Overheating of engine and transmission uneven road or over a bump. because the system will then not be able to
(p. 500) determine if it is the trailer or the driver caus-
• Sudden movements of the steering wheel.
ing the swaying.
Once swaying has begun, it can be difficult or
impossible to stop it. This makes the vehicle
and trailer difficult to control and there is a risk
of swerving into oncoming traffic or driving off
the road.
33 Trailer Stability Assist

34 Electronic Stability Control }}
|| When Trailer Stability Assist Checking trailer lights* 5. After a short time, all of the trailer's lights
is activated, the ESC symbol When connecting a trailer, make sure that the will start flashing again.
is displayed in the instrument trailer's lights are functioning before starting > The light check is completed.
panel. to drive.
Trailer rear fog light
Checking trailer lights* When a trailer is connected, the vehicle's rear
Automatic check fog light may not illuminate and rear fog light
functionality is instead transferred to only the
NOTE When the trailer has been connected to the
trailer. If this is the case, check to see if the
vehicle's electrical system, its lights can be
A vehicle software update is required when trailer is equipped with a rear fog light before
checked by automatically activating them.
a towbar is retrofitted. Contact a Volvo activating the vehicle's rear fog light when
This function helps the driver check that the
retailer. driving with a trailer to help ensure safe opera-
trailer's lights are functioning correctly before
tion.
starting to drive.
Related information
1. When a trailer is connected to the towbar, Symbols and messages in the
• Driving with a trailer (p. 513)
instrument panel
the message Perform a trailer lamp
• Electronic Stability Control (p. 311) check? will appear in the instrument If one or more of the turn signals or brake
panel. lights on the trailer is not working, a symbol
and message will be displayed in the instru-
2. Acknowledge the message by pressing
ment panel. The other lights on the trailer
the O button on the right-side steering
must be checked manually by the driver before
wheel keypad.
the vehicle is driven.
> The light check will begin.
3. Get out of the vehicle to perform the
check.
> All of the lights on the trailer will begin
flashing, and then illuminate separately
one at a time.
4. Visually check that all of the trailer's lights
are functioning correctly.
Symbol Message Towing using a towline Related information

The vehicle can only be towed using a towline • Activating and deactivating Tow mode
Right trailer turn indicator to pull it up onto the bed of a tow truck. (p. 525)
malfunction For towing to be possible, the vehicle must be • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet
Left trailer turn indicator mal- in Tow mode, which is set via the center dis- (p. 519)
function play.
Trailer brake light malfunction CAUTION

Towing should only take place when Tow
mode is activated. If Tow mode is not acti-
vated, the vehicle may start charging and
If any of the trailer's turn signal lights is not there is considerable risk that the vehicle's
working, the turn signal symbol in the instru- systems could be damaged.
ment panel will also flash more quickly than
normal.
CAUTION
Related information
The vehicle may only be transported on a
flatbed tow truck, with all four wheels on
the bed. Never tow the vehicle with any of
the vehicle's wheels rolling on the ground.
Types of towing
When activating Tow mode, the type of tow-
ing must be selected.
Towing using a tow truck
The vehicle is transported with all four wheels
on the bed of a tow truck, without any of the
vehicle's wheels rolling.
517
Towing using a towline Before towing another vehicle, check applica- WARNING
This section refers to one vehicle being towed ble speed limit regulations.
behind another using a towline. • Ignition mode II must be active – all
Preparations and towing airbags are deactivated in ignition
Before towing another vehicle, check applica-
mode I.
ble speed limit regulations.
CAUTION • Always have the key in the vehicle
when it is towed.
CAUTION For some transmission variants, it is not
possible to shift from P position if the
Never attempt to tow the vehicle behind
engine is switched off. Contact an author- WARNING
another vehicle as this could damage the
ized Volvo workshop for assistance towing
electric motor. The vehicle must instead be The brake and steering servos do not work
or call a professional towing service.
lifted onto a tow truck and transported when the engine is off – it takes
with all four wheels on the bed or lifting about 5 times more pressure on the brake
platform of the truck (no wheels may touch CAUTION pedal and steering requires much more
the road). effort than normal.
Note that the vehicle must always be
towed with the wheels rolling forward. 1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
CAUTION • Do not tow a vehicle with automatic 2. Attach the towline to the towing eyelet.
Vehicles with the seven-gear transmission transmission at a speed greater than
should never be towed behind another 80 km/h (50 mph) or for a distance 3. Put the vehicle in ignition mode II – with-
vehicle. They must instead be transported greater than 80 km (50 miles). out pressing the brake pedal, press and
with all wheels raised on the bed of a tow hold the start button for about 4 seconds.
• Vehicles with the seven-gear transmis-
Release the button.
truck. Contact a Volvo retailer to determine sion should never be towed behind
what applies for your vehicle. another vehicle. They must instead be Put the vehicle in ignition mode II – with-
transported with all wheels raised on out pressing the brake pedal, turn the start
Towing another vehicle the bed of a tow truck. knob clockwise and hold it for about
Towing another vehicle requires a lot of power 4 seconds. Release the knob, which will
- use the Constant AWD drive mode. This automatically return to its original position.
charges the hybrid battery and helps improve
the vehicle's driving and roadholding characte-
ristics.
518
4. Move the gear selector to neutral (N) and CAUTION Attaching and removing the
release the parking brake. towing eyelet
Attempting to tow with the engine running
If the battery charge level is too low, it Use the towing eyelet when towing. Screw
could result in damage to the three-way
may not be possible to release the parking the towing eyelet securely into place in the
catalytic converter.
brake. Connect an auxiliary battery to the threaded outlet behind the cover on the right-
vehicle if the battery is discharged. hand side of the front and rear bumpers.
> The towing vehicle can now start driv- CAUTION Use the towing eyelet to tow another vehicle.
ing. Attempts to tow-start the vehicle could Screw the towing eyelet securely into place
5. Keep the towline taut when the towing cause damage to the electrical drive motor in the threaded outlet behind the cover on the
vehicle slows down by applying light pres- and three-way catalytic converter. right-hand side of the rear bumper.
sure to the brake pedal. This will help NOTE
avoid jarring movements. Related information If the vehicle is equipped with a towbar,
6. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet there is no rear attachment for the towing
the vehicle. (p. 519) eye.
Jump starting
Do not tow the vehicle to start the engine. Use • Recovery (p. 525) Attaching the towing eyelet
an auxiliary battery if the start battery's charge • Recovery (p. 526)
level is so low that the engine cannot be • Jump starting using another battery
started. (p. 501)
Never attempt to tow the vehicle to start the • Jump starting using another battery
engine, as this could damage the electric (p. 503)
motor. Use an auxiliary battery if the start bat-
tery's charge level is so low that the engine
• Selecting ignition mode (p. 448)
cannot be started. • Transmission (p. 463)
1. Take out the towing eyelet, which is

stored in a foam block under the hood.
}}
519
||
Take out the towing eyelet, which is Take out the towing eyelet, which is Take out the towing eyelet, which is
stored in a foam block under the hood. stored in a foam block under the floor in stored in a foam block under the floor in
the cargo compartment. the cargo compartment36.
Take out the towing eyelet, which is

stored in a foam block under the floor in Take out the towing eyelet, which is Take out the towing eyelet, which is
the cargo compartment. stored in a foam block under the floor in stored in a foam block under the floor in
the cargo compartment35. the cargo compartment.
35 The design and location of the foam block may vary depending on vehicle model.
36 The design and location of the foam block may vary depending on vehicle model.
520
Take out the towing eyelet, which is Front: Remove the cover by pressing on
stored in a foam block under the floor in the mark with a finger.
the cargo compartment. > The cover turns along its center line and
Front: Remove the cover by pressing on can then be removed.
the mark with a finger.
> The cover turns along its center line and
can then be removed.
Front: Remove the cover – use the vehicle

key or a small screwdriver in the notch to Rear: Remove the cover by pressing on
carefully pry off the cover. the mark with a finger while folding out
> The cover turns along its center line and the opposite side/corner.
can then be removed. Front: Remove the cover by pressing the > The cover turns along its center line and
cover. can then be removed.
}}
521
||
Rear: Remove the cover by pressing on

the mark with a finger while folding out
the opposite side/corner.
> The cover turns along its center line and Rear: Remove the cover by pressing on
can then be removed. the mark with a finger while folding out
the opposite side/corner.
15. Front: Remove the cover by pressing the

cover. The cover turns along its center line
and can then be removed.
Rear: Remove the cover by placing a coin,
key or similar at the mark and prying out
the cover. Fold out the cover completely
and remove.
522

the cover.
> Fold out the cover completely and Remove the cover by pressing on the
remove. mark with a finger while folding out the
opposite side/corner.
Front: Remove the cover by pressing the

cover. The cover turns along its center line
and can then be removed.
the cover. Fold out the cover completely
and remove.
}}
523
|| 22. Screw the towing eyelet in as far as possi- CAUTION

ble.
The towing eyelet is only intended for tow-
Fasten the eyelet securing by, for exam- ing on roads – not for pulling vehicles from
ple, inserting a lug wrench* through it and ditches or any similar purpose involving
using this as a lever. severe strain. Call a tow truck for profes-
sional assistance.
CAUTION
It is important that the towing eye is Removing the towing eyelet
screwed in securely as far as possible. – Unscrew the towing eyelet after use and
Remove the cover by pressing on the
return it to the foam block.
mark with a finger while folding out the
opposite side/corner. To consider before using the towing eyelet Replace the cover on the bumper.
> The cover turns along its center line and • In certain conditions, the towing eyelet Related information
can then be removed. may be used to pull the vehicle onto a flat-
bed tow truck. The vehicle's position and
ground clearance determines if this is pos- • Towing using a towline (p. 518)
sible. • Recovery (p. 525)
• If the incline of the tow truck is too steep • Recovery (p. 526)
or if the ground clearance under the vehi-
• Tool kit (p. 603)
cle is insufficient, attempting to pull it up
using the towing eyelet may result in dam-
age.
• If necessary, lift the vehicle using the tow
truck's lifting device instead of using the
Remove the cover by pressing on the
towing eyelet.
mark with a finger while folding out the
opposite side/corner.
WARNING
can then be removed. No person or object should be behind the
tow truck when the vehicle is lifted onto
the bed of the truck.
Activating and deactivating Tow • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet Recovery
mode (p. 519) This section refers to transporting the vehicle
Tow mode is used when the vehicle needs to with a tow truck or similar vehicle.
be able to roll freely, for example, to pull it up Call a professional towing service for assis-
onto the bed of a tow truck. tance.
Activating Tow mode The vehicle can be pulled up onto the bed of a
tow truck if the vehicle is in Tow mode. Other-
wise, it should be hoisted up onto the bed of
2. Tap Car status. the tow truck.
3. Select Service.
CAUTION
4. Tap Activate Tow Mode.
Note that the vehicle must always be
5. Follow the instructions in the screen. towed raised with all wheels on the tow
> The vehicle is now in Tow mode and truck.
can roll freely.
WARNING
CAUTION
No person or object should be behind the
The vehicle may only be transported on a tow truck when the vehicle is lifted onto
flatbed tow truck, with all four wheels on the bed of the truck.
the bed. Never tow the vehicle with any of
the vehicle's wheels rolling on the ground.
Related information
• Volvo Assistance help during a trip
Deactivating Tow mode (p. 564)
1. Make sure the vehicle is stationary.
2. Apply the parking brake. • Towing using a towline (p. 518)
> Tow mode is now deactivated.
• Activating and deactivating Tow mode
Related information (p. 525)
• Towing using a towline (p. 517) • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet
(p. 519)
525
Recovery only be lifted with the tow truck's lifting equip- Preparing for a long trip
This section refers to transporting the vehicle ment. It is important to have the vehicle's systems
with a tow truck or similar vehicle. and equipment checked carefully before driv-
Call a professional towing service for assis- WARNING ing long distances.
tance. No person or object should be behind the Check that
In certain conditions, the towing eyelet can be tow truck when the vehicle is lifted onto • the engine is running properly and that
used to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed tow the bed of the truck. fuel consumption is normal
truck. • there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
CAUTION • the brake pedal is functioning properly
CAUTION The towing eyelet is only intended for tow- • all lights work
Note that the vehicle must always be ing on roads, and must not be used to pull
towed raised with all wheels on the tow vehicles from ditches or any similar pur-
• tire tread depth and air pressure are at
correct levels. Change to snow tires when
truck. pose involving severe strain. Call a tow
driving in areas where there is a risk of
truck for professional assistance.
snowy or icy roads
If the vehicle is equipped with pneumatic sus-
pension*, this feature must be turned off • the start battery is sufficiently charged
CAUTION • the battery is sufficiently charged
before the vehicle is lifted onto a tow truck.
Turning off the function in the center display. Note that the vehicle must always be • the wiper blades are in good condition
towed with the wheels rolling forward.
1. Tap . Related information
Never tow a vehicle with all-wheel drive*
2. Select Driving. with the front wheels lifted at speeds • Checking tire pressure (p. 593)
3. Choose to activate or deactivate pneu- above 70 km/h (40 mph) or for distances • Refilling washer fluid (p. 816)
matic suspension. longer than 50 km (30 miles). • Winter driving (p. 527)
The vehicle's location and ground clearance • Economical driving (p. 485)
determine if it can be lifted onto a tow truck. If Related information
the incline of the tow truck is too steep or if • Volvo Assistance help during a trip
the ground clearance under the vehicle is (p. 564) • Loading recommendations (p. 640)
insufficient, attempting to pull it up may result • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet • Driving with a trailer (p. 513)
in damage. In this case, the vehicle should (p. 519) • Pilot Assist* (p. 326)
• Tire sealing system (p. 610)
Winter driving Slippery driving conditions • Replacing windshield wiper blades

It is important to check the vehicle before Volvo recommends that One Pedal Drive is (p. 813)
driving in cold/snowy conditions to make deactivated when driving on slippery or icy • Changing rear window wipers (p. 810)
sure it can be driven safely. roads.
• Refilling coolant (p. 699)
Before the cold season arrives: To help optimize traction and roadholding,
• Make sure the engine coolant contains Volvo recommends using snow tires on all
50% antifreeze. This mixture helps pro- wheels whenever there is a risk of snow or ice
tect the engine from frost erosion down to on the road.
approx. –35 °C (–31 °F). Do not mix dif-
ferent types of antifreeze as this could NOTE
pose a health risk.
Certain countries require use of winter tires
• Keep the fuel tank well filled to prevent by law. Not all countries permit the use of
condensation from forming. studded tires.
• Check the viscosity of the engine oil. Oil
with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves Practice driving on slippery surfaces under
cold-weather starting and reduces fuel controlled conditions to learn how the vehicle
consumption when driving with a cold reacts.
engine.
• Check the condition and charge level of Related information
the start battery. Cold weather places • Regenerative braking (p. 462)
greater demands on the start battery and • Regenerative braking* (p. 462)
reduces its capacity. • Engine oil specifications (p. 862)
• Check the condition and charge level of • Snow tires (p. 608)
the battery. Cold weather places greater
demands on the battery and reduces its • Snow chains (p. 609)
capacity. • Braking on salted roads (p. 453)
• Use washer fluid containing antifreeze to • Braking on wet roads (p. 453)
help prevent ice from forming in the • Refilling washer fluid (p. 816)
washer fluid reservoir.
See separate section for engine oil recommen-
dations.
Driving through standing water CAUTION After driving through standing water
It may be necessary to drive the vehicle When you have passed the water, press lightly
through standing water e.g. deep puddles or • Engine damage could occur if water on the brake pedal and check that the brakes
enters the air cleaner. are functioning properly. Water, mud, slush,
flooding on the road. This must be done with
great caution. • If water enters the transmission, the etc. can make the brake linings slippery,
When driving through standing water lubricating ability of the oils is reduced resulting in delayed braking effect.
To help prevent damage to the vehicle when and the service life of these systems is
If the vehicle is equipped with any electric
driving through water: shortened.
heater and trailer connection contacts, clean
• The vehicle can be driven through water • Damage to any component, engine, the contacts after driving in water or mud.
up to a depth of 45 cm (17 in). transmission, turbocharger, differential
or its internal components caused by
• The vehicle can be driven through water flooding, vapor lock or insufficient oil is
up to a depth of 25 cm (9 in). not covered under warranty.
• The vehicle can be driven through water • If the engine stalls while the vehicle is
up to a depth of 30 cm (11 in). in water, do not attempt to restart it.
• The vehicle can be driven through water Have the vehicle towed out of the
up to a depth of 40 cm (15 in). water to a workshop. An authorized
• Do not drive faster than walking speed. Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk
of engine failure.
• Do not stop the vehicle in the water. Drive
carefully forward or back the vehicle out of
the water. CAUTION
• Be particularly careful when driving Because it can be difficult to determine the
through flowing water. water depth, Volvo recommends not driv-
• Do not allow the vehicle to stand in water ing through standing or running water. The
up to the sills any longer than absolutely driver is always responsible for operating
necessary. This could result in electrical the vehicle in a safe manner and adhering
malfunctions. to all applicable laws and regulations.
528
When driving through standing water CAUTION If the vehicle is equipped with a trailer cou-
To help prevent damage to the vehicle when pling contact, clean the contact after driving in
driving through water: Parts of the vehicle (e.g. engine, transmis- water or mud.
sion, driveline, electrical components, etc.)
• Do not drive in water higher than the floor can be damaged if the vehicle is driven Related information
of the vehicle. If possible, check the depth through water higher than its floor level. • Recovery (p. 525)
of the water at its deepest point before Damage to any components caused by
driving through it. • Recovery (p. 526)
flooding, vapor lock or insufficient oil is not
• Always select the Off-road drive mode covered under warranty.
before driving in water to ensure the gaso- If the engine stalls while the vehicle is in
line engine is running. water, do not attempt to restart it. Have
• Do not drive faster than walking speed. the vehicle towed on the bed of a tow
• Do not stop the vehicle in the water. Drive truck to a workshop - an authorized Volvo
carefully forward or back the vehicle out of workshop is recommended.
the water.
• Be particularly careful when driving CAUTION
through flowing water.
Because it can be difficult to determine the
• Remember that waves created by passing water depth, Volvo recommends not driv-
vehicles could cause the water level to rise ing through standing or running water. The
above the vehicle's floor level. driver is always responsible for operating
• Avoid driving through salt water to help the vehicle in a safe manner and adhering
avoid the risk of corrosion. to all applicable laws and regulations.
After driving through standing water

When you have passed the water, press lightly
on the brake pedal and check that the brakes
are functioning properly. Water, mud, slush,
etc. can make the brake linings slippery,
resulting in delayed braking effect.
529
HomeLink®*37 NOTE Programming HomeLink®*39

HomeLink®38 is a programmable remote con- Save the original remote controls for future Program HomeLink®, reset programming or
trol integrated in the vehicle's electrical sys- reprogramming (e.g. for use in another reprogram individual buttons.
tem. vehicle). Programming
It can remotely control up to three different It is also advisable to delete the button pro- 1. Point the remote control at the
devices, such as garage door openers or gramming if the vehicle is sold. HomeLink® button to be programmed and
alarm systems, and thereby replace the hold it about 2-8 cm (1-3 inches) from the
remote controls for these.
More information button. Do not obstruct the HomeLink®
Visit homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. indicator light.
2. Press and hold both the remote control
Related information button and the HomeLink® button to be
• Using HomeLink®* (p. 532) programmed.
• Programming HomeLink®* (p. 530)
• Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 533)
The illustration is generic – the design may vary.

Programmable buttons
Indicator light
HomeLink® is integrated in the rearview mirror
and consists of three programmable buttons
and an indicator light in the mirror.

38 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
3. Do not release the buttons until the indica- Programming individual buttons
tor light has stopped flashing slowly 1. Press and hold the desired button for
(about once a second) and either flashes about 20 seconds.
quickly (about 10 times a second) or
2. When the indicator light on HomeLink®
glows steadily.
starts flashing slowly, it is possible to pro-
> If the indicator light glows steadily: gram as usual.
Indication that programming is com-
plete.
NOTE
Press the programmed button twice to
activate. If the button you are reprogramming does
4. Locate the "training" button40 on the
not program with a new device, it will
If the indicator light flashes quickly: receiver for the e.g. garage door opener. It
return to the previously saved program-
The device being programmed with is usually located near the antenna bracket
ming.
HomeLink® may have a security func- on the receiver.
tion that requires an extra step. 5. Press and release the "training" button
Resetting the HomeLink® buttons
Try pressing the programmed button once.
It is only possible to reset all HomeLink® but-
twice to see whether the programming Programming must be completed within tons at once. Individual buttons can only be
works. Otherwise, continue with the 30 seconds after pressing the button. reprogrammed.
following steps.
6. Press and release the HomeLink® button – Press and hold the outer buttons on
to be programmed. Repeat the press/ HomeLink® for about 10 seconds.
hold/release sequence a second time. For > When the indicator light goes from a
some receivers, the sequence may need to steady glow to flashing, the buttons
be repeated a third time. have been reset and are ready for
> Programming is complete. reprogramming.
NOTE Problems programming

Visit homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
Some remote controls are more effective
at programming HomeLink® from a dis-
tance of about 15-20 cm (6-12 inches).
40 The name and color of the button varies depending on the manufacturer. }}
531
|| Related information Using HomeLink®*41 WARNING

• Using HomeLink®* (p. 532) Once HomeLink® is programmed, it can be • If you use HomeLink® to open a garage
• HomeLink®* (p. 530) used instead of the separate remote controls.
door or gate, be sure no one is near the
Press and hold the programming button. The
• Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 533)
garage door, gate, alarm system, etc. will be
gate or door while it is in motion.
activated (this may take several seconds). If • Do not use HomeLink® with any
the button is held down for more than 20 sec- garage door opener that lacks safety
onds, reprogramming will begin. The indicator stop and reverse features as required
light will glow steadily or flash when the but- by U.S. federal safety standards (this
ton has been pressed. The original remote includes any garage door opener model
controls may be used concurrently with manufactured before April 1, 1982). A
HomeLink® if desired. garage door that cannot detect an
object - signaling the door to stop and
reverse - does not meet current U.S.
NOTE federal safety standards. For more
When the ignition is switched off, information, contact HomeLink at:
HomeLink® will be active for at least homelink.com.
7 minutes.
Related information
NOTE • HomeLink®* (p. 530)
HomeLink® cannot be used if the vehicle is • Programming HomeLink®* (p. 530)

locked and the alarm is armed* from the • Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 533)
outside.
Type approval for HomeLink®*42

Type approval for HomeLink® is provided
below.
Country/ Type approval
Area
USA and This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
Canada This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Europe Gentex Corporation hereby declares that HomeLink® Model UAHL5 complies with the Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU.
Wavelengths within which the radio equipment operates:
• 433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.
• 868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.
• 868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.
• 869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.
• 869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.
Certificate holder address: Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA
For further details, search for support informa- WARNING Related information
tion on type approval at volvocars.com/intl/ • HomeLink®* (p. 530)
support. The transmitter has been tested and com-
plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or • Type approval Radio Equipment Directive
modifications not expressly approved by (p. 559)
the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
device.43

43 The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Audio and media Sound settings

The vehicle's sound system takes into Sound reproduction quality is preset but can
account factors such as listener position and also be adjusted.
vehicle speed. The center display provides
access to radio* and music apps, and addi- Volume
tional third-party music and media apps can The system's volume is normally adjusted
be downloaded via Google Play. using the volume control below the center dis-
Connect a phone or other device via play or the right-side steering wheel keypad.
Bluetooth. Select if you would like to use this This applies, for example, when playing music
as media device to play music and/or as or the radio* or during phone calls and active
phone device to make calls, display contacts, traffic messages.
etc. When the volume is adjusted, an expandable
Audio and media overview menu will appear in the center display. This
The functions can be controlled using voice menu can be used to change volume settings
commands, the steering wheel keypad or the for incoming phone calls, notifications, the
center display. media player and other functions.
Charge devices via the USB ports. For additional sound settings, go to settings
and tap Sound.
Related information
• Connecting a phone to the vehicle Sound reproduction
(p. 545) The audio system is precalibrated using digital
• Radio* (p. 539) signal processing. This calibration takes into
account speakers, amplifiers, passenger com-
• Bluetooth Media Player (p. 542)
partment acoustics, listener location, etc.
• Sound settings (p. 536) There is also a dynamic calibration that takes
• Apps (p. 537) into account the volume control's position and
the vehicle's speed.
(p. 147) Related information
• Driver distraction (p. 39) • Audio and media (p. 536)
Apps Related information Download apps

App view provides access to the vehicle's • Audio and media (p. 536) New apps can be downloaded and installed
preinstalled and downloaded apps. • Download apps (p. 537) when the vehicle is connected to the Internet.
Tap the icon for App view at the bottom of Google Play contains a number of
different apps customized for use in
the center display to go to App view and start collection (p. 34)
the radio*, navigation system, phone or the vehicle.
another app1.
• Deleting apps (p. 538)
• Moving apps in the center display (p. 135) To download apps, the vehicle must be sta-
Several basic apps are always available. More
• Hard disk storage space (p. 559) tionary, i.e. it must be in usage mode Comfort:
apps such as web radio and music services
can be downloaded when the car is connected • Center display views (p. 133) 1. Open App view .
to the Internet. • Switching off the vehicle (p. 446) 2. Tap Google Play.
Some apps can only be used when the vehicle • Switching off the vehicle (p. 446) > A Google account must be connected
is connected to the Internet. to the current user profile in order to
All apps used should be updated to the latest open Google Play.
version. This provides access to the latest
3. Search for and select the desired app2.
updates and functions.
4. Tap Install.
Apps close down
5. Follow the instructions on the screen to
If an app closes down unexpectedly, try the
complete the installation.
following:
• open the app again NOTE
• check to see if an app update is available
The app sometimes requires access to cer-
• restart the system (switch off the vehicle, tain things, such as the address book or
wait a few seconds and restart) the vehicle's location, in order for the app
• uninstall and reinstall the app. to function as intended. When such access
is required, you will be prompted to accept
If the problem persists, contact a workshop.
this.
Volvo recommends contacting an authorized
Volvo workshop.
1 The most recently used apps are always available from Home view. }}
|| Related information Deleting apps Related information

• Apps (p. 537) Installed apps3 can be deleted in various • Apps (p. 537)
• Deleting apps (p. 538) ways. • Download apps (p. 537)
• Usage mode (p. 449) Deleting apps via App view
• Connecting an account to a user profile 1. Open App view .
(p. 142)
2. Press and hold the app you wish to
• Hard disk storage space (p. 559) remove until a recycling bin appears at the
bottom of the screen.
3. Pull the app to the recycling bin and
release.
4. Confirm the deletion.
Deleting apps via settings

1. Go to settings at the bottom of the
center display.
2. Go to Applications.
3. Select to display all installed apps and
then select the app you want to delete.
4. Select to uninstall the app and confirm its
deletion.
NOTE
If the app you want to delete is the only
app in a tile, it must be uninstalled via set-
tings.
2 Only vehicle-adapted apps are available.

3 The vehicle's "native" default apps, such as the phone or radio* apps, cannot be deleted.
Radio* Starting the radio* Storing radio favorites*

It is possible to listen to FM stations. The radio app can be started via the center A radio station can be added to the list of
The radio can be controlled from the display or by using voice control. favorite radio stations, which has its own tab
center display or the steering wheel in the radio app.
keypad, or by using voice control. Starting from the center display
Radio favorites
Additional radio apps can be down- To save a radio station as a favorite:
loaded from Google Play. 1. Open the radio app from Home view or
1. Start the radio app from Home view5 or App view.
App view . 2. Tap the star next to the radio station
Shortcuts
2. Select the desired radio station from the you want to add to the list of favorite sta-
When the app is in use, it can also be con-
list of available radio stations or from tions. The star becomes solid blue to indi-
trolled via shortcuts in Home view.
favorites. cate that the selection has been con-
Radio messages4 firmed.
Different types of radio messages, such as Starting using voice control > The radio station is added to the list of
traffic news and important public announce- FM radio can also be started using voice con- favorites.
ments, can be adjusted under settings in the trol by saying a frequency6. To remove a radio station from the list of
radio app. favorites, tap the star again. The blue color will
Related information
disappear to confirm that the radio station has
Related information • Radio* (p. 539)
been removed from the list of favorites.
• Starting the radio* (p. 539) • Storing radio favorites* (p. 539)
• Storing radio favorites* (p. 539) It is also possible to add and remove favorites
from the Now-playing view, which can be
• RBDS* (p. 540) (p. 147)
accessed by expanding the Now-playing field
• SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 540) to full-screen view.
Related information
• Radio* (p. 539)
• Starting the radio* (p. 539)

5 The app is available from Home view if it is among the most recently used apps.
6 Only FM frequencies can be specified using voice control, not names of radio stations.
RBDS* SiriusXM® Satellite radio* Related information

RBDS radio The SiriusXM®
Satellite system broadcasts • Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 541)
RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) ena- from of a number of high elevation satellites • Radio* (p. 539)
bles certain functionality7, such as: in geosynchronous orbit.
• Audio and media (p. 536)
• Searches for program types or new broad- Starting SiriusXM
casts The SiriusXM app can be started via the center
• Text information about currently broadcast display or via voice control.
programs
Via the center display:
Related information
• Radio* (p. 539)
1. Start the SiriusXM app from Home view8

or App view.
2. Select the desired station from the list of
available stations, favorites or categories.
If no subscription is activated, press station 0
which shows your radio ID. The Now Playing
view prompts you to make a call SiriusXM on
the screen to activate the subscription you
want. The Radio ID can also be found on the
settings page for SiriusXM, which also con-
tains subscription status information.
When the subscription has been activated,
you can choose to listen to a desired station in
the SiriusXM app.
7 Certain stations only.

8 The app is available from Home view if it is among the most recently used apps.
Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* SiriusXM® Satellite radio functions Related information
SiriusXM Satellite radio offers several fea- Search • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 540)
tures for finding and listening to music, news, Tapping the magnifying glass brings up a • Radio* (p. 539)
sporting events, etc. being broadcast on sat- search view where you can enter digits using
ellite radio stations.
the center display's keyboard and search for a
station.
Setting favorites
A SiriusXM station can be added to the list of Settings
favorites, which has its own tab in the Pressing the gear wheel displays settings for
SiriusXM app. SiriusXM. Here you will find information about
your subscription, radio ID and setting for hid-
To save a stations as a favorite: ing or showing stations in the station list that
1. Open the SiriusXM app from Home view you can no longer subscribe to.
or app view. Stations
2. Tap the star next to the station you Tap the station tab to display a complete list
want to add to the list of favorites. The of the stations included in your subscription.
star becomes solid blue to indicate that Tap a station name to listen. If a subscription
the selection has been confirmed. to a station has expired, its name will be
grayed-out on the screen. For quick access to
> The station is added to the list of favor-
a station that you often listen to, tap the star
ites.
to the right of the station's name. It will then
The stations are placed in numerical order. be added to your list of favorites.
To remove a station from the list of favorites, Favorites
tap the star again. The blue color will disap- Tap on the favorites tab to display the stations
pear to confirm that the station has been that you have added to this list. Tap a station
removed from the list of favorites. to listen.
It is also possible to add and remove favorites Categories
from the Now-playing view, which can be Tap on the categories tab to display the cate-
accessed by expanding the Now-playing field gories available. Tap a category to display the
to full-screen view. stations that it contains and then tap a station
to listen.
Bluetooth Media Player Playing media Apple® CarPlay®*

If a phone or another device is connected to Regardless of which media app is used, a With CarPlay9, you can listen to music, make
the vehicle via Bluetooth, media from the Now-playing field will be shown in the center phone calls, get driving instructions, send/
devices can be played in Bluetooth Media display. receive messages and use Siri®, all while
Player. In the Now-playing field, you can perform remaining focused on driving.
Start the Bluetooth Media Player operations such as pause, change track, etc. CarPlay works with select iPhone®10 models.
app from Home view or App view Expand the Now-playing field to full-screen If the vehicle does not already have support for
. When the app is in use, it can mode to access additional settings. CarPlay, it can be retrofitted. Contact a Volvo
also be controlled via shortcuts in Opening the Now-playing view retailer to install CarPlay.
Home view. Tap the arrow in the Now-playing field to Information on supported apps and compati-
expand the field to Now-playing view. This ble iPhones can be found on Apple's website:
NOTE view provides access to additional settings, www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Please note that
To stream media from a phone via which could vary depending on which app is Volvo is not responsible for the content in
Bluetooth, you must first start Bluetooth used. Minimize the Now-playing view by tap- CarPlay.
Media Player. ping the arrow again.
When using map navigation via CarPlay, guid-
Related information ance will only be shown on the center display
Other third-party apps for media playback can • Bluetooth Media Player (p. 542) and not in the instrument panel or head-up
also be downloaded to the vehicle. display.
• Download apps (p. 537)
Start Bluetooth Media Player via voice When using navigation guidance provided by
control CarPlay, navigation will only be shown on the
It is also possible to control the media player center display and not in the instrument panel.
using voice control. When navigation is started through Apple
CarPlay, any current route guidance from the
Related information
vehicle's own systems will be discontinued.
• Connecting a phone to the vehicle
(p. 545) The CarPlay apps can be controlled via the
center display, your iPhone or with the right-
• Playing media (p. 542)
side steering wheel keypad. The apps can be
• Download apps (p. 537) voice-controlled using Siri. Press and hold the
• Voice control with the Google Assistant button on the steering wheel to start
(p. 147) voice control with Siri. Press briefly to activate
the vehicle's own voice control system. If Siri Using Apple® CarPlay®* 3. Tap the desired app.
cuts off too soon, press and hold the but- To use CarPlay11,
the Siri®
voice control must > The app will start up.
ton on the steering wheel. be activated in your iPhone®12. The device CarPlay will run in the background if another
also needs to have an Internet connection for app is started. To display CarPlay again, tap
Related information
all functions to work. the CarPlay app in App view.
• Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 543)
• Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 544) Connecting an iPhone and starting Related information
CarPlay • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 542)
• Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 544)
NOTE
CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is
disabled in the vehicle. A cell phone or
media player connected to the vehicle via
Bluetooth will therefore not be available
when CarPlay is active.
1. Plug an iPhone with support for CarPlay

into the USB port with the white frame13.
If CarPlay has been previously used from
the phone, CarPlay will open automati-
cally.
2. If this is the first time the phone is con-
nected, read and approve the terms and
conditions to connect.
> CarPlay opens and compatible apps are
shown.
9 Availability may vary depending on market.

10 Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and Siri are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
13 USB-C to lightning cable required.
Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* Related information Phone

Here are some useful tips for when you use • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 542) A phone equipped with Bluetooth can be
CarPlay®14. • Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 543) wirelessly connected to the vehicle.
When a phone has been paired and connected
• Update your iPhone®15 with the latest ver-
sion of the iOS operating system and to the vehicle, it is possible to make calls, send
ensure that the apps have been updated. and receive text messages and play media
wirelessly through the vehicle's audio system.
• In the event of a problem with CarPlay,
unplug your iPhone from the USB port The phone is controlled from the center dis-
and plug it in again. Otherwise, try to play and certain functions can also be voice-
close the app on the device that is not controlled.
working and then restart the app, or try
closing all apps and restart your device. Related information
• You can use Siri®
to write or dictate mes-
sages or have them read aloud. Messages • Connecting a phone to the vehicle
(p. 545)
are read aloud and dictated in the lan-
guage selected in the Siri settings. When • Handling phone calls (p. 547)
a message is written/dictated, it will be • Managing contacts (p. 549)
displayed in your iPhone, but not in the
center display.
• Handling text messages (p. 548)
• If the device is connected to the vehicle

• Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 546)
through Bluetooth, the connection will be
broken when CarPlay is used. • Switch between phones connected via
Bluetooth (p. 546)
• CarPlay only works with iPhone.
• Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi-
ces (p. 547)
NOTE
Availability and functionality can vary
(p. 147)
depending on market.
• Sound settings (p. 536)

Connecting a phone to the vehicle 4. In the phone, accept or cancel the options Related information
Use Bluetooth to pair a phone with the vehi- for selecting the phone's contacts and text • Phone (p. 544)
cle to make calls, send and receive text mes- messages.
sages and play media. > By default, the phone is connected for phone (p. 546)
use as both phone and media device17.
Searching for the phone from the • Switch between phones connected via
vehicle 5. Tap Done. Bluetooth (p. 546)
Activate Bluetooth in the phone and verify in • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi-
the settings that the phone is visible to other NOTE ces (p. 547)
devices. • The message function must be acti-
1. If no phone is already paired, tap . Oth- vated in certain phones.
erwise, go to settings at the bottom of • If contacts and messages are not
the center display, and then tap shown in the vehicle even when the
Connectivity and Bluetooth. If the phone function is activated, try unplugging
is not already listed under 16, select Pair the phone and plugging it in again.
new device. • Not all phones are fully compatible and
> A list of available Bluetooth devices will may not be able to display contacts
be displayed. The list will be updated as and messages in the vehicle.
new devices are discovered.
2. Tap the name of the phone you would like NOTE
to connect.
If the phone's operating system is being
3. Make sure that the code displayed in the updated, it is possible that the connection
vehicle matches the one in the phone and will be interrupted. Delete the phone from
confirm. the car and reconnect.
16 Previously paired phones will be visible under Bluetooth and can be selected from there.
17 Which device should be used for phone and/or media can be selected later on, for example if a passenger wants to use their phone as media device to play media.
545
Disconnecting a Bluetooth- • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- Switch between phones

connected phone ces (p. 547) connected via Bluetooth
A Bluetooth-connected phone can be discon- It is possible to switch between Bluetooth-
nected from the vehicle. connected phones.
• When the phone is out of range of the You can do this by opening the phone app and
vehicle, it will be automatically discon- tapping .
nected. If a call is in progress when the
phone is disconnected from the vehicle, You can also switch between phones by fol-
the call will be transferred from the vehi- lowing the steps below.
cle's speakers and microphone to the cel- 1. Tap at the bottom of the display.
lular phone.
2. Tap Connectivity.
• The phone can also be disconnected by
manually deactivating Bluetooth. 3. Under Bluetooth, tap the name of the
phone you would like to connect.
Disconnecting via the center display
4. Select if it should be used as phone,
1. Tap at the bottom of the display. media device, or both.
2. Tap Connectivity.
Related information
3. Under Bluetooth, tap the row containing • Phone (p. 544)
the name of the phone to disconnect both
phone and media.
• Connecting a phone to the vehicle
(p. 545)
> The phone is no longer connected to
the vehicle. • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 546)
You can also select whether the phone should
be connected as only phone or only media
• Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi-
ces (p. 547)
device by pressing the relevant icon.
Related information
• Phone (p. 544)
• Switch between phones connected via
Bluetooth (p. 546)
546
Disconnecting Bluetooth- Handling phone calls Answering a call while another call is in
connected devices You can make and receive calls over the vehi- progress
Phones or other devices in the list of regis- cle's speakers when your phone is connected If a new call comes in while you are
tered Bluetooth devices can be removed. to the vehicle via Bluetooth. The phone must on another call, you can answer the
1. Tap at the bottom of the display. be paired as a phone device. new call via the center display. The
original call will be parked (put on
2. Tap Connectivity. Making a call from the phone app hold) while you answer the incoming call.
3. Under Bluetooth, tap the arrow after the 1. Open the phone app from Home view or Switch between the calls by pressing the
name of the phone. App view . symbol for that.
4. Tap Forget device. 2. Select a contact from Favorites, Recents Turning off the microphone
> The phone is no longer registered in the or Contacts. You can also enter a phone Tap the microphone symbol to turn
vehicle. number using the keypad. off the microphone. The person on
3. Tap the contact to make a call. the phone call will not hear what is
Related information said in the vehicle.
• Phone (p. 544) 4. Tap to end the call.
Switching between the vehicle's and
• Connecting a phone to the vehicle It is also possible to make calls using voice
(p. 545) control. phone's speakers
Tap Car/Phone to switch the sound between
Answering calls the vehicle's and the phone's speakers.
phone (p. 546)
Incoming phone calls are shown and managed
• Switch between phones connected via via the center display. Using the keypad during a call
Bluetooth (p. 546) If you need to use the keypad during
1. Tap or to answer or decline a call. a call, you can open it by pressing
the keypad symbol in the center dis-
2. Tap to end the call.
play. To exit Keypad view and return
to Call view, tap the same symbol again.
Missed calls
Missed calls are shown in Home view, where
it is also possible to call back. Missed calls are
also shown in Notification view at the top of
the center display.
}}
547
|| Related information Handling text messages Text messages are not displayed
• Phone (p. 544) SMS text messages can be received and sent If new text messages are shown on the phone
• Connecting a phone to the vehicle via the vehicle when the phone is paired with but not in the center display, try unplugging
(p. 545) the vehicle. the phone and plugging it back in.
To manage text messages in the vehicle, the
• Managing contacts (p. 549) Related information
phone must be connected via Bluetooth18 as
• Handling text messages (p. 548) phone device and the user must have accep- • Phone (p. 544)
• Voice control with the Google Assistant ted notification display in the phone's Blue- • Connecting a phone to the vehicle
(p. 147) tooth settings. (p. 545)
• Sound settings (p. 536) • Voice control with the Google Assistant
Sending text messages (p. 147)
It is possible to dictate a new message by ask-
ing the voice control system to send a mes-
sage to a named contact or phone number.
Receiving text messages

When the phone is paired with the vehicle, a
notification will be displayed at the top of the
center display when a new text message
comes in. Select whether to play the message
by tapping the screen or using voice control.
You can also choose to mute the conversation.
In this case, no further notifications for this
conversation will be shown during the current
trip.
Answering text messages

When a text message is read aloud, it is possi-
ble to dictate a reply19. Follow the instructions
given by the voice control system.
18 Text messages can only be handled in the vehicle if the phone is compatible.
19 Only phones with Android or iOS 13 or later.
548
Managing contacts Related information Wireless phone charger*

When a phone is connected to the vehicle, • Phone (p. 544) A charging pad for wireless phone charging is
contacts can be managed directly in the cen- • Connecting a phone to the vehicle located in the tunnel console.
ter display. (p. 545) To be able to charge, the phone
When a phone is connected to the vehicle must have wireless charging (Qi)
with Bluetooth and selected as phone device, capability. Phones not equipped with
contacts in the phone app will be shown a wireless charging receiver can
under a separate tab. often be supplemented with a shell that ena-
bles wireless charging.
Contact sharing must first be accepted in the
phone before the contacts can be shown in
the vehicle. WARNING
Scroll through contacts by swiping up or Wireless charging can affect the operation
down. of an implanted pacemaker or other medi-
cal devices. If you have one, it is recom-
It is possible to display a phone's favorites in mended to consult with your doctor before
the vehicle.20 using the wireless charging system.
Contacts not displayed
It may take a moment for the contacts to load.
Related information
If the contacts are still not shown after a pro- • Phone (p. 544)
longed period of time, try unplugging the • Using the wireless phone charger*
phone and plugging it back in. (p. 550)
• Certificate for wireless phone charger
NOTE (p. 551)
Not all phones are fully compatible with
the vehicle. If the phone is not compatible,
contacts cannot be displayed in the vehi-
cle.
20 Some phones are unable to sync favorites. In that case, you can manually add favorites in the vehicle.
Using the wireless phone charger* To use the wireless charging plate: • Make sure the phone hasn't slid off the
The rubber pad below the center display can charging pad while driving.
– Remove all objects from the charging pad
be used to charge a phone without having to and place the phone in the center of the • If the temperature of the battery becomes
connect its cord. pad. too high while charging, the charging
> The phone will begin charging and the function will be switched off.
symbol will appear at the top of • If any of the doors are opened, charging
the center display. will stop for a few seconds.
If an object is preventing charging on the
CAUTION charge pad, a message will be shown in the
center display.
Do not place cards with NFC (Near Field
Communication), e.g. debit cards for con-
tactless payment, next to the phone. This CAUTION
type of card could be destroyed during Keep cellular phones and charger stations
charging. away from other objects while charging to
help avoid overheating.
Wireless phone charger in front of gear selector
NOTE
Related information
WARNING Some cellular phones may become warm
• Phone (p. 544)
Wireless charging can affect the operation during wireless charging. This is normal.
of an implanted pacemaker or other medi- • Wireless phone charger* (p. 549)
cal devices. If you have one, it is recom- If the phone is not charging: • Certificate for wireless phone charger
mended to consult with your doctor before (p. 551)
using the wireless charging system. • Make sure there are no other objects on
the charging pad. • Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 135)
• Make sure the phone supports wireless
charging (Qi).
• If the phone has a phone case, remove it.
• Lift up the phone and then put it back on
the center of the charging pad.
• Make sure the ignition is on.
Certificate for wireless phone charger
Country/
Area
China: （一）符合“微功率短距离无线电发射设备目录和技术要求”的具体条款和使用场景，采用的天线类型和性能，控制、调整及开关等使用
方法；
（二）不得擅自改变使用场景或使用条件、扩大发射频率范围、加大发射功率（包括额外加装射频功率放大器），不得擅自更改发射天
线；
（三）不得对其他合法的无线电台（站）产生有害干扰，也不得提出免受有害干扰保护；
（四）应当承受辐射射频能量的工业、科学及医疗（ISM）应用设备的干扰或其他合法的无线电台（站）干扰；
（五）如对其他合法的无线电台（站）产生有害干扰时，应立即停止使用，并采取措施消除干扰后方可继续使用；
（六）在航空器内和依据法律法规、国家有关规定、标准划设的射电天文台、气象雷达站、卫星地球站（含测控、测距、接收、导航
站）等军民用无线电台（站）、机场等的电磁环境保护区域内使用微功率设备，应当遵守电磁环境保护及相关行业主管部门的规定；
（七）禁止在以机场跑道中心点为圆心、半径 5000 米的区域内使用各类模型遥控器；
（八）微功率设备使用时温度和电压的环境条件。
Mexico: RCPVAPVO 18-1919
Para-
guay:
2018-11-1-000541
}}
551
|| Country/
Area
Taiwan: 根據 NCC 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法規定:
第十二條經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功
能。
第十四條
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信。
低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
552
Country/
Area
Ukraine: Ци
Діапазон частот: 107 кГц - 115 кГц
Максимальна потужність радіосигналу: 5 Вт (сполучена), 63 Вт наномасштабів (випромінюється)
Коефіцієнт викидів: N / A
Модуляції: 2 кГц
NFC
Діапазон частот: 13,56 МГц, у межах +/- 0,01%
Максимальна вихідна потужність РФ: 10 мВт
–
виробник: Ел-Джі Електронікс Інк.(LG Electronics Inc) 10, Магок'юнганг 10-ро, Гангсео-гу, Сеул, 07796, Корея
Frequency range 111 кГц / Максимальна потужність РЧ: 42 дБмк А / м
справжнім Ел-Джі Електронікс Інкзаявляє, що тип радіообладнання WC510MVV20 відповідає Технічному регламенту
радіообладнання; повний текст декларації про відповідність доступний на веб-сайті за такою адресою:https://www.lg.com/
global/support/cedoc/cedoc.
імпортер : Віннер Імпортс Україна
Вул. Дачна, 5-А, с.Капітанівка, Київська область, 08112, Україна
Тел.: +38(044) 585 63 00
Контактна особа : Alla Haidai ([email protected])
}}
553
|| Country/
Area
US/ FCC ID : BEJWC510MVV20
Canada
IC : 2703H-WC510MVV20
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-Gen,RSS-216 rules of Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any changed or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate
this equipment.
FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 15cm between the radiator and your body.
–
IDéclaration d'avertissement ISED
Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquerd'interferences nuisibles, et
(2) Cet appareil doit accepter toute interference recue, y compris les interferences pouvant entrainerun fonctionnement indesirable.
Les changements ou modifications non expressement approuves par LG Vehicle Components Company pourraient annuler l'autorite
de l'utilisateura utilizer l'equipement.
Déclaration d'exposition aux radiations RF de l'ISED: Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements RF de
l'ISED définies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas être situés ou fonctionner
conjointement avec une autre antenne ou un autre émetteur.
554
Country/
Area
Cet équipement doit être installé pour fonctionner avec une distance minimale de 10cm entre le radiateuret le corps de l'utilisateur
final.
Related information
• Wireless phone charger* (p. 549)
• Using the wireless phone charger*
(p. 550)
Internet connection Connecting to the Internet via Related information

When the vehicle is connected to the Inter- Bluetooth • Internet connection (p. 556)
net, you can use apps to listen to web radio, Set up an Internet connection via Bluetooth • Connecting a phone to the vehicle
music services, etc. through tethering (personal/portable hotspot) (p. 545)
The vehicle can be connected to the Internet from a phone.
via a Bluetooth-connected phone or a Wi-Fi 1. Make sure that the phone supports Inter-
• Connecting to the Internet via Wi-Fi
(p. 557)
network. In some markets, the vehicle can net sharing (tethering) and that the func-
also be connected via the vehicle's built-in tion is activated. • Internet connection problems (p. 557)
modem21. If the vehicle has Internet connec- 2. Connect the phone to the vehicle via • Markets with Internet via vehicle modem
tions to several different sources at the same (p. 558)
Bluetooth. Go to settings at the bot-
time, it will first attempt to connect over Wi-
Fi, then Bluetooth and finally via the vehicle's tom of the center display and then tap
integrated modem. Connectivity and select Bluetooth.
3. If the phone was previously connected,
Related information tap the icon for tethering via Bluetooth for
• Connecting to the Internet via Bluetooth the phone you want to use. Otherwise,
(p. 556) select Pair new device first.
4. Accept, via the message shown, that con-
(p. 557)
nection should be made.
• Internet connection problems (p. 557) > The vehicle is connected to the Inter-
• Markets with Internet via vehicle modem net.
(p. 558)
• Profile settings (p. 141) NOTE
The cellular phone and network operator
must support tethering (sharing of Internet
connection) and the subscription must
include data traffic.
21 On certain markets, approval of conditions is required for Internet connection via modem.
556
Connecting to the Internet via Internet connection problems if the problem is with the device or in the
Wi-Fi If the vehicle loses its Internet connection, vehicle.
The vehicle can be connected to a Wi-Fi net- you can try the following. If the problem persists:
work.
Switching cellular data on and off 1. Delete all previously added phones under
If the vehicle is parked outside a building with
If the vehicle's Internet connection suddenly the Bluetooth settings in the vehicle.
a Wi-Fi network, for example, or if you are
sharing an Internet connection via a cellular and inexplicably disappears, it may help to 2. Restart the phone you want to connect.
phone, you can connect the vehicle to that switch cellular data on and off. 3. Try connecting the phone again.
network. Go to settings at the bottom of the
1. Problems connecting via the vehicle's
To connect the vehicle to an external Wi-Fi center display and then tap Connectivity.
network:
integrated modem22
2. Switch Vehicle SIM data, Wi-Fi and If connection via the vehicle's integrated
1. Activate tethering (personal/portable hot- Bluetooth off and then on again to restart modem is not working well, e.g. due to poor
spot) in your cellular phone if you would the connection. coverage, try connecting via a Wi-Fi network
like to share the cellular phone's Internet or Bluetooth-connected phone instead.
connection. Restarting the system
Restart the system by pressing and holding
2. Go to settings at the bottom of the down the Home button for 20 seconds. NOTE
center display and then tap Connectivity. If multiple Internet connection sources are
Problems connecting via a Bluetooth- used at the same time, for example, if the
3. Tap the Wi-Fi row to display a list of avail-
connected phone vehicle has Internet via integrated modem
able networks.
If you are having difficulty connecting a phone and simultaneously has Internet switched
4. Choose a network, enter the password if to the vehicle via Bluetooth on via a Bluetooth-connected phone, these
required, and connect. sources are used according to the follow-
• Make sure the phone is switched on and
that the battery has sufficient charge. ing order of priority. First, connection will
Related information
be attempted via Wi-Fi network, second,
• Audio and media (p. 536) • Make sure Bluetooth is enabled in both
via the Bluetooth-connected phone and
• Connecting to the Internet via Bluetooth the phone and in the vehicle.
third, via the vehicle's integrated modem.
(p. 556) • Make sure you have established a
• Internet connection problems (p. 557) Bluetooth connection and connected the
vehicle to the phone you want to use.
• Markets with Internet via vehicle modem
(p. 558) • If possible, try connecting another phone
to the vehicle through Bluetooth to check
}}
557
|| Related information Markets with Internet via vehicle Country

• Internet connection (p. 556) modem
Markets offering Internet via the vehicle's Indonesia
• Connecting to the Internet via Bluetooth
(p. 556) integrated modem are listed here. Ireland
The markets listed here offer Internet via the
Italy
(p. 557) vehicle's integrated modem for four years23
from the purchase date of the vehicle. Data
• Markets with Internet via vehicle modem Japan
roaming works within the EU.
(p. 558) Korea
• Audio and media (p. 536) Country
Malaysia
Australia
Mexico
Austria
Netherlands
Belgium
New Zealand
Canada
Norway
China
Poland
Czech Republic
Portugal
Denmark
Puerto Rico
Finland
Singapore
France
Spain
Germany
Sweden
Hong Kong
Switzerland
India
Taiwan
22 Connection via integrated modem is only available on some markets.

23 This time may vary depending on market and vehicle model.
558
Country Hard disk storage space Type approval Radio Equipment

It is possible to view how much space is Directive
ThailandA remaining on the vehicle's hard disk. Information about the Radio Equipment
To check available space: Directive is available at volvocars.com/intl/
United Kingdom
support.
1. Tap settings at the bottom of the dis-
USA
play. Related information
A The Volvo XC40 Recharge Pure Electric model years 2022
and 2023 and the C40 Recharge Pure Electric model year 2. Select System. • Radio* (p. 539)
2023 come with connected services free of charge for four
years. For other vehicle models, one year of free connected 3. Proceed to Storage.
services is included.

• Internet connection (p. 556) • Apps (p. 537)
• Connecting to the Internet via Bluetooth

(p. 556)
(p. 557)
• Internet connection problems (p. 557)
VOLVO ASSISTANCE AND THE VOLVO
CARSAPP
VOLVO ASSISTANCE AND THE VOLVO CARSAPP
Volvo Assistance NOTE NOTE

The and SOS buttons in the overhead The SOS button should only be used in All calls to Volvo Assistance may be recor-
console can provide extra security and assis- case of accident, illness or if there is an ded.
tance if the vehicle won't start or in the event external threat to the vehicle and its pas-
of a flat tire, accident, etc. sengers. The SOS function is only intended
Related information
for emergency situations. Misuse could
incur extra charges.
• Getting started with the Volvo Cars app
(p. 566)
The button can be used for other assis- • Volvo Cars app (p. 566)
tance, e.g. questions about vehicle use or if
roadside assistance is needed.
collection (p. 34)
• Contact between the Volvo Cars app and
The Volvo Assistance system the vehicle (p. 568)
The buttons in the overhead console are con-
nected to the vehicle's safety and alarm sys-
tems and to other systems in the vehicle, such
as lock and climate systems. The vehicle has
The functions are available via and the SOS but- an integrated modem for communication with
tons in the overhead console. Volvo Assistance and the Volvo Cars app.
In the event of an accident, emergency assis- GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System) is
tance (ambulance, police, etc.) can be sum- used to locate the vehicle.
moned to the vehicle. In less critical situations,
Personal data processing
e.g. a flat tire, roadside assistance can be
In order to provide you with all the functions of
called out.
the service, certain information, including per-
sonal data, must be processed. Read more
about terms and conditions and privacy at
volvocars.com/intl//legal.
Contacting Volvo Assistance

To contact Volvo Assistance, use the vehicle's
button or the Volvo Cars app.
562
Automatic Crash Notification with • Volvo Assistance help during a trip Emergency assistance with Volvo
Volvo Assistance (p. 564) Assistance
In the event of a collision, the vehicle can • Volvo Assistance abroad (p. 565) In the event of an emergency, press the SOS
automatically notify Volvo Assistance, or an button to contact Volvo Assistance or an
emergency service center, which can then emergency service center.
summon emergency assistance.
Volvo Assistance
Volvo Assistance To summon assistance in the event of an ill-
If any of the vehicle's safety systems are trig- ness or an external threat to the vehicle or
gered, for example in an accident in which the passengers, Volvo Assistance can be alerted
activation level is reached for seat belt ten- manually by pressing and holding the SOS
sioners or airbags, the vehicle will automati- button for at least 2 seconds. The vehicle will
cally contact Volvo Assistance and a message contact Volvo Assistance and a message will
will be sent containing the vehicle's location be sent containing information such as the
and other information. vehicle's location.
1. Volvo Assistance will then attempt to 1. Volvo Assistance will then attempt to
establish voice contact with the driver to establish voice contact with the driver to
determine the extent of the accident and determine the extent of the emergency
the need for assistance. and the need for assistance.
2. Volvo Assistance will then contact the 2. Volvo Assistance will then contact the
appropriate emergency service (police, appropriate emergency service (police,
ambulance, tow truck, etc.). ambulance, tow truck, etc.).
If voice contact cannot be established, Volvo If voice contact cannot be established, Volvo
Assistance will contact emergency services for Assistance will contact emergency services for
appropriate action. appropriate action.

• Volvo Assistance (p. 562) • Volvo Assistance (p. 562)
• Emergency assistance with Volvo • Automatic Crash Notification with Volvo
Assistance (p. 563) Assistance (p. 563)
}}
563
• Volvo Assistance help during a trip Volvo Assistance help during a trip Roadside Assistance costs
(p. 564) If you e.g. get a flat tire, run out of gas or have Roadside Assistance costs are included in the
• Volvo Assistance abroad (p. 565) a dead battery, you can summon assistance first X1 years when buying a new Volvo. After
using the button or the Volvo Cars app. this time has passed, in most of the markets,
Roadside Assistance is offered for free provid-
If you e.g. get a flat tire or have a dead bat- ing the car has been serviced regularly at an
tery, you can summon assistance using the authorized Volvo workshop. A Volvo retailer
button or the Volvo Cars app. can inform you of the status of your Roadside
Hold the button in the overhead console Assistance agreement.
depressed for at least 2 seconds to establish You can get help you get back on the road
voice contact with Volvo Assistance. They will even if your Roadside Assistance agreement
consult with you to determine what type of has expired. If this is the case, you will be
assistance is needed. If data sharing for the asked to pay the cost for the service that is
overhead buttons is activated, a message with sent out to you.
the vehicle's position is sent to Volvo
Assistance.
NOTE
NOTE If you do not have a valid roadside assis-
The SOS button should only be used in tance agreement, additional recovery costs
case of accident, illness or if there is an may apply.
external threat to the vehicle and its pas-
sengers. The SOS function is only intended Related information
for emergency situations. Misuse could • Volvo Assistance (p. 562)
incur extra charges.
The button can be used for other assis- collection (p. 34)
tance, e.g. questions about vehicle use or if • Automatic Crash Notification with Volvo
roadside assistance is needed. Assistance (p. 563)
• Emergency assistance with Volvo
Assistance (p. 563)
• Volvo Assistance abroad (p. 565)
1 Varies depending on market.
564
Customer service via Volvo Volvo Assistance abroad Backup battery for Volvo
Assistance The assistance services may vary when driv- Assistance
The button can be used to contact Volvo ing in other countries. If the main battery has no electrical current, a
Assistance for questions concerning vehicle When you push the SOS button, you will backup battery will take over so that Volvo
usage. always be connected to Volvo Assistance or Assistance can still be used.
Operators are available for assistance 24 an emergency service center for the market in The backup battery has a limited lifespan.
hours a day. which the vehicle is currently located. When the battery requires servicing or
replacement, a message (eCall Service
You can also reach Volvo Assistance via the When you press the button, you will
required) is shown in the instrument panel.
tab in the Volvo Cars app. always be connected to your home country's
Volvo Assistance. If the message persists, contact an authorized
Related information For more information, please contact a Volvo
Volvo workshop.
• Automatic Crash Notification with Volvo
retailer.
Assistance (p. 563) Related information
Related information • Messages in the instrument panel (p. 130)
• Emergency assistance with Volvo
Assistance (p. 563) • Volvo Assistance (p. 562) • Volvo Assistance (p. 562)
• Volvo Assistance help during a trip

(p. 564)
565
Volvo Cars app Related information Getting started with the Volvo Cars
With the Volvo Cars app, you can maintain • Volvo Assistance (p. 562) app
contact with your vehicle through a number • Approval of terms and conditions and data Some preparations are needed before using
of app functions.2 collection (p. 34) the Volvo Cars app.
You can, for example, lock or unlock the vehi-
• Connecting the Volvo Cars app to the Exploring the Volvo Cars app
cle and start the climate system in the vehicle vehicle (p. 567)
before departure.3 Before picking up the vehicle from the retailer,
• Devices compatible with the Volvo Cars you should download the free Volvo Cars app
Downloading the Volvo Cars app app (p. 569) and test it in demo mode. Demo mode gives
The Volvo Cars app can be downloaded free of the driver the chance to explore most of the
charge from Apple App Store or Google Play. functions and learn how the app is used.
You can test most of the app functions with-
out connecting to a vehicle by running the app Volvo ID and connecting the Volvo
in demo mode. Cars app to the vehicle
A Volvo ID is required to use the Volvo Cars
Internet connection required app. Once you have created a Volvo ID, the
When using the Volvo Cars app, your mobile app needs to be connected to the vehicle.
device will send and receive data via the inter-
net. If you do not have a data plan, then your Purchasing a pre-owned vehicle with
cell phone carrier may charge you for that digital services
data. If you use your app abroad you may incur If you have purchased a pre-owned vehicle
data roaming charges. For further information, with digital services, it is important to delete
contact your cell phone operator. the data from the previous owner and add you
own details for the service to work. Visit a
NOTE Volvo retailer for assistance.
Data sharing for the overhead buttons Related information
must be activated for remote control of • Creating a Volvo ID (p. 25)
vehicle functions, such as climate and lock-
ing, to work.
• Change of ownership when the Volvo Cars
app is connected to the vehicle (p. 574)
2 Both the vehicle and the mobile device must have cellular coverage or another Internet connection.
3 Available functions may vary depending on market and vehicle model.
566
• Resetting user data (p. 138) Connecting the Volvo Cars app to 2. Log in to the Volvo Cars app using your
• Viewing the Vehicle Identification Number the vehicle Volvo ID and follow the instructions in the
(VIN) (p. 38) To use the Volvo Cars app's services, the app app. If you already have a connected vehi-
must first be connected to the vehicle. cle in the app and would like to add
• Connecting the Volvo Cars app to the
another, select , Connected vehicles
vehicle (p. 567) Once a main user (administrator) has con-
nected their app to the vehicle, additional vehi- and Add a vehicle.
• Devices compatible with the Volvo Cars cle users can be added.
app (p. 569)
NOTE
Connect the Volvo Cars app to the
vehicle For a more customized experience and
Make sure your vehicle is positioned in an area support, it is recommended that every user
with cellular coverage and that your mobile create a personal Volvo ID.
device has an Internet connection.
Make sure you have your Volvo ID and the 3. Make sure that data sharing for the Volvo
vehicle's identification number (VIN). The Cars app is activated. In the center dis-
Volvo ID can be created by logging in to the play, tap , select Profiles, Volvo
Volvo Cars app, and the vehicle identification privacy settings and then Volvo Cars
number can be found in the windshield or in app.
the center display. 4. Go back to Profiles and select Volvo
If you are a main user (administrator), you Cars app devices to access the menu for
must have all of the vehicle's keys with you. connecting the app to the vehicle.
For other users, one key is sufficient. The first 5. Follow the instructions in the center dis-
user to link their app with the vehicle must be play and the Volvo Cars app.
logged in on the Owner profile and have all of
the vehicle's keys with them. Difference between administrator and
1. Sit in the vehicle. non-administrator in the Volvo Cars
app
The vehicle's Owner profile must be linked
with the app before any other profile can be
linked. To be allocated the role of administra-
}}
567
|| tor, all of the vehicle's keys must be in the questions about the Volvo Cars app on Contact between the Volvo Cars
vehicle when the app is linked. volvocars.com/intl/support or contact Volvo app and the vehicle
customer care. The vehicle's systems that have contact with
A user who is administrator in the app can
If the vehicle was previously owned, however, the Volvo Cars app are programmed to shut
• see which phones and other devices are
you should first check whether access to down when the vehicle is not used for
linked with the vehicle extended periods of time.
Volvo Assistance is activated in the vehicle.
• remove their own and other linked After a few days, the system switches off to
phones/devices from the vehicle Related information save the battery. Some of the app's functions
A user who is not administrator in the app can • Volvo Cars app (p. 566) cannot be used during this time. The system
• Volvo ID (p. 24) resumes full availability once the vehicle has
• see if their own phone/device is linked been started.
with the vehicle • Viewing the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) (p. 38)
• remove their own phone/device. WARNING
Switching between connected The system's services only work in areas in
vehicles in the Volvo Cars app which Volvo Assistance partners have cel-
lular coverage and where the technology
If you have multiple vehicles connected to the
allows.
Volvo Cars app, you can switch between
these. To do this: Just as with cellular phones, atmospheric
disturbances or areas with fewer transmit-
1. Go to the tab. ters, e.g. sparsely populated rural areas,
can make connection impossible.
2. Select Connected vehicles.
3. Mark the vehicle you want to switch to Related information
and select Switch to this vehicle. • Volvo Assistance (p. 562)
Tips when using the Volvo Cars app • Keys (p. 267)
If you experience disruptions with the Volvo • Backup battery for Volvo Assistance
Cars app, ensure that the vehicle the app is (p. 565)
connected to is outdoors in an open area with
• Volvo Assistance abroad (p. 565)
cellular coverage and that your mobile device
has a good Internet connection. If disruptions
persist, read the section with frequently asked
568
Devices compatible with the Volvo Related information Shortcuts to the Volvo Cars app
Cars app • Volvo Assistance (p. 562) You can create shortcuts to the functions
The Volvo Cars app is compatible with a offered in the Volvo Cars app.
number of mobile devices and operating sys-
tems. Widgets
The Volvo Cars app is available for iPhone, If you use the Volvo Cars app in an Android or
iPad and Apple Watch as well as Android iOS device, it is possible to add Widgets
phones. You can download the app free of (shortcuts) to more quickly access features
charge from Apple App Store or Google Play. such as climate control remote start and lock/
unlock vehicle.
For the Volvo Cars app to work as well as pos-
sible, ensure that you have updated the app to 3D Touch
the latest version available for your device. Using 3D Touch gives you access to shortcuts
More information on technical requirements to certain features in the Volvo Cars app5.
concerning version as well as operating sys-
tems and compatibility for device models is A hard press on the App icon in your phone
available when downloading apps. takes you to shortcuts for functions such as
Start Climate and Unlock Doors.
NOTE Sharing addresses to the Volvo Cars
Volvo reserves the right to end the mainte- app
nance of older versions of apps and Some third party apps facilitate sharing
remove them from existing app stores at addresses to the Volvo Cars app6.
any time.
Related information
Internet connection
Because the app communicates with the vehi- • Using the Volvo Cars app with an Apple
cle via the Internet, your mobile device must Watch (p. 574)
have an Internet connection4 to perform your
commands.
4 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.
5 Applies to certain iPhone models. See the manufacturer's website for more information.
6 Varies depending on phone model and version of operating system.
569
Booking service with the Volvo Click on the booking to: Locking function in the Volvo Cars
Cars app • see details about the booking app
Vehicle service can be scheduled using the The Volvo Cars app shows the actual lock
• save the booking in the calendar (with
status and you can lock and unlock the vehi-
Volvo Cars app.7 option to add a reminder)
cle remotely.
Book service • cancel the service You can find the lock function in the tab.
1. In the tab, tap Maintenance. • contact the workshop via email or phone.
2. Select Book service. Service messages in the Volvo Cars NOTE
3. Select a workshop to perform the service. app If an incorrect lock status is shown, open
When it is time for the vehicle to be serviced, the lock function from the tab and wait
4. Select any additional services8 you would
this will be shown in the Volvo Cars app 15-20 seconds.
like to purchase, e.g. air conditioning
check. • with a message in the tab
5. Enter a date and time for service and indi-
Related information
• and under Maintenance in the tab.
cate if you would like a courtesy car9.
While the vehicle is being serviced, the esti-
Some workshops also offer pick-up and mated completion time is shown in the Volvo
delivery of the vehicle to be serviced. Cars app.
6. Fill in comments, if any, and confirm the
booking.
7. Select if you would like to add the booking
to the calendar.
When a service has been booked, this will be
shown under Maintenance in the tab.

8 Available services vary depending on workshop.
9 Certain workshops only.
570
Remote Start of the climate Remote Start of the climate Timers are set from the climate function in the
system using the Volvo Cars app system using the Volvo Cars app tab.
With the Volvo Cars app, the climate system If the vehicle is equipped with the climate
can be started remotely to heat up or cool package*, you can start the climate system Related information
down the vehicle to a comfortable tempera- immediately or enter a time at which you will • Remote Start of the vehicle using the
ture. Volvo Cars app (p. 572)
use the vehicle.10 If you choose to enter a
The climate system is started from the climate time, the climate system will start automati-
function in the tab and runs for 30 cally to heat up the passenger compartment
minutes. before departure.
Direct-starting the climate system

Start the climate system from the climate
function in the tab. Enter when you plan to
start driving (in number of minutes from the
current time). When 30 minutes is selected,
only the climate system will start to warm up
the passenger compartment. If 1-15 minutes is
selected, there is also the option to remote-
start the engine to help the vehicle more
quickly reach a comfortable temperature.
Read more about Remote Start of the vehicle
in the separate section.
Setting climate system timers

A timer can be set to automatically start the
climate system to warm up the passenger
compartment before departure. You can
choose a time, date, day of the week and
whether the setting should be repeated every
week. Up to 8 different timers can be set.
Remote Start of the climate Setting climate system timers Remote Start of the vehicle using
system using the Volvo Cars app A timer can be set to automatically start the the Volvo Cars app
You can start the climate system immediately climate system to adjust the temperature of With the Volvo Cars app, the vehicle's engine
or enter a time at which you will use the vehi- the passenger compartment before departure. can be started remotely to warm up or cool
cle.11 If you choose to enter a time, the cli- You can choose a time, day of the week and down the vehicle to a comfortable tempera-
mate system will start automatically to adjust whether the setting should be repeated every ture.14
the passenger compartment temperature week. Up to 8 different timers can be set. First, make sure it is permissible under local
before departure. Timers are set from the climate function in the environmental regulations and laws to start
tab. the vehicle in its present location.
When the vehicle is plugged into an
electrical outlet The vehicle can be started from the climate
Other climate settings
The climate system can be started from the function in the tab. Enter when you plan to
Select in the climate function's settings if the
climate function in the tab. The climate start driving (in number of minutes, 1-15, from
driver seat, passenger seat and steering
the current time). Confirm that you want to
system runs for 30 minutes. wheel13 heating should be activated.
start the vehicle and verify your identify using
When the vehicle is not plugged into Related information your phone's unlock method (PIN code, pass-
an electrical outlet • Remote Start of the vehicle using the word, pattern, TouchID, FaceID, etc.).
Start the climate system from the climate Volvo Cars app (p. 572) It may also be possible to select 30 minutes15.
function in the tab. Enter when you plan to In that case, only the climate system starts
start driving (in number of minutes from the and not the engine. Read more about Remote
current time). When 30 minutes12 is selected, Start of the climate system in the separate
only the climate system will start. If 1-15 section.
minutes is selected, there is also the option to It is possible to activate the function in the
remote-start the engine to help the vehicle Volvo Cars app twice in succession. After that,
more quickly reach a comfortable tempera- the vehicle has to be started with the key
ture. Read more about Remote Start of the before you can activate the function via the
vehicle in the separate section. app again.

12 Only available for vehicles equipped with fuel heaters.
13 Vehicles with steering wheel heating.
15 Only available for Recharge models and vehicles equipped with fuel heaters.
572
When the vehicle is remote-started, functions • Engine status is OK (no critical diagnostic Viewing battery level in the Volvo
such as heating for the seats, door mirror and trouble codes). Cars app
rear window will also be activated. • Sufficient fuel level (more than 8 liters You can check the vehicle's current battery
(2.11 US gallons)). level in the Volvo Cars app.
Things to bear in mind when using
Engine Remote Start User recommendations can be found in the The battery level is shown in the tab.
The function can only be used if: Volvo Cars app.
Related information
• The vehicle is locked. • Contact between the Volvo Cars app and
NOTE the vehicle (p. 568)
• No vehicle keys remain in the vehicle.
For safety reasons, the vehicle cannot be • Volvo Cars app (p. 566)
• The hood is locked. driven when it is remote-started via the
• The vehicle is parked and the transmission Volvo Cars app. The function will remain • General information about charging
is in Park. active until you depress the brake pedal (p. 404)
• The engine is not running. and turn the start knob. • General information about electric vehi-
cles (p. 406)
• The vehicle is under supervision.
Related information
• There are no people or animals in or
around the vehicle. • Remote Start of the climate system using
• The vehicle is not parked inside a closed
room/space without sufficient ventilation. • Remote Start of the climate system using
• There are no risks of anybody being in
direct contact with the vehicle (e.g. during • Remote Start of the climate system using
service work in a workshop or children
playing near the vehicle).
• The function can be used at the specified
time according to local law.
In addition, the system will check the follow-
ing before the vehicle is started:
573
Using the Volvo Cars app with an can be found on the information page in the Change of ownership when the
Apple Watch relevant app store. Volvo Cars app is connected to the
You can use an Apple Watch to access cer- vehicle
Related information
tain Volvo Cars app functions, such as star- When the vehicle changes owners, there are
ting/stopping the parking climate and lock-
several steps that need to be carried out to
ing/unlocking the vehicle. • Shortcuts to the Volvo Cars app (p. 569) disconnect the previous owner and allow the
When the Volvo Cars app is installed on a new owner to connect the Volvo Cars app to
phone and connected to the vehicle, the app the vehicle.
functions will be automatically available in the
Apple Watch that is paired with the phone. Selling a vehicle
The previous owner needs to remove the link
Functions that can be controlled from an between the vehicle and the Volvo Cars app.
Apple Watch16: Once ownership is ended, an automatic fac-
• Parking climate (start/stop). tory reset of the vehicle will be performed, so
that profiles, user data, linked keys, personal-
• Remote start of vehicle (start/stop).
ized settings, etc. are deleted.
• Doors (lock/unlock).
• Find the vehicle by activating the vehicle's Purchasing a vehicle
horn and/or turn signals for a few sec- The new owner will need to connect the Volvo
onds. Cars app to the vehicle.
• View estimated range. Change of ownership to another

• View the vehicle's location on a map. country
When a vehicle is purchased and imported to
Paring an Apple Watch with a phone
another country, further measures may be
For instructions on how to pair an Apple
necessary. Contact a retailer for information.
Watch with a phone, as well as the technical
requirements for this, see Apple's website. Related information
Technical requirements • Volvo Cars app (p. 566)
Technical requirements for operating systems • Removing the link between the vehicle
and information about cell model compatibility and the Volvo Cars app (p. 575)
16 Available functions can vary over time.
574
• Resetting user data (p. 138) Removing the link between the
• Connecting the Volvo Cars app to the vehicle and the Volvo Cars app
vehicle (p. 567) Your Volvo ID is personal and does not need
to be changed or deleted if you sell your vehi-
cle. However, you do need to end ownership
and remove the link between the Volvo Cars
app and the vehicle.
The link between the vehicle and the Volvo
Cars app can be removed from the administra-
tor account in the app. If you do not have
access to the app, contact your Volvo retailer
and explain that you want to sell your vehicle.
You can end your ownership under
Connected vehicles in the tab. Select the
relevant vehicle and follow the instructions in
the app to end ownership.
When ownership is ended, user history and
other user accounts will be deleted. An auto-
matic factory reset of the vehicle will also be
performed, so that profiles, user data, linked
keys, personalized settings, etc. are deleted.
Contact your Volvo retailer if you would like to
delete your contact information from their sys-
tem.
Related information
• Change of ownership when the Volvo Cars
app is connected to the vehicle (p. 574)
• Resetting user data (p. 138)
575
NAVIGATION
NAVIGATION
Google Maps NOTE • Voice control with the Google Assistant

The Google Maps app contains maps and (p. 147)
The above instructions provide a general
gives you access to traffic information, route
description and include third-party suppli-
guidance, suitable charging station locations,
ers. Availability, procedures and functional-
etc.
Maps can be used both when the
vehicle has an Internet connection
and when it doesn't, but more servi- WARNING
ces are available when the vehicle is
online. Observe the following:
• Direct all your attention to the road and
Same information in the vehicle as on make sure that your concentration is
other devices focused on driving.
Connecting your Google account to the active
user profile also makes the services more per-
• Follow applicable traffic laws and use
good judgment while driving.
sonalized. Destinations given on other devi-
ces, such as home, work, favorites and most • Road conditions can be affected by
recent searches, will be shown. If you change weather or season, which may make
something on one device, it will also be certain recommendations less reliable.
changed in Maps if the device and the vehicle
are logged in to the same Google account. Related information
Voice control (p. 142)
Maps can also be voice-controlled using the
Google Assistant1. • Use Google Maps (p. 579)
• Google Maps in the instrument panel
(p. 579)
• Destinations in Google Maps (p. 580)
• Creating route guidance with Google
Maps (p. 580)
1 The Google Assistant is not yet available in all languages.
578
NAVIGATION
Use Google Maps WARNING Google Maps in the instrument

Maps is displayed and managed in the center panel
Observe the following:
display and in the instrument panel using the Guidance to destinations can be displayed in
steering wheel keypad. Maps can also be • Direct all your attention to the road and the instrument panel, along with step-by-step
managed using voice control. make sure that your concentration is instructions and a map. The map can also be
focused on driving. displayed even if no destination has been
Opening and closing Maps specified.
• Follow applicable traffic laws and use
To open Maps, tap its icon in the good judgment while driving. Different map and guidance information will
center display. To close the app, be displayed depending on the selected dis-
press the Home button. • Road conditions can be affected by
play mode in the instrument panel. Examples
weather or season, which may make
When the app is open, the map and of information in the instrument panel:
certain recommendations less reliable.
current traffic information will be shown. • Arrows indicating next maneuver
Shortcuts Related information • Distance to maneuver
There are shortcuts in the navigation tile, each • Creating route guidance with Google • Name of next street
of which initiates a search in Maps. Examples Maps (p. 580)
of shortcuts:
• Road number and exit number
• Destinations in Google Maps (p. 580)
• Lane information
• Charging station • Google Maps in the instrument panel
Turn-by-Turn guidance points provide clear
• Service stations (p. 579)
driving directions on the instrument panel and
• Restaurant • Voice control with the Google Assistant minimize the need to move your eyes from the
(p. 147) road.
When a route has been entered in Maps, there
will be an extra shortcut to stop current guid- • Connecting an account to a user profile
ance.
NOTE • Creating route guidance with Google

Maps (p. 580)
• Instrument panel settings (p. 103)
579
NAVIGATION
Destinations in Google Maps Creating route guidance with NOTE

You can enter several types of destinations in Google Maps
Maps. Enter the destination in the search field and
Various types of destinations can be entered let Maps create a route.
in the search field. In addition to addresses, 1. Open Maps in Home view or App view . ity may vary or be changed.
you can also enter a specific destination, such
as a museum, and request route guidance 2. Enter an address or location in the search
there. You can also perform more general field. For more information, go to g.co/mapsincar.
searches, such as for charging stations, res- > A route will be suggested and shown in
taurants and hotels, and then select one of the blue on the map. Alternative routes will WARNING
search results as a destination and get route be indicated in gray. The available
routes for selection may be affected if Observe the following:
guidance there.
If a Google account is connected to the vehi-
preferences have been set to, for exam- • Direct all your attention to the road and
ple, avoid road tolls or highways. make sure that your concentration is
cle, destinations given on other devices, such
focused on driving.
as home, work, favorites and most recent 3. If another route is preferred, tap the route
searches, will be shown in Maps. overview icon and choose and alternative • Follow applicable traffic laws and use
route. good judgment while driving.
NOTE 4. Start navigation. • Road conditions can be affected by
weather or season, which may make
A poor connection can adversely affect the > Instructions in the instrument panel and
certain recommendations less reliable.
functions. voice guidance2 will begin.
Maps can also be voice-controlled using the Adding a waypoint to an existing route
Related information Google Assistant3. 1. Select a shortcut.
2. Select a waypoint.
(p. 142) > The route will be recalculated.
• Creating route guidance with Google Trip information in the navigation tile
Maps (p. 580) When a route has been entered in Maps, the
navigation tile will display the following trip
2 Voice guidance can be switched off in settings in the Maps app via the center display.
3 The Google Assistant is not yet available in all languages.
580
NAVIGATION
information about the next waypoint along the Electric vehicle functions with Battery preconditioning before rapid
route: Google Maps charging
• Travel time Some functions in Maps are unique for elec- When charging stations have been added in
tric vehicles. Here are some of these, along Google Maps, the battery will be precondi-
• Distance to waypoint
with brief explanations. tioned to reduce charging time.
• Estimated time of arrival, ETA4 The functions listed are only examples. For up-
to-date information on which functions are Suggestions for adding charging
• Name of next waypoint
stations
available and how they work, go to g.co/
• Specific information for electric vehicles,
mapsincar. If route guidance is started and the system
e.g. estimated battery level at arrival. estimates that the vehicle cannot reach its
Current route guidance can be canceled The functions that relate to battery level are final destination on the current battery level,
directly from the tile. based on historic use of the vehicle and can be Maps will suggest adding charging stations at
influenced by factors such as speed, driving suitable places so that the final destination
The information displayed concerns the next style and use of electrical equipment. can be reached.
waypoint. The final destination will be shown
when there are no more waypoints along the Filter by charging stations
route. By default, the map only shows compatible NOTE
charging stations. The above instructions provide a general
Related information description and include third-party suppli-
• Destinations in Google Maps (p. 580) Battery charge level at arrival ers. Availability, procedures and functional-
• Google Maps in the instrument panel Maps can show the estimated battery level at
(p. 579) arrival at a destination.
• Google Maps settings (p. 582) Estimated minimum charging time Related information
• Voice control with the Google Assistant When charging stations are input as way- • Connected functions with Google Maps
(p. 147) points in an itinerary, Maps will indicate the (p. 582)
minimum estimated charging time at that
charging station to clarify total travel time and
• Creating route guidance with Google
Maps (p. 580)
ETA5.
• Range (p. 484)
4 Estimated Time of Arrival

5 Estimated Time of Arrival
581
NAVIGATION
Connected functions with Google Alternative route Google Maps settings

Maps When a destination is entered, a route will be The majority of the Maps settings are
For full Maps functionality, the vehicle must suggested along with alternative routes. The adjusted directly in the app under settings.
be connected to the Internet. The following is suggestions are based on system settings, Several examples are listed below.
a list of some functions that are available traffic information, estimated range, travel
when the vehicle is online. time, etc. To choose an alternative route, Voice guidance level
Maps is updated continuously with traffic select the route in the list of suggested routes Set the level for voice guidance, for example if
information and information from parking or steer the vehicle in the direction of that you only want to hear traffic information and
spots, charging stations and connected route, so-called decide by steering. not the next maneuver.
Google accounts.
If you change route during the trip, Google Route options
The functions listed are only examples. For up- Maps will dynamically redirect you based on Set, for example, preferences to avoid road
to-date information on which functions are current traffic patterns so that you can avoid tolls and highways in route guidance.
available and how they work, go to g.co/ traffic congestion.
mapsincar. NOTE
Traffic information NOTE The above instructions provide a general
If traffic is moving slowly, the map will show The above instructions provide a general description and include third-party suppli-
orange or red lines, depending on traffic description and include third-party suppliers. Availability, procedures and functional-
speed. If the vehicle loses its Internet connec- ers. Availability, procedures and functionality may vary or be changed.
tion, the colored lines will disappear after a ity may vary or be changed.
few minutes because this information will no
longer be current. Updated traffic information Related information Other settings
will be shown again once the connection has
• Electric vehicle functions with Google Voice guidance volume
been reestablished. The map also shows infor- Maps (p. 581) Turn the volume control below the center dis-
mation about different types of obstacles,
• Connecting an account to a user profile play or use the buttons on the steering
such as road construction or accidents.
(p. 142) wheel's right-side keypad. An expandable
If any accidents or other obstacles are menu will open in the center display. Set the
detected along the current route and another • Creating route guidance with Google
volume for voice guidance.
Maps (p. 580)
faster route is identified, Maps will suggest an
alternative route.
582
NAVIGATION
Language and units Map downloads Updating Google Maps

If you would like to change the language or To help ensure access to maps in Google Try to keep Maps updated to the latest ver-
measurement units used in Maps, you can Maps even when the vehicle has a poor or no sion.
change these settings in App view . Please Internet connection, map data is saved auto- Updated versions of Maps are available in
note that changing this setting will change the matically. Google Play. If there are any differences in
language and units used in all of the vehicle's Maps automatically downloads maps based access rights between the two versions of the
displays, not only Maps. on the vehicle's current location and travel app, the system will prompt the user to accept
patterns. These maps can be used when the the new terms.
NOTE vehicle does not have an Internet connection
Using the latest version ensures that you have
to:
Changing languages in the center display the most recent updates and functions. To
could mean that certain information in the • provide map data to the vehicle's safety update Maps, the vehicle must be connected
Owner's Manual will not comply with and navigation functions to the Internet and an active Google account
national or local laws and regulations. Do • provide access to Maps in areas with lim- must be connected to the user profile.
not change to a language you do not speak ited or no Internet connection. When a Maps update is available, you will
well, as it can be difficult to find your way A map area can also be selected manually and receive a notification asking if you would like
back through the menu. downloaded. to update.
Related information
• Creating route guidance with Google • Creating route guidance with Google
The above instructions provide a general Maps (p. 580)
Maps (p. 580)
description and include third-party suppli- • Google Maps settings (p. 582)
• Changing system units of measurement ers. Availability, procedures and functional-
(p. 138) ity may vary or be changed. • Connecting an account to a user profile
(p. 142)
• Sound settings (p. 536) Related information
• Updating Google Maps (p. 583) • Google Maps (p. 578)
• Map downloads (p. 583) • Connected functions with Google Maps
(p. 582)
• Google Maps settings (p. 582)
583
WHEELS AND TIRES
WHEELS AND TIRES
Tires CAUTION When replacing tires, be sure that the new

The function of the tires is to carry loads, pro- tires are the same size designation, type
Some Volvo models are equipped with an (radial) and preferably from the same manu-
vide traction on road surfaces, reduce vibra-
Ultra High Performance tire and wheel facturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is
tions and protect the wheels from wear.
combination designed to provide maxi- a risk of altering the vehicle's roadholding and
The tires significantly influence the vehicle's
mum dry pavement performance with con- handling characteristics.
driving characteristics. The type, dimensions,
sideration for hydroplaning resistance.
tire pressure and speed rating have a consid-
They may be more susceptible to road haz- Recommended tires
erable impact on how the vehicle performs.
ard damage and, depending on driving On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo
Your vehicle is equipped with tires according conditions, may achieve a tread life of less original tires that have the VOL1 marking on
to the vehicle's tire information placard on the than 30,000 km (20,000 miles). Even if the side of the tires. These tires have been
B-pillar (the structural member at the side of this vehicle is equipped with Volvo's designed specifically for your vehicle. It is
the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door advanced AWD or stability system, these therefore important when replacing tires that
opening). tires are not designed for winter driving, the new tires have this same marking to help
and should be replaced with winter tires maintain the vehicle's driving characteristics,
WARNING when weather conditions dictate. comfort and energy consumption.
A damaged tire could cause the driver to New tires
lose control of the vehicle. The tires have good road holding characteris-
tics and offer good handling on dry and wet
surfaces. It should be noted however that the
tires have been developed to give these fea-
tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.
Most models are equipped with "all-season"
tires, which provide a somewhat higher
degree of roadholding on slippery road surfa-
ces than tires without the "all-season" rating.
However, Volvo recommends using snow tires
on all four wheels for good roadholding on icy
or snow-covered roads.
1 This may vary for certain tire dimensions.
586
WHEELS AND TIRES
Tires are perishable goods. After a few years, • Correct front wheel alignment is very tires moved to the front. Ideally, tire rotation
they will begin to harden and their friction important. should be done the first time after approxi-
properties will gradually deteriorate. Always • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy mately 5000 km (approx. 3100 miles) and
replace tires with the freshest tires possible. and driving comfort. thereafter at 10,000 km (approx. 6200 miles)
This is particularly important for snow tires. A intervals.
series of numbers is imprinted on the sidewall • Tires should maintain the same direction
of rotation throughout their lifetime. If you have any questions regarding tread
of the tire. The last four digits in the series is
depth, Volvo recommends consulting an
the Department of Transportation (DOT) • When you change tires, the tires with the
authorized Volvo workshop. If significant dif-
stamp and indicates the week and year the most tread should be mounted on the rear
ferences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread
tire was manufactured. The tire in the illustra- axle to reduce the risk of rear wheel skid
depth) between the tires have already occur-
tion has 0717 as the last four digits, which during hydroplaning, turning or hard brak-
red, the least worn tires should be mounted on
means it was manufactured week 7 of 2017. ing on wet roads.
the rear wheels. A front wheel skid is usually
Tire age • Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the easier to control than a rear-wheel skid. It is
tires and/or wheels permanently. therefore important that the rear wheels do
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used. It is recommended that tires • Never switch positions between the front not lose grip before the front wheels.
generally be replaced after 6 years of normal and rear axles on vehicles with different
service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent front and rear tire or wheel dimensions. CAUTION
high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) Vehicles with different tire or wheel dimen-
exposure can accelerate the aging process.
Tire rotation
The vehicle's original tires cannot be changed sions on the front and rear axles must
The temporary spare 2 should also be replaced always have the wider tires and/or wheels
from the front to rear wheel axle or vice versa.
at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been on the rear axle. Switching between front
used. A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discol- Driving style, tire pressure, climate and road and rear wheels, e.g. to obtain more even
oration should be replaced immediately. conditions affect how quickly the tires age and tire wear between the front and rear tires,
exhibit signs of wear. Maintaining the correct is not allowed.
Tire economy tire pressure helps keep tread wear evenly dis-
• Maintain correct tire pressure. tributed.
Storing wheels and tires
• Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire To help prevent major differences in tread
screeching. When storing complete wheels (tires mounted
depth and wear patterns forming on the tires, on rims), they should be suspended off the
• Tire wear increases with speed. the front and rear wheels can be rotated, i.e. floor or placed on their sides on the floor.
the front tires moved to the rear and the rear
2 Not available on all models. }}
587
WHEELS AND TIRES
|| Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on • Tire Pressure Monitoring System* Tire direction of rotation
their sides or standing upright, but should not (p. 596) Tires with tread designed to roll in only one
be suspended. • Tire sealing system (p. 610) direction are marked with an arrow on the
sidewall.
• Uniform Tire Quality Grading (p. 592)
CAUTION
• Tire terminology (p. 589)
Tires should be stored in a cool, dry and
dark location. They should never be stored • Tire sidewall designations (p. 590)
near solvents, gasoline, oil, etc. • Loading recommendations (p. 640)
WARNING
• The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unap-
proved wheel/tire size combinations
can negatively affect your vehicle's sta-
bility and handling.
• Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combina-
tions will not be covered by your new
vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or
expenses that may result from such
installations.
Related information
• Tire direction of rotation (p. 588) The arrow shows the tire's direction of rotation.
• Tread wear indicator (p. 589)
WHEELS AND TIRES
• Tires should maintain the same direction Tread wear indicator Tire terminology
of rotation throughout their service life. The tread wear indicator shows the status of The following is a glossary of tire-related
• Tires should only be moved between the the tire's tread. terms.
front and back, never from right to left or The tire suppliers may have additional mark-
vice versa. ings, notes or warnings such as standard load,
radial tubeless, etc.
• Incorrectly mounted tires impair the vehi-
cle's braking properties and ability to force • Tire information placard: A placard
aside rain, snow and slush. showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire
• The tires with the most tread should sizes, recommended inflation pressure,
always be mounted on the rear wheels to and the maximum weight the vehicle can
help reduce the risk of rear-wheel skid- carry.
ding. • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num-
• Never switch positions between the front ber on the sidewall of each tire providing
and rear axles on vehicles with different information about the tire brand and man-
front and rear tire or wheel dimensions. ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man-
The tread wear indicator is a narrow elevated ufacture.
• To help reduce the risk of rear-wheel skid strip running across the tire's longitudinal
when driving on wet roads, Volvo recom- • Inflation pressure: A measure of the
tread grooves. The letters TWI (Tread Wear amount of air in a tire.
mends that the rear tires do not have sig- Indicator) are visible on the side of the tire.
nificantly less tread than the front tires. When approximately 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) is left • Standard load: A class of P-metric or
on the tread, the tread will be at the same Metric tires designed to carry a maximum
NOTE height as the tread wear indicator. Replace the load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric
tire as soon as possible. Tires with low tread tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
Make sure to have tires of the same type, beyond this pressure will not increase the
dimensions and make on both the front offer very poor traction in rain or snow.
tires load carrying capability.
and rear axles.
Related information • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
Vehicles with different front and rear tire • Tires (p. 586) tires designed to carry a heavier maximum
dimensions must have the same type and load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric
make of tire on the front and rear axles. tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not increase the
Related information tire's load carrying capability.
• Tires (p. 586)
}}
589
WHEELS AND TIRES
|| • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres- tion placard(s) located on the driver's side Tire sidewall designations
sure. B-pillar and in the tire inflation table. The following information can be found on a
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be tire's sidewall.
unit of air pressure. cold when they have the same tempera-
• B-pillar: The structural member at the ture as the surrounding (ambient) air. This
side of the vehicle behind the front door. temperature is normally reached after the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next hours.
to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the Related information
bead area and the tread. • Tires (p. 586)
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perime-
ter of the tire that contacts the road when
mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire
or a tire and tube assembly upon which Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers
the tire beads are seated. place standardized information on the sidewall
• Maximum load rating: A figure indicating of all tires (see the illustration).
the maximum load in pounds and kilo- The vehicle has been certified with certain
grams that can be carried by the tire. This combinations of wheels and tires.
rating is established by the tire manufac-
turer. The following information is listed on the tire
sidewall:
• Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: The greatest amount of air pres- The tire designation:
sure that should ever be put in the tire.
This limit is set by the tire manufacturer. NOTE
• Recommended tire inflation pressure: Please be aware that the following tire
Inflation pressure, established by Volvo, designation is an example only and that
which is based on the type of tires that are this particular tire may not be available on
mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This your vehicle.
information can be found on the tire infla-
590
WHEELS AND TIRES
1. 215: The width of the tire (in millimeters) 7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All 11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The Terrain, AS = All Season grades.
larger the number, the wider the tire. 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number 12. Maximum permissible inflation
2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" pressure: The greatest amount of air
width in percent. and indicates that the tire meets all federal pressure that should ever be put in the
3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the standards. The next two numbers are the tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac-
factory code where the tire was manufacturer.
symbol indicate that the vehicle is
tured, the next two are the tire size code
equipped with optional self-supporting run Speed Symbol
and the last four numbers represent the
flat tires3. A tire's Speed Symbol (SS) indicates the maxi-
week and year the tire was made. For
4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in example, 0717 means that the tire was mum speed for which the tire has been certi-
inches). manufactured during week 7 of 2017. The fied and should be at least equivalent to the
5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a numbers in between are marketing codes vehicle's top speed.
load index of 95 equals a maximum load used at the manufacturer's discretion. This Winter tires, with or without studs, are excep-
of 1521 lbs (690 kg). information helps a tire manufacturer tions and may use a lower SS. When winter
identify a tire for safety recall purposes. tires are installed, the vehicle may not be
6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum
speed at which the tire is designed to be 9. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: driven faster than the tires' SS.
driven for extended periods of time, carry- Indicates the number of plies indicates or The vehicle's speed should always be deter-
ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and the number of layers of rubber-coated fab- mined by the posted speed limit and traffic
with correct inflation pressure. For exam- ric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire man- and road conditions, not the tire's SS.
ple, H indicates a speed rating of ufacturers also must indicate the ply
210 km/h (130 mph). materials in the tire and the sidewall, The following table indicates the maximum
which include steel, nylon, polyester, and permissible speed for each SS.
others.
NOTE
10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum M 130 km/h (81 mph)
The tire's load index and speed rating may
load in pounds and kilograms that can be Q 160 km/h (100 mph)
not appear on the sidewall because they
carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's
are not required by law.
tire information placard located on the B- T 190 km/h (118 mph)
Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
vehicle.
3 Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models. }}
591
WHEELS AND TIRES
|| V 240 km/h (149 mph) Uniform Tire Quality Grading WARNING

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST
W 270 km/h (168 mph) The traction grade assigned to this tire is
CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
Y 300 km/h (186 mph) REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE tests and is not a measure of cornering
GRADES. (turning) traction.
Quality grades can be found, where applica-
WARNING ble, on the tire sidewall between the tread
TEMPERATURE
• The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo shoulder and maximum section width. For
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
are specified to meet stringent stability example:
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
and handling requirements. Unap- Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
proved wheel/tire size combinations heat when tested under controlled conditions
can negatively affect your vehicle's sta- TREADWEAR on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
bility and handling. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Sustained high temperature can cause the
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
• Any damage caused by installation of material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
unapproved wheel/tire size combina- under controlled conditions on a specified tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
tions will not be covered by your new government test course. For example, a tire sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 ½) to a minimum level of performance that all
responsibility for death, injury, or times as well on the government course as a passenger vehicle tires must meet under the
expenses that may result from such tire graded 100. The relative performance of Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109.
installations. tires depends upon the actual conditions of Grades B and A represent higher levels of per-
their use, however, and many depart signifi- formance on the laboratory test wheel than
cantly from the norm due to variation in driving the minimum required by law.
Related information habits, maintenance practices and differences
• Tires (p. 586) in road characteristics and climate.
WARNING
TRACTION The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under con- not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-
trolled conditions on specified government inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire rately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and tire failure.
marked C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
592
WHEELS AND TIRES
Related information Checking tire pressure WARNING

• Tires (p. 586) Correct inflation pressure helps improve driv-
ing stability, reduce energy consumption and • Under-inflation is the most common
• Tire sidewall designations (p. 590) cause of tire failure. This can result in
increase the service life of the tires.
severe tire cracking, tread separation,
Tire pressure decreases over time, which is
tire blow out or reduced control of the
normal. Tire pressure also varies depending on
vehicle, which can lead to an increased
the ambient temperature. Driving on under-
risk of injury.
inflated tires could cause the vehicle to over-
heat and lead to damage. Tire pressure affects • Under-inflated tires reduce the load
traveling comfort, road noise and driving cha- carrying capacity of your vehicle.
racteristics.
Check the pressure in the tires every month. Cold tires
Use the recommended inflation pressure for Inflation pressure should be checked when the
cold tires to help maintain good tire perform- tires are cold. The tires are considered to be
ance. Under-inflated or over-inflated tires cold when they have the same temperature as
could cause uneven tread wear. the surrounding (ambient) air. This tempera-
ture is normally reached after the vehicle has
Use an air pressure gauge and check the infla- been parked for at least 3 hours.
tion pressure on all the tires, including the
After driving for approximately 1.6 km (1 mile),
spare tire4, at least once a month and before
the tires are considered to be warm. If you
long trips. Volvo recommends buying a relia-
have to drive farther than that to inflate the
ble air pressure gauge, as the automatic
tire, check and record your inflation pressure
gauges provided at service stations may be
first. Then fill to an appropriate inflation pres-
inaccurate.
sure when you arrive at the pump.
When the ambient temperature changes, so
does the inflation pressure. A 10-degree tem-
perature drop causes a corresponding drop in
inflation pressure of 7 kPa (1 psi). Check the
inflation pressure of the tires regularly and
adjust to the correct pressure, which can be
4 Not available in all models. }}
593
WHEELS AND TIRES
|| found on the vehicle's tire information decal or Adjusting tire pressure 3. Screw the valve cap back on.
certification label. Tire pressure decreases over time, which is
If you check inflation pressure when the tires normal. The tire pressure must therefore be NOTE
are warm, you should never release air. The adjusted to maintain the recommended tire
• After inflating a tire, always replace the
tires become warm after driving and it is nor- pressure. valve cap to help prevent valve damage
mal for warm tires to have an inflation pres- Use the recommended inflation pressure for caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
sure above the recommended pressure for cold tires to help maintain good tire perform-
cold tires. A warm tire with an inflation pres- ance and even wear. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
sure equal to or under the recommended pres-
remove.
sure for cold tires could be significantly under- NOTE
inflated.
To help prevent incorrect inflation pressure, 4. Visually inspect the tire to make sure there
Related information pressure should be checked when the tires are no nails or other embedded objects
• Adjusting tire pressure (p. 594) are cold. The tires are considered to be that could puncture the tire and cause air
cold when they have reached the same leakage.
• Location of tire pressure decal (p. 595) temperature as the ambient temperature
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System* (about 3 hours after the vehicle was last 5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there
(p. 596) driven). After driving for a few kilometers, are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irreg-
the tires will warm up and the pressure will ularities.
• Tires (p. 586)
increase. 6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ-
ing the spare tire5.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire and
press the air pressure gauge firmly onto
the valve.
2. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres-
sure; see the tire pressure placard on the
driver's side B pillar for recommended
pressures for factory-mounted tires.
5 Not available on all models.
WHEELS AND TIRES
NOTE Location of tire pressure decal Related information

The tire pressure placard on the driver's side • Checking tire pressure (p. 593)
If you have overfilled the tire, release air by
B pillar (between the front and the rear door) • Approved tire pressure (p. 868)
pushing on the metal stem in the center of
indicates tire pressure for different loads and
the valve. Then recheck the pressure with
speed conditions.
your tire gauge.
Some spare tires require higher inflation
pressure than the other tires. Consult the
tire inflation pressure table or the inflation
pressure decal.
Related information
• Location of tire pressure decal (p. 595)
• Inflating tires using the compressor
included in the tire sealing system
(p. 617) Tire pressure decal
• Approved tire pressure (p. 868) The decal specifies the designation for the fac-
tory-mounted tires on the vehicle, as well as
load limits and inflation pressures.
NOTE
The decals shown in the Owner's Manual
do not claim to be exact reproductions of
those found in the vehicle. The purpose is
to show approximately how they look and
about where they are located on the vehi-
cle. The information that applies for your
vehicle in particular is found on the decal
on the vehicle.
595
WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire Pressure Monitoring System* Each tire, including the spare (if provided)7 level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
The tire pressure monitoring system6
pro- should be checked monthly when cold and tire pressure telltale.
vides a warning symbol in the instrument inflated to the inflation pressure recom- Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
panel if pressure is too low in one or more mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
tires. vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. the system is not operating properly. The
This symbol illuminates to (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
indicate low inflation pres- the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
sure. Check the inflation pres- inflation pressure label, you should determine detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
sure in the Car status app in the proper tire inflation pressure for those approximately one minute and then remain
the center display. tires.) continuously illuminated. This sequence will
If there is a system malfunc- As an added safety feature, your vehicle has continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
tion, the inflation pressure warning symbol will been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
flash for approximately one minute and then system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire function indicator is illuminated, the system
glow steadily. pressure telltale when one or more of your may not be able to detect or signal low tire
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord- pressure as intended.
System description ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
The tire pressure monitoring system measures nates, you should stop and check your tires as reasons, including the installation of replace-
differences in rotational speed between the soon as possible, and inflate them to the ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi-
wheels through the ABS system to determine proper pressure. cle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
if the tires are properly inflated. If inflation Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire properly.
pressure in a tire is too low, its diameter (and causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
consequently its rotational speed) changes. By Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
comparing the tires with each other, the sys- ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
tem can determine if the pressure in one or your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
more tires is too low. note that the TPMS is not a substitute for continue to function properly.
General information about the tire pressure proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
monitoring system responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
In the following description, the tire monitor- even if under-inflation has not reached the
ing system is generally referred to as TPMS.
6 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

WHEELS AND TIRES
To keep in mind WARNING Saving new reference values for

• Always save the new inflation pressure in tire inflation pressure monitoring*
the system after changing a tire or adjust- • Incorrect inflation pressure could lead
In order for the tire pressure monitoring sys-
ing the inflation pressure. to tire failure, which could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. tem9 to function correctly, tire pressure refer-
• Using snow chains can affect tire inflation ence values must be saved correctly. To help
pressure monitoring. This is indicated by a • The system cannot predict sudden tire ensure that the system can correctly alert the
symbol and message in the instrument damage. driver of low inflation pressure, this must be
panel. When the snow chains are done each time the tires are changed or the
removed, all tires should be checked and Related information inflation pressure is adjusted.
adjusted to the recommended inflation • Location of tire pressure decal (p. 595) To store the new inflation pressure as a refer-
pressure. The new inflation pressure ence value in the system:
• Viewing tire pressure status in the center
should then be saved in the tire pressure display* (p. 599) 1. Switch off the ignition.
monitoring system.
• Action when warned of low tire pressure 2. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres-
• If you switch to a tire of another size than (p. 599) sure; see the tire pressure placard on the
the factory-mounted tires, the system
• Saving new reference values for tire infla- driver's side B pillar for recommended
must be reset by storing a new inflation
tion pressure monitoring* (p. 597) pressures for factory-mounted tires.
pressure for these tires to avoid false
warnings. • Messages for tire inflation pressure moni- 3. Start the vehicle.
If a spare wheel8 is used, it is possible that toring* (p. 600)
• 4. Tap in the center display.
the tire pressure monitoring system will
not work correctly due to the differences 5. Tap Car status.
between the wheels.
• The system does not replace the need for
regular tire inspection and maintenance.
• It is not possible to deactivate the tire
pressure monitoring system.

9 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) }}
WHEELS AND TIRES
|| 6. Tap Store pressure. When the inflation 8. Drive the vehicle until the new inflation • Action when warned of low tire pressure
pressure is stored, the vehicle must be on pressure has been saved. The new infla- (p. 599)
and stationary. tion pressure is stored when the vehicle is • Tire Pressure Monitoring System* (p. 596)
driven at speeds over 35 km/h (22 mph).
NOTE > When enough data has been collected
for the system to detect low inflation
The Store pressure button is used to save
pressure, the animation showing the
new reference values for inflation pressure
progress of the procedure for storing a
in the tire pressure monitoring system. For
new reference value will disappear from
safety reasons, it is only available (selecta-
the center display.
ble) when the vehicle is stationary and the
engine is running. If storing cannot be performed, a message will
be displayed.
7. The inflation pressure must be saved after
adjusting the inflation pressure or if the WARNING
tire is replaced. Adjust the inflation pres- The exhaust gases contain carbon monox-
sure to the recommended value and tap ide, which is invisible and odorless but very
Confirm to store the inflation pressure. poisonous. The procedure for saving a new
inflation pressure must therefore always be
performed outdoors or in a workshop with
NOTE exhaust gas extraction.
To prevent the Store pressure function
from being activated inadvertently, it is Related information
necessary to confirm in a second step that • Starting the vehicle (p. 442)
the inflation pressure should be saved.
• Adjusting tire pressure (p. 594)
• Viewing tire pressure status in the center
display* (p. 599)
WHEELS AND TIRES
Viewing tire pressure status in the Action when warned of low tire 4. After the inflation pressure has been
center display* pressure adjusted, always save the new inflation
With the system for tire pressure monitor- When the inflation pressure monitoring sys- pressure in the system via the center dis-
ing 10, tire pressure status can be viewed in tem11 detects low inflation pressure in a tire, play. This can only be done when the vehi-
the center display. immediate action is required. cle is running and stationary.
If the system's indicator sym- Please be aware that the indicator symbol
Checking status bol illuminates and the mes- will not go out until the low tire pressure
The vehicle may need to be driven for a few sage about low inflation pres- has been corrected and a storing proce-
minutes at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph) sure is displayed, check the dure has been started for the new inflation
to activate the system. tire pressure and inflate if pressure.
Tap in the center display. necessary.
1. The vehicle may need to be driven for a
2. Tap Car status to see the tire inflation 1. Switch off the ignition. few minutes at a speed above 35 km/h
pressure status. (22 mph) for the system to be able to
2. Check the inflation pressure on all four
store the new reference value.
tires using a tire pressure gauge.
Related information
• Saving new reference values for tire infla- 3. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres- NOTE
tion pressure monitoring* (p. 597) sure; see the tire pressure placard on the
driver's side B pillar for recommended To help prevent incorrect inflation pressure,
• Action when warned of low tire pressure
pressures for factory-mounted tires. pressure should be checked when the tires
(p. 599) are cold. The tires are considered to be
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System* (p. 596) cold when they have reached the same
temperature as the ambient temperature
• Messages for tire inflation pressure moni-
toring* (p. 600) (about 3 hours after the vehicle was last
driven). After driving for a few kilometers,
the tires will warm up and the pressure will
increase.

WHEELS AND TIRES
|| NOTE Messages for tire inflation Instrument The indicator symbol will
pressure monitoring* panel: Tire flash for about 1 minute
• After inflating a tire, always replace the
A number of messages related to the tire pressure sys- and then glow steadily.
valve cap to help prevent valve damage
pressure monitoring system12 can be dis- tem Temporar- The system is temporar-
caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
played. Several examples are provided below. ily unavailable ily unavailable and will
• Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps be activated momentar-
could corrode and become difficult to Center display: The software has been
Storing pres- updated and the tire ily.
remove.
sure required inflation pressure must Instrument The indicator symbol will
due to updated be saved again. Check panel: Tire flash for about 1 minute
WARNING software the tire inflation pressure pressure sys- and then glow steadily. If
and fill as needed. tem Service the system is not work-
• Incorrect inflation pressure could lead
to tire failure, which could cause the Instrument The indicator symbol required ing properly, contact a
driver to lose control of the vehicle. panel: TPMS flashes and changes to a workshopA.
• The system cannot predict sudden tire unavailable steady glow after about A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
damage. Open Car Sta- one minute. See "Car
tus app to status" in the center dis- Related information
Store Pressure play for more informa- • Tire Pressure Monitoring System* (p. 596)
Related information tion.
• Location of tire pressure decal (p. 595) • Saving new reference values for tire infla-
Instrument The indicator symbol will tion pressure monitoring* (p. 597)
• Adjusting tire pressure (p. 594)
panel: Tire illuminate to indicate • Action when warned of low tire pressure
• Saving new reference values for tire infla- pressure low that inflation pressure is (p. 599)
tion pressure monitoring* (p. 597) Check Car Sta- low in one or more tires.
• Viewing tire pressure status in the center tus app in cen- See "Car status" in the
display* (p. 599) ter display center display for more
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System* (p. 596) information.
• Inflating tires using the compressor
included in the tire sealing system
(p. 617)
WHEELS AND TIRES
Changing a wheel CAUTION 2. Make sure that the parking brake is

Wheel changes must always be carried out engaged and put the gear selector in P
If a jack* is provided with your vehicle, it is position.
correctly. The following instructions show
intended to be used only in temporary sit-
how to remove and install a wheel and what 3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
uations such as changing wheels in the
is important to keep in mind. Make sure that wheels that are still on the ground. For
event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came
the tire dimension is approved for use on the example, use heavy wooden blocks or
with your particular model should be used
vehicle. large stones.
to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be
WARNING lifted more frequently, or for a longer 4. Using the lug wrench*, screw the towing
• If a tire must be changed near passing period of time than for a wheel change, a eye into place as far as possible.
traffic, make sure all passengers move garage jack or hoist is recommended.
to a safe location. Always follow this device's instructions for
use.
• Use a jack* intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other When not in use, the jack should be kept in
job, use stands to support the vehicle. its storage compartment under the cargo
compartment floor. Crank the jack to the
• Never crawl under or allow any part of
correct position so that it fits.
your body to be extended under a vehi-
cle supported by a jack. When not in use, the jack should be kept in
• Never let anyone remain in the vehicle its storage compartment under the trunk
when it is raised on a jack. floor. Crank the jack to the correct position 5. Remove the plastic covers from the wheel
so that it fits. bolts using the designated tool or pull off
the wheel cap.
Removing a wheel
Read through all instructions before starting.
Before raising the vehicle using a jack or lift,
take out all the tools you will need.
1. Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning
flashers if a wheel change must be per-
formed in an area with traffic.
}}
WHEELS AND TIRES
|| 6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use 4. Tighten the wheel bolts in a crisscross pat- WARNING
the lug wrench/towing eye to loosen the tern (as shown in illustration). It is impor-
wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing down- tant that the wheel bolts are securely The wheel bolts may need to be tightened
ward (counterclockwise). Always start tightened. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). again several days after a wheel change.
Temperature fluctuations and vibrations
with the locking wheel bolts*. Use a torque wrench to check torque. can cause them to loosen slightly.
7. Follow the instructions for safely lifting the
vehicle using a jack.
NOTE
8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
changed can move freely. Unscrew the • After inflating a tire, always replace the
valve cap to help prevent valve damage
wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
Installing a wheel • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
1. Clean the contact surfaces between the could corrode and become difficult to
wheel and the wheel hub. remove.
2. Lift the wheel into place. If the vehicle has
tires or wheels of different sizes on the Related information
front and back, make sure the correct • Leveling control settings* (p. 491)
dimensions are used for each position. 5. Depending on tire equipment: • Hoisting the vehicle (p. 675)
Tighten the wheel bolts securely.
• Replace the wheel cap over the wheel • Tool kit (p. 603)
Do not grease the wheel bolt threads. bolts by aligning it with the guide
marks and then pressing it into place. • Saving new reference values for tire infla-
3. Lower the vehicle so that the wheel can- tion pressure monitoring* (p. 597)
not rotate. • Press the plastic covers over the wheel
bolts.
6. Check the tire inflation pressure and store
the new inflation pressure in the tire pres-
sure monitoring system*.
WHEELS AND TIRES
Tool kit Funnel for refilling fluids Related information

Tools for e.g. towing or changing wheels are • Folding up the cargo compartment floor
Wheel bolt key* and towing eyelet (p. 648)
provided in the vehicle's cargo compartment.
Tools for e.g. towing or changing wheels are • Changing a wheel (p. 601)
provided in the vehicle's trunk. • Jack* (p. 604)
The vehicle's storage compartments can be • Tire sealing system (p. 610)
used to store tools for e.g. towing or chang- • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet
ing wheels. There is space for a jack and a lug (p. 519)
wrench in the vehicle's cargo compartment.
Other tools can be stowed in the storage
compartment under the hood.
Examples of tools that may be found in the vehicle.

Jack
Tool for removing the plastic wheel bolt

covers
Tire sealing system
Wheel bolt key and towing eyelet
Examples of tools that may be found in the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with a spare tire*13, a
jack and wheel bolt key are provided instead
Jack*
of the tire sealing system.
Tool for removing the plastic wheel bolt
covers
WHEELS AND TIRES
Jack* CAUTION Related information

The jack can be used to lift the vehicle to e.g. • Folding up the cargo compartment floor
If a jack* is provided with your vehicle, it is (p. 648)
change a wheel.
intended to be used only in temporary sit-
uations such as changing wheels in the • Tool kit (p. 603)
event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came • Hoisting the vehicle (p. 675)
with your particular model should be used
to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be
lifted more frequently, or for a longer
period of time than for a wheel change, a
garage jack or hoist is recommended.
Always follow this device's instructions for
use.
When not in use, the jack should be kept in
its storage compartment under the cargo
compartment floor. Crank the jack to the
correct position so that it fits.
When not in use, the jack should be kept in
its storage compartment under the trunk
floor. Crank the jack to the correct position
so that it fits.
The jack needs to be cranked together to the

correct position in order to fit.
NOTE
For vehicles with leveling control*: If the
vehicle is equipped with pneumatic sus-
pension, this feature must be turned off
before the vehicle is lifted onto a tow truck.
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel bolts CAUTION Spare wheel

The wheel bolts hold the wheel in place on The spare wheel14 is a Temporary Spare and
Make sure you have a solid connection
the wheel hub. can be used to temporarily replace one of the
between bolt and wheel bolt key when
Only use rims that have been tested and vehicle's regular wheels with a punctured
loosening/tightening the wheel bolts.
approved by Volvo and are included in Volvo's tire.
Applying force at an angle could damage
original product range. The spare wheel is only intended for tempo-
the slots in the wheel bolts and the wheel
Use a torque wrench to check that the wheel rary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as
bolt key and make it impossible to install or
bolts are tightened correctly. soon as possible.
remove the wheel.
Do not grease the wheel bolt threads. The driving characteristics of the vehicle
When the wheel bolt key* is not being used, change and ground clearance reduces when
stow it in its designated location in the foam the spare wheel is used. Do not wash the vehi-
WARNING cle in an automatic car wash while using the
block under the cargo compartment floor. This
The wheel bolts may need to be tightened is important to remember so that the tool is Temporary Spare.
again several days after a wheel change.
Temperature fluctuations and vibrations available if the vehicle is taken to a workshop. The recommended tire pressure must be
can cause them to loosen slightly. If you lose the key, contact your Volvo retailer. maintained regardless of at which position the
When the wheel bolt key is not being used, temporary spare wheel is used on the vehicle.
stow it in its designated location in the stor- If the spare wheel is damaged, a replacement
CAUTION
age area under the hood. This is important to can be purchased from a Volvo retailer.
The wheel bolts should be tightened to remember so that the tool is available if the
140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Over-tightening or vehicle is taken to a workshop. If you lose the WARNING
under-tightening could damage the threa- key, contact your Volvo retailer.
ded joints. Current legislation prohibits the use of the
Related information "Temporary Spare" wheel other than as a
• Changing a wheel (p. 601) temporary replacement for a punctured
Locking wheel bolt kit* tire. It must be replaced as soon as possi-
To loosen or tighten the locking wheel bolts, • Tool kit (p. 603) ble by a standard tire. Roadholding and
turn the wrench in the locking bolt until it fully handling may be affected with the "Tempo-
engages in the code grooves. When removing rary Spare" wheel in use.
a wheel, always start with the locking wheel
bolts. When mounting a wheel, end with the
locking bolt.
}}
WHEELS AND TIRES
|| WARNING CAUTION Handling the spare wheel

Follow these instructions regarding handling
• Never drive faster than 80 km/h The vehicle must not be driven with wheels
the spare wheel15.
(50 mph) with a spare tire mounted on of different dimensions or with a spare tire
the vehicle. other than the one the vehicle is approved
• The vehicle must never be driven with for. Using tires of different sizes can seri-
more than one "Temporary Spare" ously damage the vehicle's transmission
wheel mounted. due to different rolling circumferences.
• Driving with a spare wheel may alter Vehicles designed for different front and
the driving characteristics of the vehi- rear tire or wheel dimensions must have
cle. Replace the spare wheel with a the same type and make of tire on the front
normal wheel as soon as possible. and rear axles.
• The spare wheel is smaller than the
normal wheel, which affects the vehi-
cle's ground clearance. Watch for high Related information
This illustration is generic and appearance may vary.
curbs and do not wash the vehicle in • Changing a wheel (p. 601)
an automatic car wash when a spare The spare wheel is stored in a bag and should
wheel is mounted. be secured with two straps onto the floor of
• Follow the manufacturer's recom- the trunk/cargo compartment when the vehi-
mended tire inflation pressure for the cle is being driven. The straps should be strap-
spare wheel. ped down crosswise over the wheel, attached
to the load anchoring eyelets and pulled taut.
• On all-wheel drive vehicles, the drive
on the rear axle can be disconnected. Wheel changing tools are located under the
• If the spare wheel is mounted on the cargo compartment floor.
front axle, snow chains must not be
used.
• The spare wheel must not be repaired.

606
WHEELS AND TIRES
Accessing the spare wheel Accessing the spare wheel If one of the front tires needs to be replaced
with a spare tire:
1. Use the spare tire to replace the rear tire
on the same side of the vehicle as the flat
tire.
2. Move the rear tire to the front to replace
the flat tire.
Stowing a flat tire

1. Screw the spare tire's retaining bolt back
on.
This illustration is generic and appearance may vary. This illustration is generic and appearance may vary. CAUTION
The spare wheel is located under the cargo The spare tire is located under the floor of the Do not attempt to unscrew the lower part
compartment floor in the spare wheel well. cargo compartment and is held in place by a of the retaining bolt if it is attached to the
The spare tire is secured with a bolt that goes strap. The foam block contains all tools nee- body, as this could cause it to break.
through the tire and attaches it to the body. ded to change a wheel. If the retaining bolt becomes dislodged
The foam block contains all tools needed to from its lower attachment point in the
1. Lift the rear edge of the cargo compart-
change a wheel. body under the spare tire, replace it in the
ment floor.
1. Lift the rear edge of the cargo compart- hole and turn clockwise to secure it again.
2. Release the straps and lift out the spare
ment floor.
wheel.
2. Unscrew the retaining bolt. WARNING
Polestar Engineered
3. Lift out the spare wheel. On vehicles with 48 V batteries, the bolt is
If your vehicle is Polestar Engineered,
attached to the battery box instead of the
Temporary Spare tires will not fit on the front body. If the lower part of the retaining bolt
wheel axle due to the larger brakes. is not dislodged when the spare tire is
Tires should only be moved between the front taken out, it should be removed to help
prevent injury when the flat tire is replaced.
and back, never from right to left or vice versa.
}}
607
WHEELS AND TIRES
|| 2. Put the tools back in their correct posi- Snow tires on tires than summer conditions. Volvo there-
tions in the foam block. Snow tires are designed for winter driving fore recommends not driving on snow tires
conditions. that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm
3. Then lower the trunk/cargo compartment
Volvo recommends snow tires with specific (0.15 inch).
floor and place the punctured tire in the
trunk/cargo compartment. dimensions. The tire dimensions vary depend-
Related information
ing on engine type. When driving with snow
Related information tires, the correct type of tires must be moun- • Changing a wheel (p. 601)
• Spare wheel (p. 605) ted on all four wheels. • Winter driving (p. 527)
• Folding up the cargo compartment floor • Tread wear indicator (p. 589)
Tips for changing snow tires
(p. 648)
When switching between regular tires and
• Tool kit (p. 603) snow tires, mark the tires according to which
• Changing a wheel (p. 601) side they were mounted on, e.g. L for left and
R for right.
Contact a Volvo retailer for advice on the most
suitable rims and tires.
Studded tires
Studded tires should be broken in by driving
500–1000 km (300–600 miles) slowly and
gently to help the studs settle properly in the
tires. This gives the tire, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
Legal requirements concerning the use of
studded tires may vary. Always follow local
laws and regulations.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands
608
WHEELS AND TIRES
Snow chains does not recommend use of snow chains for CAUTION
Using snow chains and/or snow tires can Polestar Engineered, but AutoSock can be
used as a supplement to winter tires for the Snow chains can be used on the vehicle,
help improve traction in winter driving condi-
wheel dimensions 8x19 ET 42 235/40. with the following restrictions:
tions.
Volvo recommends that snow chains are not Volvo recommends that snow chains are not • Always follow the manufacturer's
used on wheel dimensions larger than used on wheel dimensions other than 7.5x18 installation instructions carefully. Install
18 inches. ET 50.5 215/55. chains as tightly as possible and
retighten periodically.
Volvo recommends that snow chains are not
used on wheel dimensions larger than WARNING • Only put snow chains on the front
19 inches. wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-
lent snow chains that are suitable for the vehicles).
Volvo does not recommend use of snow
chains on wheel dimensions larger than vehicle model and the tire and wheel sizes. • If accessory, aftermarket or "custom"
Only one-sided snow chains are permit- tires and wheels with different dimen-
18 inches. For Polestar Engineered, Volvo
ted. sions than the original tires and wheels
does not recommend use of snow chains on
wheel dimensions other than 8.5x21 ET 38.5 If uncertain about snow chains, Volvo rec- are used, snow chains in some cases
255/40. ommends contacting an authorized Volvo may NOT be used. Sufficient distance
workshop. Use of the wrong snow chains between the chains and brakes, sus-
Volvo recommends that snow chains are not could cause serious damage to the vehicle pension and body components must
used on wheel dimensions larger than and result in an accident. be maintained.
20 inches. Using snow chains could result in malfunc-
tion of the system for monitoring of tire
• Check local regulations regarding the
Volvo recommends that snow chains are not use of snow chains before installing.
inflation pressures*17.
used on wheel dimensions other than these16: • Never exceed the snow chain manu-
• 7x16 ET 37 215/60 facturer's specified maximum speed
limit. Under no circumstances should
• 7x17 ET 40.5 225/50
you exceed 50 km/h (30 mph).
• 8x18 ET 42 235/45
• Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
Volvo does not recommend use of snow when driving with snow chains.
chains on wheel dimensions other than 7.5x18
ET 45 235/45 and 8x18 ET 42 235/45. Volvo
16 The wheels on the vehicle may vary depending on model and market.
WHEELS AND TIRES
|| • Avoid driving on surfaces without Flat tire Tire sealing system

snow as this wears out both the snow Turn on the hazard warning flashers if you get The temporary tire sealing system19 (TMK)
chains and the tires. a flat tire near passing traffic. can be used to seal a puncture hole in a tire
• The handling of the vehicle can be Move the vehicle out of traffic if this can be or to check and adjust the inflation pressure
adversely affected when driving with done safely. Call road assistance if necessary. in the tire.
chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as If possible, exit the vehicle on the side with the Models equipped with a spare wheel20 do
well as locked wheel braking. least traffic. not have the tire sealing system.
• Some types of strap-on chains affect
brake components and therefore must Handling a flat tire WARNING
NOT be used. The vehicle is equipped with either a tire seal- California Proposition 65
ing system for temporarily sealing a tire, or a
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
spare wheel18. See the relevant section for senger vehicle can expose you to chemi-
Consult a Volvo retailer for more information
instructions on use. cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-
about snow chains.
oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
Related information Related information known to the State of California to cause
• Winter driving (p. 527) • Hazard warning flashers (p. 160) cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System* (p. 596) • Recovery (p. 525)
• Recovery (p. 526) except as necessary, service your vehicle in
a well ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
• Towing using a towline (p. 518) your vehicle. For more information go to
• Tire sealing system (p. 610) www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle.
• Spare wheel (p. 605)
• Volvo Assistance help during a trip The tire sealing system consists of a compres-
(p. 564) sor and a bottle containing sealing compound.
The sealing functions as a temporary repair.

19 Certain models only.
WHEELS AND TIRES
NOTE Related information

• Using the tire sealing system (p. 612)
The sealing compound effectively seals
tires with punctures in the tread but may • Inflating tires using the compressor
not be able to fully seal tires with punctu- included in the tire sealing system
res in the sidewall. Do not use the tire seal- (p. 617)
ing system on tires with large tears, cracks • Tires (p. 586)
or similar damage.
NOTE
The compressor is intended for temporary
tire sealing and is approved by Volvo.
Location
The tire sealing system is located in a foam
block under the floor of the cargo compart-
ment.
The tire sealing system is located in a foam
block under the cargo compartment floor
under the hood.
Sealing compound expiration date

The sealing compound bottle must be
replaced if its expiration date has passed (see
the decal on the bottle). Handle the old bottle
as hazardous waste.
611
WHEELS AND TIRES
Using the tire sealing system Sealing compound bottle Connection for bottle
The temporary tire sealing system (TMK21) Switch Hose
can be used to seal a puncture in a tire. Read
through all the instructions before use. Connection valve
Overview Connecting
Speed limit sticker
Switch
Electrical cable
Electrical cable
Hose
Bottle holder
Air release valve
Air pressure gauge
Protective hose cover
Air release valve
Speed limit sticker
Decal, wheel-side warning
Bottle holder (orange cover)
Sealing compound bottle
Air pressure gauge
Bottle opening
21 Temporary Mobility Kit
612
WHEELS AND TIRES
WARNING • Inhalation: Move the exposed person

to fresh air. If irritation persists, get
Please keep the following points in mind medical attention.
when using the tire sealing system:
• Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
• The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in unless directed to do so by medical
the illustration) contains 1) rubber latex, personnel. Get medical attention.
natural and 2) ethanediol. These sub-
stances are harmful if swallowed. • Disposal: Dispose of this material and
its container at a hazardous or special
• The contents of this bottle may cause waste collection point.
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory
tract, the skin, the central nervous sys-
tem, and the eyes.
NOTE Precautions:
Do not break the seal of the bottle before • Keep out of reach of children.
use. The seal is broken automatically when • Do not ingest the contents.
the bottle is screwed into place.
• Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin. Remove any clothing
that has come into contact with seal-
ant.
• Wash thoroughly after handling.
First aid:
• Skin: Wash affected areas of the skin
with soap and water. Get medical
attention if symptoms occur.
• Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for
least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting
the upper and lower eyelids. Get medi-
cal attention if symptoms occur.
}}
613
WHEELS AND TIRES
|| WARNING the upper and lower eyelids. Get medi- 2. Peel off the speed limit sticker from the
cal attention if symptoms occur. side of the compressor. Affix the decal to a
Please keep the following points in mind clearly visible location on the windshield
when using the tire sealing system: • Inhalation: Move the exposed person
to fresh air. If irritation persists, get to remind the driver not to exceed this
• The sealing compound bottle contains medical attention. speed limit. Do not drive faster than
natural rubber latex. These substances 80 km/h (50 mph) while using a tire that
are harmful if swallowed. • Ingestion: Get medical attention. has been temporarily repaired with the tire
• The contents of this bottle may cause • Disposal: Dispose of this material and sealing system.
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be its container at a hazardous or special
Also peel off the warning decal and affix it
potentially harmful to the respiratory waste collection point. Always follow
securely to the side of the wheel.
tract, the skin, the central nervous sys- federal and local environmental regula-
tem, and the eyes. tions. 3. Make sure the switch is in the 0 (Off)
position and take out the electric cable
Precautions: and the hose.
• Keep out of reach of children. WARNING
4. Unscrew the orange cover on the com-
• Do not ingest the contents. Do not remove the bottle or the hose while pressor and unscrew the cap on the seal-
the tire sealing system is being used.
• Avoid prolonged or repeated contact ing compound bottle.
with the skin. Remove any clothing
that has come into contact with seal- NOTE
ant. If the puncture was caused by a nail or
• Wash thoroughly after handling. similar object, do not remove it from the
First aid: tire. It will help to seal the hole.
• Skin: Wash affected areas of the skin
with soap and water. Get medical 1. Preparations
attention if symptoms occur. Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning
• Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for flashers if the tire sealing system is to be
least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting used in an area with traffic.
614
WHEELS AND TIRES
5. Screw the bottle onto the bottle holder as 8. Begin tire sealing 9. Start the compressor by moving the
far as possible. switch to the I (On) position.
Connect the electrical cable to the nearest
The bottle and the bottle holder are equip- 12 V outlet and start the vehicle. When the compressor first starts, air pres-
ped with catches to help prevent the seal- sure may temporarily increase up to 6 bar
ing compound from leaking. Once the bot- NOTE (88 psi) but should decrease again after
tle is screwed into place into the bottle approx. 30 seconds.
holder, it cannot be unscrewed. The bottle Make sure that none of the vehicle's other
12 V sockets are used while the compres- When the compressor starts, the pressure
can only be removed by a workshop22. can increase up to 7 bar (102 psi), but the
sor is running.
Attach the sealing compound bottle to the pressure will decrease after
compressor and then turn clockwise approx. 30 seconds.
90 degrees. WARNING
The bottle is equipped with a check valve Never leave children unattended in the WARNING
that prevents fluid leakage when the bot- vehicle while the vehicle is running.
Never stand next to a tire being inflated
tle is not connected to the compressor. with the compressor. If cracks, bulges, etc.
form on the tire, switch off the compressor
WARNING immediately. The vehicle should not be
WARNING Inhaling exhaust fumes could lead to seri- driven. Call roadside assistance to have the
Do not unscrew the bottle. It is equipped ous injury. Never leave the engine running vehicle towed to a workshop for inspec-
with a catch to prevent leakage. in an enclosed space or a space without tion/replacement of the tire. Volvo recom-
sufficient ventilation. mends an authorized workshop.
6. Attach the hose in the bottle opening and
turn clockwise 90 degrees. 10. Inflate the tire for 7 minutes.
7. Unscrew the tire's valve cap and screw
the hose's valve connector as far as possi- CAUTION
ble onto the valve. To help avoid overheating, the compressor
should never be used for more than
Be sure the air release valve on the com-
10 minutes at a time.
pressor's hose is completely closed.
22 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. }}
615
WHEELS AND TIRES
|| 11. Switch off the compressor and check the WARNING 15. Immediately drive the vehicle at least
inflation pressure using the air pressure 3 km (2 miles) at a maximum speed of
gauge. The inflation pressure should be If pressure falls below 1.8 bar (26 psi), the 80 km/h (50 mph) to allow the sealing
between 1.8 bar (26 psi) and 3.5 bar hole in the tire may be too large. The vehi- compound to seal the tire, and then
cle should not be driven. Call roadside
(51 psi). Release air by pressing the air assistance to have the vehicle towed to a recheck the inflation pressure.
release valve if the inflation pressure is too workshop for inspection/replacement of
high. the tire. Volvo recommends an authorized WARNING
Switch off the compressor and check the workshop.
During the tire's first revolution, some seal-
inflation pressure using the air pressure ing compound may spray out of the punc-
gauge. The inflation pressure should be 12. Switch off the compressor and remove ture hole. Before driving away, make sure
between 1.8 bar (26 psi) and 2.5 bar the electrical cable. that no one is near the vehicle who could
(36 psi). If the inflation pressure is too be sprayed with sealing compound. Make
13. Unscrew the hose from the tire's valve and sure no one is within 2 meters (7 feet) of
high, use the air release valve to release screw the valve cap back on. the vehicle.
air.
The sealing compound bottle must be NOTE 16. Rechecking the inflation pressure
removed in order to access the air release
valve. Remove the bottle in the following
• After inflating a tire, always replace the Connect the hose to the tire's valve and
valve cap to help prevent valve damage screw the hose connector onto the valve
order:
caused by gravel, dirt, etc. as far as possible. The compressor must
1. Remove the hose from the tire's valve.
• Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps be switched off.
2. Remove the hose from the bottle. could corrode and become difficult to
3. Remove the bottle from the compres- remove.
sor.
4. Reconnect the hose directly to the 14. Put the protective hose cover onto the
compressor. hose to help prevent leakage of any resid-
ual sealing compound. Return the equip-
5. Screw the hose back on to the tire's
ment to the cargo compartment.
valve.
6. Release air by pressing the air release Clean the hose before stowing it and
valve. make sure that no sealing compound is
leaking out.
616
WHEELS AND TIRES
17. Check the inflation pressure on the air WARNING Inflating tires using the
pressure gauge. compressor included in the tire
After using the tire sealing system, the
• If the pressure is under 1.3 bar (19 psi), vehicle should not be driven farther than
sealing system
the tire is not sufficiently sealed. The approximately 200 km (120 miles). The vehicle's original tires can be inflated
vehicle should not be driven. Call road- using the compressor in the tire sealing sys-
side assistance to have the vehicle tem.
towed. NOTE 1. The compressor must be switched off.
The compressor is an electric device. Fol- Make sure that the switch is in the 0 (Off)
• If the inflation pressure is higher than
position and take out the electrical cable
1.3 bar (19 psi), the tire must be inflated low local regulations for disposal.
and the hose.
to the inflation pressure specified on
the tire pressure decal on the driver's Related information 2. Attach the hose directly in the compres-
side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa = • Location of tire pressure decal (p. 595) sor's bottle holder and then turn clockwise
14.5 psi). If the inflation pressure is too 90 degrees.
high, use the air release valve to release • Tire sealing system (p. 610)
Move the warning sticker to the side of
air. • Inflating tires using the compressor
included in the tire sealing system the compressor; it doesn't need to be
(p. 617) affixed to the wheel side if the sealing
WARNING compound is not used.
Check inflation pressure regularly. • Contacting Volvo (p. 24)
3. Unscrew the tire's valve cap and screw
the hose's valve connector as far as possi-
Volvo recommends driving to the nearest ble onto the valve.
authorized Volvo workshop to have the tire
Be sure the air release valve on the com-
replaced/repaired. Inform the workshop that
pressor's hose is completely closed.
the tire contains sealing compound.
The sealing compound bottle and the hose
must be replaced after use. Volvo recom-
mends contacting an authorized Volvo work-
shop for replacement.
}}
617
WHEELS AND TIRES
|| 4. Connect the electrical cable to the nearest 9. If needed, save the new tire pressure in Determining the vehicle's
12 V outlet and start the vehicle. the tire pressure monitoring system.* permitted weight
Properly loading your vehicle will provide
WARNING NOTE maximum return of vehicle design perform-
ance.
Inhaling exhaust fumes could lead to seri- • After inflating a tire, always replace the
ous injury. Never leave the engine running valve cap to help prevent valve damage
in an enclosed space or a space without Weight designations
caused by gravel, dirt, etc. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize your-
sufficient ventilation.
• Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps self with the following terms for determining
could corrode and become difficult to your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a
WARNING remove. trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian
Never leave children unattended in the Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
vehicle while the vehicle is running. CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-
tion placard:
NOTE
5. Start the compressor by moving the Curb weight
switch to the I (On) position. The compressor is an electric device. Fol-
low local regulations for disposal. The weight of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not
CAUTION include passengers, cargo, or optional equip-
Related information ment.
Risk of overheating. The compressor
should not be running for longer than 10 The weight of the vehicle including all stand-
minutes at a time. • Using the tire sealing system (p. 612) ard equipment. It does not include passen-
• Tire sealing system (p. 610) gers, cargo, or optional equipment.
6. Inflate the tire to the pressure specified on • Electrical outlets (p. 632) Capacity weight
the tire pressure decal on the driver's side All weight added to the curb weight, including
door pillar. If the inflation pressure is too cargo and optional equipment. When towing,
high, use the air release valve to release towbar weight is also part of cargo weight.
air.
7. Switch off the compressor. Remove the
hose and the electrical cable.
8. Screw the valve cap back onto the tire.
WHEELS AND TIRES
Permissible axle weight 4. The resulting figure equals the available WARNING
The maximum allowable weight that can be amount of cargo and luggage load
carried by a single axle (front or rear). These capacity. For example, if the "XXX" • Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be gross vehicle weight, or any other
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the weight rating limits can cause tire over-
CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle amount of available cargo and luggage heating resulting in permanent defor-
must never exceed its maximum permissible load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × mation or catastrophic failure.
weight. 150) = 650 lbs.) • Do not use replacement tires with
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 5. Determine the combined weight of lug- lower load carrying capacities than the
The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen- gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi- tires that were original equipment on
gers. cle. That weight may not safely exceed the the vehicle because this will lower the
available cargo and luggage load capacity vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires
Steps for Determining Correct Load calculated in Step 4. with the correct load carrying capacity.
Limit Consult your Volvo retailer for informa-
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load tion.
1. Locate the statement "the combined
from your trailer will be transferred to your
weight of occupants and cargo should
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your Related information
how this reduces the available cargo and
vehicle's placard. • Loading recommendations (p. 640)
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX
lbs.
619
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Passenger compartment interior

Overview of the passenger compartment
interior and storage spaces.
Front seats
Storage compartment in door panel, glove compart- Storage compartment in the door panel and near the
ment and sun visors. steering wheel, glove compartment and sun visors.
Storage compartment in door panel, card holder*

next to the steering wheel, sun visors and glove com-
partment with fold-out hook.
Storage compartment in door panel, glove compart- Storage compartment in the door panel and near the
ment and sun visors. steering wheel, glove compartment and sun visors.
Storage compartment at leg area, electrical outlets Storage compartments with cup holders, electrical Storage compartments with cup holders, wireless
and USB ports over the wireless phone charger*, cup outlets and USB ports in the tunnel console. phone charger*, electrical outlets and USB ports in
holder and storage under armrest in tunnel console. the tunnel console.
Rear seat
Storage compartments with cup holders, wireless

Storage compartments with cup holders, wireless phone charger*, electrical outlets and USB ports in
phone charger*, electrical outlets, and USB ports in the tunnel console.
the tunnel console. Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holders*
in the center seat's backrest, storage pocket in the
front seat's backrest* and USB ports in the tunnel
console.
}}
|| Second row of seats

In vehicles with six* seats
Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holders* Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holders*
in the center seat's backrest, storage pocket* in the in the center seat's backrest, storage pocket* in the
front seat's backrest and USB ports in the tunnel front seat's backrest, electrical outlets and USB ports
console. in the tunnel console. Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holders
at the bottom of the tunnel console, storage pocket*
in the front seat's backrest and USB ports in the tun-
nel console.
Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holders* Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holders*
in the center seat's backrest, storage pocket* in the in the center seat's backrest, storage pocket in the
front seat's backrest and USB ports in the tunnel front seat's backrest, USB ports in the tunnel con-
console. sole and storage compartment under the seat.
In vehicles with seven* seats Third row of seats* Related information

• Electrical outlets (p. 632)
• Using the glove compartment (p. 635)
• Sun visors (p. 636)
• Tunnel console (p. 626)
• Wireless phone charger* (p. 549)
Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holders* Storage compartment1 and cup holders in the side
in the center seat's backrest, storage pocket* in the panel and storage compartment between the seats.
front seat's backrest and USB ports in the tunnel
console.
WARNING
Store loose objects, such as a phone, cam-
era, remote control for extra equipment,
etc., in the glove compartment or another
compartment. Otherwise, these could
injure people in the vehicle in the event of
hard braking or a collision.
CAUTION
Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be
easily scratched by e.g. metal objects. Do
not place keys, phones or similar items on
sensitive surfaces.
1 On some models, the storage compartment does not have a cover.
Tunnel console
The tunnel console is located between the
front seats.
Wireless phone charger* Storage compartment with cover* and 12

V socket3. The cover can be opened/
Storage compartment with cup holder. closed by pressing the handle.
Wireless phone charger* Waste bin*2 that can be taken out and Storage compartment with cup holder and
emptied. wireless phone charger*.
Storage compartment with cup holder.
Storage compartment under the armrest. Storage compartment and USB ports
Removable trash bin. under the armrest.
Climate control panel for the rear seats* or
Storage compartment under the armrest. storage compartment. There are also USB Climate control panel for the rear seats* or
ports underneath. storage compartment. There are also USB
Climate control panel for the rear seats* or ports underneath.
storage compartment. There are also USB
ports underneath.
2 Only in vehicles with automatic transmission.

3 If the vehicle does not have a wireless phone charger, the 12 V outlet is located in the center storage compartment.
Storage compartment with cup holder. Storage compartment with cup holder. Storage compartment with cover* and 12
V socket4. The cover can be opened/
Storage compartment with 12-volt socket Storage compartment with 12-volt socket closed by pressing the handle.
and USB ports under the armrest. and USB ports under the armrest.
Storage compartment with cup holder and
Climate control panel for the rear seats* or Climate control panel for the rear seats* or wireless phone charger*.
storage compartment. There are also USB storage compartment. There are also USB
ports underneath. ports underneath. Storage compartment and USB ports
under the armrest.
Climate control panel for the rear seats* or
storage compartment. There are also USB
ports underneath.
4 If the vehicle does not have a wireless phone charger, the 12 V outlet is located in the center storage compartment. }}
||
Storage compartment with cover* and 12 Storage compartment with cup holder. Storage compartment with cover* and 12
V socket5. The cover can be opened/ V socket6. The cover can be opened/
closed by pressing the handle. Storage compartment with 12-volt socket closed by pressing the handle.
and USB ports under the armrest.
Storage compartment with cup holder and Storage compartment with cup holder and
wireless phone charger*. Climate control panel for the rear seats* or wireless phone charger*.
storage compartment.
Storage compartment and USB ports Storage compartment and USB ports
under the armrest. 12 V socket and USB ports. The cover can under the armrest.
be opened/closed by pressing the handle.
Climate control panel for the rear seats* or Climate control panel for the rear seats* or
storage compartment. storage compartment. There are also USB
12 V socket and USB ports. The cover can ports underneath.
be opened/closed by pressing the handle.
WARNING NOTE USB ports

There are two USB ports (type C) under the
Store loose objects, such as a phone, cam- The USB ports can be used to e.g. charge
era, remote control for extra equipment, center display. There are also two USB ports
a cellular phone or tablet.
etc., in the glove compartment or another (type C) in the rear section of the tunnel con-
compartment. Otherwise, these could sole.
injure people in the vehicle in the event of Related information
hard braking or a collision. • Passenger compartment interior (p. 622)
• Electrical outlets (p. 632)
CAUTION • Climate system controls (p. 240)
Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be • Gear selector positions (p. 463)
easily scratched by e.g. metal objects. Do
not place keys, phones or similar items on
sensitive surfaces.
NOTE
One of the sensors for the alarm* is located USB ports (type C), front seat.
under the cup holder in the center console.
Avoid placing coins, keys and other metal
objects in the cup holder as this could trig-
ger the alarm.
NOTE
The USB ports can be used to e.g. charge
a phone or tablet. Only the front USB port
can be used to play media through the
vehicle's speakers.
USB ports (type C), front seat.
}}
||
USB ports (type C), front seat. USB ports (type C) in tunnel console, rear seat. USB ports (type C) in tunnel console, rear seat.
USB ports (type C) in tunnel console, rear seat. USB ports (type C) in tunnel console, rear seat. USB ports (type C) in tunnel console, rear seat.
The USB ports can be used to charge a device
such as a phone or tablet.
630
Related information Charging devices via USB ports Technical specifications for the USB-C
• Charging devices via USB ports (p. 631) The USB ports can be used to charge a port
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 622) device such as a phone or tablet. • Type C port
The USB ports can be used when the vehicle • Version 3.1
• Using the electrical outlets (p. 634)
is in Comfort or Drive mode.
• Voltage 5 V
The ports will switch off automatically when
the driver exits the vehicle. If the vehicle
• Max. current 3.0 A
remains unlocked, the ports will remain active Related information
for about 10 minutes longer. • USB ports (p. 629)
NOTE
Accessories connected to the ports can be
activated even when the vehicle's electrical
system is off or if preconditioning is used.
For this reason, unplug accessories when
they are not being used.
Some devices may become warm during
charging. This is normal.
WARNING
Position the accessory so that there is no
risk of it injuring the driver or passengers in
the event of heavy braking or a collision.
Charging devices via the USB ports

1. Fold down the cover in front of the port
and plug in the device.
2. Unplug the device and fold up the cover
when the port is not in use or left unatten-
ded.
631
Electrical outlets
There is a 12 V electrical outlet in the tunnel
console and a 12 V electrical outlet* in the
trunk/cargo compartment.
There are two 12 V electrical outlets in the
tunnel console and a 12 V electrical outlet* in
the trunk.
If a problem occurs with an electrical socket,
contact a workshop - an authorized Volvo
workshop is recommended.
12 V outlets Front electrical outlet in the tunnel console for vehi- 12 V outlet in the tunnel console, front seat.
cles without wireless phone charger*.
Front electrical outlet in the tunnel console for vehi-

cles with wireless phone charger*. 12 V outlet in the tunnel console, front seat.
12 V outlet in the tunnel console, front seat.
12 V outlet in the tunnel console, front seat. 12 V outlet in the cargo compartment*.7 12 V outlet in trunk/cargo compartment*.
The 12 V outlets can be used for devices
intended for this such as MP3 players, coolers
and cellular phones.
12 V outlet in the cargo compartment*. 12 V outlet in trunk/cargo compartment*.
12 V outlet in the tunnel console, rear seat.
7 Availability varies depending on market. }}
|| Using the electrical outlets NOTE

The 12 V outlet can be used for devices
Bear in mind that using the electrical out-
intended for this such as MP3 players, cool-
lets when the engine is off could cause the
ers and cellular phones.
starter battery to have too low of a charge
The ignition must be in at least mode I for the
level, which could limit other functionality.
outlets to supply current. The outlets will then
be active as long as there is sufficient charge Accessories connected to the electrical
in the start battery. outlets can be activated even when the
vehicle electrical system is off or if precon-
The vehicle must be in Comfort or Drive mode
ditioning is used. For this reason, discon-
in order for the outlet to deliver current.
nect plugs when they are not in use to pre-
If the engine is turned off and the vehicle is vent the starter battery from becoming dis-
12 V outlet in the cargo compartment*. locked, the outlets will be deactivated. If the charged.
engine is turned off and the vehicle remains
Related information unlocked, the sockets will remain active for up
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 622) to 7 minutes. NOTE
• Using the electrical outlets (p. 634) The outlet closes automatically when the Accessories connected to the electrical
driver exits the vehicle. If the vehicle remains outlet can be activated even when the
unlocked, the outlet will remain active for vehicle's electrical system is off or if pre-
about 10 minutes longer. conditioning is used. For this reason,
unplug accessories when they are not
being used.
WARNING CAUTION Using the glove compartment

The glove compartment is located on the pas-
• Do not use accessories with large or The maximum power is 120 W (10 A) per
senger side. The glove compartment can be
heavy plugs – they could damage the outlet.
used to store the vehicle's printed owner's
outlet or come loose while you are driv-
information and other items. There is also
ing.
Related information room for a pen and a card holder.
• Do not use accessories that could • Electrical outlets (p. 632)
cause disruptions to e.g. the vehicle's
radio receiver or electrical system.
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 622)
• Position the accessory so that there is
no risk of it injuring the driver or pas-
sengers in the event of heavy braking
or a collision.
• Pay attention to connected accessories
as they can generate heat that could
burn passengers or the interior.
Using 12 V outlets Glove compartment with fold-out hook.

1. Remove the stopper (tunnel console) or
fold down the cover (trunk/cargo com- The hook on the glove compartment can be
folded out when the glove compartment is
partment)8 over the socket and plug in the
open. Once folded out, it can be used when
device.
the glove compartment is closed.
2. Unplug the device and put the stopper
back in (tunnel console) or fold up the
cover (trunk/cargo compartment)9 when
the socket is not in use or left unattended.
8 Availability varies depending on market.

9 Availability varies depending on market. }}
635
|| Sun visors
In the ceiling in front of the driver's and front
passenger's seats, there are sun visors that
can be lowered and angled to the side as
necessary.
The glove compartment is opened by pressing Related information

the opening button in the center console. • Passenger compartment interior (p. 622)
CAUTION
The hook must be either fully retracted or The illustration is generic – the design may vary.
fully extended so that it doesn't break
The mirror lighting* comes on automatically
when the glove compartment is closed.
when the visor is lifted up.
The mirror frame has a holder for e.g. cards or
tickets.
Related information
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 622)
Folding down the armrest in the Opening the rear seat cup holder
rear seat* The rear seat armrest* houses a cup holder
The rear seat armrest* can be folded down for that can be used when the armrest is folded
increased comfort. down.
The armrest is locked in the raised position
and needs to be unlocked before it is folded
down. The handle for unlocking the armrest is
located directly underneath the head restraint.
2. When the handle is rotated to its maxi-

mum position, the armrest is unlocked
and can be folded down.
CAUTION If you press the button, the cup holder opens

automatically.
• Before moving down the armrest, make
sure to unlock it by rotating the handle. Related information
Do not pull the handle if the armrest is
1. Grasp the handle and rotate it toward you locked.
to unlock the armrest. • Folding down the armrest in the rear seat*
• Make sure the armrest is securely (p. 637)
locked into position after it is folded up.
Related information
• Opening the rear seat cup holder (p. 637)
Cargo compartment grocery bag holders to help secure objects in

The vehicle has a flexible cargo compartment place, and the retractable cargo compartment
that makes it possible to carry and secure cover* to help conceal objects in the cargo
large objects. compartment.
The vehicle has a flexible cargo compartment

that makes it possible to carry and secure
large objects. There is also a front cargo com-
partment, or "frunk," under the hood.
Loads can be secured in the trunk to keep
them in place while driving.
Cargo compartment with storage space under the

cargo compartment floor.
Cargo compartment with elastic band and storage

space under the cargo compartment floor.
The cargo capacity of the vehicle can be con-
siderably increased by folding down the rear
seat backrests. Use the load anchoring eyelets
or grocery bag holders to help secure objects
in place, and the retractable cargo compart-
Cargo compartment with mesh pocket* or side panel
as well as storage space under the cargo compartment cover* to help conceal objects in the
ment floor. cargo compartment.
The cargo capacity of the vehicle can be con- Cargo compartment with storage space under the
siderably increased by folding down the rear cargo compartment floor.
seat backrests. To make loading and unload- The cargo capacity of the vehicle can be con-
ing easier, the rear section of the vehicle can siderably increased by folding down the rear
be raised and lowered using the level control seat backrests. Use load anchoring eyelets or
function*. Use the load anchoring eyelets or grocery bag holders to help secure objects in
place. The parcel shelf can be easily removed The towing eyelet and tire sealing system, or
to make room for bulky loads. the temporary spare tire*, are located under
the cargo compartment floor.
The cargo capacity of the vehicle can be con-
siderably increased by folding down the rear If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary
seat backrests. Use load anchoring eyelets or spare tire, this is secured to the cargo com-
grocery bag holders to help secure objects in partment floor under the cover.
place. In order to accommodate bulky loads,
If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary
the parcel shelf is easy to remove and store
spare tire, this is secured to the cargo com-
under the load compartment floor.
partment floor under the cover. The towing
The cargo compartment capacity can be con- eyelet and tire sealing system are located
siderably increased by folding down the back- under the cargo compartment floor.
rests in the second and third rows* of seats. Trunk with mesh pocket* or side panel.
To make loading and unloading easier, the rear Front cargo compartment
section of the vehicle can be raised and low-
ered using the level control function*. Use the
load anchoring eyelets or grocery bag holders
to help secure objects in place, and the
retractable cargo compartment cover* to help
conceal objects in the cargo compartment.
Trunk with mesh pocket* or side panel.

There is additional storage space under the
The folding* rear seat backrests can help hood. The front cargo compartment also con-
increase the cargo capacity of the trunk. Load tains the vehicle's towing eyelet and tire seal-
anchoring eyelets and grocery bag holders are ing system.
provided to help secure objects in place.
}}
|| Related information Loading recommendations WARNING

• Loading recommendations (p. 640) There are a number of things that are impor-
In a head-on collision at a speed of
• Opening and closing the hood (p. 687) tant to consider when carrying loads in or on 50 km/h (30 mph), an unsecured object
the vehicle. weighing 20 kg (44 pounds) can reach a
• Grocery bag holders (p. 642)
Load-carrying capacity is determined by the projectile weight equivalent to 1000 kg
• Cargo anchoring eyelets* (p. 646) vehicle's curb weight. The total weight of all (2200 pounds).
• Installing and removing the cargo com- passengers and any installed accessories
partment cover* (p. 650) reduces the vehicle's load-carrying capacity by
the corresponding amount. WARNING
• Removing and storing the parcel shelf
(p. 666) If objects are loaded higher than the upper
WARNING edge of the side windows, leave a 10 cm
(4 in.) space between the objects and the
The vehicle's driving characteristics change window. Objects placed closer to this
depending on the weight and position of could impede the function of the inflatable
the load. curtain concealed inside the headlining.
Loading the cargo compartment/trunk WARNING

Keep the following in mind when loading:
Always secure the load. Otherwise, it may
• Position objects so they are pressing shift during heavy braking and injure peo-
against the rear seat backrests. ple in the vehicle.
• Heavy objects should be positioned as low Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
as possible. Avoid placing heavy objects something soft.
on folded-down seat backrests. Turn off the engine and apply the parking
• Cover sharp corners with a soft cloth or brake when loading/unloading long
similar to help prevent damage to the objects. Otherwise, it is possible for the
load to reach the gear lever or gear selector
upholstery.
and move it to a drive position – which
• Use the load anchoring eyelets and ten- could cause the vehicle to begin rolling.
sioning straps or similar to secure all
objects.
WARNING The rear end of the vehicle cannot be raised

higher than its normal height.
Always secure the load. Otherwise, it may
shift during heavy braking and injure peo- The rear end will return to the normal height
ple in the vehicle. when the vehicle begins driving.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft. NOTE
Apply the parking brake when loading/ It is not possible to adjust the height of the
unloading. vehicle's rear when one or more of the
doors or the hood is open. This does not
Extra cargo space apply to the tailgate.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down*
to increase cargo space in the cargo compart- Controls for raising/lowering the rear end of the vehi-
ment/trunk and simplify loading. If the rear cle. WARNING
seat backrests are folded down, make sure Make sure that no people, animals or
that no objects loaded into the vehicle prevent objects are found under the vehicle when it
the WHIPS system for the front seats from is lowered. This could endanger life and
cause damage to the vehicle or objects.
functioning correctly.
The ski hatch* in the rear seat can be folded
Related information
down to carry skis or other long, thin objects.
• Cargo anchoring eyelets* (p. 646)
Raising/lowering the rear end of the • Folding down the rear seat backrests*
vehicle* (p. 210)
The rear end of the vehicle can be lowered or • Folding the second row backrests (p. 213)
raised for easier loading into the cargo com-
partment/trunk or to facilitate attaching a • Rear seat ski hatch* (p. 647)
trailer*. Controls for raising/lowering the rear end of the vehi- • Roof loads and load carriers (p. 642)
cle.
The controls for raising/lowering are located at • Leveling control* and suspension (p. 488)
the rear edge of the right side panel in the The controls consist of two buttons ‒ one but- • Weights (p. 842)
cargo compartment/trunk. ton for lowering and one button for raising the
rear end. Press and hold the relevant button
until the desired height is reached.
Roof loads and load carriers WARNING Grocery bag holders

Volvo-developed load carriers are recom- Grocery bag holders (hooks) help keep shop-
The vehicle's center of gravity and driving
mended for carrying loads on the roof of the characteristics are altered by roof loads. ping bags in place and prevent them from
vehicle. falling over and spilling their contents in the
These load carriers are specially designed to Follow the vehicle's specifications regar- cargo compartment.
ding weights and maximum permitted
help prevent damage to your vehicle. Volvo
load.
load carriers are available from authorized
Volvo retailers.
Related information
Carefully follow the installation instructions
provided with the load carriers.
• Weights (p. 842)
• Distribute the load evenly throughout the
load carriers. Place heavier cargo at the
bottom of the load.
• Check periodically to ensure that the load
carriers and load are properly secured.
Secure the load firmly using tie straps or
similar.
• If the load is longer than the vehicle, such
as a canoe or kayak, attach the towing
eyelet in its front outlet and secure the tie
straps in it.
• The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel
consumption increase with the size of the
load.
• The vehicle's wind resistance and energy
consumption increase with the size of the
load.
• Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid acceleration,
hard braking and fast cornering.
642
On the sides of the cargo

compartment
The illustration is generic - details may vary accord-

ing to vehicle model. There is a grocery bag holder in the side panel
on each side of the cargo compartment.
}}
643
|| Under the parcel shelf*
There are two fold-out holders in the side pan-

els, one on each side of the cargo compart- Fold down the hook from underneath the par-
ment. cel shelf. Bags with handles of a suitable
height can be hung from the hooks.
CAUTION
The grocery bag holders are only intended Under the floor hatch*10
to hold weights up to 5 kg (11 lbs).
There are two grocery bag holders in the side

panel on each side of the cargo compartment.
There are two grocery bag holders in the side
panel on each side of the cargo compartment.
10 5-seat models only.
secure shopping bags in a suitable position. 2. Move the load compartment floor to the
Bags with handles of a suitable size can also upright position and place it in the adjust-
be hung on the hooks. ment track on each side.
> It is now possible to hang grocery bags
with handles at a suitable height on the
hooks.
In the glove compartment

There is also a fold-out hook in the glove com-
partment that can be used to hang a shopping
bag.
Related information
• Using the glove compartment (p. 635)
• Installing and removing the cargo net*
(p. 660)
• Installing and removing the cargo net*
(p. 662)
• Installing and removing the cargo com-
partment cover* (p. 650)
• Installing and removing the steel cargo
grid* (p. 657)
There are two grocery bag holders and an

elastic band11 in the hatch in the cargo com-
partment floor. The strap can be attached in
four different positions. 1. Lift the handle in the center of the load
Open the hatch to access the grocery bag compartment floor and fold up the floor.
holders. Use the provided elastic strap to
11 Additional elastic straps can be ordered from a Volvo retailer.
Cargo anchoring eyelets*

The load anchoring eyelets in the cargo com-
partment can be used to secure objects with
straps, a net, etc.
Related information Rear seat ski hatch*

• Loading recommendations (p. 640) The hatch in the rear seat backrest can be
• Weights (p. 842) opened to transport long, narrow objects
such as skis.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and heavy objects in or pro-
truding from the vehicle can cause injury in
the event of hard braking. The illustration is generic - details may vary accord-
ing to vehicle model.
Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps.
}}
|| 1. In the cargo compartment, grasp the ski Folding up the cargo compartment 2. Raise the support arm and insert the end
hatch handle and pull it down. floor in the recess on the underside of the cargo
The cargo compartment floor can be secured compartment floor.
2. Fold down the armrest in the rear seat.
in the raised position using the support arm.
3. Adjust the center seat head restraint 1. Grasp the handle to fold up the cargo
upwards so the steel tubes do not block compartment floor.
the opening.
Related information
• Cargo compartment (p. 638)
> The cargo compartment floor will then

be held in the raised position.
With folding cargo compartment floor* Removing the folding cargo 2.

compartment floor*
The folding cargo compartment floor can be
removed for easier access to the storage
space underneath.
1.
– Lift the handle in the middle of the folding

cargo compartment floor and push it for- Press the locking clip at the location
ward so that it folds together. shown by the arrow until it stops. Maintain
pressure on the locking clip.
Related information
At the same time, lift the cargo com-
partment floor slightly upward.
Push the folding cargo compartment floor
forward so that it folds together. 3. Release pressure on the locking clip, but
keep holding the cargo compartment floor
up.
}}
|| 4. Installing and removing the cargo

compartment cover*
The cover can be rolled out to conceal objects
in the cargo compartment.
In the fully open position, the cover and the
rear flap conceal objects in the cargo com-
partment.
Installing the cargo compartment

cover
The cargo compartment floor can be

carefully placed back on top of the lock-
While continuing to hold the cargo com-
ing clips without it locking into place.
partment floor up, press the locking clip on
the other side, as shown by the arrow.
> If the procedures in step 2 have been NOTE
performed correctly, the cargo com- The cargo compartment floor is also
partment floor should now be released secured in the front hinge.
from its side attachment points.
Volvo recommends that the cargo com-
partment floor remains secured in its front
hinge.
5. Press the cargo compartment floor down-

ward to lock it into its attachment points
again.
Related information
Then put the other end piece in the recess 4.

in the side panel on the opposite side.
Fold out the cover's front flap to eliminate

the gap between the cover and the rear
Make sure the front flap is pointed down-
seat backrest.
ward behind the backrest before the cas-
sette is put into place.
CAUTION
Push the end piece down on both sides,
one at a time. The flap has two plastic parts that hold it
into place.
> When a click is heard and the red
marks on each end piece are no longer Do not hang shopping bags or similar
visible, the cover is in place. Check that items on these plastic parts. They are not
it is secure. designed for this and could break.
If the cargo net* is used at the same time as

Press the end piece on one side of the the cargo compartment cover, the net has to
cover into the retaining bracket in the side be put into place first.
panel of the cargo compartment.
}}
|| Fitting the tailgate flap 2. Squeeze together the flap slightly to make Removing the tailgate flap
it easier to guide the pin into place in the If the cargo compartment cover is not being
bracket on the other side. used, the rear flap should be removed.
3. 1.
A flap should be mounted on the tailgate

when using the cargo compartment cover. Press the two upper clips in the respective Pull the upper clips of the cover straight
recess in the tailgate so it clicks into place. out of the tailgate.
1.
Removing the cargo compartment 2.
cover
In retracted position:
1. Press the button on one of the cover's
ends and lift out that end.
For 7-seat models - remove the third row
seat belt latches from the hooks above the
side panels.
2. Carefully lift the cover up and out.
Turn the flap so that the screw side faces
down and guide the pin into the bracket > The other end will release automatically Carefully pull the flap out of the bracket on
on one side of the tailgate. and the cover can then be lifted out of one side of the tailgate and then the other.
the cargo compartment. If necessary, press the flap together
slightly to make it more flexible and facili-
tate removal.
652
Related information Operating the cargo compartment

• Operating the cargo compartment cover* cover*
(p. 653) The cover can be used in two positions: fully
• Loading recommendations (p. 640) open to completely cover the cargo compart-
ment or partially retracted to make it easier to
reach further into the cargo compartment.
Fully open
Grasp the handle and pull the cover out as

far as possible.
Press the attachment pins in the recesses
in the rear pillars of the cargo compart-
ment.
> The cover will be secured in the fully
open position.
1. Grasp the handle and pull the cover out
and above the side panels in the cargo
compartment. Pull the cover to its end
position.
2. Press the cover's attaching pins down into
the grooves in the side panels. Let the
cover retract slightly while pressing the
handle lightly upward to hook the attach-
ing pins into place.
open position.
Cover in the fully open position.
}}
|| With the cover completely open (covering

the cargo compartment), press the attach-
ing pins at the end of the cover into the
grooves on the side panels and release the
cover slightly while pressing the handle
lightly downward to hook the pins into the
grooves.
open position.
7-seat models Grasp the handle and pull the cover out
1. and above the side panels in the cargo
The rear flap mounted on the inside of the tailgate
supplements the cargo compartment cover. position.
5-seat models With the cover completely open (covering
the cargo compartment), press the attach-
ing pins at the end of the cover into the
grooves on the side panels and release the
cover slightly while pressing the handle
lightly downward to hook the pins into the
grooves.
open position.
CAUTION
Grasp the handle and pull the cover out Hang the third-row seat belt latches in the
hooks provided in the side panels. Do not place objects on top of the cargo
and above the side panels in the cargo
compartment cover.
position.
654
WARNING Returning to the fully open position from the From the fully opened position:
partially retracted position:
In 7-seat models - never have a cargo com-
partment cover mounted when there are 1. Grasp the handle and pull the cover down
passengers in the rear seats. This could as far as possible. Angle the handle
lead to serious injury in the event of a colli- slightly upward so that the attaching pins
sion. can more easily move past the first set of
grooves.
Loading mode 2. Release the handle so that the attaching
From the fully opened position: pins engage into the grooves.
– > The cover will be secured in the fully
open position. Grasp the handle and pull it rearward as
far as possible.
CAUTION Press the cover slightly downward.
When in the loading position, the cargo
compartment cover can obstruct visibility Move the cover and its attaching pins
to the rear. Make sure that the cargo com- carefully forward and upward over the
partment cover is fully extended or fully hooks.
retracted during driving. > The cover will retract until it stops in
the partially retracted position.
Press the handle section of the cargo com- Returning to the fully open position from the
partment slightly upward. partially retracted position:
> The cover will move up until it stops in 1. Grasp the handle and pull the cover out as
the partially retracted position. far as possible.
2. Release the handle so that the attaching
pins engage into the hooks.
open position.
In vehicles equipped with the automatic cargo
compartment cover*, the cover will retract
}}
|| from the fully open position to the partially If your hands are full:
retracted position every time the tailgate is
opened, and will return to the fully open posi-
tion when the tailgate is closed. The cover will
detect if anything obstructs its movement and
automatically retract.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of injury when opening
and closing the electrically operated* cargo From the fully retracted position - grasp
compartment cover. the handle and pull the cover up and over
In the fully open position, push the cover's
the side panels in the cargo compartment.
handle slightly upward with e.g. your
CAUTION Pull to the end position and press the
elbow.
attaching pins at the end of the cover into
If large or bulky objects are placed in the the grooves in the side panels of the vehi- > The cover will retract until it stops in
cargo compartment, put the automatic* cle. (If the cover is already fully open, see the partially retracted position.
cargo compartment cover in the fully next section.)
retracted position to help prevent it from To fully open the cover from the partially
coming into contact with the object. From the fully open position - grasp the retracted position:
handle and press the cover's attaching 1. Grasp the handle and pull the cover out as
pins down into the grooves in the side far as possible.
panels and then release.
NOTE 2. Let the cover retract slightly and press the
> Retract the cover until it stops in the
Automatic operation of the cargo compart- handle slightly downward.
partially retracted position.
ment cover may not be possible at low > The cover will be secured in the fully
passenger compartment temperatures. open position.
Retracting the cover Installing and removing the steel

1. From the fully opened position: cargo grid*
Lift the cover's handle and pull it rearward The steel cargo grid prevents loads or pets in
to release the cover's attaching pins from the cargo compartment from being thrown
the grooves. Let the cover retract. forward into the passenger compartment
during hard braking.
From the partially retracted position:
Grasp the handle and pull the cover out of
the groves to the fully open position. Lift
the handle and pull it rearward to release
the cover's attaching pins from the
grooves. Let the cover retract.
2. Let the cover retract with its attaching For safety reasons, the steel grid must always
pins above the side panels until it stops in be installed and secured correctly.
the fully retracted position.
Keep in mind that a retracted cover could WARNING
reduce rearward visibility. Under no circumstances may a person be
in the cargo compartment when the vehi-
Related information cle is moving. Heavy braking or a collision
• Installing and removing the cargo com- could lead to serious injury.
partment cover* (p. 650)
The steel grid consists of the grid itself and
two separate mounting brackets. Each of the
mounting brackets has a screw cover and two
plastic sleeves for the grid.
}}
|| WARNING ceiling brackets are only replaced by an 4.

authorized Volvo workshop or retailer.
The steel cargo grid may only be used in
the rear position described here. The ceil- 1. Fold down the rear seat backrests.
ing brackets behind the front seats are not 2. Make sure that the steel grid is facing the
intended to anchor the steel grid.
right direction. Lift the grid into the vehicle
through one of the rear doors.
WARNING 3.
For safety reasons, the third-row seats12
must be folded down when the steel cargo
grid is mounted in the vehicle.
Position the grid's attachment points in
the ceiling brackets.
CAUTION
The next step will be easier if two people
The steel cargo grid and the cargo com- hold the steel grid in the right position.
partment cover cannot be mounted at the
same time.
Installation Position the grid's attachment points in

the ceiling brackets.
CAUTION The next step will be easier if two people
hold the steel grid in the right position.
The steel cargo grid may only be used in
the rear position (behind the rear seat)
described here.
Before installing the steel grid, the existing

plastic ceiling brackets must be replaced with
steel brackets. Volvo recommends that the
12 7-seat models only.
658
5. 6. 1. Fold down the rear seats and lift in the

steel grid through one of the rear doors or
the tailgate. The curved (convex) side of
the grid should face toward the cargo
compartment and the hooks on each side
of the grid should face upward. The
mounting brackets and plastic sleeves are
not needed in this step.
2.
Screw the provided screw into place using Screw the provided screw into place using
the provided 6 mm Allen wrench. Repeat the provided 6 mm Allen wrench. Repeat
on the other side. Recommended torque: on the other side. Recommended torque:
20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
> Check to make sure the steel grid is > Check to make sure the steel grid is
securely in place. securely in place.
7. Return the backrest to the upright posi-
tion.
Press one of the grid's hooks into the
For more information on necessary tools and larger hole in the ceiling bracket (1).
procedures for installing/removing, see the
assembly instructions13 provided with the Grasp the grid near the hook and pull/push
steel grid. it into the smaller hole (2).
> The hook is now secured in the ceiling
For more information on necessary tools and
bracket.
procedures for installing/removing, see the
assembly instructions provided with the steel
grid.
13 Assembly instructions no. 31659257. }}
659
|| 3. Repeat step 2 above to secure the other 5. Repeat step 4 for the opposite side. Installing and removing the cargo
hook in the bracket on the opposite side.
6. Center the grid and then tighten both net*
mounting brackets, moving back and forth The cargo net helps prevent objects in the
WARNING between them until the grid is securely in cargo compartment from entering the pas-
Make sure the cargo grid's hooks are place. senger compartment in the event of a sudden
securely attached in the ceiling brackets to stop or hard braking.
help ensure the grid does not come loose. The cargo net is attached in four attachment
CAUTION
points and, for safety reasons, must always be
The steel cargo grid cannot be folded up or attached and secured as described below. The
4.
down when a cargo compartment cover is net is most easily installed via the rear doors.
mounted.
The cargo net is made of a strong nylon weave
and secured behind the front seats.
Related information
• Loading recommendations (p. 640) Installing the cargo net
WARNING
Make sure that the cargo net's upper
attachments are correctly mounted and
that the straps are hooked securely into
Attach the mounting bracket's hook place.
through the cargo anchoring eyelet near Never use the net if it is damaged.
the floor of the cargo compartment and
insert the threaded section of the bracket
1. Fold out the cargo net with the upper
through the grid's lower attachment hole
hooks facing upwards.
(1).
2. Insert one of the net's hooks into the ceil-
Slide the plastic sleeve onto the threaded
ing bracket with the strap lock facing you.
section of the mounting bracket with the
sleeve's flange turned upward and press it
down through the hole. Screw the screw
cover into place until its underside is
approximately 5 mm from the grid (2).
3. Insert the net's other upper hook into the 5. With the net mounted in the ceiling brack- Removing the cargo net
ceiling bracket on the opposite side. ets, hook the straps into the outer eyelets The cargo net can be easily removed and
on the seat rails behind the seats. Attach- folded up.
Make sure that the net's hooks are pushed
ing the net is easier if the seat backrests
forward as far as possible into their 1. Loosen the cargo net by pressing the but-
are upright and the seats are moved
respective ceiling brackets. ton on the strap locks on each side and
slightly forward.
4. Pull the straps until the cargo net is taut. pulling to allow some slack.
2. Press in the catches and release both of
the strap hooks.
3. Unhook the upper hooks and remove the
net from the ceiling brackets.
4. Fold and roll up the net. Then store it in its
case.
Related information
Installation of cargo net
When moving the seat and backrest back

again, make sure to not apply too much
pressure against the net. Move the seat or
backrest only until it touches the net.
CAUTION
If a seat or backrest is pressed with too
much force back against the cargo net, the
net and its ceiling brackets could be dam-
aged.
Installing and removing the cargo • Front mounting – behind the front seats.
net* • Rear mounting – behind the rear seats.
The cargo net helps prevent objects in the • Rear mounting – behind the second row
cargo compartment from entering the pas- of seats.
senger compartment in the event of a sudden
stop or hard braking.
The cargo net is attached at four points. WARNING
Objects in the cargo compartment must
always be securely anchored, even with a
correctly installed cargo net.
Installing the cargo net
WARNING
Make sure that the cargo net's upper
attachments are correctly mounted and
that the straps are hooked securely into
place.
Never use the net if it is damaged.
NOTE
With front mounting, the cargo net is most
easily installed via the rear doors.
For safety reasons, the cargo net must always
be mounted and secured according to the fol- 1. Fold out the cargo net with the upper
lowing description. hooks facing upwards.
The net is made of strong nylon weave and 2. Fold out the cargo net and make sure that
can be attached in two different locations in the upper rod folds out and locks into
the vehicle: position.
3. Insert one of the net's hooks into the front 5.

or rear ceiling bracket with the strap lock
facing you.
4. Insert the net's other upper hook into the
ceiling bracket on the opposite side.
The telescopic spring-loaded hooks make
mounting easier.
Make sure that the net's hooks are pushed
forward as far as possible into their
respective ceiling brackets.
Rear mounting.
Rear mounting.
For rear mounting:
With the cargo net hooked into the rear
ceiling brackets, attach the net's straps
into the front cargo anchoring eyelets in
the cargo compartment.
Rear mounting.
}}
663
|| 6. Pull the straps until the cargo net is taut.
Front mounting. Front mounting.
For front mounting:

With the net mounted in the front ceiling
brackets, hook the straps into the outer
eyelets on the front seat rails behind the
seats. Attaching the net is easier if the seat
backrests are upright and the seats are
moved slightly forward.
When moving the seat and backrest back
again, make sure to not apply too much
pressure against the net. Move the seat or
backrest only until it touches the net.
Front mounting.
CAUTION
If a seat or backrest is pressed with too
much force back against the cargo net, the
net and its ceiling brackets could be dam-
aged.
664
Installing the cargo net Front mounting Removing the cargo net
Rear mounting The cargo net can be easily removed and
folded up.
1. Loosen the cargo net by pressing the but-
ton on the strap locks on each side and
pulling to allow some slack.
2. Press in the catches and release both of
the strap hooks.
3. Unhook the upper hooks and remove the
net from the ceiling brackets.
4. Fold up the net and store it in its case.
5. Fold up the net and store it in its case.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests.
Replace clothing hooks, if desired.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests to 2. Align the cassette's mounting rails above
make mounting easier. the mounting brackets on the backrest. 6. Press the red button on the rod so that it
can be folded. Fold and roll up the net.
2. Guide the ends of the cargo net's cassette 3. Press the cassette into the mounting
Store the net in its case.
over the load anchoring eyelets in the side brackets.
panel recesses. Press the ends of the cas- 1. Remove the cargo net from the ceiling
4. Pull up the net.
sette into place on each side. Make sure brackets by pressing the hook attach-
the cassette is securely in place. 5. Insert one of the net's upper attachments ments rearward. Let the net retract into
into the corresponding front ceiling the cassette.
3. Pull up the net.
bracket and press it as far forward into the
4. Insert one of the net's upper attachments bracket as possible.
into the corresponding rear ceiling bracket
6. Press the other attachment into the rear
and press it as far forward into the bracket
ceiling bracket on the opposite side and
as possible.
press it as far forward into the bracket as
5. Press the other attachment into the rear possible.
ceiling bracket on the opposite side and
press it as far forward into the bracket as
possible.
}}
665
|| 2. Removing and storing the parcel Detach the parcel shelf lifting eyes on both
shelf sides.
The parcel shelf can be removed to increase Unhook the front edge of the parcel shelf
the cargo space. and remove it.
Removing the parcel shelf Storing the parcel shelf under the
cargo floor
Rear mounting:
Press the button on each side of the cas-
sette to release the ends from the load
anchoring eyelets. Lift out the net.
Front mounting:
Slide the cassette off of the mounting
brackets and lift the net out.
Related information
Once removed, the parcel shelf can be stored

under the cargo compartment floor.
Fold up the cargo compartment floor and
secure it with the support arm.
Position the parcel shelf with its top facing
down and place it in the space with the
rear part facing forward.
With folding cargo compartment floor*:
1.
Fold the cargo compartment floor forward

to position the parcel shelf with its top fac-
ing down and its rear part facing forward.
2. Restore the cargo compartment floor to a
flat position.
Related information
Volvo's service program Service and repairs Maintenance

To keep the vehicle as safe and reliable as Service the vehicle regularly. Follow Volvo's Your Volvo passed several major inspections
possible, follow the Volvo service schedule recommended service intervals. before it was delivered to you, in accordance
specified in the Warranty and Maintenance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance
Detailed inspection and repairs may only be
Records Information booklet. procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv-
performed by an authorized workshop.
ice Records Information booklet, many of
WARNING which will positively affect your vehicle's emis-
California Proposition 65 WARNING sions, should be performed as indicated. It is
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- Do not make any repairs on this vehicle recommended that receipts for vehicle emis-
senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- yourself. Electrical cables and/or compo- sion maintenance be retained in case ques-
cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon- nents that have come loose may only be tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec-
oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are corrected by an authorized workshop – an tion and maintenance should also be per-
known to the State of California to cause authorized Volvo workshop is recom- formed anytime a malfunction is observed or
cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- mended.
suspected.
Introduction
a well ventilated area and wear gloves or The maintenance services contain several
wash your hands frequently when servicing checks that require special instruments and
your vehicle. For more information go to tools and therefore must be performed by a
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top
vehicle. condition, specify time-tested and proven
Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.
Volvo recommends having an authorized The Federal Clean Air Act - U.S.
Volvo workshop perform service and mainte- The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle
nance. Volvo workshops have the staff, service manufacturers to furnish written instructions
literature and special tools that can provide to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper
the highest quality of service. servicing and function of the components that
control emissions. These services, which are
CAUTION listed in the "Warranty and Service Records
To ensure the Volvo warranty is not invali- Information" booklet, are not covered by the
dated, check and follow the Warranty and warranty. You will be required to pay for labor
Service Records Information booklet. and material used.
670
Applicable warranties - U.S./Canada Periodic maintenance helps minimize Emission inspection readiness
In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana- emissions How do states use OBD II for emission
dian regulations, the following list of warran-
inspections?
ties is provided. NOTE Many states connect a computer directly to a
• New Vehicle Limited Warranty • Refer to your Service and Warranty vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can
• Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty Booklet for a comprehensive service then read "faults." In some states, this type of
and maintenance schedule up to inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission
• Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty
test.
240,000 km (150,000 miles). This
• Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint program contains inspections and ser- How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission
Systems Limited Warranty vices necessary for the proper function inspection?
• Emission Design and Defect Warranty of your vehicle and includes compo- Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-
• Emission Performance Warranty nents that affect vehicle emissions. tion for any of the following reasons:
These are federal warranties; other warranties • The Warranty and Service Records • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
are provided as required by state/provincial Information booklet also contains vehicle may fail inspection.
law. Refer to your separate Warranty and detailed information concerning the
Service Records Information booklet for warranties that apply to your vehicle. • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,
but went out without any action on your
detailed information concerning each of the part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.
warranties. On-board Diagnostic System Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending
OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized on the inspection practices in your area.
engine management system. It stores diag-
nostic information about your vehicle's emis- • If you had recent service that required dis-
connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic
sion controls. It can light the Check Engine
information may be incomplete and "not
light (MIL) if it detects an emission control
ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not
"fault." A "fault" is a component or system
ready may fail inspection.
that is not performing within an expected
range. A fault may be permanent or temporary.
OBD II will store a message about any fault.
}}
671
|| How can I prepare for my next OBD II Monthly: Related information

emission inspection? • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. • Connecting equipment to the vehicle's
• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit or Inspect the tires for wear. data link connector (p. 36)
was lit but went out without service, have • Check that engine coolant and other fluid • Technician certification (p. 37)
your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, levels are between the indicated "min"
serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. • Climate control system service (p. 686)
and "max" markings.
• If you recently had service for a lit Check • Climate control system service (p. 686)
• Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
Engine light, or if you had service that cleaner and soft paper towels. • Maintenance of the brake system (p. 453)
required disconnecting the battery, a • Engine compartment overview (p. 692)
period of driving is necessary to bring the • Wipe driver information displays with a
OBD II system to "ready" for inspection.
soft cloth. • Booking service with the Volvo Cars app
(p. 570)
Two half-hour trips of mixed stop-and-go/ • Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-
highway driving are typically needed to rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter-
allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your minal connector, or a battery near the end
Volvo retailer can provide you with more of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo
information on planning a trip. retailer for additional information.
• Maintain your vehicle in accordance with As needed:
your vehicle's maintenance schedule. Wash the vehicle, including the undercarriage,
to reduce wear that can be caused by a
Owner maintenance buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can be
Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- caused by salt residues.
vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet. Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at
the base of the windshield, and from other pla-
The following points can be carried out ces where they may collect.
between the normally scheduled maintenance
services. NOTE
Each time the vehicle is refueled: Complete service information for qualified
• Check the engine oil level. technicians is available online for purchase
• Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.
headlights, and taillights.
672
Data transfer between vehicle and Software Updates NOTE

workshop over Wi-Fi The vehicle's software is updated through its
Depending on software version, down-
Volvo workshops have a designated Wi-Fi connection to the cellular network via OTA
loads can take place automatically or be
network for data transfer between the vehicle (over-the-air) updates.
started via a notification of an available
and the workshop. The key buttons are used When a new software update is available, it
software update.
to connect the vehicle to the Internet, so it is will be shown in Notifications view. Once it
important to bring a key with buttons to has been downloaded, you can choose when
workshop visits. it should be installed. Update the vehicle's Installing updates
During workshop visits, service technicians software as soon as possible when an update When a software update has been downloa-
perform troubleshooting and update software is available. ded and is ready to be installed, this will be
via the network. indicated in Notifications view and via a mes-
Downloading sage when the vehicle is started. You can
Connecting to the Internet using the The download takes place in the background choose to install the update immediately or be
key via the cellular network when the vehicle is reminded again at a later time.
Pressing the lock button on the key three running. Depending on the size of the update
times will connect the vehicle to the work- and connection speed, this may take several
NOTE
shop's network. Connection to the Internet is hours. If the vehicle is switched off during the
usually performed by the service technician. download, it will resume automatically the Installation of the software update may
next time the vehicle is started. take up to 90 minutes. During this time,
When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi net- the vehicle is locked and its functions are
work, the symbol appears in the center To download updates: unavailable. Keep this in mind when choos-
display. • the vehicle must be connected to the ing a time for the update.
The key cannot be used to connect to other Internet1.
Wi-Fi networks. • use of connected services must be Do not install new software when the vehicle
approved. is plugged in for rapid charging. The vehicle
WARNING can be left plugged in for charging from a reg-
ular wall outlet, but it will not be charged dur-
The vehicle may not be driven when it is ing the installation. Depending on charging
connected to the workshop's networks and
systems. source, charging may resume automatically
after the installation is complete.
1 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan. Volvo covers data traffic charges for system updates if no personal SIM card is installed. }}
673
|| Before installation: NOTE NOTE

1. Make sure the vehicle has a charge level • If possible, avoid handling the vehicle Functionality after updating may vary
of at least 40%. and its functions during installation. depending on market, model, model year
2. If the vehicle is plugged in for charging, • Do not connect or disconnect the and options.
stop charging and unplug the charging charging cable during the installation.
cable. The vehicle cannot be charged dur- Related information
ing the update.
• If you need to get into the vehicle while
installation is in progress, you must • Approval of terms and conditions and data
3. When an update is ready to be installed, use the key blade. collection (p. 34)
this will be shown in Notifications view. • Detachable key blade (p. 280)
• To avoid false alarms, the vehicle's bur-
Open the notification and follow the glary alarm will be deactivated during
instructions in the center display. installation.
4. Exit the vehicle, close all doors and lock
the vehicle. Always read through the contents of the
> Installation will begin. The vehicle must update so that you know how the vehicle and
be locked within a few minutes or its functions will be affected.
installation will be canceled.
If the installation fails, the vehicle's systems
5. Wait until the installation is finished. will reset to the last installed version.
> The installation can take up to
90 minutes. When the installation is NOTE
finished, the vehicle can be operated as
It is important to install software updates
usual.
as soon as possible to avoid risks that may
be associated with older software. If you
experience any problems with the update,
contact your Volvo retailer.
Information on contents
You can tap the information icon in the center
display to see more information about the
content of the software update.
674
Hoisting the vehicle When lifting the vehicle using a jack*, it is used. Read through all instructions before lift-
When lifting the vehicle using a jack*, it is important to use the correct lifting points on ing.
important to use the correct lifting points on the chassis. There are different lifting points
the chassis. Read through all instructions depending on which lifting equipment is
before lifting.
Arrows along the lower edges of the sides of the vehicle indicate the location of the jack attachment points/lifting points (shown in red).
}}
||
676
}}
677
||
The triangles in the plastic covering indicate where the jack attachment points/lifting points (red areas) are located.
678
}}
679
||
NOTE CAUTION When not in use, the jack should be kept in

its storage compartment under the cargo
Volvo recommends only using the jack If a jack* is provided with your vehicle, it is compartment floor. Crank the jack to the
intended for your specific vehicle model. If intended to be used only in temporary sit- correct position so that it fits.
a jack other than that recommended by uations such as changing wheels in the
Volvo is used, follow the instructions event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came When not in use, the jack should be kept in
included with the equipment. with your particular model should be used its storage compartment under the trunk
to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be floor. Crank the jack to the correct position
lifted more frequently, or for a longer so that it fits.
period of time than for a wheel change, a
garage jack or hoist is recommended.
Always follow this device's instructions for
use.
WARNING • Do not allow any part of your body to 2. Apply the parking brake and put the gear
be extended under a vehicle supported selector in P.
• The vehicle must not be able to roll with a jack.
when it is lifted. Put on the parking
NOTE
brake and select parking mode (P).
• Chock the wheels standing on the WARNING For vehicles with leveling control*: If the
If the vehicle is lifted using a workshop vehicle is equipped with pneumatic sus-
ground, using rigid wooden blocks or
hoist, the hoist must be placed under the pension, this feature must be turned off
large stones, both in front of and
lifting points. Be precise when positioning before the vehicle is lifted onto a tow truck.
behind the wheels.
the jack to ensure that the vehicle cannot
• Use a jack designed for your vehicle slip off while lifting. Make sure the top of
model when changing a tire. For any 3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
the jack is equipped with a rubber pad to
other job, also use stands to support help keep the vehicle stable and prevent wheels that are still on the ground. For
the vehicle. damage. Always use axle stands or similar example, use heavy wooden blocks or
when the vehicle is raised. large stones.
• Do not use a jack that is in poor condi-
tion. Make sure that the threads are
lubricated and that it is free of damage When not in use, the jack should be kept in its
and dirt. storage compartment.
• Make sure the jack is stable. The sur- Read through all instructions before starting.
face must be solid, level and not slip- Before raising the vehicle using a jack or lift,
pery. take out all the tools you will need.
• No objects should be placed between 1. Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning
the base of jack and the ground, or flashers if e.g. a wheel change must be
between the jack and the lifting point performed in an area with traffic.
on the vehicle.
• Never let anyone remain in the vehicle
while it is raised on a jack. Make sure
that passengers stand in a safe place
away from the vehicle if the tire needs
to be changed in an area with traffic.
}}
|| 4. Position the jack or garage lift arms at the

designated points under the vehicle. The
triangle markings on the plastic cover indi-
cate where the jack attachment points/lift-
ing points are located. There are two jack
attachment points on each side of the
vehicle. There is a groove for the jack at
each attachment point.
682
The vehicle can be lifted with a jack designed WARNING

for occasional lifts, with a garage hoist if regu-
lar lifts are required, or by authorized work- • The vehicle must not be able to roll
shop personnel who have access to larger lift- when it is lifted. Put on the parking
ing devices. brake and select parking mode (P).
• Chock the wheels standing on the
NOTE ground, using rigid wooden blocks or
large stones, both in front of and
Volvo recommends only using the jack
behind the wheels.
intended for your specific vehicle model. If
another jack must be used, follow the • Use a jack designed for your vehicle
instructions supplied with it. model when changing a tire. For any
other job, also use stands to support
The vehicle's ordinary jack* is only intended the vehicle.
5. Position the jack under the attachment to be used in temporary situations for short
point being used, ensuring that the sur- periods of time, such as when changing • Do not use a jack that is in poor condi-
face is firm, flat and not slippery. wheels in the event of a flat tire. If the vehi- tion. Make sure that the threads are
cle needs to be lifted more frequently, or lubricated and that it is free of damage
6. Crank the jack until it is positioned cor-
for a longer period of time than for a wheel and dirt.
rectly and in contact with the vehicle's
jack attachment point. Make sure the top change, a garage hoist is recommended. In • Make sure the jack is stable. The sur-
of the jack (or the garage lift arms) is cor- this case, follow the instructions supplied face must be solid, level and not slip-
rectly positioned in the attachment point, with the hoist. pery.
with the bump on the top of the jack in the • No objects should be placed between
recess in the attachment point and its the base of jack and the ground, or
base positioned vertically under the between the jack and the lifting point
attachment point. on the vehicle.
7. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far as • Never let anyone remain in the vehicle
possible from the side of the vehicle, while it is raised on a jack. Make sure
which will position the jack's arms per- that passengers stand in a safe place
pendicular to the vehicle's direction of
movement.
8. Raise the vehicle to the required height for
the operation you will perform.
}}
|| away from the vehicle if the tire needs WARNING

to be changed in an area with traffic.
If the vehicle is lifted using a workshop
• Do not allow any part of your body to hoist, the hoist must be placed under the
be extended under a vehicle supported inner lifting points. Follow the instructions
with a jack. provided with the workshop jack. Be pre-
cise when positioning the jack to ensure
that the vehicle cannot slip off while lifting.
Lifting points Make sure the top of the jack is equipped
with a rubber pad to help keep the vehicle
stable and prevent damage. Use axle
stands or similar when the vehicle is raised.
WARNING
If the vehicle is hoisted using a workshop
jack, the instructions provided with the jack
must be followed. Be precise when posi-
tioning the jack to ensure that the vehicle
cannot slip off while lifting. Make sure the
top of the jack is equipped with a rubber
pad to help keep the vehicle stable and
prevent damage. Use axle stands or similar
The vehicle's lifting points for lifting with a jack. when the vehicle is raised.
The vehicle has outer lifting points for smaller lifts,

and inner lifting points for larger lifts with a garage
hoist, lifting arms, etc.
684
Lifting a wheel with a jack 5. Make sure that the jack is stably posi- 8. Only raise the vehicle as high as needed
Read through all instructions before starting. tioned on level, solid ground and that the for the work you will carry out.
Before raising the vehicle using a jack or lift, surface is not slippery.
Lower the vehicle using the jack immedi-
take out all the tools you will need. 6. Raise the jack until it is touching the vehi- ately after the work has been performed.
1. Activate the hazard warning flashers if the cle's lifting point. Make sure that the edge
When the jack* is not being used, it is recom-
vehicle needs to be lifted in an area with of the lifting point fits in the notch on the
mended that it is stored in the vehicle, protec-
traffic. top of the jack.
ted from moisture and dirt.
2. Apply the parking brake. Put the gear
selector in P. Related information
• Jack* (p. 604)
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels that are still on the ground. For • Wheel bolts (p. 605)
example, use heavy wooden blocks or • Tool kit (p. 603)
large stones. • Leveling control settings* (p. 491)
4. Place the jack under one of the vehicle's
lifting points, with the crank handle point-
ing straight out from the side of the vehi-
cle.
The locations of the outer lifting points are
marked with triangular arrows along the
lower edge of the side of the vehicle.
There are special grooves for the jack
behind these markings.
The locations of the lifting points are
marked with triangular arrows along the
lower edge of the side of the vehicle.
There are special grooves for the jack 7. Make sure that the jack is completely level
behind these markings. and perpendicular to the side of the vehi-
cle.
> The vehicle is now ready to be lifted.
Climate control system service Climate control system service Damaged windshield
Service and repairs on the air conditioning Service and repairs on the air conditioning It is important to repair a damaged wind-
system should only be done by an authorized system should only be done by an authorized shield as soon as possible. Minor damage
workshop. workshop. due to e.g. stone chips can often be repaired
without replacing the entire windshield. Volvo
Troubleshooting and repairs Troubleshooting and repairs recommends contacting an authorized Volvo
The air conditioning system contains a fluores- The air conditioning system contains a fluores- workshop if the windshield is damaged.
cent tracer substance. Ultraviolet light is used cent tracer substance. Ultraviolet light is used
to search for leaks. to search for leaks. Minor glass damage
If possible, repair the damage within 24 hours
Volvo recommends contacting an authorized Volvo recommends contacting an authorized
to help prevent it from worsening. If the wind-
Volvo workshop. Volvo workshop.
shield has minor damage, a windshield stone
The climate system in the vehicle uses a freon- The climate system in the vehicle uses a freon- chip sticker can help protect the damaged
free R1234yf refrigerant. For information free R1234yf refrigerant. For information area from dust and dirt until it can be repaired.
regarding the refrigerant, refer to the decal regarding the refrigerant, refer to the decal
located on the inside of the hood. located on the inside of the hood. Major glass damage
In the event of major damage to the wind-
WARNING WARNING shield, the entire windshield must be replaced.
The air conditioning system contains the The air conditioning system contains the
refrigerant R1234yf under pressure. In refrigerant R1234yf under pressure. In WARNING
accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Do not drive the vehicle if there is major
Training for Safe Service and Containment Training for Safe Service and Containment damage to the windshield. The damage
of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C Sys- of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C Sys- can quickly worsen, obscuring the driver's
tem), service and repairs to the refrigerant tem), service and repairs to the refrigerant view and preventing the vehicle from being
system may only be performed by trained system may only be performed by trained driven safely.
and certified technicians in order to ensure and certified technicians in order to ensure
the safety of the system. the safety of the system.
Replacing a windshield
It is important that the new windshield and its
Related information Related information installation comply with Volvo's specifications
• Volvo's service program (p. 670) • Volvo's service program (p. 670) for safety and compatibility with the vehicle's
functions. Volvo recommends contacting an
686
authorized Volvo workshop for windshield Opening and closing the hood
replacements. To open the hood, pull the lever in the pas-
Replacing a windshield in a vehicle with a senger compartment and then turn the han-
head-up display* dle under the front edge of the hood. It is
Windshields in vehicles equipped with head- important to follow the instructions for clos-
up displays are specially designed to be able ing and check to make sure the hood is
to display the projected image. When replac- closed completely if it has been open.
ing the windshield, the right type of glass Opening the hood
must be used for the head-up display to func-
tion.
Related information
• Head-up display* (p. 145) Turn the handle under the hood counter-
• Cleaning the head-up display* (p. 792) clockwise to release the catch and lift the
hood.
Opening the hood
Pull the lever next to the pedals to release

the hood from its fully closed position.

}}
||
Swipe your hand from left to right under Move the handle under the hood upwards
the hood, grasp the handle and move it up to release the catch and lift the hood.
and to the side to release the catch and lift
the hood. CAUTION
Opening the hood Only remove the panels around the storage
compartment under the hood if this
requirement is clearly stated in the instruc-
tions in the Owner's Manual. Contact a
workshop if you experience any problems
or maintenance is required – an authorized
Volvo workshop is recommended.

688
Warning - hood not closed 1. Lower the hood until it reaches the lock 2. Press the hood down using both hands to
An open hood is indicated by catch. close it completely. Only push on the front
a warning symbol and part of the hood above the grille plate. Do
graphic in the instrument not push on the sides of the hood.
panel as well as an audible > The hood must audibly lock into place
signal. on both sides.
3. Press the hood down using both hands to
close it completely.
NOTE > The hood must audibly lock into place
If the vehicle indicates that the hood is on both sides.
open even though it is completely closed, 4. Make sure that the hood locks securely
open the hood and follow the instructions into place without any gaps.
for closing it. Consult a workshop if the
problem persists – an authorized Volvo
workshop is recommended. WARNING
Never drive with the hood open.
Closing the hood Check carefully to ensure that the hood
closes completely after it has been open.
WARNING If the vehicle warns or indicates that the
hood is open, or if anything indicates that it
To help prevent injury, make sure that there is not completely closed, stop immediately
is nothing in the closing path of the hood. and close it properly.
Related information
• Engine compartment overview (p. 692)
• Door and seat belt reminders (p. 52)
• Removing panels under the hood
(p. 690)
689
Removing panels under the hood Cover for storage compartment under the pressed in far enough, the plug can be pulled
To access certain components, such as fuses hood out. Avoid pushing the pin all the way through
and jump-start charging points, one or more Cap for filling washer fluid the plug, as this could cause it to dislodge and
protective panels in the space under the hood fall down between components. When rein-
may need to be removed. CAUTION stalling the panel, pull the locking pin out com-
pletely before reinserting the plug. When the
Only remove the panels around the storage plug is inserted in the attachment hole, push
compartment under the hood if this the pin into place again to secure the panel.
requirement is clearly stated in the instruc-
tions in the Owner's Manual. Contact a Because the protective panels overlap one
workshop if you experience any problems another, they must be removed and installed
or maintenance is required – an authorized in a certain order. To remove the panels, follow
Volvo workshop is recommended. these steps:
CAUTION
The panels are designed to protect the
components behind them. Reinstall the
Location of panels and parts under the hood.
panels completely to their original posi-
Panel A – provides access to the negative tions before driving the vehicle.
charging point for jump-starting.
Panel B
WARNING
Panel C A number of electrical components in the
vehicle use high-voltage current and can be
Panel D – provides access to the positive extremely dangerous if handled incorrectly.
charging point for jump-starting and to Do not touch anything that is not clearly
fuses under the hood. described in this Owner's Manual.
Panel E
The protective panels are held in place with
Panel F
plugs. To remove these plugs, use a screw-
driver, pen or similar to press in the locking pin
in the middle of the plug. When the pin is
690
Plug positions for panel A. Plug positions for Panel B. Panel C positions are the Plug positions for Panel D. Panel E positions are the
reverse of those for Panel B. reverse of those for Panel D.
Panel A
Panel B/C Panel D/E
1. Remove the 4 plugs holding the panel by
pressing down their locking pins slightly. 1. Remove Panel A first according to the pre- 1. First remove Panels A and B/C, depending
vious instructions. on side, and then open the cover for the
2. The panel is now held in place by the hid- storage space under the hood (7).
den snaps. Lift the panel carefully until 2. Remove the 5 marked plugs.
these unsnap. > The panel is now detached and can be 2. Remove the marked plug. To remove
> The panel can now be removed com- removed completely. This will provide Panel E, the washer fluid cap (8) must
pletely. This provides access to the access to plugs that attach Panel D or also be removed.
negative charging point and the panels E, depending on side. Panel D must be 3. The panel is now held in place by the hid-
B and C. Panel B must be removed for removed to access the positive charg- den snaps. Lift the panel carefully until
access to Panel D, under which the ing point and fuses under the hood. these unsnap.
positive charging point and fuses under To replace the panel, pull out the locking pins > The panel is now detached and can be
the hood are located. completely and push them in again once the removed completely. The positive
To replace the panel, pull out the locking pins plugs are positioned in the attachment holes. charging point and fuses under the
completely and push them in again once the The panel also has a protruding part at the rear hood are located under Panel D.
plugs are positioned in the attachment holes. that helps hold it in place as it is being posi-
To replace the panel, pull out the locking pins
Make sure that the snaps are positioned cor- tioned in its hole.
completely and push them in again once the
rectly before pushing the panel into place. plugs are positioned in the attachment holes.
}}
691
|| Make sure that the snaps are positioned cor- Related information Engine compartment overview
rectly before pushing the panel into place. • Jump starting using another battery There are several service-related parts in the
(p. 501) engine compartment.
• Jump starting using another battery Some of the components included in the vehi-
(p. 503) cle's electric drive system are located in the
engine compartment. Exercise caution when
• Opening and closing the hood (p. 687)
accessing the engine compartment and only
• Fuses under the hood (p. 721) touch what is required for normal mainte-
• Fuses in the engine compartment nance.
(p. 728)
• Fuses in the engine compartment WARNING
(p. 734) Orange wiring may only be handled by
qualified personnel.
Plug positions for Panel F.

Panel F
WARNING
A number of electrical components in Twin
1. First remove Panels A, B, C, D and E. Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles use high-
2. Remove the 2 marked plugs. voltage current and can be extremely dan-
gerous if handled incorrectly.
3. The panel is now held in place by the hid-
den snaps. Lift the panel carefully until • Do not touch anything that is not
these unsnap. clearly described in this Owner's Man-
ual.
> The panel is now detached and can be
removed completely. • Be careful when checking/filling fluids
in the engine compartment.
To replace the panel, pull out the locking pins
completely and push them in again once the
plugs are positioned in the attachment holes.
Make sure that the snaps are positioned cor-
rectly before pushing the panel into place.
692
The layout of the engine compartment may vary The layout of the engine compartment may vary The layout of the engine compartment may vary
depending on model and engine variant. depending on model and engine variant. depending on model and engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank Coolant expansion tank Coolant expansion tank
Brake fluid reservoir (located on the driv- Brake fluid reservoir (located on the driv- Washer fluid filler pipe
er's side) er's side)
Brake fluid reservoir (located on the driv-
Washer fluid filler pipe Washer fluid filler pipe er's side)
Fusebox Fusebox Fusebox
Air filter Air filter Air filter
Engine oil filler pipe Engine oil filler pipe Engine oil filler pipe
}}
693
|| WARNING
Surfaces near the radiator in the front sec-
tion of the engine compartment can get
very hot while driving. Make sure that they
have cooled sufficiently before touching
them, especially metal parts.
WARNING
Bear in mind that the cooling fan (located
at the front of the engine compartment
behind the radiator) may start or continue
The layout of the engine compartment may vary Location of warning decal for the engine compart- running automatically up to about
depending on model and engine variant. ment. The layout of the engine compartment may 6 minutes after the engine is turned off.
vary depending on model and engine variant. Always entrust engine washing to a work-
Coolant expansion tank
shop – an authorized Volvo workshop is
Brake fluid reservoir (located on the driv- NOTE recommended. If the engine is hot, there is
er's side) a risk of fire.
Washer fluid filler pipe do not claim to be exact reproductions of
Fusebox
those found in the vehicle. The purpose is WARNING
to show approximately how they look and The ignition system works with extremely
Air filter about where they are located on the vehi- high and dangerous voltages. The vehicle
cle. The information that applies for your electrical system should always be in igni-
Engine oil filler pipe vehicle in particular is found on the decal tion mode 0 when work in being per-
on the vehicle. formed in the engine compartment.
Do not touch any spark plugs or ignition
coils when the vehicle electrical system is
in ignition mode II or when the engine is
warm.
694
Related information Engine oil If the engine oil is not checked regularly and
• Opening and closing the hood (p. 687) Only use engine oil of the prescribed grade. the level becomes low, this could cause seri-
This is a requirement for the recommended ous engine damage.
service intervals and warranties to apply.
• Refilling coolant (p. 699)
NOTE
• Fuses under the hood (p. 721)
• Fuses in the engine compartment do not claim to be exact reproductions of
(p. 728) those found in the vehicle. The purpose is
• Fuses in the engine compartment to show approximately how they look and
(p. 734) about where they are located on the vehi-
• Checking and filling engine oil (p. 696) cle. The information that applies for your
• Ignition modes (p. 447) on the vehicle.
Location of warning decal for the engine compart-

ment. The layout of the engine compartment may
vary depending on model and engine variant.
Volvo recommends:
}}
695
|| CAUTION panel and messages. Contact a Volvo retailer Checking and filling engine oil
for more information. The engine oil level is monitored by an elec-
To satisfy the requirements for the engine's
Change the engine oil and oil filter according tronic oil level sensor.
service intervals, all engines are factory-
filled with a specially adapted synthetic to the schedule specified in the Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet.
Viewing oil level in the center display
engine oil. Great care has been put into the The oil level can be shown in the center dis-
choice of oil, with consideration given to play when the vehicle is started. It should be
Related information
service life, startability, fuel consumption checked regularly.
and environmental impact.
• Checking and filling engine oil (p. 696)
• Engine oil specifications (p. 862) 1. Tap in the center display.
For the recommended service intervals to
apply, an approved engine oil must be 2. Select Car status.
used. Only use the prescribed oil grade to > Different types of information about the
top off or change the oil. Otherwise, there vehicle can be shown, including the oil
is a risk of the vehicle's service life, starta- level.
bility, fuel consumption and environmental
impact being affected. NOTE
Failure to use engine oil of the prescribed The system cannot directly detect changes
grade and viscosity could cause damage to when the oil is filled or drained. The vehicle
engine-related components. Volvo dis- must have been driven approximately
claims warranty liability for such type of 30 km (20 miles) and have been stationary
damage. 5 minutes on a level surface and with the
Volvo recommends entrusting oil changes engine off before the correct oil level will
to an authorized Volvo workshop. be displayed.
Symbols for low oil level

Volvo uses different systems to alert the driver
of oil level or low oil pressure. Low oil pressure
is indicated by a warning symbol in the
instrument panel. Warnings or information
about the vehicle's oil level can be indicated
by the warning symbol in the instrument
696
NOTE Filling engine oil

If the conditions for measuring oil level are
not properly fulfilled (time after engine
shutdown, vehicle inclination, ambient
temperature, etc.) the message No value
available will be shown in the center dis-
play. This does not mean that anything is
wrong in the vehicle systems.
CAUTION
If this symbol is shown, the oil Filler pipe6,7
pressure may be too low. Stop Filler pipe2,3
the vehicle as soon as possible It may be necessary to top up engine oil
and have it towed to a workshop between regularly scheduled services. No
– an authorized Volvo workshop is recom- action is necessary with regard to engine oil
mended. level until a message appears in the instru-
ment panel.
WARNING
If the message Engine oil level Service
required is displayed, the oil level may be
too high. Drive to a workshop – an author-
ized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Filler pipe4,5
2 Engines with an electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

3 The layout of the engine compartment may vary depending on model and engine variant.
5 The layout of the engine compartment may vary depending on model and engine variant.
7 The layout of the engine compartment may vary depending on model and engine variant. }}
697
|| WARNING Coolant CAUTION

Coolant helps keep the combustion engine at
Be careful not to spill oil in the engine com- Do not open the coolant
partment. This could lead to fire if the oil the right operating temperature. Excess heat
tank cap and do not add
comes in contact with hot parts. can be used to heat the passenger compart-
any fluids. Doing this can
ment.
cause damage that is not
The coolant cools components related to the covered by the warranty.
CAUTION
electric propulsion of the vehicle, and the
If a message appears to fill engine oil, add excess heat can be used to heat the high-
only the specified amount. A too-high level voltage battery or the passenger compart- Only a workshop may fill coolant. An
can lead to malfunction. ment. authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
Recommended grade: mended.
Related information Premixed coolant approved by Volvo.
• Engine oil (p. 695) WARNING
If concentrated coolant is used, mix with 50%
• Engine oil specifications (p. 862) clean water. The purity level must meet Never ingest coolant. It can damage kid-
• Ignition modes (p. 447) Volvo's requirements. Consult a Volvo retailer neys and other organs. The product con-
if you have any questions. tains ethylene glycol, inhibitor, water, etc.
To help prevent deterioration of the cooling

system's function, which can lead to engine
Related information
trouble and other issues, Volvo recommends • Refilling coolant (p. 699)
using only Volvo-approved coolant. • Engine compartment overview (p. 692)
Recommended grade: • Volvo's service program (p. 670)
Volvo-approved premixed coolant.

Contact a workshop8 as soon as possible in
the event of a warning for too-low or too-high
coolant level.
698
Refilling coolant
Follow the instructions on the coolant pack-
age when refilling. Never fill the cooling sys-
tem with only water. The risk of freezing is
increased with too low or too high amounts
of coolant.
If there are any signs of leakage from the cool-
ing system, do not start the vehicle and have it
towed to help prevent engine damage. Signs
of leakage include coolant under the vehicle,
steam from the coolant system, or if more
than 2 liters (about 2 quarts) are needed when
refilling. Coolant expansion tank
2. Unscrew the expansion tank cap and fill
coolant as needed. The level should be
WARNING between the MIN and MAX marks on the
The coolant can be very hot when the expansion tank.
engine has been running. Always let the Put the components back in place in the
coolant cool off before unscrewing the cap
to refill. reverse order.
When refilling – carefully unscrew the cap

to release any excess pressure.
1. Open the cap in the plastic covering.
Coolant expansion tank, left-hand drive vehicle.

}}
699
||
2. Remove the plastic cover by folding out

the catch and lifting the cover upward.
Coolant expansion tank
Unscrew the cover in the plastic covering.
Unscrew the expansion tank cap and fill

3. Unscrew the expansion tank cap and fill
coolant as needed. The level should not
1. Lift the rubber strip by pressing it inward coolant as needed. The level should be
exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the
into the engine compartment. between the MIN and MAX marks on the
expansion tank.
expansion tank.
Put the components back in place in the
Put the components back in place in the
reverse order.
reverse order.
700
CAUTION Batteries and power supply

The vehicle's own power is supplied by differ-
• Coolant is harmful if swallowed and
ent batteries and components. These enable
may cause damage to organs.
the vehicle's electric functions.
• Only use coolant of a grade approved The vehicle's primary electrical system oper-
by Volvo. If concentrated coolant is ates with 12 V voltage and powers electrical
used, make sure that the coolant mix- equipment.
ture is 50% coolant and 50% water of
acceptable quality. In addition to the primary electrical system,
the vehicle has a high-voltage system for elec-
• Hard water and water with high levels trical propulsion.
of chlorine, chlorides and other salts or
contaminants may cause corrosion in Mild hybrid* vehicles are equipped with a 48 V
Coolant expansion tank the cooling system. system in addition to the primary electrical
– Unscrew the expansion tank cap and fill system.
• Do not mix different types of coolant.
coolant as needed. The level should be
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
• When replacing larger components in WARNING
the cooling system, always replace all
expansion tank. A number of electrical components in the
coolant with new coolant.
vehicle use high-voltage current and can be
• Only operate the engine when the extremely dangerous if handled incorrectly.
cooling system is filled to the correct Do not touch anything that is not clearly
level. A too-low coolant level can lead described in this Owner's Manual.
to overheating and engine damage.
Batteries
Related information To supply power to various components, your
• Engine compartment overview (p. 692) vehicle is equipped with:
• Coolant (p. 698) • a 12 V start battery that powers the vehi-
cle's primary electrical system
• a 12 V battery that powers the vehicle's
primary electrical system
• a hybrid battery for electrical propulsion of
the vehicle.
}}
|| • a high-voltage battery for electrical propul- • Hybrid battery (p. 710)

sion of the vehicle. • High-voltage battery (p. 711)
• a support battery that helps during the • Regenerative braking (p. 462)
Start/Stop function's start sequence. The
battery is either a 12 V battery or, if the • Regenerative braking* (p. 462)
vehicle is a mild hybrid*, a 48 V battery
that also enables regenerative braking
while driving.
WARNING
Mild hybrid vehicles have components that
work with 48 V voltage, which can be dan-
components that are not clearly described
in the Owner's Manual.
• Never use a 48 V support battery to
jump-start the vehicle.
• External electrical equipment may not
under any circumstance be connected
to the 48 V battery.
• Only a workshop may replace or per-
form service on the 48 V battery – an
mended.
Related information
• Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 718)
• 12 V battery (p. 715)
• Support battery (p. 707)
Start battery CAUTION WARNING

The start battery powers the vehicle's primary
electrical system, which includes electrical
If replacing the battery, make sure you • Batteries generate hydrogen gas,
replace it with a battery of the same size, which is flammable and explosive.
equipment and engine start. If the vehicle is a
cold start capacity and type as the original • Do not connect the jumper cable to
mild hybrid*, the engine is instead started by
battery (see the decal on the battery). any part of the fuel system or to any
the support battery.
Volvo recommends having an authorized moving parts. Avoid touching hot
The start battery powers the vehicle's primary Volvo workshop change batteries. manifolds.
electrical system, which includes most of the
electrical equipment. The hybrid battery is • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
used to start the combustion engine. WARNING not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
The start battery is a 12 V battery that is skin, fabrics or painted surfaces.
dimensioned to power the vehicle's specific function for automatic opening and closing • If contact occurs, flush the affected
electrical systems and functions. must be reset to function correctly. A reset area immediately with water. Obtain
is required in order for the pinch protection medical help immediately if eyes are
• Never disconnect the start battery while to work. affected.
the engine is running.
• Make sure the cables to the start battery • Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark. Do not smoke near
are correctly connected and the clamps
the battery. Failure to follow the
are securely tightened.
instructions for jump starting can lead
to injury.
CAUTION
On certain models, the battery is secured Starter battery service life and
with a tensioning strap. Make sure that the capacity
tensioning strap is always securely tight-
The service life of the start battery is influ-
ened.
enced by a number of factors, including the
number of starts, discharges, driving style,
driving conditions and climate conditions. The
battery's starting capacity decreases over
time. Severe cold further limits starting
capacity.
}}
|| The battery level can become low if the vehicle

is not used for a prolonged period of time or if
it is only driven short distances.
To keep the start battery in good condition,
drive the vehicle at least 15 minutes a week or
connect the battery to a battery charger with
automatic maintenance charging. A starter
battery that is always kept fully charged has
the maximum service life.
Location
The start battery is located in the cargo compart- The start battery is located in the cargo compart-
ment. ment.
The start battery is located in the trunk.
The start battery is located in the cargo compart- The start battery is located in the engine compart-
ment. ment.
704
Specifications for start battery

Battery type H7 AGM H8 AGM
Voltage (V) 12 12
Cold start capacityA - CCAB (A) 800 850
Dimensions, L×W×H 315×175×190 mm (12.4×6.9×7.5 inches) 353×175×190 mm (13.9×6.9×7.5 inches)

Capacity (Ah) 80 95
A According to EN standard.
B Cold Cranking Amperes.
Battery type H6 AGM

Voltage (V) 12
Cold start capacityA - CCAB (A) 760
Dimensions, L×W×H 278×175×190 mm (10.9×6.9×7.5 inches)

Capacity (Ah) 70
Battery type H8 AGM

Voltage (V) 12
}}
705
|| Battery type H8 AGM

Capacity (Ah) 95
Related information
• Battery symbols (p. 717)
• Batteries and power supply (p. 701)
• Jump starting using another battery
(p. 501)
• Jump starting using another battery
(p. 503)
• Reset procedure for pinch protection
(p. 167)
• Recycling of batteries (p. 717)
706
Support battery
The vehicle is equipped with a support bat-
tery that helps during the Start/Stop func-
tion's start sequence.
The battery is either a 12 V battery or, if the
vehicle is a mild hybrid*, a 48 V battery that
also enables regenerative braking while driv-
ing.
Location
The 12 V support battery is located in the engine Mild hybrid vehicles have a 48 V support battery
compartment. located under the cargo compartment. The battery
and the box around it may only be handled by author-
ized workshop personnel.
The 12 V support battery is located in the engine

compartment.
The 12 V support battery is located in the engine

compartment.
Mild hybrid vehicles have a 48 V support battery
under the cargo compartment. The battery may only
be handled by authorized workshop personnel.
}}
|| any questions or concerns, consult a work- WARNING

shop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended. Mild hybrid vehicles have components that
work with 48 V voltage, which can be dan-
CAUTION components that are not clearly described
in the Owner's Manual.
If replacing the 12 V battery, make sure you
replace it with a battery of the same size, • Never use a 48 V support battery to
cold start capacity and type as the original jump-start the vehicle.
battery. Volvo recommends having an • External electrical equipment may not
authorized Volvo workshop change batter- under any circumstance be connected
ies. to the 48 V battery.
Mild hybrid vehicles have a 48 V support battery • Only a workshop may replace or per-
under the cargo compartment. The battery may only form service on the 48 V battery – an
be handled by authorized workshop personnel.
Maintenance of support battery mended.
The support battery does not normally require
more service than the start battery. If you have
Specifications for support battery

Battery type AGM
Voltage (V) 12

Capacity (Ah) 10
708
If the vehicle is a mild hybrid*, the support bat-

tery is a 48 V lithium-ion battery.
Related information
• Start/Stop function (p. 480)
Hybrid battery
The hybrid battery powers the vehicle's elec-
tric motor and is charged via the vehicle's
charging socket.
In addition to electric propulsion, the hybrid
battery is also used to start the gasoline
engine. The vehicle can therefore not be
started if the battery has for any reason
become discharged. To charge the hybrid bat-
tery, the vehicle's smaller 12 V battery must
also have sufficient charge to power the vehi-
cle's electrical system and start charging.
WARNING CAUTION
Hybrid battery replacement may only be Filling the hybrid battery coolant should
performed by a workshop – an authorized only be performed by a workshop – an
Volvo workshop is recommended. authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Hybrid battery service life and
capacity Specifications for hybrid battery
The capacity of the hybrid battery decreases Type: Lithium-ion
with age and use, which could result in
increased use of the combustion engine and Power reserve: 18.8 kWh
thereby higher fuel consumption and reduced
Related information
electric motor range.
Coolant (p. 712)
The hybrid battery's cooling system has its • Hybrid battery recommendations
own expansion tank. (p. 713)
710
• Electric vehicle charging via wall outlet High-voltage battery Location of high-voltage battery
(p. 426) The vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage
• Hybrid vehicle charging via wall outlet battery for electric propulsion, which is
(p. 429) located underneath the vehicle. The battery
and the high-voltage system work with much
higher voltage than the vehicle's ordinary
• Start battery (p. 703) electrical system.
• Recycling of batteries (p. 717) Only authorized workshop personnel may han-
dle high-voltage components.
If the high-voltage battery is discharged, it will
not be possible to drive the vehicle. To charge
the battery, the vehicle's smaller 12 V battery
must also have sufficient charge to power the
vehicle's electrical system and start charging.
WARNING
High-voltage battery replacement may only
be performed by a workshop – an author-
ized Volvo workshop is recommended.
High-voltage battery service life and

capacity
The capacity of the high-voltage battery
decreases with age and use, which could
result in decreased range.
}}
711
|| CAUTION High-voltage battery Low charge level

recommendations
Follow the recommendations for high-volt-
age battery handling to optimize its life-
Some circumstances can lead to damage to CAUTION
the high-voltage battery and shorten its life-
time and performance. The high-voltage battery could be severely
time. These recommendations are designed
damaged if it is not recharged after becom-
to help ensure a long lifetime for the high-
ing completely discharged. Because some
High-voltage battery specifications voltage battery and good performance when
consumption and natural battery discharge
Type: Lithium-ion driving.
occur even when the vehicle is not being
The power reserve depends on the version. Charging used, the charge level can drop to 0% if
Recharge Twin: 78 kWh When time and opportunity allow, choose AC the vehicle is left unplugged with a low
charging9 rather than DC rapid charging10. AC charge level.
Recharge: 69 kWh
charging is gentler on the high-voltage bat-
Related information tery, particularly in the case of regular charg- If the charge level is under 20%, charging is
• Batteries and power supply (p. 701) ing. always recommended so as to not risk dis-
charging the battery completely.
• Electric vehicle charging via wall outlet High charge level
(p. 426) Avoid charging the vehicle to 100% unless Long-term parking
• Hybrid vehicle charging via wall outlet the entire range is needed for the trip. To minimize the risk of battery damage during
(p. 429) The battery can be damaged by maintaining a long-term parking (longer than one month), a
very high charge level for a long period of time. charge level of 40-60% is recommended.
• Coolant (p. 698)
To help prevent damage, avoid leaving the • If the charge level is higher – drive the
vehicle plugged in for charging to more than
(p. 712) vehicle until the charge level is lower.
the recommended charge level, which is
• Hybrid battery recommendations shown in the center display.
• If the charge level is lower – charge the
(p. 713) vehicle.
If you plan to park the vehicle for longer than
three months, continuous charging is recom-
mended.
9 AC is also called alternating current.

10 DC is also called direct current.
712
Check the charge level of the vehicle regularly until the battery warms up again. Plug in the Hybrid battery recommendations
and ensure that it is charging properly. vehicle for charging and use preconditioning Some circumstances can lead to damage to
to avoid driving with reduced performance. the hybrid battery and shorten its lifetime.
Parking in warm climates The vehicle can then warm up the battery These recommendations are designed to help
before driving without the charge level and ensure a long lifetime for the hybrid battery
CAUTION range being decreased. and good performance when driving.
Avoid exposing the vehicle to extreme tem- Plug in the vehicle for charging if you plan to
peratures. If there is a risk of temperatures park it for longer than 24 hours when the
Long-term parking
reaching about 55 °C (131 °F), parking for The recommended charge level for long-term
ambient temperature is under -30 °C (-22 °F).
longer than 24 hours should be avoided parking (longer than 3 months) is 25-50%.
It is not harmful to drive the vehicle when it
completely as this could seriously damage Regularly check the charge level in the instru-
indicates that performance is reduced due to
the battery. ment panel.
low temperatures.
• If the charge level is higher – drive the
High temperatures can damage the high-volt- Related information vehicle until it reaches the recommended
age battery, especially if it is exposed to these • Electric vehicle charging (p. 408) level.
temperatures for a long period of time. If pos- • Hybrid vehicle charging (p. 410)
sible, always plug in the vehicle for charging in
• If the charge level is lower – charge the
temperatures higher than 30 °C (86 °F). The
• Battery gauge (p. 104) vehicle to the recommended level.
vehicle can actively cool the battery while it is • High-voltage battery (p. 711) Low charge level
parked, but this consumes current and causes • Electric vehicle charging via wall outlet
the charge level to drop. If the vehicle is (p. 426) CAUTION
charged while it is parked, the battery can be
cooled without being discharged.
The hybrid battery could be severely dam-
(p. 429)
aged if it is not recharged after becoming
If possible, park in the shade if the outdoor • Charging in the vehicle's center display completely discharged.
temperature is high. Strong sunlight in combi- (p. 421)
nation with high outdoor temperatures can
cause the vehicle and the high-voltage battery
to become very warm.
Parking in cold climates

If the temperature of the high-voltage battery
is low, its performance is temporarily reduced
}}
713
|| Parking in warm climates
CAUTION
Avoid exposing the vehicle to extreme tem-
peratures. If there is a risk of temperatures
reaching about 55 °C (131 °F), parking for
longer than 24 hours should be avoided
completely as this could seriously damage
the battery.
NOTE
Store the vehicle in a cool place and avoid
extreme temperatures during long-term
storage to minimize the risk of damage to
the battery. Choose a storage area indoors
or in shade, depending on where the tem-
perature is lowest, especially in warm cli-
mates.
Related information
(p. 426)
(p. 429)
714
12 V battery WARNING 12 V battery service life and capacity

The 12 V battery powers the vehicle's primary The service life of the battery is influenced by a
If the 12 V battery is disconnected, the number of factors, including the number of
electrical system, which includes most of the function for automatic opening and closing
electrical equipment. However, the high-volt- must be reset to function correctly. A reset discharges and climate conditions. If the vehi-
age battery is used for propulsion with the is required in order for the pinch protection cle has not been charged for a prolonged
electric motor. to work. period of time, the battery's charge level
The battery is dimensioned to power the elec- decreases due to self-discharge. If the battery
trical systems and functions specific to this becomes discharged too many times, its serv-
vehicle model. Under normal conditions, it is WARNING ice life will be shortened. A 12 V battery that is
kept charged by the larger high-voltage bat- • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen always kept fully charged has the maximum
tery. gas, which is very explosive. A spark service life.
caused by an incorrectly connected
Battery handling jumper cable could be enough to make
Location
• Never disconnect the battery while the the battery explode.
vehicle is running.
• The battery contains sulfuric acid,
• Make sure the cables to the battery are which could cause serious burn inju-
correctly connected and the clamps are ries.
securely tightened.
• If contact with eyes, skin or clothing
• If the battery is kept in place with a strap, occurs, flush the affected area immedi-
make sure that it is always securely tight- ately with water. Obtain medical help
ened. immediately if eyes are affected.
• Never smoke near the battery.
CAUTION
If replacing the battery, make sure you
replace it with a battery of the same size, WARNING
cold start capacity and type as the original PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery
battery (see the decal on the battery). posts, terminals, and related accessories
Volvo recommends having an authorized contain lead and lead compounds, chemi-
Volvo workshop change batteries. cals known to the state of California to
hands after handling.
}}
715
||
12 V battery specifications
Battery type H6 AGM
Voltage (V) 12
Dimensions, L×W×H 277.7×174.4×188.5 mm (10.9×6.9×7.4 inches)

Capacity (Ah) 70
Related information • Jump starting using another battery

• Battery symbols (p. 717) (p. 503)
• Batteries and power supply (p. 701) • High-voltage battery (p. 711)
• Jump starting using another battery • Reset procedure for pinch protection
(p. 501) (p. 167)
716
Battery symbols Recycling of batteries

There are warning symbols and information Batteries must be recycled in an environmen-
on the batteries. Avoid smoking, open tally sound manner at the end of their service
flames, and/or sparks. life.
Consult a workshop if you are uncertain of
how to dispose of this type of waste ‒ an
Wear protective goggles. authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
48 V batteries in mild hybrid vehicles* may
only be handled by authorized workshop per-
Risk of explosion. sonnel.
See the Owner's Manual how to dispose of this type of waste ‒ an
for additional information. authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Only authorized workshop personnel may han-
dle hybrid batteries.
Recycle properly.
how to dispose of this type of waste ‒ an
Keep batteries away from authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
children. Only authorized workshop personnel may han-
Related information dle high-voltage batteries.
• 12 V battery (p. 715) Related information
Batteries contain corro- • Support battery (p. 707)
sive acid. • Hybrid battery (p. 710)
Fuses and fuseboxes same fuse is repeatedly overloaded, there may Location of fuseboxes
Electrical functions and components are pro- be a problem with the component. Volvo rec-
tected by a number of fuses in order to pro- ommends contacting an authorized Volvo
tect the vehicle's electrical system from dam- workshop to have the component checked.
age by short circuiting or overloading. Fuses
Location of fuseboxes
are located in the vehicle's fuse boxes.
WARNING
Never replace a fuse with a foreign object
or a fuse with higher amperage. This could
damage the electrical system and lead to
fire.
Contact an authorized Volvo workshop for
assistance replacing fuses not described in
the Owner's Manual.
Engine compartment
Under the left front seat

WARNING
Orange wiring may only be handled by The illustration is generic - appearance may vary Location of fuseboxes
qualified personnel. according to vehicle model.
Engine compartment
WARNING
A number of electrical components in Twin Under the glove compartment
Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles use high-
voltage current and can be extremely dan- Trunk/cargo compartment
gerous if handled incorrectly.
described in the vehicle's Owner's Manual.
If any electrical component or function is not

responding, the component's fuse may be
overloaded and must then be replaced. If the
718
Under the hood • Fuses under the glove compartment Replacing fuses
(p. 749) An overloaded fuse needs to be replaced to
Under the glove compartment • Fuses under the left front seat (p. 756) restore function to the electrical component it
protects.
• Fuses under the glove compartment
Location of fuseboxes (p. 762) 1. Locate the correct fuse in the fuse dia-
grams for the different fuse boxes.
2. Pull out the fuse and examine it from the
side to determine if the curved metal wire
in the fuse is intact.
3. If the wire is broken, replace the fuse with
a new fuse of the same color and amper-
age.
NOTE
Some fuse boxes contain special pliers to
make it easier to grip the fuse.
Under the hood
WARNING
Under the glove compartment
Never replace a fuse with a foreign object
or a fuse with higher amperage. This could
Related information damage the electrical system and lead to
• Replacing fuses (p. 719) fire.
• Fuses in the trunk (p. 770) Contact an authorized Volvo workshop for
• Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 775) assistance replacing fuses not described in
the Owner's Manual.
• Fuses in the engine compartment
(p. 728)
(p. 734)
}}
719
|| WARNING
Contact an authorized Volvo workshop for
assistance replacing fuses not described in
the Owner's Manual.
Related information
• Fuses in the trunk (p. 770)
• Fuses in the cargo compartment
(p. 775)
(p. 728)
(p. 734)
(p. 749)
• Fuses under the left front seat (p. 756)
(p. 762)
720
Fuses under the hood

The fuses under the hood help protect electri-
cal components such as motor and brake
functions.
}}
721
||
To access fuses under the hood, a number of Special pliers are provided on the inside of the There are also spaces for several extra fuses in
panels around the storage compartment must cover to assist in changing blown fuses. the fusebox.
be removed.
722
CAUTION completely, depending on how the vehicle is

Positions equipped.
Only remove the panels around the storage The location of the fuses is shown on the
compartment under the hood if this If a position has several table values, this is
inside of the cover. Functions and compo-
requirement is clearly stated in the instruc- due to variations in equipment level. If this is
nents in the fuse table cover several different
tions in the Owner's Manual. Contact a the case, follow the value on the replaced
models and engine variants. Therefore, a
workshop if you experience any problems fuse. In the event of uncertainty, contact a
described fuse may apply to fewer compo-
or maintenance is required – an authorized workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is
nents than those in the table, or be missing
Volvo workshop is recommended. recommended.
Function Ampere Type

Dual USB ports in tunnel console, rear* 7.5 Micro
12 V outlet front 15 Micro
– – Micro
12 V outlet in trunk/cargo compartment* 15 Micro
Engine control module 10 Micro
Engine cooling valve group 15 Micro
Battery cooling valve 5 Micro
Spoiler damper control module 10 Micro

Cooler damper control module
– – Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
}}
|| Function Ampere Type

Headlight, right 20 Micro
Headlight, left 20 Micro
Collision module (SRS) 5 Micro

Occupant weight sensor (OWS)
Accelerator pedal sensor 5 Micro
Supplied when the vehicle's electrical system is on: engine control module, transmission components, electri- 5 Micro
cal power steering, central electrical module, brake system control module
Exterior sound module 5 Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
Lighting, rear 10
Internal relay windings 5 Micro
– – Micro
Brake pedal sensor 5 Micro
Calculation module 5 Micro
High-voltage battery control module 5 Micro
– – Micro
724

Charge module 5 Micro
Converter, front electric motor 5 Micro
Horn (honk) 20 Micro
Alarm siren* 5 Micro
Wipers 30 MCaseA
– – MCase (slotted)A
Brake control module 30 MCaseA
– – MCaseA
Headlights 30 MCaseA
– – MCaseA
– – MCaseA
Towbar* control module 25 MCaseA
Towbar* control module 40 MCase (slotted)A
– – MCaseA
}}

Exterior heat exchanger* 5 Micro
A/C compressor control module 5 Micro

High-voltage heater control module
Electric expansion valve control module
Monitoring unit
High-voltage battery control module 15 Micro
Converter, front and rear electric motor
High-voltage battery coolant pump 20 Micro
Electric drive system coolant pump 20 Micro
– – MCaseA
– – Micro

A This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
• Replacing fuses (p. 719)
(p. 749)
(p. 762)
• Removing panels under the hood (p. 690)
727
Fuses in the engine compartment

The fuses in the engine compartment help
protect electrical components such as engine
and brake functions.
728
There are spaces for several extra fuses in the models and engine variants. Therefore, a If a position has several values in the table, the
fuse box. described fuse may apply to fewer compo- value depends on variations in equipment
nents than those in the table, or be missing level. If this is the case, follow the value on the
Positions completely, depending on how the vehicle is replaced fuse. In the event of uncertainty, con-
The location of the fuses is shown on the equipped. tact a workshop. An authorized Volvo work-
inside of the cover. Functions and compo- shop is recommended.

USB port in tunnel console, rear* 5 Micro
12 V outlet tunnel console, front 15 Micro
– – Micro
Spark plug/ignition coils 15 Micro

Fuel evaporation valve (EVAP)
}}

Engine oil pump solenoid
A/C compressor solenoid
Fuel leakage control pump
Engine component group (Components related to engine function, including turbo/compressor and cooling/
temperature regulation of driveline. Content depends on engine variant.)
Heated oxygen sensor group 15 Micro
– – Micro
Coolant pump 20 Micro
Airbags 5 Micro
Fed when ignition is on: engine control module, transmission components, electrical power steering, central elec- 5 Micro
trical module, brake system control module
Auxiliary electric heater* 5 Micro
Firewall module diagnostic port
– – Micro

– – Micro
– – Micro
Brake pedal sensor 5 Micro
Transmission actuator 25 Micro

Clutch actuator
Transmission control module 15 Micro
Clutch actuator 25 Micro
Battery charger control module 5 Micro
Hybrid battery control module 5 Micro

High-voltage converter high-voltage generator
Wipers 30 MCase+A
Brake system control module (valves, parking brake) 40 MCase+ HTA
Brake system control module (ABS pump) 40 MCase+ HTA
}}

Brake Assist System module 40 MCase+ HTA
Transmission actuator 30 MCase+A

Transmission control module
Transmission control module 30 MCase+A
Headlights 30 MCase+A
Brake assist control module 30 MCase+A
Starter solenoid 30 MCase+A
Towbar* control module 25 MCase+A
Towbar* control module 40 MCase+ HTA
– – MCase+ HTA
Power driver seat* 20 MCase+A
– – MCaseA
– – Micro
Air conditioning 5 Micro

Coolant heating control module
High-voltage converter high-voltage generator

Shut-off valve, hybrid battery cooling 15 Micro
Hybrid battery coolant pump
– – MCase+A
– – MCase+ HTA
– – MCase+ HTA
Voltage check support battery 5 Micro

Related information
• Fuses in the cargo compartment
(p. 775)
(p. 749)
(p. 762)
733
Fuses in the engine compartment

The fuses in the engine compartment protect
functions connected to the engine, brake sys-
tem, etc.
734
}}
735
||
736
Special pliers are provided on the inside of the Positions models and engine variants. Therefore, a
cover to assist in changing blown fuses. The location of the fuses is shown on the described fuse may apply to fewer compo-
inside of the cover. Functions and components than those in the table, or be missing
There are also spaces for several extra fuses in
the fusebox. nents in the fuse table cover several different
}}
737
|| completely, depending on how the vehicle is the case, follow the value on the replaced
equipped. fuse. In the event of uncertainty, contact a
workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is
If a position has several table values, this is
recommended.
due to variations in equipment level. If this is

– – Micro
– – Micro
Turbo charge pressure module 15 Micro

Heated oxygen sensor group
Spark plug/ignition coils (gasoline) 15 Micro
Exhaust sensor group, diesel particulates/nitrous oxides (diesel)
Engine oil pump solenoid 15 Micro
Heated oxygen sensor group
Air conditioning compressor solenoid
Oil level and temperature sensors 7.5 Micro
Glow plug control module (diesel)
Engine component group 1 (Components related to engine function, including turbo/compressor. Content depends on
engine variant).
Throttle control module
Engine component group 2 (Components related to engine function, including turbo/compressor. Content depends on
engine variant).
738

Fuel evaporation pump (EVAP) 10 Micro
Glow plug control module (diesel) 10 Micro

Engine component group 3 (Components related to engine function, including turbo/compressor and cooling/tempera-
ture regulation of driveline. Content depends on engine variant.)
Relay windings power pulse (PowerPulse) (diesel)
Coolant changeover valve
Coolant pump 15 Micro
Starter motor 40 MCaseA
Starter motor Shunt MCaseA
Fuel filter heater (diesel) 30 MCaseA

– –
Clutch actuator 1 25 MCaseA
– –
}}
739

Extra fuse 7.5 Micro
Extra fuse 10 Micro
Extra fuse 15 Micro

– –
USB port in tunnel console, rear 7.5 Micro
12 V outlet in tunnel console, rear* 15 Micro

– –
– – Micro

– –
Heated windshield*, left side Shunt MCaseA
Heated windshield*, left side 40 MCaseA
Headlight washers* 25 MCaseA

Washer fluid pump, front 25 MCaseA
Electric gear selector 15 Micro
Brake system control module (valves, parking brake) 30 MCaseA
Wipers 30 MCaseA
– – MCaseA
Washer fluid pump, rear 25
Heated windshield*, right side 40 MCaseA
– – MCaseA
Parking heater* 20
– – MCaseA
Clutch actuator 2 25 MCaseA

– –
Heated windshield*, right side Shunt MCaseA
Fed when ignition is on: engine control module, transmission components, electrical power steering, central electrical 5 Micro
module, brake system control module
Radar, front 5 Micro
}}

Alcohol interlock* 5 Micro

– –
Battery connection control module 5 Micro



– – Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
Transmission actuator control module 5 Micro
Coolant heating control module 5 Micro
Air conditioning 5 Micro

High-voltage converter high-voltage generator/starter motor
– – Micro
– – Micro

High-voltage converter high-voltage generator/starter motor
Charge module 5 Micro
Shut-off valve, hybrid battery cooling 15 Micro

Hybrid battery coolant pump
Hybrid components cooling fan 25 MCaseA
– – MCaseA
– – MCaseA
– – MCaseA
– – Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
}}
743

– – Micro
USB port in tunnel console, rear 7.5 Micro
– – Micro
12 V outlet in tunnel console, rear 15
Extra fuse 5 Micro
Extra fuse 10 Micro
Heated windshield*, left side Shunt MCaseA
Heated windshield*, left side 40 MCaseA
Windshield washer 25 MCaseA
– – Micro

Brake system control module (valves, parking brake) 30 MCaseA
Wipers 30 MCaseA
– – MCaseA
Rear window washer 25
Heated windshield*, right side 40 MCaseA
Parking heater* 20 MCaseA

– –
– – MCaseA
– – MCaseA
Heated windshield*, right side Shunt MCaseA
Fed when ignition is on: Engine control module, transmission components, electrical power steering, central electrical 5 Micro
module
Exterior vehicle sound (certain markets) 5 Micro

– –
– – Micro
}}


Gear selector control module
– – Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro

Throttle control module
Compressor actuator switch
Engine component group 1 (Components related to engine function, including turbo/compressor. Content depends on 10 Micro
engine variant).
Engine component group 2 (Components related to engine function, including turbo. Content depends on engine var- 7.5 Micro
iant.)
Air conditioning changeover valve
746

– – Micro
Heated oxygen sensor 15 Micro
Engine oil pump solenoid 15 Micro

Heated oxygen sensors
Air conditioning compressor solenoid
– – Micro
Spark plug/ignition coils 15 Micro
– – MCaseA
– – MCaseA
Transmission oil pump control module 30 MCaseA
– – MCaseA
Transmission actuator 25 MCaseA
– – MCaseA
}}
747

– – MCaseA
– – MCaseA
Related information
748
Fuses under the glove

compartment
The fuses in the fuse box under the glove
compartment protect electrical components
such as outlets, displays and door modules.
}}
749
||
The fuse box is located behind the floor mat/panel.

There are also spaces for several extra fuses in Positions nents in the fuse table cover several different
the fusebox under the hood. The location of the fuses is shown on the models and engine variants. Therefore, a
inside of the cover. Functions and compo- described fuse may apply to fewer compo-
750
nents than those in the table, or be missing If a position has several table values, this is fuse. In the event of uncertainty, contact a
completely, depending on how the vehicle is due to variations in equipment level. If this is workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is
equipped. the case, follow the value on the replaced recommended.

Infotainment control module (amplifier) 40 MCase (slotted)A
Electric Module A 40 MCase (slotted)A
Electric Module B 40 MCase (slotted)A
Climate system blower, front 40 MCase (slotted)A
Power tailgate 25 MCaseA
Power seat*, left 20 MCaseA
Power seat*, right 20 MCaseA
– – MCaseA
Door module, right side, rear 20 Micro
Door module, left side, rear 20 Micro
Door module, left side, front 20 Micro
Rear lighting 15 Micro
Door module, right side, front 20 Micro
Seat heating, rear* 15 Micro
}}

Safety module (ASDM) 5 Micro
Converter, rear electric motors
Sun sensor 5 Micro
– – Micro
Climate system control module 7.5 Micro
Interior movement sensors* 5 Micro
Instrument panel 5 Micro
Center console keypad 5 Micro
Steering wheel module 5 Micro
Electronic shifting module 5 Micro

Parking brake
Center display 5 Micro
Control module for Internet-connected vehicle 5 Micro

Control module for Connect
Antenna module (TCAM) 5 Micro
Relay coils 5 Micro
Opening trunk/tailgate with foot movement* 5 Micro

Infotainment control module 15 Micro
Diagnostics port 10 Micro
– – Micro
Folding head restraint, left side, rear 15 Micro
Folding head restraint, right side, rear 15 Micro
Heated rear window 30 MCaseA
Seat belt tensioner, left side 40 MCase (slotted)A
Seat belt tensioner, right side 40 MCase (slotted)A
– – Micro
– – Micro
Coolant pump 7.5 Micro
Heated steering wheel module* 15 Micro
– – Micro
Windshield and tailgate window washers 25 MCaseA
– – MCaseA
– – MCaseA
}}

– – Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
Seat belt tensioners 5 Micro
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* 5 Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
Radar control module, front 5 Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
Prepared fuse, Special Edition vehicle 5 Micro
Rear wiper 15 Micro
Overhead console indicator (SRS) 5 Micro

Wake-up, electronic shifting mode
360° Park Assist Camera*
Overhead console, panoramic roof* 20 Micro

Passenger compartment lighting 7.5 Micro
Rearview mirror auto-dimming
Rain and light sensors
Control panels in rear doors and cargo compartment
Transponder for road tax
Wireless charging pad* 5 Micro
Front camera 5 Micro
– – Micro
USB port 5 Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
Related information
• Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 728)
• Troubleshooting fuses in the event of cen-
ter display problems (p. 783)
Fuses under the left front seat

Fuses under the left front seat provide pro-
tection for e.g. electrical outlets, displays and
door modules.
756
There are spaces for several extra fuses in the models and engine variants. Therefore, a If a position has several values in the table, the
distribution box in the engine compartment. described fuse may apply to fewer compo- value depends on variations in equipment
nents than those in the table, or be missing level. If this is the case, follow the value on the
Positions completely, depending on how the vehicle is replaced fuse. In the event of uncertainty, con-
The location of the fuses is shown on the equipped. tact a workshop. An authorized Volvo work-
inside of the cover. Functions and compo- shop is recommended.

Audio control module 40 MCase+ HTA
Central Electric Module A: Sensors, radar sensors, power seats* 40 MCase+ HTA
Central Electric Module B: Sensors, radar sensors, power seats* 40 MCase+ HTA
Climate system blower module (front) 40 MCase+ HTA
Power tailgate* 25 MCase+A
Power seat*, right 20 MCase+A
Parking heater* 25 MCase+A
– – MCase+A
Door module, right side, rear 20 Micro
Door module, left side, front 20 Micro
Safety module (ASDM) 5 Micro
Door module, right side, front 20 Micro

}}

Seat heating, rear* 15 Micro
48 V battery control module 5 Micro
Sun sensor 5 Micro
– – Micro
Climate system control module 7.5 Micro
Interior movement sensors* 5 Micro
Center console buttons 5 Micro
Start knob module 5 Micro

Electronic shifting module
Electronic parking brake
Connected services control module 5 Micro
Multiband antenna module 5 Micro

Antenna module telematics
Relay coils 5 Micro

Opening tailgate with foot movement* 5 Micro
Sensus control module 15 Micro

TV*
OBD-II diagnostic port 10 Micro
– – Micro
Lock motor for rear seat head restraint, left side 15 Micro
Lock motor for rear seat head restraint, right side 15 Micro
Heated rear window 30 MCase+A
Seat belt tensioner, left 40 MCase+ HTA
Seat belt tensioner, right 40 MCase+ HTA
Humidity sensor 5 Micro

48 V generator and voltage converter
Fuel pump control module 20 Micro
Heated steering wheel* 15 Micro
Air humidity sensors 5 Micro

Air particulate matter sensor
Headlight washers* 25 MCase+A
}}

Windshield and tailgate window washers 25 MCase+A
– – MCaseA
– – MCaseA
– – Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
Seat belt tensioners 5 Micro
– – Micro
All Wheel Drive (AWD) control module* 15 Micro
Exhaust system 5 Micro
Park Assist Camera* 5 Micro
– – Micro
Control module for airbags and seat belt tensioners 5 Micro
Rear window wiper 15 Micro

Roof console for panoramic roof* 20 Micro
– – Micro
Courtesy lighting 7.5 Micro

Rearview mirror auto-dim*
Rain and light sensor*
Control panels in rear doors and cargo compartment
Wireless phone charger* 5 Micro
Driver support functions control module 5 Micro
– – Micro
USB port 5 Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
Related information • Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 734)

• Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 775)
Fuses under the glove

compartment
The fuses in the fuse box under the glove
compartment protect electrical components
such as outlets, displays and door modules.
762
The fuse box is located behind the floor mat/side panel.
}}
763
||
The fuse box is located behind the floor mat/side panel.

There are spaces for several extra fuses in the Positions nents in the fuse table cover several different
distribution box in the engine compartment. The location of the fuses is shown on the models and engine variants. Therefore, a
inside of the cover. Functions and compo- described fuse may apply to fewer compo-
764
nents than those in the table, or be missing If a position has several table values, this is fuse. In the event of uncertainty, contact a
completely, depending on how the vehicle is due to variations in equipment level. If this is workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is
equipped. the case, follow the value on the replaced recommended.

48 V battery control module 10 Micro
– – MCaseA
– – Micro
Movement sensor* 5 Micro
– – Micro
Center console keypad 5 Micro
Sun sensor 5 Micro

Toll collection transponder
– – Micro
Infotainment system 15 Micro
Control module, start knob and parking brake 5 Micro
Heated steering wheel* 15 Micro
Air particulate matter sensor (APMS) 5 Micro

}}

– – Micro
– – Micro
Rear lighting control module 15 Micro

– –
Climate system control module 10 Micro
– – Micro
OBD-II diagnostic port 10 Micro
Climate system blower module, front 40 MCaseA
USB hub 5 Micro
Instrument lighting 7.5 Micro

Passenger compartment lighting
Rearview mirror auto-dimming*
Rain and light sensors*
Power front seats*
Rear door control panels
Climate system blower module
Ionizer
Keypad in tunnel console, rear seat footwell*

Camera, front* 5 Micro
Overhead console* 20 Micro
Head-up display* 5 Micro
Passenger compartment lighting 5 Micro
Wireless charging pad* 5 Micro
Overhead console display 5 Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
Fuse box trunk/cargo compartment 10 Micro

Electric motor, rear
Control module for Internet-connected vehicle 5 Micro
Volvo Services control module
– – Micro
Infotainment control module (amplifier) 40 MCaseA
Climate system blower module, rear* 40 MCaseA

– –
Antenna module (TCAM) 5 Micro
}}

Seat comfort control module, front* 5 Micro

– –
– – Micro
Sun curtain control module, rear 15
Rear window wiper
Fuel pump control module 15 Micro
Relay windings for transmission oil pump 5 Micro

48 V converter
Engine start module
Driver support functions control module (active safety) 5 Micro
Driver's seat heating 15 Micro
Front passenger's seat heating 15 Micro
Air cleaner 5 Micro
Power driver's seat* 20 Micro
Active suspension module* 20 Micro
Opening trunk/tailgate with foot movement* 5 Micro

– – MCaseA
– – Micro
Climate system blower module, rear 10
Power front passenger seat* 20 Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
Circuit breaker infotainment 15 Micro

Related information
Fuses in the trunk

The fuse box containing the trunk's fuses is
located behind a panel on the right-hand side.
The fuse box is located behind the panel on the right-hand side.
770
Special pliers are provided on the inside of the nents in the fuse table cover several different If a position has several table values, this is
cover to assist in changing blown fuses. models and engine variants. Therefore, a due to variations in equipment level. If this is
described fuse may apply to fewer compo- the case, follow the value on the replaced
There are spaces for several extra fuses in the
nents than those in the table, or be missing fuse. In the event of uncertainty, contact a
distribution box in the engine compartment.
completely, depending on how the vehicle is workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is
Positions equipped. recommended.
The location of the fuses is shown on the
inside of the cover. Functions and compo-

Central electrical module 40 MCaseA
Compressor for pneumatic suspension* 40 MCaseA

– –
Lock motor for rear seat backrest, right side 15 MCaseA
– – MCaseA
Lock motor for rear seat backrest, left side 15 MCaseA
Door module, right side, rear 20 MCaseA
Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 30 MCaseA

– –
Power trunk release* 25 MCaseA
– –
Door module, right side, front 20 MCaseA
}}

– –
Seat belt tensioner, right 40 MCaseA
Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 15 Micro

– –
– – Micro

– –
Accessory module 40
Door module, left side, front 20 MCaseA
Seat belt tensioner, left 40 MCaseA
Rear lighting (backup) 10 Micro

– –
– – Micro

Position prepared for Special Edition vehicles 5 Micro
– – Micro
Feed when ignition is on 10
– – Micro
– – Micro
Heated rear seat, left* 15 Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro
Seat belt tensioner, left 5 Micro

Seat belt tensioner, right
Actuator, exhaust system (gasoline) 5 Micro
– – Micro
All Wheel Drive (AWD)* control module 15 Micro
Heated rear seat, right* 15 Micro
– – MCaseA
}}
(p. 749)
(p. 762)
774
Fuses in the cargo compartment

The fuses in the cargo compartment help pro-
tect electrical components such as the power
seats*, airbags and seat belt tensioners.
}}
||
776
}}
777
||
The fuse box is located under the storage compartment on the right-hand side.
Special pliers are provided on the inside of the There are also spaces for several extra fuses in Positions
cover to assist in changing blown fuses. the distribution box in the engine compart- The location of the fuses is shown on the
ment. inside of the cover. Functions and compo-
778
nents in the fuse table cover several different If a position has several table values, this is workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is
models and engine variants. Therefore, a due to variations in equipment level. If this is recommended.
described fuse may apply to fewer compo- the case, follow the value on the replaced
nents than those in the table, or be missing fuse. In the event of uncertainty, contact a
completely, depending on how the vehicle is
equipped.

Central electrical module 40 MCaseA

– –
Compressor for pneumatic suspension* 40 MCaseA
– –
Rear auxiliary electric heater, right-hand side* 30 MCaseA
– –
– – MCaseA
Rear auxiliary electric heater, left-hand side* 30 MCaseA

– –
– – MCaseA
Power tailgate* 25 MCaseA
}}

– –
Seat belt tensioner, right 40 MCaseA
– – Micro
– – Micro
– – Micro

Accessory module 40
Door module, left side, front 20 MCaseA
Seat belt tensioner, left 40 MCaseA
Rear lighting (backup) 10 Micro

– –
– – Micro
– – Micro

– – Micro
Feed when ignition is on 10
– – Micro
– – Micro
Heated rear seat, left* 15 Micro
– – Micro
USB port, cargo compartment 5 Micro

– –
Seat belt tensioner, left 5 Micro
Seat belt tensioner, right
Actuator, exhaust system 5 Micro
– – Micro
All Wheel Drive (AWD)* control module 15 Micro
Heated rear seat, right* 15 Micro
– – MCaseA
}}
782
Troubleshooting fuses in the event Replacing fuses

of center display problems 1. Refer to the fuse diagram to locate the
This section describes which fuses may need fuse.
to be replaced if the center display is not 2. Pull out the fuse and examine it from the
working. Fuse lists for other components and side to determine if the curved metal wire
functions are available in the Owner's Manual in the fuse is intact.
in the vehicle's center display, and on
volvocars.com/intl/support. 3. If the wire is broken, replace the fuse with
a new fuse of the same color and amper-
Important points to remember age.
If any electrical component or function is not
responding, its fuse may be overloaded. The WARNING
fuse must then be replaced in order to restore The fusebox is located under the left-side front seat.
functionality. If you experience repeated prob- • Never use a foreign object or a fuse
with a higher amperage than that
lems, you should contact a workshop – an
specified to replace a fuse. This could
authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
cause significant damage to the electri-
Fuses under the glove compartment cal system and lead to a fire.
• Contact an authorized Volvo workshop
for assistance replacing fuses not listed
in the Owner's Manual. If fuse replace-
ment is performed incorrectly, signifi-
cant damage can be caused to the
electrical system.
The fusebox is located behind the floor mat/panel. A

decal on the inside of the cover shows the location of
the fuses.
The fusebox is located behind the floor mat/panel. A

decal on the inside of the cover shows the location of
the fuses.
}}
783



Circuit breaker infotainment 15 Micro
Related information • Fuses under the glove compartment

• Complete Owner's Manual in the center (p. 762)
display (p. 19)
(p. 749)
784
Replacing bulbs NOTE NOTE

Bulb types vary depending on model and
For information on lights not mentioned in If the error message persists after the
equipment level. If a light bulb11 breaks, it can
the Owner's Manual, contact a Volvo defective bulb has been replaced, we rec-
be replaced by following the procedure
retailer or an authorized Volvo workshop. ommend a visit to an authorized Volvo
shown in the Owner's Manual.
workshop.
If you are experiencing problems with any
lights other than light bulbs, contact a work- WARNING
shop12. The vehicle must be switched off when NOTE
replacing bulbs. Exterior lighting such as headlights and
This vehicle does not have any replaceable
taillights may develop temporary conden-
light bulbs. Contact a workshop13 if you expe-
sation on the inside of the lens. This is nor-
rience any problems with the lighting. WARNING
mal, and all exterior lighting is designed to
This vehicle is equipped with only LED15 The vehicle electrical system must be in resist this. Condensation is normally ven-
lights, which means it does not have any ignition mode 0 when bulbs are replaced. ted out of the lamp housing once the light
replaceable bulbs. Contact a workshop14 if has been lit for some period of time.
you experience any problems with the light- CAUTION
ing. Related information
Never touch the bulb glass with your bare
This vehicle is equipped with LED lights front fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers • Location of exterior lights (p. 786)
and rear. The rear fog lights consist of bulbs vaporize in the heat and will leave a • Replacing rear turn signal bulbs (p. 787)
that can be replaced manually according to deposit on the reflector, which may dam-
the method described in the Owner's Man- • Replacing the brake light bulb (p. 789)
age it.
ual. • Replacing the rear fog light bulb (p. 790)
If there is a problem with an LED15 light, the • Bulb specifications (p. 790)
entire lamp unit will normally need to be
replaced.
11 Some vehicles do not have any light bulbs.

785
Location of exterior lights Daytime running lights/position lamps/ Rear bulbs

The vehicle's exterior lighting consists of sev- direction indicators (LED)
eral different bulbs. LED16 bulbs must be Pixel module* for high and low beams
replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo (LED)
workshop is recommended. Front fog light/cornering illumination*
(LED)
This vehicle does not have any replaceable
light bulbs. Contact a workshop17 if you expe- Front lights
rience any problems with the lighting.
Front lights
The front lighting consists entirely of LED
lights.
Front lights Brake light (LED)
Parking light (LED)
Backup light18
Parking light (LED)
High beams/low beams (LED) Turn signal (LED)
Side marker lights (LED) Fog light (LED)
Daytime running lights/position lamps/ Brake light ‒ central, high-mounted (LED)

direction indicators (LED)
Pixel module* for high and low beams
High beams/low beams (LED) (LED)
Side marker lights (LED) Front fog light/cornering illumination*
(LED)

18 Contact a workshop for replacement ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Replacing rear turn signal bulbs

The rear turn signal bulbs are located behind
the panel in the side of the cargo compart-
ment.
Brake light ‒ central, high-mounted (LED) Brake light ‒ central, high-mounted (LED)
Fog light Parking light (LED)
Parking light (LED) Backup light (LED)

1. Press in the top edge of the panel cover to
Turn signals Brake light (LED) remove it.
Brake lights Turn signals (LED) 2. Move aside the insulation to access the
support bridge.
Backup light (LED) Fog light
Related information
• Replacing bulbs (p. 785)
• Bulb specifications (p. 790)
}}
787
|| CAUTION
fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers
vaporize in the heat and will leave a
deposit on the reflector, which may dam-
age it.
Related information
• Location of exterior lights (p. 786)
• Replacing bulbs (p. 785)
3. Unscrew the spring screw by turning 4. Remove the gray bulb holder by turning it
counterclockwise, press the clips into the counterclockwise and pulling it out.
sides and remove the support bridge. It is 5. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and
simplest to leave one screw in place in the turning it counterclockwise.
support bridge.
6. Insert the new bulb by pressing it in and
turning it clockwise.
7. Put the panel back in place and turn it
clockwise.
8. Install the support bridge using the sup-
plied spring screw and make sure that the
clip is positioned correctly. Tighten the
spring screw until it stops, max. 2 Nm (1.5
ft lbs).
9. Reposition the insulation, hook the panel
and then press it back into place.
788
Replacing the brake light bulb Related information

The brake light bulbs are located behind the • Location of exterior lights (p. 786)
panel in the side of the cargo compartment. • Bulb specifications (p. 790)
3. Remove the black bulb holder by turning it

counterclockwise and pulling it out.
4. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and
1. Press in the top edge of the panel cover to turning it counterclockwise
remove it. 5. Insert the new bulb by pressing it in and
2. Move aside the insulation to access the turning it clockwise.
brake light bulb. 6. Put the panel back in place and turn it
clockwise.
7. Reposition the insulation, hook the panel
and then press it back into place.
CAUTION
fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers
vaporize in the heat and will leave a
deposit on the reflector, which may dam-
age it.
789
Replacing the rear fog light bulb 1. Remove the fog light unit on the driver's Bulb specifications
The rear fog light is located in the rear side by inserting a flat object (e.g. a Specifications for replaceable light bulbs.
bumper on the driver's side. kitchen knife or screwdriver) behind the
light kit's narrower short side and prying If you are experiencing problems with any
out the fog light unit. lights other than light bulbs, contact a work-
shop19. If there is a problem with an LED20
2. Unplug the connector. light, the entire lamp unit will normally need
3. Remove the bulb holder by turning it to be replaced.
counterclockwise and pulling it out. Function WA Type
4. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and
Rear turn signals 24 PY24W
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Insert the new bulb by pressing it in and Brake lights 21 H21W LL
turning it clockwise. Rear fog light 21 H21W LL
6. Put the panel back in place and turn it A Watt
clockwise.
7. Plug in the connector. Related information
8. Insert the hook on the wide part of the fog
light unit in the rear bumper and rotate the • Replacing bulbs (p. 785)
unit until the clips fasten into place.
Related information
The rear fog light is only located on the driver's side.

790
Cleaning the interior • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 794) Cleaning the center display
Use cleaning agents and car care products • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats Marks, stains, finger smudges etc. on the
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and (p. 794) center display may affect its performance and
treat stains immediately. It is important to readability. Clean the screen regularly with a
• Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 795)
vacuum before using a cleaning agent. microfiber cloth.
• Cleaning the leather steering wheel
CAUTION (p. 796)
• Some colored clothing (for example, • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
dark jeans and suede garments) may surfaces (p. 797)
stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
important to clean and treat these • Cleaning Microtech upholstery* (p. 795)
parts of the upholstery as soon as pos-
sible.
• Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, gasoline, mineral spirit or
concentrated alcohol to clean the inte-
rior as this can damage the upholstery
as well as other interior materials.
1. Turn off the center display by pressing and
• Never spray cleaning agent directly holding the Home button.
onto components that have electrical
buttons and controls. Wipe instead 2. Wipe the screen with a clean, dry micro-
with a damp cloth with cleaning agent. fiber cloth using small, circular motions. If
necessary, moisten the cloth slightly.
• Sharp objects and Velcro can damage
the car's textile upholstery. 3. Reactivate the display by pressing the
Home button briefly.
• Only use cleaning agent on the type of
material it is intended for.
CAUTION
Related information The microfiber cloth must be free of sand
• Cleaning the center display (p. 791) and dirt when cleaning the center display.
• Cleaning fabric upholstery and headliner
(p. 793)
}}
|| CAUTION Cleaning the instrument panel Cleaning the head-up display*

Carefully wipe the glass covering the head-up Carefully wipe the glass covering the head-up
When cleaning the center display, apply
display unit with a clean and dry microfiber display unit with a clean and dry microfiber
only light pressure to the screen. Pressing
cloth. If necessary, the cloth may be slightly cloth. If necessary, the cloth may be slightly
too hard could damage the screen.
moistened. moistened.
Never use cleaning agents. For difficult clean- Never use strong stain removers. For difficult
CAUTION ing conditions, a special cleaning agent can be cleaning conditions, a special cleaning agent
purchased at a Volvo retailer. can be purchased at a Volvo retailer.
Do not spray liquid or corrosive chemicals
directly onto the center display. Do not use Related information Related information
window cleaners, cleaning agents, aerosol • Instrument panel (p. 99) • Head-up display* (p. 145)
sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or
detergents that contain abrasives.
Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or
tissue paper, as these may scratch the cen-
ter display.
Related information
• Cleaning the interior (p. 791)
(p. 793)
• Cleaning the seat belt (p. 794)
• Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(p. 794)
(p. 796)
• Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
surfaces (p. 797)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and CAUTION • Cleaning the leather steering wheel
headliner (p. 796)
Always clean all of the upholstery, even if it
Use of textile cleaner is recommended when
only has isolated stains. This helps to pre- • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
cleaning textile and nubuck textile materials. surfaces (p. 797)
vent permanent water rings.
Clean as needed and treat stains immedi- • Cleaning Microtech upholstery* (p. 795)
ately.
CAUTION NOTE
Never scrape or rub a stain because this Do not remove the upholstery when clean-
may damage the upholstery. ing.
Cleaning the headliner

CAUTION
1. Carefully brush the headliner using a soft
Never use stain removers or strong sol- brush.
vents because these may damage the
2. Follow the instructions for the textile
upholstery.
cleaner.
3. Then use a soft, lint-free cloth to wipe the
Cleaning textile upholstery headliner.
1. Start by vacuuming the upholstery.
2. Follow the instructions for the textile CAUTION
cleaner.
Careless cleaning could damage the head-
3. When cleaning upholstery, a spray extrac- liner.
tion cleaner is recommended for sucking
up cleaning fluids and rinse water.
Related information
CAUTION
Certain dyed clothing (such as denim and
suede garments) may stain the upholstery. • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 794)
Difficult stains, like oil, can be difficult to • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
remove. (p. 794)
Cleaning the seat belt Cleaning textile floor and inlay WARNING
Use cleaning agents and car care products mats
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and Use of textile cleaner is recommended when
• Never use more than one inlay mat at a
time on the driver's floor. If any other
treat stains immediately. It is important to cleaning textile mats. Clean regularly and
type of floor mat is used, remove the
vacuum before using a cleaning agent. treat stains immediately. It is important to
original mat from the driver's seat floor
Use water and a synthetic soap solution. Spe- vacuum before using a cleaning agent.
cially designed textile cleaning agents are Remove the inlay mats to clean the floor mats
available for purchase at Volvo retailers. Make and inlay mats separately. Each inlay mat is
ment points in the floor. Make sure the
sure the belt is dry before it is retracted. secured into place with pins.
floor mat does not impede the move-
Related information 1. Remove the inlay mat by grasping the ment of the brake pedal or accelerator
• Cleaning the interior (p. 791) inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat pedal in any way, as this could be a
straight up. serious safety hazard.
2. Use a vacuum to remove dust and dirt. • Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-
(p. 793)
NOTE properly secured in the attachment
• Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats points in the floor to help ensure they
(p. 794) Do not swing or strike the inlay mats vio- cannot slide and become trapped
lently against another object to remove dirt under the pedals.
as this could damage the mats.
3. After vacuuming, a specially designed tex- • Cleaning the interior (p. 791)
• Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood tile cleaning agent should be used to
surfaces (p. 797) remove stains on floor mats. • Cleaning the center display (p. 791)
4. After cleaning, put the inlay mat back into

(p. 793)
place by pressing it in at each pin.
(p. 796)
• Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
surfaces (p. 797)
Cleaning leather upholstery* 2. Move the sponge in circular motions to Cleaning Microtech upholstery*
Use cleaning agents and car care products apply the foam to the stain. Volvo's Microtech upholstery is treated to
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the maintain its original appearance.
treat stains immediately. It is important to sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain Over time, sunlight, grease, dirt, etc. could
vacuum before using a cleaning agent. and do not rub. break down the protective layer, which could
result in scratches or cracking. Regular clean-
Volvo's leather upholstery* is treated to pro- 4. Dry the stain using a soft towel and let the ing and immediate treatment of stains are
tect its original appearance. Over time, sun- leather dry completely. required to preserve the qualities and color of
light, grease, dirt, etc. could break down the Protecting the leather upholstery the leather. Vacuuming is recommended
protective layer. This could result in scratches 1. Apply a small amount of leather protector before cleaning with cleaning agents.
and cracking. to a cloth and then apply the protector to Cleaning Microtech upholstery
Leather upholstery* is a natural product that the leather using light circular movements. 1. Vacuum the upholstery.
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over 2. Let it dry for approximately 20 minutes.
time. Regular cleaning and treatments are 2. Apply the cleaning agent (VCC interior
required to preserve the qualities and color of > Protecting the leather upholstery cleaner) to a damp sponge and squeeze it
the leather. Volvo offers a comprehensive makes it better able to withstand sun- until the cleaner foams.
product, Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes, for light's harmful UV rays.
3. Move the sponge in a circular motion over
cleaning and treating leather upholstery. Related information the stain. Dampen the stain thoroughly
When used as directed, it helps preserve the with the sponge. Let the sponge absorb
leather's protective coating. the stain and do not rub.
For optimal results, Volvo recommends clean- 4. Wipe with a soft cloth or towel and then
ing and applying protective cream one to four • Cleaning fabric upholstery and headliner
(p. 793) let the upholstery dry completely.
times a year (or more often as needed). Volvo
Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Volvo Leather • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 794) CAUTION
Softener 943 7429 are available for purchase • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
at Volvo retailers. Certain dark dyed clothing, such as denim
(p. 794)
or suede, may stain the Microtech uphols-
Cleaning the leather upholstery • Cleaning the leather steering wheel tery.
1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp (p. 796)
sponge and squeeze it until the cleaner • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
foams. surfaces (p. 797)
• Cleaning Microtech upholstery* (p. 795)
}}
|| NOTE Cleaning the leather steering Type 3 (dry dirt or dust)

wheel 1. Remove the dirt/dust using a soft brush.
Use an alcohol-free cleaning agent or
Use cleaning agents and car care products
Volvo's cleaning agent designed for interi- 2. Same procedure as for Type 1 stains.
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
ors (VCC interior cleaner).
treat stains immediately. It is important to Related information
vacuum before using a cleaning agent.
Related information
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
• Cleaning the interior (p. 791) leather steering wheel with a plastic protector. • Cleaning the center display (p. 791)
• Cleaning the center display (p. 791) Volvo Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather • Cleaning fabric upholstery and headliner
Softener 943 7429 are recommended for (p. 793)
cleaning the leather steering wheel. First,
(p. 793) • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 794)
remove dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or
• Cleaning the seat belt (p. 794) cloth. • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(p. 794)
• Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(p. 794) CAUTION • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 795)
• Cleaning the leather steering wheel Sharp objects such as rings could damage • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
(p. 796) surfaces (p. 797)
the leather on the steering wheel.
• Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood • Cleaning Microtech upholstery* (p. 795)
surfaces (p. 797) Treating stains on the steering wheel:
Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood)
– Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the
steering wheel using a solution of 5%
ammonia. For blood stains, mix approxi-
mately 2 dl (1 cup) of water with 25 g
(one ounce) of salt and wipe the stain.
Type 2 (grease, oil, sauces or chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for Type 1 stains.
2. Finish by wiping the wheel with an
absorbent paper or towel.
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats Cleaning the exterior
wood surfaces (p. 794) The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
Use cleaning agents and car care products • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 795) becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and to clean because dirt does not attach as
treat stains immediately. (p. 796) strongly. It also reduces the risk of scratches
A lightly dampened microfiber cloth is recom- and keeps the vehicle looking new. Wash the
mended for cleaning interior details and surfa- rims at a car wash or garage with an oil sepa-
ces. These cloths are available for purchase at rator. Use car care products recommended
Volvo retailers. by Volvo.
Never scrape or rub a stain. Never use strong Related information
stain removers. • Polishing and waxing (p. 798)
• Hand washing (p. 799)
CAUTION
• Cleaning exterior lights (p. 802)
Do not use solvent containing alcohol to
clean the instrument panel glass. • Automatic car washes (p. 800)
• High-pressure washing (p. 802)
CAUTION
• Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 803)
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be components (p. 804)
easily scratched. Wipe these surfaces with
a clean and dry microfiber cloth using • Cleaning rims (p. 806)
small, circular motions. If necessary, mois- • Corrosion protection (p. 806)
ten the cloth lightly with clean water.
Related information
(p. 793)
Polishing and waxing CAUTION • Cleaning rims (p. 806)

Polish and wax the vehicle when the paint is
Avoid waxing and polishing plastic and • Corrosion protection (p. 806)
dull or to provide extra protection. The vehicle
rubber.
does not need to be polished until it is at
least a year old. However, it can be waxed If using degreaser on plastic and rubber,
during the first year. Do not polish or wax the only rub (if necessary) with slight pressure.
vehicle in direct sunlight. The surface of the Use a soft sponge.
vehicle should not be warmer than 45 °C Polishing glossy trim moldings can wear
(113 °F). away or damage the glossy surface layer.
• Wash and dry the vehicle very carefully
before polishing or waxing. Remove Polish containing abrasives must not be
asphalt and tar stains with asphalt used.
remover or paint thinner. More stubborn
stains can be removed with a grinding
paste designed for vehicle paint. Use CAUTION
cleaning agents recommended by Volvo. Use cleaning agents recommended by
• Use polish first and then liquid or paste Volvo. Other treatments, such as preserva-
wax. Follow the instructions on the pack- tion, sealing, protection, luster sealing or
age carefully. Many products contain both similar, could damage the paintwork.
polish and wax. Paintwork damage caused by such treat-
ments are not covered by Volvo's warranty.
CAUTION
Related information
Never polish or wax initially matte exterior
details on the vehicle. This could destroy
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 797)
the matte effect and make the surface per- • Hand washing (p. 799)
manently shiny. • Automatic car washes (p. 800)
components (p. 804)
798
Hand washing • If necessary, use cold degreaser on heavily CAUTION

The vehicle should be washed as soon as it soiled surfaces. Note that in such cases
the surfaces must not be hot from the sun. Dirty headlights do not work as well. Clean
becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier
them regularly, e.g. when refueling.
to clean because dirt does not attach as • Wash using a sponge, car washing deter-
strongly. It also reduces the risk of scratches gent and plenty of lukewarm water. Make Dirty headlights do not work as well. Clean
and keeps the vehicle looking new. Wash the sure that the sponge is clean. A dirty them regularly, e.g. when charging.
vehicle in a car wash or garage with an oil sponge can scratch the paint. Do not use corrosive cleaners. Use water
separator and use car washing detergent.
• Clean the wiper blades with lukewarm and a non-abrasive sponge. See separate
Use cleaning agents and car care products soap solution or car washing detergent. section for more information.
recommended by Volvo.
• Dry the vehicle using a clean, soft chamois
Important to keep in mind when or a squeegee. Try not to let drops of
NOTE
handwashing your vehicle water dry in strong sunlight. This could
• Avoid washing the vehicle in direct sun- cause water drying stains that may need Exterior lighting such as headlights and
light. This could cause the detergent or to be polished out. taillights may develop temporary conden-
wax to dry out and become abrasive. sation on the inside of the lens. This is nor-
• In areas with heavy industrial emissions,
mal. All exterior lighting is designed to
• Remove bird droppings from paintwork as more frequent washing of the vehicle's
resist this. Condensation is normally ven-
soon as possible. It contains chemicals exterior is recommended.
ted out of the lamp housing once the light
that affect and discolor paintwork very • Tar spots from asphalt may remain even has been lit for some period of time.
quickly. Use e.g. soft paper or a sponge after washing. Use a Volvo-recommended
soaked in lots of water. Consult an author- tar remover to remove these spots after
ized Volvo workshop for assistance washing the vehicle. CAUTION
removing discoloration.
WARNING • Make sure that the panoramic roof*
• Hose down the underbody, including the and sun shade are closed before wash-
wheel housings and bumper. Always entrust engine washing to a working the vehicle.
shop. If the engine is hot, there is a risk of
• Hose down the entire vehicle and remove fire. • Never use abrasive polishing agents on
any loose dirt, droppings etc. to reduce the panoramic roof.
the risk of scratches from washing. Do not
spray directly onto locks.
• Never use wax on the rubber seals
around the panoramic roof.
}}
|| CAUTION Automatic car washes • Use the button in the tunnel console to
It is important to prepare the vehicle before turn off the Auto-hold brake function.
Remember to remove dirt from the drain
washing it in an automatic car wash. Care- • Switch off the warning and auto-braking
holes in the doors, sills and panoramic roof
fully follow the instructions for vehicle han- when backing up functions in the center
after washing the vehicle.
dling before and during the car wash. display's Park Assist Camera view. They
Automatic car washes can be a fast and easy may be reactivated if the vehicle is restar-
Related information way to clean the vehicle, but they do not reach ted, and must then be deactivated again.
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 797) all the parts of the vehicle that need regular
• Polishing and waxing (p. 798) cleaning. Volvo recommends supplementing
automatic car washing with hand-washing.
• Cleaning exterior lights (p. 802)
• Automatic car washes (p. 800) NOTE
Avoid washing a brand new vehicle in
• Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 803) automatic car washes for the first few
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim months after it leaves the factory. This will
components (p. 804) allow the paintwork to fully set.
• Cleaning rims (p. 806)
Preparations before washing
• Corrosion protection (p. 806)
In automatic car washes in which the vehicle
is pulled through the car wash, it is important
to switch off functions that prevent the vehicle
from rolling freely.
• Secure or remove protruding exterior parts
such as retrofitted auxiliary lights, anten-
nas, etc.
• Fold the door mirrors in.
• Make sure that the automatic rain sensor
function is switched off. The windshield
wipers must be switched off throughout
the car wash to avoid the risk of damage.
800
During the car wash 2. Put the gear selector in N. heat up the brakes so that they will dry more
quickly, reducing the risk of corrosion.
CAUTION NOTE
The parking brake may be automatically WARNING
Keep the vehicle's windows, doors and
tailgate closed throughout the car wash. applied if the seat belt is unbuckled. If the Always test the foot brake and parking
symbol for the automatic parking brake is brake after washing the vehicle to ensure
If the vehicle is equipped with keyless lock- they are functioning properly.
illuminated after gear position N has been
ing and unlocking*:
selected, the automatic parking brake is
Take out the key and place it in the open in still active. Deactivate it before switching Related information
the front section of the vehicle during the off the vehicle by depressing the brake • Cleaning the exterior (p. 797)
car wash. This minimizes the risk of unin- pedal while pressing the button for the
• Polishing and waxing (p. 798)
tentionally pressing the button that opens automatic parking brake in the tunnel con-
the tailgate, or of the key being incorrectly sole. • Hand washing (p. 799)
detected outside of the vehicle. • High-pressure washing (p. 802)
3. Turn the start knob in the tunnel console • Activating and deactivating Auto-hold at a
CAUTION clockwise and hold it for a few seconds to standstill (p. 460)
put the vehicle in ignition mode 0. • Activating and deactivating warning and
Keep the vehicle's windows, doors and
> The motor is switched off, while the auto-braking when backing up* (p. 374)
trunk lid closed throughout the car wash.
vehicle can roll freely.
If the vehicle is equipped with keyless lock-
4. The vehicle goes through the automatic • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
ing and unlocking*:
car wash. components (p. 804)
Take out the key and place it in the open in
the front section of the vehicle during the
Keep your seat belt buckled for the entire • Cleaning rims (p. 806)
car wash.
car wash. This minimizes the risk of unin- • Corrosion protection (p. 806)
tentionally pressing the button that opens > Don't forget to reset the adjustments
the trunk, or of the key being incorrectly made before the car wash.
detected outside of the vehicle. After the car wash
Depress the brake pedal lightly for a short
1. Drive into the car wash and stop at the time while driving after the brake pads have
designated place. been exposed to moisture. The friction will
High-pressure washing Related information Cleaning exterior lights

The vehicle should be washed as soon as it • Cleaning the exterior (p. 797) Dirty lights do not work as well. Clean them
becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains, • Polishing and waxing (p. 798) regularly, e.g. when refueling.
the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle
clean. It could also lead to paint damage.
• Hand washing (p. 799) Dirty lights do not work as well. Clean them
• Cleaning exterior lights (p. 802) regularly, e.g. when charging.
Wash the vehicle in a car wash or garage
Wash exterior lights, such as headlights and
with an oil separator. Use a car washing • Automatic car washes (p. 800) taillights, using a soft and clean sponge, mild
detergent recommended by Volvo.
• Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 803) soap and lukewarm water.
If washing the vehicle with a high-pressure
wash, use sweeping movements and keep the • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim It is normal for condensation to form tempo-
nozzle at least 30 cm (13 in.) from the vehicle. components (p. 804) rarily on the inside of the glass during wash-
Do not spray directly on the lock or on the • Cleaning rims (p. 806) ing. All outer lights are designed to withstand
inside of the fuel filler door. this. Condensation is normally ventilated out
of the light housing once the light has been
If washing the vehicle with a high-pressure
illuminated for a short period of time.
wash, use sweeping movements and keep the
nozzle at least 30 cm (13 in.) from the vehicle.
Do not spray directly on the lock or on the CAUTION
inside of the charger door. Do not use strong detergents or chemicals
If washing the vehicle with a high-pressure to clean the lights. These types of prod-
wash, use sweeping movements and keep the ucts, such as those containing alcohol,
nozzle at least 30 cm (13 in.) from the vehicle. may cause cracks in the glass.
Do not spray directly on the lock or on the
inside of the fuel filler door or the charger CAUTION
door.
Do not rub with a dry sponge or rag as this
could cause electric discharge and damage
CAUTION
the components in the light.
Do not use water hotter than 60 °C
(140 °F) on the exterior lights, such as
headlights and taillights. See separate sec-
Related information
tion for more information. • Cleaning the exterior (p. 797)
802
• Automatic car washes (p. 800) Cleaning the wiper blades • Corrosion protection (p. 806)
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
components (p. 804) becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains,
clean. It could also lead to paint damage.
• Corrosion protection (p. 806) Wash the vehicle in a car wash or garage
with an oil separator. Use a car washing
detergent recommended by Volvo.
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windshield,
shorten the service life of wiper blades.
When cleaning, put the wiper blades in the
service position.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windshield
regularly with a lukewarm soap solution or
vehicle shampoo. Do not use strong sol-
vents.
Related information
components (p. 804)
803
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber

and trim components
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains,
clean. It could also lead to paint damage. Use
a car washing detergent recommended by
Volvo.
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
retailers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of colored plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, e.g. glossy trim. Follow the
usage instructions for the cleaning agent care- Components that should be washed with a cleaning Components that should be washed with a cleaning
fully. product with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. product with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
Avoid using car washing detergents with a pH

value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. Doing
so could result in the discoloring of anodized
aluminum surfaces* (as shown in the illustra-
tions below). Abrasive polishing agents are not
recommended for these areas (as shown in
the illustrations below).
Components that should be washed with a cleaning Components that should be washed with a cleaning
product with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. product with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
CAUTION
Avoid waxing and polishing plastic and
rubber.
If using degreaser on plastic and rubber,
only rub (if necessary) with slight pressure.
Use a soft sponge.
Polishing glossy trim moldings can wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polish containing abrasives must not be
used.
product with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. product with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
CAUTION
Avoid washing the vehicle with cleaner
with a pH value below 3.5 or above 11.5.
This could cause discoloration of anodized
aluminum components like the roof rail and
around the side windows.
Never use metal polishing agent on ano-
dized aluminum components. This could
cause discoloration and destroy the sur-
face treatment.
Related information
product with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. product with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. • Cleaning the exterior (p. 797)
}}
805
• High-pressure washing (p. 802) Cleaning rims Corrosion protection

• Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 803) The vehicle should be washed as soon as it Your vehicle is constructed with protection
becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains, against corrosion.
the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle Corrosion protection for the body consists of
• Corrosion protection (p. 806) clean. It could also lead to paint damage. modern metallic protective coatings on the
Wash the rims at a car wash or garage with sheet metal, a high-quality painting process,
an oil separator. Use a car washing detergent corrosion-protected and minimized metal
recommended by Volvo. overlap, and shielding plastic components,
abrasion protection and supplemental rust
Use a rim cleaning agent recommended by inhibitor in exposed areas. In the chassis,
Volvo. exposed components of the wheel suspension
are made of corrosion-resistant cast alumi-
Strong rim cleaning agents could damage the
num.
surface and stain the chromed aluminum rims.
Related information Inspection and maintenance

The corrosion protection does not normally
require maintenance, but keeping the vehicle
• Polishing and waxing (p. 798) clean helps reduce the risk of corrosion. The
• Hand washing (p. 799) use of strong alkaline or acidic cleaning fluids
should be avoided on shiny body components.
Any stone chips in the paint should be
• High-pressure washing (p. 802) touched up as soon as they are discovered.
components (p. 804) Related information
806
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim Paintwork Touching up minor paint damage
components (p. 804) The paintwork consists of multiple layers. It is The paintwork is an important part of the
• Cleaning rims (p. 806) an important part of the vehicle's corrosion vehicle's corrosion protection and therefore
protection and therefore needs to be checked needs to be checked regularly. The most
regularly. common types of paint damage are minor
The most common types of paint damage are stone chips, scratches and damage to e.g.
minor stone chips, scratches and damage to the edges of fenders, doors and bumpers.
e.g. the edges of fenders, doors and bumpers. To help prevent corrosion, paint damage
To help prevent corrosion, paint damage should be rectified immediately.
should be rectified immediately.
NOTE
Related information
• Touching up minor paint damage Make sure the surface is clean and dry
(p. 807) before performing any touch-ups to the
paint. The surface temperature should be
• Color codes (p. 808)
at least 15 °C (59 °F).
Materials that might be needed

• Primer ‒ special adhesive primer is availa-
ble in a spray can for e.g. plastic-covered
bumpers.
• Base coat and clear coat ‒ available in
spray cans or as a touch-up pen/stick21.
• Masking tape.
• Fine-grain sandpaper.
21 Follow the instructions on the packaging for the touch-up pen/stick carefully. }}
807
|| Applying touch-up paint to a damaged 2. Light sanding with a very fine-grained Color codes
surface abrasive cloth or similar may be required The color code decal is placed on the vehi-
before painting (e.g. if there are uneven cle's left-side door pillar (B-pillar) between
edges). Clean the area carefully to remove the front and rear doors and is visible when
dirt, grease, salts, etc. and let it dry. the left front door is open.
3. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it
with a small brush, toothpick or similar.
Color code
When the primer is dry, apply one or more
coats of paint and then a clear coat, letting
the paint dry between each application.
If there is a longer scratch, follow the same
procedure as above, but first mask off the sur-
rounding area to protect the undamaged paint.
Touch-up pens/sticks and spray paint are
If the damage has not reached all the way
available at Volvo retailers.
down to the metal, then touch-up paint can be
applied immediately after the surface has been
cleaned. NOTE
1. Place a strip of masking tape over the If the stone chip has not gone down to the Sample color code (1): US models.
damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that bare metal and an undamaged coat of
Exterior color code
any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. paint remains, apply base coat and clear
coat immediately after cleaning the sur- Secondary exterior color code (if applica-
If the damage goes down to the bare face. ble)
metal, you may need to use primer first. If
the paint damage is on a plastic surface,
an adhesive primer should be used for bet- Related information
ter results. Spray the primer into the lid of • Paintwork (p. 807)
the spray can and brush on thinly. • Color codes (p. 808)
808
Sample color code (1): US models. Sample color code (1): US models. Sample color code (1): Canadian models.
Exterior color code Exterior color code Exterior color code
Secondary exterior color code (if applica- Secondary exterior color code (if applica- Secondary exterior color code (if applica-
ble) ble) ble)
809
Changing rear window wipers

The wiper blades help remove water from the
windshield and rear window. Along with the
washer fluid, they are designed to clean the
glass and help improve visibility while driving.
The windshield and rear window wiper
blades can be replaced.
Changing rear window wipers
Sample color code (1): Canadian models. Sample color code (1): Canadian models.
Exterior color code Exterior color code
Secondary exterior color code (if applica- Secondary exterior color code (if applica-
ble) ble)
Related information
• Paintwork (p. 807)
• Touching up minor paint damage (p. 807)
Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the
lower section of the blade to the right.
810
Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the
lower section of the blade to the right. lower section of the blade to the right. lower section of the blade to the right.
Grasp the center of the wiper blade and
lift it from the window to the stop posi-
tion.
NOTE
When the wiper arm is about halfway
extended, resistance may be felt as the
wiper stops in the stop position. This stop
helps prevent the wiper arm from falling
back onto the rear window. The wiper arm
must be pulled past the locking position
stop in order to change the wiper blade.
lower section of the blade to the right.
Grip the lower part of the blade and pull to
the right until the blade loosens from the
arm.
}}
811
|| 3. Press the new wiper blade until it clicks Lift the sleeve on the wiper blade attach-
into place. Check to make sure the blade ment. Make sure that the wiper arm
is securely in place. doesn't accidentally retract toward the
window.
4. Fold the wiper arm back toward the win-
dow.
upper section of the blade down diagonally to the
right.
Grasp the center of the wiper blade and
lift it from the window to the stop posi-
tion. Remove the washer hose from the attach-
ment.
NOTE Attach the new washer hose and wiper
When the wiper arm is about halfway blade in the attachment. Fold down the
extended, resistance may be felt as the sleeve on the wiper blade attachment.
wiper stops in the stop position. This stop
helps prevent the wiper arm from falling NOTE
back onto the rear window. The wiper arm Make sure that the hose is positioned as
must be pulled past the locking position shown in the illustration. If the hose is not
stop in order to change the wiper blade. positioned as shown, it could be squeezed
by the sleeve when it is folded down again.
Grasp the center attachment point and
pull it diagonally down to the right until
the blade detaches from the arm.
812
6. Press the new wiper blade until it clicks Replacing windshield wiper blades Raise the wiper arms to the service posi-
into place. Check to make sure the blade The wiper blades help remove water from the tion. Service position is activated/deacti-
is securely in place. windshield and rear window. Along with the vated via the center display when the vehi-
washer fluid, they are designed to clean the cle is stationary and the windshield wipers
7. Fold the wiper arm back toward the win-
glass and help improve visibility while driving. are not on. Press the button on the wiper
dow.
The windshield and rear window wiper blade attachment and pull the wiper blade
blades can be replaced. straight out, parallel with the wiper arm.
CAUTION
The wiper blades help remove water from the Slide in a new wiper blade until it clicks
Check the blades regularly. Neglected into place.
maintenance shortens the life of the windshield. Along with the washer fluid, they
blades. are designed to clean the glass and help 3. Check to make sure the blade is securely
improve visibility while driving. The wiper in place.
blades can be replaced.
Related information 4. Press the wiper blade back against the
• Using the rain sensor (p. 185) windshield.
ers (p. 188)
(p. 190)
tion (p. 815)
(p. 813)
Raise the wiper arms to the service position.
Service position is activated/deactivated via
}}
813
|| the center display when the vehicle is station- Wiper blades come in varying lengths
ary and the windshield wipers are not on.
Put the wiper blade in removal position by
folding it out from the wiper arm until it
clicks.
Press and hold the lock button on the
wiper blade attachment.
While holding the button down, pull the
blade straight out, parallel with the wiper
arm.
4. Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks
into place.
NOTE
5. Fold the blade back toward the arm until it
clicks into place. The blade is no longer in When changing wiper blades, make sure
its removal position and can once again be that the blades are of different lengths. The
moved. blade on the driver's side is longer than the
one on the passenger side.
6. Check to make sure the wiper blade is
securely in place.
Related information
7. Press the wiper blade back against the • Using the rain sensor (p. 185)
windshield.
ers (p. 188)
(p. 190)
tion (p. 815)
814
• Using the windshield wipers (p. 183) Putting the wiper blades in service
• Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 182) position
The windshield wiper blades must be in the
service (vertical) position for certain opera-
tions, e.g. replacing the blades.
The windshield wipers must be in the service

position when replacing, washing or lifting the
blades (e.g. to scrape ice or snow from the
windshield).
Windshield wipers in the service position.

CAUTION
Before placing the wipers in service posi-
tion, ensure that they have not frozen to
the windshield.
Activating/deactivating service
position
The service position can be activated/deacti-
vated when the vehicle is stationary and the
windshield wipers are switched off. Activat-
ing/deactivating the service position in the
center display:
Windshield wipers in the service position.
}}
815
|| 1. Tap in the center display. • Changing rear window wipers (p. 810) Refilling washer fluid
2. Then tap Controls and activate/deactivate • Using the windshield wipers (p. 183) Washer fluid is used to help keep the head-
lights and windshield clean. Washer fluid
service position for the wiper blades. • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 182)
containing anti-freeze should be used in very
The wiper blades will also move out of the cold weather (below-freezing temperatures).
service position if: Washer fluid is used to keep the headlights,
• The windshield wipers are turned on. windshield and rear window clean. Washer
fluid containing anti-freeze should be used in
• The windshield washers are turned on.
very cold weather (below-freezing tempera-
• The rain sensor is activated. tures).
• The vehicle begins moving.
CAUTION
If the wiper arms in service position are
raised from the windshield, they must be
folded back against the windscreen before
activating wiping, washing or rain sensor
as well as before departure. This is to pre-
vent scratching the paint on the hood.
Related information
ers (p. 188)
(p. 190)
(p. 813)
816
cold weather and temperatures below the

freezing point.
CAUTION
Use Volvo's original washer fluid or an
equivalent fluid with the recommended pH
value between 6 and 8, diluted as recom-
mended, e.g. in a 1:1 solution with pH-neu-
tral water.
CAUTION
Fill washer fluid into the reservoir with the Use washer fluid with anti-freeze when
blue cover. The reservoir is used for the wind- temperatures are below the freezing point
shield washer, tailgate window washer and to help keep the pump, reservoir and hoses
headlight washer*. from freezing.
Fill washer fluid into the reservoir with the
blue cover. The reservoir is used for both the Volume:
windshield washer and the headlight washer*.
• Vehicles with headlight washing: 5.5 liters
(5.8 qts).
NOTE
• Vehicles without headlight washing: 3.5
When there is approximately 1 liter (1 qt) of liters (3.7 qts).
washer fluid remaining, the message Refill
• Vehicles with headlight washing: 5.3 liters
washer fluid, level low and the (5.6 qts).
symbol will be displayed in the instrument
panel.
• Vehicles without headlight washing: 3.5
liters (3.7 qts).
The washer fluid reservoir has a volume of 5.5
Recommended grade: Washer fluid recom-
liters (5.8 qts).
mended by Volvo, with frost protection during
}}
ers (p. 188)
(p. 190)
tion (p. 815)
(p. 813)
818
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
The decals in the vehicle contain information
such as chassis number, type designation,
color code, etc.
Location of decals
Vehicle Emission Control Information.

US models. Your Volvo is designed to meet all
applicable emission standards, as evidenced
by the certification label on the underside of
the hood. For further information regarding
these regulations, please consult your Volvo
retailer.

ing to market and model.

820
SPECIFICATIONS
Vehicle Emission Control Information. Tire inflation pressures. This label indi- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
Canadian models. Your Volvo is designed to cates the correct inflation pressures for the (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry
meet all applicable emission standards, as evi- tires that were on the vehicle when it left the of Transport (CMVSS) standards (Canada).
denced by the certification label on the under- factory. Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable
side of the hood. For further information regar- safety standards, as evidenced by the certifi-
ding these regulations, please consult your cation label on the driver's side B-pillar (the
Volvo retailer. structural member at the side of the vehicle, at
the rear of the driver's door opening). This
label also includes codes for paint color, etc.
For further information regarding these regula-
tions, please consult your Volvo retailer. U.S.
models have the upper decal; Canadian mod-
els have the lower one.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The

VIN plate is located on the top left surface of
the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all
correspondence concerning your vehicle with
the retailer and when ordering parts.
}}
821
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Type designations
The decals in the vehicle contain information
such as chassis number, type designation,
color code, etc.
Location of decals
Decal A/C. Refrigerant R1234yf. The decal

is affixed to the underside of the hood.
NOTE
vehicle in particular is found on the decal The illustration is generic - details may vary accord-
on the vehicle. ing to market and model.
Related information
• Air conditioning specifications (p. 864)
• Air conditioning specifications (p. 866)
822
SPECIFICATIONS
The illustration is generic - details may vary accord- The illustration is generic - details may vary accord- The illustration is generic - details may vary accord-
ing to market and model. ing to market and model. ing to market and model.
}}
823
SPECIFICATIONS
||
Vehicle Emission Control Information. Vehicle Emission Control Information. Tire inflation pressures. This label indi-
US models. Your Volvo is designed to meet all Canadian models. Your Volvo is designed to cates the correct inflation pressures for the
applicable emission standards, as evidenced meet all applicable emission standards, as evi- tires that were on the vehicle when it left the
by the certification label on the underside of denced by the certification label on the under- factory.
the hood. For further information regarding side of the hood. For further information regar-
these regulations, please consult your Volvo ding these regulations, please consult your
retailer. Volvo retailer.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The

VIN plate is located on the top left surface of
the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all
correspondence concerning your vehicle with
the retailer and when ordering parts.
824
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE
on the vehicle.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Engine oil. This label contains the recom-
(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry mended engine oil specifications.
of Transport (CMVSS) standards (Canada). Related information
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable • Air conditioning specifications (p. 864)
safety standards, as evidenced by the certifi- • Air conditioning specifications (p. 866)
cation label on the driver's side B-pillar (the
structural member at the side of the vehicle, at
the rear of the driver's door opening). This
label also includes codes for paint color, etc.
For further information regarding these regula-
tions, please consult your Volvo retailer. U.S.
models have the upper decal; Canadian mod-
els have the lower one. Decal A/C. Refrigerant R1234yf. The decal
is affixed to the underside of the hood.
825
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions
The vehicle's length, height, etc. are shown in
the table.
Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches

A Ground clearanceA 142 5.6 C Length 4778 188.1 E Load length, floor 1005 39.6
138 5.4 D Load length, floor, 1797 70.7 F HeightB 1437 56.6
folded backrest
B Wheelbase 2872 113.1 1430 56,3
826
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches

G Load height 485 19.1 E Load length, floor 1149 45.2
H Wheel track, front 1610C 63,4C F HeightB 1446 56.9
1603D 63.1D 1441 56,7
1600E 63.0E G Load height 373 14.7

1593F 62.7F H Wheel track, front 1628C 64.1C
I Wheel track, rear 1610C 63,4C 1618D 63.7D
1603D 63.1D 1617E 63.7E
1600E 63.0E 1623F 63.9F
1593F 62.7F I Wheel track, rear 1629C 64.1C
J Load width, floor 867 34.1 1619D 63.7D
K Width 1850 72.8 1618E 63.7E
L Width incl. folded- 2040 80.3 1624F 63.9F

out rearview mirrors
J Load width, floor 1014 39.9
M Width incl. folded 1916 75.4 Dimensions mm inches K Width 1879G 74.0G
rearview mirrors
A Ground clearanceA 148 5.8 1890H 74.4H
A For curb weight plus 1 person. (Varies slightly depending on
tire dimensions, chassis variant, etc.).
B Including roof antenna, at curb weight. 146 5.7
C Vehicles with 16-inch wheels.
D Vehicles with 17-inch wheels. B Wheelbase 2941 115.8
E Vehicles with 18 and 19-inch wheels.
F Vehicles with 20-inch wheels. C Length 4969 195,6
D Load length, floor, 1978 77.9
folded backrest
}}
827
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches

L Width incl. folded- 2019 79.5 D Load length, 2098 82.6
out rearview mirrors floor, folded
backrest
M Width incl. folded 1895 74.6
rearview mirrors E Load length, 1149 45.2
floor
B Including roof antenna, at curb weight. F HeightB 1444 56.9
C Vehicles with 17 and 18-inch wheels.
D Vehicles with 19-inch wheels. 1453 57.2
E Vehicles with 20-inch wheels.
F Vehicles with 21-inch wheels. G Load height 435 17.1
G Chassis width.
H At door moldings. H Wheel track, 1638C 64,5C
front
1628D 64.1D
1618E 63.7E
1617F 63.7F
I Wheel track, 1639C 64,5C
rear
1629D 64.1D
Dimensions mm inches 1619E 63.7E
A Ground 144 5.7 1618F 63.7F

clearanceA J Load width, 1014 39.9
B Wheelbase 3061 120.5 floor
C Length 5090 200,4 K Width 1890 74.4

(1879G) (74.0G)
828
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions mm inches
L Width incl. 2019 79.5
folded-out
rearview mir-
rors
M Width incl. 1895 74.6
folded rear-
view mirrors
B Including roof antenna, at curb weight.
D Vehicles with 17 and 18-inch wheels.
F Vehicles with 20-inch wheels.
G Chassis width.
}}
829
SPECIFICATIONS
||

A Ground clearanceA 142 5.6 E Load length, floor 1033 40.7 H Wheel track, front 1610C 63,4C
138 5.4 F HeightB 1437 56.6 1603D 63.1D
B Wheelbase 2872 113.1 1430 56,3 1600E 63.0E
C Length 4778 188.1 G Load height 644 25.4 1593F 62.7F
folded backrest
830
SPECIFICATIONS
I Wheel track, rear 1610C 63,4C
1603D 63.1D
1600E 63.0E
1593F 62.7F
K Width 1850 72.8
L Width incl. folded- 2040 80.3
rearview mirrors
D Vehicles with 17-inch wheels.
E Vehicles with 18 and 19-inch wheels.
}}
831
SPECIFICATIONS
||

A Ground 197 7.8 D Load length, 1821 71.7 G Load height 644 25.4
clearanceA floor, folded
backrest H Wheel track, 1649C 64.9C
B Wheelbase 2875 113.2 front
E Load length, 1033 40.7 1649D 64.9D
C Length 4787 188.5 floor 1640E 64.6E
F HeightB 1504 59.2 1636F 64.4F
832
SPECIFICATIONS

I Wheel track, 1633C 64.3C E Load length, floor 1153 45.4
rear
1633D 64.3D F HeightB 1478 58.2
1625E 64.0E 1463 57.6
1621F 63.8F G Load height 704 27.7
J Load width, 1064 41.9 H Wheel track, front 1628C 64.1C
floor
1618D 63.7D
K Width 1893 74.5
1617E 63.7E
(1850G) (72.8G)
1623F 63.9F
L Width incl. 2040 80.3
folded-out I Wheel track, rear 1629C 64.1C
rearview mir-
rors 1619D 63.7D
1618E 63.7E
folded rear- 1624F 63.9F
view mirrors
tire dimensions, chassis variant, etc.). Dimensions mm inches K Width 1879G 74.0G
A Ground clearanceA 148 5.8 1890H 74.4H
146 5.7
G Chassis width.
B Wheelbase 2941 115.8
C Length 4945 194,7
folded backrest
}}
833
SPECIFICATIONS

L Width incl. folded- 2019 79.5 D Load length, 1988 78.3
out rearview mirrors floor, folded
backrest
rearview mirrors E Load length, 1153 45.4
floor
B Including roof antenna, at curb weight. F HeightB 1543 60.7
C Vehicles with 17 and 18-inch wheels.
D Vehicles with 19-inch wheels. G Load height 704 27.7
F Vehicles with 21-inch wheels. H Wheel track, 1652C 65.0C
G Chassis width.
H At door moldings. front
1655D 65.2D
I Wheel track, 1643C 64.7C
rear
1645D 64.8D
J Load width, 1130 44.5
floor
K Width 1903 74.9
(1879E) (74.0E)
A Ground clear- 195 7.7
anceA
C Length 4959 195,2
834
SPECIFICATIONS

L Width incl. 2052 80.8 F HeightB 1596 62.8
folded-out
rearview mir- G Load height 630 24.8
rors H Wheel track, front 1598 62.9
M Width incl. 1929 75.9 I Wheel track, rear 1603 63.1
folded rear-
view mirrors J Load width, floor 1059 41.7
A For curb weight plus 1 person. (Varies slightly depending on K Width 1873 73.7
C Vehicles with 17, 18 and 19-inch wheels.
L Width incl. folded- 2034 80,1
D Vehicles with 20 and 21-inch wheels. out rearview mirrors
E Chassis width.
rearview mirrors
A For curb weight + 1 person. (Varies slightly depending on
tire dimension, chassis alternative, etc.).
A Ground clearanceA 171 6.7

C Length 4440 174.8
folded backrest
E Load length, floor 896 35.3
}}
835
SPECIFICATIONS
||

A Ground clear- 205 8.1 D Load length, 1670 65.7 G Load height 733 28.9
anceA floor, folded
backrest H Wheel track, 1601 63.0
B Wheelbase 2702 106.4 front
E Load length, 887 34.9
C Length 4440 174.8 floor I Wheel track, 1626 64.0
rear
F HeightB 1657 65.2
floor
836
SPECIFICATIONS

K Width 1873 73.7 D Load length, 1670 65.7
(1863C) (73.3E) floor, folded
backrest
L Width incl. 2034 80,1
folded-out E Load length, 887 34.9
rearview mir- floor
rors
F HeightB 1651 65.0
folded rear- G Load height 733 28.9
view mirrors H Wheel track, 1601 63.0
A For curb weight + 1 person. (Varies slightly depending on front
B Including roof antenna, at curb weight. I Wheel track, 1615C 63,6C
C Chassis width.
rear
1610D 63,4D
floor
K Width 1873 73.7
(1863E) (73.3E)
A Ground clear- 175 6.9
anceA
C Length 4440 174.8
}}
837
SPECIFICATIONS

L Width incl. 2034 80,1 E Load length, floor 960 37.8
folded-out
rearview mir- F HeightB 1660 65.4
rors 1656 65.2
M Width incl. 1910 75.2 G Load height 776 30.6
folded rear-
view mirrors H Wheel track, front 1653C 65.1C
A For curb weight + 1 person. (Varies slightly depending on 1649D 64.9D
B Including roof antenna, at curb weight. 1655E 65.2E
C 19-inch wheel.
D 20-inch wheel. 1668F 65.7F
E Chassis width.
I Wheel track, rear 1657C 65.2C
1653D 65.1D
1659E 65.3E
1673F 65.9F
Dimensions mm inches K Width 1902G 74,9G
A Ground clearanceA 209 8.2 1915H 75,4H
200 7.9 1939I 76,3I
C Length 4708 185.4
folded backrest
838
SPECIFICATIONS
L Width incl. folded- 2117 83.3
rearview mirrors
C Vehicles with 17, 18 and 19-inch wheels.
G Chassis width.
H Width for vehicles with 21-inch wheels.
I Width for vehicles with 22-inch wheels.
}}
839
SPECIFICATIONS
||

A Ground clearanceA 217B 8,5B D Load length, floor, 2040 80.3 F HeightH 1778F 70.0F
folded backrest
216C 8,5C 1260D 49.6D 1776G 69.9G
205 8.1 1260E 49.6E 1772 69.8
B Wheelbase 2984 117.5 E Load length, floor 1220F 48.0F G Load height 816 32.1
C Length 4953 195.0 554G 21.8G
840
SPECIFICATIONS

H Wheel track, frontI 1665JK 65,6JK L Width incl. folded- 2140 84.3
1673L 65.9L
Wheel track, frontM 1668JK 65,7JK rearview mirrors
1676L 66.0L A For curb weight plus 1 person. (Varies slightly depending on
I Wheel track, rearI 1667JK 65,6JK B Vehicles with 5 or 6 seats.
C Vehicles with 7 seats.
1675L 65.9L D From the second row of seats in 6-seat models.

E From the second row of seats in 7-seat models.
F Vehicles with 5 seats.
Wheel track, rearM 1671JK 65,8JK G Vehicles with 6 or 7 seats.
H Including roof antenna, at curb weight.
1679L 66.1L I Vehicles without pneumatic suspension.
J Vehicles with 18 and 19-inch wheels.
J Load width, floor 1192 46.9 K Vehicles with 19-inch wheels.
L Vehicles with 20, 21 and 22-inch wheels.
K Width 1923N 75.7N M Vehicles with pneumatic suspension.
N Chassis width.
1931JK 76,0JK
Related information
1958L 77.1L • Weights (p. 842)
841
SPECIFICATIONS
Weights
The following table lists important weight
data for your vehicle.
Category Engine USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
B5 4915 2230
Gross vehicle weight
B5 AWD 5070 2300
Capacity weight – 890 405
B5 2515 1140
Permissible axle weights, front
B5 AWD 2580 1170
B5 2515 1140
Permissible axle weights, rear
B5 AWD 2600 1180
Curb weight – 3730–4480 1690–2030
Max. roof load – 165 75
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Gross vehicle weight 5510 2500
Capacity weight 890 405
Permissible axle weights, front 2775 1260
Permissible axle weights, rear 2865 1300
842
SPECIFICATIONS
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Curb weight 3730–4480 1690–2030
Max. roof load 165 75
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Curb weight 4270–4670 1910–2130
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
}}
843
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Curb weight 4270–4670 1910–2130
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Gross vehicle weight – 2350
Capacity weight – 415
Permissible axle weights, front – 1180
Permissible axle weights, rear – 1220
Curb weight – 1850–2050
Max. roof load – 75
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
844
SPECIFICATIONS
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Curb weight 4490–4510 1850–2050
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Curb weight 4060–4140 1840–1880
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
}}
845
SPECIFICATIONS

(lbs) (kg)
Curb weight 4270–4330 1940–1970

(lbs) (kg)
Recharge Twin 5775 2620
Recharge 5445 2470
Recharge 2800 1270
Recharge 2845 1290
Recharge Twin 4740–4800 2150–2180
Curb weight
Recharge 4370–4430 1980–2010
846
SPECIFICATIONS

(lbs) (kg)
B4 AWD – 2280
Gross vehicle weight B4 4915 –
B5 AWD 5025 2280
B4 AWD – 1200
Permissible axle weights, front B4 2620 –
B5 AWD 2645 1200
B4 AWD – 1130
Permissible axle weights, rear B4 2400 –
B5 AWD 2490 1130
Curb weight – 3700–3940 1730–1790

(lbs) (kg)
Recharge 5465 2480
}}
847
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Category Engine USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Recharge 2800 1270
Recharge 2885 1310
Curb weight – 4340–4800 1960–2180

(lbs) (kg)
B5 5290 2400
Gross vehicle weight B5 AWD 5400 2450
B6 AWD 5510 2500
B5 2645 1200
Permissible axle weights, front B5 AWD 2670 1210
B6 AWD 2735 1240
848
SPECIFICATIONS

(lbs) (kg)
B5 2735 1240
Permissible axle weights, rear B5 AWD 2800 1270
B6 AWD 2865 1300
Curb weight – 4010–4690 1810–2130
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Curb weight 4010–4690 1810–2130
}}
849
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Category Version USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
7-seat 6150 2790
6-seat 6030 2735
7-seat 1210 550
Capacity weight
6-seat 1160 525
7-seat 2885 1310
6-seat 2865 1300
7-seat 3440 1560
6-seat 3285 1490
7-seat 4570–5140 2070–2340
Curb weight
6-seat 4690–5110 2120–2320
Category Version USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
7-seat 6500 2950
6-seat 6330 –
7-seat 1210 550
Capacity weight
6-seat 1160 –
850
SPECIFICATIONS
Category Version USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
7-seat 3000 1360
6-seat 2910 –
7-seat 3680 1670
6-seat 3550 –
7-seat 4570–5140 2070–2340
Curb weight
6-seat 4690–5110 –
CAUTION
• When loading the vehicle, the maxi-
mum gross vehicle weight and permis-
sible axle weights may not be excee-
ded.
Related information
• Type designations (p. 820)
• Towing capacity and tongue weight
(p. 852)
851
SPECIFICATIONS
Towing capacity and tongue Towing capacity and tongue weight are
weight shown in the table.
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Without brakes: 1650 750
Max. trailer weights
With brakes: 2000 900
Max. tongue weight – 200 90
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Without brakes: – 750
With brakes: – 900
Max. tongue weight – – 90
852
SPECIFICATIONS
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Max. trailer weights With brakes (AWD): 2000 900
Braked (AWD tow pack): 3500 1580
AWD: 200 90
Max. tongue weight
AWD tow pack: 350 150
}}
853
SPECIFICATIONS

(lbs) (kg)
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
854
SPECIFICATIONS
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
}}
855
SPECIFICATIONS

(lbs) (kg)
CAUTION
• The maximum trailer weights listed are
only applicable for altitudes up to
3280 ft (1,000 m) above sea level.
With increasing altitude the engine
power and therefore the car's climbing
ability are impaired because of the
reduced air density, so the maximum
trailer weight has to be reduced
accordingly. The weight of the car and
trailer must be reduced by 10% for
every further 3280 ft (1,000 m) (or
part thereof).
Related information
• Weights (p. 842)
• Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 515)
SPECIFICATIONS
Electric motor specifications

Recharge Twin is powered by two electric
motors (front and rear), while Recharge is
powered by one electric motor (front).
Electric motor
Recharge Twin Recharge
Location in vehicle: Front and rear Front
Electric motor type: Permanent-magnet synchronous motors Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
Electric motor model: EAD 3.1 EAD 3.4
kW 150 170
Max output, per electric motor:
hp 204 231
kW 300 170
Max output, total vehicle:
hp 408 231
Nm 330 330
Max torque, per electric motor:
ft. lbs 243 243
Nm 660 330
Max torque, total vehicle:
ft. lbs 487 243
NOTE NOTE Related information

Not all electric motor variants are available If electric motor data is not shown in the
on all markets. table, it will be updated at a later time. • Type designations (p. 822)
857
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine specifications The vehicle is powered by both a gasoline NOTE

Engine specifications (output, etc.) for each engine and an electric motor (ERAD –
Electric Rear Axle Drive). Not all engines are available on all markets.
engine variant are shown in the table below.
The specifications for Special Edition vehicles
may vary.
Engine Engine codeA Output Output Torque Torque Number of cylinders

(kW/rps) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rps) (ft. lbs./rpm)
B5 / B5 AWD B420T2 184/90–95 247/5400–5700 350/30-80 258/1800-4800 4
A The engine code, component and manufacturer serial numbers can be found on the engine.

T8 AWD B4204T57 233/100 312/6000 400/50–90 295/3000–5400 4

B6 AWD B420T 220/90 295/5400 420/35–80 310/2100–4800 4
858
SPECIFICATIONS

T8 AWD B4204T57 233/100 312/6000 400/50–90 295/3000–5400 4

B6 AWD B420T 220/90 295/5400 420/35–80 310/2100–4800 4

T8 AWD B4204T57 233/100 312/6000 400/50–90 295/3000–5400 4

B5 AWD B420T2 184/90–95 247/5400–5700 350/30-80 258/1800-4800 4
}}
859
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Engine Engine codeA Output Output Torque Torque Number of cylinders

B6 AWD B420T 220/90 295/5400 420/35–80 310/2100–4800 4

B4 / B4 AWD B420T6 145/80–90 194/4800–5400 300/25–70 221/1500–4200 4
B5 AWD B420T2 184/90–95 247/5400–5700 350/30-80 258/1800-4800 4

B5 / B5 AWD B420T2 184/90–95 247/5400–5700 350/30-80 258/1800-4800 4
B6 AWD B420T 220/90 295/5400 420/35–80 310/2100–4800 4

T8 AWD B4204T57 233/100 312/6000 400/50–90 295/3000–5400 4
860
SPECIFICATIONS

B5 AWD B420T2 184/90–95 247/5400–5700 350/30-80 258/1800-4800 4
B6 AWD B420T 220/90 295/5400 420/35–80 310/2100–4800 4

T8 AWD B4204T57 233/100 312/6000 400/50–90 295/3000–5400 4
Electric motor
Max. output: 107 kW (145 hp).
Torque: 309 Nm.
Related information
• Engine oil specifications (p. 862)
861
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine oil specifications Oil viscosity Related information

Engine oil of type VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 The wrong oil viscosity can shorten engine • Type designations (p. 820)
must be used1. Lower oil grades may not service life during normal use. • Type designations (p. 822)
offer the same fuel economy, engine perform- VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 provides good fuel
economy and engine protection. See the vis- • Checking and filling engine oil (p. 696)
ance or engine protection.
cosity chart. • Engine oil (p. 695)
Volvo recommends:
Viscosity chart
General Oil volume

See the Service and warranty booklet for infor- Engine oil volumes (including oil filter) are
mation about oil change intervals. shown in the table.
NOTE Liter (approx) 5.6
This vehicle is delivered from the factory US qts (approx) 5.9

with synthetic oil.
Liter (approx) 6.1
Do not use oil additives.
US qts (approx) 6.4
1 0W-30 or 5W-30 ACEA A5/B5 engine oil can also be used if VCC RBS0 2AE 0W-20 oil is not available.
862
SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission fluid specifications Brake fluid specifications Fuel tank volume

Under normal driving conditions, the trans- The medium in the hydraulic brake system is The fuel tank's refillable volume is shown in
mission fluid will not need to be changed dur- called brake fluid and is used to transfer pres- the table below.
ing the transmission's service life. However, sure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master All engines
it may need to be changed if the vehicle is brake cylinder, which in turn actuates the
driven frequently in adverse driving condi- brake calipers. Liter (approx) 60
tions. Recommended grade: Volvo Original or simi-
US gallons (approx) 15.9
lar fluid that meets a combination of Dot 4, 5.1
Automatic transmission and ISO 4925 class 6.
All engines
AW-1
Prescribed transmission fluid: NOTE
AW-2 Liter (approx) 60
Changing or filling brake fluid should be
entrusted to an authorized Volvo work- US gallons (approx) 15.9
NOTE shop.
Check with your Volvo retailer if you are All engines
unsure which variant your vehicle is equip- Related information
ped with. Liter (approx) 60
• Engine compartment overview (p. 692)
Related information
• Type designations (p. 820) All engines
Liter (approx) 60
All engines
Liter (approx) 60
}}
863
SPECIFICATIONS
|| All engines All engines Air conditioning specifications

The climate system in the vehicle uses a
Liter (approx) 60 Liter (approx) 60 freon-free R1234yf refrigerant. For informa-
US gallons (approx) 15.9 US gallons (approx) 15.9 tion regarding the refrigerant, refer to the
decal located on the underside of the hood.
Refrigerant and compressor oil are used in the
All engines All engines air conditioning system. Information about the
refrigerant decals, including amounts, is
Liter (approx) 54 Liter (approx) 71
shown below. The table shows the prescribed
US gallons (approx) 14.2 US gallons (approx) 18.8 grade and volume of the compressor oil.
A/C Decal
All engines All engines
Decal for R1234yf
Liter (approx) 71 Liter (approx) 71
US gallons (approx) 18.8 US gallons (approx) 18.8
All engines
Related information
• Refueling (p. 494)
Liter (approx) 71 • Octane rating (p. 497)
All engines
Liter (approx) 60
864
SPECIFICATIONS
Explanation of symbols for R1234yf Evaporator

Symbol Explanation
CAUTION
Caution
The A/C system evaporator must never be
repaired or replaced with a previously used
evaporator. The new evaporator must be
Mobile air condition system certified and labeled in accordance with
(MAC) SAE J2842.
Refrigerant amount.
Related information
Lubricant • Climate control system service (p. 686)
WARNING • Climate control system service (p. 686)
The air conditioning system contains the
refrigerant R1234yf under pressure. In
Only a trained and certified tech- accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician
nician can perform service on the Training for Safe Service and Containment
mobile air conditioning system of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C Sys-
(MAC) tem), service and repairs to the refrigerant
system may only be performed by trained
Flammable refrigerant and certified technicians in order to ensure
the safety of the system.
Compressor oil
Refrigerant Volume Prescribed grade
The refrigerant amount (charge level) is prin-
ted on a decal on the underside of the hood. 110 ml (3.87 fl. oz.)A
POE RB68
260 ml (9.15 fl. oz.)B
A Vehicles without heating pump.
B Vehicles equipped with heating pump.
865
SPECIFICATIONS
Air conditioning specifications Explanation of symbols for R1234yf Vehicles with R1234yf refrigerant
The climate system in the vehicle uses a Symbol Explanation
freon-free R1234yf refrigerant. For informa-
tion regarding the refrigerant, refer to the Caution
decal located on the underside of the hood.
Refrigerant and compressor oil are used in the
air conditioning system. Information about the
refrigerant decals, including amounts, is Mobile air condition system
shown below. The table shows the prescribed (MAC)
grade and volume of the compressor oil.
Refrigerant amount.
A/C Decal Lubricant
Decal for R1234yf
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains the
Only a trained and certified tech- refrigerant R1234yf under pressure. In
nician can perform service on the accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician
mobile air conditioning system Training for Safe Service and Containment
(MAC) of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C Sys-
tem), service and repairs to the refrigerant
Flammable refrigerant system may only be performed by trained
and certified technicians in order to ensure
the safety of the system.
Refrigerant
The refrigerant amount (charge level) is prin-
ted on a decal on the underside of the hood.
866
SPECIFICATIONS
Compressor oil Volume Prescribed grade Related information

Volume Prescribed grade • Climate control system service (p. 686)
130 ml (4.40 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2
• Climate control system service (p. 686)
130 ml (4.40 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2
Volume Prescribed grade
130 ml (4.40 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2
100 ml (3.38 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2
100 ml (3.38 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2
80 ml (2.70 fl. oz.)A ND12
A For some markets, 110 ml (3.72 fl. oz) applies. Consult a Volume Prescribed grade
Volvo retailer if you are unsure.
110 ml (3.72 fl. oz.) ND12
80 ml (2.70 fl. oz.)A
ND12
110 ml (3.72 fl. oz.)B 120 ml (4.06 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2
A Canadian models. Evaporator

B US models.
Volume Prescribed grade CAUTION

The A/C system evaporator must never be
80 ml (2.70 fl. oz.)A repaired or replaced with a previously used
ND12
110 ml (3.72 fl. oz.)B evaporator. The new evaporator must be
certified and labeled in accordance with
A Canadian models. SAE J2842.
B US models.
867
SPECIFICATIONS
Approved tire pressure the tire inflation placard for information spe-
The following tire pressures are recom- cific to the tires installed on your vehicle at
mended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the factory.
Cold tire pressure for up to five persons

Tire dimensions Front Rear
psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
225/50 R17
235/45 R18 36 (250) 36 (250)
235/40 R19
Temporary spare tire
60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/60 R19

psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
235/45 R18
39 (270) 39 (270)
235/40 R19
60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/80 R18
868
SPECIFICATIONS

psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
255/40 R19 35 (240) 35 (240)
255/35 R20 36 (250) 36 (250)
60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/70 R19

psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
255/40 R19
38 (260) 38 (260)
245/40 R20
60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/70 R19
}}
869
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Cold tire pressure for up to five persons

psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
225/50 R17
235/45 R18 36 (250) 36 (250)
235/40 R19
60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/60 R19

psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
215/55 R18
235/45 R19 38 (260) 38 (260)
245/40 R20
60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/60 R19
870
SPECIFICATIONS

psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
235/55 R18
235/50 R19 35 (240) 35 (240)
245/45 R20
245/40 R21 36 (250) 36 (250)
60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/70 R19

psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
235/50 R19
255/45 R19
41 (280) 42 (290)
235/45 R20
255/40 R20
60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/70 R19
}}
871
SPECIFICATIONS

psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
235/50 R19
255/45 R19
41 (280) 42 (290)
235/45 R20
255/40 R20
60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/70 R19
CAUTION
Do not switch the front wheels with the
rear wheels or vice versa.
872
SPECIFICATIONS

psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
235/60 R17
235/55 R18
33 (230) 33 (230)
235/50 R19
245/45 R20
245/40 R21 35 (240) 35 (240)
T125/70 R18 60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/80 R18
}}
873
SPECIFICATIONS

psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
235/60 R18
235/55 R19
255/45 R20 35 (240) 35 (240)
255/40 R21
265/35 R22
60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/80 R18

psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
235/60 R18
235/55 R19 35 (240) 35 (240)
255/45 R20
255/40 R21
38 (260) 38 (260)
265/35 R22
60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/80 R18
874
SPECIFICATIONS
Cold tire pressure for up to seven people (depending on number of seats)

psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
235/60 R18
235/55 R19
275/45 R20 38 (260) 38 (260)
275/40 R21
275/35 R22
60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/70 R19
Cold tire pressure for up to seven people (depending on number of seats)

psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
235/55 R19
275/45 R20 42 (290) 42 (290)
275/40 R21
Related information
875
SERVICES
SERVICES
Rearview mirror and overhead Exterior

console Click on the hotspots to read more about
Click on the hotspots to read more about key selected functions. Swipe right or left to see
functions for the vehicle's rearview mirror and more views.
overhead console.
878
SERVICES
Exterior
Click on the hotspots to read more about
selected functions. Swipe right or left to see
more views.
}}
879
SERVICES
||
880
SERVICES
}}
881
SERVICES
||
882
SERVICES
}}
883
SERVICES
||
884
SERVICES
885
SERVICES
Instrument panel
Click on the hotspots to read more about the
key functions for the vehicle's instrument
panel.
886
SERVICES
Interior
more views.
}}
887
SERVICES
Interior
more views.
888
SERVICES
}}
889
SERVICES
||
890
SERVICES
}}
891
SERVICES
||
892
SERVICES
Steering wheel
selected functions for the vehicle's steering
wheel.
893
SERVICES
Cargo compartment
vehicle's cargo compartments.
894
SERVICES
Trunk Engine compartment

Click on the hotspots to read more about the Click on the hotspots to read more about the
vehicle's trunk. engine compartment.
}}
895
SERVICES
||
896
SERVICES
Front cargo compartment Key Driver's door control panel

Click on the hotspots to read more about the Click on the hotspots to read more about the Click on the hotspots to read more about
vehicle's front cargo compartment. vehicle's key. selected functions for the control panel in the
driver's door.
}}
897
SERVICES
Tunnel console
vehicle's tunnel console.
898
SERVICES
899
INDEX INDEX
Airbag 53 All-wheel drive (four-wheel drive) 469

1, 2, 3 ... activation/deactivation 58, 62 Antenna
12 V battery 715 driver's side 54 location 288
passenger side 54, 58, 62 type approval 400
Air bag, see Airbag 53 Apple CarPlay 542, 543, 544
A Air conditioning 251 Approach lighting 160
ABS Air conditioning, fluid Apps
anti-lock brakes 450 volume and grade 864, 866 deleting apps 538
AC (Air conditioning) 251 Air distribution 236 downloading vehicle apps 537
air vents 236, 239 vehicle apps 537
Accessories and extra equipment 34
changing 239 Armrest
installation 36
defrosting 248 folding down the rear seats 637
Accessory installation warning 36 recirculation 247 rear seat cup holder 637
Active Bending Lights 156 Air purification 257 Assistance at risk of collision 349
Adapting driving characteristics 474 start/stop 258 at risk of run-off 360
Adaptive Cruise Control Air quality 233, 234 braking for oncoming vehicles 358
auto-brake 341 Advanced Air Cleaner 236 crossing traffic 357
deactivate 324 allergy and asthma 234 detecting obstacles 351
display 331 passenger compartment filter 235 during collision risks from behind 359
passing 336 Air recirculation 247 limitations 354
set time interval 340 speed reduction 353
Alarm 303
steering wheel buttons 322 Symbols and messages 361
deactivating 304
stored speed 339 Audio and media 536
switching target vehicles 338 Alarm about slippery road conditions 315
Auto-climate 246
WARNING 337 Alarm on hazard warning flashers 315
Auto hold 459
Adjusting the steering wheel 228 Allergy and asthma-inducing sub-
stances 234 Auto-hold brakes 459
Advanced Air Cleaner 236
activating/deactivating 460
All Wheel Drive (AWD) 469
901
INDEX
after collision 461 jump-start 501, 503 Brake position 464

driver support 308 Maintenance 703 Brakes 450
Automatic braking at a standstill (Hold) 459 recycling 717 anti-lock brakes, ABS 450
starter battery 703 auto-brake withPilot Assist 341
Automatic car wash 800
support battery 707 auto-braking with Adaptive Cruise
Automatic high beam 155 symbols 717 Control 341
Automatic locking 295 Battery gauge 104 automatic when stationary 459
Automatic opening and closing of windows Battery use 486 Brake Assist System, BAS 452
resetting 167 brake lights 159
Blind Spot Information 364
Automatic relocking 270, 285 brake system 450
BLIS 364 emergency brake lights 159
Automatic Speed Limiter limitations 365 Maintenance 453
activating 323 Symbols and messages 368 on salted roads 453
Automatic transmission 464 Blower on wet roads 453
kickdown 467 adjusting 250 parking brake 454
oil 863 air distribution 239 brake system
Auxiliary heater 263 air vents 239 fluid 863
Bluetooth
phone 544
B Bluetooth Media Player 542 C
Backrest Booster cushions 79
Camera sensor
front seat, adjusting 194, 197, 203, Brake assist see Camera 393
204, 205, 206 after collision 461
Camera unit 393
rear seat, adjusting 222, 225 at start-up 461
limitations 393
rear seat, folding 210, 213, 223, 224 Brake energy 451, 469 maintenance and cleaning 396
Batteries 701 Brake fluid Symbols and messages 399
12 V battery 715 grade 863 Capacity weight 618, 842
high-voltage battery 711
Brake functions 450
hybrid battery 710
902
INDEX
Care Key reset settings 138 recalls and registration 72

restricted key 279 symbols in status bar 135 top tether anchors 80
settings 280 troubleshooting 783 Child safety 70
Cargo compartment 638 Center display views 133 Circuit breaker 432
attachment points 646 Central locking 290 Cleaning 794, 796, 797
cargo net 662
Certificate 551 automatic car wash 800
electrical outlet 632, 634
Change of owner 138 car wash 797, 799, 800
Lighting 163
center display 791
parcel shelf 666 Changing target vehicle 338
exterior details 804
Cargo compartment cover 650, 653, 666 Charging Seat belts 794
Cargo compartment floor 648 charging via wall outlet 426, 429 textile upholstery 791, 793, 795
foldable 649 general 404 upholstery 791, 793, 795
start charging 408, 410 wheels 806
cargo net 662
Status 416, 418, 421, 434 wiper blade 803
protection, net, cargo net, safety net,
stop charging 423, 425
protective net, textile net, fabric net, Cleaning wheels 806
nylon net 660 Charging cable 412
Cleaning wiper blades 803
Cargo net 660, 662 Charging time 414, 415
CleanZone 233
Car wash 797, 799, 800 Checking engine oil level 696
Clean Zone Interior Package 234
Catalytic converter 499 Child lock
Climate 230
recovery 519 activating/deactivating 293
auto-regulation 246
Center console 626 Child restraints 70, 72 blower control 250
booster cushions 79 parking 253
Center display
convertible seats 77 perceived temperature 232
cleaning 791
infant seats 74 Sensors 231
climate controls 240
integrated booster cushion 85 temperature control 250, 251
handling 132
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 83 zones 230
keyboard 136
lower attachment points 82
messages 144
overview 131
903
INDEX
Climate controls 240 Connect phone 545 Curb weight 842

center display 240 Contact information 24 CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 234
rear seat 240
Contacts 549
Climate system 230, 240
Control unit
Refrigerant 864, 866
repairs 686
charging status 434 D
Convertible seats 77 Data
Clock, setting 98
coolant 698 recording 32
Clothing hook 662
filling 699 transferring between vehicle and
Collision 42, 47, 53, 68 workshop 673
Cooling system
Collision Avoidance 349 overheating 500 Daytime running lights 152
Collision warner Cornering illumination 157 Decals
crossing traffic rear 372 location 820, 822
Corner Traction Control 311
Collision warning Defrosting 248
Corrosion protection 806
from the rear 363
Covering Detecting obstacles
with Adaptive Cruise Control 337
cargo compartment 653 Assistance at risk of collision 351
withPilot Assist 337
Crash, see Collision 42 Diagnosis
Color code, paintwork 808
via the workshop'sWi-Fi 673
Color codes 808 Crash event data 32
Dimensions 826
Condensation in headlights 799 Creep 480
Dipstick, electronic 696
Connect Cross Traffic Alert 372
activating/deactivating 374 Direction of rotation 588
account 142
Cruise control 324 Display
Connected Safety 315
activating 323 driver information 99
limitations 316 deactivate 324 Display lighting 163
standby mode 325 Distance Alert 371
Connection and entertainment 28
steering wheel buttons 322 limitations 372
Connect key to user profile 142 stored speed 339
904
INDEX
Door mirrors 173 Electrical system 701, 703 Engine temperature

dimming 174 Electric drive motor high 500
outer 173 specifications 857, 858 Environment 26
power folding 175
electric motor 469 Ethanol content
resetting 175
Driving 484 max. 10% by volume 496
store position 198, 199, 200, 201
general 406 Exterior dimensions 826
Driveline Range 483
transmission 463 Extra heater (Auxiliary heater) 263
Electric parking brake 454
Drive mode 474, 475
Electronic immobilizer 283
changing 478
Driver Alert 369
emergency brake lights 159 F
limitations 371 Emission inspection readiness 670
Farewell lighting
Driver support system 308 Energy distribution Farewell light 161
using map data 479
Drive systems 469 Federal Clean Air Act 670
Engine
Driving Ferry transport 488
overheating 500
cooling system 500 Flat tire 610
start 443
with a trailer 513
turn off 446 Flooded road 528
Driving through standing water 528
Engine braking 450, 464 Fluids, volumes 816, 863, 864, 866
driving with a trailer
Engine compartment Fluids and oils 698, 863, 864, 866
towball load 852
coolant 699 Fog lights
towing capacity 852
engine oil 695 front 157
overview 692 rear 158
Engine drag control 311
E Engine oil 695
Four-C 488
Front seat
Economical driving 485 checking and filling 696 blower 250
Electrical outlet 632 grade and volume 862 climate 240
use 634 Engine specifications 858 heating 242
905
INDEX
temperature 250 troubleshooting center display 783 Hazard warning flashers 160
ventilation 244 under the hood 721 Head restraint 215, 219
Front seat manual 194 Head-up display 145, 146
Front seats, power 196 cleaning 792
adjusting passenger seat from driv- G Distance Alert 371
er's seat 208 settings 146
Gasoline grade 496
adjusting seat 197 store position 199, 201
lumbar support 206 Gauge
Heated washer nozzles 182
massage 203 fuel gauge 104
Heated wiper blades 182
multifunction control 196, 203, Gear selector positions 463
204, 205, 206 automatic transmission 464 Heater 262
side bolsters 205 auxiliary heater 263
Glass, laminated/reinforced 166
store position 198, 199, 200, 201 parking heater 262
Glove compartment 635
FSC, environmental labeling 22 Heating
Googleservices Seats 242, 243
Fuel 496 getting started withGoogleservices 40 steering wheel 245, 246
Fuel filling 494 Grocery bag holders 642 windows 249
Fuel requirements 496, 497 Gross vehicle weight 842 Height adjustment 488, 491
Fuel tank Guidance Light,Homesafe Lighting,Fol- high beams 154, 155
volume 863 low me home lighting,follow-me-home High engine temperature 500
Fuse box 718 lighting,guidance light 160
High-voltage battery 711
Fuses 718
Hoisting the vehicle 675
below the glove compartment 749,
HomeLink® 530
756, 762 H programming 530
in engine compartment 728, 734
in the cargo compartment 775 Handbrake 454 type approval 533
in trunk 770 use 532
Hand wash 799
replacing 719 HomeLink®remote control
Hard disk
programmable 530
space 559
906
INDEX
Honk 226 Inflation pressure Integrated booster cushion 85

Hood adjusting 594 folding down 89
opening and closing 687 Checking 593 folding up 87
panels under the hood 690 decal with recommended pressure 595 Interior Air Quality System 234
Horn 226 Inflation pressure monitoring 596 Intermittent wiping 184
action 599
Hybrid battery 710 Internet-connected vehicle
save new inflation pressure 597
Hybrid mode 479 software updates 673
Status 599
Internet connection 556, 557
Inflation pressure table 868
Internet connection via Bluetooth 556
Information display 99
I Infotainment 536
Internet via vehicle modem 558
IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 234 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 83

Instrument cluster 99
IC (Inflatable Curtain) 67 Instrument illumination 163
ID, Volvo 24 Instrument lighting 163
Identification number 38
J
Instrument panel 99
Ignition mode 447, 448 cleaning 792 Jack 604
Immobilizer 283 hybrid-related symbols and mes- Jump-start 501, 503

Electronic immobilizer 283 sages 439
messages 130
Indicator symbols 107
settings 103
Infant seats 74 symbols and messages related to
K
Inflatable curtain 67 electric propulsion 437 Key
Inflatable Curtain 67 Instruments and controls 92 battery replacement 275
Instruments overview detachable key blade 280
Inflating tires 617
left-hand drive vehicle 92 locking/unlocking 270
907
INDEX
loss 278 Language in passenger compartment 161

Range 273 settings 138 light locations 786
Keyboard 136, 137 Launchfunction 468 low beams 153
change language 136 position lights 152
Leather upholstery, cleaning instruc-
rear fog light 158
Keyless tions 795
settings 151
locking/unlocking 285 Leveling control 488 Turn signals 156
settings 287 suspension 488 Welcome Light 161
touch-sensitive surfaces 285
License agreement 110 Lighting, replacing bulbs 785
Keys 267
Lifting tools 604 brake lights 789
Key tag 267 light bulbs, specifications 790
Light bulbs
changing 785 rear fog light 790
specifications 790 turn signal, rear 787
L Light control 150, 163 Load anchoring eyelets
cargo compartment 646
Labels Lighting
location 820, 822 Active Bending Lights 156 Load anchoring hooks 642
Laminated glass 166 approach lighting 160 Load carriers 642

automatic high beam 155 Load index 590
Lamps
brake lights 159
changing 785 Loading
control, instrument, display 163
location 786 general 640
controls 150, 161
specifications 790 load anchoring eyelets 646
cornering illumination 157
Lane Keeping Aid 342 long load 641
daytime running lights 152
activating/deactivating 344 emergency brake lights 159 Lock indication 266
display 347 Farewell lighting 161 setting 267
limitations 344 front fog lights 157 Locking/unlocking
see Lane Keeping Aid 342 Hazard warning flashers 160 settings 272
Symbols and messages 345 high beams 154, 155 Tailgate 272, 287
home safe lighting 160 trunk lid 273, 288
908
INDEX
Locking wheel bolts 605 traffic information 582

update 583
N
Locks
locking/unlocking 270 Max. axle weight 842 Navigation
destination 580
Locks and keys 266 Max. roof load 842
electric vehicle functions 581
Long-term storage 712, 713 Media player 542 in instrument panel 579
Low battery charge level Messages and symbols in the center display 579
start battery 501 Assistance at risk of collision 361 map download 583
Low battery in vehicle key 275 BLIS 368 Maps 578
camera and radar units 399 route guidance 580
Low beams 153
Lane Keeping Aid 345 settings 582
Lower the rear end 641 Park Assist Camera 388 traffic information 582
Parking Assist 388 update 583
Pilot Assist 334 Net
M stability and traction control system 313 cargo compartment 660, 662
Messages in display 130
Maintained climate comfort 258
start/stop 259 Messages in the center display 144
Maintenance 670 Microtechupholstery, washing instruc- O

corrosion protection 806 tions 795
Occupant Classification System 58
Managing tiles in the center display 134 Mileage
Occupant safety 43
electric motor 483
Maps Occupant weight sensor 62
destination 580 Misting
condensation in headlights 797 Octane rating 497
electric vehicle functions 581
in instrument panel 579 Mood lighting Odometer 105
in the center display 579 adjusting 163 Off-road mode 479
map download 583 Moving apps in the center display 135 Oil, see also Engine oil 862
navigation 578
Oil filter 695
route guidance 580
settings 582 Oil level 696
909
INDEX
On-board diagnostics 670 Symbols and messages 388 Passing assistance 336
On-board Diagnostic socket 36 trajectory lines 383 activating 336
Option/accessory 21 Park Assist System 375 Phone 544

parking call 547
Outside temperature gauge 106
on hills 457 connect 545
Overheating 500 contacts 549
Parking Assist 375
Owner's information 18 delete 547
OWNER'S MANUAL 21 disconnect 546
front, rear and sides 376
environmental labeling 22 phone book 549
limitations 379
in the center display 19, 20 switching phone 546
Symbols and messages 388
text message 548
Parking brake 454
Phone charger 549, 550
activating/deactivating 454, 456
P Low battery charge level 457 Pilot Assist 326
activating 323
Paddle at steering wheel 226 Parking climate 253
auto-brake 341
Paint deactivate 324
color code 808 Parking heater 262 display 331
paint damage and touch-up 807, 808 Passenger compartment filter 235 passing 336
Passenger compartment heater (Parking set time interval 340
Panoramic roof 176, 177
heater) 262 standby mode 332
opening and closing 178
steering wheel buttons 322
pinch protection 166 Passenger compartment interior 622
stored speed 339
sun shade 182 center console 626
switching target vehicles 338
ventilation position 179 electrical outlet 632
Parcel shelf 666 glove compartment 635
WARNING 337
Park Assist Camera 380 sun visor 636
USB 629 pinch protection 166
activating 386 resetting 167
limitations 393 Passenger compartment lighting 161
adjusting 163 Play media 542
location and views 381
sensor field 385 auto switch 162
910
INDEX
Pneumatic suspension folding backrest 210, 213, 224

settings 491
R folding down the armrests 637
Polestar Engineered 488, 491 Radar unit 390 getting in/getting out 223
limitations 393 head restraint 215, 219
Polishing 798
maintenance and cleaning 396 heating 243
Position lights 152 Symbols and messages 399 moving forward/rearward 221
Power 858 type approval 392 open cup holders 637
electric motor 857, 858 Radio 539 ventilation 245
Power folding door mirrors 175 RBDS 540 Rearview/door mirrors
Power meter 105 start 539 adjusting door mirrors 175
Radio favorites 539 dimming 174
Power panoramic roof 177
heating 249
Power save mode 501 Rain sensor 185
interior 173
Power seats 196 Raise the rear end 641
Rearview mirror 173
Power windows 168, 169 Range assistant 487 dimming 174
opening and closing 169 Ready to drive notification 369 Rear window
pinch protection 166 Rear Auto Brake 372 heating 249
Preconditioning 253 activating/deactivating 374 sun shade 171
start/stop 254 Rear camera 380 washers 190
timer 255 wipers 190
Rear Collision Warning 363
Pressure wash 802 limitations 363 Recalls 45
Profile Rear door Recommendations when driving 526
settings 141 sun shade 171 Recommendations when loading 640
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING 501, Rear seat 209 Recovery 525, 526
503, 715 adjusting backrest tilt 222, 225 Refrigerant 686
adjust passenger seat from rear climate system 864, 866
seat 225
climate 240
911
INDEX
Refueling Safety defects, reporting 44 Sensors

filling 494 Safety mode 68 air quality 235
fuel filler door, fuel flap 493 starting/moving 69 Camera unit 393
Regenerative braking 462 climate 231
Sealing compound 610
Radar unit 390
Reporting safety defects 44 Seat, see Seats 194
Service position 815
Resetting door mirrors 175 Seat belt reminder 52
Service program 670
Resetting settings 138 Seat belts 47
Shiftlock 467
Resetting the trip odometer 106 Automatic locking retractor/Emer-
gency locking retractor 72 Side airbag 65, 66
Road Sign Information 317
activate/deactivate warnings 319 buckling/unbuckling 48 Side Impact Protection System 65, 66, 67
display 318 pregnancy 43 SIPS (Side Impact Protection Sys-
limitations 319 seat belt reminder 52 tem) 65, 66, 67
speed camera information 318 seat belt tensioner 50
SiriusXM Satellite radio 540, 541
Speed warning 318 securing child restraint systems 74,
77, 79 Ski hatch 647
Road trip 526
Seat belt tensioner 50 Snow chains 609
Roll-over protection 311
resetting 51 Software updates 673
Roll Stability Control 311
Seats Sound settings 536
Roof load, max. weight 842 front seats 194 Spare tire 605
Route guidance 580 heating 242, 243 handling 606
Run-off Mitigation 360 manual front seat 194
Speed camera information 318
power front seats 196
rear seat 209
store position 198, 199, 200, 201 Speed-controlling functions
S ventilation 244, 245 activating 323
whiplash protection 46 deactivate 324
Safety 42
steering wheel buttons 322
pregnancy 43
Safety belt, see Seat belt 47
912
INDEX
Speed Limiter Steering wheel resistance, speed- parking climate 260

activating 323 dependent 311 transmission 468
deactivate 324 Stone chips and scratches 807, 808 System units
steering wheel buttons 322 changing 138
Storage compartments 622
Speed symbols, tires 590 center console 626 system updates 673
Spin control 311 glove compartment 635
Stability and traction control system 311 sun visor 636
Symbols and messages 313 Stored speed 339 T
Stains 791, 793, 795 Sunroof
Tailgate
Start/Stop function 480 pinch protection 166
closing and locking using button 295
activating/deactivating 481 Sun shade locking/unlocking 272, 287
Start and lock system panoramic roof 177, 182 open/close with foot movement 299
type designations 284 pinch protection 166 unlocking from inside 292
rear door 171
Start battery 503, 703 Technician certification 37
rear window 171
overload 501 Temperature
Sun visor 636
Start engine 443 adjusting 250, 251
mirror lighting 162
Start vehicle 442, 443 perceived 232
Support battery 707
after a collision 69 Temperature monitoring 433
Switching off the vehicle 446
Steel cargo grid 657 Temporary Spare 605
Symbols
Steering power level, see Steering wheel Temporary tire sealing system 610
dynamic 99
resistance 311 terms and conditions, data collection,
indicator symbols 107
Steering wheel 226, 228 warning symbols 107 data registration, user terms 34
heating 245, 246 Time interval to the vehicle ahead 340
Symbols and messages
keypad 226
center display's status bar 135 Tires
paddle 226
electric propulsion 437 age 586
steering wheel adjustment 228
hybrid-related 439 designations 590
Steering wheel keypad 226 direction of rotation 588
913
INDEX
economy and wear 586 Towing eyelet 519 Trunk lid

glossary of terms 589 Tow mode 525 closing and locking using button 297
inflation pressure table 868 emergency opening 292
TPMS - Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
pressure 868 locking/unlocking 273, 288
tem 596
recommended 586 open/close with foot movement 301
removing and installing 601 Traction control 311 unlocking from inside 292
rotation when changing 586 Trailer TSA - Trailer Stability Assist 515
specifications 590, 868 driving with a trailer 513
Tunnel detection 153
speed rating 590 Lamps 516
storage 586 swaying 515 Turn off engine 446
tread wear indicator 589 Trailer Stability Assist 312 Turn signals 156
winter tires 608 trailer 515 Type approval
Tire sealing system 610 Trailer stabilizer 312, 515 antenna 400
Inflating tires 617 HomeLink® 533
Trailer towing
use 612 radar system 392
trailer hitch 510, 511
Tire tread 589
Transmission 463
Tools 603 automatic 464, 468
Top tether anchors (child restraint sys- Transmission fluid
U
tems) 80 grade 863 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 592
Total airing function 267 Tread depth 589 Unlocking
Towbar 510, 511 winter tires 608 settings 272
removable, attaching, installing, Tread wear indicator 589 with key blade 282
mounting 510, 511
Trip computer 105 Usage modes 449
removable, removing, detach-
ing 510, 511 Trip odometer 105 USB
retractable 508 ports (USB-C) 629
Trunk
technical specifications 631
Towing 517, 518 electrical outlet 632, 634
Lighting 163 User profile 139
Towing capacity and towball load 852
handling 140
914
INDEX
Wheels
V W cleaning 806
Vehicle care 797, 799 Warning lights removing and installing 601
leather upholstery 795 Adaptive Cruise Control 337 Snow chains 609
Microtechupholstery 795 Pilot Assist 337 Wheels and tires
Vehicle Event Data 32 stability and traction control system 311 Load index and speed symbol 590
Vehicle recovery 525, 526 Warning sound Whiplash protection 46
parking brake 457
Vehicle status Whiplash Protection System 46
inflation pressure 599 warning symbols 107
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 46
Vehicle upholstery 791, 793, 795 Warning symbols
Wi-Fi network 557
safety 42
Vehicle weight 842 Window
Warranties 670
Ventilation 236, 239 sun shade 171
Seats 244, 245 Washer
Windows and glass 166
headlights 188
Voice control Windshield
rear window 190
Google Assistant 147 glass damage 686
washer fluid, filling 816
use 148
Windshield 188 Windshield washing 188
VOL mark 586
Washer fluid 182, 816 Windshield wipers 183
Volume 536 rain sensor 185
Washer nozzles, heated 182
Volvo Assistance 562 Winter driving 527
Waxing 798
Volvo Cars app 566 Snow chains 609
Weights
Volvo ID 24 winter tires 608
Curb weight 842
create and register 25 Wiper blade 182
Welcome Light 161
replacing 810, 813
Wheel bolts 605 service position 815
Wiper blade and washing fluid 182
Wiper blades, heated 182
915
INDEX
WPC 549, 550
916
WARNING
California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
senger vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands fre-
quently when servicing your vehicle. For
more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle.
TP xxxxx (English - USA & Canada), AT 2222, MY23, Copyright © 2000-2022 Volvo Car Corporation

Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

XX

Owner's information Printed information Related information

CAUTION NOTE The Owner's Manual is also available on

Illustrations, images and video clips

Contacting Volvo volvocars.com/ca Volvo ID

Creating a Volvo ID Related information Problems logging in with Volvo ID

2 Certain markets only.

tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are Electrified vehicles

NOTE WARNING WARNING

Accessory installation information. Volvo assumes no responsi- Connecting equipment to the

NOTE This device complies with Industry Canada Technician certification

3 Vehicle Identification Number

Change of market when importing NOTE Driver distraction

4 Applicable only to markets that have access to Volvo Assistance. }}

|| WARNING Getting started with Google Related information

Safety The warning symbol in the instrument panel Related information

|| Occupant safety reminders Related information Reporting safety defects

WARNING • Power* front seats (p. 196) Seat belts

Seat belt maintenance

|| WARNING Buckling and unbuckling seat belts Buckling seat belts

1 On five- and seven-seat vehicles.

Press the button on the seat belt holder

The lap section of the seat belt should be positioned

1 On five- and seven-seat vehicles.

Door and seat belt reminders As soon as the graphic is NOTE

If the vehicle is moving at a speed Airbags WARNING

• Near-side airbags (p. 65) Driver/passenger side front

NOTE The front airbag system

|| WARNING deploy in certain non-frontal collisions NOTE

Front airbag deployment

|| WARNING WARNING Occupant Classification System

• The occupant's back must be as • There should be no loose articles, such

Related information The front passenger-side airbag is either ena-

|| or center console, by pushing their feet

NOTE WARNING Passeng- OWS indi- Passenger's

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)

WARNING WARNING Near-side airbags

|| WARNING Far-side airbags WARNING

The inflatable curtains are installed along both

|| WARNING Safety mode WARNING

|| WARNING Child safety ejected from the vehicle during a sudden

Child seats should always be registered with

|| Volvo has some very specific Child restraints

Fasten the seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

|| NOTE WARNING • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 83)

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the

When installing infant seats in the rear seat, Volvo

Check that the infant seat is properly secured. Related information

Convertible seats WARNING

Ensure that the convertible seat is securely in place.

Positioning the seat belt.

Child restraint anchorages

Six-seat models: Top tether anchor and symbol on

Five-seat and seven-seat models: Top tether anchors

Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's

Location of the child seat attachment points in the

|| To access the anchors NOTE WARNING

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/

Unlocking/opening/closing the tailgate Left-side steering wheel keypad

Unlocking/opening/closing the trunk lid Hood open

Unlocking/opening/closing the tailgate

Unlocking/opening/closing the tailgate Hood open